DocuCentre-V C2265

DocuCentre-V C2263
Administrator Guide
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Internet Explorer are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, Reader, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc.
PCL, HP-GL, and HP-GL/2 are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.
ThinPrint is a registered trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries.
Unicode is a registered trademark of Unicode, Inc.
Mopria is a trademark of the Mopria Alliance.
Google Cloud Print and Gmail are registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
For information on license, refer to About License in the User Guide.

In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol .

Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures.

As the copying machine contains a feature designed to prevent forging of certain documents, there may
be rare instances where copies or scanned images do not achieve the desired results.

The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk. Fuji
Xerox is not responsible for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss.

Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or
computer hacking.

Important
1. This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be
copied or modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.
2. Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
3. We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages.
4. Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual.
Unauthorized operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting
from unauthorized operation of the equipment.

An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.

Xerox, Xerox and Design, as well as Fuji Xerox and Design are registered trademarks or trademarks of Xerox
Corporation in Japan and/or other countries.
PDF Bridge, ContentsBridge, ApeosWare, DocuShare, SmartWelcomEyes, and DocuWorks are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
CentreWare is a registered trademark or trademark of Xerox Corporation in Japan and/or other countries.
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1 Before Using the Machine ................................................................ 15
Preface.............................................................................................................................................. 16
Types of Manuals.......................................................................................................................... 17
Using This Guide ........................................................................................................................... 18
Organization of This Guide.......................................................................................................................................... 18
Conventions ....................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Interface Cables............................................................................................................................ 21
Using the USB Interface ............................................................................................................................................... 21
Using the Ethernet Interface ...................................................................................................................................... 21
Power Saver Mode........................................................................................................................ 23
Changing the Interval for Entering Power Saver Mode ................................................................................... 23
Warmer Mode ................................................................................................................................ 26
Setting the Warmer Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 26
Customizing the Control Panel ................................................................................................ 29
Changing the Screen Default...................................................................................................................................... 29
Setting the Screen After Auto Clear......................................................................................................................... 31
Customizing the Button Layout................................................................................................................................. 33
Assigning Services to the Custom Buttons ............................................................................................................ 39
Adjusting Screen Brightness........................................................................................................................................ 41
Touch Screen .................................................................................................................................. 42
Important Security Instructions ............................................................................................. 44
Entering Text.................................................................................................................................. 45

2 Paper and Other Media...................................................................... 47

Paper Types .................................................................................................................................... 48
Loadable Quantity and Weight for Supported Paper....................................................................................... 48
Supported Paper Type ................................................................................................................................................... 49
Loading Paper ................................................................................................................................ 66
Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4..................................................................................................................................... 67
Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass) ............................................................................................................................. 68
Changing the Paper Size ............................................................................................................ 70
Changing the Paper Size for Trays 1 to 4 .............................................................................................................. 70
Changing the Paper Settings.................................................................................................... 72

3 Maintenance.......................................................................................... 77
Replacing Consumables.............................................................................................................. 78
Replacing Toner Cartridge ........................................................................................................................................... 80
Replacing Waste Toner Container (R5) .................................................................................................................. 82
Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4 ....................................................................................................... 87
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-A1)........................................................................................................ 88

3
 Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-B1).........................................................................................................90
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1) .........................................................92
Emptying Punch Waste Container (for Finisher-B1) ..........................................................................................93
Replacing Stamp...............................................................................................................................................................94
Cleaning the Machine ..................................................................................................................96
Cleaning the Exterior.......................................................................................................................................................96
Cleaning the Interior (LED Printheads) ...................................................................................................................97
Cleaning the Touch Screen...........................................................................................................................................99
Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass ........................................................................................99
Cleaning the White Chute and Constant Velocity Transport Glass..........................................................100
Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers ................................................................................................................101
Executing Calibration................................................................................................................ 103
Printing a Report/List ................................................................................................................ 107
Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID..................................... 108
Setting Restore Tool .................................................................................................................. 109

4 Machine Status...................................................................................111
Overview of Machine Status................................................................................................... 112
Machine Information................................................................................................................ 113
General Information ....................................................................................................................................................113
Paper Tray Status ..........................................................................................................................................................114
Print Reports ....................................................................................................................................................................115
Automatically Printed Reports/Lists.......................................................................................................................125
Overwrite Hard Disk......................................................................................................................................................127
Print Mode........................................................................................................................................................................127
Fax Receiving Mode .....................................................................................................................................................130
Faults .............................................................................................................................................. 132
Supplies .......................................................................................................................................... 133
Billing Information .................................................................................................................... 134
Billing Information........................................................................................................................................................134
User Account Billing Information ...........................................................................................................................135

5 Tools .......................................................................................................137
System Settings Procedure ..................................................................................................... 138
Step1 Entering System Administration Mode ...................................................................................................138
Step2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode.............................................................138
Step3 Selecting [Tools]................................................................................................................................................139
Step4 Selecting a Setting Item on the [Tools] Screen ...................................................................................139
Step5 Setting a Feature..............................................................................................................................................142
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode .....................................................................................................142
Tools Menu List ........................................................................................................................... 143
System Settings..............................................................................................................................................................143
Setup...................................................................................................................................................................................145
Accounting .......................................................................................................................................................................145
Authentication/Security Settings............................................................................................................................145
Common Service Settings........................................................................................................ 146

4
 Table of Contents

Machine Clock/Timers..................................................................................................................................................146
Power Saver Settings....................................................................................................................................................149
Audio Tones .....................................................................................................................................................................150
Screen/Button Settings................................................................................................................................................152
Paper Tray Settings.......................................................................................................................................................157
Image Quality Adjustment........................................................................................................................................162
Reports ...............................................................................................................................................................................164
Maintenance....................................................................................................................................................................166
Watermark........................................................................................................................................................................170
Force Annotation ...........................................................................................................................................................172
Print Universal Unique ID...........................................................................................................................................174
Notify Job Completion by E-mail ............................................................................................................................174
Plug-in Settings...............................................................................................................................................................175
Other Settings .................................................................................................................................................................175
Copy Service Settings................................................................................................................182
Copy Tab - Features Allocation................................................................................................................................182
Preset Buttons .................................................................................................................................................................183
Copy Defaults..................................................................................................................................................................183
Copy Control ....................................................................................................................................................................189
Original Size Defaults...................................................................................................................................................192
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ...............................................................................................................................................192
Custom Colors .................................................................................................................................................................193
Annotations - Create Comments.............................................................................................................................193
Connectivity & Network Setup...............................................................................................194
Port Settings.....................................................................................................................................................................194
Protocol Settings ............................................................................................................................................................200
Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name..................................................................................................................205
Proxy Server Settings....................................................................................................................................................206
EP Proxy Server Setup ..................................................................................................................................................207
SIP Settings ......................................................................................................................................................................209
T.38 Settings....................................................................................................................................................................212
Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings ......................................................................................................................212
Remote Authentication/Directory Service...........................................................................................................214
Security Settings ............................................................................................................................................................220
Other Settings .................................................................................................................................................................226
Print Service Settings ................................................................................................................227
Allocate Memory............................................................................................................................................................227
Delete Form......................................................................................................................................................................229
Register Google Cloud Print.......................................................................................................................................229
Other Settings .................................................................................................................................................................229
Scan Service Settings ................................................................................................................235
Screen Defaults...............................................................................................................................................................235
Scan Defaults ..................................................................................................................................................................236
Scan to PC Defaults ......................................................................................................................................................239
Original Size Defaults...................................................................................................................................................240
Output Size Defaults ....................................................................................................................................................240
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ...............................................................................................................................................241
Other Settings .................................................................................................................................................................241
Fax Service Settings...................................................................................................................245

5
 Screen Defaults ..............................................................................................................................................................245
Fax Defaults.....................................................................................................................................................................246
Fax Control.......................................................................................................................................................................248
Fax Received Options...................................................................................................................................................255
Reduce/Enlarge Presets...............................................................................................................................................257
Original Size Defaults...................................................................................................................................................257
Local Terminal Information ......................................................................................................................................258
Internet Fax Control.....................................................................................................................................................259
E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings................................................................................... 262
E-mail Control .................................................................................................................................................................262
Address Book Settings .............................................................................................................. 266
Folder Service Settings ............................................................................................................. 267
Job Flow Service Settings ........................................................................................................ 269
Media Print Service Settings .................................................................................................. 270
Stored File Settings.................................................................................................................... 271
Web Browser Setup.................................................................................................................... 274
Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 276
Create Folder...................................................................................................................................................................276
Stored Programming....................................................................................................................................................279
Create Job Flow Sheet .................................................................................................................................................279
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword ..............................................................................................................................288
Add Address Book Entry..............................................................................................................................................289
Create Fax Group Recipients ....................................................................................................................................299
Add Fax Comment ........................................................................................................................................................300
Paper Tray Attributes...................................................................................................................................................300
Accounting .................................................................................................................................... 301
Create/View User Accounts .......................................................................................................................................301
View Accounts.................................................................................................................................................................305
Reset User Accounts.....................................................................................................................................................305
System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs) ........................................................................................................307
Accounting Type ............................................................................................................................................................307
Accounting Login Screen Settings ..........................................................................................................................308
Fax Billing Data ..............................................................................................................................................................310
Accounting/Billing Device Settings ........................................................................................................................310
Authentication/Security Settings ......................................................................................... 313
System Administrator Settings ................................................................................................................................313
Authentication................................................................................................................................................................315
Allow User to Disable Active Settings....................................................................................................................324
Job Status Default.........................................................................................................................................................324
Overwrite Hard Disk......................................................................................................................................................325

6 CentreWare Internet Services Settings......................................327

Installation of CentreWare Internet Services.................................................................. 328
Preparations ....................................................................................................................................................................328
Configuration on the Machine.................................................................................................................................328
Starting CentreWare Internet Services .............................................................................. 330

6
 Table of Contents

Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services.......................331

7 Printer Environment Settings ........................................................335

Print Overview..............................................................................................................................336
Installation When Using USB Port.......................................................................................338
Step 1 Preparations ......................................................................................................................................................338
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine...................................................................................................................338
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................................................339
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items......................................................................................................339
Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)..........................................................341
Step 1 Preparations ......................................................................................................................................................341
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine...................................................................................................................341
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................................................342
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items......................................................................................................343
Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)...........................................345
Step 1 Preparations ......................................................................................................................................................345
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine...................................................................................................................345
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................................................346
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items......................................................................................................347

8 E-mail Environment Settings .........................................................349

E-mail Overview...........................................................................................................................350
Preparations .................................................................................................................................352
Installation Procedures ............................................................................................................355
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ......................................................................................................355
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment ...............................................................................................................356
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items......................................................................................................358

9 Scanner Environment Settings......................................................359

Scan Service Overview...............................................................................................................360
Configuration of Store to Folder...........................................................................................362
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ......................................................................................................362
Step 2 Registering a Folder........................................................................................................................................363
Step 3 Configuring a Computer...............................................................................................................................363
Configuration of Scan to PC ...................................................................................................364
Step 1 Preparations ......................................................................................................................................................364
Step 2 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ......................................................................................................365
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................................................366
Configuration of Scan to My Folder.....................................................................................367
Step1 Preparations........................................................................................................................................................367
Step 2 Enabling SMB Port and Setting up TCP/IP............................................................................................367
Step 3 Configuring Remote Authentication .......................................................................................................368
Step 4 Configuring Scan to My Folder ..................................................................................................................369
Step5 Configuration on the Computer .................................................................................................................371
Configuration of Store to USB ...............................................................................................372

7
 Available USB Memory Devices...............................................................................................................................372
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items .....................................................................................................372
Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning) ................................. 373
Step 1 Preparations ......................................................................................................................................................373
Step 2 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP ....................................................................................................373
Step 3 Configuring the SNMP Port.........................................................................................................................374
Step 4 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................................................375
Configuration of Job Flow Sheets......................................................................................... 376
Step 1 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP ....................................................................................................376
Step 2 Configuring the SNMP Port.........................................................................................................................376
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................................................376
Configuration of Store & Send Link ..................................................................................... 377
Step 1 Configuring E-mail ..........................................................................................................................................377
Step 2 Enabling Authentication ..............................................................................................................................377
Step 3 Other Settings...................................................................................................................................................377
Step 4 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items .......................................................................................377
Configuration of Store to WSD ............................................................................................. 379
Step 1 Preparations ......................................................................................................................................................379
Step 2 Enabling Port.....................................................................................................................................................379
Step 3 Confirmation on the Computer.................................................................................................................380

10 Using IP Fax (SIP)..............................................................................381

IP Fax (SIP) Overview................................................................................................................ 382
Preparations ................................................................................................................................. 383
System Requirements for the Machine ................................................................................................................383
Settings by System Configuration..........................................................................................................................383
Installation Procedures ............................................................................................................ 384
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ......................................................................................................384
Step 2 Configuring the SIP User Name................................................................................................................385
Step 3 Configuring Fax Environment ....................................................................................................................386
Step 4 Configuring the SIP Server ..........................................................................................................................387
Step 5 Registering the VoIP Gateway...................................................................................................................388

11 Using the Internet Fax Service .....................................................391

Internet Fax Overview .............................................................................................................. 392
Preparations ................................................................................................................................. 393
System Requirements for the Machine ................................................................................................................393
E-Mail Environment ......................................................................................................................................................393
Installation Procedures ............................................................................................................ 394
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ......................................................................................................394
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment...............................................................................................................395
Step 3 Testing the Internet Fax ..............................................................................................................................397

12 Using the Server Fax Service..........................................................399

Server Fax Overview .................................................................................................................. 400

8
 Table of Contents

Preparations .................................................................................................................................401
System Requirements for the Machine ................................................................................................................401
Installation Procedure ..............................................................................................................402
Installation Overview ...................................................................................................................................................402
Step 1 Fax Settings .......................................................................................................................................................402
Step 2 Setting the Server Fax Feature ..................................................................................................................403

13 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings ...............................405

Encryption and Digital Signature Overview......................................................................406
Types of Certificate.......................................................................................................................................................406
Certificate Conditions ..................................................................................................................................................407
Encryption Features for Communication.............................................................................................................408
Encryption and Digital-Signature Features for Scan Files.............................................................................409
Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption ....................................................410
Installation Overview ...................................................................................................................................................410
Step1 Configuration on the Machine....................................................................................................................410
Step2 Configuration on the Computer .................................................................................................................412
Configuration of Encryption using IPsec............................................................................413
Installation Overview ...................................................................................................................................................413
Step1 Import and Configuration of a Certificate.............................................................................................413
Step2 Configuration on the Machine (Configuration of IPsec)..................................................................414
Step3 Configuration on the Computer .................................................................................................................415
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature..................................................416
Installation Overview ...................................................................................................................................................416
Step1 Configuration on the Machine....................................................................................................................417
Step2 Configuration on Sender and Recipient ..................................................................................................417
Configuration of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature ..........................................................420
Installation Overview ...................................................................................................................................................420
Step1 Configuration on the Machine....................................................................................................................420
Step2 Configuration on the Computer .................................................................................................................422

14 Authentication and Accounting Features .................................423

Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature...................................................424
Types of User...................................................................................................................................................................424
User Roles and Authorization Groups....................................................................................................................424
Access Control .................................................................................................................................................................426
Types of Authentication .............................................................................................................................................426
Account Administration ..............................................................................................................................................428
Services Controlled by Authentication................................................................................432
Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................432
Combination of Authentication and Account Administration types........................................................432
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders ............................................................435
Creating / Using Job Flow Sheet..............................................................................................................................435
Creating / Using Folder................................................................................................................................................437
Configuration for Authentication.........................................................................................439

9
 Installation Overview ...................................................................................................................................................439
Enabling Authentication.............................................................................................................................................439
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings .....................................................................................442
Creating an Authorization Group............................................................................................................................443
Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional) ................................................................... 444
Step 1 Preparations ......................................................................................................................................................444
Step 2 Logout Method Using the Smart Card ...................................................................................................445
Step 3 Registering Smart Card Information ......................................................................................................445
Configuration for Account Administration ....................................................................... 446
Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type ...................................................................................................................446
Step 2 Registering User Information ....................................................................................................................446
User Authentication Operations ........................................................................................... 448
Authenticating Login Users.......................................................................................................................................448
Changing Passcode.......................................................................................................................................................449

15 Problem Solving..................................................................................451
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................................... 452
Machine Trouble ......................................................................................................................... 453
Image Quality Trouble ............................................................................................................. 458
Trouble during Copying............................................................................................................ 464
Unable to Copy...............................................................................................................................................................464
The Copy Result is Not What was Expected.......................................................................................................465
Trouble during Printing ............................................................................................................ 468
Unable to Print ...............................................................................................................................................................468
The Print Result is Not What was Expected........................................................................................................469
Trouble during Faxing............................................................................................................... 471
Sending Problems..........................................................................................................................................................471
Receiving Problems .......................................................................................................................................................475
Trouble during Scanning.......................................................................................................... 481
Unable to Scan with the Machine ..........................................................................................................................481
Unable to Import Scanned Documents to the Computer ............................................................................482
Unable to Send a Scanned Document over the Network (FTP/SMB) ......................................................482
Unable to Send E-mail.................................................................................................................................................484
The Image is not What was Expected ..................................................................................................................484
Network-related Problems....................................................................................................... 486
When using SMB............................................................................................................................................................486
When using TCP/IP .......................................................................................................................................................486
CentreWare Internet Services Problems ..............................................................................................................488
E-mail Features Problems...........................................................................................................................................489
Internet/Intranet Connection Problems ..............................................................................................................489
IPv4 and IPv6 Connection Problems .....................................................................................................................491
Media Print - Text Trouble ...................................................................................................... 494
Media Print - Photos Trouble.................................................................................................. 495
Error Code...................................................................................................................................... 496
Other Errors ......................................................................................................................................................................611

10
 Table of Contents

Paper Jams ....................................................................................................................................612

Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4.........................................................................................................................................613
Paper Jams in Tray 5 ....................................................................................................................................................613
Paper Jams in Top Left Cover A ...............................................................................................................................615
Paper Jams in Bottom Left Cover B (for 2-tray configuration) ...................................................................617
Paper Jams in Bottom Left Cover B (for 4-tray configuration) ...................................................................617
Paper Jams in Top Left Cover C ...............................................................................................................................618
Paper Jams in Duplex Module ..................................................................................................................................619
Paper Jams in Finisher-A1 ..........................................................................................................................................620
Paper Jams in Finisher-B1 ..........................................................................................................................................621
Document Jams...........................................................................................................................623
Document Jams..............................................................................................................................................................623
Stapler Faults ...............................................................................................................................626
Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (For Finisher-A1)............................................................................................627
Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (For Finisher-B1)............................................................................................628

16 Appendix ...............................................................................................631
Specifications...............................................................................................................................632
Copy Function .................................................................................................................................................................632
Print Function .................................................................................................................................................................635
Scan Function (Optional)............................................................................................................................................637
Fax Function (optional)...............................................................................................................................................639
Direct Fax Function (optional)..................................................................................................................................640
Internet Fax Function (optional).............................................................................................................................641
IP Fax (SIP) Function (optional) ..............................................................................................................................641
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder....................................................................................................................642
Duplex Function .............................................................................................................................................................642
Finisher-A1 (Optional)..................................................................................................................................................643
Finisher-B1 (Optional)..................................................................................................................................................643
Side Tray (optional) ......................................................................................................................................................645
Printable Area ..............................................................................................................................646
Standard Printable Area..............................................................................................................................................646
Extended Printable Area .............................................................................................................................................646
Internal Fonts ..............................................................................................................................648
Optional Components ...............................................................................................................651
Adjust Image Transfer..............................................................................................................654
Adjusting the Transfer Output Value ....................................................................................................................654
ESC/P-K Emulation......................................................................................................................659
Emulation..........................................................................................................................................................................659
Output Feature ...............................................................................................................................................................660
ESC/P-K Emulation Print Features...........................................................................................................................660
ESC/P-K Emulation Settings.......................................................................................................................................660
Magnification Table .....................................................................................................................................................667
Paper Size and Number of Printable Characters...............................................................................................674
PDF Direct Print...........................................................................................................................677
PDF Direct Print Settings.............................................................................................................................................677

11
 DocuWorks Direct Print ............................................................................................................ 679
DocuWorks Direct Print Settings .............................................................................................................................679
PCL Emulation ............................................................................................................................. 681
Emulation .........................................................................................................................................................................681
Fonts ...................................................................................................................................................................................681
Output Feature...............................................................................................................................................................682
PCL Emulation Settings...............................................................................................................................................683
HP-GL/2 Emulation..................................................................................................................... 688
Emulation .........................................................................................................................................................................688
Fonts ...................................................................................................................................................................................688
Output Feature...............................................................................................................................................................689
Factory Default Settings.............................................................................................................................................689
HP-GL/2 Emulation Settings......................................................................................................................................690
Hard Clip Area.................................................................................................................................................................695
Printable Area .................................................................................................................................................................696
Auto Layout .....................................................................................................................................................................698
Notes and Restrictions.............................................................................................................. 707
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine .........................................................................................707
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature ...............................................................................711
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Print Feature ................................................................................711
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Scan Features ..............................................................................714
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Fax Feature ..................................................................................720
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the E-mail/Internet Fax Feature..................................................722
Notes and Restrictions for IP Fax (SIP) ................................................................................................................727
Notes and Restrictions when Connecting with Internet Service Provider ..............................................728
Notes and Restrictions on the Interrupt Mode .................................................................................................731
Notes and Restrictions on Folders ..........................................................................................................................732
Notes and Restrictions when Connecting to Internet or Intranet ............................................................733
Notes and Restrictions when Operating from Computers............................................................................733
Notes and Restrictions on Job Flows .....................................................................................................................734
Notes and Restrictions on the Security Features..............................................................................................735
Notes and Restrictions on the Authentication and Accounting Features..............................................735
Notes and Restrictions for Using SMB ..................................................................................................................735
Notes and Restrictions for Using TCP/IP .............................................................................................................736
Notes and Restriction for Using Secondary Ethernet (Optional)...............................................................737
Notes and Restrictions for Using Bonjour ...........................................................................................................737
Notes and Restrictions for IPv6 Connection ......................................................................................................738
Notes and Restrictions for Print E-mail.................................................................................................................739
Passcode Setting for Extended Functions ......................................................................... 740
Available Extended Function and Passcode .......................................................................................................740
Using the Telephone ................................................................................................................. 743
Placing a Call ...................................................................................................................................................................743
Activity Report............................................................................................................................. 746
EP System...................................................................................................................................... 749
Automated Meter Reading........................................................................................................................................749
Check or Maintenance Request of the Machine...............................................................................................749
Automated Alert Notification ..................................................................................................................................749
Timely Delivery of Consumables .............................................................................................................................749

12
 Table of Contents

Remote Modification of the Settings ....................................................................................................................750

Software Upgrade .........................................................................................................................................................750

Index...............................................................................................................751

13
14
1
Before Using the Machine
1
 Before Using the Machine

Preface
Before Using the Machine

Thank you for selecting DocuCentre-V C2265/C2263 (hereafter referred to as “the

machine”).
This guide is intended for system administrators, and provides maintenance information
such as how to replace consumables, how to configure network, andtroubleshooting
procedures.
The guide assumes that you are familiar with a personal computer and knowledgeable of
computer networks. When you need additional information, refer to the manuals provided
with the personal computer, operating system, and network products.
1 After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in case
you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.
For more information on how to copy, print, scan, and fax, refer to the User Guide. For
information about optional components for the Print feature, refer to the guide provided
with each optional component.

Warning:This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.

When you use this machine, we recommend that you change the system administrator's user ID
and passcode immediately after installing the machine.For more information on changing the
user ID and passcode, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.313).

16
 Types of Manuals

Types of Manuals
The following guides are provided with the machine.

Before Using the Machine

Accompanying Manuals

„ User Guide
The guide describes all the necessary steps for copy, print, scan, and fax.
This manual is included in the Media (Software/Product Manual).

„ Administrator Guide
The guide is intended for system administrators, and describes how to configure network
and how to solve problems that may occur with the machine. This guide alsodescribes daily
maintenance and the system settings procedures. This manual is included in the Media
1
(Software/Product Manual).

„ Quick Reference Guide

The guide describes the basic operations of the machine, as well as daily management and
maintenance.

„ Security Function Supplementary Guide

The guide is intended for the manager and system administrator of the organization where
the machine is installed, and describes the setup procedures related to security.
This manual is included in the Media (Software/Product Manual).

„ Manual (HTML)
The manual describes installation and configuration procedures for print drivers and the
printer environment. This manual is included in the Media (Software/Product Manual).

„ Print Driver Help

The help describes the Print features and operations.

„ CentreWare Internet Services Help

The help describes how to change various settings of the machine using a web browser, and
how to import scanned data to a computer from the machine.
Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the Internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

Guides for Optional Components

Optional components are available for the machine. Some of them come with user guides.
The guides for optional components describe all the necessary steps for using the optional
components and for installing the software.

17
 Before Using the Machine

Using This Guide

Organization of This Guide
Before Using the Machine

This guide consists of the following chapters.

„ Before Using the Machine(P.15)

Describes the organization of this guide and conventions.

„ Paper and Other Media(P.47)

Describes the types of paper and other media that you can use on the machine and how to
load media in a tray.

„ Maintenance(P.77)
1 Describes how to replace consumables and to clean the machine.

„ Machine Status(P.111)
Describes how to check the faults that occurred on the machine and to print various
reports/lists.

„ Tools(P.137)
Describes the procedures to set up the system.

„ CentreWare Internet Services Settings(P.327)

Describes how to use CentreWare Internet Services.

„ Printer Environment Settings(P.335)

Describes the settings to use the Print feature on the machine.

„ E-mail Environment Settings(P.349)

Describes the settings to use various services via e-mail on the machine.

„ Scanner Environment Settings(P.359)

Describes the settings to use the Scan services on the machine.

„ Using IP Fax (SIP)(P.381)

Describes the settings to use the IP Fax (SIP) feature on the machine.

„ Using the Internet Fax Service(P.391)

Describes the settings to use the services via the Internet Fax service on the machine.

„ Using the Server Fax Service(P.399)

Describes how to use the Server Fax service on the machine.

„ Encryption and Digital Signature Settings(P.405)

Describes how to configure the machine to use the Encryption and the Digital Signature
features with your communications and documents.

18
 Using This Guide

„ Authentication and Accounting Features(P.423)

The machine has the Authentication feature to restrict the availability of services for each
feature and the Accounting feature to manage the use of each feature based on the Login
Type selected.

Before Using the Machine

„ Problem Solving(P.451)
Describes troubleshooting procedures to solve the problems with the machine.

„ Appendix(P.631)
Describes the specifications of the machine, optional accessories, and cautions/restrictions.

Conventions
z
The screen shots and illustrations used in this guide vary depending on the machine
configuration and optional components installed. Some of the items in the screen shots 1
may not be displayed or available depending on your machine configuration.
z
The procedures in this guide may vary depending on the driver and utility software being
used due to the upgrades.
z In this document, "Computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.
z
The following terms are used in this guide:
Important
z
Important information that you should read.

Note
z Additional information on operations or features.
z
The following symbols are used in this guide:

" " z
A cross-reference included in this guide.
z
Names of media,features, touch screen messages and input text.
[ ] z
Folders, files, applications, button or menu names displayed on the
touch screen.
z
Names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on
the computer screen and their buttons and menu names.
< > button z
Hardware buttons on the control panel.
< > key z
Keys on the keyboard of the computer.
> z
Path to a certain item within a procedure on the control panel.
For example: When you see the procedure "select [Tools] >[Setup] >
[Create Folder]", this means that you need to select [Tools], select
[Setup], and then select [Create Folder].
z
Path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.
For example: When you see the procedure "to search for files and
folders, click [Start] > [Search] > [For Files or Folders]", this means
that you need to click [Start], click [Search], and then click [For Files
or Folders] to search for files and folders.
z
Cross-reference
For example: "Refer to "Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio
Tones" in the Administrator Guide." The sentence above means that
it is recommended to refer to the section "Audio Tones", in
"Common Service Settings" in chapter "Tools" of the Administrator
Guide.
z Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:
, , Long Edge Feed (LEF): Loading the document or paper in portrait orientation when
viewed from the front of the machine.

19
 Before Using the Machine

, , Short Edge Feed (SEF): Loading the document or paper in landscape orientation
when viewed from the front of the machine.

LEF Orientation SEF Orientation

Before Using the Machine

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

20
 Interface Cables

Interface Cables
When you connect the machine directly to your computer, use the USB interface.

Before Using the Machine

When you connect the machine to a network, use the Ethernet interface.

Using the USB Interface

The USB interface of the machine supports USB 2.0.
This section describes the installation procedures for the USB interface.

1 Press the power switch to switch off the power.

2 Make sure that the touch screen is blank and the <Power Saver> button is not lit.
1
3 Open the front cover.

4 Press the main power switch to the [ ] position to switch off the main power.

5 Remove the rear right cover.

6 Connect a USB cable to the USB 2.0 interface connector.

7 Return the rear right cover to its original position.

8 Connect the other end of the USB cable to the computer.

9 Press the main power switch to the [ ｜ ] position to switch on the main power.

10 Close the front cover.

11 Press the power switch to switch on the power.

12 Restart the computer.

Reference
z For more information on setting items, refer to "Printer Environment Settings" (P.335).

Using the Ethernet Interface

The Ethernet interface of the machine supports the following three types.
z 1000BASE-T

21
 Before Using the Machine

z 100BASE-TX
z 10BASE-T
Note
z
The machine supports IEEE802.3az (a compliance standard of wired LAN) which reduces the power
Before Using the Machine

consumption of the Ethernet equipments while suspending data transmission. To use this feature, both of
the equipments need to support IEEE802.3az.
This section describes the installation procedures for the Ethernet interface.

1 Press the power switch to switch off the power.

2 Make sure that the touch screen is blank and the <Power Saver>button does not light up.

3 Open the front cover.

1 4 Press the main power switch to the [ ] position to switch off the main power.

5 Connect a network cable to the Ethernet interface connector.

z When the Secondary Ethernet Kit (optional) is not installed

z
When the Secondary Ethernet Kit (optional) is installed.

Note
z Prepare a network cable suitable for your network connection. When you replace the network cable, contact
our Customer Support Center.

6 Press the main power switch to the [ ｜ ] position to switch on the main power.

7 Close the front cover.

8 Press the power switch to switch on the power.

Reference
z For more information on setting items, refer to "Printer Environment Settings" (P.335).

22
 Power Saver Mode

Power Saver Mode

The machine is equipped with the Power Saver mode that reduces the power consumption
by saving the electricity to the machine when no copy or print data is received for a

Before Using the Machine

specified time.
The Power Saver has two modes: the Low Power mode and the Sleep mode.
When you do not use the machine for a specified period of time, the machine enters the
Low Power mode. When it reaches the specified time in the Low Power mode, the machine
then enters the Sleep mode.

Changing the Interval for Entering Power Saver Mode

You can set the time to elapse until the machine enters the Low Power mode and the Sleep
mode from 1 to 240 minutes in 1 minute increments. 1
Note
z If the preset time period is the same for the Low Power mode and the Sleep mode, the machine directly
enters the Sleep mode without entering the Low Power mode first.

Note
z
When the machine operates normal printing, Sample Set print, or printing received fax documents while the
control panel remains lit off and the machine is in the Power Saver mode, only the output device exits the
Power Server mode. In this case, the machine enters the Sleep mode 15 seconds later without following this
setting by factory default.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 ＃

2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter]. When a passcode is required, select [Next] and
enter the system administrator’s passcode, and select [Enter].

Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

23
 Before Using the Machine

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Before Using the Machine

Note
z When the Services Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen, press the <Services Home> button.

4 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Power Saver Settings].

5 Select [Power Saver Timers], and then select [Change Settings].

6 Using[ ]and[ ], set the time to elapse until entering the Power Saver mode, in 1 minute
increments.

„From Last Operation to Low Power Mode

Set the time to elapse from the last operation until the machine enters the Low Power
mode.
Note
z The default value for [From Last Operation to Low Power Mode] is [1] minutes.You cannot disable the Low
Power mode.

24
 Power Saver Mode

„From Last Operation to Sleep Mode

Set the time to elapse from the last operation until the machine enters the Sleep mode.
Note
z The default value for [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] is [1] minutes. To make the machine enter the Low

Before Using the Machine

Power mode set a longer period of time for [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] than for [From Last
Operation to Low Power Mode].

7 Select [Save].

8 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

9 Select [Close].

25
 Before Using the Machine

Warmer Mode
Depending on the operating environment, temperature rise in the machine may cause
condensation when the machine exits the Sleep mode. You can use the Warmer mode to
Before Using the Machine

prevent or reduce condensation.

We recommend that you enable this mode when the season changes.
Note
z For some models, [Warmer Mode] may not be displayed depending on the setting by our service
representative. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z During operation of the Warmer mode, the machine does not enter the Sleep mode.

Setting the Warmer Mode

1
1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 ＃

2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter]. When a passcode is required, select [Next] and
enter the system administrator’s passcode, and select [Enter].
Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Note
z When the Services Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen, press the <Services Home> button.

26
 Warmer Mode

4 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Machine Clock/Timers].

Before Using the Machine

5 Select [Warmer Mode], and then select [Change Settings].

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

6 Select [On].

Note
z
If you select [Off], the machine will not enter the Warmer mode. To display a message when condensation
may have occurred, select [Condensation Alert].

7 Using[ ]and[ ], set the start time and duration of the Warmer mode.

„Start Time
Set the start time of the Warmer mode.

„Duration
Set the duration of the Warmer mode between 1 to 1440 minutes in 1 minute increments.

27
 Before Using the Machine

„Auto Start
Select the check box to automatically switch the Warmer mode to [On] when condensation
continued for a specific period of time.

„Auto Stop
Before Using the Machine

Select the check box to automatically switch the Warmer mode to [Off] after a specified
period of absence of condensation has elapsed.
Note
z If the power is off at the time specified in [Start Time], the machine will not enter the Warmer mode.
z While the Warmer mode is enabled, the machine will not enter the Sleep mode and prevents or reduces
condensation.
z [Auto Start] allows you to automatically enable the Warmer mode when the machine detects condensation
in future years.

1 8 Select [Save].

9 Select [Close] repeatedly until the Services Home screen is displayed.

Note
z When you configure settings under [System Settings] or [Setup] and then press the <Services Home> button,
the screen directly goes back to the Services Home screen.

28
 Customizing the Control Panel

Customizing the Control Panel

You can change the services displayed on the touch screen or the features assigned to the
buttons to make best use of the machine.

Before Using the Machine

This section describes how to change the screen default, the services displayed after Auto
Clear, the services displayed on the Services Home screen, and the services assigned to the
custom buttons, and how to adjust the screen brightness.
Note
z For information on how to change the other settings of the control panel, refer to Screen/Button Settings
(P.152).

Changing the Screen Default

You can change the screen displayed when the machine is turned on or the Power Saver 1
mode is deactivated. The Services Home screen is displayed by factory default.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 ＃

2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter]. When a passcode is required, select [Next] and
enter the system administrator’s passcode, and select [Enter].

Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin".

29
 Before Using the Machine

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Before Using the Machine

Note
z When the Services Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen, press the <Services Home> button.

4 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Screen/Button Settings].

5 Select [Screen Default], and then select [Change Settings].

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

6 Select a service you want to display.

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

7 Select [Save].

30
 Customizing the Control Panel

Setting the Screen After Auto Clear

You can select the screen to be displayed after Auto Clear from [Last Selection Screen] or
[Services Home].
Reference

Before Using the Machine

z For information on Auto Clear, refer to "Auto Clear" (P.148)"

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0
9

＃
1
C

2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode,
and select [Enter].

Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Note
z
When the Services Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen, press the <Services Home> button.

31
 Before Using the Machine

4 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Screen/Button Settings].
Before Using the Machine

5 Select [Screen After Auto Clear], and then select [Change Settings].

Note
z
Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

6 Select [Last Selection Screen] or [Services Home].

7 Select [Save].

32
 Customizing the Control Panel

Customizing the Button Layout

You can customize the services and the button layout displayed on the Services Home
screen when you press the <Services Home> button on the control panel.
Note

Before Using the Machine

z
Services not supported by the machine will not be displayed on the screen. Grayed out buttons cannot be
used as a result of malfunctioning.

Service buttons Additional feature

1
buttons

The following services can be displayed on the service buttons.

Note
z
The available services vary depending on the installed options.
z
Copy
z Fax/Internet Fax
z E-mail
z
Simple Copy
z Simple Fax
z Scan to PC
z
Store to Folder
z Network Scanning
z Store to USB
z
Send from Folder
z Fax Received - Line 1 (Folder NNN)
z Fax Received - Line 2 (Folder NNN)
z
Fax Received - Line 3 (Folder NNN)
z Fax Received - SIP (Folder NNN)
Note
z
The folder number specified in Folder Selector Setup will be displayed instead of "NNN". When the folder
number is not specified, "(Folder Not Set)" will be displayed instead of "NNN".

33
 Before Using the Machine

z Stored Programming
Note
z This services is displayed when the User Authentication feature is used.
z
Store & Send Link
Before Using the Machine

Note
z This services is displayed when the User Authentication feature is used.
z Media Print - Text
z
Media Print - Photos
z Secure Print
z Sample Set
z
Delayed Print

1 z Charge Print
z Private Charge Print
z
Store to WSD
Note
z
WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
z Custom Services
Note
z
[Custom Services] can be displayed when any custom service is installed on the machine. For more
information on the custom services, contact our Customer Support Center.
The following services can be displayed on the additional feature buttons.
z Language
z
Screen Brightness
z
Setup
z Calibration
z
Activity Report
z Fax Receiving Mode
z Print Mode
z
Lockout Printer/Release Printer
Note
z [Lockout Printer]/[Release Printer] is not displayed by default. To display this feature, select [Allow User to
Lock Out] in [Printer Lockout] under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Machine
Clock/Timers], and then assign [Disable Auto Printing] to a button on the [Services Home - Additional
Features] screen.

Services Home
You can select service buttons, which are displayed on the Services Home screen.
If you select [(Not Assigned)], the position of the selected button becomes blank.

34
 Customizing the Control Panel

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

Before Using the Machine

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 ＃

2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode, 1
and select [Enter].

Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Note
z When the Services Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen, press the <Services Home> button.

4 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Screen/Button Settings].

35
 Before Using the Machine

5 Select [Services Home], and then select [Change Settings].

Before Using the Machine

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

6 Select the position where you want to assign a service.

1

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.
z The layout of the buttons in this screen corresponds to the layout of those on the Services Home screen.

7 Select a service you want to display on the Services Home screen.

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

z You cannot assign the same feature to more than one button.

8 Select [Save].

9 Select [Save].

Services Home - Additional Features

You can select additional feature buttons, which are displayed on the Services Home
screen.
If you select [(Not Assigned)], the position of the selected button becomes blank.
You cannot assign [Setup] to [(Not Assigned)]. If you do not want to display the [Setup]
button, select the [Show this in Admin mode] check box.

36
 Customizing the Control Panel

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

Before Using the Machine

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 ＃

2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode, 1
and select [Enter].

Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Note
z When the Services Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen, press the <Services Home> button.

4 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Screen/Button Settings].

37
 Before Using the Machine

5 Select [Services Home - Additional Features], and then select [Change Settings].
Before Using the Machine

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

6 Select the position where you want to assign an additional feature.

Note
z
Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen
z The layout of the buttons in this screen corresponds to the layout of those on the Services Home screen.

7 Select a service you want to display on the Services Home screen.

Note
z
Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.
z You cannot assign the same feature to more than one button.

8 Select [Save].

9 Select [Save].

38
 Customizing the Control Panel

Assigning Services to the Custom Buttons

You can assign services to the <Copy>, <(Not in Use)>, and <Review> buttons on the control
panel.
Assigning a service to a custom button allows you to switch to this service without having to

Before Using the Machine

return to the Services Home screen. If you do not need to assign any service to a custom
button, select [(Not Set)].
By factory default, the following services are assigned to each button: [Copy] for the
<Copy> button, [Not in use] for the <(Not in Use)> button(only for the machine with the
Fax service) and [Review] for the <Review> button.
This section describes how to assign [Send from Folder] to the <(Not in Use)> button, as an
example.
Note
z After you change the assignment, apply the labels provided with the machine. When you assign a service for
which no label is provided, use a blank label and write down the service name with a permanent marker. The 1
labels include the services that are not supported by the machine.
z "Fax" is assigned to <Custom Button 2> only when the Fax service is available to the model. Use a "Fax" label
on "Not in Use" on the control panel. If Fax is not available, "Fax" is not assigned to this button.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 ＃

2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode,
and select [Enter].

Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin".

39
 Before Using the Machine

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Before Using the Machine

Note
z
When the Services Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen, press the <Services Home> button.

4 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Screen/Button Settings].
1

5 Select [Custom Button 2], and then select [Change Settings].

Note
z
Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

6 Select [Send from Folder].

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

7 Select [Save].

40
 Customizing the Control Panel

Adjusting Screen Brightness

You can adjust the screen brightness of the screen on the Services Home screen.

1 Select [Screen Brightness] on the Services Home screen.

Before Using the Machine

2 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the screen brightness.

1
3 Select [Save].
Reference
z To adjust the screen brightness from the [Tools] screen, refer to "Screen Brightness" (P.154).

41
 Before Using the Machine

Touch Screen
On the touch screen of the machine, you can switch pages and scroll a list by the following
operations.
Before Using the Machine

Note
z The touch screen of the control panel used in the machine is pressure-sensitive. Adjust the power to touch the
screen.
z You can set whether to enable flick and double-tap or not. For more information, refer to "Screen/Button
Settings" (P.152).

Drag
Slide your finger to the position desired with your finger touched the touch screen. Drag the
touch screen from side to side to switch pages.
1

Drag the touch screen up and down to scroll a list.

Note
z During drag, scrolling stops when you move your finger away from the touch screen.

42
 Touch Screen

Flick
Slide your finger quickly to the position desired and release it.
Flick the touch screen from side to side or up and down to switch pages.

Before Using the Machine

Flick the touch screen up and down to scroll a list.

Note
z During flick, scrolling continues for a while even after you move your finger away from the touch screen.

Tap
Touch the touch screen and move your finger away from the screen quickly. To tap the
same position of the screen twice is called double-tap.
Tap the touch screen to switch the thumbnail bar to be displayed or not.
Note
z The operation of pinch in or pinch out (moving two fingers inward or outward) to zoom in or out screens is not
supported.

Double-tap a previewed image to enlarge the image.

43
 Before Using the Machine

Important Security Instructions

The Security Warning screen is displayed before the Services Home screen when any one of
the following conditions is fulfilled and you enter the System Administration mode.
Before Using the Machine

z The system administrator's user ID and passcode are default values.

z
The SNMP protocol's community name and authentication password are default values.
z The Global IP Address is used and [Login Type] is set to [No Login Required].
To use the machine more safely, we recommend that you change the settings immediately
after installing the machine.
z
Change the system administrator's user ID and passcode, and SNMP protocol's
community name and authentication password from the default values.

1 Changing these settings prevents the machine from the malicious person's attacks
(changing settings or exploitation of information).
Note
z Changing the system administrator's user ID and passcode, and SNMP protocol's community name and
authentication password from the default values affects the behavior of cooperative software or utilities.
Check the influence before changing these settings.
z When using the Global IP Address on the machine, set the IP filtering setting to prevent
the machine from illegal access from an external network (browsing job history or
accessing folders).
z Set [Login Type] to [Login to Local Accounts] or [Login to Remote Accounts].
Select [Login to Local Accounts] to use the user information registered on the machine to
manage authentication. Only the users who have succeeded in the authentication can
use the machine. When using this method, entering user ID or using a smart card is
required to log in.
Select [Login to Remote Accounts] to use the user information registered on a remote
authentication server to manage authentication.
For information on how to change the system administrator's user ID and passcode, refer
to "System Administrator Settings" (P.313).
For information on how to change the SNMP authentication information, refer to the help
of CentreWare Internet Services.
For information on how to set the IP filtering setting, refer to the help of CentreWare
Internet Services.
For information on how to set the login type, refer to "Login Type" (P.315) For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the Internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

44
 Entering Text

Entering Text
During operations, a screen for entering text sometimes appears. The following describes
how to enter text.

Before Using the Machine

You can enter the following characters: numerals, alphabets, and symbols.
1
Item Description
Entering alphabets and To enter uppercase letters, select [Shift]. To return to the
numerals lowercase letters, select [Shift] again.
Entering symbols Select [More Characters].

Note
z
Depending on the keyboard, you can select a symbol from
the pull-up options displayed on the bottom left of the
screen.
Entering a space Select [Space].
Deleting characters Select [Backspace] to delete one character at a time.
Select [Delete Text] to delete all characters.

45
Before Using the Machine Before Using the Machine

46
2
Paper and Other Media
2
 Paper and Other Media

Paper Types
This section describes the kinds of paper available for this machine.
Use of inappropriate paper may result in paper jams, cause reduced print quality,
malfunctions and other trouble. To make full and effective use of the machine's
performance, we recommend using only paper recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Paper and Other Media

If you want to use paper not recommended by Fuji Xerox, contact our Customer Support
Center.

WARNING
Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper or
conductivelycoated paper. When paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and
eventually a fire accident.

2 Important
z Moisture generated by water, rain, or vapor may cause the printed images to fade. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Loadable Quantity and Weight for Supported Paper

Paper Trays Basis Weight/ Loadable Quantity*1

Ream Weight
Tray 1 to 4*2 60 to 256 gsm 500 sheets
Ream Weight: 51.6
- 220.1 kg
Tray 5 60 to 216 gsm Up to 5 mm
Ream Weight: 51.6 45 sheets
- 185.7 kg

*1 : When using 80 gsm paper

*2 : Trays 2 to 4 are optional for some models.

Important
z
Printing on paper that differs from the paper type and size selected in the print driver, or printing from a tray
that does not support the loaded paper may result in a paper jam. To ensure correct printing, select the
correct paper size, paper type, and paper tray.

Note
z Basis weight is the weight of 1 m of a paper sheet.
z Ream weight is the weight of 1,000 sheets of duodecimo size (788 x 1,091 mm) paper.
z When copying on non-standard size paper from Tray 5, you must enter the paper size. Furthermore, if you
frequently copy on non-standard size paper, you can preset the size on the machine. That size then appears
under [Standard Sizes] on the [Tray 5] screen. For more information on the settings, refer to "Tray 5 - Paper
Size Defaults" (P.159).
z Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of paper.
For more information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.160).

48
 Paper Types

Supported Paper Type

Standard Paper
When printing or copying on commonly used paper (plain paper), use paper meeting the
standards described below. To copy or print as clear as possible, we recommend the
following standard paper.

Paper and Other Media

Important
z The paper performance may not be guaranteed depending on the manufacturer of the paper being used. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Paper Basis Paper Type*1 Image Notes/Countermeasure

Name Weight Quality*2
(gsm)
Xerox 75 Plain Plain A -
Business
4200 2
Xerox 90 Bond Plain F -
Color
Xpressions
Select
Xerox 80 Plain Plain D -
Premier
Xerox 90 Bond Plain F -
Digital
Colour
Colotech+
GOLD
P 64 Plain Plain A -
Colotech+ 90 Bond Plain F -
J-Paper 75 Plain Plain A -
Business 80 Plain Plain D -
Premier 80 Plain Plain D -

*1 : Select the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray. For more information, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.72).
*2 : Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of paper. For more
information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.160).

49
 Paper and Other Media

Semi Standard Paper

In addition to the standard paper, the following paper also can be used.

Important
z The paper performance may not be guaranteed depending on the manufacturer of the paper being used. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Paper and Other Media

Paper Basis Paper Type*1 Image Notes/Countermeasure

Name Weight Quality*2
(gsm)
Xerox 75 Plain Plain A -
Business
4200 (8.5
x 11" with
3 holes
and 8.5 x
2 14")
Xerox 90 Bond Plain F -
Color
Xpressions
Select (8.5
x 11 with 3
holes and
8.5 x 14)
Xerox 90 Bond Plain F -
Premier
Xerox 80 Plain Plain D -
Exclusive
Xerox 80 Plain Plain D -
Exclusive
(4-hole)
Xerox 90 Bond Plain F -
Digital
Colour
Colotech+
Xerox 100 Bond Plain F -
Digital
Colour
Colotech+
Xerox 100 Bond Plain F -
Digital
Colour
Colotech+
GOLD
M-Paper 80 Plain Plain D -
Business + 80 Plain Plain D -
Business + 70 Plain Plain A -
Business + 75 Plain Plain A -
Business + 80 Plain Plain D -
Performer 70 Plain Plain A -

50
 Paper Types

Performer 80 Plain Plain D -

Performer 70 Plain Plain A -
+
Performer 80 Plain Plain D -
+
Performa 80 Plain Plain D -
Plus

Paper and Other Media

Xcite 80 Plain Plain D -
Xplore 70 Plain Plain A -
Astro Extra 70 Plain Plain A -
Astro Extra 80 Plain Plain D -
Xceed 70 Plain Plain A -
Xceed 80 Plain Plain D -
Profession
al
70 Plain Plain A -
2
Profession 80 Plain Plain D -
al
Xpress 70 Plain Plain A -
Paper
Premier 80 Plain Plain D -
Fsc
Performer 75 Plain Plain A -
A4 75gsm
White Fsc
Star 70 Plain Plain A -
(Package:
Orange)

*1 : Select the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray. For more information, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.72).
*2 : Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of paper. For
moreinformation on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.160).

51
 Paper and Other Media

Usable Paper
In addition to the standard paper, the following paper also can be used.
Important
z The paper performance may not be guaranteed depending on the manufacturer of the paper being used. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Paper and Other Media

Paper Basis Paper Type*1 Image Notes/Countermeasure

Name Weight Quality*2
(gsm)
Xerox 75 Plain Plain A -
Business
Recycled
Paper
Xerox 75 Plain Plain A -
Business
2 Recycled
Paper (3-
hole)
Xerox 105 Bond Plain F If the paper is jammed, fan the
Color paper before loading. If jams still
Xpressions occur, feed one sheet at a time.
Elite
Xerox 105 Bond Plain F
Color
Xpressions
Elite (3-
hole)
Xerox 120 Heavyweight Heavyweight
Color (HW) A
Xpressions
Elite
Xerox 163 Heavyweight Heavyweight
Color (HW) A
Xpressions
Elite
Xerox 215 Extra Extra
Color Heavyweight Heavyweight
Xpressions (X-HW) A
Elite
Xerox 105 Bond Plain F -
Color
Xpressions
Planet 20
Xerox 175 Extra Extra -
Color Heavyweight Heavyweight
Xpressions (X-HW) A
Planet 20
Xerox 215 Extra Extra -
Color Heavyweight Heavyweight
Xpressions (X-HW) A
Planet 20

52
 Paper Types

Xerox 90# 163 Heavyweight Heavyweight -

Index (HW) A
Stock
Xerox 199 Extra Extra -
110# Heavyweight Heavyweight
Index (X-HW) A
Stock
Monarch 75-90 Envelope - Soft envelopes may be jammed in a

Paper and Other Media

high-temperature or humid
condition.
Com10 75-90 Envelope
Xerox 60 Plain Plain A -
Premier
Xerox 120 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Premier (HW) A
Xerox
Business
80 Plain Plain D -
2
Xerox 80 Plain Plain D -
Recycled
Xerox 80 Plain Plain D -
Recycled
Supreme
TCF
Xerox 90 Plain Plain F -
Exclusive
Xerox 80 Plain Plain D -
Digital
Colour
Impressio
ns
Xerox 90 Bond Plain F -
Digital
Colour
Impressio
ns
Xerox 100 Bond Plain F -
Digital
Colour
Impressio
ns
Xerox 120 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Digital (HW) A
Colour
Impressio
ns
Xerox 160 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Digital (HW) A
Colour
Impressio
ns

53
 Paper and Other Media

Xerox 250 Extra Extra -

Digital Heavyweight Heavyweight
Colour (X-HW) A
Impressio
ns
Xerox 120 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Digital (HW) A
Colour
Paper and Other Media

Colotech+
Xerox 160 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Digital (HW) A
Colour
Colotech+
Xerox 200 Extra Extra -
Digital Heavyweight Heavyweight
Colour (X-HW) A
Colotech+
2 Xerox 220 Extra Extra -
Digital Heavyweight Heavyweight
Colour (X-HW) A
Colotech+
Xerox 250 Extra Extra -
Digital Heavyweight Heavyweight
Colour (X-HW) A
Colotech+
Xerox 120 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Digital (HW) A
Colour
Colotech+
GOLD
Xerox 160 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Digital (HW) A
Colour
Colotech+
GOLD
Xerox 200 Extra Extra -
Digital Heavyweight Heavyweight
Colour (X-HW) A
Colotech+
GOLD
Xerox 220 Extra Extra -
Digital Heavyweight Heavyweight
Colour (X-HW) A
Colotech+
GOLD
Xerox 250 Extra Extra -
Digital Heavyweight Heavyweight
Colour (X-HW) A
Colotech+
GOLD
Xerox 100 Bond Plain F -
Colotech+
Natural
White

54
 Paper Types

Xerox 160 Heavyweight Heavyweight -

Colotech+ (HW) A
Natural
White
Xerox 200 Extra Extra -
Colotech+ Heavyweight Heavyweight
Natural (X-HW) A
White

Paper and Other Media

200 180 Extra Extra -
Heavyweight Heavyweight
(X-HW) A
Xerox - Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Colour (HW) A
Laser Matt
CD
labelsCom
bi Box (2-
up) 2
DL - Envelope
Envelope
Colotech+ 90 Bond Plain F -
Colotech+ 100 Bond Plain F -
Colotech+ 120 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
(HW) A
Colotech+ 160 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
(HW) A
Colotech+ 200 Extra Extra -
Heavyweight Heavyweight
(X-HW) A
Colotech+ 220 Extra Extra -
Heavyweight Heavyweight
(X-HW) A
Colotech+ 250 Extra Extra -
Heavyweight Heavyweight
(X-HW) A
Xpress 80 Plain Plain D -
Paper
DocuPaper 80 Plain Plain D -
Blue
DocuPaper 70 Plain Plain A -
Blue
J 82 Plain Plain D -
JD PAPER 98 Plain Plain F -
Diplomat 80 Plain Plain D -
Black
Business 85 Plain Plain D -
Digital
Carbon
Neutral

55
 Paper and Other Media

Green 80 Plain Plain D -

Wrap Pure
100
Carbon
Neutral
100
Percent
Recycled
Paper and Other Media

Green 80 Plain Plain D -

Wrap
Australian
Made 50
Percent
Recycled
Laserprint 80 Plain Plain D -
Van Hawk 70 Plain Plain A -
paper
2 Van Hawk 80 Plain Plain D -
paper
Horizon 70 Plain Plain A -
Horizon 80 Plain Plain D -
Office 70 Plain Plain A -
Office 80 Plain Plain D -
Recycled 80 Plain Plain D -
Supreme
PAPER 80 Plain Plain D -
ONE All
Purpose
Express 80 Plain Plain D -
Nappco 80 Plain Plain D -
paper
Reflex 80 Plain Plain D -
Carbon
Neutral
Ultra
White
Reflex 90 Plain Plain F -
Carbon
Neutral
Ultra
White
Reflex 80 Plain Plain D -
recycled
Reflex 80 Plain Plain D -
Ultra
White
Double A 70 Plain Plain A -
Double A 80 Plain Plain D -
PaperOne 70 Plain Plain A -
Copier

56
 Paper Types

PaperOne 75 Plain Plain A -

Copier
PaperOne 80 Plain Plain D -
Copier
Xerox 80 Plain Plain D -
Undertone
s- Several
Colours

Paper and Other Media

Copy Pilot 70 Plain Plain A -
Copy Pilot 80 Plain Plain D -
Kool Print 80 Plain Plain D -
Le Copy 70 Plain Plain A -
Le Copy 80 Plain Plain D -
Colotech+ 160 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Supergloss
1 Sided
(HW) A
2
Colotech+ 210 Extra Extra -
Supergloss Heavyweight Heavyweight
(X-HW) A
Colotech+ 250 Extra Extra -
Supergloss Heavyweight Heavyweight
1 Sided (X-HW) A
Colotech+ 120 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Gloss 2 (HW) A
Sided
Colotech+ 140 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Gloss 2 (HW) A
Sided
Colotech+ 170 Extra Extra -
Gloss 2 Heavyweight Heavyweight
Sided (X-HW) A
Colotech+ 210 Extra Extra -
Gloss 2 Heavyweight Heavyweight
Sided (X-HW) A
Colotech+ 250 Extra Extra -
Gloss 2 Heavyweight Heavyweight
Sided (X-HW) A
Colotech+ 120 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Silk 2 (HW) A
Sided
Colotech+ 140 Heavyweight Heavyweight -
Silk 2 (HW) A
Sided
Colotech+ 170 Extra Extra -
Silk 2 Heavyweight Heavyweight
Sided (X-HW) A
Colotech+ 210 Extra Extra -
Silk 2 Heavyweight Heavyweight
Sided (X-HW) A

57
 Paper and Other Media

Colotech+ 250 Extra Extra -

Silk 2 Heavyweight Heavyweight
Sided (X-HW) A

*1 : Select the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray. For more information, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.72).
*2 : Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of paper. For more
information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.160).
Paper and Other Media

58
 Paper Types

Limited Paper

* : Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of paper. For more
information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.160).

You can use the following paper with limitations.

Important
z The paper performance may not be guaranteed depending on the manufacturer of the paper being used. For

Paper and Other Media

more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Paper BasisWei Paper Type*1 Image Notes/Countermeasure

Name ght(gsm) Quality*2
Xerox 120 Gloss Heavyweight Paper may be jammed in a humid
Digital (HW) A condition. Fan the paper before
Color Elite loading. If paper jams still occur,
Silk feed one sheet at a time.
Coated
Text and 2
Covers
(C2S)
Xerox 140 Gloss Heavyweight
Digital (HW) A
Color Elite
Silk
Coated
Text and
Covers
(C2S)
Xerox 210 HW Gloss Extra
Digital Heavyweight
Color Elite (X-HW) A
Silk
Coated
Text and
Covers
(C2S)
Xerox 120 Gloss Heavyweight
Digital (HW) A
Color Elite
Gloss
Coated
Text and
Covers
(C2S)
Xerox 140 Gloss Heavyweight z Loading from Trays 1 to 4 is
Digital (HW) A recommended.
Color Elite z Paper may be jammed in a
Gloss humid condition. Fan the paper
Coated before loading. If paper jams still
Text and occur, feed one sheet at a time.
Covers If misfeeding still occurs, load
(C2S) paper curled upward.
z Paper may be jammed when
high density originals are printed
to the Exit 2 tray. If the jam
occured, use the center tray.

59
 Paper and Other Media

Xerox 210 HW Gloss Extra

Digital Heavyweight
Color Elite (X-HW) A
Gloss
Coated
Text and
Covers
(C2S)
Paper and Other Media

Xerox 120 Gloss Heavyweight

Digital (HW) A
Color Elite
Gloss
Coated
Text and
Covers
(C2S)
Xerox 210 HW Gloss Extra

2 Digital
Color
Heavyweight
(X-HW) A
Select
Gloss
Coated
Text and
Covers
(C2S)
Xerox 160 Gloss Heavyweight z
Loading from Trays 1 to 4 is
Digital (HW) A recommended.
Color z
Paper may be jammed in a
Supreme humid condition. Fan the paper
Gloss before loading. If paper jams still
(C1S) occur, feed one sheet at a time.
If misfeeding still occurs, load
paper curled upward.
z
Paper may be jammed when
high density originals are printed
to the Exit 2 tray. If the jam
occured, use the center tray.
Xerox 247 HW Gloss Extra
Digital Heavyweight
Color (X-HW) A
Supreme
Gloss
Xerox 160 Gloss Heavyweight
Digital (HW) A
Color
Trifold
Brochures
(C1S)
Xerox - Labels - z
Loading from Trays 1 to 4 is
Digital recommended.
Color z
Paper may be jammed in a
Glossy humid condition. Fan the paper
Labels before loading. If paper jams still
occur, feed one sheet at a time.

60
 Paper Types

Xerox - Labels - z
Labels once fed to the machine
Digital cannot be used.
Color z
Loading from Trays 1 to 4 is
Matte recommended.
Labels z
Paper may be jammed in a
humid condition. Fan the paper
before loading. If paper jams still
occur, feed one sheet at a time.

Paper and Other Media

Xerox - Labels - -
Laser
Transp. -
Removabl
e Stripe
Phaser - Labels -
Profession
al
Transpare
ncy
Xerox 120gsm Gloss Heavyweight Paper may be jammed in a humid
2
Digital (HW) A condition. Fan the paper before
Colour loading. If paper jams still occur,
Colotech+ feed one sheet at a time.
Gloss
Coated
Xerox 140gsm Gloss Heavyweight
Digital (HW) A
Colour
Colotech+
Gloss
Coated
Xerox 170gsm HW Gloss Extra
Digital Heavyweight
Colour (X-HW) A
Colotech+
Gloss
Coated
Xerox 210gsm HW Gloss Extra
Digital Heavyweight
Colour (X-HW) A
Colotech+
Gloss
Coated
Xerox 250gsm HW Gloss Extra z
Loading from Trays 1 to 4 is
Digital Heavyweight recommended.
Colour (X-HW) A z
Paper may be jammed in a
Colotech+ humid condition. Fan the paper
Gloss before loading. If paper jams still
Coated occur, feed one sheet at a time.
If misfeeding still occurs, load
paper curled upward.
Xerox 120gsm Gloss Heavyweight Paper may be jammed in a humid
Digital (HW) A condition. Fan the paper before
Colour loading. If paper jams still occur,
Colotech+ feed one sheet at a time.
Silk
Coated

61
 Paper and Other Media

Xerox 140gsm Gloss Heavyweight

Digital (HW) A
Colour
Colotech+
Silk
Coated
Xerox 170gsm Glossy Extra
Digital Cardstock Heavyweight
Paper and Other Media

Colour (X-HW) A
Colotech+
Silk
Coated
Xerox 210gsm HW Gloss Extra
Digital Heavyweight
Colour (X-HW) A
Colotech+
Silk

2 Coated
Xerox 250gsm HW Gloss Extra Paper may be jammed in a humid
Digital Heavyweight condition. Fan the paper before
Colour (X-HW) A loading. If paper jams still occur,
Colotech+ feed one sheet at a time to Tray 1
Silk to 4(Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be
Coated used for media heavier than 216
gsm).
Xerox 135gsm Gloss Heavyweight z
Loading from Trays 1 to 4 is
Colotech+ (HW) A recommended.
Supergloss z
Paper may be jammed in a
(Coated 1 humid condition. Fan the paper
side) before loading. If paper jams still
occur, feed one sheet at a time.
If misfeeding still occurs, load
paper curled upward.
z
Paper may be jammed when
high density originals are printed
to the Exit 2 tray. If the jam
occured, use the center tray.
Xerox 135gsm Gloss Heavyweight z Loading from Trays 1 to 4 is
Colotech+ (HW) A recommended.
Supergloss z Paper may be jammed in a
(Coated 1 humid condition. Fan the paper
side) before loading. If paper jams still
occur, feed one sheet at a time.
If misfeeding still occurs, load
paper curled upward.
z
Paper may be jammed when
high density originals are printed
to the Exit 2 tray. If the jam
occured, use the center tray.
Xerox 160gsm Gloss Heavyweight
Colotech+ (HW) A
Supergloss
(Coated 1
side)

62
 Paper Types

Xerox 210gsm HW Gloss Extra

Colotech+ Heavyweight
Supergloss (X-HW) A
(Coated 1
side)
Xerox - Labels - z
Labels once fed to the machine
Colour cannot be used.
Copier z Always use Tray 5.

Paper and Other Media

Laser
Labels
Xerox - HW Gloss - z
Always use Tray 1 to 4.
Supergloss z
Paper may be jammed in a
Labels humid condition. Fan the paper
before loading. If paper jams still
occur, feed one sheet at a time.
If misfeeding still occurs, load
paper curled upward.
z Paper may be jammed when
high density originals are printed 2
to the Exit 2 tray. If the jam
occured, use the center tray.
Xerox - Labels - Labels once fed to the machine
Color cannot be used.
Laser Dura
Paper
Label
Xerox High - Labels - z
Labels once fed to the machine
Speed cannot be used.
Removabl z
Paper may be jammed in a
e Labels humid condition. Fan the paper
before loading. If paper jams still
occur, feed one sheet at a time.
Xerox High - Labels -
Speed
Removabl
e
Labels(A4)
Xerox - Extra - -
Plain Heavyweight
Transpare
ncy for
Colour
Xerox 210 gsm Labels Extra z
Loading from Trays 1 to 4 is
Digital Heavyweight recommended.
Color (X-HW) A z
Paper may be jammed in a
DocuPac humid condition. Fan the paper
Prsentatio before loading. If paper jams still
n Folder occur, feed one sheet at a time.
High Gloss If misfeeding still occurs, load
White paper curled upward.
z
Paper may be jammed when
high density originals are printed
to the Exit 2 tray. If the jam
occured, use the center tray.

63
 Paper and Other Media

Xerox - Labels - Paper may be jammed in a humid

Colour condition. Fan the paper before
Laser loading. If paper jams still occur,
Gloss CD feed one sheet at a time. If
labels misfeeding still occurs, load paper
curled upward.
Xerox High - Labels - Labels once fed to the machine
Speed cannot be used.
Paper and Other Media

Laser
Labels
Xerox - Labels - -
Labels
White with
Square
Xerox - Labels - -
Laser
Copier
2 White
Label
Xerox - Labels - -
Laser
Copier
Label
24UP
LABELS - Labels - -
MULTI-
USE 14UP
99X38.1M

*1 : Select the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray. For more information, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.72).
*2 : Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of paper. For more
information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.160).

Unusable Paper
z Transparencies
z Damp or wet paper
z
Paper pre-printed with other printer or copying machine
z Wrinkled, creased, or ripped paper
z Envelopes that are not flat, or that have clasps
z
Envelopes with adhesive tape or glue, or that have windows
z Color paper with surface treatments
z Paper with rough surface, such as pulp paper or fibrous paper
z
Symphony (Pastel Pink etc.) 80 gsm

Storing and Handling Paper

„ Please keep the following points in mind when storing paper

z Store paper inside a cabinet or other dry place. Paper that has absorbed moisture can
result in paper jams and lower image quality.

64
 Paper Types

z After opening a package of paper, wrap and store any remaining paper. We recommend
that you store remaining paper in moisture prevention packets.
z
Store paper on a flat surface to prevent bends or warping.
z Do not store unwrapped paper in high temperature and humid locations.

„ Please adhere to the following points when loading paper in a tray

z
Align the stack of paper neatly before setting it in a tray.

Paper and Other Media

z Do not use paper that is creased or wrinkled.
z Do not use warped or curled paper.
z
Do not load paper of mixed sizes together into a tray.
z Carefully and labels before use. Otherwise, the paper may sticktogether, resulting in
paper jams, or multiple sheets being fed to the machine simultaneously.

65
 Paper and Other Media

Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper.

Types of paper loaded in trays

The machine automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded paper in a tray, but
Paper and Other Media

not a paper type. Normally, each tray is set to plain paper. When loading paper other than
plain paper, you must change the paper type setting. You can name paper types and can
set up to five paper types as user-defined paper.
Reference
z For information on changing the paper type settings, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.72).

Automatic Tray Selection

If you set paper source on the [Paper/Output] tab to [Paper Tray] in the PCL print driver's
2 screen when printing, the machine automatically selects the paper tray according to the
size and orientation of the document to be printed. This is called [Automatic Tray
Selection].
When copying, selecting [Auto Select] for [Paper Supply] enables automatic tray selection.
If the machine detects two or more corresponding trays for the automatic tray selection,
the machine selects the tray with the highest priority specified in [Paper Type Priority]
among the trays set under [Paper Type Settings]. Trays whose [Paper Type Priority] setting
is set to [Auto Paper Off] are ignored in automatic tray selection. Also, if the [Paper Type
Priority] settings are identical, the tray priority is determined by [Paper Tray Priority].
Note
z Some trays may not be selected in automatic tray selection depending on the setting of that tray for [Auto
Paper Select]. For more information, refer to ""Change Settings" (P.158).
z Tray 5 cannot be selected in automatic tray selection.
z
When the paper runs out during copying or printing, select a tray containing the same sized paper and
orientation, and the machine continues copying or printing (Auto Tray Switching feature). The machine
cannot switch to a tray containing a paper type for which [Paper Type Priority] is set to [Auto Paper Off].

Reference
z
For information about [Paper Type], [Paper Type Priority], and [Paper Tray Priority] settings, and the paper substitute feature, refer
to "Paper Tray Settings" (P.157). You can also set these settings from CentreWare Internet Services.

Adding paper
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayed on
the touch screen. Add paper according to the message instructions. Copying or printing
automatically resumes when paper is added.
Note
z Fan the paper well before loading paper in a tray. It prevents paper from sticking to each other and reduces
paper jams.

66
 Loading Paper

Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4

The following describes the procedures to load paper in Trays 1 to 4.
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message appears on the
touch screen. Add paper according to the message instructions. Copying or printing
automatically resumes when paper is added.
Important

Paper and Other Media

z The user documentations may be placed in a tray when the machine is first installed. In the case, be sure to
remove the user documentations from the tray. Otherwise, it may cause paper jams or machine malfunction.
z Do not place any objects other than paper in the trays.

Note
z Trays 2 to 4are optional for some models.
z
Carefully fan paper before loading it in a tray. Otherwise, the paper may stick together, resulting in paper
jams.
For information on changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper
Size for Trays 1 to 4" (P.70). 2
1 Pull out the tray until it stops.

Important
z While the machine is processing a job, do not pull out the tray that is being used for a job.
z
To prevent paper jams or erroneous detection of loaded paper in a tray by the machine, do not add paper on
top of any remaining paper in the tray. Remove any remaining paper in the tray, and then load that paper on
top of the newly loaded paper.
z Do not pull out all the trays together. Otherwise, the machine gets inclined and turns over, which may cause
injuries.

67
 Paper and Other Media

2 Load and align the edge of the paper against the left edge of the tray, with the side to be
copied or printed on facing up.
Paper and Other Media

Note
z Do not load paper above the maximum fill line ("MAX" in the right figure). It may cause paper jams or
machine malfunction.
z Do not place any paper or objects in the empty space on the right side of Trays 1 to 4. It may cause paper
jams or machine malfunction.
2
3 Push the tray in gently until it stops.
Important
z When inserting the tray, push it gently. Forcibly pushing in the tray may cause machine malfunction.

Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)

When printing or copying on a size or type of paper that cannot be set in Trays 1 to 4, use
Tray 5. The following describes the procedures to load paper in Tray 5. For printings, specify
the instructions using the [Paper/Output] tab in the print driver. Also specify the type of
paper to be loaded.

1 Open the Tray 5 (Bypass).

Note
z If necessary, pull out the extension tray. The extension tray can be extended in two stages. Pull out the
extension tray gently.

68
 Loading Paper

2 Load paper with the side to be copied or printed on facing down, inserting the paper until
its edge lightly touches against the paper feed entrance.

Paper and Other Media

Important
z Do not load mixed paper types into the tray.
z Do not load paper above the maximum fill line. It may cause paper jams or machine malfunction.
z When making copies or prints on thick-stock paper and the paper will not feed into the machine, apply a curl
to the paper as shown in the figure on the right. Note, however, that excessively bending or folding the paper
2
may cause paper jams.
z Depending on the type of the heavyweight paper, paper may not be fed to the machine or image quality
may deteriorate.

3 Adjust the paper guides to align the edges of the paper loaded.

69
 Paper and Other Media

Changing the Paper Size

This section describes how to change the paper size for Trays 1 to 4.

Changing the Paper Size for Trays 1 to 4

The following describes how to change paper size in Trays 1 to 4.
Paper and Other Media

Note
z Trays 2 to 4 are optional for some models.
z The types of paper in Trays 1 to 4 are preset. There are 11 paper types: Plain paper, Bond paper, Recycled
paper, Heavyweight paper, Gloss paper, Labels, Custom paper 1 to 5, and normally, plain paper is set. When
changing to a different paper type, change the paper quality settings to match the type of paper to be
loaded so that you can maintain high quality printing. For more information on paper type settings, refer to
"Changing the Paper Settings" (P.72).
z When loading non-standard size paper, you must register the paper size. For information on registering paper

2 sizes, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.158).

Reference
z For more information on how to copy on non-standard size paper, refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper
for Copying)" in the User Guide. For more information on how to print on non-standard size paper, refer to the help of the print
driver.

1 Pull out the tray until it stops.

CAUTION
z When pulling out the paper tray, do it slowly. If pulled out with too much
force, the tray can hit and injure your knees.

Important
z While the machine is processing a job, do not pull out the tray that is being used for a job.
z To prevent paper jams or erroneous detection of loaded paper in a tray by the machine, do not add paper on
top of any remaining paper in the tray.

2 Remove any paper loaded in the tray.

70
 Changing the Paper Size

3 While pinching the two paper guides, move them to the positions for the paper size you are
loading.

Paper and Other Media

4 Load and align the edge of the paper against the left edge of the tray with the side to be
copied or printed on facing down.

Important
z
Do not load paper above the maximum fill line.

5 Push the tray in gently until it stops.

Important
z When inserting the tray, push it gently. Forcibly pushing in the tray may cause machine malfunction.

Note
z Affix the paper size label to the front of the paper tray.

Reference
z
For more information on paper type settings, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.72).

71
 Paper and Other Media

Changing the Paper Settings

This section describes how to change the paper type for Trays and how to set image quality
processing by the individual paper type.
After loading paper in a tray, specify the type of paper loaded and select image quality for
the paper type. Setting Image quality for each paper type enables you to print with the
most suitable image quality for the paper type.
Paper and Other Media

Reference
z For information on image quality processing for each paper type, refer to "Image Quality" (P.160).

Note
z
Users can name Custom 1 to Custom 5 displayed in the paper type settings. For information on how to set
names to Custom 1 to Custom 5, refer to "Custom Paper Name/Color" (P.157).
z
You can change the paper type setting without entering to the System Administration mode on the [Setup]
screen, which is displayed by selecting [Setup] in the Services Home screen if you configure the settings in
advance. For more information, refer to "Customize Paper Supply Screen" (P.158).
2
1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 ＃

2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode,
and select [Enter].

Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
The default passcode is "x-admin".

72
 Changing the Paper Settings

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Paper and Other Media

Note
z When the Services Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen, press the <Services Home> button.

4 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Paper Tray Settings].

5 Select [Paper Tray Attributes].

6 Select a paper tray for changing the paper type setting under [Items].

7 Select [Change Settings].

73
 Paper and Other Media

8 Set [Paper Type], [Paper Size], [Paper Color], and [Auto Paper Select] respectively.
Paper and Other Media

9 Select [Cancel], [Save], [Confirm], or [Close] repeatedly until the [Paper Tray Settings]
screen is displayed.

10 Select [Image Quality].

2

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

11 Select the paper type for changing the image quality settings under [Items], and then
select [Change Settings].

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

12 Select the image quality, and then select [Save].

13 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

74
 Changing the Paper Settings

14 Select [Close].

Paper and Other Media

2

75
Paper and Other Media Paper and Other Media

76
3
Maintenance
3
 Maintenance

Replacing Consumables
The machine is provided with the following consumables and periodic replacement parts.
We recommend the use of the following consumables as they are manufactured to meet
the specifications of the machine.

Type of Consumables/Periodic Product Code Quantity/Box

Replacement Parts
Toner cartridge K (Black) (for TSC (Total CT202488 1 unit/box
Service Contract) or FSMA (Full Service
Maintenance Agreement))
Maintenance

Toner cartridge C (Cyan) (for TSC or FSMA) CT202489 1 unit/box

Toner cartridge M (Magenta) CT202490 1 unit/box
(for TSC or FSMA)
Toner cartridge Y (Yellow) CT202491 1 unit/box
(for TSC or FSMA)
3 Toner cartridge K (Black) (for T&M (Time and
Material contract))
CT202496 1 unit/box

Toner cartridge C (Cyan) (for T&M) CT202497 1 unit/box

Toner cartridge M (Magenta) (for T&M) CT202498 1 unit/box
Toner cartridge Y (Yellow) (for T&M) CT202499 1 unit/box
Drum cartridge CT351088 1 unit/box
Waste toner container CWAA0885 1 unit/box

Staple cartridge (Finisher-A1/B1)*1 CWAA0856 5,000 staples X 2 sets/box

Staple cartridge (Booklet Maker Unit for CWAA0728 2,000 staples X 4 sets/box
Finisher-B1)*2
Stamp Replacement Kit F451 -

*1 : For Finisher-A1 and Finisher-B1

*2 : For Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1

Note
z We recommend that you always keep spare consumables/periodic replacement parts available.

WARNING
z
Never use a vacuum cleaner for spilled toner and residual toner in this product,
toner cartridge or toner bottle. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside a
vacuum cleaner and cause explosion. Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off the
spills. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
z Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the
cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion. If you have a used
toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative
for its disposal.
z Never throw a waste toner bottle into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and
cause burn injuries or explosion. If you have a used waste toner bottle no longer
needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal.

78
 Replacing Consumables

CAUTION
z Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a
child accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink
water and consult a physician immediately.
z When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the
toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and
mouthas well as inhalation.
z If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water. If you
get toner particles in the eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15
minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary. If you inhale
toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water. If

Maintenance
you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of
water and consult a physician immediately.

Handling consumables/periodic replacement parts

z Do not store boxes of consumables/periodic replacement parts upright. 3
z
Do not unpack consumables/periodic replacement parts before use. Avoid storing
consumables/periodic replacement parts in the following locations:
- In high temperature and humid locations
- Near heat-generating devices
- Areas exposed to direct sunlight
- Dusty areas
z
When using consumables/periodic replacement parts, carefully read precautions for use.
Precautions for use are instructed on their bodies or packages, or a precaution sheet is
included in their packages.
z
We recommend always keeping spare consumables/periodic replacement parts in stock.
z When calling our Customer Support Center to order consumables/periodical replacement
parts, have the product codes ready.
z
The use of consumables/periodic replacement parts not recommended by Fuji Xerox
could impair machine quality and performance. Use only consumables/periodic
replacement parts recommended by Fuji Xerox.

Checking the status of consumables

You can check the status of consumables on the [Supplies] screen.
Reference
z
For information on consumables, refer to "Supplies" (P.133).
The following shows the reference section for each item.
"Replacing Toner Cartridge" (P.80)
"Replacing Waste Toner Container (R5)" (P.82)
"Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4" (P.87)
"Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-A1)" (P.88)
"Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1)" (P.92)
"Emptying Punch Waste Container (for Finisher-B1)" (P.93)
"Replacing Stamp" (P.94)

79
 Maintenance

Replacing Toner Cartridge

The following messages are displayed on the touch screen depending on the amount of
toner remaining. Replace the toner cartridge according to the message.

Message*1 Remaining Page Yield*2 Solution

Please order a Yellow Toner Black: Approx. 3,000 You do not need to replace the Toner
[Y] Cartridge. pagesOther than Black: Cartridge immediately. Order the
Approx. 2,500 pages Toner Cartridge displayed on the
screen.
Yellow Toner [Y] Cartridge Approx. 40 pages Replace the toner cartridge with a new
needs to be replaced soon. one.
Maintenance

Yellow Toner [Y] Cartridge - The machine will stop. Replace the
needs to be replaced. toner cartridge with a new one.

*1 : The messages in the above table apply to Yellow Toner. "Yellow Toner [Y]" shown in the messages vary depending on the color
and number of the applicable toner.
*2 : The remaining page yield for copy/print jobs is applicable when A4 paper LEF ( ) is used. The value is an estimate and varies

3 depending on the conditions such as the content printed, dot coverage (area coverage), paper size, paper type, copy/print
density, output image type, and the machine operating environment.

WARNING
z
Never use a vacuum cleaner for spilled toner and residual toner in this product,
toner cartridge or toner bottle. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside a
vacuum cleaner and cause explosion. Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off the
spills. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
z Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the
cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion. If you have a used
toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative
for its disposal.

Important
z
When you replace a toner cartridge, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying paper on the
floor beforehand.
z
The use of toner cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality and performance.
Use only toner cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
z
When the remaining amount of toner is low, the machine may stop printing and display a message. If this
occurs, replace the toner cartridge to resume copying or printing.
z
Replace toner cartridge while the machine is on.
z Copy or print density may decrease slightly after the message "Please order XXX" appears on the touch
screen.
z When the machine is in the Power Saver mode, exit the Power Saver mode by pressing the <Power Saver>
button and the <Machine Status> button on the control panel before you replace the waste toner container.
z When replacing the toner cartridge, press the <Machine Status> button and check the current status for the
toner cartridge even when the control panel is lit.
z If a partially used toner cartridge is used, a message appears and the number of pages that you can copy or
print displayed on the screen may differ considerably.

80
 Replacing Consumables

1 Make sure that the machine is not operating, and open the front cover.

2 Put your hand under the dent of the toner cartridge indicated in the message, and slightly

Maintenance
lift up the cartridge.

Note
z
"Y", "M", "C", or "K" indicates Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black, respectively.

3 Pull out the toner cartridge slowly, and slide it out.

Important
z Slide out the toner cartridge gently. Otherwise, toner may spill from the cartridge.
z If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact our Customer Support Center for its disposal.

81
 Maintenance

4 Take the new toner cartridge of the same color out of the box, and shake the cartridge up
and down and left and right for ten times.
Maintenance

5 Hold the cartridge with the arrow facing up, and push the cartridge in slowly until it stops.

6 Close the front cover.

Note
z
If the front cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine will remain paused.

Replacing Waste Toner Container (R5)

The waste toner container holds used toner. The following messages are displayed on the
touch screen according to the status of the waste toner container. Follow the messages.

Message Remaining Page Yield* Solution

Please order a Waste Toner z DocuCentre-V C2265 Order the waste toner container.
Container. Approx. 1,200 pages
z DocuCentre-V C2263
Approx. 1,000 pages
The Waste Toner Container - The machine will stop. Replace
needs to be replaced. the wastetoner container with a
new one.

82
 Replacing Consumables

* : The remaining page yield for copy/print jobs is applicable when A4 paper LEF（ ）is used. The value is an estimate and varies
depending on the conditions such as the content printed, dot coverage (area coverage), paper size, paper type, copy/print
density, output image type, and the machine operating environment.

When replacing the waste toner container, clean the LED printheads located behind the
waste toner container by using the cleaning bar supplied with a new waste toner container
to prevent inconsistencies in density or color in copies and prints.

WARNING
z
Never use a vacuum cleaner for spilled toner and residual toner in this product,
toner cartridge or toner bottle. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside a
vacuum cleaner and cause explosion. Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off the
spills. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.

Maintenance
z
Never throw a waste toner bottle into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and
cause burn injuries or explosion. If you have a used waste toner bottle no longer
needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal.

Important
z Do not touch the five gray-colored sponge parts on the back side of the waste toner container. Otherwise, 3
your hands may get dirty with toner.
z When you replace the waste toner container, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying paper
on the floor beforehand.
z The proper disposal of used waste toner containers is required. Return the old waste toner container to our
Customer Support Center.
z The use of waste toner container not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use
only waste toner container recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.
z When the machine is in the Power Saver mode, exit the Power Saver mode by pressing the <Power Saver>
button and the <Machine Status> button on the control panel before you replace the waste toner container.
z When replacing the waste toner container, press the <Machine Status> button and check the current status
for the waste toner container even when the control panel is lit.

1 Make sure that the machine is not operating, and open the front cover.

83
 Maintenance

2 Turn the lock lever counterclockwise to unlock the waste toner container. While holding
down the tabs on the top of the waste toner container, lay the container down toward you
and then pull out the container upward at an angle.
Maintenance

Note
z After removing the waste toner container from the machine, do not turn the container upside down.
Otherwise, toner may spill.

3 Prepare a new waste toner container and cleaning bar.

Waste Toner Container

Note
z Take a new container and cleaning bar out of the box in advance.

84
 Replacing Consumables

4 Clean each of the LED printheads once with the cleaning bar on the back side of the front
cover. Insert the cleaning bar into each slot until it stops, and then slowly slide the bar back
out.

Maintenance
5 After cleaning the LED printheads, attach the new cleaning bar to the back side of the front
cover.

Important
z
When inserting the waste toner container, do not grip the handle of the container.

6 Align the dents at the bottom of the waste toner container with the tabs on the machine.

7 Raise the waste toner container toward the inside of the machine until it clicks into place,
and then turn the lock lever clockwise to lock the waste toner container.

85
 Maintenance

8 Insert the used waste toner container into the supplied plastic bag.

9 Use both hands to carefully place the used waste toner container into the empty box. Place
Maintenance

also the old cleaning bar in the box.

Note
z Return the old waste toner container to our Customer Support Center.

10 Close the front cover.

Note
z If the front cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine will remain paused.

86
 Replacing Consumables

Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4

Important
z When replacing the drum cartridge, refer to replacement instructions provided with each new consumable
box.
The machine displays the following messages when a drum cartridge needs to be replaced.
When the message is displayed, contact our Customer Support Center.
If you continue to copy or print without replacing the drum cartridge after the message is
displayed on the touch screen, the machine will stop after copying or printing the number
of pages shown in the following table.

Message Remaining Page Yield Solution

Please order a Drum z
DocuCentre-V C2265 Approx. You do not need to replace the Drum

Maintenance
Cartridge RX. 2,000 pages Cartridge immediately. Order the
z
DocuCentre-V C2263 Approx. Drum Cartridge displayed on the
3,000 pages screen.
Drum Cartridge needs to - Replace the drum cartridge with a
be replaced. new one.
3
CAUTION
z When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the
toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and
mouth as well as inhalation.
z If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water. If you
get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15
minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary. If you inhale
toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water. If
you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of
water and consult a physician immediately.
z Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child
accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and
consult a physician immediately.

Important
z
The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality and performance.
Use only drum cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
z When the machine is in the Power Saver mode, exit the Power Saver mode by pressing the <Power Saver>
button and the <Machine Status> button on the control panel before you replace the drum cartridge.
z When replacing the drum cartridge, press the <Machine Status> button and check the current status for the
drum cartridge even when the control panel is lit.

Note
z Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent lighting. Do not touch
or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in unsatisfactory printing.
z When storing drum cartridges, do not leave them unpacked before use. The drum cartridges may be
deteriorated when exposed to light
z The remaining page yield is applicable when A4 paper LEF （ ）is used. The value is an estimate and varies
depending on the conditions such as the paper size, the paper orientation, the number of pages continuously
print, and the machine operating environment.
z Replace the drum cartridge while the machine is switched on. If the power is switched off, all information
stored to the machine's memory will be erased.
z Images output from the machine may get dirty after the message "Please order a Drum Cartridge XXX RX"

87
 Maintenance

appears on the touch screen.

Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-A1)

When the optional Finisher-A1 is installed and the staple cartridge needs to be replaced, a
message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, load a new staple case
into the staple cartridge.
Important
z The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade quality and performance. Use only
staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
z When the machine is in the Power Saver mode, exit the Power Saver mode by pressing the <Power Saver>
button and the <Machine Status> button on the control panel before you replace the staple cartridge.
z When replacing the staple cartridge, press the <Machine Status> button and check the current status for the
Maintenance

staple cartridge even when the control panel is lit.

Note
z To order a staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Make sure that the machine is not operating, and open the finisher front door.
3

2 Take the staple cartridge out of the finisher.

3 After you take out the staple cartridge, check inside of the finisher for any remaining
staples.

88
 Replacing Consumables

4 Pinch both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers (1), and remove the staple case
from the cartridge (2).

5 Insert the front side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge (1), and then push the

Maintenance
rear side into the cartridge (2).

6 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.

7 Close the finisher front cover.

Note
z
If the front cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine will remain paused.

89
 Maintenance

Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-B1)

When the optional Finisher-B1 is installed and the staple cartridge needs to be replaced, a
message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, load a new staple case
into the staple cartridge.
Important
z The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade quality and performance. Use only
staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
z When the machine is in Power Saver mode, exit Power Saver mode by pressing the <Power Server> button
and the <Machine Status> button on the control panel before you replace the staple cartridge.
z When replacing the staple cartridge, press the <Machine Status> button and check the current status for the
staple cartridge even when the control panel is lit.

Note
Maintenance

z To order a staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Make sure that the machine is not operating, and open the finisher front cover.

2 Grasp the handle and pull out the staple cartridge holder to the right, towards you.

3 Take the staple cartridge out of the finisher.

Note
z The staple cartridge is firmly inserted. A slight force is required to pull the cartridge out of the finisher.

90
 Replacing Consumables

4 Pinch both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers (1), and remove the staple case
from the cartridge (2).

Maintenance
Insert the front side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge (1), and then push the
rear side into the cartridge (2).

6 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.

7 Close the finisher front cover.

Note
z If the finisher front cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine will remain
paused.

91
 Maintenance

Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1)

When the optional Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1 is installed and the staple cartridge
needs to be replaced, a message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears,
load a new staple case into the staple cartridge.
Important
z The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade quality and performance. Use only
staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
z When the machine is in the Power Saver mode, exit the Power Saver mode by pressing the <Power Saver>
button and the <Machine Status> button on the control panel before you replace the waste toner container.
z When replacing the staple cartridge, press the <Machine Status> button and check the current status for the
staple cartridge even when the control panel is lit.

Note
Maintenance

z To order a staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Make sure that the machine is not operating, and open the finisher side cover.

2 Hold the tabs on both sides of the staple cartridge and pull the cartridge out of the finisher.

3 Hold the tabs on both sides of a new staple cartridge, and insert it into the original position
until it clicks.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to replace the other staple cartridge.

92
 Replacing Consumables

5 Close the finisher side cover.

Note
z If the cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine remains paused.

Emptying Punch Waste Container (for Finisher-B1)

When the optional Finisher-B1 is installed and the hole punch waste container becomes full,
a message appears on the touch screen. When the message appears, empty the hole punch
waste container as instructed.
Make sure to discard all paper chads when emptying the hole punch waste container. Not
doing so will cause the container to fill up before the message telling you to empty the
container appears again, and this can cause machine malfunction.

Maintenance
Important
z
Empty the hole punch waste container when the machine is on. If you empty the container while the
machine is off, the machine does not recognize that the container has been emptied.
z
When the machine is in the Power Saver mode, exit the Power Saver mode by pressing the <Power Saver>
button and the <Machine Status> button on the control panel before you replace the waste toner container.
z
When replacing the punch waste container, press the <Machine Status> button and check the current status
for the hole punch waste container even when the control panel is lit. 3
1 Make sure that the machine is not operating, lift the top transport cover, and then open the
front transport cover of the finisher.

2 Pull out the hole punch waste container.

93
 Maintenance

3 Empty the container.

4 Insert the emptied hole punch waste container into the finisher until it stops.
Maintenance

5 Close the front transport cover, and then close the top transport cover of the finisher.

Note
z If the cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine remains paused.

Replacing Stamp
If the machine offers the Fax service and the Stamp Kit (optional) is installed, replace the
stamp cartridge when stamp impressions start to fade.
Important
z Do not touch the ink pad of the stamp cartridge as the ink may be adhered to the pad. If it comes into
contact with your skin, wash immediately.
z Problems caused by using consumables not recommended by Fuji Xerox are not covered by the maintenance
service contract.
z Before using consumables, carefully read instructions and precautions on their packages.

Note
z We recommend always keeping spare consumables/periodic replacement parts in stock.
z
To order consumables, contact our Customer Support Center.
(Product Name: Stamp Replacement Kit, Product Code: F451)

94
 Replacing Consumables

1 Pull up the knob on the document feeder top cover, and open the document feeder top
cover completely.

Maintenance
Pull up the lever to open the inner cover.

3 Stick the supplied pin into the old stamp cartridge, and pull it straight out of the machine.

Note
z If only the sponge part of the stamp cartridge is removed, make sure of removing the bottom part of the
cartridge.

4 Insert the new stamp cartridge.

5 Close the inner cover of the document feeder.

6 Close the left cover of the document feeder until it clicks into place, and confirm that there
is no space between the near or far side of the cover and the document feeder.

95
 Maintenance

Cleaning the Machine

This section describes how to clean the machine such as the machine exterior, document
cover, document feeder, and document glass.

WARNING
When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it.
Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product. Never
use aerosol cleaners to avoid catching fire and explosion.
Maintenance

CAUTION
When cleaning this product, always switch off and unplug it. Access to a live
machine interior may cause electric shock.

3 Cleaning the Exterior

The following describes how to clean the exterior of the machine.
Important
z Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile liquids or spray insect repellent on the machine as they
might discolor, deform, or crack covers.
z Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or damage
documents during copying.

1 Wipe the exterior with a firmly wrung soft cloth moistened with water.

Important
z Do not use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent.

Note
z If you cannot remove the dirt easily, gently wipe the machine with a soft cloth moistened with a small
amount of neutral detergent.

2 Wipe off any excess water with a soft cloth.

96
 Cleaning the Machine

Cleaning the Interior (LED Printheads)

The following describes how to clean the interior (LED printheads) of the machine.
Normally, clean the LED printheads when you replace the waste toner container. However,
if you have image quality problems such as white or colored stripes appearing on copied or
printed outputs, clean the LED printheads.
Important
z Clean the LED printheads periodically when you replace the waste toner container.

1 Make sure that the machine is not operating, and open the front cover.

Maintenance
3
2 Turn the lock lever counterclockwise to unlock the waste toner container. While holding
down the tabs on the top of the waste toner container, lay the container down toward you
and then pull out the container upward at an angle.

97
 Maintenance

3 Remove the cleaning bar from the back side of the front cover, and then clean each of the
LED printheads once with the bar.
Insert the cleaning bar into each slot until it stops, and then slowly slide the bar back out.
Maintenance

4 Return the cleaning bar to the back side of the front cover.

5 Align the dents on the bottom of the waste toner container with the tabs on the machine.

6 Raise the waste toner container toward the inside of the machine until it clicks into place.

98
 Cleaning the Machine

7 Close the front cover.

Note
z If the front cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine will remain paused.

Cleaning the Touch Screen

The following describes how to clean the touch screen.

1 Wipe only the LCD area with a soft cloth moistened with neutral detergent or alcohol.

Maintenance
3
Important
z
When you moisten the cloth with neutral detergent or alcohol, do not allow the excess liquid to drip down
from the cloth. If the cloth is moistened with the excess liquid, wring the cloth gently before wiping the LCD
area.
z Do not use any volatile liquids on the machine such as benzene and paint thinner, or insect repellent as these
may discolor, deform, or crack the machine exterior.
z Cleaning the touch screen with an excessive force may cause the screen to be damaged. Wipe the screen
gently.

Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass

If the document cover and document glass are dirty, streaks or smears may appear on
copies, faxes, or scanned documents and the machine may not properly detect document
sizes.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the document cover and the document glass
about once a month.
Important
z Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint or coating on
plastic parts.
z Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or damage
documents during copying, faxing, or scanning.

99
 Maintenance

1 Wipe the document cover with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt, and
then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Maintenance

Important
z Do not use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent.

Note
z If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the document cover with a soft cloth moistened with a small
amount of neutral detergent.

3 2 Wipe the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt, and
then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.

Important
z Do not use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent.

Note
z If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with a small
amount of neutral detergent.

Cleaning the White Chute and Constant Velocity Transport Glass

If the White Chute or constant velocity transport glass become soiled, smudges may
appear on copies, faxes, or scanned documents and the machine may not properly detect
document sizes.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the White Chute and constant velocity transport
glass about once a month.
Important
z Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint or coating on
plastic parts.
z Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or damage
documents during copying, faxing, or scanning.

100
 Cleaning the Machine

1 Wipe the White Chute with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt, and then
wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.

Maintenance
Important
z Do not press the film with an excessive force as it can be easily damaged.

Important
z Do not use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent.

Note
z If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the film with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of
neutral detergent.
3
2 Wipe the constant velocity transport glass with a soft cloth moistened with water to
remove any dirt, and then wipe it with a soft dry cloth.

Important
z
Do not use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent.

Note
z
If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the glass with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of
neutral detergent.

Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers

If the document feeder rollers become soiled, smudges may appear on copies, faxes, or
scanned documents and paper jams may occur.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the document feeder roller about once a month.
Important
z Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint or coating on
plastic parts.
z Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or damage
documents during copying, faxing, scanning, or printing.

101
 Maintenance

1 Pull up the knob on the document feeder top cover, and open the document feeder top
cover completely.
Maintenance

Note
z When you fully open the cover, it enters a fixed position. Open the cover gently.

2 While turning the rollers, wipe them with a soft cloth moistened with water.

Important
z
Do not use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent.
z
Use a cloth firmly wrung to prevent water drops from falling into the machine. If water gets into the machine,
it may cause the machine to malfunction.

Note
z If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the rollers with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of
neutral detergent.

3 Close the document feeder left cover until it clicks into place, and confirm that there is no
space between the near or far side of the cover and the document feeder.

102
 Executing Calibration

Executing Calibration
The machine can automatically calibrate colors using the calibration chart when the
reproducibility of density or color in copies and prints deteriorates. The machine can adjust
the gradation for each screen type set in the machine in advance.
The following three types of screen are available.
Note
z We recommend executing auto calibration for all three screen types. When the adjustment for one screen
type is complete, specify the next screen type and repeat the procedure.
z If color is not calibrated despite the periodic execution of auto calibration, contact our Customer Support
Center.
z Confirm the settings of the following items under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Copy Service Settings] >

Maintenance
[Copy Defaults] in the System Administration mode before executing auto calibration:
z Lighten/Darken: Normal
z Contrast: Normal
z Sharpness: Normal
z

z
Saturation: Normal
Color Balance: 0, 0, 0
3
z
Color Shift: Normal
z After finishing the auto calibration, change the settings of [Copy Defaults] if necessary. For information on
[Copy Defaults], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.183).
z During auto calibration, the machine cannot receive print jobs and faxes.

„ [Copy Job]
Calibrates the screen for copying.

„ [Print Job 1]
For PCL print drivers
- Calibrates the screen used for the functions ([Image Quality], [Image Adjustment
Mode], and [Image Types]) set in the [Color Options] tab.
- Calibrates the screen when [Auto Screening], [Fineness], or [Standard] is selected for
[Screen] in the [Advanced] tab.
For PostScript print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [High Quality] for [Image Quality] and [Auto Screening],
[Fineness], or [Standard] for [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is selected.
- Calibrates the screen when [High Speed] for [Image Quality] and [Fineness] or
[Standard] for [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is selected.

„ [Print Job 2]
For PCL print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [Gradation] is selected for [Screen] in the [Advanced] tab.
- Calibrates the screen when [Print Page Mode] is enabled in the [Advanced] tab.
For PostScript print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [High Speed] of [Image Quality] and [Auto Screening] or
[Fineness] of [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is selected.
The following describes how to perform calibration.

103
 Maintenance

1 Select [Calibration] on the Services Home screen.

If [Calibration] is not displayed, follow the procedure below.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

Maintenance

2) Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode,
and select [Enter].

Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Note
z When the Services Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen, press the <Services Home> button.

4) Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Image Quality Adjustment].

2 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 ＃

Note
z You also can select [Calibration] on the Services Home screen. Selecting [Calibration] on the Services Home
screen shows the screen in step 6.

104
 Executing Calibration

3 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Image Quality Adjustment].

4 Select [Calibration].

Maintenance
3
5 Set [Screen Type], [Paper Supply], and [Target].

Note
z
For Target, select from [Copy & Print Jobs], [Copy Jobs Only], [Print Jobs Only], and [None]. When [Copy &
Print] is not selected for [Target], calibration is not valid for the mode not listed in [Target].

6 Select [Start].

Note
z The message "Outputting the Calibration Chart... - Copy Job" appears and the document for calibration
(Calibration Chart) is printed.

7 Align the magenta patch (squares printed at the top and bottom of the Calibration Chart)
of the printed Calibration Chart against the left side of the document glass, and load the
chart facing down on the document glass.

Note
z Place the Calibration Chart on the document glass.

105
 Maintenance

8 Place at least five sheets of white paper on the Calibration Chart to cover the Chart and
close the document cover.

9 Select [Start].
Maintenance

The message “Calibration in progress. - Copy Job” appears and the machine automatically
calibrates the colors. It takes about 10 seconds to complete calibration.
A screen showing the result appears.

10
3 Select [Confirm].

11 To continue calibration for other screen types, repeat steps 3 to 8.

12 Select [Close] repeatedly until the Services Home screen is displayed.

Note
z When you configure settings under [System Settings] or [Setup] and then press the <Services Home> button,
the screen directly goes back to the Services Home screen.

13 Copy or print to confirm the image quality.

Note
z During auto calibration, the machine cannot receive print jobs and faxes.

106
 Printing a Report/List

Printing a Report/List
You can print a report/list to check the settings and communication status.
Note
z When the <Data> indicator is not lit, you cannot print the Stored Documents List.

Reference
z
For information on the types of report/list, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

Maintenance
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 ＃

C 3

2 Select [Print Reports].

Note
z If [Print Reports Button] under [Reports] is set to [Disabled], the [Print Reports] button appears only when the
[Tools] button is displayed on the Services Home screen. For more information on Reports, refer to "Reports"
(P.164).
z
If you want to print [Billing Data List] or [Auditron Report (Fax Jobs)], insert a card to the machine before
instructing print.

3 Select the service that you want a report or list for.

4 Select a report or list to print, and then press the <Start> button.

Note
z The reports or lists displayed on the screen vary depending on the machine configuration.

107
 Maintenance

Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid

User ID
When the Private Charge Print feature is used, all the print jobs with a User ID, regardless of
its validity, are stored with the Private Charge Print feature. The system administrator can
set the expiration date and can set up the machine to delete the expired jobs
automatically, or manually delete them.
This section describes how to delete documents with an invalid User ID stored with the
Private Charge Print feature.
Reference
z For more information on the Private Charge Print feature, refer to "Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs", and
Maintenance

"Computer Operations" > "Print" in the User Guide.

z For more information on how to set the period of time save jobs, refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.271).

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

3 2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode,
and select [Enter].

Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Press the <Job Status> button.

4 Select the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab.

5 Select [Private Charge Print].

6 Select the User ID to delete, and then select [Job List].

7 Select the job to delete, and then select [Delete].

108
 Setting Restore Tool

Setting Restore Tool

Setting Restore Tool backs up the settings data of the machine to a network-connected
computer to prevent the loss of data resulting from the malfunction of the machine’s hard
disk.
The feature is designed to restore data to the machine after the hard disk is replaced.
For more information on Setting Restore Tool, contact our Customer Support Center.
Note
z You can back up the setting data of the machine when the hard disk and the Ethernet interface are installed
on the machine.
The following data can be backed up on the computer:

Maintenance
z
Address Book
z Folder (except for document files)
z User account list
z
Job Flow
z Stored Programming
3
z Job log
z
Error log
z Auditron log
z Other information such as user setting data
Users cannot replace the hard disk by themselves. When replacing the hard disk, contact
our Customer Support Center.

109
Maintenance Maintenance

110
4
Machine Status
4
 Machine Status

Overview of Machine Status

You can check machine status and the number of printed pages on the screen. You can also
print various reports/lists to check the job history, settings and registered information.

1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9
Machine Status

0 ＃

You can check the following information on the [Machine Status] screen:

„ Machine Information
4 You can check the machine configuration, paper tray status, and hard disk overwriting
status.
You can also change or set print modes, and check the number of pages printed per meter
or per user.
You can also print various reports/lists to check the job history, settings and registered
information.
Note
z [Overwrite Hard Disk] is displayed when the hard disk is installed in the machine. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Reference
z
For more information, refer to "Machine Information" (P.113).

„ Faults
You can check the information on errors that occurred on the machine.
Reference
z
For more information, refer to "Faults" (P.132).

„ Supplies
You can check the status of consumables.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Supplies" (P.133).

„ Billing Information
You can check the number of pages printed by meter.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Billing Information" (P.134)".

112
 Machine Information

Machine Information
On the [Machine Information] screen, you can check the machine configuration and paper
tray status, print various reports/lists, and change and set print mode settings.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
"General Information" (P.113)
"Paper Tray Status" (P.114)
"Print Reports" (P.115)
"Automatically Printed Reports/Lists" (P.125)
"Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.127)
"Print Mode" (P.127)

Machine Status
"Fax Receiving Mode" (P.130)

1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

2 On the [Machine Information] screen displayed, you can check the machine status.

General Information
On the [General Information] screen, you can check the serial number of the machine,
machine configuration, and software version.

1 Check the general information.

„ Website
Tells you whom to contact when making inquiries about maintenance and operation.

„ Machine Serial Number

Indicates the serial number of the machine.

„ Current System Software

Indicates the current system software.

„ IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the machine.

„ Machine Configuration
Displays the [Machine Configuration] screen.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "[Machine Configuration] Screen" (P.114).

113
 Machine Status

„ Software Version
Displays the [Software Version] screen.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "[Software Version] Screen" (P.114).

[Machine Configuration] Screen

You can check the machine configuration.

1 Select [Machine Configuration].

2 Check the machine configuration on the screen displayed.

Machine Status

4 Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.
z Scroll the list by drag or flick operation to switch the screen to be displayed. For information on how to drag or
flick, refer to "Product Overview" > "Touch Screen" in the User Guide.

[Software Version] Screen

You can check the software version.

1 Select [Software Version].

2 Check the software versions.

Paper Tray Status

You can check the paper trays set on the machine. On the screen, you can check the
following items:
z Status
z % Full
z
Size
z Paper Type

114
 Machine Information

1 Select [Paper Tray Status].

2 Check the status of the paper trays.

Print Reports

Machine Status
The following describes how to print a report and a list.
Note
z The items displayed vary depending on the optional features installed.

1 Select [Print Reports].

4
2 Select the type of a report or a list to print.

Note
z
The screen as shown on the right appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the Services Home screen.

Job Status/Activity Report

1 Select [Job Status/Activity Report].

Note
z To display the [Job Status/Activity Report] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select
[Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Job Status/Activity Report].

2 Select a report or a list to print.

3 Press the <Start> button.

115
 Machine Status

„ Job History Report

You can check the status or result of each job. Up to 200 latest jobs can be printed. Select a
report to print from [All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Folder Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax
Jobs], [File Transfer Jobs], or [Job Flow & File Transfer Jobs].
Selecting [Include Child Jobs] check box prints each related job on each line. Deselecting
this check box prints the multiple related jobs (such as job flow jobs) on one line.
You can also set up the machine to automatically print a [Job History Report] every 50 jobs.
Reference
z For information on the auto print of a job history report, refer to "Reports" (P.164). When you set the machine to print a job history
report automatically, the machine prints the results of all jobs.

„ Error History Report

You can print information on errors occurred in the machine. The latest 50 errors are
Machine Status

printed.

„ Activity Report
You can check whether transmissions completed successfully or not. The remote terminal
name and the result and status are recorded by sorting into incoming or outgoing fax.
The following information is not included in the Activity Report.
4 z Redialed transmissions and pollings.
z Deleted documents that were waiting to be transmitted.
z
When the power is shut off, or when a system error occurs during an activity.
You can also set up the machine to automatically print a [Job History Report] every 50 jobs.
Note
z
The use of ApeosWare Log Management (sold separately) allows you to import the contents of an Activity
Report to a computer. For information on ApeosWare Log Management or ApeosWare Accounting Service,
refer to the manuals provided with the software.

Reference
z For information on the settings, refer to "Reports" (P.164).
z For more information about the Activity Report, refer to"Activity Report" (P.746).

Copy Reports

1 Select [Copy Reports]

Note
z To display the [Copy Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Copy Reports].

2 Select [Configuration Report].

3 Press the <Start> button.

116
 Machine Information

„ Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy
settings of the machine.
Note
z
The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy Reports], [Printer
Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].

Printer Reports

1 Select [Printer Reports].

Note
z To display the [Printer Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Printer Reports].

Machine Status
2 Select a list to print.

Note
z The items displayed vary depending on the options installed.

3 Press the <Start> button.

You can print the following items when printer related options are installed.
When Adobe® PostScript® 3TM Kit (optional) is installed:

z
PostScript Logical Printers List z
PostScript Font List

„ Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy
settings of the machine with the report.
Note
z The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy Reports], [Printer
Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].

„ PCL Settings List

Prints the settings for the PCL printer.

„ PCL Macro List

Prints the list of forms registered for PCL.

„ PDF Settings List

Prints the settings configured in the PDF printer mode.

117
 Machine Status

„ TIFF/JPEG Settings List

Prints the settings configured in the TIFF and JPEG printer mode.

„ TIFF/JPEG Logical Printers List

Prints the list of logical printers created in the TIFF and JPEG printer mode.
Reference
z You can configure the setting for TIFF and JPEG logical printers using CentreWare Internet Services. For more information on the
settings, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services .

Important
z
To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

„ PostScript Logical Printers List

Prints the list of logical printers created in PostScript.
Machine Status

Reference
z You can configure the setting for PostScript logical printers using CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer to the
help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Important
z
To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
4 to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

„ ESC/P Settings List

Prints the settings configured in the ESC/P-K emulation mode.

„ ESC/P Logical Printers List

Prints the programming settings configured in the ESC/P-K emulation mode.

„ ESC/P User Defined List

Prints the list of the registered forms, logos, and patterns for ART IV, ESC/P and PC-PR201H.

„ HP-GL/2 Settings List

Prints the settings for the HP-GL®, HP-GL/2® and HP-RTL emulation modes.

„ HP-GL/2 Logical Printers List

Prints the stored programming settings for the HP-GL®, HP-GL/2®, and HP-RTLemulation
modes.

„ HP-GL/2 Palette List

Prints the sample list in 256 colors that can be set with the pen attribute on HP-GL® and
HP-GL/2® emulation modes.

„ KS Settings List
Prints the settings for the KS5843 emulation mode.

„ KSSM Settings List

Prints the settings for the KSSM emulation mode.

118
 Machine Information

„ KS5895 Settings List

Prints the settings for the KS5895 emulation mode.
Reference
z For information on KS5843/KSSM/KS5895 emulation mode, refer to the Administrator Guide for the Korean model.

„ Font List
Prints the list of fonts available on the machine.
Note
z
Information printed varies depending on the options installed.

„ PCL Font List

Prints the fonts available in PCL.

„ PostScript Font List

Machine Status
Prints the fonts available in PostScript.

„ DocuWorks Printer Settings List

Prints the settings for DocuWorks Direct Print.

Scan Reports 4
1 Select [Scan Reports].
Note
z
To display the [Scan Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Scan Reports].

2 Select a list to print.

3 Press the <Start> button.

„ Reports
You can print the Configuration Report, Scan/Fax Configuration Report, and Domain Filter
List. Select a list to print, and then press the <Start> button.
‹ Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy
settings of the machine.
Note
z
The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy Reports], [Printer
Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].

‹ Scan/Fax Configuration
You can check the settings configured for the Scan feature and the Fax feature.

119
 Machine Status

‹ Domain Filter List

You can check the settings configured for the domain which filters data transmissions.

„ Address Book
You can check the settings for the address numbers. When you specify a range of address
numbers, the list of settings for the specified address numbers is printed. Each page
contains the settings information on 50 address numbers.

1 Select [Address Book].

2 Specify a range of address numbers to print.

Machine Status

4 3 Press the <Start> button.

Fax Reports

1 Select [Fax Reports].

Note
z
To display the [Fax Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Fax Report].

2 Select a list to print.

3 Press the <Start> button.

„ Reports
You can print the Configuration Report, Scan/Fax Configuration Report, Folder Selector List,
Inbound Fax Spam List, Domain Filter List, and VoIP Gateway List. Select a list to print, and
then press the <Start> button.

120
 Machine Information

„ Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy
settings of the machine.
Note
z
The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy Reports], [Printer
Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].

‹ Scan/Fax Configuration
You can check the settings configured for the Fax feature and the Scan feature.
Note
z
The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy Reports], [Printer
Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].

‹ Folder Selector List

You can check the settings for the Folder Sorting feature.

Machine Status
‹ Inbound Fax Spam List
You can check the settings for the G3 ID (telephone numbers) for which fax reception is
restricted.
‹ Domain Filter List
You can check the settings configured for the domain which filters data transmissions. 4
‹ VoIP Gateway List
You can check the registration for VoIP gateways.

„ Address Book
You can check the settings for the address numbers (speed dial), fax group recipients, and
relay stations.
When you specify a range of address numbers, the lists of settings for the specified address
numbers and relay stations are printed. Each page contains the settings information on 50
address numbers.
Reference
z For information on how to register speed dial and fax group recipients, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.289) and "Create Fax
Group Recipients" (P.299).
Selecting [Address Book] displays the screen for specifying a range of address numbers.
Select a range of numbers, and then press the <Start> button.

‹ Fax Group Recipients

You can print the list of settings for Fax Group Recipients.
‹ Select All
You can print the lists of settings for all address numbers, fax group recipients, and relay
stations.

121
 Machine Status

„ Fax Comments List

You can check the registered comments to use on fax cover sheets.

„ Billing Data List

You can check the registration status of the billing data.
Note
z [Billing Data List] is displayed when [Fax/Internet Fax Service] is set to [Enable Accounting] under
[Accounting] > [Accounting Type] > [Local Accounting] > [Auditron Mode].
Selecting [Billing Data List] displays the screen for specifying a range of address numbers.
Select a range of numbers, and then press the <Start> button.
Machine Status

‹ Select All
4 You can print the list of all billing data.

Folder List
Prints the list of folder settings and the procedure for saving files to folders.
Note
z
[Folder List] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the Services Home screen.

Reference
z For information on how to create a folder, refer to "Create Folder" (P.276).

1 Select [Folder List].

Note
z
To display the [Folder List] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Folder List].

2 Select a range of folder numbers to print.

3 Press the <Start> button.

Job Counter Report

Prints the counter report for each job. You can check the breakdown of the number of
actual use of the machine by feature (such as the number of pages printed and the number

122
 Machine Information

of times used) and cumulative time when the machine is used (such as runtime, standby
time, Low Power mode, Sleep mode, and power-off time) by minutes on the Job Counter
Report.
Note
z [Job Counter Report] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the Services Home screen.

1 Select [Job Counter Report].

Note
z To display the [Job Counter Report] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Job Counter Report].

2 Select [Job Counter Report].

Machine Status
4
3 Press the <Start> button.

Auditron Reports
You can print an auditron report by each user. Note that the content on the screen differs
depending on whether the Auditron mode for services is enabled or not.
Note
z
[Auditron Reports] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the Services Home screen.
z You cannot output the report to a file. To output a report to a file, use ApeosWare Log Management (sold
separately) or ApeosWare Accounting Service (sold separately).

„ When [Accounting Type] is set to other than [Local Accounting]

When [Accounting Type] of each service is set to other than [Local Accounting], the
following screen appears, allowing you to print a Meter Report (Print Jobs).

1 Select [Auditron Reports].

Note
z
To display the [Job Counter Report] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Auditron Reports].

2 Select [Meter Report (Print Jobs)].

123
 Machine Status

3 Press the <Start> button.

‹ Meter Report (Print Jobs)
You can check the total number of printed pages and sheets of paper used for each client
(job owner). [Meter Report (Print Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is
initialized.

„ When [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting]

When [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting], the [Auditron Reports] screen
appears. You can print the auditron report per user for the services of which the Auditron
mode is set to [Enable Accounting].
Reference
z For information on enabling the Auditron feature for each service, refer to "Accounting" (P.145).
Machine Status

1 Select [Auditron Reports].

Note
z
To display the [Auditron Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Auditron Reports].

2 Select an auditron report to print.

4

3 Select a range of user numbers to print.

Note
z
Selecting [Select All] selects all users.

4 Press the <Start> button.

‹ Auditron Report (Copy Jobs)
You can check the total number of pages copied and printed on the machine. If the limit is
set for the number of pages or colors that can be scanned, you can also check the limit
value. [Auditron Report (Copy Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is
initialized.
Note
z
[No.] displayed on the report is the User Administration Number assigned when a user is registered under
[Accounting] or [Authentication/Security Settings].

124
 Machine Information

‹ Auditron Report (Print Jobs)

You can check the total number of printed pages and sheets of paper used for each client
(job owner). [Auditron Report (Print Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is
initialized.
Important
z When [Print Service] is set to [Disable Accounting] in [Auditron Mode] under [Accounting Type], [Meter Report
(Print Jobs)] is displayed instead of [Auditron Report (Print Jobs)]. For more information on Meter Report
(Print Jobs), refer to "Meter Report (Print Jobs)" (P.124).

Note
z [No.] displayed on the report is the User Administration Number assigned when a user is registered under
[Accounting] or [Authentication/Security Settings].

‹ Auditron Report (Scan Jobs)

You can check the total number of pages scanned with the machine. If the limit is set for
the number of pages that can be scanned, you can also check the limit value. [Auditron

Machine Status
Report (Scan Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is initialized.
Note
z
[No.] displayed on the report is the User Administration Number assigned when a user is registered under
[Accounting] or [Authentication/Security Settings].

‹ Auditron Report (Fax Jobs)

You can check the total number of fax transmissions/receptions and the total number of 4
pages transmitted for each user.
Note
z
[No.] displayed on the report is the User Administration Number assigned when a user is registered under
[Accounting] or [Authentication/Security Settings].

Automatically Printed Reports/Lists

Some reports/lists related to the Fax and Scan services can be printed only automatically.
The following describes reports/lists that can be printed automatically.

Transmission Report - Job Undelivered

The report is automatically printed when a transmission of scanned data to a computer on
a network or a transmission of scanned data by e-mail fails. When a fax, the IP Fax (SIP), or
the Internet Fax transmission fails, this report is also printed. You can check a thumbnail of
the scanned data and its transmission result.
You can set not to print out the Transmission Report - Undelivered automatically.
Reference
z For information on setting whether to print the report for e-mails automatically, refer to "Scan File Transfer Report" (P.165).
z For information on setting whether to print the report for faxes automatically, refer to "Transmission Report -
Job Undelivered" (P.165).

Transmission Report
The report is automatically printed when a transmission of scanned data to a computer on
a network or a transmission of scanned data by e-mail succeeds. When a fax, the IP Fax

125
 Machine Status

(SIP), or the Internet Fax transmission succeeds, this report is also printed. You can check a
thumbnail of the scanned data and its transmission result.
You can set not to print out the Transmission Report - Undelivered automatically.
Reference
z For information on setting whether to print the report for e-mails automatically, refer to "Scan File Transfer Report" (P.165).
z For information on setting whether to print the report for faxes automatically, refer to "Transmission Report -
Job Undelivered" (P.165).

Folder Report
You can confirm a document that is stored in a folder.
Reference
z For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Folder Report" (P.165).
Machine Status

Broadcast Report
You can check the result of a broadcast transmission. The recipients and transmission
result/status are recorded.
If you set to print this report automatically, it is printed each time a broadcast transmission
is completed.
4 Reference
z
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report" (P.165).

Multi-poll Report
You can check the result of a multi-poll communication (polling from multiplerecipients).
The remote terminal name and transmission result/status are recorded.
If you set to print this report automatically, it is printed each time a multi-polltransmission
is completed.
Reference
z For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report" (P.165).

File Transfer Report - Fax Server

This report is output after image data scanned by the machine is sent to a Server Fax server
via a network. It contains the scanned document image and the transmission result. To
have the report printed, enter the System Administration mode.
Reference
z
For information on specifying whether or not to have the report printed automatically, refer to "Scan File Transfer Report (Fax
Server)" (P.166).

Job Flow Error Report

This report notifies job flow errors. The date and time of the error occurred and the error
codes are printed.
You can set not to print out the Job Flow Error Report automatically.
Reference
z For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Job Flow Error Report" (P.166).

126
 Machine Information

Overwrite Hard Disk

You can check the overwriting status of the hard disk. "Overwriting" indicates that the
overwriting is in progress. "Standby" indicates that the overwriting is completed.
Note
z
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.
z [Overwrite Hard Disk] appears when [Overwrite Hard Disk] is enabled under [Authentication/Security
Settings]. For more information, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.325).

1 Select [Overwrite Hard Disk].

2 Check the overwriting status of the hard disk.

Machine Status
4
Print Mode
You can print the programming settings configured in the ESC/P-K emulation mode and
retrieve the programming.
Note
z
The items displayed vary depending on the options installed.

1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

2 Select [Print Mode].

3 Select [Off-line] or [On-line].

„Off-line
The machine does not accept data from a computer. Any data being sent is cancelled and
not printed.

„On-line
The printer accepts data from a computer.

4 Select a printer language to set a print mode.

127
 Machine Status

5 Set each item.

Note
z The items displayed vary depending on the printer language.

Retrieve Programming
Machine Status

You can retrieve and use settings registered in memory.

1 Select [Retrieve Programming].

2 Select the memory number to use.

„ Factory Defaults
You can use the factory default settings.

„ Custom Settings
Displays the numbers stored in the memory.

Programming
You can check or change the value set for the print mode item number.
Reference
z For the item numbers that can be configured in each mode menu, refer to "ESC/P-K Emulation Settings" (P.660), "PDF Direct Print
Settings" (P.677), "PCL Emulation Settings" (P.683) and "HP-GL/2 Emulation Settings" (P.690).

1 Select [Programming].

2 Enter the item number of the feature to set in [Item Number] with the numeric keypad.

128
 Machine Information

3 Select [Confirm]. The current setting value appears.

4 Select [Change Value].

5 Enter [New Value] with the numeric keypad.

Machine Status
Select [Save].

Store/Delete Programming
For ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2 emulations, you can register settings in memory.
You can register up to 20 print modes for ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2 emulations.
4
1 Select [Store/Delete Programming].

2 Select [Store Current Selections] or [Delete].

„Store Current Selections

Stores the current selections. If you select a number already used, its settings will be
overwritten with the new settings. The overwritten settings cannot be restored.

„Delete
Select this to delete a programming.
Important
z Deleted numbers cannot be restored.

3 Select the memory number to store or to delete.

Default Programming
You can start the machine using the settings stored in memory as default settings.

1 Select [Default Programming].

129
 Machine Status

2 Select [Factory Defaults] or [Custom Settings].

„Factory Defaults
You can use the factory default settings.

„Custom Settings
Machine Status

Displays the numbers stored in memory.

3 When you select [Custom Settings], select a memory number to use.

4 Select [Save].

4 Password
For PDF Direct Print, if a password is set for files, set the password here in advance. PDF files
can be printed only when the passwords assigned and entered are the same.
You can use up to 32 characters for the password.

1 Press [Password].

2 Enter a password of up to 32 single-byte characters with the keyboard displayed, and select
[Save].

Fax Receiving Mode

You can set a mode for receiving faxes.
Note
z
As for IP fax (SIP), the machine always receives faxes automatically.

Reference
z For information on auto receive and manual receive, refer to "Fax" > "Receiving Faxes" in the User Guide.

1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

2 Select [Fax Receiving Mode].

130
 Machine Information

3 Select a fax receiving mode

„Manual Receive
The machine manually receives faxes from a remote machine. This mode is convenient to
confirm the sender or use an external telephone before receiving faxes.

„Auto Receive
The machine automatically receives faxes.

4 Select [Save].

Machine Status
4

131
 Machine Status

Faults
This section describes how to check the information on errors that occurred on the machine.
The error history report shows the list of the latest 50 errors. The items printed include the
date and time, error code, and error category.
The following describes how to print the error history report.

1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

2 Select the [Faults] tab.

Machine Status

4 3 Select [Error History Report].

4 Press the <Start> button.

Note
z You can also access [Error History Report] under [Machine Information] > [Print Reports] >[Job Status/Activity
Report].
z If [Print Reports Button] under [Reports] is set to [Disabled], the [Error History Report] button does not appear
on the screen. For more information on reports, refer to "Reports" (P.164).

132
 Supplies

Supplies
You can check the status of consumables on the [Supplies] screen. The status of
consumables is shown as "OK", "Replace Soon (Order Now)", or "Replace Now".
The following describes the procedure to check the status of consumables.
Reference
z For information on replacing consumables, refer to "Replacing Consumables" (P.78).

1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

2 Select the [Supplies] tab and confirm the status of the toners.

Machine Status
4
Note
z Pressing a supply name displays a screen about the status of the supply.

3 Select [Other Consumables] from the drop-down menu, and confirm the status of the
consumables.
Important
z If you replace a toner cartridge with a partially used toner cartridge, the displayed status may differ from the
actual remaining amount. When you replace toner cartridges, we recommend that you use new ones.

Note
z
Pressing a supply name displays a screen about the status of the supply.
z The items displayed vary depending on the options installed.

133
 Machine Status

Billing Information
On the [Billing Information] screen, you can check the number of pages printed per meter
or user.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
"Billing Information" (P.134)
"User Account Billing Information" (P.135)

1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

2 Select the [Billing Information] tab.

Machine Status

4
Billing Information
You can check the total number of copies and pages printed by individual meters.

1 Select [Billing Information].

2 On the screen, check each meter.

Note
z [Previous meter reading] can be displayed when using EP system. For more information on EP system, refer to
"EP System" (P.749).

„ Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the machine.

„ Color Impressions
Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in full color.

„ Black Impressions
Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white,and pages faxed.

134
 Billing Information

„ Color Large Impressions

Displays the total number of pages printed in large-size full color.

„ Black Large Impressions

Displays the total number of pages printed in large-size black and white.

„ Total Impressions
Displays the total number of Color Impressions and Black Impressions.
Note
z When print data resulting from color conversion using an ICC profile, for example, on the application is
printed at Auto (Color/B/W), even documents that appear in black-and-white on the monitor are printed in
color. In this case, Color Impressions is used for counting the number of prints.

User Account Billing Information

Machine Status
You can check the number of pages printed by user.
Note
z [User Account Billing Information] is displayed when the [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting].

Reference
z
For more information on the Auditron mode, refer to "Accounting" (P.145).
4
1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

„To check the billing meter of a currently authenticated user ID

1) Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen, and
select [Enter].

When a password is required, select [Next] and enter the user’s passcode, and select
[Enter].

2) Press the <Machine Status> button.

„To check the system administrator meter

1) Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].

When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

2) Press the <Machine Status> button.

135
 Machine Status

2 Select the [Billing Information] tab.

3 Select [User Account Billing Information].

4 Select a meter to check.

Machine Status

4
Note
z
The meters are displayed only for the features set to [Enable Accounting] in the Auditron mode.

„ Meter (Copy Jobs)

Displays the number of pages copied.

„ Meter (Scan Jobs)

Displays the number of pages scanned.

„ Meter (Print Jobs)

Displays the number of pages printed.
Note
z [Meter (Print Jobs)] is not displayed for the system administrator.

136
5
Tools
5
 Tools

System Settings Procedure

To change or customize the system settings, enter the System Administration mode.
This section describes the basic procedures for system settings.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Step1 Entering System Administration Mode" (P.138)
"Step2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode" (P.138)
"Step3 Selecting [Tools]" (P.139)
"Step4 Selecting a Setting Item on the [Tools] Screen" (P.139)
"Step5 Setting a Feature" (P.142)
"Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode" (P.142)

Step1 Entering System Administration Mode

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button or the login information field on the touch screen.
Tools

5 1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 ＃

Step2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode

To enter the system administration mode, enter the system administrator's user ID. If
[Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login] is set to [On] under [Tools] > [Authentication/
Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Passcode Policy], you need to enter the passcode.
We recommend that you change the system administrator's user ID and passcode
immediately after installing the machine.
Reference
z For more information on how to change the passcode, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.313).

138
 System Settings Procedure

1 Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and then select [Enter].

Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".
z The screen may differ depending on the settings of the machine.
z The <Log In/Out> button is lit when the machine enters the system administration mode.

Step3 Selecting [Tools]

Tools
1 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.
5

Note
z When the Services Home screen is not displayed on the touch screen, press the <Services Home> button.

Step4 Selecting a Setting Item on the [Tools] Screen

On the [Tools] screen, select a setting item to set.
Reference
z For the items that can be selected on the [Tools] screen, refer to "Tools Menu List" (P.143)".

1 Select a tab to set.

139
 Tools

System Settings
You can set or change the default values of each service.

„ Common Service Settings

Allows you to configure the general settings of the machine.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Common Service Settings" (P.146).

„ Copy Service Settings

Allows you to configure the copy service settings such as copy feature defaults, copy
operation control, and button indications.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Copy Service Settings" (P.182).

„ Connectivity & Network Setup

Allows you to configure the network related settings such as ports and protocols.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Connectivity & Network Setup" (P.194).
Tools

„ Print Service Settings

5 Allows you to configure the print service settings such as memory settings and print
operation control.
Reference
z
For more information, refer to "Print Service Settings" (P.227).

„ Scan Service Settings

Allows you to configure the scan service settings such as scanner defaults and button
indications.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Scan Service Settings" (P.235).

„ Fax Service Settings

Allows you to configure the fax service settings such as setting defaults, fax control and
button settings.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Fax Service Settings" (P.245).

„ E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings

Allows you to configure the e-mail and Internet fax transmission specifications settings.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings" (P.262).

„ Address Book Settings

Allows you to configure the Address Book settings.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Address Book Settings" (P.266).

140
 System Settings Procedure

„ Folder Service Settings

Allows you to configure the settings relating to folders.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Folder Service Settings" (P.267).

„ Job Flow Service Settings

Allows you to configure the settings relating to Job Flow.
Job flow is a function to execute a series of registered operations.
Reference
z
For more information on Job Flow, refer to Job Flow Service Settings(P.269).

„ Media Print Service Settings

Allows you to configure the settings relating to Media Print (Text and Photo).
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Media Print Service Settings" (P.270).

„ Stored File Settings

Allows you to set how to delete files in a folder and print files stored in the machine.

Tools
Reference
z
For more information, refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.271).
5
„ Web Browser Setup
Allows you to configure the settings relating to the web browser when accessing a remote
destination server.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Web Browser Setup" (P.274).

Setup
You can create and change folders, job flow sheets, and the Address Book (speed dial
numbers).
Reference
z
For more information, refer to "Setup" (P.276).

Accounting
You can register users and configure the settings for account administration.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Accounting" (P.301).

Authentication/Security Settings
You can configure the authentication and security settings.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Authentication/Security Settings" (P.313).

141
 Tools

Step5 Setting a Feature

1 Select any feature.

Note
z Select a submenu from the [Group] list, and then select a feature from the [Features] list.
z Select[ ]or[ ]as required.

2 Select an item to set.

3 After setting the feature, select [Save].

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the Services Home screen is displayed.

Note
z If rebooting the machine is required to enable the new settings, when you select [Close] in the [Tools] screen,
a message may be displayed. Follow the message and reboot the machine. After the machine reboots, it exits
from the System Administration mode, and the <Log In/Out> button is unlit.
z When you configure settings under [System Settings] or [Setup] and then press the <Services Home> button,
the screen directly goes back to the Services Home screen.
Tools

Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode

5 1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

Note
z You can also log out by pressing the login information field on the touch screen, and then selecting [Logout].
z The <Log In/Out> button is unlit when the machine exits from the system administration mode.

142
 Tools Menu List

Tools Menu List

The following tables list the items that can be set on the [Tools] screen. Note that some
items may not appear depending on the configuration of the machine.

System Settings

Common Service Settings

z "Machine Clock/Timers" (P.146)

z "Power Saver Settings" (P.149)
z "Audio Tones" (P.150)
z "Screen/Button Settings" (P.152)
z "Paper Tray Settings" (P.157)
z Image Quality Adjustment(P.162)
z "Reports" (P.164)
z "Maintenance" (P.166)
z "Watermark" (P.170)

Tools
z "Force Annotation" (P.172)
z
"Print Universal Unique ID" (P.174)
z
"Notify Job Completion by E-mail" (P.174)
z

z
"Plug-in Settings" (P.175)
"Other Settings" (P.175) 5
Copy Service Settings

z
"Copy Tab - Features Allocation" (P.182)
z
"Preset Buttons" (P.183)
z
"Copy Defaults" (P.183)
z
"Copy Control" (P.189)
z
"Original Size Defaults" (P.192)
z
"Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.192)
z "Custom Colors" (P.193)
z "Annotations - Create Comments" (P.193)

Connectivity & Network Setup

z "Port Settings" (P.194)

z "Protocol Settings" (P.200)
z "Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.205)
z "Proxy Server Settings" (P.206)
z "EP Proxy Server Setup" (P.207)
z "SIP Settings" (P.209)
z "T.38 Settings" (P.212)
z "Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings" (P.212)
z "Remote Authentication/Directory Service" (P.214)
z "Security Settings" (P.220)
z "Other Settings" (P.226)

143
 Tools

Print Service Settings

z "Allocate Memory" (P.227)

z "Delete Form" (P.229)
z Register Google Cloud Print(P.229)
z Register Google Cloud Print(P.229)

Scan Service Settings

z "Screen Defaults" (P.235)

z "Scan Defaults" (P.236)
z "Scan to PC Defaults" (P.239)
z "Original Size Defaults" (P.240)
z "Output Size Defaults" (P.240)
z "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.241)
z "Other Settings" (P.241)

Fax Service Settings

Tools

z
"Screen Defaults" (P.245)
z
"Fax Defaults" (P.246)
5 z
"Fax Control" (P.248)
z
"Fax Received Options" (P.255)
z
"Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.257)
z
"Original Size Defaults" (P.257)
z
"Local Terminal Information" (P.258)
z
"Internet Fax Control" (P.259)

E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings

z "E-mail Control" (P.262)

Address Book Settings

z
"Address Book Settings" (P.266)

Folder Service Settings

z
"Folder Service Settings" (P.267)

Job Flow Service Settings

z "Job Flow Service Settings" (P.269)

144
 Tools Menu List

Media Print Settings

z "Media Print Service Settings" (P.270)

Stored File Settings

z "Stored File Settings" (P.271)

Web Browser Setup

z
"Web Browser Setup" (P.274)

Setup

z "Create Folder" (P.276)

Tools
z
"Stored Programming" (P.279)
z
"Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.279)
z
"Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword" (P.288)
z

z
"Add Address Book Entry" (P.289)
"Create Fax Group Recipients" (P.299)
5
z
"Add Fax Comment" (P.300)
z
"Paper Tray Attributes" (P.300)

Accounting

z
"Create/View User Accounts" (P.301)
z
"Reset User Accounts" (P.305)
z
"System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs)" (P.307)
z "Accounting Type" (P.307)
z "Accounting Login Screen Settings" (P.308)
z "Fax Billing Data" (P.310)

Authentication/Security Settings

z
"System Administrator Settings" (P.313)
z
"Authentication" (P.315)
z
"Allow User to Disable Active Settings" (P.324)
z
"Job Status Default" (P.324)
z
"Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.325)

145
 Tools

Common Service Settings

"Image Quality Adjustment" (P.162)
In [Common Service Settings], you can make settings relating to the machine’s common
features.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
"Machine Clock/Timers" (P.146)
"Power Saver Settings" (P.149)
"Audio Tones" (P.150)
"Screen/Button Settings" (P.152)
"Paper Tray Settings" (P.157)
Image Quality Adjustment(P.162)
"Reports" (P.164)
"Maintenance" (P.166)
"Watermark" (P.170)
Tools

"Force Annotation" (P.172)

"Print Universal Unique ID" (P.174)
5 "Notify Job Completion by E-mail" (P.174)
"Other Settings" (P.175)

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings].

Reference
z For information on how to display the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138)".

2 Select an item to set or change.

Machine Clock/Timers
You can set the machine clock or the time intervals of the machine to reset settings.

Date
Set the date in the system clock of the machine. The date set here will be printed on all lists
and reports.

1 Select [Date], and then select [Change Settings].

146
 Common Service Settings

2 Select a date format.

3 Specify [Year], [Month], and [Day].

4 Select [Save].

Time
Set the time in the system clock of the machine, using 12-hour or 24-hour format.
The time set here will be printed on all lists and reports.

Tools
1 Select [Time], and then select [Change Settings].

2 Select the time format. 5

3 When you select [12 Hour Clock], set [AM] or [PM].

4 Specify [Hours] and [Minutes].

5 Select [Save].

NTP Time Synchronization

You can synchronize the machine clock with a time server (NTP: Network Time Protocol),
receiving time information from the server.
To connect to a time server, select [On] for [NTP Time Synchronization], and set the IP
address of the time server in [Time Server Address].

Connection Interval
Select the time interval to connect to the time server.
You can select from 1 to 500 hours in 1 hour increments.

147
 Tools

Time Server Address

Set the server name or IP address of the time server.
Note
z For IPv4, enter the IP address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format, where "xxx" is a value between 0 and 255.
z
For IPv6, enter the IP address in xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx format, where "xxxx" is a hexadecimal
number.

Auto Clear
Specify the time lapsed without any operation until the machine resets the settings
automatically.
When you select [On], specify a value between 10 and 900 seconds in 1 second increments.
When you select [Off], the settings are not reset automatically.
Note
z When [Off] is selected, the machine will cancel the standby status and begin processing a document after
one minute has elapsed in anticipation of a job command.

Auto Job Release

Specify the time lapsed until the machine cancels the active job and starts the next job if
Tools

an error such as document or paper jams and running out of paper occurs during copying or
scanning. In that case, only those jobs not affected by the error can be processed.
5 When you select [On], specify a value in 1 minute increments. When you select [Off], the
active job is not canceled automatically.

Auto Print
Set the time period to start the next print job after the operation of the control panel
(except for the <Start> and <Clear All> buttons) after the end time of the Printer Lockout
Duration passed.
When you select [On], specify a value between 1 and 240 seconds in 1 second increments.
When you select [Off], printing starts immediately after the machine is ready.

Printer Lockout
You can set the machine to disable printing temporarily.
To use this feature, the [Lock Out Printer] button needs to be displayed on the right side of
the Services Home screen.
Reference
z For information on how to display the [Lock Out Printer] button on the Services Home screen, refer to "Customizing the Button
Layout" (P.33).
z You can configure detailed settings on CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer to the help
of CentreWare Internet Services.

148
 Common Service Settings

„ Allow User to Lock Out

Selecting [Lock Out Printer] on the Services Home screen temporarily disables printing.
[Release Printer] is displayed during the printer lockout duration. Selecting [Release Printer]
enables printing.
Note
z The printer lockout status is not released automatically even after the end time elapsed. To release the
printer lockout status, the control panel operation is required.
z The machine starts printing in accordance with the setting in [Auto Print] when [Release Printer] is selected.
Thus the printing may not start just after [Release Printer] is selected.
z When the [Allow User to Lock Out] check box is deselected, [Disable Auto Printing] in [Services Home -
Additional Features] is displayed as [(Not Assigned)].

Time Zone
Set the time difference from GMT between -12 and +12 hours.
Note
z GMT stands for Greenwich Mean Time.

Daylight Savings

Tools
You can set daylight saving time. During daylight saving time period, the machine moves
the clock forward by one hour.
Select from [Adjust Off], [Adjust by Day, Month & Time], and [Adjust by Month, Week, Day
of Week & Time]. 5
If you select [Adjust by Day, Month & Time], specify the month, day, and time for [Start
Date] and [End Date].
If you select [Adjust by Month, Week, Day of Week & Time], specify the month, week, day
of week, and time for [Start Date] and [End Date].

Warmer Mode
Set whether to enable the Warmer mode, which is used to prevent or reduce condensation
inside the machine.
Select [Disabled] or [Enabled].
If you select [Disabled], the machine will not enter the Warmer mode. To display a message
when condensation may have occurred, select [Condensation Alert].
If you select [Enabled], you can specify [Start Time] and [Duration] for the Warmer mode.
To automatically switch the Warmer mode to [Disabled] after a specified period of absence
of condensation has elapsed, select [Auto Disabled].
Note
z This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z During operation of the Warmer mode, the machine does not enter the Sleep mode.

Power Saver Settings

You can configure the following settings of Power Saver mode.

149
 Tools

Power Saver Timers

The Power Saver mode has two modes: the Low Power and Sleep modes. When a specified
period of time has elapsed, the machine switches to these modes in the following order to
reduce power consumption.
Last operation on the machine J Low Power mode J Sleep mode
Reference
z For more information on the setting procedure, refer to "Power Saver Mode" (P.23).

Note
z
You cannot configure the machine not to switch to the Low Power mode or the Sleep mode.

„ From Last Operation to Low Power Mode

Specify a time period between 1 and 240 minutes in 1 minute increments to enter the Low
Power mode after the last operation.

„ From Last Operation to Sleep Mode

Specify a time period between 1 to 240 minutes in 1 minute increments to enter the Sleep
mode after the last operation.
Note
Tools

z
Configure the [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] time to be same or longer than the [From Last Operation
to Low Power Mode] time.
z
The machine enters Sleep mode without entering Low Power mode when the [From Last Operation to Low
5 Power Mode] time is same as the [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] time.

Power Saver Deactivation

Select whether to disable the Power Saver mode fully or partially when exiting the mode.

„ Deactivate All
All devices of the machine exit the Power Saver mode.

„ Deactivate Partially As Required

Only the devices necessary for the operation exit the Power Saver mode.
You can select from [Always On] or [When Printing / Job Auto Processing].

Scheduled Power Off

You can set a time for the machine to be automatically turned off.

„ Disabled
Does not turn off the machine automatically.

„ Enabled
Set a time for the machine to be automatically turned off.
Note
z
[Disabled] is set by default.
z Even when [Enabled] is set, the machine will not be automatically turned off during an error (such as paper
jam) or processing (such as copying, printing, interruption).

Audio Tones
Select whether to sound an alarm when a job ends or a fault occurs.

150
 Common Service Settings

Control Panel Select Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when a button on the control panel is correctly selected.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Control Panel Alert Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when a button that cannot be selected is selected, or an error
occurs.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Base Tone
Set the volume for the base tone of the toggle button, which changes setting each time it is
pressed. The machine plays this sound when it exits the Interrupt mode.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Machine Ready Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when the machine is ready to copy or print, or powered on.

Tools
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Job Complete Tone 1, 2

Set the volume to be sounded when a job is completed normally.
5
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
You can select the target jobs to play the sound.
You can select the pitch of the sound.

Fault Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a job fails.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off]. You can
select the target jobs to play the sound.

Auto Clear Alert Tone

Set the volume to be sounded at five seconds before automatically returning to the initial
screen when [Auto Clear] is set to [On].
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Reference
z For information on Auto Clear, refer to "Auto Clear" (P.248).

Alert Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a fault such as a paper jam occurs, and the job remains
in failure state.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Out of Paper Warning Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when a job is suspended because there is no paper in a tray.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

151
 Tools

Low Toner Alert Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when the toner cartridge needs replacing.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Stored Programming Tone

Set the volume to be sounded while a stored program is being registered.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud].
This tone cannot be disabled.

Stored Programming Complete Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when the call of a stored programming registered is
completed.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Line Monitor Volume

When sending a fax, you can relay the sound on the telephone line until the connection is
Tools

made through the speakers on the machine. This is convenient for Fax Information Services
without using the telephone receiver.
You can select a volume level from [Soft], [Normal], or [Loud]. To disable the sound, select
5 [Off].

Ringing Volume
Set the volume to be sounded when the machine receives a fax.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Screen/Button Settings
Set screens and buttons.

Screen Default
Set the screen displayed after powering on the machine or canceling the Power Saver
mode.
Reference
z For more information on the setting procedure, refer to "Customizing the Control Panel" (P.29).

Screen After Auto Clear

Set the screen displayed after Auto Clear.
Reference
z For more information on the setting procedure, refer to "Setting the Screen After Auto Clear" (P.31).

Auto Display of Login Screen

When the Authentication feature is enabled on the machine, set whether or not to
automatically display the login screen after turning on the machine or canceling the Power
Saver mode.

152
 Common Service Settings

Custom Buttons 1 to 3
You can assign services such as Copy and Send from Folder to the custom buttons on the
control panel: Custom Button 1 to Custom Button 3.To leave a feature unassigned, select
[(Not Set)].
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Assigning Services to the Custom Buttons" (P.72).

One-touch Buttons
Set the number of address numbers that are assigned to the one touch buttons.

„ Type 1
Assigns the one touch buttons 1 to 52 to the address numbers 0001 to 0052, and buttons
53 and 54 to the stored programming jobs 1 and 2.

„ Type 2
Assigns the one touch buttons 1 to 45 to the address numbers 0001 to 0045, and buttons
46 to 54 to the stored programming jobs 1 to 9.
Note

Tools
z [Type 1] is selected by factory default.

Services Home 5
Set the layout of service buttons that appear on the Services Home screen.
Reference
z
For more information on how to set the buttons, refer to "Customizing the Button Layout" (P.33).

Services Home - Additional Features

Set the layout of additional feature buttons that appear on the Services Home screen.
Note
z If you do not want to display [Setup] as an additional feature button, select the [Show this in Admin mode]
check box. You can set or change settings with the machine only when it is in the System Administration
mode.

Reference
z
For more information on how to set the buttons, refer to "Customizing the Button Layout" (P.49).

Job Type on Job Status screen

Select the job types to be shown on the [Completed Jobs] screen under the [Job Status]
screen that is displayed when the <Job Status> button on the control panel is pressed.
Select from [All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Folder Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], or
[Job Flow & File Transfer Jobs].

Default Language
You can select the language displayed on the machine.
There are two ways of selecting the language: set in the System Administration mode and
set by local users.
z Setting in the System Administration mode

153
 Tools

The language set here is the standard language that is retained even when the machine
is powered off and on.
z
Setting in the local users mode
The language setting in [Language] in the Services Home screen is lost when the
machine is powered off.
Important
z When [English] is selected, only ASCII characters can be used.
z When you set [Language] to [English] on the Services Home screen and an address book entry or contents of
[Details] of Job Flow Sheets is entered in double-byte characters, the characters may not be displayed
properly.
z When you use CentreWare Internet Services to import a CSV file* including double-byte characters other than
a selected language, the characters in the file may be garbled or the import may fail.
*: CSV (Comma Separated Values) is a file format that is often used for saving data by spreadsheets and
database programs.

Screen Brightness
You can adjust the screen brightness of the control panel between -16 and +16.

Reconfirm E-mail Recipient

Tools

Select whether or not to display the screen to confirm e-mail recipients when sending e-
mails.
5 Select from [Confirmation Not Required], [Always Reconfirm Recipient], and [Reconfirm if
Multiple Recipients].

Reconfirm Fax/Internet Fax Recipient

„ First Tab - Reconfirm Recipients

Select from [Off], [Always Reconfirm Recipient], and [Reconfirm if Multiple Recipients].

„ Start Job at Other Tabs

Select from [Disabled] and [Enabled].
Note
z When you select [Start Disabled], you cannot confirm the e-mail recipients in other Tabs.

„ Reconfirm Recipient at Other Tabs

Select from [Off], [Always Reconfirm Recipient], and [Reconfirm if Multiple Recipients].
Note
z This item is not displayed when you select [Disabled] for [Start Job at Other Tabs].
z [Off] cannot be selected when you select [Reconfirm if Multiple Recipients] for [First Tab - Reconfirm
Recipients]. And [Off] and [Reconfirm if Multiple Recipients] cannot be selected when you select [Always
Reconfirm Recipient] for [First Tab - Reconfirm Recipients].

Reconfirm E-mail Recipient Button

Set whether or not to display a screen to check available memory when sending e-mails.
Select from [Disabled (Show Memory)] and [Enabled].

154
 Common Service Settings

Reconfirm Fax/Internet Fax Button

Set whether or not to display a screen to check available memory when sending faxes/
Internet faxes.
Select from [Disabled (Show Memory)] and [Enabled].

Screen After Inserting USB

Select whether or not to display the screen when the machine detects USB memory device
insertion, and also select the screen type at the time.
Select from [Off], [Store to USB], [Media Print - Text], [Media Print - Photos], and [Service
Selection Screen].
Note
z If you select [Service Selection Screen], the [USB Device Detected] screen is displayed when a USB memory
device is inserted. You can select [Store to USB] ,[Media Print - Text], or [Media Print - Photos].
z If a USB memory device is inserted when the machine is switched off, and then you switch on, the Services
Home screen is displayed.
z When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory slot during the Power Saver mode, the touch
screen does not light up. After exiting the Power Saver mode by pressing the <Power Saver> button, insert the
USB memory device again or select the feature to be used on the Services Home screen.

Tools
z If a commercially available Memory Card Reader is used and it is left inserted all the time, the screen is not
switched to the selected screen even when a medium is inserted into the slot of the Memory Card Reader.

Display Consumables Screen 5

Allows you to select whether or not to display the consumables status when a replacement
is required.

„ Off
Does not display the consumables status screen.

„ When power is switched on

Displays the consumables status screen at startup.

„ When Auto Clear is activated

Displays the consumables status screen when Auto Clear is executed.

Keyboard Input Restriction

Allows you to select whether or not to restrict the display of the virtual keyboard of the
machine. To prevent characters from being garbled when switching character sets, you can
limit input to ASCII characters. If you select [On (ASCII Only)], the keyboard displayed
shows ASCII characters only.

Operation of Up/Down Buttons

Allows you to whether or not to enable continuous scrolling when pressing the scroll
buttons.

155
 Tools

Flick and Double-tap

Set whether or not to operate the machine by flicking and double-tapping. Select from
[Disabled] or [Enabled].
Besides the operation method, the design of Services Home Screen and the display effect
of the screens vary depending on this setting.

Icon Style Button Style

Screen Operation /Display Effect Enabled Disabled

Menu Design Button
Icon Style
Tools

Style
Scroll Direction Horizontal Vertical

5 Flick to switch pages O -

Drag to switch pages O -
Preview Thumbnail View Tap to display the entire view O O
Flick to switch pages O -
Drag to switch pages O O
Entire View Flick to switch pages O -
Tap the previous/next previewed
O O
images to switch pages
Tap to switch whether to display the
page switching buttons or the O -
thumbnailed bar
Double-tap to move to enlarged
O -
view
Preview(Co Enlarged View Flick the enlarged image to move
O -
ntinued) the position to be displayed
Drag the enlarged image to move
O O
theposition to be displayed
Drag the slider to enlarge/ reduce
O O
the image size
Double-tap to enlarge/reduce the
O -
image size
Tap to switch whether to display the
O -
slider or the thumbnail bar
Drag to switch pages O -
O:Available -:Not available

156
 Common Service Settings

Double-Tap Interval
You can set the interval between two taps to be recognized as a double-tap by the machine.
Select from [Shorter], [Default], or [Longer].

Sys. Admin. Settings Security Warning

Set whether or not to display the security warning screen when the default values of system
administrator's user ID and passcode are used. The warning screen is displayed when
entering the System Administration mode on the control panel or on the CentreWare
Internet Services.
Select [Do Not Display Warning Screen] or [Display Warning Screen].

SNMP Configuration Security Warning

Set whether or not to display the security warning screen when the default values of SNMP
protocol's community name and authentication password are used. The warning screen is
displayed when entering the System Administration mode on the control panel or on the
CentreWare Internet Services.
Select [Do Not Display Warning Screen] or [Display Warning Screen].

Tools
Note
z You can set the SNMP protocol settings on CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer to the
help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Important 5
z
To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the Internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

Global IP Address Security Warning

Set whether or not to display the security warning screen when the Global IP Address is
used and [Login Type] is set to [No Login Required]. The warning screen is displayed when
entering the System Administration mode on the control panel or on the CentreWare
Internet Services.
Select [Do Not Display Warning Screen] or [Display Warning Screen].

Paper Tray Settings

Set the items related to the paper and trays, including the type of paper and tray priority.

Custom Paper Name/Color

You can name Custom Paper Types 1 to 5 which you can select in [Paper Type] and Custom
Paper Colors 1 to 5 which you can select in [Paper Color] of [Paper Tray Attributes].
You can use letters, numerals, and symbols of up to 24 characters for each name and color.
For example, you can use a name showing its usage, such as "Color" for colored paper, and
"Covers" for bond paper.
Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

157
 Tools

Paper Tray Attributes

You can set the size and type of paper loaded in trays.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.72).

„ Change Settings
Select this button, if you change the paper size for the tray or the setting of auto paper
selection.
When you load non-standard size paper in a tray, select [Custom Size], and specify the
width and length. When you load standard size paper in a tray, select [Auto Detect].
Important
z
Align the paper guides against the paper to prevent paper jams or errors. If the machine cannot detect a tray,
use Tray 5.

‹ Paper Type
Select the type of paper to load in the trays.
Reference
z For information about paper types available on the machine, refer to "Loadable Quantity and Weight for Supported Paper" (P.48).
Tools

‹ Paper Size
When using Trays 1 to 4, you can load both standard size paper and non-standard size
5 paper. When you load non-standard size paper, select [Custom Size], and then set the size
in the X (width) direction and in the Y (length) direction. Set the size in X (width) direction
between 182 and 432 mm and the Y (length) direction between 140 and 297 mm in 1 mm
increments. Select [Auto Detect] to use the standard size paper.
‹ Paper Color
Set the color of paper. The paper color selected here is displayed as the paper color on the
[Paper Supply] screen.
‹ Auto Paper Select
Set the condition for Auto Paper selection. When the color mode selected is used, Auto
Paper selection is enabled. Select from [All Colors], [Color], and [Black & White].
Automatic tray selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is
automatically selected by the machine for copying or printing.

Customize Paper Supply Screen

Select whether or not the setting items specified in [Paper Size] or [Auto Paper Select] under
[Paper Tray Attributes] are to be displayed on the [Paper Supply] screen.

„ Disabled
Does not display the items specified in [Paper Size].

„ Size Detection
Displays the setting in [Paper Size].

„ Usage (Auto Paper Select)

Displays the setting in [Auto Paper Select].

158
 Common Service Settings

Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen

Select whether or not to display [Paper Tray Attributes] in the [Setup] screen.
This setting allows you to select the size and type of paper without entering the System
Administration mode.

Paper Tray Attributes During Loading

Select whether or not to display the [Paper Tray Attributes] screen after the tray is pulled
out or inserted in.
This setting applies to Trays 1 to 4. You cannot apply this setting to Tray 5.

Paper Tray Priority

Set the priority of the trays to use when paper of the same size and the same orientation is
set in the multiple trays or print data does not include the paper tray information for
automatic tray selection.
Auto Paper selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically
selected by the machine for copying or printing.
This setting applies to Trays 1 to 4. You cannot set this setting to Tray 5.

Tools
Note
z
When a logical printer is used and if you specify the paper tray with the print driver, this setting will be
ignored.
5
Paper Type Priority
Set the priority of the trays to use when paper of the same size and the same orientation is
set in the multiple trays for automatic tray selection.
Auto Paper selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically
selected by the machine for copying or printing.
You can set Plain paper, Bond paper, Recycled paper, Plain Reload paper, Heavyweight
paper, Gloss paper, Heavyweight A paper, Heavyweight B paper, Heavyweight C paper,
Heavyweight S paper, and Custom paper 1 to 5.
The paper type setting is prioritized over the paper tray priority settings. If, however,
different paper types appear in the same priority sequence, the paper is determined by
paper tray priority sequence. The tray containing paper type set to [Auto Paper Off] is not
selected by automatic tray selection.
Reference
z For more information about the tray priority sequence, refer to "Paper Tray Priority" (P.159).

Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults

Select the paper sizes displayed in the [Tray 5] screen in [Paper Supply] when copying with
Tray 5.
You can assign the paper size selected here to the buttons for [Standard Size] in the [Tray
5] screen.
If you frequently use non-standard size paper for copying, assigning the paper sizes to the
buttons will save your time to specify the size each time. For your convenience, set the
commonly used paper sizes in the upper level.

„ A/B Series Size

You can select a paper size from A and B series sizes.

159
 Tools

„ Inch Size
You can select a paper size from inch series sizes.

„ Others
You can select a paper size from other sizes.

„ Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the X width between 98 and 483 mm, and the Y length between
89 and 297 mm in 1 mm increments.
Note
z For envelopes, enter the size with the flap size excluded.

Auto Tray Switching Control

Set the alternative tray or paper when running out of paper loaded in the tray selected.

„ Auto Tray Switching

You can select from [Always Enable], [Enable during Auto Select], and [Enable for Same
Paper Type/Color].
Tools

When [Enable during Auto Select] is selected, the machine switches the tray when [Auto
Select] is selected in the [Copy] screen or [Paper Select] of the print driver.

5 Note
z The machine does not switch the tray automatically in the following cases:
z
Tray 5 is selected.
z
The tray set as [Auto Paper Off] is selected in [Paper Type Priority].

„ Targeted Paper Type (Copy Jobs)

You can select paper types.
When [According to Priority Assigned] is selected, the paper type is determined according
to the settings in [Paper Type Priority]. When selecting [Selected Paper Type Only], you can
specify the paper type.

„ Targeted Paper Color (Copy Jobs)

You can target all paper colors or only one paper color.

Image Quality
You can specify the image quality processing method for each of Bond paper, Plain paper,
Recycled paper, Plain Reload paper, Heavyweight paper, Heavyweight Reload paper, Extra

160
 Common Service Settings

Heavyweight paper, Extra Heavyweight Reload paper, Extra Heavyweight Plus paper, Extra
Heavyweight Plus Reload paper, and Custom paper 1 to 5.
When copying or printing a document, the machine controls the image quality according to
the type of paper set in [Image Quality] and the image quality processing method specified
for that type of paper.
The following table shows available settings.
Reference
z For information about paper characteristics and notes, refer to "Loadable Quantity and Weight for Supported Paper" (P.48).

Setting values Meaning

Plain A (60 - 79 gsm) Default setting for plain paper. Paper having ream weight of 60 -
79 gsm.
Plain B (60 - 79 gsm) Normally, do not select this value.
Plain C (60 - 79 gsm) Default setting for recycled paper. Paper having ream weight of 60
- 79 gsm.
Plain D (80 - 89 gsm) Paper having ream weight of 80 - 89 gsm.
Plain E (80 - 89 gsm) Normally, do not select this value.

Tools
Plain E (80 - 89 gsm) Default setting for bond paper. Paper having ream weight of 90 -
105 gsm.
Plain G (90 - 105 gsm) Normally, do not select this value.
5
Plain S For customized settings.
Heavyweight (HW) A (106 - Default setting for Heavyweight paper. Paper having ream weight
169 gsm) of 106 - 169 gsm.
Heavyweight (HW) B (106 - For customized settings.
169 gsm)
Heavyweight (HW) C (106 - For customized settings.
169 gsm)
Heavyweight (HW) S (106 - Normally, do not select this value.
169 gsm)
Heavyweight A Reload (106 - Default setting for Heavyweight Reload paper. The image quality
169 gsm)? is suitable for side 2 of the heavyweight A paper.
Heavyweight B Reload (106 - For customized settings.
169 gsm)
Heavyweight C Reload (106 - For customized settings.
169 gsm)
Heavyweight S Reload (106 - Normally, do not select this value.
169 gsm)
Extra Heavyweight (X-HW)A Default setting for Extra Heavyweight paper. Paper having ream
(170 - 256 gsm) weight of 170 - 256 gsm.
Extra Heavyweight (X- For customized settings.
HW)B(170 - 256 gsm)
Extra Heavyweight (X- For customized settings.
HW)C(170 - 256 gsm)
Extra Heavyweight (X- For customized settings.
HW)D(170 - 256 gsm)
Extra Heavyweight (X- Normally, do not select this value.
HW)S(170 - 256 gsm)

161
 Tools

Setting values Meaning

Extra Heavyweight (X- Default setting for Extra Heavyweight Reload paper. The image
HW)AReload (170 - 256 gsm) quality is suitable for side 2 of the Extra Heavyweight A paper.
Extra Heavyweight (X- For customized settings.
HW)BReload (170 - 256 gsm)
Extra Heavyweight (X- For customized settings.
HW)CReload (170 - 256 gsm)
Extra Heavyweight (X- For customized settings.
HW)DReload (170 - 256 gsm)
Extra Heavyweight (X- Normally, do not select this value.
HW)SReload (170 - 256 gsm)

Image Quality Adjustment

You can set the image quality and calibration settings.

Image Quality
You can select the image quality processing method when the machine scans a document.
Tools

„ Photo & Text Recognition

Allows you to change a level with which the machine determines a document as text or
5 photos. This setting is used when you select [Photo & Text] for [Original Type] on the
[Image Quality] screen.
Selecting [More Text] enables the machine to easily recognize very fine print as text.
Selecting [More Photo] enables the machine to easily recognize halftone images from
newspapers and advertisements as photos.

„ Output Color Recognition

Allows you to change a level from the five levels with which the machine determines a
document as monochrome or color. This setting is used when you select [Auto Detect] for
[Output Color] on the [Copy] screen.
Selecting [More Black & White] enables the machine to easily recognize monochrome
documents.
Selecting [More Color] enables the machine to easily recognize color documents.

„ Photo Reproduction Level

When copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen set to [Photo & Text], you
can adjust the color reproduction level in the areas determined by the machine as photos.
Selecting [More Text] yields a bold copy effect, emphasizing the dense parts of an image.
Selecting [More Photo] soften the image gradation of the photo aspects of an image,
enhancing the reproducibility of subtle colors.

162
 Common Service Settings

„ Photo Image Quality

[Photo Image Quality] is valid when [Photo] is selected for [Original Type] on the [Image
Quality] screen.
Selecting [High Speed] copies a document without reducing the processing speed.
Selecting [High Quality] creates a near-quality reproduction of the document.
Note
z Selecting [High Quality] may reduce the copy speed.

„ Background Suppression (Color Copy)

Set the method of background suppression to be used when making color copies.
Background suppression is the function to detect the density of colors and suppress the
scan of background colors when a document has background colors on colored paper.
Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the document and detect the background color.
Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the
background color.
Important
z When you select [High Quality], and [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] with a ratio of 60% or less is
specified in [Reduce/Enlarge], a part of the image may not be printed or blank paper may be output.

Tools
„ Background Suppression (Black Copy)
Set the method of background suppression to be used when making monochrome copies. 5
Background suppression is the function to detect the density of colors and suppress the
scan of background colors when a document has background colors on colored paper.
Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the document and detect the background color.
Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the
background color.
Important
z When you select [High Quality], and [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] with a ratio of 60% or less is
specified in [Reduce/Enlarge], a part of the image may not be printed or blank paper may be output.

„ Background Suppression (Scan Jobs)

Set the method of background suppression to be used for scan operations.
Set how the machine detects density and deletes the background color.
Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the document and detect the background color.
Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the
background color.

„ Image Enhancement
Allows you to select whether to carry out image enhancement. If you select [On], the
machine gives the image a smoother appearance when printed.

163
 Tools

Calibration
When color gradation of a printed image shifts, you can calibrate the color of the image to
maintain the image quality of the machine at a certain level.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.103).

Note
z
If you cannot calibrate the machine to adjust for a shift in color gradation despite the periodic calibration,
contact our Customer Support Center.

„ Screen Type
Select from [Copy Job], [Print Job 1], and [Print Job 2].
Reference
z For more information about screen type, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.103).

„ Paper Supply
Select a tray.

„ Target
Tools

Select from [Copy & Print Jobs], [Copy Jobs Only], [Print Jobs Only], and [None].

Adjust Color Registration

5
You can adjust color registration if colors are misaligned in outputs.
Selecting [Start] starts color registration.
Important
z Do not execute color registration continuously. Doing so may impair the performance of the machine.

Reports
You can configure settings related to printing reports.

Print Reports Button

Set the display method of [Print Reports] under the [Machine Information] screen and
[Error History Report] under the [Faults] screen displayed by pressing the <Machine Status>
button.
If you select [Disabled], the [Print Reports] button under [Machine Information] and the
[Error History Report] button under [Faults] are displayed only in the System Administration
mode.
If you select [Disabled], the [Print Reports] button under [Machine Status] > [Machine
Information] and the [Error History Report] button under [Faults] are displayed only in the
System Administration mode.
Reference
z For information on Print Reports, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).
z
For information on Error History Reports, refer to "Faults" (P.132).

164
 Common Service Settings

Job History Report

Select whether or not to automatically print a Job History Report when a total of 50 jobs
have been processed. All jobs are automatically listed on the printed report.
Reference
z For information on how to print a Job History Report manually, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

Activity Report
Select whether or not to automatically print an Activity Report when a total of 100
communication results have been accumulated.
Reference
z
For information on an Activity Report, refer to "Activity Report" (P.746).
z
For information on how to print an Activity Report manually, refer to "Job Status/Activity Report" (P.115).

Transmission Report - Job Undelivered

Select whether or not to automatically print a Transmission Report - Job Undelivered.

Transmission Report - Job Deleted

Tools
Select whether or not to automatically print a Transmission Report - Job Deleted for a
cancelled document.
5
Folder Report
Select whether or not to automatically print a Folder Report.

Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report
Select whether or not to automatically print a Broadcast Report and a Multi-Poll Report.

„ Off
Does not print a report regardless of the data transmission result.

„ On
Automatically prints a report regardless of the data transmission result.

„ Print only when communication error

Prints a report only when a communication error occurs.Select [All communications] or
[Communication with error only] for report contents.

Scan File Transfer Report

Select whether or not to print the report for data transmission results when the scanned
data is transferred to the computer on the network or is sent via e-mail.

„ Off
Does not print a report regardless of whether data transmission is successfully completed or
not.

„ On
Automatically prints a Transmission Report when data is sent successfully and a
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered when data transmission failed.

165
 Tools

„ Print when delivery fails

Prints a Transmission Report - Job Undelivered when the data transmission failed.

Scan File Transfer Report (Fax Server)

Set whether or not to print a Transmission Report after scanned data is sent using the
Server Fax feature.
Reference
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.

„ Off
Does not print a report regardless of whether data transmission is successfully completed or
not.

„ On
Automatically prints a Transmission Report for a successful transmission and a
Transmission Report (undelivered) for a transmission failure.

„ Print when delivery fails

Tools

Prints a Transmission Report (undelivered) for a transmission failure.

5 2 Sided Report
Select whether or not to print a report on one side of the paper or both sides when printing
a report/list.

Activity Report - Recipient

Select how the information on recipients is shown when printing an Activity Report: the first
40 characters or the last 40 characters.

Job Flow Error Report

Select whether or not to automatically print a Job Flow Error Report.

Maintenance
You can initialize or delete data from the hard disk of the machine.

EP Diagnostic Request/Repair Request

When the EP system via the Internet is used, the machine contacts our Customer Support
Center if a check or maintenance is required. Our service representative visits your place as
required.
Note
z The EP system is not available in some region. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Reference
z For more information on the EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.749).

166
 Common Service Settings

Check EP Connection
This feature is used to check whether or not the communications between the machine and
our Customer Support Center function normally when the EP system via the Internet is
used.
Note
z The EP system is not available in some region. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Reference
z
For more information on the EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.749).

EP Registration

„ BB Registration
Select [BB Registration] and then select [Start] to register the machine in EP system.

„ EPA Server Registration

After the BB registration, [EPA Server Registration] is automatically selected in accordance
with your environment. When this feature is selected, enter the destination server IP of your
EPA server and then select [Start] to register the machine in the EPA server.

Tools
Initialize Hard Disk
Initializes the hard disk.
5
Data deleted by initialization includes supplementary fonts, ESC/P, and HP-GL/2 forms.
Note
z
The secure print documents and logs are not erased.

Delete All Data

This feature is designed to prevent the leakage of confidential information of a customer
when the machine is returned to Fuji Xerox. All data stored on the machine will be deleted.
Before executing the operation, make sure that the operation is absolutely necessary.
Important
z It takes several minutes to several hours to delete all data. (The time taken depends on the machine
configuration or the hard disk capacity.)

Software Options
This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.

167
 Tools

Software Upgrade
When EP system via the Internet is used, this feature is used to upgrade the software for EP
system when the version upgrade is required.
You can specify when to start the software upgrade.
Important
z After the downloading is finished, the machine automatically restarts and upgrades the software. After the
machine restarts again and the Services Home screen is displayed, the software upgrade is completed.

Note
z EP system may not be available in your region. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z To use this feature, a dedicated contract is needed in addition to a use of the EP system service. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Reference
z For information on EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.749).

1 Select [Software Upgrade].

„ Start Upgrade
Starts a version upgrade soon.
Tools

„ Schedule Upgrade
Select [On] and specify the date and time to start a version upgrade.
5
Power on Self Test
Set whether or not to perform self test when the machine is turned on and started up.
If any abnormal condition such as intentional program modification is found during the
program diagnosis, the machine stops starting up and records the information in the audit
log.
Note
z
The information may not be recorded in the audit log depending on the status of program malfunction.
z If the machine does not start, contact our Customer Support Center.

Check Smart Card Details

When you select [Check Smart Card Details] and touch your smart card to the smart card
reader, the information of the smart card appears on the touch screen.
Note
z You can register the authentication information using CentreWare Internet Services. For more information,
refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the Internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

Finisher Adjustment
This feature is displayed only when the Finisher-B1 (optional), the Booklet Maker Unit for
Finisher-B1 (optional), or the Hole Punch Unit (optional) is installed.

„ Hole Punch Tool

Specify either [2/4 Hole Punch] or [2/3 Hole Punch (US Specification)].

168
 Common Service Settings

„ Adjust Punch Position/Booklet Fold Position

Set the punch position and booklet fold position for paper smaller than B4 or larger than or
equal to B4.

Adjust Image Transfer

You can specify the transfer output value for each paper type. This is useful when the toner
image does not transfer to the paper properly.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "Adjust Image Transfer" (P.654).

Adjust Paper Registration

Allows you to adjust the print image position vertically and horizontally on the paper using
[Lead / Side Registration]. Also allows you to adjust the perpendicularity of the image using
[Perpendicularity].
You can enter from -2.0 to +2.0 for [Lead / Side Registration], and from -1.0 to +1.0 for
[Perpendicularity]. Select [Adjust] after entering the values.
When you enter the amount in [Number of Sheets] and select [Sample Printout], the
machine prints the sample that the values changed are reflected.

Tools
Delete All Certificates/Initialize Settings
Deletes all certificates stored in the machine and initializes the security settings associated 5
with certificates. This feature is designed to use when you cannot use a certificate data in
the machine because of an abnormality of certificate file even when the certificate is set to
enabled for [SSL/TLS Settings] under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Connectivity & Network
Setup] > [Security Settings].

Quick Setup Home

Displays Install Wizard which requires configuring the items necessary when installing the
machine.
You can configure Screen/Button Settings, IP Address Settings, and Fax Settings.
Reference
z For more information on setting items, refer to "Screen/Button Settings" (P.152), "Connectivity & Network Setup" (P.194), and "Fax
Service Settings" (P.245).

Process Control Setup

Automatically adjusts the density deviation when lowering of the density reproducibility
occurs on copying or printing.

Spots/Streaks Diagnostics
This feature provides the diagnosis of a spot-like or streak-like defect in a printed image by
printing the diagnostic chart and scanning it. The diagnosis result, which is not displayed in
the machine, is sent to our Customer Support Center by pressing [EP Diagnosis] when the
machine is connected to the EP system.

„ Print Diagnostic Chart

Prints the diagnostic chart. Select the paper and select [Print].

169
 Tools

„ Scan Chart with Document Feeder

Scans the sample chart using the document feeder. Set the sample chart with the print side
facing up as instructed on the screen, and select [Scan]. After the sample chart is scanned,
select [Start Diagnostic]. Then the diagnosis is started.

„ EP Diagnosis
When the EP system is connected to the Internet, Pressing [EP Diagnosis] sends the
diagnosis to our Customer Support Center. Our service representative visits your place as
required.

Watermark
Watermark is the function to print text or background pattern on the whole page to inhibit
the replication of documents.
You can configure Watermark settings such as date or text, background pattern, and
watermark to embed.

Date Format
Set the format for printing dates. This setting is common to Annotation, Watermark, and
Tools

Force Annotation.
Three formats are available: "YYYY/MM/DD", "MM/DD/YYYY", and "DD/MM/YYYY".
5 Default Watermark Effect
Set the default type of text effect for Watermark.

„ Off
A text effect is not applied.

„ Embossed
When you re-copy a copied document with watermark, the text hidden in the background is
printed as embossed text.

„ Outline
When you re-copy a copied document with watermark, the text hidden in the background is
printed as white cutout.

Default Watermark
Set watermark text.
You can select text from [Copy Prohibited], [Copy], [Duplicate], and the strings assigned to
Custom Watermark 1 to 3.
Reference
z For more information about custom text, refer to "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" (P.172).

Font Size
Set the size of the text to be printed as the Watermark.
You can set the font size from 24 to 80 points in 1 point increments.

170
 Common Service Settings

Background Pattern
Set the background pattern to embed the text for the Watermark effect.
You can select from eight patterns: [Wave], [Circle], [Stripe], [Chain], [Beam], [Rhombic],
[Sunflower], and [Fan].

Font Color
Specify a hidden text color used for the Watermark feature.
You can select from [Black], [Magenta], and [Cyan].
Note
z The hidden text color in fax transmission is black, regardless of the font color.

Density
Select the text density of the Watermark.
You can select from [Lighten], [Normal], and [Darken].

Watermark/Background Contrast

Tools
Set a contrast level for text and background for the Watermark.
You can select a level from 1 to 9. Select a contrast level, referring to the printed samples by
selecting [Print this Sample List].
5
Force Watermark - Copy
Set whether or not to forcibly use the Watermark feature when copying a document. When
you select [On], the setting of [Watermark] in the [Output Format] screen is fixed to [On]
and you cannot change the setting.
The user control number, machine ID, and date and time are printed.
Note
z
You can authorize a user to temporarily cancel the force watermark printing. For more information, refer to
"User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.424).
z The user control number may not be printed depending on the Login mode configuration.

Force Watermark - Client Print

Set whether or not to forcibly use the Watermark feature when printing from a computer.
To prioritize the settings in the machine, select [Allow Device Settings to Override], and to
prioritize the settings of the software such as TrustMarkingBasic (sold separately) or the
print server, select [Allow Client Settings to Override].
When you [Allow Device Settings to Override] is selected, the user Details or the user control
number, machine ID, and date and time are printed.
Note
z The user control number may not be printed depending on the Login mode configuration.

171
 Tools

Force Watermark - Print Stored File

Set whether or not to forcibly use the Watermark feature when printing from a folder.
The user control number, machine ID, and date and time are printed.
Note
z You can authorize a user to temporarily cancel force watermark printing. For more information, refer to "User
Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.424).
z The user control number may not be printed depending on the Login mode configuration.

Force Watermark - Media Print

Set whether or not to use the Watermark feature when printing for Media Print - Text and
Photos.
The user control number, machine ID, and date and time are printed.
Note
z You can authorize a user to temporarily cancel force watermark printing. For more information, refer to "User
Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.424).
z The user control number may not be printed depending on the Login mode configuration.

Custom Watermark 1 to 3
Tools

Register text to be printed as the Watermark. You can enter up to 32 single-byte characters.
The registered text is displayed at [Default Watermark].
5 Reference
z
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Print this Sample List

Prints hidden text samples of various densities. Select [Watermark/Background Contrast],
referring to the printed samples.

Force Annotation
The string such as a user name and a date (Annotation) is forcibly printed out according to
the layout template associated with each job type.
The layout templates, Preset 1 to Preset 4, are provided with the machine. The printed
items with the templates as follows:
z Preset 1 and Preset 2
The string registered on [Create Text String 1] is printed as watermark at an angle in the
center of paper.
The following items are printed at the bottom right for Preset 1 or bottom left for Preset
2 of paper.
- First line: file name and the IP address of the computer that send a print job
z
Preset 3 and Preset 4
The string registered on [Create Text String 1] is printed as watermark at an angle in the
center of paper.
The following items are printed at the bottom right for Preset 3 or bottom left for Preset
4 of paper.

172
 Common Service Settings

- User ID and date and time

DocName-192.0.2.1 DocName-192.0.2.1
UserName-CardID-UserID-2012/02/01 13:08 UserName-CardID-UserID-2012/02/01 13:08 UserID-2012/02/01 13:08 UserID-2012/02/01 13:08

Preset1 Preset2 Preset3 Preset4

Note
z Some items may not be printed depending on the job type and performance conditions.
z Force annotation is not printed on blank paper generated by the machine.
z A time printed as a watermark using the Force Annotation feature may differ from the time the print job is
submitted depending on the status and settings of the machine and the contents of the print job. In this
case, the print job start time is printed as a watermark.

Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Tools
Apply Layout Template to Copy/Print Jobs
Set the association between jobs and layout templates. You can associate layout templates
with the following jobs.
5
z
Copy
z Client Print
z Print Stored File
z
Media Print
z Print Fax
z Print E-mail
z
Report
Note
z You can associate a layout template with Client Print when a print job is sent from a computer.

Delete Layout Template

Deletes a layout template.
Important
z
The provided layout templates, Preset 1 to Preset 4, cannot be deleted.

Create Text String

Register text strings for the Force Annotation feature. You can register up to eight types of
strings in [Create Text String 1] to [Create Text String 8]. You can enter up to 64 single-byte
characters.
Important
z
The available text for the provided layout templates, Preset 1 to Preset 4, is the text strings registered in
[Create Text String 1].

173
 Tools

Print Universal Unique ID

You can print UUIDs (Universal Unique IDs) for each print job to identify each job.
The printed UUIDs can be used as a search key to retrieve print job logs using an
application, such as ApeosWare Log Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare
Accounting Service (sold separately). Retrieving the image log with the UUID enables you
to verify "when", "by whom", and "with what service" the document was processed. This
prevents leakage of confidential information.
Note
z You can authorize a user to temporarily cancel force watermark printing. For more information, refer to "User
Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.424).
z If a layout template is specified in [Apply Layout Template to Copy/Print Jobs] under [Force Annotation],
UUIDs are overlapped with the text on the layout template.

Reference
z For details on Force Annotation, refer to "Force Annotation" (P.172).

Print Universal Unique ID

Select whether or not to print Universal Unique IDs.
Tools

Print Position
Select a print position from six positions: [Top Left], [Bottom Left], [Top Center], [Bottom
5 Center], [Top Right], or [Bottom Right].

Print Position Adjustment

Adjust print positions vertically and horizontally from 0 to 100 mm and from 0 to 200 mm
respectively, in 0.5 mm increments.
Note
z 0 mm is at the edge of paper. Increasing the value moves the print position toward the center of the paper.
However, for [Top Center] or [Bottom Center], the horizontal value for the center of paper is set to 100 mm.
Therefore, when you select [Top Center] or [Bottom Center], set the value to 100 mm and then specify
desired value.

Print Position (Side 2)

Select the position to print the UUID on Side 2 from [Same as Side 1] or [Mirror Side 1]
when making 2 sided copies.

Notify Job Completion by E-mail

You can receive the results of jobs performed by an e-mail notification.

Targeted Jobs
Select the service whose job result you want to receive by an e-mail notification. When the
target job is already selected, [Selected] is displayed.
You can select more than one target job from [Copy], [Fax], [Scan], [Print], or [Report].
Select the notification timing from [Notify at the End of Job] or [Notify when Error Only].
When [Fax] is selected as one of the targeted jobs, [Attach Faxed Images] setting becomes
available. The specified pages of faxed images converted to PDF format will be attached to
notification e-mail. Select [First Page Only], [First 2 Pages], [All Pages], or [Do Not Attach].

174
 Common Service Settings

E-mail Addresses 1 to 5
Specify the e-mail addresses to notify the result of the jobs.
Note
z When you select [Save] to exit this screen without specifying an e-mail address, the setting of [Targeted Jobs]
or [E-mail Message] is deleted.

E-mail Message
Enter a comment attached to the e-mail.

Plug-in Settings
You can browse list of available Plug-ins when you use the custom authentication and set
to switch Plug-ins.
Note
z This item is displayed when the Extensible Customization Function is set to be enabled.

Embedded Plug-ins
Set whether or not to use the embedded plug-ins. Select [Enabled] or [Disabled].

Tools
List of Embedded Plug-ins
Display the embedded plug-in name and status on the list. 5
Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the machine.

Fax Service
Switches between the Fax feature and the Server Fax feature.
Note
z
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.
z The Fax and Server Fax features cannot be enabled at the same time.

Scan to Fax
Allows you to use the Fax feature on the machine.

Scan to Fax Server

Allows you to use the Server Fax feature on the machine.
Note
z
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Offset Stacking (Center Tray)

Offsetting means that each set of copies is delivered to the center tray and shifted slightly
to separate it from the previous job. When a set of copies is delivered to the front of the

175
 Tools

tray, the next set is delivered to the rear of the tray. Set the offset function for the Center
Tray - Lower.
Select from [No Offset], [Offset per Set], and [Offset per Job]. When [Offset per Set] or
[Offset per Job] is selected, the machine slightly shifts the output position per set or per job
(print job) respectively.

Offset Stacking (Center Tray - Lower)

Offsetting means that each set of copies is delivered to the center tray and shifted slightly
to separate it from the previous job. When a set of copies is delivered to the front of the
tray, the next set is delivered to the rear of the tray. Set the offset function for the Center
Tray - Lower.
Select from [No Offset], [Offset per Set], and [Offset per Job]. When [Offset per Set] or
[Offset per Job] is selected, the machine slightly shifts the output position per set or per job
(print job) respectively.

Offset Stacking (Right Middle Tray)

Offsetting means that each set of copies is delivered to the finisher tray and shifted slightly
to separate it from the previous job. When a set of copies is delivered to the front of the
tray, the next set is delivered to the rear of the tray. Set the offset function for the Right
Tools

Middle Tray.
Select from [No Offset], [Offset per Set], and [Offset per Job]. When [Offset per Set] or
5 [Offset per Job] is selected, the machine slightly shifts the output position per set or per job
(print job) respectively.
Note
z
This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For more
information, contact out Customer Support Center.

Booklet Offset
When [Offset Stacking (Center Tray)] or [Offset Stacking (Right Middle Tray)] is set to
[Offset per Set], the paper is output to the tray by being slightly displaced by set. If,
however, [Fold & Staple] is selected for booklet settings, the paper is not output by set.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Extra Center Tray

Allows you to select whether or not to use the Extra Center Tray. Select from [Not Installed]
and [Installed].

176
 Common Service Settings

Auto Job Promotion

You can select whether or not to allow another job to automatically bypass the current job
when the machine is unable to start an operation for a any reason, (for example, running
out of paper in a tray when starting copying or printing).
Select [Disabled] or [Enabled]. When [Enabled] is selected, you can select whether or not to
delete the bypassed jobs automatically. Select [Yes] to specify the period of time until a
bypassed job is deleted between 1 minute and 120 hours.
Note
z Stored documents such as Secure Print and Sample Set documents cannot be used with the Auto Job
Promotion feature.
z When [Enabled] is selected and there is a job bypassed because of paper out, a message stating the reason
of the job promotion appears. The job bypassed can be processed after you take proper measures by
following the instruction of the message. Or, you can cancel the job by pressing the <Clear All> button. When
multiple jobs are bypassed, a screen that lists the bypassed jobs appears. This screen allows you to display the
details screen and to delete the jobs.
z When you have specified the time period to disable print jobs, the jobs received during the specified time
period is not deleted automatically even when you have selected [Yes] for [Automatically Delete Held Jobs].
For more information on the setting to disable print jobs, refer to "Printer Lockout" (P.148).

Default Print Paper Size

Tools
You can set the paper size, A4 or 8.5 X 11" to print reports and/or lists.

Odd Page 2 Sided 5

You can specify whether or not to add a blank page when a document containing an odd
number of pages is printed in 2-sided.

Paper Size Settings

You can specify the size of paper to be automatically detectedwhen you use standard sizes
of a document or the machine is set to detect sizes of a document.
Refer to the following tables for a combination of sizes that can be detected automatically.

Paper size group A/B series A/B series A/B series A/B series Inch series
(8 x 13") (8K/16K) (8 x 13"/8 x
14")
Document feeder

Document feeder

Document feeder

Document feeder

Document feeder
Document glass

Document glass

Document glass

Document glass

Document glass
Trays 1 to 4

Trays 1 to 4

Trays 1 to 4

Trays 1 to 4

Trays 1 to 4

Loading position/
Size orientation

A6 O X X O X X O X X O X X O X X

A5 O O O O O O O O O O O O O X O

O X X O O X O O X O X X O X X
A5

A4 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
A4

A3 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

177
 Tools

Paper size group A/B series A/B series A/B series A/B series Inch series
(8 x 13") (8K/16K) (8 x 13"/8 x
14")

Document feeder

Document feeder

Document feeder

Document feeder

Document feeder
Document glass

Document glass

Document glass

Document glass

Document glass
Trays 1 to 4

Trays 1 to 4

Trays 1 to 4

Trays 1 to 4

Trays 1 to 4
Loading position/
Size orientation

B6 O X X O X X O X X O X X O X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
B6

B5 O X O O O O O O O O X O O X O

O O X O O O O O O O O X O O X
B5

B4 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

5.5 x 8.5" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Tools

O O X X X X X X X O O X O O X
5.5 x 8.5"
X O O X X X X X X X O O X O O
5 7.25 x 10.5"
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
8 x 10"
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
8 x 10"

8.5 x 11" O O O X O O X O O O O O O O O

O O O X O O X O O O O O O O O
8.5 x 11"

8.5 x 13" X O O X X O X X O X O O X O O

8.5 x 14" X X O X X O X X O X X O X X O

11 x 17" O O O X O O X O O O O O O O O

12 x 18" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

SRA3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

16K(Taiwan) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X O O X O O X X X X X X
16K(Taiwan)

8K(Taiwan) X X X X O O X O O X X X X X X

16K (mainland X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
China)

X X X X O O X O O X X X X X X
16K
(mainland China)

8K X X X X O O X O O X X X X X X
(mainland China)

178
 Common Service Settings

Millimeters/Inches
Allows you to select unit of measurement displayed on the screen from [Millimeters] or
[Inches].

Encryption Key for Confidential Data

Allows you to set an encryption key to encrypt confidential information such as the
passcode of the system administrator and a folder. Encrypting confidential information
prevents a network hacking and an unauthorized access to the information.
Enter an encryption key of 4 to 12 single-byte characters using alphanumeric characters.
Important
z If you change the existing encryption key, you may not restore confidential information from a backup.

Note
z
The factory default encryption key is "x-admin".

1 Select [Encryption Key for Confidential Data], and then [Change Settings].

2 Select [New Encryption Key], and enter an encryption key, and then select [Save].

Tools
3 Select [Re-enter Encryption Key], enter the same encryption key, and then select [Save].

4 Select [Save] to display a confirmation screen. Select [Yes] on the screen to save the setting.
5
Service Rep. Restricted Operation
Allows you to select whether or not to restrict the operation by our service representative to
protect the security settings from being altered by someone impersonating our service
representative.

„ Off
The operation by our service representative is not restricted.

„ On
Our service representative cannot change the following settings:
z "Delete All Data" (P.167)
z "Print Universal Unique ID" (P.174)
z
"Encryption Key for Confidential Data" (P.179)
z "Service Rep. Restricted Operation" (P.179)
z "SSL/TLS Settings" (P.220)
z
S/MIME Settings(P.221)
z "IPsec Settings" (P.223)
z "System Administrator Settings" (P.313)
z
"Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator" (P.320)
z "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.325)
z Creating/Changing Users with System Administrator Rights

179
 Tools

z Changing SNMP v3 Setting

When [On] is set, you can set a maintenance passcode of 4 to 12 digits in the [Maintenance
Passcode] screen. Entering the passcode is required when our service representative
performs maintenance.
Important
z When [On] is set, note the followings:
z If you lose the System Administrator's user ID and passcode, the items restricted to the service
representative cannot be changed.
z If you lose the passcode, our service representative cannot perform maintenance in the case when an error
occurs in the machine.
z To change the restricted items or perform maintenance, the electric circuit board of the machine must be
replaced. You will be charged for the electrical circuit board and handling cost. Be sure not to lose the System
Administrator’s user ID and passcode.

Note
z An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.

Reference
z For information on the system administrator permissions, refer to "User Roles" (P.425).
Tools

Software Download
You can select whether or not to permit software downloading. This feature is for service
5 representative use. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Check Document Guides Position

Set whether or not to display the confirmation screen when you set the guide position of
the document feeder to 8.5" and start loading. Select from [No] or [Yes].

Document Feeder Quiet Mode

When you use the duplex automatic document feeder, allows you to specify whether or not
to reduce the noise of loading a document. You can specify the setting each for [Copy],
[Scan], and [Fax].

Restrict Recipient Selection Method

Allows you to select whether or not to restrict a fax/Internet fax or an e-mail transmissions
to addresses not registered on the Address Book.
Selecting [Only From Address Book] disables address entry using the keyboard or numeric
keypad, and permits only transmission to addresses registered on the Address Book.
Note
z You can also give users authority to deactivate [Restrict Recipient Selection Method]. For more information,
refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.424).

Restrict User to Edit Address Book

Specify whether or not to permit local users to add and edit recipients in the Address Book.
When you select [Yes], local users cannot add or edit the Address Book.
Note
z You can also give users authority to deactivate [Restrict User to Edit Address Book]. For more information,
refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.424).

180
 Common Service Settings

Auto Validation of Speed Dial Entry

Allows you to select whether the machine automatically validate the number when you use
speed dial. When you select [Validate entry after a fixed time], you can select the time to
auto-validation from [Shorter], [Default], or [Longer].
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models.

Data Indicator
Allows you to set the lighting pattern of the <Data> indicator.

„ Pattern 1
Lights up when a document is stored in the hard disk (optional) of the machine.

„ Pattern 2
Lights up when a fax document is in a print queue or a fax received with the Store Fax -
Local Folder feature is stored in the folder.

„ Pattern 3

Tools
Lights up for 30 seconds after a job in the print queue is printed.

Paused Job Handling

Allows you to select the way of processing of a job left uncontrolled over the time specified
5
in [Auto Clear Alert].
Reference
z For more information on Auto Clear, refer to "Auto Clear" (P.148).

„ Resume Job Automatically

The job is automatically resumed.

„ Delete Job Automatically

The job is automatically cancelled.

„ Resume / Delete by User

The job is still suspended until you resume the operation.

181
 Tools

Copy Service Settings

In [Copy Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Copy feature. The
following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Copy Tab - Features Allocation" (P.182)
"Preset Buttons" (P.183)
"Copy Defaults" (P.183)
"Copy Control" (P.189)
"Original Size Defaults" (P.192)
"Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.192)
"Custom Colors" (P.193)
"Annotations - Create Comments" (P.193)

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Copy Service Settings].

Reference
z For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).
Tools

2 Select an item to set or change.

5
Copy Tab - Features Allocation
You can customize the features displayed on the [Copy] screen. Setting the most frequently
used features enables you to avoid extra operations such as selecting tabs.

1 Select the number of features displayed on the [Copy] screen.

„5 Features
The following five features are shown on the screen: [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge],
[Paper Supply], [2 Sided Copying], and [Copy Output]. Features and positions displayed
cannot be changed.

„7 Features
Allows you to set features appearing in the fourth column from the left of the [Copy]
screen.
Note
z [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], and [Paper Supply] cannot be specified.

182
 Copy Service Settings

„10 Features
Allows you to set features appearing in the third and fourth columns from the left of the
[Copy] screen.
Note
z
[Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge] and [Paper Supply] cannot be specified.

2 From [Frequently Used Features] on the right of the screen, select a button and the position
of the button where you want to allocate a feature.
Note
z The position of each button on the right side corresponds to the position on the [Copy] screen.

3 Select a feature to display, and select [Save].

Note
z Select [ ] to display the previous screen or [ ] to display the next screen.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required.

5 Select [Save].

Tools
Preset Buttons

Paper Supply - Button 2 - 5

5
Select the paper tray displayed in the second to fifth buttons in [Paper Supply] on the
[Copy] screen.

Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3 - 4
Select the magnification ratio displayed in the third and fourth buttons in [Reduce/Enlarge]
on the [Copy] screen.Select the ratio from the Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons registered.

Front Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3

Set the default value of the tray displayed in [Paper Supply] when an option that printed on
Front Cover is selected for [Front Cover] under [Output Format] > [Covers].

Back Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3

Set the default value of the tray displayed in [Paper Supply] when an option that printed on
Back Cover is selected for [Back Cover] under [Output Format] > [Covers].

Copy Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Copy feature. When the machine is turned on,or the
machine exits the Power Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the
machine resets to the default values set here. Setting frequently used features and values
as the defaults can avoid extra operations required during the use of the machine.
Reference
z For more information on each setting item, refer to "Copy" in the User Guide.

183
 Tools

Paper Supply
Set the default value for [Paper Supply] in the [Copy] screen.
Note
z When the default value of [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %], [Auto Select] cannot be selected for [Paper
Supply].

Reduce/Enlarge
Set the default value for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Copy] screen.Select the ratio from
[100%], [Auto %], and the buttons registered as Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons.
Note
z
When the default value of [Paper Supply] is set to [Auto Select], [Auto %] cannot be selected for [Reduce/
Enlarge].

Reference
z For information on the Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.192)".

Output Color
Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.When [No Default] is selected,
select the output color in the [Copy] screen before making copies.
Tools

Output Color (Simple Copy)

5 Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [Simple Copy] screen. You can select from
[Auto], [Color], and [Black & White].

Single Color
Set the default value for [Single Color] in [More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.
You can select a color from six preset colors and six custom colors.
Reference
z For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.193).

Dual Color - Source Color

Set the default value for [Source Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected for
[More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.Selecting [Color] enables you to select a
color from six colors.

Dual Color - Target Area Color

Set the default value for [Target Area Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected for
[More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You can select a color from seven preset
colors and six custom colors.
Reference
z
For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.193).

Dual Color - Non-target Area Color

Set the default value for [Non-target Area Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected
for [More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You can select a color from seven preset
colors and six custom colors.
Reference
z For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.193).

184
 Copy Service Settings

Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.

Original Type - Auto (Non-Black & White)

Set the default value for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.
This is valid when a color other than [Black & White] is selected for [Output Color] in the
[Copy] screen.

Original Type - Auto (Black & White)

Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
This is valid when [Black & White] is selected for [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.

Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality]
screen.

Contrast

Tools
Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Sharpness 5
Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Saturation
Set the default value for [Saturation] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Background Suppression
This feature allows you to suppress the background color of documents.
Set the default value for [Suppress Background] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Image
Quality] screen.
[Background Suppression] is valid when [Original Type] is set to [Photo & Text], [Text], or
[Maps].

Color Balance - Yellow / Color Balance - Magenta / Color Balance - Cyan / Color
Balance - Black
Set the default density levels for the [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen.You can
set density levels of each color for each of the [Highlights], [Midtones], and [Shadows].
Note
z Depending on the density level settings, [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen is set as follows:
z
When the density levels of all colors are set to [0,0,0], [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen is set to
[Normal].
z
When the same value is set to all levels for each color (for example: [0,0,0] or [1,1,1]), [Color Balance] in the
[Image Quality] screen is set to [Basic Color].
z
When the settings other than the ones described above are applied, [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality]
screen is set to [Advanced Color].

185
 Tools

Color Shift
Set the default value for [Color Shift] in the [Image Quality] screen.

2 Sided Copying
Set the default value for [2 Sided Copying] in the [Copy], [Layout Adjustment], and [Output
Format] screens.

Mixed Size Originals

Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Edge Erase - Top Edge

When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book, the
edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows. This feature
allows you to erase such shadows on the top edge.
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the top directions
in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
Tools

Note
z
You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Top Edge]. For the printable area, refer to
"Printable Area" (P.646).
5
Edge Erase - Bottom Edge
When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book, the
edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows. This feature
allows you to erase such shadows on the bottom edge.
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the bottom
directions in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm
in 1 mm increments.
Note
z You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Bottom Edge]. For the printable area, refer
to "Printable Area" (P.646).

Edge Erase - Left Edge

When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book, the
edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows. This feature
allows you to erase such shadows on the left edge.
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the left directions
in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
Note
z You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Left Edge]. For the printable area, refer to
"Printable Area" (P.646).

186
 Copy Service Settings

Edge Erase - Right Edge

When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book, the
edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows. This feature
allows you to erase such shadows on the right edge.
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the right directions
in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
Note
z You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Right Edge]. For the printable area, refer
to "Printable Area" (P.646).

Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase

When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book, the
edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows. This feature
allows you to erase such shadows on the center of facing pages of a bound document or a
booklet.
Set the default value for [Center] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the
value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Tools
Note
z
You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase]. For the printable
area, refer to "Printable Area" (P.646).
5
Edge Erase - 2 Sided Original - Side 2
This feature allows you to set whether the edge erase value of Side 1 and Side 2 are to be
same or to be symmetrical.

Image Shift - Side 1

Set the default value for [Side 1] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Image Shift - Side 2

Set the default value for [Side 2] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Image Rotation
Set the default value for [Image Rotation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Image Rotation - Rotation Direction

Set the default value for [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] of [Image Rotation] in the
[Layout Adjustment] screen.

Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Pages per Side

Set the default value for [Pages per Side] in the [Copy] and [Output Format] screens.

187
 Tools

Copy Output
This feature allows you to set the finishing options to output multiple copies. Select [Auto],
[Collated], [Uncollated], or [Uncollated with Separators].
Set the default value for [Copy Output] in the [Copy] and [Output Format] screens.

Uncollated - Default Separator Tray

Set the default value for [Separators Tray] under [Copy Output] > [Uncollated with
Separators] in the [Copy] and [Output Format] screens.

Output Destination
Set the default value for [Output Destination/Offset] under [Copy Output] in the[Copy] and
[Output Format] screens.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Output Destination (Simple Copy)

Tools

Set the output destination when you start copying from the [Simple Copy] screen.
Note
z If paper cannot be output to the tray you set, the destination may be changed automatically.
5 z
When the [Simple Copy] screen is displayed, you can confirm the output destination on the [Review] screen,
which can be displayed by pressing the <Review> button. For information on the <Review> button, refer to
"Product Overview" > "Control Panel" in the User Guide.

Sample Job
Set the default value for [Sample Job] in the [Job Assembly] screen.

Annotations - Stored Comment

Set the default value for [Stored Comments] displayed when [Comment] is selected for
[Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.
You can select a comment type from eight preset types and custom text registered.
Reference
z
For information about how to set custom text, refer to "Annotations - Create Comments" (P.193).

Annotations - Comment on Side 1 and Side 2

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Comment] is selected for [Annotations]
in the [Output Format] screen.

Annotations - Comment - Font Size

Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Format & Style] displayed when [Comment] is
selected for [Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.

Annotations - Comment - Font Color

Set the default value for [Font Color] under [Format & Style] displayed when [Comment] is
selected for [Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.

188
 Copy Service Settings

Date - Position on Side 1 and Side 2

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Date Stamp] is selected for
[Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.

Date - Font Size

Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Font Size] displayed when [Date Stamp] is
selected for [Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.

Page Numbers - Style

Set the default value for [Style] displayed when [Page Numbers] is selected for
[Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.

Page Numbers - Position on Side 1 and Side 2

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Page Numbers] is selected
for[Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.

Page Numbers - Font Size

Tools
Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Font Size] displayed when [Page Numbers] is
selected for [Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.

Bates Stamp - Number of Digits 5

Set the default value for [Number of Digits] displayed when [Bates Stamp] is selected for
[Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.

Bates Stamp - Position on Side 1 and Side 2

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Bates Stamp] is selected for
[Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.

Bates Stamp - Font Size

Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Font Size] displayed when [Bates Stamp] is
selected for [Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.

Booklet Creation - Default Cover Tray

Set the default value for [Covers] which is displayed when you select a Cover page option in
the [Booklet Creation] screen.

Covers - Default Front Cover Tray, Default Back Cover Tray

Set the default value for [Front Cover] and [Back Cover] which are displayed when you
select Front Cover and Back Cover options in the [Covers] screen.

Separators - Default Separator Tray

Set the default value for [Segment Separator Tray] under [Segment Separators] which is
displayed when you set [Build Job] to [On] in the [Job Assembly] screen.

Copy Control
You can configure settings related to copy operation control.

189
 Tools

Memory Full Procedure

If there is insufficient hard disk memory while scanning a document, a screen appears
asking you how you want to handle the partially stored data.
Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a
certain time has elapsed in the confirmation screen.
Reference
z You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to "Machine Clock/Timers" (P.146).

„ Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.

„ Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and start copying the document partially stored.

Maximum Stored Pages

Set the maximum number of pages stored for a copy document. You can set from 1 to 999
pages.
Tools

Auto Paper Off

Select the tray used when [Auto Select] of [Paper Supply] in the [Copy] screen is cancelled.
5 [Auto Select] of [Paper Supply] is cancelled when [Auto %], [Auto X-Y %] for [Independent
X-Y %], or [Slight Reduction (Improves Fit)] is selected.

Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy

Specify paper to copy side 2 of a document: in 2 sided copying, if the size of side 1 and side
2 of a document is different, and the machine detects different paper size for sides 1 and 2.
Important
z When the side 1 and side 2 are different sizes and if the side 2 is copied on the sheet on which the side 1 has
been printed, a part of the image may be missing.

„ Copy to new sheet

Side 2 is copied as side 1 on a new sheet of paper.

„ Copy to Side 2
Side 2 is copied on the reverse side of side 1 without changing paper size.

Fine-tune 100%
You can fine-tune magnification when copying at 100% (actual size). The set value is
applied to [100%] in the [Copy] screen is set to 100%.
Set the value in the X/Y direction between 98 and 102% in 0.1% increments.
Important
z This feature is applied only when a copy is made using the document glass. This setting is not reflected in the
magnification (100%) under [Independent X-Y%] or [Calculator %].

Note
z A magnification displays [100%] even if [Fine-tune 100%] is selected.

190
 Copy Service Settings

ID Card Copy - Reduce/Enlarge

Set the copy magnification ratio when to copy ID cards. Selecting [Allow to Change] allows
you to specify the ratio between 25 to 400 % in 1 % increments.
Note
z
The machine may copy an ID card in a different orientation from the original orientation depending on the
magnification ratio you specified.

Background Suppression (Photo & Text)

Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Photo &
Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen. The larger the value, the
stronger the effect of removing background noise.

Background Suppression Level (Text)

Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Text] is
selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.

Photo & Text /Printed Original

Tools
Set the type of document when [Printed Original] of [Photo & Text] is selected for [Original
Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.

„ Normal
5
Copies with standard image quality.

„ Inkjet Originals
Select [Inkjet Originals] when copying a document printed with an inkjet printer. This
improves the recognition of inkjet colors.

„ Highlighted Originals
Select [Highlighted Originals] when copying an original marked with a highlight pen. This
improves the recognition of the colors of highlight pen.

Original Type - See-Through Paper

When [Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen, set whether to
display [Text on See-Through Paper].

Annotations - Comment Density

Set the translucency of the comment printed as annotation.
You can select a translucency value from [Darken], [Normal], and [Lighten]. Darken
represents no translucency.
Note
z
If a stamp set to [Darken] density is printed over text, the text may be unreadable.

Comment Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Left Center, - Center, -
Right Center, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and - Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a comment finely.

191
 Tools

Date Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center,
and - Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a date stamp finely.

Page Number Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom
Center, and - Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a page number finely.

Bates Stamp - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center,
and - Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a bates stamp finely.

Quantity Display
You can select how you want to display the counter in the Copy service.
Select from [Quantity], [Quantity and Memory], and [Quantity and Original Count].

Maximum Number of Sets

Tools

Set the maximum number of allowed sets to copy between 1 and 999. Users will not be
able to specify a larger number of sets to copy than the value set here.
5
Original Size Defaults
Set the original sizes displayed in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign original sizes to the buttons other than [Auto Detect].
If you frequently make copies of non-standard size document, setting non-standard size as
the default can avoid extra operations required during the use of the machine.

„ A/B Series Size

You can select a size from A and B series sizes.

„ Inch Size
You can select a size from inch series sizes.

„ Others
You can select a size from other sizes.

„ Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to
297 mm in 1 mm increments.

Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed when [Proportional %]
is selected under [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Copy] screen.
You can assign any magnification to the Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons other than[100%]
and [Auto %].

192
 Copy Service Settings

Custom Colors
Set the custom colors used for [Single Color] and [Dual Color] in the [Output Color]screen.
You can assign custom colors with yellow (0 to 100%), magenta (0 to 100%), and cyan (0
to 100%) to each custom color buttons 1 to 6.
Note
z Adjust so that the total of yellow, magenta, and cyan does not exceed 240%.

Annotations - Create Comments

Register text to print with [Comment] under [Annotation]. You can enter up to 64
singlebyte characters(32 double-byte characters).
Reference
z
For information about how to enter characters, "Entering Text" (P.45).

Tools
5

193
 Tools

Connectivity & Network Setup

In [Connectivity & Network Setup], you can configure settings related to the Connectivity &
Network feature.
Reference
z For information on Connectivity and Network Settings, refer to "Printer Environment Settings" (P.335) or "E-mail Environment
Settings" (P.349).
z If you use CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible. For more information, refer to
"CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.327).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
"Port Settings" (P.194)
"Protocol Settings" (P.200)
"Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.205)
"Proxy Server Settings" (P.206)
"EP Proxy Server Setup" (P.207)
"SIP Settings" (P.209)
Tools

"T.38 Settings" (P.212)

"Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings" (P.212)
5 "Remote Authentication/Directory Service" (P.214)
"Security Settings" (P.220)
"Other Settings" (P.226)

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Connectivity & Network Setup].

Reference
z
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select an item to set or change.

Port Settings
Set the interface of the machine connected to a client. In [Port Settings], you can configure
the following settings.
Important
z
For LPD, Port9100, HTTP-SSL/TLS, and SIP, do not use a number that is the same as a port number of another
port.
For a port that uses HTTP (IPP, Internet Service (HTTP), UPnP Discovery, SOAP, WebDAV, and Web Services on
Devices (WSD)), do not use a number that is the same as a port number of LPD, Port9100, and HTTP-SSL/TLS.
Furthermore, if any of the above are set to one of the port numbers indicated below, operation may no longer
be performed properly depending on the setting conditions of the port:

194
 Connectivity & Network Setup

25, 139, 427, 445, 631, 15000

z Only LPD, Port9100, SNMP , Internet Services (HTTP), and Bonjour ports are available for Ethernet 2 when two
Ethernet interfaces are used.
z Secondary Ethernet (optional) does not support IPP and Google Cloud Print ports. Print submission of AirPrint
and Google Cloud Print via Ethernet 2 is not available.

Reference
z For information on HTTP-SSL/TLS port, refer to "Security Settings" (P.220).
z You can configure the Google Cloud Print port settings in CentreWare Internet Services. For more
information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the Internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

USB

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use a USB interface.

„ Print Mode

Tools
Select the printer language use on the machine. Selecting [Auto] enables the machine to
automatically determine and use the most suitable language to print data received from
the host device.
5
„ PJL
PJL (Printer Job Language) is a job control language and a PJL command is data prepended
to the top of the print jobs. Usually select [Enabled].

„ Auto Eject Time

Configure the time that the data so far received by the machine will automatically be
printed since data is no longer sent to the printer.
You can enter a time between 5 and 1275 seconds in 5 seconds increments.

„ Adobe Communication Protocol

‹ Standard
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the ASCII format.
‹ Binary
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the BCP format.
‹ TBCP
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the TBCP format.
‹ RAW
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the ASCII or binary format.
The data is printed without being controlled by the Adobe communication protocol.

„ PostScript Wait Timeout

The machine automatically terminates a connection when the machine does not receive
data for a certain period of time. When data is being printed with [RAW] is selected for
[Adobe Communication Protocol], select [Disabled] if you want to use the time period set in
[Auto Eject Time] or select [Enabled] if you want to use the timeout period of PostScript.

195
 Tools

LPD

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use LPD.

„ Port Number
Enter a port number for LPD from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 515.
Important
z Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

„ Maximum Number of Sessions

Enter the maximum number of client sessions using LPD. You can enter a number from 1 to
10 in 1 session increments.
The default value is 5.

SMB Client

„ Port Status
Tools

Select [Enabled] to use SMB when you use the Scan to PC (SMB) service or SMB
authentication service
5
IPP

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use IPP.
Set this when you want to use IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) to print via the Internet.

„ Added Port Number

Select [Disabled] when you want to set the machine does not accept IPP from other than
the standard port number, or select [Enabled] when accepts all port numbers.
Enter a port number for IPP other than the standard port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Important
z Do not use a number that is the same as a port number of another port. However, you can use the same port
number for a port that uses HTTP (IPP, Internet Services (HTTP), UPnP Discovery, SOAP, WebDAV, and Web
Services on Devices (WSD)).

Note
z [Added Port Number] cannot be configured if [Port Status] is set to [Disabled]. To configure [Added Port
Number], enable port status and reboot the machine, and then configure [Added Port Number].

Bonjour

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use Bonjour.
Note
z To print from a printer detected by [Bonjour], the LPD port must be activated in advance.

196
 Connectivity & Network Setup

Port 9100

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use Port9100.
Select this option when the communication protocol is in the RAW format for Windows
Standard TCP/IP port monitor.

„ Port Number
Enter a port number for Port9100 from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 9100.
Important
z Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

SNMP

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use SNMP, when you use any web applications manufactured by Fuji
Xerox to control the machine on the network.

Tools
SIP

„ Port Status 5
Select [Enabled] to use SIP, when you use IP fax (SIP) transmission.

„ Port Number
Enter a port number to use IP fax (SIP).
The default value is 5060.
Important
z Do not use any numbers assigned to other ports.

Note
z IP fax (SIP) is not available for some models.

FTP Client

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use the Scan to PC service with FTP transmission.
Note
z Select a communication mode to send data scanned via FTP from [Passive Mode] and [Active Mode].
[Passive Mode] is selected by factory default. You can change the setting from CentreWare Internet Services.

Receive E-mail

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you receive e-mails or Internet faxes.

197
 Tools

Send E-mail

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you send e-mails or Internet faxes.

E-mail Notification Service

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use the E-mail Notification Service. The E-mail Notification
Service notifies you of the machine status or the completion of a print job, and a direct fax
job by e-mail.
Note
z [Consumables Status], [Parts Status], [Paper Tray Status], [Output Tray Status], [Jam Status], [Interlock
Status], and [Fault Notice] are notified as the machine status.
z You can configure the E-mail Notification Service in CentreWare Internet Services. For more information,
refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Important
z
To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
Tools

UPnP Discovery
5 „ Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use UPnP.

„ Port Number
Enter a port number for UPnP communication from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Important
z Do not use a number that is the same as a port number of another port. However, you can use the same port
number for a port that uses HTTP (IPP, Internet Services (HTTP), UPnP Discovery, SOAP, WebDAV, and Web
Services on Devices (WSD)).

WSD
Note
z
WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

„ WSD Print - Port Status

Select [Enabled] to use WSD Print.
Set this when you search a device on a network from Windows Vista®, Windows 7, Windows
8, Windows 8.1, Windows ServerR 2012, or Windows Server 2012 R2.

„ WSD Scan - Port Status

Select [Enabled] to use WSD Scan.
Set this when you search a device on a network from Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows
8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012, or Windows Server 2012 R2.

198
 Connectivity & Network Setup

„ Port Number
Enter a port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Important
z Do not use a number that is the same as a port number of another port. However, you can use the same port
number for a port that uses HTTP (IPP, Internet Services (HTTP), UPnP Discovery, SOAP, WebDAV, and Web
Services on Devices (WSD)).

Internet Services (HTTP)

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use CentreWare Internet Services.
Reference
z
For more information about CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.327).

„ Port Number
Enter a port number for the Internet Services from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.

Tools
Important
z Do not use a number that is the same as a port number of another port. However, you can use the same port
number for a port that uses HTTP (IPP, Internet Services (HTTP), UPnP Discovery, SOAP, WebDAV, and Web
Services on Devices (WSD)). 5
Note
z You cannot select [Port Number], if HTTP port is disabled. To configure [Port Number], enable port status and
reboot the machine, and then configure [Port Number].

SOAP

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use an application program such as Device Setup.

„ Port Number
The default value is 80.
Enter a port number for SOAP from 1 to 65535.
Important
z Do not use a number that is the same as a port number of another port. However, you can use the same port
number for a port that uses HTTP (IPP, Internet Services (HTTP), UPnP Discovery, SOAP, WebDAV, and Web
Services on Devices (WSD)).

199
 Tools

WebDAV

„ Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use an application program such as Network Scanner Utility 3 to
access folders in the machine.
Important
z We recommend you to enable [HTTP - SSL / TLS Communication] under [SSL / TLS Settings] when you use
WebDAV. This is an effectual way to avoid password leaking.

Note
z You cannot select [Port Number] and [Operation Time-Out], if WebDAV port is disabled. To configure [Port
Number] and [Operation Time-Out], enable port status and reboot the machine, and then configure [Port
Number] and [Operation Time-Out].

„ Port Number
Enter a port number for WebDAV from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Important
z
Do not use a number that is the same as a port number of another port. However, you can use the same port
number for a port that uses HTTP (IPP, Internet Services (HTTP), UPnP Discovery, SOAP, WebDAV, and Web
Tools

Services on Devices (WSD)).

„ Operation Time-Out
5 You can enter an operation time-out period between 1 and 65535 seconds in 1 second
increments.

ThinPrint

„ Port Status
You can use the machine for print in the ThinPrint® .print environment. The machine
decompresses and prints the compressed print data sent from the print server.
Select [Enabled] when you use ThinPrint.

„ Port Number
Enter a port number for ThinPrint from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 4000.
Important
z Do not use any numbers assigned to the other ports.

Note
z
ThinPrint is available when the communication protocol uses IPv4.
z The maximum of three connections are possible at a time.

„ Wireless LAN Settings

You can make the settings for the wireless LAN communication. For information on the
setting procedures, refer to "Wireless LAN Converter Setup Guide" accompanying the
Wireless LAN Converter.

Protocol Settings
Set the parameters required for communications. In [Protocol Settings], you can set the
following items.

200
 Connectivity & Network Setup

z Ethernet Settings
z TCP/IP - Common Settings
z
TCP/IP - Network Settings
Important
z To configure each category, select the corresponding item and then select [Change Settings].
Also on [Ping Connection Test], you can check whether or not the machine can be properly
connected to a network with the configured condition.

Ethernet Settings
Configure the Ethernet settings.

„ Ethernet1 - Network Name, Ethernet 2 - Network Name

When two Ethernet interfaces are used, specify the names respectively.
Note
z This item is displayed only when Secondary Ethernet (optional) is installed on the machine.

„ Ethernet - Rated Speed / Ethernet 1 - Rated Speed, Ethernet 2 - Rated Speed

Set the communication speed for the Ethernet interface.

Tools
Note
z
The title of this setting item differs depending on the Ethernet interface configuration: When single Ethernet
interface is used, [Ethernet - Rated Speed] is displayed. When two Ethernet interfaces are used, [Ethernet 1 -
Rated Speed] and [Ethernet 2 - Rated Speed] are displayed.
5
‹ Auto
Select this to detect the Ethernet transmission rate automatically.
‹ 100 Mbps Full-Duplex
Select this to set 100BASE-TX (Full Duplex) as the default value.
‹ 100 Mbps Half-Duplex
Select this to set 100BASE-TX (Half Duplex) as the default value.
‹ 10 Mbps Full-Duplex
Select this to set 10BASE-T (Full Duplex) as the default value.
‹ 10 Mbps Half-Duplex
Select this to set 10BASE-T (Half Duplex) as the default value.
‹ 1000 Mbps
Select this to set 1000BASE-T as the default value.
‹ Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) Port
Select this check box to use Gigabit Ethernet Port.

TCP/IP - Common Settings

Configure common settings to use TCP/IP.

201
 Tools

„ Primary Network
When two Ethernet interfaces are used, the name of interface which works as the primary
network is displayed.
Note
z
The primary network is "Ethernet 1". You cannot set "Ethernet 2" as the primary network.
z This item is displayed only when Secondary Ethernet (optional) is installed on the machine. You cannot edit
the setting from here.

„ IP Mode
Allows you to select the TCP/IP operation mode.
Displays current IP mode.
‹ IPv4 Mode
Select this option for IPv4.
‹ IPv6 Mode
Select this option for IPv6.
‹ Dual Stack
Select this option for an environment using both IPv4 and IPv6.
Tools

TCP/IP - Network Settings/ TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 1), TCP/IP -

5 Network Settings (Ethernet 2)
Configure network settings other than common settings to use TCP/IP.
Important
z Configuring same IP address for [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 1)] and [TCP/IP - Network Settings
(Ethernet 2)] is prohibited. When setting the same IP address to each Ethernet, contact our Customer Support
Center.
z
Only LPD, Port9100, and Bonjour ports are available for [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)]. The
applications using any other ports such as Network Scanner Utility 3 may not work with the [TCP/IP - Network
Settings (Ethernet 2)] setting.

Note
z We recommend you to specify different IP addresses between [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 1)] and
[TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)].
z The title of this setting item differs depending on the Ethernet interface configuration: When single Ethernet
interface is used, [TCP/IP - Network Settings] is displayed. When two Ethernet interfaces are used, [TCP/IP -
Network Settings (Ethernet 1)] and [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)] are displayed.
z
For [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 1)] and [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)], same setting items
as [TCP/IP - Network Settings] are displayed. You can configure individual settings for each Ethernet
interface.
z When any interface names are specified in [Ethernet1 - Network Name] and [Ethernet2 - Network Name], the
specified names are displayed instead of "Ethernet1" and "Ethernet2" of [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet
1)] and [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)] respectively.

„ IPv4 - IP Address Resolution

Allows you to select a method for obtaining the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway
address.
‹ DHCP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via DHCP.
‹ BOOTP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via BOOTP.

202
 Connectivity & Network Setup

‹ RARP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via RARP.
‹ DHCP/AutoIP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via DHCP/AutoIP.
If the machine fails to communicate with the DHCP server, the AutoIP function is
automatically enabled and an IP address (169.254.XXX.XXX) is assigned to the machine.
When communication between the machine and the DHCP server recovers, the machine
obtains an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address by the DHCP server.
‹ STATIC
Allows you to manually specify an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
Note
z To configure a subnet mask and a gateway address, an IP Address must be set first.

„ IPv4 - IP Address
Enter the IP address using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad when selecting
[STATIC] at [IPv4 - IP Address Resolution].
Note

Tools
z
Enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from of 0 to 255.
z
Specify an IP address using numbers (0 to 9) and periods (.). If you mistyped a character on the screen, select
[Backspace] to delete the character.

„ IPv4 - Subnet Mask

5
Enter the subnet mask using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad when selecting
[STATIC] at [IPv4 - IP Address Resolution].
Note
z Enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from of 0 to 255.
z Specify a subnet mask using numbers (0 to 9) and periods (.). If you mistyped a character on the screen,
select [Backspace] to delete the character.

„ IPv4 - Gateway Address

Enter the gateway address using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad when
selecting [STATIC] at [IPv4 - IP Address Resolution].
Note
z
Enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from of 0 to 255.
z
Specify a gateway address using numbers (0 to 9) and periods (.). If you mistyped a character on the screen,
select [Backspace] to delete the character.

„ IPv4 - DNS Server Setup

Set the DNS server.
‹ Get IP Address from DHCP
Set whether or not to automatically obtain the address of the DNS server from the DHCP
server.
‹ Preferred DNS Server IP Address, Alternate DNS Server 1 IP Address, Alternate
DNS Server 2 IP Address
When [Get IP Address from DHCP] is set to [Disabled], manually set the DNS server address.
Specify alternate DNS server addresses for [Alternate DNS Server 1 IP Address] and
[Alternate DNS Server 2 IP Address].

203
 Tools

„ IPv4 - IP Filter
Select whether or not to limit the IPv4 addresses that can access the machine.
Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

Note
z
[IPv4 - IP Filter] applies to all features using TCP/IP, such as Print, Store to Folder, and CentreWare Internet
Services.
z
To set the IPv4 IP addresses that the machine accepts connection from, use [IP Filtering] in CentreWare
Internet Services. For more information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services or refer to
"CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.327).
z When [IP Filtering] is enabled, make sure to switch the FTP transfer mode to [Active Mode] to transfer the
scanned image from the machine via FTP. You can switch the FTP transfer mode from CentreWare Internet
Services.

„ IPv6 Address Manual Configuration

Allows you to select whether or not to configure the IPv6-address settings manually.

„ Manually Configured IPv6 Address

Tools

This setting is configurable when [IPv6 Address Manual Configuration] is set to [Enable].
Specify an IPv6 address.
Note
5 z
Enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a hexadecimal value.
z
Specify an address using alphanumeric characters (0 to 9 and A to F) and colons (:). If you mistyped a
character on the screen, select [Backspace] to delete the character.

„ Manually Configured IPv6 Address Prefix

This setting is configurable when [Manually Configured IPv6 Address] is set. Specify a prefix
length from 0 to 128.

„ Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway

This setting is configurable when [Manually Configured IPv6 Address] is set. Specify a
gateway address.
Note
z Enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a hexadecimal value.

„ IPv6 - DNS Server Setup

Set the DNS server for IPv6.
‹ Get IP Address from DHCP
Set whether or not to automatically obtain the address of the DNS server from the DHCP
server.
‹ Preferred DNS Server IP Address, Alternate DNS Server 1 IP Address, Alternate
DNS Server 2 IP Address
When [Get IP Address from DHCP] is set to [Disabled], manually set the DNS server address.
Specify alternate DNS server addresses for [Alternate DNS Server 1 IP Address] and
[Alternate DNS Server 2 IP Address].

„ Automatically Configured IPv6 Address

Displays the following addresses, which are automatically assigned.
z
Link-local Address

204
 Connectivity & Network Setup

z Auto Stateless Address 1 and Prefix Length

z Auto Stateless Address 2 and Prefix Length
z
Auto Stateless Address 3 and Prefix Length
z Auto Gateway Address

„ IPv6 - IP Filter
Select whether or not to limit the IPv6 addresses that can access the machine.
Note
z IPv6 - IP Filter] applies to all features using TCP/IP, such as Print, Store to Folder, and CentreWare Internet
Services.
z To set the IPv6 addresses that the machine accepts connection from, use [IP Filtering] in CentreWare
Internet Services. For more information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services or refer to
"CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.327).
z When [IP Filtering] is enabled, make sure to switch the FTP transfer mode to [Active Mode] to transfer the
scanned image from the machine via FTP. You can switch the FTP transfer mode from CentreWare Internet
Services.

Important
z
To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

Tools
Ping Connection Test
Allows you to confirm whether the machine connects your computer properly or not with 5
the configured condition. Set the following setting and then select the [Start] button to
start Ping connection test.

„ Network Interface
Select [Ethernet 1] or [Ethernet 2] according to the protocol settings.
Note
z
This item is displayed only when Secondary Ethernet (optional) is installed on the machine.

„ Protocol
Select [IPv4] or [IPv6] according to the protocol settings.

„ IP Address or Host Name

Enter the IP address or host name of your computer. When using IP address, enter the IPv4
address or IPv6 address. When using host name, enter the host name with up to 32 single-
byte characters.

Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name

Set the e-mail address, host name, and domain name of the machine.

E-mail Address
Enter the E-mail address of the machine with up to 128 single-byte characters.

„ When receiving E-mail via SMTP

You can set any name for the account (on the left side of @). Set the address section (on
the right side of @), with the combination of the host name and domain name. An alias
cannot be set.
Example: [email protected]

205
 Tools

z Account name: mymail

z Host name: myhost
z
Domain Name: example.com

„ When receiving E-mails via POP3

Enter the POP user name (on the left side of @) and incoming POP3 mail server name in the
address section (on the right side of @). You can set an alias, such as
[email protected].
Example: [email protected]
z Account name: mymail

Machine Name
Enter the machine name with up to 32 single-byte characters.

Host Name
Enter the host name with up to 32 single-byte characters
Important
Tools

z When you use SMB, enter the first 15 letters of the host name. The host name must be up to 15 single-byte
characters to identify the machine properly.

5 Domain Name
Enter the domain name with up to 64 single-byte characters.

Proxy Server Settings

Configure the settings for a proxy server.
Configure a proxy server when using inbound/outbound access.
Important
z
Do not set this item unless you use services requiring proxy server settings.

Use Proxy Server

Select whether or not to use a proxy server.

Proxy Server Setup

Select the proxy server specification from [Same Proxy for All Protocols] or [Different Proxy
for Each Protocol].

Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server

Enter addresses not using the proxy server. You can specify the addresses by IPv4 address,
IPv6 address, and FQDN. You can use wildcards "*" for specifying the addresses.

HTTP Proxy Server Name

Enter the server name or IP address of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 255 characters are
allowed. You can specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.

206
 Connectivity & Network Setup

HTTP Proxy Server Port Number

Set the HTTP proxy server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 8080.
Important
z Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

HTTP Proxy Server Authentication

Select [Enabled] when authentication is required to connect to the HTTP proxy server.

HTTP Proxy Server Login Name

Enter a login name of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

HTTP Proxy Server Password

Enter a password of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

HTTPS Proxy Server Name

Tools
Enter the HTTPS proxy server name or the IP address. Up to 255 characters are allowed.
You can specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.

HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number 5

Set the HTTPS proxy server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 8080.
Important
z Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication

Select [Enabled] when authentication is required to connect to the HTTPS proxy server.

HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name

Enter a login name of the HTTPS proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

HTTPS Proxy Server Password

Enter a password of the HTTPS proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

EP Proxy Server Setup

Configure the settings for a proxy server for EP connection when the EP system via the
Internet is used.
Important
z Configure the settings when the EP system via the Internet is used.

Reference
z
For information on EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.749).

207
 Tools

Proxy Server Setup

Select the proxy server specification from [Same Proxy for All Protocols] or [Different Proxy
for Each Protocol]. When [Different Proxy for Each Protocol] is selected, you can configure
the HTTPS proxy server and HTTP proxy server, respectively.
When [Same Proxy for All Protocols] is selected, the settings for the HTTPS proxy server are
copied to those of the HTTP proxy server.

HTTPS Proxy Server Name

Enter the HTTPS proxy server name or the IP address. Up to 255 characters are allowed.
You can specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.

HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number

Set the HTTPS proxy server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 8080.
Important
z Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
Tools

HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication

Select [Enabled] when authentication is required to connect to the HTTPS proxy server.

5 HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name

Enter a login name of the HTTPS proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

HTTPS Proxy Server Password

Enter a password of the HTTPS proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

HTTP Proxy Server Name

Enter the server name or IP address of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 255 characters are
allowed. You can specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.

HTTP Proxy Server Port Number

Set the HTTP proxy server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 8080.
Important
z Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

HTTP Proxy Server Authentication

Select [Enabled] when authentication is required to connect to the HTTP proxy server.

HTTP Proxy Server Login Name

Enter a login name of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

HTTP Proxy Server Password

Enter a password of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

208
 Connectivity & Network Setup

SIP Settings
Configure the settings for a SIP user ID, SIP server to go through, and VoIP gateway. In [SIP
Settings], you can set the following items.

SIP User ID (Sign-in Name)

Enter the SIP user name of the machine.
For example: [email protected]
The left side of @ (111 in this example) is called the SIP user name.
Note
z If you do not use a SIP server, specify the IP address of the machine on the right side of "@".
z When you use a SIP server manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc. for [SIP User Name] of the machine, you can
use only IPv4 address strings of the SIP server on the right side of "@".
You cannot use IPv6 address strings, FQDN strings, and SIP domain name strings.

SIP Transport Protocol

Select the SIP transport protocol from [UDP] or [TCP].
Note

Tools
z
Select [UDP] when you use a SIP server manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc.

Enable SIP Server 5

Select whether or not to enable a SIP server.

SIP Server IP Address Resolution

Specify a method for obtaining the IP address for the SIP proxy server and the SIP registrar
server.
Note
z Even when IP addresses can be resolved automatically using [DHCP] or [DHCP v6], port number, login user
name, login password, and server type cannot be resolved automatically. Configure these items manually.
z When you select [DHCP] to automatically obtain the IP address, select [DHCP] or [DHCP/AutoIP] for [IPv4 - IP
Address Resolution] of the TCP/ IP settings of the machine.
z If an IP address is resolved automatically, the same IP address is assigned to both a proxy server and a
registrar server. If you use different IP addresses for the proxy server and the registrar server, configure the IP
addresses manually. If multiple IP addresses are resolved automatically, assign the first IP address to a
primary proxy/registrar server and the second to a secondary proxy/registrar server. The third and subsequent
addresses are not used.
z Even when the IP address is resolved automatically, the port number, login user name, login password, and
server type cannot be automatically obtained. Set these manually.

„ DHCP
The SIP proxy server IP address and the SIP registrar server IP address will be automatically
retrieved from DHCP.

„ DHCP v6
The IPv6 address for the SIP proxy server and the IPv6 address for the SIP registrar server
will be automatically retrieved from the DHCPv6 server.

„ STATIC
Allows you to manually enter the IP addresses for the SIP proxy server and the SIP registrar
server.

209
 Tools

SIP Proxy Server Setup

Configure SIP proxy server settings. You can set a primary server and a secondary server.
Note
z You can use up to two SIP proxy servers.
z
Select [Cisco] for a server type.

„ Primary Server - IP Address

Enter the IP address of the primary server. Up to 255 characters are allowed. You can
specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.

„ Primary Server - Port Number

Set the primary server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 5060.

„ Primary Server - Login User Name

Enter the login user name of the primary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

„ Primary Server - Login Password

Tools

Enter the login password of the primary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

„ Primary Server Type

5 Select the type of primary server from [Standard] or [Cisco].

„ Secondary Server - IP Address

Enter the IP address of the secondary server. Up to 255 characters are allowed. You can
specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.

„ Secondary Server - Port Number

Set the secondary server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 5060.

„ Secondary Server - Login User Name

Enter the login user name of the secondary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

„ Secondary Server - Login Password

Enter he login password of the secondary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

„ Secondary Server Type

Select the type of secondary server from [Standard] or [Cisco].

SIP Registrar Server Setup

Configure SIP registrar server settings. You can set a primary server and a secondary server.
Note
z
You can use up to two SIP registrar servers.
z Select [Cisco] for a server type.

„ Primary Server - IP Address

Enter the IP address of the primary server. Up to 255 characters are allowed. You can
specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.

210
 Connectivity & Network Setup

„ Primary Server - Port Number

Set the primary server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 5060.

„ Primary Server - Login User Name

Enter the login user name of the primary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

„ Primary Server - Login Password

Enter the login password of the primary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

„ Primary Server Type

Select the type of primary server from [Standard] or [Cisco].

„ Secondary Server - IP Address

Enter the IP address of the secondary server. Up to 255 characters are allowed. You can
specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.

„ Secondary Server - Port Number

Set the secondary server port number from 1 to 65535.

Tools
The default value is 5060.

„ Secondary Server - Login User Name

5
Enter the login user name of the secondary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

„ Secondary Server - Login Password

Enter the login password of the secondary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.

„ Secondary Server Type

Select the type of secondary server from [Standard] or [Cisco].

VoIP Gateway Setup

You can configure the following settings for VoIP Gateway 1 to 50.
You can also configure different VoIP gateways by a recipient’s telephone number.
Note
z
To use a fixed VoIP gateway, do not register the ID, and specify only the IP address for VoIP Gateway 1.
z You cannot use a VoIP gateway in an IPv6 network.

„ ID
Specify a number to identify the recipients’ telephone numbers.
If you specify "03", this VoIP gateway is used for the telephone numbers beginning with
"03" such as "0312345678" and "0312345679".
Note
z If you specify a specific telephone number, specify the entire telephone number such as "0312345678".

„ Gateway Address
Enter the IP address of the VoIP gateway.

211
 Tools

T.38 Settings
Configure the settings for T.38.

T.38 Transport Protocol

Select T.38 transport protocol from [TCP] or [UDP].
Note
z When you use VoIP gateway manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc., select [UDP].

UDPTL Listening Port Number

Set the UDPTL listening port number from 1 to 65535.
Important
z Do not use any numbers assigned to other ports.

TCP Listening Port Number

Set the TCP listening port number from 1 to 65535.
Important
Tools

z Do not use any numbers assigned to other ports.

RTP Listening Port Number

5 Set the RTP listening port number from 1 to 65535.
Important
z
Do not use any numbers assigned to other ports.

Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 1), Prioritize IP Packets

(Ethernet 2)
Set the priority of IP packet transmission from 0 to 255.
Note
z The value set varies depending on your environment. Consult your network administrator.
z Set the value already specified by the network side. If you set other values, the priority does not change.
(For most of Cisco® routers, speech traffic is set to 184(ef). If you change the value, consult your network
administrator.)
z The title of this setting item differs depending on the Ethernet interface configuration: When single Ethernet
interface is used, [Prioritize IP Packets] is displayed. When two Ethernet interfaces are used, [Prioritize IP
Packets (Ethernet 1)] and [Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)] are displayed.
z
When any interface names are specified in [Ethernet1 - Network Name] and [Ethernet2 - Network Name], the
specified names are displayed instead of "Ethernet1" and "Ethernet2" of [Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 1)]
and [Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)] respectively.

Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings

Set e-mail transmission and reception settings.

212
 Connectivity & Network Setup

POP3 Server Settings

Set the POP3 server. In [POP3 Server Settings], you can set the following items:
Note
z For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
z
For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
z When you make an entry mistake, press the <C> (Clear) button and enter again.

„ Server Name/IP Address

Enter a server name or IP address with up to 128 characters, and then select [Save].

„ Port Number
Enter a port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 110.
Important
z Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

„ Polling Interval

Tools
Set the interval for checking the e-mail on the POP3 server from 1 to 120 minutes in 1
minute increments.

„ Login Name 5
Enter the name to login to the POP3 server with up to 64 characters.

„ Password
Enter a password for the POP3 server with up to 64 characters.
Enter the same password in [New Password] and [Retype Password] using the numeric
keypad displayed by selecting [Keyboard]. If you do not set the password, leave the text
boxes blank and select [Save].

„ POP Password Encryption

Select [On (APOP)] to encrypt the password.

SMTP Server Settings

Set the SMTP server. In [SMTP Server Settings], you can set the following items:
You can check the connection between the machine and the SMTP server by sending a test
mail to the e-mail address specified in [Connection Test]. Selecting [Connection Test] >
[Print SMTP Comm. Report] outputs the report that shows the contents of protocol of the
SMTP communication transmitted and received by the machine.
Note
z For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
z For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
z When you make an entry mistake, press the <C> (Clear) button and enter again.

„ SMTP Server Name/IP Address

Enter a server name or IP address, and then select[Save]. Up to 128 characters are allowed.

213
 Tools

„ SMTP Server Port Number

Enter a port number in the range from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 25.
Important
z Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

„ E-mail Send Authentication

Select one from [Off], [POP before SMTP], or [SMTP AUTH].
Note
z If [POP before SMTP] is selected, the POP3 settings must be set.
z
AUTH GSSAPI (only for Kerberos), AUTH NTLMv2, AUTH NTLMv1, AUTH PLAIN, AUTH-LOGIN, or AUTH
CRAM-MD5 can be used as an authentication method.

„ Login Credentials for E-mail Send

Select the login user name when sending e-mails from [Remotely Authenticated User] and
[System].
When [Remotely Authenticated User] is selected and if the machine tries authenticating
the remote server before a job startup, the machine performs verification at the time of
Tools

transmission with the remotely authenticated user name and password. You can also select
the post-failure behavior of the machine from [Cancel E-mail Send] and [Relogin using
System Data]. If you do not set remote authentication, the machine uses the user ID and
5 passcode of the machine for authentication.

„ SMTP AUTH Login Name

Enter the user name for verification purposes at the SMTP server with up to 64 characters.

„ SMTP AUTH Password

Enter the password for verification purposes at the SMTP server. Up to 64 single-byte
characters are allowed.
Note
z If you do not set the password, leave the text boxes blank and select [Save].

Remote Authentication/Directory Service

You can make the settings for the remote authentication server and directory service.

Authentication System Setup

„ Authentication System
Allows you to select the authentication system from [Kerberos (Windows2000)], [Kerberos
(Solaris)], [LDAP], [SMB].
After you change the authentication system, folders and job flow sheets used with the
previous authentication system are not deleted automatically. If these folders or job flow
sheets are no longer needed, delete them from the machine. If the same user IDs are also
used on the new authentication system, folders and job flow sheets can be used by the
same users.

„ Server Response Time-Out

Set the server time-out response between 1 and 75 seconds in 1 second increments.

214
 Connectivity & Network Setup

„ Search Time-Out
Set the user information search time-out between 1 and 120 seconds in 1 second
increments.

Kerberos Server Settings

Configure the Kerberos Servers 1 to 5.
The settings in [Kerberos Server 1 (Default)] will be the default settings for authentication.

„ Primary Server Name/Address

Enter the primary server name or IP address.
Note
z For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
z For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.

„ Primary Server - Port Number

Set the primary server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 88.

Tools
Important
z Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

„ Secondary Server Name/Address

5
Enter the secondary server name or IP address.
Note
z For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
z
For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.

„ Secondary Server - Port Number

Set the secondary server port number in the range from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 88.
Important
z
Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

„ Domain Name
When you use Active Directory of Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server® 2003, Windows
Server 2008, or Windows Server 2012 as server, specify the domain name of Active
Directory in [Domain Name]. Up to 64 characters are allowed.
Important
z
Enter a realm name in uppercase characters. Otherwise, an authentication error occurs.

„ Server Certificate Verification

Select whether or not to verify a server certificate.

215
 Tools

LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings

Configure the directory server, authentication method, and search attributes and ranges for
LDAP authentication and the Address Book search by LDAP.
You can check the connection to the server by selecting [Connection Test]. Selecting
[Connection Test] > [LDAP Communication Report] outputs the report that shows the
contents of protocol of the LDAP communication transmitted and received by the machine.

„ Primary Server Name/Address

Enter the primary server name or IP address.
Note
z For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
z For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.

„ Primary Server - Port Number

Set the Primary server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 389.
Important
Tools

z Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

„ Secondary Server Name/Address

5 Enter the secondary server name or IP address.
Note
z For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value 0 to 255.
z
For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.

„ Secondary Server - Port Number

Set the secondary server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 389.
Important
z
Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

„ Authentication Method
Select a method to perform LDAP authentication from [Direct Authentication] and
[Authentication of User Attributes].

„ Direct Authentication
User ID and password entered by a user are used for LDAP authentication.

„ Authentication of User Attributes

The user ID entered is used as an attribute specified in [Attribute of Typed User Name] to
perform a search on the LDAP server. [Attribute of Login User Name] of a user found
through the search is used as the user ID of a job and the owner of a job flow sheet and a
folder.

216
 Connectivity & Network Setup

„ Attribute of Typed User Name

When [Authentication of User Attributes] is used for LDAP authentication, set the attribute
of the user ID entered. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Set the attribute of the User Attribute information registered on the LDAP server that
corresponds to the value to be entered as the user name from the control panel. For
example, when you want a user to enter the mail address, set "mail."

„ Attribute of Login User Name

Enter an attribute to be used for LDAP authentication using User Attribute information
registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

„ Use Added Text String

Select whether or not to automatically add text strings in [Text String Added to User Name]
when you enter the authentication information from the control panel.

„ Text String Added to User Name

Enter text strings for [Text String Added to User Name] when you use additional text
strings. Up to 64 characters are allowed.
When [Use Added Text String] is set to [Enabled], enter the corresponding fixed text string.

Tools
For Example:
When "mail" is set for[Attribute of Typed User Name] and the information registered for
the target user is "[email protected]," you will need to enter
[email protected]".
5
However, if [Use Added Text String] is set to[Enabled]and "@myhost.example.com" is
specified for [Text String Added to User Name], you will only need to enter "mail" from the
control panel because the machine adds "@myhost.example.com" to the end of the string.

„ Attribute of Smart Card

When a smart card is used for LDAP authentication, set the attribute of the card ID to
perform a search on the LDAP server to authenticate the user who has the card. Up to 32
characters are allowed.

„ Network User ID Attribute

When a smart card is used for LDAP authentication, set the attribute of the user name to be
used for a smart card ID search. The user name is given to the remote service as the
authentication information. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

„ Login Credentials to Search Entries

Select which users are allowed to search the Address Book.
You can select from [Remotely Authenticated User] and [System].

„ Login Name
Set a user name for the Address Book search and access to the directory server using
[Authentication of User Attributes] method for LDAP authentication.
Set this item only when authentication is required for the search for the directory service.
Up to 255 characters are allowed.

„ Password
Set a login password for the user specified in [Login Name]. Up to 32 characters are
allowed.

217
 Tools

„ Search Directory Root

Enter a search root character string with up to 255 characters.

„ Scope of Search from Root Entry

Select the search range from the root entry.
‹ Root entry only
Searches the root level only.
‹ One level below root entry only
Searches from the root level to one level below the root level.
‹ All levels below root entry
Searches from the root level to all lower levels below the root level.

„ Object Class of Search Target

Enter the object class to search with up to 32 characters.

„ LDAP Referrals
Specify whether or not to re-establish connection to another LDAP server if a currently
Tools

connected LDAP server requests to do so.

„ LDAP Referral Hop Limit

5 When using the Referral feature, specify how many times that a user is allowed to hop
servers within 1 to 5 times.

„ LDAP Server
Select the software used by the directory server from [Microsoft Active Directory],
[Microsoft Exchange], [IBM Lotus Domino 6.*], and [Other Applications].

„ Search Entries by Common Name

Set whether or not to use [Attribute Type of Name] as a search entry when a name is used
as a search key.

„ Search Entries by Surname

Set whether or not to use [Attribute Type of Surname] when a name is used as a search key.

„ Search Entries by Given Name

Set whether or not to use [Attribute Type of Given Name] when a name is used as a search
key.

„ Attribute Type of Name

Set the recipient name attribute type. Enter a field attribute name to be used as a recipient
name from user information registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters are
allowed. For Windows, enter "cn" for an attribute name used as a recipient name.

„ Attribute Type of Surname

Set the sender's family name attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

„ Attribute Type of Given Name

Set the sender's first name attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

218
 Connectivity & Network Setup

„ Attribute Type of E-mail Address

Set the e-mail address attribute type. Enter a field attribute name to be used as e-mail
information from the user information registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters
are allowed. For Windows, enter "mail" for an attribute name used as e-mail information.

„ Attribute Type of Fax Number

Set the fax number attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

„ Attribute Type of IP Fax (SIP) Number

Set a field attribute name that is used as IP fax (SIP) number information from the user
information registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

„ Attribute Type of E-mail (Internet Fax)

Set the Internet fax address attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

„ Attribute Type of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3

Set the LDAP attribute type of custom items 1 to 3. In addition to [Attribute Type of Name]
and [Attribute Type of E-mail Address], you can assign user attributes registered on the
LDAP server for a search. Up to 32 characters are allowed.

Tools
„ Attribute Name of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3
Set the attribute names assigned to custom items 1 to 3. Up to 16 single-byte characters
are allowed. 5
Note
z
To encrypt communications using this feature, a trusted root certificate authority and all intermediate
certificate authorities that are registered in the path of a certificate to use must be registered.

„ Attribute Type of Certificate

Set the certificate attribute type. Select and enter the field name to use as a certificate
from among the user information registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 single-byte
characters are allowed.
For Windows, enter "userCertificate;binary" for an attribute name used as certificate
information. The information is used as an S/MIME certificate when you specify an address
using the directory service to encrypt e-mail transmission by S/MIME.
Note
z To encrypt communications using this feature, a trusted root certificate authority and all intermediate
certificate authorities that are registered in the path of a certificate to use must be registered.

„ Maximum Number of Search Results

Set a maximum number of address to display from search results from 5 to 100. If the
search results exceed the maximum, the search stops at the maximum number set.
The default value is 50.

„ Search Time-Out
Select whether or not to set a search time-out. Set the value from 5 to 120 seconds in 1
second increments.

SMB Server Settings

Set the following items to use SMB server as a remote authentication server.

219
 Tools

„ SMB Server Setup

Select the server specification method from [By Domain Name] and [By Domain & Server
Names/IP Address].
According to the option you selected here, set [Domain Name] and [Server Name/IP
Address] for SMB servers 1 to 5 respectively.
The setting for SMB server 1 is used as the default setting for authentication.

„ Domain Name
Enter the domain name of the server. Up to 64 characters are allowed.
This setting is mandatory regardless of the SMB server specification method selected for
[SMB Server Setup].
Important
z Use the NetBIOS or Active Directory domain name for the domain name.

„ Server Name/IP Address

Enter the server name or IP address.
This setting is valid when [SMB Server Setup] is set to [By Domain & Server Names/IP
Address].
Tools

Important
z
Use the NetBIOS computer name or full computer name with DNS suffix for the server name.

5 z
For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.

Security Settings
Set the security settings.

SSL/TLS Settings
Configure the SSL/TLS settings to encrypt the communication between the server or the
client computer and the machine. Enabling SSL/TLS protects the communication from an
unauthorized access and prevents information leakage or data falsification.

„ Device Certificate - Server

Select a certificate for HTTP SSL/TLS communications.

„ HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication

Select whether or not to enable HTTP SSL/TLS communications.

„ HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number

Set the port number used for HTTP SSL/TLS communication from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 443.
Important
z Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.

220
 Connectivity & Network Setup

„ LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication

Set whether or not to enable the SSL/TLS communications for authentication and searches.
If you enable the LDAP SSL/TLS communications, you must set [Primary Server - Port
Number] and [Secondary Server - Port Number] under [LDAP Server/Directory Service
Settings].
The port number for SSL/TLS communications of the LDAP directory server is normally set
to 636.

„ SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication
Configure the SSL/TLS communications.
Note
z The Internet Fax Direct (P2P) feature does not support SMTP-SSL/TLS communication.

‹ Disabled
The machine does not communicate in SSL/TLS.
‹ STARTTLS (If Available)
The machine verifies the certificate and communicates in SSL/TLS. If the verification fails,
the machine does not communicate in SSL/TLS.

Tools
‹ STARTTLS
The machine verifies the certificate and communicates in SSL/TLS. If the verification fails,
the machine cannot perform communication. 5
‹ SSL/TLS
The machine communicates in SSL/TLS.

„ ThinPrint-SSL/TLS Communication
Select whether or not to enable the SSL/TLS communications.

„ Device Certificate - Client

Select a certificate for HTTP SSL/TLS communications.

„ Verify Remote Server Certificate

When the machine is operated as an SSL client, select whether or not to verify the
certificate of the remote server.

S/MIME Settings
Configure the S/MIME settings to use encryption or signature option on the transmission of
e-mail or fax.

„ Device Certificate - S/MIME

Select a certificate for S/MIME communications.
Reference
z For more information on the certificate, refer to "Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" (P.405).

„ S/MIME Communication
Select whether or not to enable S/MIME communications.

„ Receive Untrusted E-mail

If you select [No], the machine does not receive the following e-mail:

221
 Tools

z E-mails other than e-mail sent by S/MIME when [S/MIME Communication] is set to
[Enabled].
z
E-mails that fail to attach a signature or verification.
z E-mails that are attached with an expired certificate.

„ Receive Untrusted Internet Fax

If you select [No], the machine does not receive the following Internet fax:
z
Internet faxes other than the Internet fax sent by S/MIME when [S/MIME
Communication] is set to [Enabled].
z Internet faxes that fail to attach a signature or verification.
z
Internet faxes that are attached with an expired certificate.

„ Message Digest Algorithm

Select a message digest algorithm. Select from [SHA-1], [MD5] and [SHA-256].

„ Message Encryption Method

Set the encryption method for mail contents. Select from [3DES], [RC2-40], [RC2-64], [RC2-
128], [AES-128], [AES-192], and [AES-256].
Tools

„ Split Encrypted E-mail

5 Select whether or not to split an outgoing encrypted e-mail for each recipient.

„ Split Encrypted Internet Fax

Select whether or not to split an outgoing encrypted Internet fax for each recipient.

„ Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail

Select whether or not to always add a digital signature to outgoing e-mails. You can also
select the setting in which the machine asks to add a digital signature to the e-mail
whenever you send.

„ Signing Certificate for E-mail Attachment

Select the certificate to use for attaching a signature to e-mails.

„ Digital Signature - Outgoing Internet Fax

Select whether or not to always add a digital signature to outgoing Internet faxes. You can
also select the setting in which the machine asks to add a digital signature to the Internet
fax whenever you send.

„ Certificate Auto Store

Select whether or not to automatically store an S/MIME certificate attached with the e-
mail when receiving e-mail from an address registered on the Address Book.

PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature Settings

Configure signature settings of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS documents.
Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

222
 Connectivity & Network Setup

„ Device Certificate
Select a certificate to use for the signature.
Reference
z For more information on the certificate, refer to "Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" (P.405).

„ PDF Signature
Select the setting for PDF signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add visible
signature], [Always add invisible signature], or [Select during send].

„ PDF Signature Hash Algorithm

Select the setting for PDF Signature Hash Algorithm from [SHA-1] or [SHA-256].

„ DocuWorks Signature
Select the setting for DocuWorks signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add
signature], or [Select during send].
Important
z
The DocuWorks documents with DocuWorks signature are available on the following versions of DocuWorks
software.
z
When [SHA-1] is selected: DocuWorks 5.0 or later

Tools
z
When [SHA-256] is selected: DocuWorks 8.0 or later

„ DocuWorks Signature Hash Algorithm

5
Select the setting for the hash algorithm when using DocuWorks signature from [SHA-1] or
[SHA-256].

„ XPS Signature
Select the setting for XPS Signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add invisible
signature], or [Select during send].
Note
z
XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

IPsec
Note
z This item is not displayed when Secondary Ethernet (optional) is installed on the machine.

„ IPsec Settings
Configure the IPsec settings to use encryption or signature option on the transmission of e-
mail or fax.
Note
z For [IKE Authentication Method], [Preshared Key], [DH Group], and [PFS Settings], consult your network
administrator.
z IKE Authentication Method
Set the IKE authentication method. Select from [Authenticate by Preshared Key] or
[Authenticate by Digital Signature].
z Preshared Key
Enter a preshared key.
This setting is valid when [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by
Preshared Key].

223
 Tools

z Device Certificate
Select a certificate for IPsec communications.
Select a certificate when [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by Digital
Signature]. A self-signed certificate created by CentreWare Internet Services cannot be
used.
Reference
z For more information on a certificate, refer to "Types of Certificate" (P.406).
z
IPsec Communication
Select whether or not to enable IPsec communications.
z IKE SA Life Time
Specify IKE SA lifetime from 5 to 28800 minutes in 1 minute increments.
Note
z
The value must be greater than the value set in [IPsec SA Life Time].
z IPsec SA Life Time
Specify IPsec SA lifetime from 300 to 172800 seconds in 1 second increments.
Note
Tools

z The value must be smaller than the value set in [IKE SA Life Time].
z DH Group

5 Set DH group. Select from [G1] or [G2].

z
PFS Settings
Select whether or not to enable PFS.
z
Destination IPv4 Address
Set the IPv4 address of the destination.
When entering an IP address, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where
"xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.
z
Destination IPv6 Address
Set the IPv6 address of the destination.
When entering an IP address, enter the address in the format
"xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a hexadecimal value.
z Communicate with Non-IPsec Devices
Select whether or not to communicate with non-IPSec devices.

IEEE 802.1X Settings / IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet 1), IEEE 802.1X Settings
(Ethernet 2)
Note
z
When both of the [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 1)] setting and the [TCP/IP - Network Settings
(Ethernet 2)] setting are configured, you can configure individual IEEE802.1X settings for each Ethernet
interface.
z The title of this setting item differs depending on the Ethernet interface configuration: When single Ethernet
interface is used, [IEEE 802.1X Settings] is displayed. When two Ethernet interfaces are used, [IEEE 802.1X
Settings (Ethernet 1)] and [IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet 2)] are displayed.
z
When any interface names are specified in [Ethernet1 - Network Name] and [Ethernet2 - Network Name], the
specified names are displayed instead of "Ethernet1" and "Ethernet2" of [IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet 1)]
and [IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet 2)] respectively.

224
 Connectivity & Network Setup

„ IEEE 802.1x Settings

Configure the IEEE 802.1x settings.
z IEEE 802.1X
Set whether or not to use IEEE 802.1x authentication.
z
Authentication Method
Select from [EAP-MD5], [EAP-MS-CHAPv2], [PEAP/MS-CHAPv2], or [EAP-TLS].
z Login User Name
Enter the login user name with up to 128 characters.
z Login Password
Enter the login password with up to 128 characters.
z
Server Certificate Verification
Select whether or not to verify a server certificate when [PEAP/MS-CHAPv2] is selected in
[Authentication Method].

Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings

Configure the settings for certificate revocation retrieval.

Tools
„ Level of Certificate Verification
Select a level of certificate verification from [Low], [Medium], or [High]. 5
Selecting [Low] does not verify the validity of certificates.
Selecting [Medium] verifies the validity of certificates. If a certificate cannot be verified
because of a network error or any other problems, the certificate is determined as valid.
Selecting [High] verifies the validity of certificates, and determines only certificates that
have not been revoked as valid.

„ Retrieval of Certificate Status

Select the method to verify the validity of certificates.
Select [By Retrieving CRL] if the machine retrieves a CRL (Certificate Revocation List) from
the validation authority to verify the revocation status of the certificate. Select [By OCSP] if
the machine uses OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol), which can verify the validity
revocation status of the certificate, to have the certificate authority or validation authority
check the revocation status.

„ Auto Retrieval of CRL

Select whether or not to automatically retrieve a CRL.

„ CRL Retrieval Time-Out

Specify a time-out value to retrieve a CRL from 5 to 60 seconds in 1 second increments.

„ Send Query to OCSP Responder With

Select how to access an OCSP responder from [URL as Specified in Certificate] or [URL as
Specified by Administrator].

„ URL of OCSP Responder

Enter the URL of an OCSP responder when [URL as Specified by Administrator] has been
selected for [Send Query to OCSP Responder With]. Up to 255 characters are allowed.

225
 Tools

„ OCSP Communication Time-Out

Specify a time-out value for OCSP communication from 5 to 60 seconds in 1 second
increments.

Other Settings
You can set the following network related items.

Protocol to Receive E-mail

Select from [SMTP] and [POP3] depending on your environment.

Add Domain Name to User Name

Select whether or not to add domain names to user names.

Output Destination for E-mail

Specify an output destination for e-mail print. Selecting [Auto] enables the machine to
select the output destination, which is set as the default output destination.
Tools

Domain Filtering
Set the domain filtering settings for the E-mail, Internet Fax, and IP fax (SIP) features.
5
„ Domain Filtering
When [Allow Domains] is selected, you can specify domains to permit transmissions. When
[Block Domains] is selected, you can specify domains to prohibit transmissions.

„ Domains 1 to 50
When [Domain Filtering] is set to [Allow Domains] or [Block Domains], you can specify up to
50 domains to allow or block transmissions.
Selecting [Change Settings] allows you to enter the domain name using a keyboard
displayed with up to 64 characters.

226
 Print Service Settings

Print Service Settings

In [Print Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Print feature.
Using CentreWare Internet Services, you can make more detailed settings.
Reference
z For more information, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.327).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
"Allocate Memory" (P.227)
"Delete Form" (P.229)
"Register Google Cloud Print" (P.229)

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Print Service Settings].

Reference
z For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select an item to set or change.

Tools
Allocate Memory
For each interface, set the memory capacity of the receiving buffer (temporary storage for 5
data sent from the client).
You can change the receiving buffer capacity according to its use and purpose.Increasing
the receiving buffer capacity may allow a client to be released sooner from an interface.
Important
z
If you change the memory capacity, the memory is reset, thus all data stored in memory area is erased.
z You cannot allocate more memory beyond its memory capacity. When you turn the machine on, and the size
set exceeds the total memory size, the system automatically adjusts the memory size.

Note
z When a port is set to [Disabled], the corresponding items to the port do not appear.
z Depending on the amount of data sent from the client, increasing the memory capacity may not change the
time taken to release the client.

PostScript Memory
Specify a value for the PostScript memory capacity in 0.25 MB increments.
Note
z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,
contact out Customer Support Center.
z The maximum amount of memory you can allocate varies according to the amount of free space available in
memory.

ART IV, ESC/P, 201H Form Memory

Displays where to save forms for use with ESC/P-K.
Note
z
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

227
 Tools

HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory

Set the working memory area when HP-GL/2 auto layout memory is used. When the hard
disk is installed, the area is fixed to the hard disk. When the hard disk is not installed, specify
the area for working memory.

Job Ticket Memory

Specify the amount of memory to use for job tickets from 0.25 to 8.00 MB in 0.25 MB
increments.
Note
z The maximum amount of memory you can allocate varies according to the amount of free space available in
memory.

Receiving Buffer - USB

Set the receiving buffer for USB.
You can specify a value from 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments.

Receiving Buffer - LPD

Tools

Note
z You may not be able to change the [Receiving Buffer - LPD] setting because of the setting of [LPD Print
Queue]. For more information on LPD Print Queue, refer to "LPD Print Queue" (P.234).
5 „ No Spooling
Does not use spooling. While LPD printing is performed for one client, data cannot be
received over the same interface from another client. Specify a value for the dedicated LPD
receiving buffer memory capacity from 1024 to 2048 KB in 32 KB increments.

„ Spool to Memory
Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses memory. When this setting is
selected, specify the memory capacity of a receiving buffer for spooling from 0.50 MB to
32.00 MB in 0.25 MB increments.
Note that print data exceeding the memory capacity set is not accepted. In such cases,
select [Spool to Hard Disk] or [No Spooling].

„ Spool to Hard Disk

Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses the hard disk.

Receiving Buffer - IPP

„ No Spooling
Does not use spooling. While IPP printing is performed for one client, data cannot be
received over the same interface from another client.
Specify a value for the dedicated IPP receiving buffer memory capacity from 64 to 1024 KB
in 32 KB increments.

„ Spool to Hard Disk

Receiving Buffer - Port 9100

Set the Port 9100 receiving buffer.
Specify a value from 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments.

228
 Print Service Settings

Delete Form
You can delete registered ESC/P-K forms.

1 Select [Delete Form].

2 Select the print mode to delete forms.

„ESC/P
Deletes ESC/P-K emulation forms.

„Form Number

Tools
When you select an item to delete, you can enter the form number.

„Form Name
After you enter the form number and select [Confirm], the form name matching the form
5
number entered appears.

3 Enter the form number with the numeric keypad, and select [Confirm].

4 Check the form name, and then select [Delete Data].

Register Google Cloud Print

This setting is displayed when you register the machine to Google Cloud Print.
Reference
z
For more information, refer to the User Guide (For Google Cloud Print).

Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the paper used in the printer.

Print Area
Set whether or not to expand the print area.
Reference
z For more information about the printable area, refer to "Printable Area" (P.646).
z For more information on the extended printable area, refer to "Extended Printable Area" (P.646).

Substitute Tray
When there is no tray containing the paper size selected by the Auto Paper selection, select
whether or not to print with paper loaded in another paper tray. In the event of using a

229
 Tools

substitute tray, select the paper size from [Use Larger Size], [Use Closest Size], or [Select
Tray 5].
Note
z
When documents are printed using emulation such as ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2, the substitute tray setting is not
valid and a message prompting you to load paper displayed on the screen.

„ Display Message
Does not use a substitute tray, but displays a paper loading message.

„ Use Larger Size

Switches to the next larger size of paper than previously selected and prints at the same
magnification.

„ Use Closest Size

Switches to the closest size of paper to previously selected and prints. If necessary, the
image is automatically reduced in size on the paper.
Note
z
If there is a client specification, the client specification is prioritized.

„ Select Tray 5
Tools

Prints using the paper loaded in Tray 5.

5 Paper Type Mismatch

Set an action to take when the paper type loaded in the paper tray does not match the
paper type specified when a print job is submitted.

„ Print
Prints using the paper loaded in the tray.

„ Display Confirmation Screen

A confirmation screen appears to ask whether or not to print the job.
If a paper type mismatch occurs during printing, the machine ignores the paper type
specified and prints the job in accordance with [Paper Tray Priority], [Paper Size], or
[Substitute Tray].
Reference
z
For more information, refer to "Automatic Tray Selection" (P.66).

„ Display Paper Supply Screen

Load another type of paper in the selected tray by following the message displayed on the
touch screen, and then select the [Start] button. The machine changes the paper type
setting for the tray and prints the job.
Important
z
The machine keeps the changed paper type setting after the printing.
z Even if you select the [Start] button without loading another type of paper in the selected tray, the machine
considers the paper type has been changed and prints the job. Consequently, the print quality cannot be
guaranteed because the paper type loaded in the paper tray does not match the paper type specified.

230
 Print Service Settings

Unregistered Forms
Set whether or not to print a job if a form specified for printing in a form data file (overlay
printing) is not registered on the machine. If you specify [Print], only the data is printed
because the specified form is not present.
Note
z This setting works only when the emulation feature is used.

Resume Job After Print Error

Set whether or not to automatically cancel a print job when the print job was suspended
because of an error.
Note
z
The machine will enter the off-line state to restrict subsequent print jobs.

„ Job Resumes Automatically

Automatically cancels the print job to print subsequent jobs.

„ Resume by User
Displays a confirmation screen before cancelling the print job. After the confirmation, the

Tools
machine cancels the print job to print the subsequent jobs.
Important
z When [Resume by User] is selected, pressing the <Interrupt> button to suspend printing temporarily will not
work. 5
When Paper Jam Occurs
Specify how the machine handles print jobs after a paper jam is cleared.

„ Resume Job after Jam Clearance

When a paper jam is cleared, the machine automatically resumes printing from the next
page of the page which was output correctly.

„ Delete Job
The machine cancels printing and removes the print job.
Note
z For print files stored in a folder such as Charge Print, Private Charge Print, Secure Print, and Sample Print, the
machine resumes printing after the paper jam is cleared.

Print User ID
When printing using a print driver, specify whether or not to print user ID set in the print
driver on paper. The first 64 letters of the user ID are printed.
Select a position to print from [Top Left], [Top Right], [Bottom Left], and [Bottom Right].
Note
z To use the Print user ID feature, the user ID must be set in the print driver beforehand. For more information,
refer to the help of the print driver.
z When user ID set in the print driver is not available, "Unknown User" is printed.

231
 Tools

Banner Sheet
You can output a banner sheet to separate different jobs by users not to be mixed the
outputs. The machine outputs the banner sheet before or after the job.
A date, time, user name, and file name are printed on the banner sheet.
Note
z Even if stapling is selected, banner sheets are not stapled.
z When a document is printed from a Macintosh, the document name is not printed on the banner sheet.
z When printed, banner sheets are counted by meter.

„ Off
Does not print banner sheets.

„ Start Sheet
Prints a banner sheet before a print job.

„ End Sheet
Prints a banner sheet after a print job.

„ Start Sheet & End Sheet

Tools

Prints a banner sheet before and after a print job.

5 „ Allow Print Driver to Override

Select the check box to print a banner sheet according to the banner sheet print settings of
the print driver.

Banner Sheet Offset

Set whether or not to offset when banner sheets are output.

Banner Sheet Tray

Select a paper tray used for banner sheets.
This setting applies to Trays 1 to 4. You cannot apply this setting to Tray 5.

PostScript Default Color

Set the default value for Post Script output color.
Note
z
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

232
 Print Service Settings

PostScript Paper Supply

Select whether the PostScript Deferred Media Selection feature is enabled or disabled when
the paper tray is selected. Select [Auto Select] to enable the PostScript Deferred Media
Selection feature, or [Select Paper Tray] to disable the feature.
When PostScript data generated by other than the print driver is printed, the tray is not
selected as intended depending on the description method of the PostScript data. In this
case, select [Select Paper Tray].
Note
z Even when you select [Auto Select], the setting is automatically changed to [Select Paper Tray] when [Use
Larger Size] or [Use Closest Size] is selected for [Substitute Tray] and print PostScript data.
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

PostScript Font Absence

Set an action to take when a PostScript font specified in a job is not present.
Note
z
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Tools
„ Cancel Printing
Cancels printing.

„ Substitute Font and Print

5
Prints using a substitute font. Courier is used as the substitute font.

PostScript Font Substitution

Set whether or not to use ATCx as a substitute if a PostScript font specified in a job is not
present.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

XPS Print Ticket Processing

Set how the machine processes the print tickets written in XPS documents.
Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

„ Off
Does not process print tickets.

„ Standard Mode
Uses the standard mode to process print tickets.

„ Compatible Mode
Uses the Microsoft®-compliant mode to process print tickets.

233
 Tools

LPD Print Queue

Set the LPD print sequence.
Note
z If you change the [LPD Print Queue] setting, the [Receiving Buffer - LPD] setting may automatically be
changed. For more information on Receiving Buffer - LPD Spool, refer to "Receiving Buffer - LPD" (P.228).

„ Data Processing Order

Prints jobs in the order of becoming print-ready status after receiving the jobs.
If you instruct the machine to print jobs of multiple documents continuously, the machine
may preferentially print a job which was sent later depending on the time for data
processing.

„ Job Submission Order

Prints jobs in the order of lpr print submission.
Important
z This setting is valid only when [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [Spool to Hard Disk]. When any other setting,
printing is performed in [Data Processing Order].

OCR Font Glyphs (0 x 5C)

Tools

Allows you to select [Backslash] or [Japanese Yen Sign] to print 0x5C character when the
OCR fonts are used.
5

234
 Scan Service Settings

Scan Service Settings

In [Scan Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Scan services.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. The items displayed on the screen vary depending on the
optional components installed. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z When [Scan to Fax Server] is selected in the System Settings, [Scan Service Settings] is replaced with [Scan/
Fax Service Settings].

Reference
z
For information on scanner environment settings, refer to "Scanner Environment Settings" (P.359).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
"Screen Defaults" (P.235)
"Scan Defaults" (P.236)
"Scan to PC Defaults" (P.239)
"Original Size Defaults" (P.240)
"Output Size Defaults" (P.240)

Tools
"Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.241)
"Other Settings" (P.241)

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Scan Service Settings].
5
Reference
z For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select an item to set or change.

Screen Defaults
You can set the items that appear in the First Tab screen. The First Tab means thescreen
displayed when you select the following tabs in the [E-mail], [Store to Folder], [Scan to PC],
[Store & Send Link], and [Store to USB] screens.
You can set the items that appear in the First Tab screen. The First Tab means the screen
displayed when you select the following tabs in the [E-mail], [Store to Folder], [Network
Scanning], [Scan to PC], [Store & Send Link], and [Store to USB] screens.
z The [E-mail] tab of the E-mail service
z
The [Store to Folder] tab of the Store to Folder service
z The [Network Scanning] tab of the Network Scanning service
z The [Scan to PC] tab of the Scan to PC service
z
The [Store & Send Link] tab of the Store & Send Link service
z The [Store to USB] tab of the Store to USB service
Note
z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,
contact out Customer Support Center.

235
 Tools

Email Screen Default

Set the default screen that appears when [E-mail] on the Services Home screen is selected.
Select from [First Tab] and [Address Book].

Scan to PC Screen Default

Set the default screen that appears when [Scan to PC] on the Services Home screen is
selected. Select from [First Tab] and [Address Book].

1st Tab - Features Allocation

You can set the features that appear in the second to the fourth column of the lower part in
the First Tab screen.
Select a column by choosing from [Feature in 1st Column] to [Feature in 4th Column].
And set the item to be displayed from [Not Selected], [Color Scanning], [2 Sided Scanning],
[Original Type], [File Format], [Resolution], [Lighten / Darken], [Reduce / Enlarge], [Mixed
Size Originals], and [Original Orientation].
[2 Sided Scanning] and [Mixed Size Originals] are not displayed on the screen for the
models without the document feeder.
Tools

Reduce/Enlarge - Buttons 2 to 5
This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected for one of thefeatures that appear
5 in the second to the fourth column in [1st Tab - Features Allocation].
Select the magnification ratio displayed in [Reduce/Enlarge] from the Reduce/Enlarge
Presets registered.
Reference
z
For information on Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.241).

Scan Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Scan services. When the machine is turned on, or the
machine exits the Power Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the
machine resets to the default values set here. Setting frequently used features and values
as the defaults can avoid extra operations required during the use of the machine.
The values set here become valid after the machine turned off and then on.
Reference
z For more information on each setting item, refer to "Scan" in the User Guide.

Color Scanning
Set the default value for [Color Scanning] in the First Tab.

Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the First Tab.

File Format
Set the default value for [File Format] in the First Tab.

236
 Scan Service Settings

Optimize PDF For Quick Web View

Set the default value for [Optimize For Quick Web View] of [File Format] in the First Tab.

Thumbnail - Outgoing E-mail

For the E-mail feature, set the default value for [Add Thumbnail] when [DocuWorks] or
[XPS] is selected for [File Format] in the First Tab.
Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

Thumbnail - Scan to PC
For the Scan to PC feature, set the default value for [Add Thumbnail] when [DocuWorks] or
[XPS] in selected for [File Format] in the First Tab.
Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

Preview
Set whether or not to place a check mark in the [Preview] checkbox of the First Tab by

Tools
default.

Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in the [Advanced Settings]
5
screen.

Contrast
Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Advanced Settings]
screen. The contrast setting is valid when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].

Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Image Options] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.

Background Suppression
This feature allows you to suppress the background color of documents.
Set the default value for [Background Suppression] of [Image Enhancement] in the
[Advanced Settings] screen.

Shadow Suppression
Set the default value for [Shadow Suppression] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.

Color Space
Set the default value for [Color Space] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Important
z When [Device Color Space] is selected as default and "Color Space" (P.242) is set to [Disabled], [Auto Detect]
of [Color Scanning] in the First Tab does not appear. In addition, when the High Compression Image Kit
(optional) is installed to the machine, [MRC High Compression] and [Specific Color] under [File Format] is not
displayed either.

237
 Tools

Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Resolution
Set the default value for [Resolution] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can select from [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], and [600 dpi].

Mixed Size Originals

Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Edge Erase
Set the default value for [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can select
from [All Edges] and [Parallel Edges].

Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges

Set the default value for [Top & Bottom] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Tools

Specify a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges

5 Set the default value for [Left & Right] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Specify a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase

Set the default value for [Center] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Specify a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Quality/File Size
Set the default value for [Quality/File Size] in the [Filling Options] screen.
Select from [Quality: Normal/File Size: Small], [Quality: Higher +1/File Size: Larger +1],
[Quality: Higher +2/File Size: Larger +2], [Quality: Higher +3/File Size: Larger +3], and
[Quality: Maximum/File Size: Largest].

E-mail Subject
Set the default value for the e-mail subject. Up to 128 characters can be entered for the
subject.

238
 Scan Service Settings

Store & Send Link - E-mail Subject

Set the default value for the subject used when sending an e-mail to an authenticated user
to notify the URL of the location to retrieve the scanned data. Up to 128 characters can be
entered for the subject.
Note
z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,
contact out Customer Support Center.

Reference
z
For more information on the Store & Send Link feature, refer to "Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" > "Step 2 Selecting the Features" in
the User Guide.

E-mail Encryption
Set the default value for [Encryption] in the [E-mail Options] in the [E-mail] screen.
Note
z
This feature appears only when the root certificate for a remote server for remote authentication is set.

Searchable Text
Set the default value for [Searchable Text] in the [File Format] screen under the First Tab.

Tools
Note
z
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center. 5
Language of the Original
Set the default language to identify the text on a document.
Note
z To enable the machine to recognize both English and double-byte character languages (Japanese, Korean,
Traditional Chinese, or Simplified Chinese) in a document containing both languages, select the double-byte
character language in [Language of the Original], and also select [300 dpi] in [Resolution] when scanning a
document. English characters, however, may have the lower recognition rate than when [English] is selected
in [Language of the Original].
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Searchable - Text Compression

Set whether or not to compress searchable text when using the OCR feature.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Scan to PC Defaults

Transfer Protocol
Set the default value for the transfer protocol used for transfer from [FTP], [SMB], or [SMB
(UNC Format)].

239
 Tools

Login Credential to Access Destination

Set whether or not to use a user authenticated by the remote server when the user logs in to
the destination computer for the Scan to PC service. This setting is effective for remote
authentication.

„ None
Does not use the remotely authenticated user.

„ Remotely Authenticated User

Uses the user name and the password of the remotely authenticated user for login.

User Name for FTP Scan

When the remotely authenticated user name is used as a login user name for FTP transfers
for the Scan to PC service, specify whether or not to include the domain part of the
credentials.

„ User Name Only

Uses only the user name part (before "@") of the login credential for the login name. The
domain part is not used.
Tools

„ Add Domain Name

5 Uses the full login credential name, including the domain name (after "@"), for the user
name.

Original Size Defaults

Set the document size displayed in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You
can assign a document size to each of the 17 buttons other than [Auto Detect].
If you frequently use non-standard size paper for scanning, assigning the paper sizes to the
buttons will save your time to specify the size each time.

„ A/B Series Size

You can select a size from A and B series sizes such as A4 and B5.

„ Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series sizes such as 8.5 x 11" and 11 x 17".

„ Others
You can select a size from other sizes than the above series such as photo and postcard
sizes.

„ Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to
297 mm in 1 mm increments.

Output Size Defaults

Set the sizes to display in [Output Size] when selecting [Enter Output Size] for scanning
documents at [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign any output size to output size buttons.
Assigning the output sizes to the buttons will save your time to specify the size each time.

240
 Scan Service Settings

„ A/B Series Size

You can select a size from A and B series sizes such as A4 and B5.

„ Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series sizes such as 8.5 x 11" and 11 x 17".

„ Others
You can select a size from other sizes than the above series such as photo and postcard
sizes.

Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed when [Proportional %]
is selected under [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign any magnification to the Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons other than[100%].

„ Preset %
Select a ratio from standard magnification ratios.

Tools
„ Variable %
You can specify a magnification from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

Other Settings
5
You can configure other settings related to the Scan services specifications.

Memory Full Procedure

If there is insufficient hard disk memory while scanning a document, a screen appears
asking you how you want to handle the partially stored data.
Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a
certain time has elapsed in the confirmation screen.
Reference
z
You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to "Auto Job Release" (P.148).

„ Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.

„ Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and starts sending the document partially stored.

Maximum Stored Pages

Set the maximum number of pages stored for a scan document. You can specify from 1 to
999 pages.

Saturation
Set the saturation when scanning a full color document. When a document is scanned,
saturation is automatically adjusted according to the value set here.

241
 Tools

Background Suppression Level

Set the background suppression level. This is valid when [Background Suppression] is set to
[Auto Suppression].
The larger the value is, the stronger the effect of suppressing the background becomes.

Shadow Suppression Level

Set the shadow suppression level. This is valid when [Shadow Suppression] is set to [Auto
Suppression].

Color Space
Set whether or not to display the Color Space feature.
When you select [Enabled], the [Color Space] button is displayed on the [Advanced
Settings] screen for the [E-mail], [Store to Folder], [Scan to PC], and [Job Template].

TIFF Format
Set the TIFF format for scanned data. You can select either [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].
Tools

Image Transfer Screen

Select whether or not to display a message when the scan of a document completes.
5 „ Disabled
Does not display a scan completion message.

„ Display Message at End of Scanning

Displays a scan completion message.

„ Display Scan & Transfer Screens

Displays the transfer screen after scan completion. The scan completion message is not
displayed.

„ Display Message at End of Transfer

Displays a transfer completion message.

Filename Format
For the Store to Folder, Store to USB, Scan to PC, and Store & Send Link services, you can
select the file name format.
You can select [DDMMYYYYHHMMSS] or [img-MDDHHMMSS].
Note
z When you select [DDMMYYYYHHMMSS], the order depends on the setting of [Date Format] in [System
Settings] > [Machine Clock/Timers] > [Date].
z When you select [img-MDDHHMMSS], October, November, and December are represented by X, Y, and Z
respectively.

242
 Scan Service Settings

Add Date to E-mail Attachment Name

Set whether or not to add dates and page number after file names when E-mail is selected.
The file name depends on the setting of [Filename Format] and whether or not the file
name is automatically generated.
The followings are examples of the file names:
Enabled
1) When a file name is automatically generated:
20121002023309-0001.tif or img-X02023309-0001.tif
2) When a file name is specified:
Report-20121002023309-0001.tif or Report-X02023309-0001.tif
Disabled
1) When a file name is automatically generated: 20121002023309-0001.tif or img.tif
2) When a file name is specified: Report.tif
Note
z This setting is also applied to the file names of the Internet Fax service.
z When you select [DDMMYYYYHHMMSS] for [Filename Format], even if you select [Disabled], the date is

Tools
added to the file names.

Searchable - Page Orientation

Set whether or not to handle the character orientation to be upright when the machine
5
scans a document with OCR (Optical Character Recognition).
Note
z
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

„ Auto Upright Orientation

Handles the character orientation upright regardless of the document orientation.

„ According to Original Orientation

Handles the character orientation depending on the document orientation.

URL File Expiration

Set the retention period for files stored with the Store & Send Link feature. You can specify
a value from 1 to 168 hours in 1 hour increments. The default value is 3 hours.
Note
z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,
contact out Customer Support Center.

243
 Tools

Generation of URL Link

Set the format of URLs generated with the Store & Send Link feature. Select either [Use IP
Address] or [Use FQDN].
The following are examples of URLs:
If [Use IP Address] is selected:
http://192.0.2.1/scanUrl/doc1/get.htm
If [Use FQDN] is selected:
http://pc1.mycompany.co.jp/scanUrl/doc1/get.htm
Note
z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,
contact out Customer Support Center.

Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size

Set the maximum data size of files that can be stored for the Store & Send Link feature. You
can specify the value from 1 to 200 MB in 1 MB increments. The default value is 200 MB.
Note
z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,
Tools

contact out Customer Support Center.

Print Login Name on PDF Files

5 If scanning a document in PDF format when local machine authentication is enabled, you
can set whether or not to add an authentication user name as the Author in the document
properties of the PDF document.

244
 Fax Service Settings

Fax Service Settings

In [Fax Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Fax service.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. The items displayed on the screen vary depending on the
optional components installed. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z You can register new address book entries in [Add Address Book Entry] under [Setup]. For more information,
refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.289).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
"Screen Defaults" (P.245)
"Fax Defaults" (P.246)
"Fax Control" (P.248)
"Fax Received Options" (P.255)
"Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.257)
"Original Size Defaults" (P.257)
"Local Terminal Information" (P.258)

Tools
"Internet Fax Control" (P.259)

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [Fax Service Settings].

5
Reference
z For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select an item to set or change.

Screen Defaults
You can set items displayed on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.

Fax Screen Default

Set the default screen that appears when the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen is selected in the
Services Home screen.
Select from [Fax Tab] or [Address Book].

1st Tab - Features Allocation

Set the features that appear on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.

„ Feature in 2nd to 4th Column

You can set the features that appear in the second to the fourth column of the lower part
on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
Select the item to be displayed from [Not Selected], [2 Sided Faxing], [Original Type],
[Resolution], [Confirmation Options], [Starting Rate], [Transmission Header], [Mixed Size
Originals], and [Reduce / Enlarge].
[2 Sided Faxing] and [Mixed Size Originals] are not displayed on the screen for the models
without the document feeder.

245
 Tools

Reduce / Enlarge - Button 3 - 5

This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd to 4th Column].
You can set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed under [Reduce/
Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can assign any magnification to the
Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3 - 5.

Transmission Screen
Set whether or not to display transmission status during transmission.

Display Fax Line Selection

Set whether or not to enable you to select a fax line (port) on the [Fax / Internet Fax]
screen.
Note
z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,
contact out Customer Support Center.

„ Display Fax Line Selection

Specify whether or not to displaythe [Line Selection] option on the [Fax / Internet Fax]
Tools

screen.

„ Fax Line 1 - Name to Fax Line 3 - Name

5 Specify the names for each fax line.
Note
z
The number of lines displayed on the screen depends on the options installed on the machine.

Fax Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Fax services. When the machine is turned on, or the
machine exits from the Power Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the
machine resets to the default values specified under this menu. By setting frequently used
features and values as the defaults, you can simplify operations.
Reference
z
For more information on each setting item, refer to "Fax" in the User Guide.

Resolution
Set the default value for [Resolution] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] and [Layout Adjustment]
screens.

Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] and [Layout Adjustment]
screens.

Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] and [Layout
Adjustment] screens.

246
 Fax Service Settings

Mixed Size Originals

Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Preview
Set whether or not to place a check mark in the [Preview] checkbox of the First Tab by
default.

Stamp
Set the default value for [Stamp] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Skip Blank Pages

Tools
Set the default value for [2 Sided Scanning] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] and [Layout
Adjustment] screens to [2 Sided (First Page 1 Sided)].
Note
z This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. 5
Starting Rate
Set the default value for [Starting Rate] in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.

Delay Start - Specific Time

Set the default value for [Specific Time] of [Priority Send/Delay Start] in the [Fax/Internet
Fax Options] screen when [Specific Time] is selected for [Delay Start].

Transmission Header Text

Set the default value for [Transmission Header Text] in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options]
screen.

Confirmation Options
Set the default value for [Confirmation Options] of [Acknowledgement Report] in the [Fax/
Internet Fax Options] screen.
Note
z You can select Delivery Receipts or Read Receipts in [Delivery Confirmation Method]. For more information
on the delivery confirmation method, refer to "Delivery Confirmation Method" (P.260).

Delivery Receipts/Read Receipts

Set the default value for [Read Receipts] or [Delivery Receipt] of [Acknowledgement
Report] in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.
Note
z You can select Delivery Receipts or Read Receipts in [Delivery Confirmation Method]. For more information
on the delivery confirmation method, refer to "Delivery Confirmation Method" (P.260).

247
 Tools

Internet Fax Profile

Set the default value for [Internet Fax Profile] in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.

Internet Fax Subject

Set the default value for [Internet Fax Subject] in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen. Up
to 128 single-byte characters can be entered for the subject.

Internet Fax Encryption

Set the default value for [Encryption] in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.
Note
z This feature appears only when the root certificate for a remote server for remote authentication (except for
ApeosWare Authentication Management or Authentication Agent) is set.

Fax Control
You can configure the settings related to fax control.

Extension
Tools

To set which port to use when you send a fax to an extension.

Note
5 z
This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Re-enter Recipients
Set whether to re-enter the recipient after once specifying the recipient, to reduce the risk
of sending a fax, an IP fax, or an Internet fax to the wrong address. When Re-enter
Recipients is set to [Enter Twice], if you specify the recipient by entering the phone number,
or by selecting from the Address Book, the screen prompting you to re-enter the recipient
appears. If the same recipient has been entered, the transmission process will start.

Re-enter Broadcast Recipients

This setting is required when you selected [Enter Twice] for [Re-enter Recipients]. Set
whether or not to allow the Broadcast Send.

„ Enter Once Only

Allows the Broadcast Send. No need to re-enter the recipient.

„ Enter Twice
Allows the Broadcast Send. Re-entering the recipient is required.

„ Broadcast Disabled
No Broadcast Send is allowed.

Re-enter Speed Dial Recipients

This setting is required when you selected [Enter Twice] for [Re-enter Recipients]. Select
how to re-enter a recipient after the first entry.

248
 Fax Service Settings

„ Enter Once Only

No need to re-enter the recipient.

„ Enter Twice
Use the Speed Dial feature to re-enter the recipient.

„ Re-enter Fax Number or E-mail

You cannot enter the speed dial when you re-enter the number or address. Use the fax
number, SIP User ID (Sign-in Name), phone number or SIP user name for IP fax, or e-mail
address to enter the recipient.

Re-enter Group Recipients

Specifies whether you need to re-enter group addresses after entering a group address.

„ Group Send Disabled

No group recipient is allowed.

„ Enter Once Only

No need to re-enter the group recipient.

Tools
„ Enter Twice
Re-entering the group recipient is required. 5
Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab
Specify whether or not to show the [Enable Broadcast] checkbox in the [Fax/Internet Fax]
screen to explicitly express broadcast directions.

Chain Dial
Allows you to combine the fax numbers registered in one touch button, speed dial, and
address book respectively and the numbers entered using the numeric keypad to specify as
one recipient. You can select from [No] or [Yes].
Note
z
This item is valid when [Address Book Type] under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Address Book Settings] is set
to [Type 1].

Manual Redial List - Saved Entries

Specify the number of redial destinations saved.

Manual Redial List - Dial Mode

Specify the destination type saved as a redial destination number.
When you deselect all the check boxes, the Redial feature becomes disabled.

Transmission Header Text - Polling

Set whether or not to attach a transmission header to a polling file.
A polling is the function that a document is stored in the machine's public folder for polling,
and can then be sent by an operation from the other party.

249
 Tools

Polled Files - Auto Delete

Set whether or not to automatically delete a polling file after transmission.

Rotate 90 degrees
Set whether or not to automatically rotate a document if its image must be reduced in size
unless it is rotated.
Note
z If an arbitrary magnification is specified in [Reduce/Enlarge], the Rotate 90 Degrees feature does not
function.

G3 Sender ID - Fax
When using G3 communications, you can select whether to notify G3 ID to recipients for
fax.

G3 Sender ID - IP Fax (SIP)

When using G3 communications, you can select whether to notify G3 ID to recipients for IP
Fax (SIP).
Tools

Save Undelivered Faxes

Set whether or not to save a fax document if a fax transmission fails. When [Yes] is
5 selected, the [Undelivered Faxes] button appears on the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab of
the [Job Status] screen. Select this button to send the fax document again.
Reference
z
For details on Undelivered Faxes, refer to "Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs" > "Undelivered Faxes" in the User
Guide.

Save Deleted Faxes

When [Yes] is selected for [Save Undelivered Faxes], set whether or not to save cancelled
faxes.

Saved Faxes - Auto Delete

When [Yes] is selected for [Save Undelivered Faxes], set whether or not to automatically
delete saved faxes in 24 hours.

Transmission Interval
Specify a value for the interval between the end of one transmission and the beginning of
the next, from 3 to 255 seconds in 1 second increments.
A longer transmission interval increases the total time to send a broadcast transmission,
but allows calls to be received during the standby time.

Batch Send
When the machine stores multiple faxes addressed to a destination, enabling the Batch
Send feature allows you to send them all at the same time in a single fax transmission. By
using this feature, you can reduce your communication costs. Select whether or not to
enable the Batch Send feature.
Note that a batch send is not available for manual transmissions, broadcasts, relay
broadcasts, remote folder, and delayed start transmission with a specified time before the

250
 Fax Service Settings

specified time. When a redial, resend, delayed start transmission job, or the Authentication
feature is used and different users send to the same address, a batch send is not possible.

Manual Send/Receive Default

When on-hook or off-hook is used when sending a fax, select either [Manual Receive] or
[Manual Send].
Note
z This setting is not valid for IP fax (SIP) because the IP Fax feature does not offer the Manual Send/Receive
feature option.

Fax Receiving Mode

Set the default value for [Fax Receiving Mode] in the [Machine Information] screen
displayed by pressing the <Machine Status> button. Select whether or not to receive a fax
automatically or manually.
Note
z As for IP fax (SIP), the machine always receives faxes automatically.

Border Limit

Tools
Set the length to make a page break that will be applied when the length of a received fax
document is longer than the paper length. You can specify a value from 0 to 127 mm in 1
mm increments.
This setting can conveniently be used together with the following Auto Reduce on Receipt
5
feature.

Auto Reduce On Receipt

When the length of a received fax document exceeds the paper length but is within the
page break threshold value, select whether or not to automatically reduce the image to fit
the page.
This setting can conveniently be used together with the Border Limit feature. If you select
[No], the part of the image beyond the paper length is ignored.

Receiving Paper Size

Set the method of notifying the paper size on which the received fax document will be
printed, from the receiver to the sender.

„ Tray Mode
Specify the paper tray for printing the received fax document. Only the specified paper tray
will be used for printing the received document. Multiple paper trays can be specified
except for Tray 5. If the fax document cannot be printed on the paper loaded in the
specified paper trays, the machine displays a message stating that it will be printed on the
paper loaded in Tray 5. Load paper in Tray 5 and press the <Start> button to print the
document. To cancel printing, press the <Clear All> button.

„ User Mode
Specify the paper sizes to use for printing received fax documents. Regardless of whether
the paper is loaded in the trays, only the specified size paper is used for printing. When
youselect [User Mode], select paper sizes from [A3 ], [A4 ], [A4 ], [A5 ], [B4 ], [B5
], [8.5X11" ], and [Select All]. You can select one or more paper sizes.

251
 Tools

2 Pages Up On Receipt
Set whether or not to print two pages of a fax document on one side of a sheet. This is
convenient for saving paper.
For example, when two A5 pages are received, they are printed on a single A4 sheet.
However, if paper of the same paper size as the received document is specified in [Receiving
Paper Size], it is printed on the specified size of paper. Depending on the sizes of the
received document, two pages of the document may not be printed on one sheet of paper.

2 Sided Printing
Set whether or not to print received fax documents (including the Internet fax received
documents) as 2 sided. This is convenient for saving paper.
Note
z Even if you select [On], depending on the data, 2 sided printing may not always be possible.

Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges

Specify the amount of edges erased from the document in the top and bottom directions.
Specify a value from 0 to 20 mm in 1 mm increments.
Tools

Edge Erase - Left &amp; Right Edges

Specify the amount of edges erased from the document in the left and right directions.
5 Specify a value from 0 to 20 mm in 1 mm increments.

Reduce 8.5 x 11" Original to A4

When [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen is set to [Auto %], you can set
whether or not to reduce 8.5 x 11” size document to A4 , while scanning the document.

Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode

You can select a gradation expression mode. Selecting this mode enables the machine to
change the processing method for gray part (halftone) to achieve near-photo quality.
Select either [Error Diffusion] or [Dither].
Changing this setting also changes the photo gradation mode for Color Scanning (Black &
White).

Folder Selector by G3 ID
Set whether or not to use the Folder Selector by G3 ID feature.
The Folder Selector by G3 ID feature allows you to classify received documents according
to sender's G3ID and store them to specified.
Note
z
When the machine does not send sender's G3 ID to a recipient, the recipient may not send recipient's G3 ID.
In this case, the received documents cannot be classified according to G3 ID.
z
Due to that G3 ID is manually registered by a sender, the telephone number set for G3 ID may be wrong. You
can find G3 ID sent by the sender in a Job History Report.
z
You can find the G3 ID of the sender in "Input Source" column of a Job History Report.

252
 Fax Service Settings

Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID

Set whether or not to use the Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID feature.
This feature allows you to classify received documents according to sender's telephone
number (Caller ID), G3 ID, or recipient's telephone number (Dial-In) and store them to
specified folders.
Note
z This screen is displayed as [Folder Selector by G3 ID] when the IP Fax (SIP) Kit is not installed on the machine.
In this case, classifying only by G3 ID is available.
z When the machine does not send sender's G3 ID to a recipient, the recipient may not send recipient's G3 ID.
In this case, the received documents cannot be classified according to G3 ID.
z Due to that G3 ID is manually registered by a sender, the telephone number set for G3 ID may be wrong. You
can find G3 ID sent by the sender in a Job History Report.
z You can find the G3 ID of the sender in "Input Source" column of a Job History Report.

Folder Selector - Service Priority

When using the Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID feature, specify the priority
for the methods of classifying received documents: by sender's telephone number (Caller
ID), G3 ID, or recipient's number (Dial-in). Select priority from [First Priority], [Second
Priority], or [Third Priority] for each method.

Tools
This feature is available only when the IP Fax (SIP) kit is installed on the machine.

Folder Selector Setup 5

Select whether or not to use the Folder Selector Setup feature.
The Folder Selector Setup feature allows you to classify received faxes by line type and
store them in folders specified.

Filename Format for Store to Folder

Set the format for the filename to be generated when fax is stored to folder.
When [YYYYMMDDHHMMSS] is selected, the files will be named in the order of year,
month, day, hour, minute, and second. When [img-MDDHHMMSS] is selected, the files will
be named in the order of month, day, hour, minute, and second after a fixed string "img-".
Note
z When you select [YYYYMMDDHHMMSS], the order depends on the setting of [Date Format] in [System
Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Machine Clock / Timers] > [Date].
z When you select [img-MDDHHMMSS], October, November, and December are represented by X, Y, and Z
respectively.

Memory Full Procedure

If there is insufficient hard disk memory while scanning a document, a screen appears
asking you how you want to handle the partially stored data.
Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a
certain time has elapsed in the confirmation screen.
Reference
z You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to "Auto Job Release" (P.148).

„ Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.

253
 Tools

„ Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and start scanning the document partially stored.

Maximum Stored Pages

Set the maximum number of pages stored for a fax document. You can specify from 1 to
999 pages.

Mixed Size Originals Scan Mode

Set the scan mode when the machine scans documents of various sizes simultaneously with
the document feeder. If only documents of standard sizes are to be scanned, we
recommend that you select [Standard Size Mode].
Important
z When [Standard Size Mode] is selected, image loss may occur if the following types of documents are
scanned:
z Non-standard size documents
z B4 size documents with the inch series setting in [Paper Size Settings].

Skip Blank Pages

Tools

Set whether or not to detect blank pages while scanning 2 sided documents and transmits
only pages that are not blank.
5 Note
z This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Fax Data in Folder Priority 1 to 3

Set the priority to display the fax information received using folders. For instance, when
using Network Scanner Utility 3, the fax information is displayed in the [Recipient] section
of the file list screen.
There are priority levels from 1 to 3. All priority can be set, however, if you want to display
only one priority level, make the settings of all priority levels the same.

Direct Fax
Set whether or not to receive a fax, which is instructed using a fax driver from a computer.
When you select [Disabled], the Direct Fax feature becomes unavailable.

Block Inbound Faxes

Set a G3 ID (fax number) from which you want to reject a fax reception. You can specify up
to 50 G3 IDs.
Note
z You can find the G3 ID of the sender that you want to reject in "Remote Station" column of an Activity Report
or "Input Source" column of a Job History Report.

Block Unknown Fax Numbers

Set whether or not to receive faxes from unknown G3 ID fax numbers. When [Yes] is
selected, the machine does not receive faxes from unknown fax numbers.

254
 Fax Service Settings

Fax Received Options

Fax Received Options allows you to specify a method for classifying received fax
documents into specified folders.
There are following two methods for classifying received documents.
z
Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID
z Folder Selector Setup
Note
z When you enable both features, classifying by [Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID] takes
precedence.

Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID

The machine classifies the received documents by sender's telephone number (Caller ID),
G3 ID , or recipient's telephone number (Dial-In) and stores them in specified folders. You
can register up to 500 settings.
Note
z This screen is displayed as [Folder Selector by G3 ID] when the IP Fax (SIP) Kit is not installed on the machine.
In this case, classifying only by G3 ID is available.

Tools
Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID
Set whether or not to use the Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID feature.
This feature allows you to classify received documents according to sender's telephone
5
number (Caller ID), G3 ID, or recipient's telephone number (Dial-In) and store them to
specified folders.
Note
z This screen is displayed as [Folder Selector by G3 ID] when the IP Fax (SIP) Kit is not installed on the machine.
In this case, classifying only by G3 ID is available.

1 Select [Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID].

2 Select a folder selector number to register and then select [Create/Delete].

Note
z
Select [ ] to display the previous screen or [ ] to display the next screen.
z Entering a 3-digit folder selector number with the numeric keypad displays the specified folder selector at the
top of the column.

3 Select a setting item and then select [Change Settings].

„Service
Specify the priority of classifying method when [Dial-In], [Caller ID], and [G3ID] are
informed at the same time. [Dial-In] is set as the factory default value.

„Telephone Number / G3 ID
Enter a G3 ID telephone number to be classified up to 20 digits with the numeric
keypad.When you use * (wild card), the machine checks the G3 ID telephone number from
the first digit. For example, when you enter "03*", the documents sent from the G3 IDs
telephone number beginning with "03" are stored to the specified folder.When you do not
use * (wild card), the machine checks the G3 ID telephone number from the last digit. For

255
 Tools

example, when you enter "1234", the documents sent from the G3 IDs telephone number
of which last four digits are "1234" are stored to the specified folder.
Important
z *
(wild card) cannot be entered as the first digit.

Note
z The machine checks the folder selector in ascending order. So we recommend you to register specific
telephone number on smaller folder selector numbers to have intended result of the classifying.

„Folder Number
Enter a 3 digits folder number with the numeric keypad. The documents are stored to the
specified folder.

4 Edit settings and select [Save].

5 Repeat step 3 to 4 as necessary.

6 Select [Save].

Folder Selector Setup

Tools

If you set the classification by line type, the machine classifies the received documents by
line type and store them in the folders specified.
5 Note
z You can assign folders specified to each line to the service buttons on the Services Home screen. The number
of documents in the folder is displayed on the assigned service button. Pressing the button allows you to
confirm the documents in the folder. For more information, refer to "Customizing the Button Layout" (P.33).

1 Select [Folder Selector Setup].

2 Select the line to register, and then select [Change Settings].

Note
z The displayed items may vary depending on the options installed.

3 Select [On].

256
 Fax Service Settings

4 Enter the folder number (three digits) where you want to store the faxes with the numeric
keypad.

5 Select [Save].

Output Destination Setup

In [Output Destination Setup], you can set the output destination for each receiving line.
Note
z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z The displayed items may vary depending on the options installed.

„ Fax Received - Line 1 to 3

Specify output tray for each line.

„ Fax Received - SIP

Specify output tray for IP fax (SIP).

„ Public Folder Printed Files

Tools
Specifies output tray for public folder for polling.

Reduce/Enlarge Presets 5
You can set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed under [Reduce/
Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can assign any magnification to the
Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons other than [100%] and [Auto %].

„ Preset %
You can select a ratio from preset ratios.

„ Variable %
You can specify a magnification from 50 to 400% in 1% increments.

Original Size Defaults

You can set the original sizes displayed in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign original sizes to the buttons other than [Auto Detect].
If you frequently use non-standard size paper for scanning, setting non-standard size as the
default will save your time to specify the size each time.

„ A/B Series Size

You can select a size from A and B series sizes such as A4 and B5.

„ Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series sizes such as 8.5 x 11" and 11 x 17".

„ Others
You can select a size from other sizes such as photo and postcard.

257
 Tools

Local Terminal Information

You can set the local terminal information, including a local name and company logo.
Note
z The displayed items may vary depending on the options installed.
z There are a maximum of three lines that can be used for G3 communications: line 1, line 2, and line 3.
z You can set a company logo, G3 ID (fax number), G3 dial type, and G3 line type.

Reference
z
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Local Name
Register the name of the local terminal as the local name.
The local name is shown in the recipient's touch screen or Activity Report. Depending on
the recipient's device, however, it may not be displayed.
Specify a local name with up to 20 single-byte characters using the keyboard displayed or
the numeric keypad.

Company Logo
Tools

Register the sender name (company logo). The company logo is printed in the Transmission
Header Text or Cover Page. Specify a company logo with up to 60 single-byte characters
5 using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad.
Note
z
If [Line 1 to 3 - Company Logo] or [Company Logo for SIP Line] is not registered, the company logo is used.

Machine Password
Set the machine password when you want to limit the other parties that can send faxes.
When the machine password is set, only a party that sends the correct machine password
by F code is allowed to send or poll. Note that this means that faxes cannot be accepted
from a fax without the F Code feature.

Line 1 to 3 - Company Logo

Register the sender names for lines 1 to 3. The sender name is printed in the Transmission
Header Text or Cover Page. Enter up to 60 single-byte characters using the keyboard
displayed or the numeric keypad.

G3 Line 1 to 3 - Fax ID
When using G3 communications, register the G3 ID. The G3 ID is normally set to the local
terminal fax number.
Specify a G3 ID with up to 20 digits using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad.
Note
z
A G3 ID (fax number) can consist of not more than 20 digits, including 0 to 9, +, and space.

G3 Line 1 to 3 - Dial Type

Set the dial type.

„ Tone
Tone dialing line.

258
 Fax Service Settings

„ 10pps
Pulse dialing line.

G3 Line 1 to 3 - Line Type

Set the line type.

„ PBX
Private branch exchange.

SIP Line - Company Logo

Register the sender names for IP fax (SIP). The sender name is printed in the Transmission
Header Text or Cover Page. Enter up to 60 characters using the keyboard displayed or the
numeric keypad.

G3 SIP Line - ID
When using G3 communications, register the G3 ID for IP fax (SIP).
Specify a G3 ID with up to 20 digits using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad.

Tools
Internet Fax Control
You can configure the settings related to the Internet fax control. 5
Internet Fax Path
Set the Internet fax communication path.

„ Via E-mail Server

Sends e-mail via an SMTP server.

„ Direct (P2P)
Directly sends to the machine with the Internet Fax feature, without going through an
SMTP server.
You can specify the following two types of e-mail address for the Internet Fax feature:
z Specifying a host name @ must be followed by FQDN. Example: local-
[email protected]
z Specifying an IP address @ must be followed by an IP address with brackets. Example:
local-part@[192.0.2.1]

Profile for Broadcast Job

Set the default value for an Internet fax profile when performing an Internet fax broadcast
send.
A profile is specified to restrict attribute information such as image resolution and paper
size for transmissions between Internet Fax-enabled machines.
Important
z
The supported TIFF-file profiles vary depending on the destination Internet Fax-enabled machine. Before
specifying a profile, check the profile that the destination machine supports.

259
 Tools

„ TIFF-S
The Internet fax standard profile. For documents larger than A4, the size is automatically
reduced to A4 when transmission.

„ TIFF-F
Select this profile when you specify [Superfine] for [Resolution] or when you send A3 or B4
documents.

„ TIFF-J
Select this profile for sending documents in JBIG.

Broadcast Starting Rate

Set the default value for the communications mode for the broadcasting for the Internet
fax.

Delivery Confirmation Method

Set the default value for the method of confirming that an Internet fax sent has arrived or
not.
Tools

To print a transmission result, set [Print Delivery Confirmation Mail] to [On] under [E-mail/
Internet Fax Service Settings] > [E-mail Control].

5 Note
z
You can select [Delivery Receipts] when the destination machine supports the DSN feature. You can use
[Read Receipts] when the destination machine supports the MDN feature.

„ Delivery Receipts
You can confirm whether the Internet fax you sent is delivered to the recipient's folder
successfully.

„ Read Receipts
You can confirm whether the Internet fax including attachments you sent is processed
properly at the recipient.

Incoming Internet Fax Print Options

When an e-mail sent from an Internet fax compatible machine to the e-mail address of the
machine is received, you can select the print operation.

„ Print Attachment Only

Only prints the attached documents.

„ Attachment, Full Headers & Message

Prints the e-mail header and body of e-mails.

„ Attachment, Basic Headers & Message

Prints the part of headers (From/To/Subject/Date) and the contents of e-mails. When you
select [Do not print if no message], the machine prints only e-mail that has contents.

260
 Fax Service Settings

Internet Fax Output Destination

Set the output tray to use for printed Internet fax documents.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Fax Transfer from Address Book

Set whether to permit forwarding of Internet fax data received by e-mail via SMTP when
the forwarding destination is not registered on the Address Book.

„ Off
Permits forwarding.

„ On
Checks whether the forwarding fax number is listed in the Address Book, and if not, rejects
receiving the e-mail and deletes it.

Transmission Header Text - Fax Transfer

Tools
When forwarding received e-mail from Internet fax to fax, select whether or not to add a
Transmission Header Text (start time, company logo, recipient name, G3 ID, and number of
pages).
5
Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size
When forwarding a received e-mail from Internet fax to fax, set the maximum data size.

„ No Limit
No limit on data size.

„ Limit Size
Specify a value from 1 to 65535 KB in 1 KB increments. If a data size exceeds the specified
value, the data is deleted.

261
 Tools

E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings

In [E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the e-mail
and the Internet Fax service.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings].

Reference
z
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select an item to set or change.

E-mail Control
You can configure the settings for e-mail and Internet fax transmissions.
Tools

Maximum Address Entries

Set the maximum number of addresses that can be specified when sending an e-mail.
5 The number of addresses is the total number of To:/Cc:/Bcc:.
You can set the maximum number of addresses from 1 to 100. If the maximum number of
addresses exceeds, the e-mail transmission is aborted.
Important
z This option is not applicable to the Internet Fax service.

Incoming E-mail Print Options

When an e-mail sent to the e-mail address of the machine is received, you can select the
print operation.

„ Print Attachment Only

Only prints the attached documents.

„ Attachment, Full Headers & Message

Prints the e-mail headers and body of e-mails.
When you select [Attachment, Full Headers & Message (with S/MIME Info)], S/MIME
Information is also printed.

„ Attachment, Basic Headers & Message

Prints the part of headers (From/To/Subject/Date) and the contents of e-mails.
When you select [Do not print if no message], the machine prints only e-mail that has
contents.

262
 E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings

Print Error Notification E-mail

Select whether the error e-mail because of an incorrect address or transmission error should
be automatically printed.
Note
z
The job for printing error e-mail is displayed as an error on the [Job Status] screen and a Job History Report
even when the job has been complete successfully.

Response to Read Receipts

Set whether or not to respond when a read receipt (MDN) is requested.

„ Off
Does not respond.

„ On
Automatically notifies the sender that the e-mail has been processed.

Read Receipts
When an e-mail is sent from the machine, select whether or not to use the Read Receipts

Tools
feature.

„ Off
The Read Receipts feature is disabled.
5
„ On
Uses the Read Receipts feature.
Important
z
For the Internet fax read receipts setting, select either [Delivery Receipts] or [Read Receipts] in [Delivery
Confirmation Method] under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Fax Service Settings] > [Internet Fax Control].

Print Delivery Confirmation Mail

Select whether or not to automatically print transmission result e-mails (DSN response/
MDN response).

„ Off
Does not print transmission result e-mails.

„ On
Transmission result e-mails are automatically printed regardless of success or failure of the
transmission.

„ Print when delivery fails

Prints only when the transmission failed.

Split Send Method

Set the default value for the mail split method.

„ Split into Pages

Splits into pages.

263
 Tools

„ Split by Data Size

Splits by the data size set in [Maximum Data Size per E-mail].

Maximum Data Size per E-mail

Set the upper limit of the data size for splitting mail.
Specify a value from 512 to 20480 KB in 1 KB increments. The default value is 10240 KB.

Maximum Total Data Size

Set the upper limit of the data size of mail.
Specify a value from 512 to 200000 KB in 1 KB increments. The default value is 200000 KB.

Maximum Split Count

Set the split upper limit for splitting mail.
Specify not to split mail or a value from 2 to 500.

Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field

Tools

Set whether or not to protect e-mail addresses from being changed by unregistered users
under [From] on the [E-mail] tab.

5 Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field

Set whether or not to protect e-mail addresses from being changed by guest users under
[From] on the [E-mail] tab.

Allow to edit From if Search Found

Set whether or not to protect e-mail addresses from being changed under [From] on the
[Email] tab when a login user retrieves an e-mail address.

Allow to edit From if Search Failed

Set whether to protect e-mail addresses from being changed under [From] on the [E-mail]
tab when a login user fails to retrieve an e-mail address.

E-mail Sending When Search Failed

Set whether or not to disable the [E-mail] service when a login user fails to retrieve an e-mail
address.

Add Me to "To" Field

Set whether or not to automatically add the sender's address to the To field.

Add Me to "Cc" Field

Set whether or not to automatically add the sender's address to the CC field.

264
 E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings

Edit E-mail Recipients

Set whether or not to permit to edit e-mail recipients (To, CC, BCC). Selecting [No] prevents
e-mails from being sent to unintended destinations.
Important
z
If you set [Edit E-mail Recipients] to [No], set [Add Me to "To" Field] to [Yes].

Tools
5

265
 Tools

Address Book Settings

In [Address Book Settings], you can configure settings related to the e-mail and the address
book.

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Address Book Settings].

Reference
z For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select an item to set or change.

Address Book Type

Select the type of the Address Book from [Type 1] or [Type 2].

Directory Service
Select whether or not to use an address book stored on the directory server.
Even when [Enabled] is selected, the address book of the directory server will not be started
Tools

unless the following conditions are satisfied.

z The IP address of the machine must be set.
5 z
The IP address or Internet address of the directory server (primary) must be set.
z The port numbers used for LDAP communication must be set on the directory server and
the machine.

Address Book Default - Scan

Select from [Public Entries] or [Network Entries].
Note
z This item can be set when [Directory Service] is set to [Enabled].

Address Book Default - Fax

Select from [Public Entries] or [Network Entries].
Note
z
This item can be set when [Directory Service] is set to [Enabled].

Search Display Default

Select from [Simple Search] or [Advanced Search].
Note
z This item can be set when [Address Book Type] is set to [Type 1].

Fax Speed Dial Default

Specify the default speed dial to display at the top of the [Fax Address Book] screen.
Set the number from 1 to 2000.
Note
z Avalirable numbers to assign to speed dials are different depending on your machine configuration. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

266
 Folder Service Settings

Folder Service Settings

In [Folder Service Settings], you can configure settings to handle files stored in folders.

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Folder Service Settings].

Reference
z For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select an item to set or change.

Files Retrieved By Client

Set whether or not to delete a file stored in a folder when a client retrieves it.

„ Delete according to Folder settings

Operates following the settings for individual folder.
Reference
z
For more information about setting folders, refer to "Delete Files After Retrieval" (P.278).

Tools
„ Force Delete
Ignores the settings for individual folder, and when a file is retrieved by a client, the
retrieved file is forcibly deleted.
5
File Display Default
Set the display method of the file list screen. Select from [List] or [Thumbnail].

Orientation for Stored Print Jobs

Set the orientation of non-standard size documents to be stored in a folder. Select [Portrait]
or [Landscape].Even when [Portrait] is selected, a print job whose orientation is not
available for the paper tray will be stored in [Landscape] orientation.

Print & Delete Confirmation Screen

Set whether or not to display a confirmation screen for automatically deleting files after
printing the files stored in a folder.

Convert Custom Size to Standard Size

Set whether or not to convert custom size to standard size when transferring a fax/Internet
fax received or a file for Secure Polling in the folder.

Standard Size Threshold Value

Specify a threshold value for converting custom size to standard size when [Convert Custom
Size to Standard Size] is set to [Yes (Fax & Internet Fax files only)].
Specify the value from 0 to 10 mm in 1 mm increments.

Internet Fax to Internet Fax

Select whether or not to permit Internet fax forwarding of files received in a folder.

267
 Tools

Internet Fax to E-mail

Select whether or not to permit e-mail forwarding of files received in a folder.

Quality/File Size for Retrieval

Select a quality and size for files highly compressed and retrieved from folders. Select from
[Quality: Normal, File Size: Small], [Quality: Higher, File Size: Larger], and [Quality:
Maximum, File Size: Largest].
Tools

268
 Job Flow Service Settings

Job Flow Service Settings

In [Job Flow Service Settings], you can configure the settings related to the Job Flow. The
Job Flow is a function to perform a series of jobs registered.
Also, in [Job Flow Service Settings], you can configure a pool server. As for [Pool Server],
[Pool Server Login Method], and [Job Flow Sheet List Default], however, leave the default
settings unchanged because a pool server is not available for the machine.
You can select a resolution in [Fax Transfer Resolution] when you transfer a scanned
document as a fax.

Pool Server
Leave the default setting unchanged.

Pool Server Login Method

Leave the default setting unchanged.

Job Flow Sheet List Default

Tools
Set the default values for [Save in], [Owner], and [Target] of Job flow sheets which are
displayed when you select [Job Flow Sheets] on the Services Home screen.

„ Save in
5
Leave the default setting unchanged.

„ Owner
Select the owner of job flow sheets from Administrator and Non-System Administrator to
filter.
Note
z When the machine is in the Authentication mode, select the owner from Shared or Personal.

„ Target
Select the target of job flow sheets from Scan Jobs, External Application, and Copy to filter.

Fax Transfer Resolution

Select the resolution setting when you send a color document as a fax using the Job Flow
feature.

„ Same Resolution (High Quality)

Converts color images to black and white images on a document with the same resolution
when the document is transferred as a fax. Conversion of high resolution color images will
take longer.

„ 200 dpi (High Speed)

Converts color images to black and white images of 200 dpi on a document when the
document is transferred as a fax.
Reduces the time when converting color images of 300 dpi or higher to black and white
images. 200 dpi is equivalent to [Fine] in fax transmission.

269
 Tools

Media Print Service Settings

In [Media Print Service Settings], you can select the paper trays displayed for [Paper
Supply] in the [Media Print Text] and [Media Print Photos] screens.
When the USB Memory Kit (optional) is installed in the machine, you can import and print
image data (DCF1.0 (Exif 2.0 - 2.2 compliant JPEG/TIFF files)) from supported storage
media and document files (PDF, TIFF, XPS (MSXPS format and OpenXPS format), XDW,
XBD, or JPEG (JFIF)). This feature is called the Media Print feature.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Media Print Service Settings].

Reference
z
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138)

2 Select an item to set or change.

Tools

Text - Paper Supply - Button 2 to 5

5 Select the paper tray displayed in the second to fifth columns for [Paper Supply] on the
[Media Print - Text] screen.

Photos - Paper Supply - Button 1 to 5

Select the paper tray displayed in the first to fifth columns for [Paper Supply] on the [Media
Print - Photos] screen.

270
 Stored File Settings

Stored File Settings

In [Stored File Settings], you can select whether to automatically delete files stored on the
folder or the machine. Set the expiration date and the time of deletion.
You can also set whether or not to delete the stored file by file type.

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Stored File Settings].

Reference
z For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select an item to set or change.

Expiration Date for Files in Folder

You can set expiration date for the file in a folder. To delete stored files automatically,
specify an expiration date and deletion time. The settings apply to all folders.

„ Off

Tools
Does not automatically delete the print files stored in the machine.

„ On
Allows you to set the file retention period and the expiration date. The stored files will be 5
deleted after the time specified in [Files deleted at] passed.

„ Files kept for

Set the file retention period from 1 to 14 days.

„ Files deleted at
Set the deletion time for the expired files from 1 to 12 hours for AM or PM and 0 to 59
minutes.
Note
z When you select [24 Hour Clock] in [Common Service Settings] > [Machine Clock/Timers] > [Time], set the
deletion time from 0 to 23 hours and 00 to 59 minutes.

Reference
z
To automatically delete files at the time specified here, you need to set [Delete Expired Files] to [Yes]. For more information, refer
to "Delete Expired Files" (P.278).

Stored Job Expiration Date

You can set whether or not to automatically delete print files (Charge Print, Private Charge
Print, Secure Print, or Sample Print) stored in the machine.

„ Options
Set the retention period for stored jobs.
Select from [Off], [On], and [Same Date as Files in Folder]. When [On] is selected, set the
value for [Files kept for] from 1 to 23 hours in 1 hour increments. If the time elapses, print
files stored in the machine are deleted. When [Same Date as Files in Folder] is selected,
print files stored in the machine are deleted in accordance with the setting in [Expiration
Date for Files in Folder].

271
 Tools

„ Power Off Deletes Jobs

Allows you to set whether or not to delete print files stored when the machine is turned off
and then on. When you select [Yes], all stored print files are deleted. When you select [No],
the machine deletes only the expired stored print files.
Important
z If you select [Yes], all print files stored will be deleted regardless of the setting in [Options].

Display Details of Stored Print Job List

Set whether or not to display detailed information such as output color and 2 sided in the
stored job list of print files (Charge Print, Secure Print, Sample Print, or Delayed Print). When
you select [On], detailed information is displayed in the list. When you select [Off], you can
see more jobs at a time since detailed information is not displayed.

Preview Generation
Set whether or not to generate preview images when displaying the list of stored print files
(Charge Print, Secure Print, Sample Print, or Delayed Print). Selecting [On] generates the
preview images of stored print files when they are stored in the machine. Selecting [Off]
generates no preview image and displays the list of stored print files. This setting can also
be set from the printer driver. When the two settings between the driver and the machine
Tools

are different, the setting of the printer driver will take precedence.
Note
5 z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,
contact out Customer Support Center.

Duration for Preview Generation

Set whether or not to restrict time to generate a preview image of the print files. When you
select [No Limit], preview images are generated with no time restriction. When you select
[Limited], only the preview images generated within the specified duration are displayed.
In the case of exceeding the time limit, no preview image will be generated. Specify the
time limit between 10 and 900 seconds in 1 second increments.
Note
z
This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,
contact out Customer Support Center.

Display Default of Stored Print Job List

Set the default of displaying the list of stored print files (Charge Print, Secure Print, Sample
Print, or Delayed Print). Select [List] or [Thumbnail]. When you select [List], the list of stored
print files is shown as default. When you select [Thumbnail], the preview images of stored
print files are shown as default.
Note
z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,
contact out Customer Support Center.

Print Job Confirmation Screen

Set whether or not to display a print confirmation screen for deletion of the print files
stored in the machine after printing. When [Enabled] is selected, the confirmation message
appears. You can change the number of print sets if the print settings are permitted to be
modified. When [Disabled] is selected, print files stored in the machine are automatically
deleted after printing.

272
 Stored File Settings

Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs

Set the minimum number of allowed passcode digits between 0 and 12 digits. A passcode is
required when Secure Print or Private Charge Print files are to be stored or printed.
A passcode must be a string consisting of the number of digits that is equal to or larger
than the value specified here.
Note
z Specify "0" if you do not set passcodes or the minimum number of digits.

Print Order for All Selected Files

Specify the printing order when you select to print all print files stored.

„ Date & Time: Oldest First

Prints files in chronological order.

„ Date & Time: Newest First

Prints files in reverse chronological order.

„ File Name: Ascending

Tools
Prints files in ascending order by file name.

„ File Name: Descending

Prints files in descending order by file name.
5

273
 Tools

Web Browser Setup

In [Web Browser Setup], you can configure the settings for the Web browser to be used
when the machine accesses a web application using the Web Applications feature. Remote
access allows you to view web application services, which are compatible withthe machine,
directly on the touch screen, to upload a document that has been scanned on the machine
to the web applications, and to directly select and print a document that is stored in the
remote server. It also allows you to directly upload and print a file without going through
another computer.
Note
z To use this feature, any Fuji Xerox manufactured web applications (purchase separately) are required. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Web Browser Setup].
Reference
z
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select an item to set or change.

Tools

Web Applications Version

5 Select a version of the Web applications service from [V2], [V4], and [V5].
Important
z If [V2] is selected, the following settings become invalid: [Delete Persistent Cookie Upon Closing], [Clear
Cache Upon Closing], [Use Cache], [Accept Cookies], [Use TLS1.0], [When SSL Certificate Verification Fails],
and [Enable File Printing].

Note
z When you use V3 of the web application version, select [V4].

Delete Persistent Cookie Upon Closing

Set whether or not to delete persistent cookie when connection to a Web application ends.

Clear Cache Upon Closing

Set whether or not to delete cache when connection to a Web application ends.

Use Cache
Set whether or not to use cache.

Accept Cookies
Set whether or not to accept cookies.
Select from [No], [Yes], and [Warn user when cookie is offered].
When you select [Warn user when cookie is offered], the machine behaves as when
youselect [Yes].

Use TLS1.0
Set whether or not to use TLS 1.0.

274
 Web Browser Setup

When SSL Certificate Verification Fails

Set whether or not to stop accessing the site or to display a confirmation screen for access if
SSL certificate verification fails.

Enable File Printing

Set whether or not to use the File Printing feature.The File Printing feature allows you to
directly print the printable files obtained from the remote Web server.

Functional Code
Set the functional code as necessary when you use a remote linkage service.

Tools
5

275
 Tools

Setup
In [Setup], you can create or update folders, job flows, and the Address Book.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
"Create Folder" (P.276)
"Stored Programming" (P.279)
"Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.279)
"Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword" (P.288)
"Add Address Book Entry" (P.289)
"Create Fax Group Recipients" (P.299)
"Add Fax Comment" (P.300)
"Paper Tray Attributes" (P.300)
Tools

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [Setup].

Reference
5 z For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select an item to set or change.

Create Folder
Using the Folder function enables you to store scanned documents using the machine, fax
received documents, or print documents sent from a computer in the machine.
You can also send a file stored in a folder via e-mail or retrieve a file stored in a computer on
a network.
You can create a private folder and a public folder in the machine and use them separately
depending on your purpose.
You can create up to 200 folders.
Reference
z You can check the current folders in a Folder List. For more information, refer to "Folder List" (P.122).

1 Select [Create Folder].

276
 Setup

2 Select the folder to create.

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.
z Entering a 3-digit folder number with the numeric keypad displays the specified folder at the top of the
column.

3 When you create a folder, the [New Folder - Passcode] screen appears. Select items, and
then select [Save].

Tools
5
Note
z When you select a folder already created, the [Folder XXX - Create/Delete] screen appears.

Reference
z
For more information on assigning a passcode, refer to "Check Folder Passcode" (P.277).

4 Select items and set the required settings.

5 When you finish required settings, select [Save].

Folder Name
Set the folder name. Enter up to 20 single-byte characters using the keyboard displayed or
the numeric keypad.
Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Check Folder Passcode

Set an access restriction to permit operations for specified users only.

„ Check Folder Passcode

Set whether or not to set a passcode.

„ Folder Passcode
Folder PasscodeTo use the Check Folder Passcode feature, enter a passcode. You can enter
a passcode of up to 20 numeric digits (0 to 9).

277
 Tools

„ Target Operation
Set the operations to be restricted.
‹ Always (All Operations)
You need to enter the passcode when storing a file in a folder and displaying the files in a
folder for operations such as printing and deleting the files.
‹ Save (Write)
You need to enter the passcode only when storing a file in a folder.
‹ Print/Delete (Read)
You need to enter the passcode only when displaying the files in a folder for operations
such as printing and deleting the files.

Delete Files After Retrieval

When a file stored in a folder is printed or is retrieved from a remote server, set whether the
file should be deleted.

„ No
The file is left stored.
Tools

„ Yes

5 After the file is printed, or is retrieved by an external source, it is automatically deleted.

Note
z If you select [Yes], a file is not deleted when retrieved from CentreWare Internet Services.

Delete Expired Files

Specify whether or not to enable the operation to delete files stored in a folder at a
specified time after a retention period has elapsed.

„ No
Even when the retention period has elapsed, files are not deleted.

„ Yes
Deletes expired files at the specified time. If, however, the expiration date has not
beenspecified, files are not deleted even when [Yes] is selected.
Note
z When the machine is off at the deletion time of an expired file, the file is deleted next time the deletion time
comes after the machine is turned on.

Reference
z For information on setting the file retention period, refer to "Expiration Date for Files in Folder" (P.271).

Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder

You can link a job flow sheet to a folder. Linking a job flow in which a series of actions is
recorded to a folder enables you to set the processing method for files stored in a folder.
Reference
z For information on how to register a job flow, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.279).

„ Cut Link
Cancels the link between a folder and a linked job flow sheet.

278
 Setup

„ Create/Change Link
A screen to link a job flow sheet appears. You can select the existing job flow sheets or
create a new job flow sheet.
Reference
z For more information about the operation, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.279).

„ Auto Start
If you select the [Auto Start] check box, when a file is stored in a folder, the procedures
registered on the job flow linked automatically starts.

When the [Delete Folder] Button is Selected

Selecting this button deletes the selected folder. Any files stored in the folder are also
deleted.
If [Login Type] is set to [No Login Required], all the job flow sheets, including a local user
created on the [Create Folder] screen or job flow sheets created on the [Send from Folder]
screen, are deleted as well.
Important
z
Once files or job flow sheets are deleted, they cannot be restored.

Tools
Stored Programming
The Stored Programming feature enables you to register frequently used settings and 5
record a series of operations.
Reference
z
For more information on operation, refer to "Stored Programming" > "Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs" in the
User Guide.

Create Job Flow Sheet

Job flow is a feature to execute a series of registered actions. Up to 1000 job flow sheets
can be created.
The target of a job flow is files stored in a folder. A job flow can be executed by using one of
the following three methods:
z
by automatically starting a job flow when a file is stored in a folder
z by selecting a file stored in a folder to manually execute the associated job flow
z by selecting a file stored in a folder to select a job flow and execute manually
To start a job flow automatically, you must link the job flow to a folder. When a file is stored
in the folder, it is automatically processed in accordance with the job flow sheet linked.
Note
z To link a folder with a job flow sheet created with [Create Job Flow Sheet], start from [Send from Folder] or
[Create Folder]. For more information, refer to "Send from Folder" in the User Guide and ""Create Folder"
(P.276).
Features that can be registered are listed below.
z
Forward to (FTP, SMB, e-mail, fax, IP fax, and Internet fax)

279
 Tools

z Print
Depending on the method of storing in the folder, there are restrictions on the combination
of features.

Output Print Fax IP Intern Mail FTP SMB

Fax(SI et Fax
Iutput
P) *1
Fax Documents for O O O O O O O
Secure Polling
Scanning O O O O O O O
Fax to Folder O*2 O O O O O O

Internet Fax O O O ? ? O O
Received
Print Stored X X X X X X X

O : Available
X : Not available
Tools

? : Available depending on the SystemAdministration mode

settings
*1 : Load an A4 document in landscape orientation when TIFF-S has been selected for the Internet fax forwarding profile.
5 Loading the document in portrait orientation will reduce the size of the Internet fax image.
*2 : If the fax USB cable is disconnected while a received fax file in a folder is being printed, the file is not deleted after printing,
even if the delete after printing setting is enabled in the folder settings.

Restrictions on Using Job Flow

A job flow can be used by single or multiple users, or can be used by linking to a specific
folder. The Authentication feature restricts the use of the job flows.
Reference
z
For information on the available Job Flow features and restrictions on use, refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and
Folders" (P.435).

1 Select [Create Job Flow Sheet].

2 Carry out the job flow operation in accordance with your purpose.

280
 Setup

„ Sheet Filtering
You can filter the job flow sheets to display. Select the filtering conditions, and then select
[Save].

Note
z The screen displayed varies depending on the Login Type selected.
z
Owner:Filters job flow sheets by owner type.
z
Target:Filters job flow sheets by target, such as scan jobs and folders.

„ Create
Displays the [Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen.

Tools
Reference
z Refer to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.281).

„ Edit/Delete
5
Displays the [Details] screen.
Reference
z
Refer to "Edit/Delete" (P.288).

„ Search by Name
Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job
flow names that were registered upon each job flow creation. You can enter up to 128
single-byte characters.
Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

„ Search by Keyword
Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords
that were registered upon each job flow creation.
Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

„ Select Keyword
Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword registered in the System Settings to
search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine
searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation.
Reference
z For information on the keyword registry, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword" (P.288).

Create New Job Flow Sheet

Create a new job flow.

281
 Tools

1 Select an item to set, and then select [Edit].

„ Delete
Deletes all setting values of the selected item.

„ Edit
Confirm or change the settings of the selected item.

„ Close Menu
Deselect the selected item.
Tools

Name
Set the name for the job flow sheet with up to 128 single-byte characters.
5 Description
Set the description of the job flow sheet with up to 256 single-byte characters.

Keyword
Enter a keyword with up to 12 single-byte characters for job flow search. You can also use
the keywords that are registered for [Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword].
Reference
z For information on the job flow keyword search, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword" (P.288).

Send as Fax
Specify destinations for fax transmission. You can specify a total of 100 destinations, either
by selecting from the Address Book or by direct input.
Important
z You cannot use wildcards or group dial numbers.

„ Speed Dial
Specify an address with a speed dial. Enter the speed dial with the numeric keypad, and
select [Save]. The address specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send Fax]
screen.

„ New Recipient
Specify a new address. The address specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send
Fax] screen.

„ Name/Fax Number
Displays the recipient name or fax number specified.

282
 Setup

„ Delete Recipient
Deletes all information for the selected recipient.

„ Edit
Displays the [Edit Recipient] screen, which allows you to check or change the recipient
selected.
Reference
z For more information on the [Edit Recipient] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.

„ Cancel
Deselect the selected item.

Send as IP Fax (SIP)

„ Speed Dial
Specify an address with a speed dial. Enter the speed dial with the numeric keypad, and
select [Save]. The address specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send as IP Fax
(SIP)] screen.

Tools
„ New Recipient
Specify a new address. Select an item to change, and select [Change Settings]. The address
specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send as IP Fax (SIP)] screen. 5
„ Name/Fax Number
Displays the name and fax number specified.

„ Remove
Deletes all information for the selected recipient.

„ Edit
Displays the [Edit Recipient] screen, which allows you to check or change the recipient
selected.
Reference
z For more information on the [Edit Recipient] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.

Send as Internet Fax

Specify destinations for fax transmission. You can specify a total of 100 destinations, either
by selecting from the Address Book or by direct input.
Important
z
You cannot use wildcards or group dial numbers.

„ Speed Dial
Specify an address with a speed dial. Enter the speed dial with the numeric keypad, and
select [Save]. The address specified appears in [Name/E-mail Address] in the [Send Internet
Fax] screen.

„ New Recipient
Specify a new address. The address specified appears in [Name/E-mail Address] in the
[Send Internet Fax] screen.

283
 Tools

„ Name/E-mail Address
Displays the recipient name or address specified.

„ Delete Recipient
Deletes all information for the selected recipient.

„ Edit
Displays the [Edit Recipient] screen, which allows you to check or change the recipient
selected.
Reference
z For more information on the [Edit Recipient] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.

„ Close Menu
Deselect the selected item.

„ Message
Enter body message of an Internet fax with the keyboard displayed.

„ Internet Fax Profile

Tools

Select an Internet fax profile.

A profile is specified to restrict attribute information such as image resolution and paper
5 size for transmissions between Internet Fax-enabled machines.

„ Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set the
number of resend attempts and interval.
‹ Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.
‹ Resend Interval
Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.

„ Transmission Header Text

Set whether or not to add a Transmission Header Text to an Internet fax.

Send as E-mail
Specify the recipients for e-mail transmission.
You can specify a total of 100 addresses, either by selecting from the Address Book or by
direct input.
If [Encryption] is set to [On], you cannot specify a recipient by selecting [New Recipient].

„ Address Book
You can specify the recipients from the Address Book. The address specified appears in
[Name/E-mail] in the [Send E-mail] screen.

„ New Recipient
Specify a new address. The address specified appears in [Name/E-mail] in the [Send E-mail]
screen.

284
 Setup

„ Name/E-mail Address

„ Subject
Enter a subject using the keyboard displayed.

„ Delete Recipient
Deletes all information for the selected recipient information.

„ Edit
Displays the [Edit Recipient] screen, which allows you to check or change the recipient
selected.
Reference
z For more information on the [Edit Recipient] screen, refer to "Scan" in the User Guide.

„ File Format
Select an output file format.
Reference
z
For more information on the [File Format] screen, refer to "Scan" in the User Guide.

Tools
„ Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set the
number of resend attempts and interval. 5
‹ Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.
‹ Resend Interval
Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.

„ Encryption
Set whether or not to encrypt the e-mail transmission.
Note
z
To encrypt e-mail transmission, the configuration of S/MIME is required.
z
To encrypt e-mail transmission, a certificate is required.
z To enable encryption, select [On] before specifying an address. [On] will be disabled after an address is
specified.

„ Digital Signature
Select whether or not to add digital signature.
Note
z To add digital signature, the configuration of S/MIME is required.
z To add digital signature, a certificate is required.

Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2)

Specify where FTP forwarding is to be stored.
[Transfer via FTP (2)] will be displayed when [Transfer via FTP (1)] is configured.

285
 Tools

„ Address Book
When the server address is registered on the Address Book, you can specify the address
from the Address Book. The specified address appears in the [Transfer via FTP (1)] or
[Transfer via FTP (2)] screen.
Reference
z For more information on the Address Book, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.289).

„ File Format
Specify an output file format.
Reference
z For more information on the [File Format] screen, refer to "Scan" in the User Guide.

„ Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set the
number of resend attempts and interval.
‹ Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.
‹ Resend Interval
Tools

Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.

5 „ Name, Server, Save in, User Name, and Password

Select [Name], [Server], [Save in], [User Name], or [Password] to display an input screen.
The numbers of characters you can input are as follows:
z
Name: Up to 18 single-byte characters
z
Server: Up to 64 single-byte characters
z Save in: Up to 128 single-byte characters
z
User Name: Up to 97 single-byte characters
z
Password: Up to 32 single-byte characters

Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2)

Specify where SMB forwarding is to be stored.
[Transfer via SMB (2)] will be displayed when [Transfer via SMB (1)] is configured.

„ Address Book
When the server address is registered on the Address Book, you can specify the address
from the Address Book. The specified address appears in the [Transfer via SMB (1)] or
[Transfer via SMB (2)] screen.

„ File Format
Specify an output file format.

„ Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set
thenumber of resend attempts and interval.
‹ Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.

286
 Setup

‹ Resend Interval
Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.

„ Name, Server, Shared Name, Save in, User Name, and Password
Select [Name], [Server], [Shared Name], [Save in], [User Name], or [Password] to display an
input screen.
The numbers of characters you can input are as follows:
z Name: Up to 18 single-byte characters
z Server: Up to 64 single-byte characters
z
Shared Name: Up to 64 single-byte characters
z Save in: Up to 128 single-byte characters
z User Name: For domain users: up to 97 characters with the format of “user
name@domain name” or “domain name\user name” (user name and domain name
must be up to 32 and 64 single-byte characters respectively) For local users: up to 32
single-byte characters
z
Password: Up to 32 single-byte characters

Tools
Print
Configure print settings. When [On] is selected, you can configure the settings for the Print
feature. 5
„ Print Quantity
Set the number of copy sets from 1 to 999 in 1 set increments.

„ Paper Supply
Select a paper tray for printing. When [Auto Select] is selected, the same paper size as the
document size is used.
‹ Auto Select
A suitable paper tray is automatically selected.
‹ Trays 1 to 4
Select paper from four trays.
‹ Bypass
Prints on paper loaded in Tray 5.

„ 2 Sided Printing
Set the 2 sided printing option.

„ Output
Configure the stapling, hole punch, and output destination settings.
‹ Staple
Set the position for stapling.
‹ Hole Punch
Set the position for punching.
‹ Output Destination
Set the output destination.

287
 Tools

E-mail Notification
You can receive an e-mail notification when a file is saved in a folder or a job flow ends.

„ Name/E-mail Address
Set the recipient of the e-mail notification.

„ Message
Enter a message that is displayed in the e-mail message body.

„ When to Notify
Select the e-mail notification timing from [When file is stored] and [At the end of Job Flow].

„ Delete Recipient
Deletes all information for the selected recipient.

„ Edit
Allows you to check or change the recipient selected.
Reference
Tools

z
For more information, refer to "Create Fax Group Recipients" (P.299).

„ Close Menu
5 Deselects the selected item.

Edit/Delete
You can check the content of a job flow sheet, and edit, copy, or delete it.
Note
z Some operations may be restricted according to types of job flow owners, authentication settings, and user
types. For more information, refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders" (P.435).

„ Delete
Deletes the selected job flow sheet.

„ Copy
Creates a duplicate of the selected job flow sheet. You can create a new job flow sheet
based on the duplicate.
Reference
z The procedure of creation is the same as creation of a new job flow sheet. For more information, refer to "Create New Job Flow
Sheet" (P.281).

„ Edit
You can edit the selected job flow sheet.
Reference
z The procedure of change is the same as creation of a new job flow sheet. For more information, refer to "Create New Job Flow
Sheet" (P.281).

Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword

You can register job flow search keywords. The registered keywords are displayed under
[Select Keyword] and allows you to use for job flow sheet search. The keywords are also

288
 Setup

available from a list under [Keyword] that is displayed when you create a new job flow
sheet.
Up to 12 single-byte characters are allowed for a job flow search keyword.

Add Address Book Entry

You can register frequently used addresses on the Address Book. Select an addresstype
from Fax, IP Fax (SIP), Internet Fax, E-mail, and Server (FTP/SMB).
When an address is registered, you can search for it with [Address Book] on the [Fax], [IP
Fax (SIP)], [Internet Fax], and [E-mail] screens.
You can store a total of 2000 addresses for Fax, IP Fax (SIP), Internet Fax, E-mail, and
Server (FTP/SMB).
Important
z The following address types can be selected when you add an address to Address Book: Fax, IP Fax (SIP),
Internet Fax, E-mail, and Server (FTP/SMB) When you register an address on the Address Book, select an
address type in accordance with the service. The address book entry registered with the wrong address type
cannot be selected from the original service.

Note
z
The address numbers correspond to the one touch buttons. The one touch buttons are available for fax, IP

Tools
Fax (SIP), Internet Fax, E-mail, and Scan to PC. For more information on the relationship between the address
numbers and the one touch buttons, refer to "One-touch Buttons" (P.153).
z
To specify an e-mail or server (FTP/SMB) address (for insertion in the Address Book), it is not possible to use a

z
speed dial specified with the numeric keypad, one-touch dialing, or a group dial number.
To specify an e-mail address or a server address for the Scan services, use the Address Book. The speed dial
5
with the numeric keypad, the one touch buttons, and the group address created using the Group Recipients
feature cannot be used to specify such addresses.
z
You can register, edit, delete, or view the Address Book from CentreWare Internet Services. For more
information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

1 Select [Add Address Book Entry].

Note
z To display the [Add Address Book Entry] screen, press the <Log In/Out> button and enter the system
administrator’s user ID, and then select [Tools] > [Setup] > [Add Address Book Entry]. If [Setup] is displayed
on the Services Home screen, select [Setup] > [Add Address Book Entry]. When users are prohibited from
editing the Address Book in the System Administration mode, [Add Address Book Entry] cannot be selected in
[Setup] on the Services Home screen.

289
 Tools

2 Press a speed dial to register.

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.
z Entering a speed dial number with the numeric keypad displays the specified number at the top of the
column.

3 Select [Address Type].

Tools

5
4 Select the address type, and then select [Save].

5 Select an item to set and set.

6 When the settings are completed, select [Save].

290
 Setup

„ When selecting [E-mail] as the address type

The following items appear:

- Address Type - Given Name

- E-mail Address - Custom Item 1 (Telephone Number*)

- Name - Custom Item 2 (Office*)

- Index - Custom Item 3 (Department*)

- Surname - S/MIME Certificate

*: Factory default setting

„ When selecting [Server] as the address type

The following items appear:

Tools
- Address Type - Save In
- Name - User Name
- Index - Password 5
- Transfer Protocol - Port Number
- Server Name/IP Address - Shared Name (SMB Only)

„ When selecting [Fax] as the address type

The following items appear:

- Address Type - Delay Start

- Fax Number - Remote Folder
- Name - F Code
- Index - Relay Broadcast
- Starting Rate - Billing - Day Time
- Resolution - Billing - Night Time
- Cover Page - Billing - Midnight
- Maximum Image Size

„ When selecting [IP Fax (SIP)] as the address type

The following items appear:

z
Address Type z
Delay Start
z Recipient (Fax Number) z Remote Folder
z Name z F Code
z Index z Relay Broadcast
z Starting Rate z Billing - Day Time

291
 Tools

z
Resolution z
Billing - Night Time
z
Cover Page z
Billing - Midnight
z
Maximum Image Size

„ When selecting [Internet Fax] as the address type

The following items appear:

z Address Type z Starting Rate

z E-mail Address z Resolution
z Name z Maximum Image Size
z Index z Internet Fax Profile
z S/MIME Certificate

Address Type
Allows you to change an address type.
Tools

E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address with up to 128 single-byte characters.
5 Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Name
Enter a recipient name with up to 18 single-byte characters.
Reference
z
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Index
You can register a single alphanumeric index character for use as a keyword when listing
the registered recipients in alphabetical order.
Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Surname
Enter a recipient surname with up to 32 single-byte characters
Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Given Name
Enter a recipient given name with up to 32 single-byte characters
Reference
z
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

292
 Setup

Custom Item 1
The attribute name set as [Attribute Name of Custom Item 1] is shown as the item name.
By factory default, the item name is set to "Telephone Number". You can input
anyinformation as an auxiliary item. Up to 20 single-byte characters are allowed. This item
is suitable for information represented by a shorter character string, such as telephone
number and employee number.
Reference
z For more information on the item name, refer to "Attribute Name of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3" (P.219).

Custom Item 2
The attribute name set as [Attribute Name of Custom Item 2] is shown as the item name.
By factory default, the item name is set to "Office". You can input any information as an
auxiliary item. Up to 40 single-byte characters can be used. This item is suitable for
information represented by a longer character string, such as company name and
department name.
Reference
z
For more information on the item name, refer to "Attribute Name of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3" (P.219).

Tools
Custom Item 3
The attribute name set as [Attribute Name of Custom Item 3] is shown as the item name.
By factory default, the item name is set to "Department". You can input any information as
5
an auxiliary item. Up to 60 single-byte characters can be used. This item is suitable for
information represented by a much longer character string, such as company division name
and company address.
Reference
z For more information on the item name, refer to "Attribute Name of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3" (P.219).

S/MIME Certificate
Allows you to link an S/MIME certificate. The S/MIME certificate must be registered in
advance.
To link a certificate, select [Attach/Change Link] and select a certificate in a screen
displayed. To remove a link, select [Remove Certificate].
Important
z If a certificate linked to an S/MIME certificate in the Address Book is deleted by some reasons such as hard
disk initialization and the deletion of the certificate, the certificate linked to the S/MIME certificate will be
invalid. Even if you re-register the S/MIME certificate, you have to manually link it again.

Note
z
If many certificates are registered on the machine, it may take a long time to link a certificate.

Transfer Protocol
Set the transfer protocol. You can select either [FTP] or [SMB].

Server Name/IP address

Enter a name or an IP address of a forwarding destination server.

293
 Tools

Shared Name (SMB Only)

Enter the shared name set for the SMB folder.
Important
z If the “/” mark is used at the top of a shared name, a job flow cannot read the shared name correctly. Do not
use the “/” mark at the top of a shared name.

Save in
Enter the directory for storing files. When SMB is selected, use a UNC format.
‹ Transferring via FTP
For example: aaa/bbb
When you save files in the bbb directory under the aaa directory in the root directory.
‹ Transferring via SMB
For example: aaa\bbb
When you save files in the bbb directory under the aaa directory in a specified volume.

User Name
Tools

Set the user name when a user name is required to be input by the forwarding destination
server.

5 When [FTP] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], up to 97 characters are allowed.

When [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], use one of the following formats:
‹ For Active Directory:
User name@Domain name (User name: up to 32 characters / Domain name: up to 64
characters)
For example: [email protected] ("fuji" is a user name and "example.com" is a domain
name)

‹ For Windows NT®domains:

Domain name\User name (Domain name: up to 64 characters / User name: up to
32characters)
For example: example\fuji ("example" is a domain name and "fuji" is a user name)
‹ For workgroups:
Local user (up to 32 characters)
For example: Fuji-Taro

Password
Set a password when the forwarding destination server prompts a password entry. You can
enter up to 32 single-byte characters for a password.

Port Number
Set the forwarding destination port number. Specify a number from 1 to 65535.

294
 Setup

Fax Number
Enter a fax number with up to 128 digits.
Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Index
You can register a single alphanumeric index character for use as a keyword to search with
the Address Book.
Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Starting Rate
Set a communications mode. You can select from [G3 Auto], [Forced 4800bps], and [G4
Auto].
When the destination is specified by a speed dial number with the communications mode
set, you cannot change the communications mode in the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
Note

Tools
z
[G4 Auto] is displayed only when Internet fax addresses are selected.

Resolution 5
Set image quality for transmission.
Select from [Panel] (image quality selected on the control panel), [Standard (200x100 dpi)],
[Fine (200 dpi)], [Superfine (400 dpi)], and [Superfine (600 dpi)].

Cover Page
Select whether or not to send a fax or an Internet fax with a cover note attached. If
attached, specify comments on the sender and a recipient to be printed in the cover pages.
Comments must be registered in advance.
Reference
z For information on comment registration, refer to "Add Fax Comment" (P.300).

1 Select [Print Cover Page].

2 Select [Comments].

295
 Tools

3 Select any comment from the list of comments displayed under [Recipient’s Comment] and
[Sender’s Comment].

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

4 Select [Save]. The image of the Fax Cover Page is displayed.

5 Select [Save].

Maximum Image Size

Tools

Select the maximum image size from [A3], [B4], or [A4] to match the recipient's paper size
or available profile.

5 Delay Start
Set whether or not to use a delayed start transmission.
Reference
z If the machine’s system clock is set to the 24-hour display, [AM] and [PM] do not appear. For information on the system clock, refer
to "Time" (P.147).

Remote Folder
Select whether or not to send a fax or an Internet fax to a recipient’s folder. To use folder
communications, you must obtain the recipient's folder number and passcode in advance.

1 Select [On].

2 Enter a recipient's folder number with the numeric keypad.

3 If a passcode is set, enter the passcode with the numeric keypad.

Note
z If no passcode is set, leave the text boxes blank and select [Save].

296
 Setup

F Code
Select whether or not to use F code communications.
F Code is the transmission procedure set by the Communications and Information Network
Association of Japan and is the T.30 (communication protocol) method for using
subaddresses that are standardized by the ITU-T.
For F code (sub address) and password, you can use up to 20 digits 0 to 9, *, and #.

1 Select [On].

2 Enter the F code with the numeric keypad.

Tools
Note
z The F code consists of “0” + folder number. For example, if the folder number is 123, the F code will be “0123”.

3 Enter the password as required with the numeric keypad, and then select [Save]. 5
Note
z You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.

Relay Broadcast
Set the instruction given to a relay station, which is used when the machine is a base
station and the registered speed dial is a relay station for relay broadcast.When selecting
[On], set [Relay Station ID], [Print at Relay Station], and [BroadcastRecipients].

1 Select [On].

2 Enter a 2-digit relay station ID with the numeric keypad.

Note
z The relay station ID is the address number for the base station (the machine) already registered on the relay
station.

3 Select [Speed Dial 001<->099].

297
 Tools

4 Enter a speed dial number of broadcast destination (001 to 099) or group number (#01 to
#09) registered on the relay station with the numeric keypad, and then select [Add].
Note
z
If there are more than one broadcast destinations, repeat step 4.

5 To print a document also at the relay station, under select [On] for [Print at Relay Station].

6 Select [Save].

Billing - Day Time, Billing - Night Time, Billing - Midnight

Set the connection time for one unit charge in each of the time bands (daytime/night/
midnight).
You can set a value from 0.1 to 255.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
Reference
z This item is displayed when [Accounting] > [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting] and [Fax/Internet Fax Service] is set to
[Enable Accounting] under [Auditron Mode]. For information on how to enable the feature, refer to "Auditron Mode" (P.308).
z The information registered can be confirmed by printing a Billing Data List. For information about how to
print, refer to "Billing Data List" (P.122).
Tools

1 Select one of [Billing - Day Time], [Billing - Night Time], and [Billing - Midnight].

5 2 Select [Billing].

3 Enter the time for one unit charge from 0.1 to 255.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments with
the numeric keypad.

4 Select [Save].

Internet Fax Profile

Set the format of the Internet fax profile.
A profile is specified to restrict attribute information such as image resolution and paper
size for transmissions between Internet Fax-enabled machines.

„ TIFF-S
The Internet fax standard profile. For documents larger than A4, the size is automatically
reduced to A4 when transmission.

„ TIFF-F
Select this profile when you specify [Superfine] for [Resolution] or when you send A3 or B4
documents.

298
 Setup

„ TIFF-J
Select this profile for sending documents in JBIG.

When the [Delete Entry] Button is Selected

Selecting this button deletes all the information registered for the address selected. To
delete all information registered, select [Delete].
Important
z Deleted information cannot be restored.

Create Fax Group Recipients

You can register addresses for broadcast transmission as a group. Each group caninclude up
to 20 address numbers. The maximum number of groups that can beregistered is 50.
Note that recipients to be added to a group must be registered in the speed dials on the
Address Book.
Note
z Even when the speed dial number of fax recipients (address book entries) are included in a group, the
machine does not send faxes to the recipients if their address types are set to [Email] or [Server].

Tools
z
You cannot include a group in another group.
z
You can use wildcards for specifying the numbers in the last one or two digits as shown in the following
example:
z
001*:Specifies the 10 addresses with address numbers 010 to 019. 5
z ****:Specifies all address numbers.

1 Select [Create Fax Group Recipients].

2 Select a group number to register.

Note
z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.

3 Select [Group Name] and enter a group name to register, and then select [Save].

299
 Tools

4 Enter a speed dial number (four digits) to register with the numeric keypad, and then select
[Add to this Group].

5 Repeat step 4 to register the address numbers.

6 Select [Save].

„ Delete this Group

Deletes all information registered on a group.

„ Delete from this group

Deletes a registered address.
Tools

Select the speed dial or enter the speed dial number to delete with the numeric keypad, and
then select [Delete from this group].
5
Add Fax Comment
You can register comments to be printed on cover sheets. A maximum of 50 comments can
be registered, each of which can be up to 36 single-byte characters.
Reference
z
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Paper Tray Attributes

Set a paper size and a paper type load in each tray.
Reference
z
For more information, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.158).

300
 Accounting

Accounting
In [Accounting], you can register the users that will use the machine, and set the operation
settings of the Accounting feature.
Reference
z For more information about this feature, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.423).
"Create/View User Accounts" (P.301)
"View Accounts" (P.305)
"Reset User Accounts" (P.305)
"System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs)" (P.307)
"Accounting Type" (P.307)
"Accounting Login Screen Settings" (P.308)
"Fax Billing Data" (P.310)
"Accounting/Billing Device Settings" (P.310)

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [Accounting].

Tools
Reference
z For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).
5
2 Select an item to set or change.

Create/View User Accounts

To enable the Accounting feature, register user IDs and user names to authenticate
registered users.
You can set a limit on the number of pages for each user of the machine. You can also
check the cumulative number of pages for each user registered. Up to 1,000 user data can
be registered. The settings described here are identical with [Create/View User Accounts]
under [Authentication] of [Authentication/Security Settings].
Important
z
Before registering users, refer to "Accounting Type" (P.307) and set the Accounting Type you use.

Note
z This item does not appear when [Network Accounting] is selected in "Accounting Type" (P.307).

1 Select [Create/View User Accounts].

301
 Tools

2 Select a [User ID] for which you want to register a user, and then select [Create/ Delete].

Note
z A 4-digit number displayed on the left of each User ID is a user control number.
z Selecting a line displayed as [<Available>] displays a screen to enter User ID. Enter a User ID, and then select
[Save].

z Select[ ]to display the previous screen or[ ]to display the next screen.
z Entering a 4-digit User ID number with the numeric keypad displays the specified number at the top of the
column.

3 Select any item, and set it.

Tools

4 Select [Close].

User ID
Enter a user ID to use the machine. Up to 32 single-byte characters are allowed.

User Name
Set a user name. Up to 32 single-byte characters are allowed.
Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Passcode
Set a passcode. Setting a passcode is strongly recommended for security. Set a passcode
from 4 to 12 digits.
Note
z When [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login] is set to [On], a passcode entry is required upon user
authentication.

Reference
z For information on how to change your passcode later, refer to "Changing Passcode" (P.449).

302
 Accounting

E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address with up to 128 characters. The address set here will be set as [From]
under [E-mail].
Reference
z For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.45).

Device Access
Set whether to allow the machine use.

„ Enabled
Allows the machine use. When the smart card reader is connected, you can select the
settings for each Login Type.

„ Disabled
Prohibits the machine use.

Service Access
You can place restrictions on the use and the maximum number of allowed pages for each

Tools
of the Copy, Fax, Scan, and Print services.

1 Select [Service Access]. 5

2 Select a feature to restrict.

3 To set account limits, select [Change Account Limit], and then enter the maximum number
of pages with the numeric keypad.

„ Feature Access
Set access restrictions on features.
‹ Free Access
The feature is not restricted.
‹ No Access to Copy/Fax/Scan/Print Service
Allows you to restrict the use of the Copy, Fax, Scan, or Print service.

„ Change Account Limit

Set the maximum number of pages for copying, scanning, or printing.
You can specify a number from 1 to 9,999,999 (7 digits) pages in 1 page increments.
z The following limits can be placed on the Copy service for each user: Permission to use:
[Free Access], [Black & White Only], [Color Only], or [No Access to Copy Service]

303
 Tools

Maximum number of color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999 Maximum number of black-

and-white pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
z
The following limits can be placed on the Fax service for each user: Permission to
use:[Free Access] or [No Access to Fax Service]
z The following limits can be placed on the Scan service for each user: Permission to use:
[Free Access], [Black & White Only], [Color Only], or [No Access to Scan Service]
Maximum number of color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999 Maximum number of black-
and-white pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
z
The following limits can be placed on the Print service for each user: Permission to use:
[Free Access], [Black & White Only], or [No Access to Print Service] Maximum number of
color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999 Maximum number of black-and-white pages
allowed: 1 to 9,999,999

User Role

„ User Role
Allows you to select a user role for a user.
‹ User
Tools

No special authority is given to this user role.

‹ System Administrator
5 The same authority as a system administrator is given except for the following operation:
z Operate folders
z
Operate job flow sheets
z Change the passcode of the system administrator
‹ Account Administrator
The following authorities are given:
z Create, delete, change (except for passcode), and view (unavailable depending on some
settings) user information
z
Create, delete, change, and view accounting
z Change an Alternative Name for Account ID or Mask Account ID
z Print an Auditron Report for each user

„ Add This User to Authorization Group

Allows you to select an authorization group for a user.

Reset User Account

Deletes all registered information for a selected user.

„ Reset
Deletes the registered user data. Once deleted, the data cannot be restored.
Important
z
All job flow sheets, folders, and files within folders belonging to the user are deleted. If the user is owner of a
large amount of material (when a large quantity of files is left remaining within a folder for example), the
deletion will take a considerable time.

304
 Accounting

„ Cancel
Cancels the deletion of the user data.

Reset Total Impressions

Resets the current cumulative number of pages for a selected user, returning it to zero.

„ Reset
Resets the current cumulative number of pages for users. Once reset, the previous count
cannot be restored.

„ Cancel
Cancels resetting the cumulative number of pages.

View Accounts
Selecting [Xerox Standard Accounting] on the [Accounting Type] screen allows you to check
the following for each registered user or group: (1) the maximum number of times that the
account can be used for each service, and (2) how many times the account has been used
for each service.

Tools
Important
z
To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
5
Note
z You can register users and groups on CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer to the help of
CentreWare Internet Services.

Note
z
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Click [View Accounts].

2 Select [User Account] or [Group Account]. If you select [User Account], select also the User
ID to check.

3 Click [Account Details].

Reset User Accounts

You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation, or
reset the auditron data. It is also available to print contents for confirmation before
resetting. The settings described here are identical with [Reset User Accounts] under
[Authentication] of [Authentication/Security Settings].
Note
z This item does not appear when [Network Accounting] or [Xerox Standard Accounting] is selected in
[Accounting Type].

305
 Tools

All User Accounts

Deletes all information registered for each user. It also deletes all data including the
maximum number of pages, cumulative number of pages, and printer auditron data.
Important
z
All job flow sheets, folders, and documents within folders belonging to the user are deleted. If the user is
owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of files is left remaining within a folder for
example), the deletion will take a considerable time.

All Feature Access Settings

Resets the feature access limit for all users.

All Account Limits

Resets the maximum number of pages for all users to the default (9,999,999 pages).

Total Impressions
Resets all accounting data for all users including the system administrator. The number of
pages is also reset to 0.
Tools

All Authorization Groups

Delinks users from authorization groups, and links those users to the default authorization
5 group.

Meter (Print Jobs)

Resets all printer auditron, and deletes automatically registered job owner names. The
number of pages printed is also reset to 0.
Note
z
[Meter (Print Jobs)] is displayed when [Disable Accounting] is selected for [Print Service] in the [Auditron
Mode] screen under [Accounting Type].

Print the Auditron Report

Prints a report including contents registered information to reset or a report including
contents administration data to reset. The report is available for confirmation before
resetting.

Print the Meter Report

Prints a meter report, which is helpful when you check counters before you reset or delete
them.
Note
z [Meter (Print Jobs)] is displayed when [Disable Accounting] is selected for [Print Service] in the [Auditron
Mode] screen under [Accounting Type].

Reset
Deletes or resets the data for the selected item.

306
 Accounting

System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs)

You can check or reset the total impression copied using the System Administration mode
on the screen.
The total impressions are counted up to 9,999,999 pages.
Note
z This item does not appear when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].

Accounting Type
You can select whether or not to use the Accounting feature.

Accounting Disabled
Does not perform accounting.

Local Accounting
Performs accounting.

Tools
Network Accounting
Performs accounting based on the user information managed on a remote service. User
information is registered on the remote service.
5
Note
z
When [Network Accounting] is selected, users are prompted to enter their Account ID on the [Login] screen
that is displayed when attempting to use services required for accounting.

Reference
z For more information on Network Accounting, refer to "Types of Account Administration" (P.428).

Xerox Standard Accounting

Accounting is carried out based on the user information and account information
preregistered on the machine.
Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

307
 Tools

Auditron Mode
Allows you to set whether or not to enable the Auditron feature for the following services:

z Copy z Fax/Internet Fax z Store to Folder

z E-mail z Network Scanning z Scan to PC
z Store to USB z Store & Send Link z Store to WSD
z Media Print - Text z Media Print - Photos z Print

Note
z WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
z The services displayed on the screen vary depending on the machine configuration.
z
When [Enable Accounting] is selected for a service, [ ] is displayed on the button of the applicable service
on the Services Home screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed at the lower left of the Services Home
screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed after authentication.
z Print jobs may be canceled depending on the settings in "Receive Control" (P.322).

Verify User Details

Tools

Allows you to set whether or not to verify user information.

Selecting [Yes] also allows you to select [For printer/Direct Fax Jobs].
5
Customize User Prompts
Allows you to set the type of user information used for authentication.
Note
z Account ID is used for accounting.
z
Display User ID & Account ID Prompts
Prompts users to enter both their user ID and Account ID.
z
Display User ID Prompt Only
Prompts users to enter their user ID only.
z Display Account ID Prompt Only
Prompts users to enter their Account ID only.
z Display No Prompts
Does not prompt users to enter their user ID or Account ID.

Accounting Login Screen Settings

You can configure Accounting settings.

Alternative Name for User ID

If required, you can change the indication "UserID" on the [Login] screen that appears
when the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel or the login information area on the
touch screen is pressed to another name such as "User Name" or "Number". The alias can be
set to 1 to 15 single-byte characters.
Note
z The name changed is also printed in a report or a list.

308
 Accounting

Mask User ID (***)

You can set how an entered user ID is shown on the screen. Use this feature to enhance
security as required.

„ Show
As you enter the user ID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.

„ Hide
As you enter the user ID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).

Alternative Name for Account ID

If required, you can change the indication "Account ID" on the [Login] screen that appears
when the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel or the login information area on the
touch screen is pressed to another name such as "Account Name" or "Number". The alias
can be set to 1 to 15 single-byte characters.
Note
z This item is displayed when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].
z The name changed is also printed in a report or a list.

Tools
Mask Account ID (***)
You can set how an entered Account ID is shown on the screen. Use this feature to enhance
security as required.
5
Note
z
This item is displayed when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].

„ Show
As you enter the Account ID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.

„ Hide
As you enter the Account ID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).

Display Billing Information Upon Login

You can set whether to display billing information per user when a user logs in.If you select
[Enabled], users can check their billing information: [Impressions], [Account Limit], and
[Balance] for each of the services (copying, printing, and scanning).
Note
z This item is displayed when [Login to Local Accounts] is selected in [Login Type] and [Local Accounting] is
selected in [Accounting Type].
z Only the billing information for the services that the user is allowed to use will be displayed.
z When a user logs in as the system administrator, billing information will not be displayed.

309
 Tools

Fax Billing Data

You can configure fax billing settings.
Important
z To register the billing data, enable the Auditron feature for fax/Internet fax under Accounting in advance. For
details on how to enable the Auditron feature, refer to "Auditron Mode" (P.308).

Note
z
Set the connection time for one unit charge in each of the time bands (daytime/night/ midnight) in [Billing].
For more information on how to set [Billing], refer to "Billing - Day Time, Billing - Night Time, Billing -
Midnight" (P.298).
z The registered details can be confirmed by printing the Billing Data List. For information on how to print, refer
to "Billing Data List" (P.122).

1 Select [Fax Billing Data].

2 Select [Charge Rate per Unit].

Tools

5
„Charge Rate per Unit
This is a communication charge per unit. You can set a value from 0.1 to 255.9 seconds in
0.1 second increments.

3 Select [Change Settings].

4 Enter an amount with the keyboard displayed on the screen or the numeric keypad.

5 Select [Save].

Accounting/Billing Device Settings

You can configure accounting or billing device settings.
Important
z When an accounting or billing device is connected to the machine, be sure to set a password and that users
other than the system administrator do not disconnect the device by mistake.
z The features described in this section may not appear for some models. Optional components or related
products provided by Fuji Xerox are required to use the features. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.

310
 Accounting

Connect with Accounting/Billing Device

Allows you to select whether or not to use the connected accounting or billing device from
[None] or [Connected].
Note
z
While a device for maintenance is connected, you cannot change the setting.

Accounting/Billing Device
Select the type of the accounting/billing device connected to the machine.
Important
z If a device connected does not match the device selected in [Accounting/Billing Device], an error occurs. Jobs
related to the accounting/billing device cannot be performed until the error is resolved. For information on
how to resolve the error, refer to "Error Code" (P.496).

Track Print Jobs

This feature is effective for the Print service.
Select whether or not to track billing information for the print jobs. Select from [No
Tracking] and [Track with Accounting/Billing Device].
This feature is available for all accounting/billing devices.

Tools
Track Scan/Fax Jobs
This feature is effective for the Scan, Fax, Internet Fax, and Server Fax services.
5
Select whether or not to track billing information for the scan, fax, Internet fax, and server
fax jobs. Select from [No Tracking] and [Track with Accounting/Billing Device].
This feature is available for accounting/billing devices other than Coin Kit and Dispenser.

Interrupt Mode
This feature is effective for the Copy service.
Select whether or not to enable the Interrupt mode. Select from [Disabled] and [Enabled].
This feature is available for accounting/billing devices other than Card Activated -
Cumulative and Smart Card Reader.

Job with Insufficient Credit

This feature is effective for the Copy, Print, and Scan services.
Select the operation of the machine when the amount remaining in the accounting/billing
device becomes insufficient. Select from [Delete Job Immediately] and [Hold Job].
This feature is available for accounting/billing devices other than Card Activated -
Cumulative and Smart Card Reader.

Charge Print Jobs

This feature is effective for the Print service.
Select how the print job performed is charged. Select from [Charge by Card Number] and
[Do not Charge by Card Number].
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative and Card Activated - Subtractive.

311
 Tools

Track with Cumulative Device

This feature is effective for the Copy and Print services.
Select the timing that the amount for copy or print job is charged. Select from [Track with
Accounting Device] and [High Speed Printing].
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative.

Scan Ahead for Copy Job

This feature is effective for the Copy service.
Select whether or not to enable the Scan Ahead feature for copy jobs. Select from
[Disabled] and [Enabled].
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative, and Card Activated - Subtractive.
Important
z Some of the products listed above may not be available for this feature depending on the types and settings.
For information on the products available for this feature and on how to change the settings, contact our
Customer Support Center.
Tools

312
 Authentication/Security Settings

Authentication/Security Settings
In [Authentication/Security Settings], you can configure the registration and
authentication of a user and security settings.
Reference
z For more information about the feature, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.423).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
"System Administrator Settings" (P.313)
"Authentication" (P.315)
"Allow User to Disable Active Settings" (P.324)
"Job Status Default" (P.324)
"Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.325)

1 On the [Tools] screen, select [Authentication/Security Settings].

Reference
z
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

Tools
2 Select an item to set or change.
5
System Administrator Settings
In [System Administrator Settings], you can set the system administrator ID and passcode.
We recommend setting the system administrator ID and passcode to prevent unauthorized
setting changes and ensure security.

System Administrator's Login ID

Set the system administrator's user ID. Enter the ID from 1 to 32 single-byte characters.
Note
z
The default of the system administrator's user ID is “11111”.

1 Select [System Administrator's Login ID].

2 Select [On].

3 Select [Keyboard].

4 Enter the system administrator's ID with up to 32 characters, and then select [Save].

313
 Tools

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to re-enter the same system administrator’s ID in [Re-enter System
Administrator's Login ID].

6 Select [Save].

7 A confirmation window appears. Select [Yes] to confirm your entry.

System Administrator's Passcode

Set the passcode for the System Administrator.
Setting a passcode is strongly recommended to enhance security.
Note
z The default of the system administrator's passcode is “x-admin”.
The system administrator's passcode set here is used when [Passcode Entry for Control
Panel Login] is set to [On] under [Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication] >
[Passcode Policy].
Set the passcode after setting the system administrator's user ID. You can set the passcode
from 4 to 12 characters.
Reference
Tools

z For more information about [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login], refer to "Passcode Policy" (P.321).

5 1 Select [System Administrator's Passcode].

2 Select [New Passcode].

3 Enter a new passcode (4 to 12 digits) using the keyboard displayed, and then select [Save].
Note
z
If no passcode is set, leave the text boxes blank and select [Save].

4 Select [Retype Passcode], enter the same passcode, and then select [Save].

5 Select [Save].

6 A confirmation window appears. Select [Yes] to confirm your entry.

314
 Authentication/Security Settings

Authentication
In [Authentication], you can set the following items.
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
"Login Type" (P.315)
"Access Control" (P.315)
"Create/View User Accounts" (P.317)
"Reset User Accounts" (P.317)
"Create Authorization Groups" (P.317)
"User Details Setup" (P.318)
"Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator" (P.320)
"Passcode Policy" (P.321)
"Charge/Private Print Settings" (P.321)
"Receive Control" (P.322)

Login Type

Tools
Allows you to select a type of authentication.

„ No Login Required
Does not use the Authentication feature. 5
„ Login to Local Accounts
Authenticates users based on the user information registered on the machine.
Note
z When [Login to Local Accounts] is selected, the machine enters the Login mode and [Login] is displayed at
the lower left of the Services Home screen.

„ Login to Remote Accounts

Authenticates users based on the user information registered on a remote authentication
server.
Note
z When [Login to Remote Accounts] is selected, the machine enters the Login mode and [Login] is displayed at
the lower left of the Services Home screen.

Access Control
Allows you to restrict access to the machine or each service. Once the access control is
enabled, user authentication is required to use the machine or the services.
Note
z When a user is authenticated by a remote authentication server (except ApeosWare Authentication
Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent), the authenticated user can access the services through
the control panel based on the permission information obtained from the remote server.
z When a guest user is permitted to use the machine, access restriction for each service cannot be specified for
the guest user. If you want to restrict a guest user to use the machine, refer to "Guest User" (P.319).

„ Device Access
Allows you to set whether or not to restrict buttons operation on the control panel of the
machine.
Select [Unlocked] or [Locked].

315
 Tools

„ Service Access
Allows you to set whether or not to restrict access to each of the following services.
Note
z When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service, [ ] is displayed on the button of the applicable service
on the Services Home screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed at the lower left of the Services Home
screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed after authentication.
z When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service, the applicable service is not displayed on the Services
Home screen. The services are displayed after authentication.

Reference
z
For more information on how to set the login type, refer to "Login Type" (P.315).
z
Copy
Restricts access to the Copy service on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Copy service, the use of the store
programming is also restricted.
z
Fax/Internet Fax
Restricts access to the Fax/IP Fax (SIP)/Internet Fax/Direct Fax service on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Fax/IP Fax (SIP)/Internet Fax service,
Tools

the use of the store programming is also restricted.

z Scan
5 Restricts access to the E-mail, Store to Folder, Scan to PC, Store to USB, Store & Send Link,
Store to WSD, and Network Scanning services and features on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Scan services, the use of the store
programming is also restricted.
Note
z
WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
z
Media Print - Text
Restricts access to the Media Print - Text service on the machine.
z
Media Print - Photos
Restricts access to the Media Print - Photos service on the machine.
z Send from Folder
Restricts access to the Send from Folder service on the machine.
z
Stored Programming
Restricts access to the Stored Programming service on the machine.
z Job Flow Sheets
Restricts access to the Job Flow Sheets service on the machine.
z Custom Services
Restricts access to custom services on the machine.
Note
z
This feature is available when any custom service is installed on the machine. For more information on the
custom services, contact our Customer Support Center.
z
Print
Restricts users to print jobs stored on the machine, such as the Secure Print and Sample
Set jobs.

316
 Authentication/Security Settings

This feature also restricts the submission of print jobs from a computer via a network. To
use the Authentication feature, authentication information such as a user ID and
passcode needs to be entered in a print driver.
If authentication fails, the print data sent to the machine is saved in the machine or
deleted according to the Charge Print settings.
Note
z When [Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote
Accounts], the Print feature is not restricted.

Reference
z
For information on how to select an authentication type, refer to "Login Type" (P.315)

„ Feature Access
Set [Color Copying], [Print Files from Folder], and [Retrieve Files from Folder].

Create/View User Accounts

To enable the Accounting feature, register user IDs and user names to authenticate
registered users.
You can set a limit on the number of pages for each user of the machine. You can also

Tools
check the cumulative number of pages for each user registered. Up to 1,000 user data can
be registered. The settings described here are identical with [Create/View User Accounts]
under [Accounting].
Reference 5
z
Refer to "Create/View User Accounts" (P.317).

Reset User Accounts

You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation, or
reset the auditron data. It is also available to print contents for confirmation before
resetting. The settings described here are identical with [Reset User Accounts] under
[Accounting].
Reference
z Refer to "Reset User Accounts" (P.317).

Create Authorization Groups

System administrators can give login users authority to use some features that are
restricted for login users. The login users can be divided into different authorization groups.
Note
z Up to 20 groups can be registered.

1 Select [Create Authorization Groups].

2 Select [Group Name], and then select [Create/Delete].

317
 Tools

3 Select and set any item.

„ Group Name
Enter a group name with up to 32 single-byte characters.

„ Restrict Recipient Selection Method

When [Only From Address Book] is selected for [Restrict Recipient Selection Method] under
[Tools] > [Common Service Settings] > [Other Settings], a transmission to a recipient who is
not registered on the Address Book is restricted for the Fax / Internet Fax or E-mail Service.
Set whether or not to cancel the restriction.

„ Restrict User to Edit Address Book

When [Yes] is selected for [Restrict User to Edit Address Book] under [Tools] > [Common
Service Settings] > [Other Settings], local users cannot register / edit the Address Book. Set
whether or not to cancel the restriction.
Note
z When [Only From Address Book] is selected for [Restrict Recipient Selection Method] under [Tools] >
[Common Service Settings] > [Other Settings], shift the select [No Restriction] to enable the local users to
register / edit the Address Book.
Tools

„ Allow User to Disable Active Settings

Select whether or not to permit the group members to temporarily disable the forcible
5 printing features, such as the Force Watermark, Print Universal Unique ID, and Force
Annotation features, and to allow the machine to process a job.
Note
z
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.

User Details Setup

Set the information required when carrying out authentication.

„ Alternative Name for User ID

If required, you can change the indication "UserID" on the [Login] screen that appears
when the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel is pressed to another name such as
"User Name" or "Number". The alias can be set to 1 to 15 single-byte characters.
Note
z
The name changed is also printed in a report or a list.

„ Mask User ID (***)

You can set how an entered user ID is shown on the screen. Use this feature to enhance
security as required.
When you select [Show], the characters you enter are echoed on the screen in the normal
way as you enter the user ID. When you select [Hide], the characters you enter is hidden as
a row of asterisks (*****) as you enter the user ID.

„ Failed Access Log

Set the failure count to detect unauthorized access. An error is logged if authentication fails
the number of times specified here within a predetermined time (10 minutes).

„ Logout Confirmation Screen

Set whether or not to display a logout confirmation screen every time a user session ends.

318
 Authentication/Security Settings

„ User ID for Login

Set whether or not to make the user ID entry field on the user login screen case-sensitive.
When you select [Case Sensitive], authentication is performed using the User ID as
registered (including upper and lower cases). When you select [Non-Case Sensitive],
authentication is performed with case ignored even if the User ID has both upper and lower
cases.
Important
z Do not change the setting while a file is stored for the Private Charge Print. Otherwise, you may encounter
problems, such as being unable to print. Change the setting after the machine prints all the files stored.
z Do not select [Case Sensitive] when the machine stores User IDs such as “ABC” and “abc” which are regarded
as the same ID under the setting. If you select [Case Sensitive], it may cause the problem and those IDs may
not be displayed. Before you select the setting, correct those User IDs to distinguish them.

„ When Smart Card Reader is Connected

Set whether or not to enable user ID authentication when [Login to Local Accounts] is
selected and the smart card reader is connected.
When [Smart Card Login] is selected, user ID authentication cannot be used. When [Smart
Card or Control Panel Login] is selected, both smart card authentication and user ID
authentication can be used.

Tools
„ Account Auto Setup for Card Login
Set whether or not to register new user information when [Login to Local Accounts] is
selected and an unregistered user holds a card over the smart card reader. 5
When [Disabled] is selected, the machine does not register the user. When [Enabled] is
selected, the machine registers the user automatically.
Note
z When [Enabled] is selected, [User Name], [Service Access], and [Add User To Authorization Group] will be
displayed.
z Set the user name by selecting [User Name].
z
When [Service Access] is selected, [Copy], [Fax], [Scan], and [Print] will be displayed. You can set [Feature
Access] and [Change Account Limit] for each item.
z
When [Add User To Authorization Group] is selected, you can select a user role and an authorization group for
the user.
z When [Passcode Entry for Smart Card Login] under [Tools] > [Authentication/ Security Settings] >
[Authentication] > [Passcode Policy] is set to [On], you need to enter the passcode twice for the auto assign.

„ Guest User
Set whether or not to permit a guest user when [Login to Remote Accounts] is selected. Set
the guest user passcode from 4 to 12 digits.
Note
z Access restriction for each service cannot be specified for the guest user.

„ Use of Smart Card

Set whether or not to use smart card authentication.

„ Smart Card Link Mode

Set whether or not to require a passcode for smart card authentication when [Login to
Remote Accounts] is selected.

319
 Tools

„ Smart Card Certificate Verification

Set whether or not to verify the smart cart certificate when a user uses the smart card.
When [Enabled] is selected, the owner of the smart card is verified not only by PIN code
verification but by certification verification of the smart card and private key match. In this
case, the upper level CA certificate of the smart card certification must be registered on the
machine.
When [Disabled] is selected, the owner of the smart card is verified by PIN code verification.
Note
z This item is displayed when the Extensible Customization Function is set to be enabled.

„ Kerberos Server Certificate Verification

Set whether or not to verify the Kerberos server certificate when a user uses the Kerberos
server as a remote authentication server.
Note
z
This item is displayed when the Extensible Customization Function is set to be enabled.

„ Smart Card Logout Timing

Select the logout method for smart card authentication when a contactless smart card is
used for authentication.
Tools

When [Log Out when Card is Removed] is selected, you can logout from the machine by
removing the smart card from the smart card reader. When [Log Out from Control Panel] is
5 selected, you can logout by operating the touch screen or control panel.

„ Save remote accounts in this machine

Select whether or not to save the user information used for remote authentication. While
the user information is saved in the machine, the machine can authenticate the user using
the information saved in the machine even when the remote server is off.
Note
z This setting applies only to a user who is authenticated by smart cards.

„ Delete Remote Accounts

Select whether or not to delete the user information saved in the machine for remote
authentication. Select from [Do Not Delete], [Weekly], and [Monthly].
For [Weekly], you can set the day and time. For [Monthly], set the date and time.
Note
z
This setting applies only to a user who is authenticated by smart cards.

Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator

This feature protects the settings from being changed by someone impersonating your
system administrator. If authentication for a system administrator's ID fails more than
specified times continuously, access is denied.
You can specify a login attempt count from 1 to 10.
Note
z The failure count is reset when the machine is restarted.
z To cancel the access rejection state, restart the machine by switching off and on the power.

320
 Authentication/Security Settings

Passcode Policy

„ Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login

You can set whether a passcode is required when the system administrator or a user uses
the machine.Selecting [On] enables [System Administrator's Passcode] setting and
[Passcode] setting for [Create/View User Accounts].
Selecting [Off] does not require the passcode, even if a passcode is set in the above
settings.
Important
z The setting of [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login] is used for authentication on the machine. A passcode
must always be entered when accessing from remote devices using CentreWare Internet Services or the like,
regardless of the use of passcode setting. Depending on authentication procedures, a passcode may be
required for other processes as well.

Note
z The system administrator's passcode is also required when you change settings from CentreWare Internet
Services.

„ Passcode Entry for Smart Card Login

You can set whether a passcode is required for smart card authentication when [Login to
Local Accounts] is selected.

Tools
„ Minimum Passcode Length
Set this item when you specify the minimum number of digits allowed for a passcode. 5
Set a value from 4 to 12 in 1 digit increments.
Note
z This is only applicable to login users (not applicable to the system administrator and guests).
z
Registered users can be authenticated with a passcode less than the minimum number of digits.

Charge/Private Print Settings

You can set how received print jobs should be handled.
You can directly print jobs and temporarily store print jobs to Charge Print or Private Charge
Print for stored files.
The Charge Print feature prints the print jobs of authenticated users. But, using this feature,
you can also temporarily store print jobs and print them later by operating the machine. If
[Save as Charge Print Job] is selected, print jobs received are saved by a user ID for storage
set in a print driver.
The Private Charge Print feature stores jobs to the machine, using the login User ID at print
instruction. You can print the jobs later by operating the machine. Only the files of the login
user are displayed on the touch screen, therefore, it can help ensure privacy protection as
well as prevent output from being left in the tray.
Reference
z
For more information on the Charge Print and Private Charge Print features, refer to "11 Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting
Stored Jobs" and "Computer Operations" > "Print" in the User Guide.
z
To use Charge Print or Private Charge Print, [Receive Control] must be set. For more information, refer to
"Receive Control" (P.322).

321
 Tools

Receive Control
You can set how received print jobs should be handled.
Reference
z For information about printing from a print driver, refer to "Computer Operations" in the User Guide.
z For information about printing or deleting the print job saved, refer to "Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting
Stored Jobs" > "Private Charge Print" in the User Guide, and about deleting a Private Charge Print job with an
invalid User ID, refer to "Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID" (P.108).

1 Select [Receive Control], and then select [Change Settings].

2 Select any item.

Tools

3 According to the selected item, set the processing to apply to jobs.

5 4 Select [Save] after the setting is completed.

„ According to Print Auditron

Specifies how print jobs should be handled when the Authentication and Accounting
features are enabled and [Print] under [Service Access] is set to [Locked].
Note
z When the Authentication and Accounting features are disabled and [Print] under [Service Access] is set to
[Unlocked], the settings specified in the print driver are applied.
When [According to Print Auditron] is selected, [Job Login Success], [Job Login Failure], and
[Job without User ID] are displayed.
‹ Job Login Success
Set the processing to apply to successfully authenticated jobs.
z
To print jobs, select [Print Job].
z To save jobs as Private Charge Print, select [Save as Private Charge Print Job]
Note
z When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in Remote Folder, and
Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.

‹ Job Login Failure

Set the processing to apply to jobs authentication failed (whose information such as the
user ID and passcode has been incorrectly registered on the print driver).
z To save jobs as Private Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
z
To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].
‹ Job without User ID
Set the processing to apply to jobs with no authentication user ID attached (such as print
jobs sent from CentreWare Internet Services or e-mail print).

322
 Authentication/Security Settings

z To print jobs, select [Print Job].

z To save jobs as Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
z
To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].
Note
z [Job without User ID] is automatically changed to [Print Job] on the machine when you select as follows on
CentreWare Internet Services: [Properties] > [Security] > [Authentication Configuration] > [Non-Account
Print]. When [Job without User ID] is set to [Save as ChargePrint Job] or [Delete Job], the [Non-account Print]
check box on CentreWare Internet Services is deselected automatically.

„ Save as Private Charge Print Job

Regardless of whether the Authentication feature is being used or not, all jobs that have a
user ID are saved as Private Charge Print. You can also specify how to handle the job that
does not have a User ID or a PJL command.
Important
z
When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, all the print jobs that have User IDs are saved regardless
of whether or not being successfully authenticated. To minimize the unnecessary print jobs, specify an
expiration date, so that they can be automatically deleted after a specified period of time. Or the system
administrator can manually delete them. For details on how to specify an expiration date, refer to "Stored File
Settings" (P.271). For details on how to delete the print jobs manually, refer to "Deleting a Private Charge
Print Job with an Invalid User ID" (P.108).

Tools
Note
z When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in Remote Folder, and
Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.
When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, [Job without User ID] and [Non-PJL
5
Command Job(s)] are displayed.
‹ Job without User ID
Set how to process jobs with no user ID attached.
z To print jobs, select [Print Job].
z To save jobs as Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
z
To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].
Note
z
[Job without User ID] is automatically changed to [Print Job] on the machine when you selectas follows on
CentreWare Internet Services: [Properties] > [Security] > [AuthenticationConfiguration] > [Non-Account Print].
When [Job without User ID] is set to [Save as ChargePrint Job] or [Delete Job], the [Non-account Print] check
box on CentreWare InternetServices is deselected automatically.

‹ Non-PJL Command Job(s)

Set how to handle the job that does not have a PJL command. The job will be distinguished
by the existence of the User ID, and will be handled according to the following settings.
Select [Do Not Use At All] to apply the [Job without User ID] setting regardless of whether
the job has a User ID.
Select [Use When Available] to specify how to handle the job that has a User ID.
z
To print jobs, select [Print Job].
z To save jobs as Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
z To save jobs as Private Charge Print, select [Save as Private Charge Print Job].
z
To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].

323
 Tools

„ Save as Charge Print Job

Regardless of whether the Authentication feature is being used or not, all received jobs are
saved as Charge Print.
Important
z
When using [Save as Charge Print Job], all the print jobs are saved regardless of whether or not being
successfully authenticated. To minimize the unnecessary print jobs, specify an expiration date, so that they
can be automatically deleted after a specified period of time. Or the system administrator can manually
delete them. For details on how to specify an expiration date, refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.271). For
details on how to delete the print jobs manually, refer to "Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs" >
"Charge Print" in the User Guide.

Note
z
When [Save as Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in Remote Folder, and
Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.

Allow User to Disable Active Settings

Use this feature when you want use active settings for most jobs but not for specific jobs.
You can temporarily disable active settings such as Force Watermark, Print Universal
Unique ID, and Force Annotation features that have been enabled
This feature is applicable to Copy, Print from Folder, Print Stored File, Media Print - Text,
Tools

and Media Print - Photos jobs when [Enable Active Settings] is selected (for jobs such as
Fax, Client Print, and Report, you cannot disable active settings).

5 This option is displayed when [Enable Active Settings] is selected for [Allow User to Disable
Active Settings] for the authorization group where the login user belongs.
Note
z If this setting is set to [Enable Active Settings] while a job is in progress, the setting is not effective for the job.
z
You can disable active settings even when you select a file in a folder using the Job Flow feature and
manually execute a job.
z
Users with system administrator role can configure this feature regardless of authorization group.
z The Watermark feature specified by user using TrustMarkingBasic (sold separately) or copy are not disabled.

Reference
z For more information about Force Watermark, refer to "Watermark" (P.170).
z For settings of authorization group, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.423).

Job Status Default

You can hide active jobs, completed jobs, and job logs from unauthenticated users or non-
job owners, to protect privacy and prevent leakage of confidential information.
Note
z If you set to hide job details, you cannot stop or delete jobs you instructed. Therefore, you cannot cancel jobs
in the case of operational error of copies or wrong transmission of faxes.

Active Jobs View

Select whether or not to hide active jobs from local users.

Completed Jobs View

Select from [All Job Viewing at All Times], [Require Login to View Jobs], and [No Job
Viewing].

324
 Authentication/Security Settings

„ Access To
This feature is displayed when [Require Login to View Jobs] is selected.
Select either [All Jobs] or [Jobs Run By Login User Only].

„ Hide Job Details

This feature is displayed when [Allow Job Viewing at All Times] or [Require Login to View
Jobs] is selected.
Select either [No] or [Yes].

Overwrite Hard Disk

Select whether or not to conduct hard disk overwriting.
When copy, fax, scan, or print processing is completed, the data is deleted from the hard
disk and the area on which the deleted data was stored is automatically overwritten with
blank data. This feature prevents unauthorized retrieval or restoration of the data recorded
on the hard disk. It also applies to copy document and other information stored
temporarily by the system. The following option can be configured.
Note
z
This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,

Tools
contact out Customer Support Center.

Number of Overwrites 5
You can set the number of overwrites.
Important
z If the machine is turned off during the overwriting, unfinished files may remain on the harddisk. The
overwriting will resume if you turn the machine on again with the unfinished files remaining on the hard disk.
z Overwriting once erases the data, but overwriting three times makes it even more definite that the data
cannot be restored. It does, however, take longer.
z During overwriting, normal operations may be slowed down.

Note
z An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.

Reference
z
For more information on how to check the status during overwriting, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.325).
Prerequisite for Using the Data Security Kit
The system administrator must follow the instructions below:
z To protect the data deleted from or stored on the hard disk, the following settings are
required:
- Number of Overwrites: [1 Overwrite] or [3 Overwrites]
- Data Encryption: [On]: an encryption key of 12 digits
- Service Representative Restricted Operation: [Yes]
z Change the system administrator’s factory default passcode (x-admin). Register a new
passcode of 7 characters or more (maximum 12 characters). Be careful not to register a
passcode that can be easily assumed and not to store the registered passcode on a
location that is easily accessible to other persons.
Important
z
If the system administrator's user ID and passcode are forgotten, the machine configuration will not be able
to recover in case of malfunction.

325
 Tools

z Set [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login] to [On].

z Set [Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator] to 5 times.
z
Note that the hard disk security will not be warranted if you do not correctly follow the
above setting instructions.
Reference
z For more information on how to set data encryption, refer to "Data Indicator" (P.181).
z For more information on how to set service representative restricted operation, refer to "Service Rep.
Restricted Operation" (P.179).
z For more information on how to set [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login], refer to "Passcode Policy"
(P.321).
z For more information on how to set the system administrator's user ID, refer to "System Administrator's
Login ID" (P.313).
The manager (of the organization that this machine is used for) must follow the
instructions below:
z Assign an appropriate person as a system administrator and manage and train the
person properly.
z When turning off the machine, make sure no operation is running. Train the users to turn
off the machine after an active operation completes, if any.
Tools

z
Note that the Data Security Kit is used to protect deleted document data from being
recovered; it does not protect files stored in folders in the hard disk.
5 z Install an anti-bugging device on the internal network that the machine with the Data
Security Kit is located on, and perform the network settings properly to protect the
machine from interceptions.
z To block unauthorized access, install a firewall device between the external network and
the internal network that the machine is located on.
z Set the passcode and encryption key according to the following rules:
- Do not use easily assured character string
- Use both characters and numerics
Reference
z For more information on encryption key, refer to "Encryption Key for Confidential Data" (P.179).

326
6
CentreWare Internet Services
6

Settings
 CentreWare Internet Services Settings

Installation of CentreWare Internet Services

CentreWare Internet Services provides services such as displaying the status of the machine
and jobs, and altering configurations using a web browser in a TCP/IP environment.

Preparations
Prepare a computer supporting the TCP/IP protocol and a Web browser such as Internet
Explorer® or Safari to use CentreWare Internet Services.
CentreWare Internet Services Settings

Reference
z Refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Problems" (P.488) when any troubles occur during the configuration.

Configuration on the Machine

The following describes the configuration procedure for using CentreWare Internet Services
on the machine.

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter]. When a passcode is required, select [Next]
6 and enter the system administrator’s passcode, and then select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable the Internet Services (HTTP) port on the machine.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [Internet Services (HTTP)], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

3 Set an IP address.
If an IP address is already set, you can skip this step. For an environment with DHCP or
BOOTP, configure the method for obtaining the address. If an IP address cannot be
obtained automatically or manual configuration is preferred, confirm the settings of an IP
address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
Reference
z For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.200).

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen appears.

328
 Installation of CentreWare Internet Services

5 Select [Close].

Note
z Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

6 After the machine reboots, you can print out a configuration report to confirm that the port
for CentreWare Internet Services is enabled and TCP/IP is set up correctly.
Reference
z
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

CentreWare Internet Services Settings

Start CentreWare Internet Services to confirm whether the service is available or not.
Reference
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).

329
 CentreWare Internet Services Settings

Starting CentreWare Internet Services

To use CentreWare Internet Services, perform the following procedure on your computer.
When Login Type is selected on the machine, authentication is required to access the
machine via a web browser.

1 Start a web browser.

2 Enter the machine's IP address or the Internet address in the address box on the web
CentreWare Internet Services Settings

browser, and press the <Enter> key.

z Example of the IP address entry
http://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
http://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)

z Example of the Internet address entry (when the machine's Internet address is
myhost.example.com)
http://myhost.example.com/

Note
z
If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is registered on the domain
name server, you can access the machine using the Internet address combining the host name and the
domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain name is "example.com" then the
Internet address is "myhost.example.com".
z When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address.
z
If using the Authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode in the [User Name] and
[Password] fields. If you are not sure about the user ID and passcode, consult your system administrator. The
features you can operate vary depending on the system administrator’s authority that was given to a user.
z If communications are encrypted; when the [Enabled] check box is selected under [Security] > [SSL/TLS
Settings] > [HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication] on the [Properties] tab, you must specify an address that starts
with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.
Example of the IP address entry
https://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
https://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
Example of the Internet address entry
https://myhost.example.com/

Reference
z If CentreWare Internet Services is not displayed, refer to ""CentreWare Internet Services Problems" (P.488).

330
 Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services

Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare

Internet Services
CentreWare Internet Services enables you to change various settings on the machine from
a computer.
Note
z Confirm that the port in use is enabled in [Properties] tab > [Connectivity] > [Port Settings] of CentreWare
Internet Services when an item that you want to set is not displayed.
z You cannot change settings from CentreWare Internet Services while Smart WelcomEyes is detecting human

CentreWare Internet Services Settings

presence or the control panel is being used. You can change settings after the machine resets the settings
automatically (Auto Clear). For information about Auto Clear, refer to "Auto Clear" (P.148).
z You may be prompted to enter your user name and passcode when you attempt to change settings on
CentreWare Internet Services. In that case, enter the system administrator's user ID and passcode into the
[User Name] and [Password] fields. The default user ID is "11111" and passcode is "x-admin".
You can configure the following settings with CentreWare Internet Services:
Note
z For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services
screen to see help.

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

Item How to Select Overview/Reference

6
Usage Counters Select from [Status] tab Displays the total number of pages printed
> [Counters] for each service.
Total Runtime Select from [Status] tab Displays the cumulative time of runtime
(printing or scanning), standby time, Sleep
mode time, warm-up time, and power-off
time of the machine by minutes.
Job Templates Select from [Scan] tab Allows you to create, edit, copy, or delete job
templates.
Folder Refer to "Create Folder" (P.276).
Job Flow Sheets Refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.279).
Add New Name Select from [Address Refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.289).
Book] tab
Job Management Select from [Properties] Allows you to configure the delete method
tab > [General Setup] of jobs.
Paper Tray Attributes Refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.72).
Paper Settings Refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.72).
Power Saver Settings Refer to "Changing the Interval for Entering
Power Saver Mode" (P.23).
Stored Job Settings Refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.271).
Memory Settings Refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.227).
Web Browser Setup Refer to "Web Browser Setup" (P.145).

331
 CentreWare Internet Services Settings

Item How to Select Overview/Reference

InternetServices Select from [Properties] Allows you to configure the auto refresh
Settings tab > [General Setup] interval and the display language of the
CentreWare Internet Services settings.
Cloning Allows you to save the settings of the
machine in a file, and copy the file to the
other machine of the same model but not to
the other models.
Notify Job Completion Select from [Properties] Refer to "Notify Job Completion by E-mail"
by E-mail tab > [General Setup] > (P.174).
[Alert Notification]
CentreWare Internet Services Settings

E-mail Notification for Allows you to configure the recipient of the

Machine Status notification and a status of which to be
notified.
Port Settings Select from[Properties] Refer to "Port Settings" (P.194).
tab >[Connectivity]
Physical Connections Refer to "Port Settings" (P.194).
Protocols Refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.200).
Language Emulations Select from [Properties] Refer to Print Mode(P.127).
tab > [Services] >
[Printing]
Scan Service - Common Select from [Properties] Allows you to specify the file name when
Settings tab > [Services] sending or storing the scanned document.
6 E-mail Refer to "E-mail/Internet Fax Service
Settings" (P.144).
Internet Fax Refer to "E-mail/Internet Fax Service
Settings" (P.144).
Fax Refer to "Fax Service Settings" (P.245).
Network Scanning Refer to "Configuration of Network
Scanning (Job Template Scanning)" (P.373).
Scan to My Folder Refer to "Configuration of Scan to My
Folder" (P.367).
Scan to PC Refer to "Configuration of Scan to PC"
(P.364).
Store & Send Link Refer to "Configuration of Store & Send
Link" (P.377).
Store to USB Refer to "Configuration of Store to USB"
(P.372).
Custom Services Allows you to configure the Validation
Options settings. Sends the user name with
the validation request if the user is
authenticated on the machine.
Media Print Allows you to enable and disable the Media
Print - Text and Media Print -Photos services.
USB Allows you to enable and disable Store to
USB, Media Print - Text and Media Print -
Photos settings.

332
 Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services

Item How to Select Overview/Reference

EP Service Select from [Properties] Configures the EP system with an active
tab > [Services Internet connection. For details about EP
Service, contact our Customer Support
Center or Sales Agency.
Accounting Select from [Properties] Refer to "Accounting" (P.145).
tab
Authentication Select from [Properties] Refer to "Authentication" (P.315).
Configuration tab > [Security]
User Details Setup Refer to "User Details Setup" (P.318).

CentreWare Internet Services Settings

Create Refer to "Create Authorization Groups"
AuthorizationGroups (P.317).
Remote Authentication Refer to "Remote Authentication/Directory
Servers Service" (P.214).
IP Filtering Allows you to configure the IPs to permit
access, for IPv4 and IPv6 respectively.
Unbounded Port Allows you to set unbounded portnumbers.
Audit Log Allows you to enable the Audit Logfeature
that logs the operation on the machine, and
retrieve the audit log.
Machine Digital Allows you to create a self-signed certificate
Certificate and import a certificate to the machine.
Management
IPsec Refer to "Configuration of Encryption using
6
IPsec" (P.413).
Certificate Displays the certificates registered on the
Management machine. Also allows you to select, delete,
and export of the certificate.
Certificate Refer to "Certificate Revocation Retrieval
RevocationRetrieval Settings" (P.225).
Settings
IEEE 802.1 Refer to "IEEE 802.1X Settings / IEEE 802.1X
Settings (Ethernet 1), IEEE 802.1X Settings
(Ethernet 2)" (P.224).
SSL/TLS Settings Refer to "SSL/TLS Settings" (P.220).
S/MIME Settings Refer to S/MIME Settings(P.221).
PDF/DocuWorks/ Refer to PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature
XPS*Signature Settings Settings(P.222).
Watermark Refer to "Watermark" (P.170).
Force Annotation Refer to "Force Annotation" (P.172).
Job Status Default Allows you to configure the display/hide
settings for completed and active jobs.
Plug-in/Custom Services Refer to "Plug-in Settings" (P.175).
Settings
On Demand Overwrite Refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.325).
Service Representative Allows you to restrict the operation of
Restricted Operation service representatives. Prevents the
machine from being altered by someone
impersonating our service representative.

333
 CentreWare Internet Services Settings

Item How to Select Overview/Reference

System Administrator Select from [Properties] Refer to "System Administrator Settings"
Settings tab > [Security] (P.313).
Smart Card Settings Allows you to configure the smart card
settings and backup the settings.

* : XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

CentreWare Internet Services Settings

334
7
Printer Environment Settings
7
 Printer Environment Settings

Print Overview
This machine can be set up as a local printer by directly connecting the machine to a
computer using a USB interface cable. Similarly, it can be set up as a network printer by
connecting the machine to a network.
Enable the necessary port using the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services.

Local connection USB

Via Internet IPP

Printer Environment Settings

Network Connection
LPD/SMB/Port9100

Server

Note
z
This feature does not appear for some models. For such models, an optional component is required. For more
7 information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z
The print drivers are contained in the Media (Software/Product Manual). For information on the driver
installation procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Media (Software/Product Manual).
z
You can download the latest print driver from our web site.

Using the Machine as a Local Printer

„ USB
Use a USB interface cable to directly connect the machine to a computer.
Reference
z For more information on how to set up the machine using USB connection, refer to "Installation When Using USB Port" (P.338).

Using the Machine as a Network Printer

To set up the machine as a network printer, the following protocols are available to connect
the machine.

„ LPD
Use LPD when direct communication between the machine and a computer via TCP/IP is
available.
Reference
z
For more information on how to set up the machine using LPD, refer to "Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)" (P.341).

336
 Print Overview

„ IPP
Use IPP to print via the Internet.
Reference
z For more information on how to set up the machine using IPP, refer to "Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)"
(P.345).

„ Port 9100
Use Port9100 when the machine uses Port9100.
Reference
z For more information on how to set up the machine using Port 9100, refer to "Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)"
(P.341).

Supported Operating Systems

Printer Environment Settings

Connectionmethod Localconn Network connection
ection
Port

Port 9100 TCP/IP

USB 2.0*1

Bonjour
WSD*2
LPD

Protocol IPP

Bonjour
TCP/IP

TCP/IP

WSD*2
-

OS Windows Server O O O O
2003 7
Windows Server O O O O
2008
Windows Server O O O O O
2012
Windows Server O O O O O
2012 R2
Windows Vista O O O O O
Windows 7 O O O O O
Windows 8 O O O O O
Windows 8.1 O O O O O
UNIX O*3
Mac OS O O O O

O: Available
Blank: Not available
*1 : A USB 2.0 port is required on a computer to connect.
*2 : WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
*3 : The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) and a Unix filter are required to print PostScript data.

Note
z
The print driver supplied with the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) supports only English operating systems.

Reference
z For information on network environments, refer to the manual contained in the Media (Software/Product Manual).

337
 Printer Environment Settings

Installation When Using USB Port

This section describes how to install the machine using a USB interface.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Step 1 Preparations" (P.338)
"Step 2 Configuration on the Machine" (P.338)
"Step 3 Configuration on the Computer" (P.339)
"CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.339)

Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to connect the machine to a computer via a USBinterface.
z USB cable
Printer Environment Settings

z
Media (Software/Product Manual) provided with the machine

Step 2 Configuration on the Machine

The following describes the configuration procedures to use a USB interface on the
machine.
Note
z To print binary data using a USB interface, set [Adobe Communication Protocol] to [RAW]. For more
information, refer to "USB" (P.195).
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For items that can be configured using
7 CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.339).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable the USB port on the machine.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [USB], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

338
 Installation When Using USB Port

3 Configure [Print Mode] or [Auto Eject Time] as necessary.

Reference
z For information on the setting items, refer to "USB" (P.195).

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

5 Select [Close].

Note
z
Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the USB port is enabled.

Reference
z For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to Printer Reports(P.117).

Printer Environment Settings

Step 3 Configuration on the Computer
To print from the machine, you need to install a print driver on your computer.
Reference
z For information on the supported operating systems, refer to "Supported Operating Systems" (P.337).

Note
z
For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, and OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks and OS X
10.10 Yosemite, you can use USB without the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) if you install the print driver
for Mac OS X contained in the media provided with the driver.
z For information on the installation procedures of Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional), refer to the manual
contained in the CD-ROM provided with the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional). 7
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items
You can configure the following setting items using CentreWare Internet Services:
Reference
z For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help.

Important
z
To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

Reference
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).
z Receiving buffer size for the USB interface
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [USB])
z Port Settings
z Bi-directional Communication
z Auto Eject Time
z
Adobe Communication Protocol
Note
z The Adobe Communication Protocol can be configured when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is
installed.

339
 Printer Environment Settings

z PostScript Wait Timeout

Note
z The PostScript Wait Timeout can be configured when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is installed.
Printer Environment Settings

340
 Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)

Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)

The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Step 1 Preparations" (P.341)
"Step 2 Configuration on the Machine" (P.341)
"Step 3 Configuration on the Computer" (P.342)
"CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.343)

Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to use the machine via TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100).
z TCP/IP network environment
z
Media (Software/Product Manual) (provided with the machine)

Printer Environment Settings

Step 2 Configuration on the Machine
The following describes the configuration procedures to use TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100) on the
machine. Enable the LPD Port or the Port 9100 port, and then configure TCP/IP settings.
Note
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services or the Media (Software/Product Manual).

Reference
z For the items that can be configured using CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items"
(P.343). For information on how to configure the setting using the Media (Software/Product Manual), refer to the manual
contained in the Media (Software/Product Manual). 7
1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable the LPD port or Port 9100 port as appropriate.

In this example, the LPD port is enabled.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [LPD], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

341
 Printer Environment Settings

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

3 Set an IP address and the other addresses.

Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for obtaining the
address. The configuration of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address is not
required.
Reference
z For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.200).

4 If the operating system on the client is Mac OS X 10.6 or later, enable the Bonjour port, and
the Discovery feature that automatically detects printers on the IP network can be enabled.
Note
z
To print from a printer detected by Bonjour, the LPD port must be enabled in advance.
Printer Environment Settings

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [Bonjour], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

5 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

7 6 Select [Close].

Note
z Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

7 Print a configuration report to confirm that the LPD port is enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.
Reference
z For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

8 Configure other LPD or Port 9100 settings as necessary.

Reference
z For information on how to set up the LPD port or Port 9100, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.343).

Step 3 Configuration on the Computer

To print from the machine, you need to install a print driver on your computer.
Reference
z For information on the supported operating systems, refer to Supported Operating Systems(P.337).
z For information on the driver installation procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Media (Software/
Product Manual).
z You can print via TCP/IP (LPD) from a Macintosh computer for Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X
10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks, and OS X 10.10 Yosemite. For information on the installation
procedures of the print driver for Mac OS X, refer to the manual contained in the Media provided with the
driver.

342
 Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)

CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items

You can configure the following setting items using CentreWare Internet Services:
Reference
z For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help.

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

Reference
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).
z
Spool Destination for Jobs
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [LPD])
Note
z The spool destination can be configured when the LPD port is enabled.

Printer Environment Settings

z Receiving buffer size for Port 9100
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [Port 9100])
z
Port Settings
z
IP Mode
z
Host Name
z IPv4
- IP Address Resolution
- Port Settings
- IP Address
- Subnet Mask
7
- Gateway Address
z
IPv6
- Enable Manual Address
- IP Address
- Link-Local Address
- Gateway Address
z
Domain Name
z
DNS Configuration
- IPv4
- IPv6
z
DHCP/DDNS
z WINS Server
z Port Number
z
TBCP Filter
Note
z The TBCP filter can be configured when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is installed.
z Connection Time-Out
z
Maximum Number of Sessions
Note
z The Maximum Number of Sessions can be configured when the LPD port is enabled.

343
 Printer Environment Settings

z TCP-MSS Mode
z IPv4 Subnet Mask when TCP-MSS Mode is enabled
z
IP Filtering
- IPv4 Filtering
- IPv6 Filtering
Printer Environment Settings

344
 Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)

Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol

(IPP)
This section describes how to install the machine using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP).
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Step 1 Preparations" (P.345)
"Step 2 Configuration on the Machine" (P.345)
"Step 3 Configuration on the Computer" (P.346)
"CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.347)
Note
z If the size of print data sent via IPP is larger than the value set in the proxy server, the machine cannot receive
the data. In this case, set a larger value in the proxy server or change your browser setting not to use the
proxy server.

Printer Environment Settings

Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to set up the machine to use Internet Printing Protocol
(IPP).
z
TCP/IP network environment
z Media (Software/Product Manual) provided with the machine

Step 2 Configuration on the Machine

The following describes the configuration procedures to use Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) 7
on the machine. Enable the IPP port, and then configure TCP/IP settings.
Note
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services or the Media (Software/Product Manual).

Reference
z
For the items that can be configured using CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items"
(P.347). For information on how to configure the setting using the Media (Software/Product Manual), refer to the manual
contained in the Media (Software/Product Manual).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable the IPP port.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

345
 Printer Environment Settings

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [IPP], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

3 Set an IP address and the other addresses.

Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for obtaining
the address. The configuration of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address is
not required.
Reference
Printer Environment Settings

z For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.200).

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

5 Select [Close].

Note
z Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the IPP port is enabled and that TCP/IP is set up
correctly.
7 Reference
z For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

7 Configure other IPP settings as necessary.

Reference
z Refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.347).

Step 3 Configuration on the Computer

To print from the machine, you need to install a print driver on your computer.
Reference
z For information on the supported operating systems, refer to Supported Operating Systems(P.337).
z For information on the driver installation procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Media (Software/
Product Manual).

346
 Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)

CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items

You can configure the following setting items using CentreWare Internet Services:
Reference
z For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help.

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

Reference
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).
z
Spool Destination for Jobs
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [IPP])
z
Port Settings
z Add Port Number

Printer Environment Settings

z
TBCP Filter
Note
z The TBCP filter can be configured when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is installed.
z
Administrator Mode
z DNS
z
Connection Time-Out

347
Printer Environment Settings Printer Environment Settings

348
8
E-mail Environment Settings
8
 E-mail Environment Settings

E-mail Overview
The machine can send and receive e-mails.
The following services and features are available using e-mail:
z E-mail
z Store & Send Link
z
Internet Fax Service
z Print E-mail
z E-mail Notification (Status notifications such as consumables)
z
Job Completion Notice
Note
z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For more
information, contact out Customer Support Center.

E-mail
E-mail Environment Settings

Scanned documents can be converted into electronic form and transmitted via e-mail.

Store & Send Link

The machine can convert a document, scanned by a user authenticated by themachine into
electronic form, store it in the hard disk, and send a URL that indicatesthe location of the
document.

Internet Fax Service

8 Unlike the normal fax transmissions via telephone lines, faxed data is transmitted via a
corporate intranet or the Internet as an e-mail attachment.
The message body of e-mail is processed according to the settings in [IncomingInternet
Fax Print Options] of CentreWare Internet Services.

Print E-mail
You can send and transfer e-mails with files attached from computers. File formats that can
be attached to the e-mails are TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), XDW (DocuWorks documents), XBD
(DocuWorks binders), and XPS (Microsoft XPS Format, Open XPS format).
The message body of e-mail is processed according to the settings in [Incoming E-mail Print
Options] of CentreWare Internet Services.
Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

E-mail Notification (Status notifications such as consumables)

The machine can notify the status information such as consumable status, parts status,
and paper tray status that is set in [E-mail Notification for Machine Status] ofCentreWare
Internet Services to a specified recipient. By receiving the statuses of consumables
periodically or when they need to be replaced soon, you can properly determine when to
replace the toner and drum cartridges.
It is recommended that you register the address of the system administrator or a shared
address as the recipient of the e-mail.

350
 E-mail Overview

Job Completion Notice

The following methods can be used to notify the completion of the jobs. Register the
address of the network administrator or a shared address as necessary.

„ Notify the Completion of Jobs by E-mail

When a computer submitted a print job or a Direct Fax job to the machine, its completion
can be notified by e-mail. For more information, refer to the help of theprint driver.

„ Notify Job Completion by E-mail

You can receive the result of the jobs performed by e-mail. For more information,refer to
"Notify Job Completion by E-mail" (P.174).

„ E-mail Notification
You can receive an e-mail notification when a file is saved in a folder or a job flow ends. For
more information, refer to "E-mail Notification" (P.288).

E-mail Environment Settings

8

351
 E-mail Environment Settings

Preparations
The following items must be set to use the E-mail feature.
Reference
z For more information on the preparations to use the Internet Fax feature, refer to "Preparations" (P.328).
E-mail Environment Settings

352
 Preparations

„Configuration on the Machine

Item Description E- Store & Print E-mail E-mail Job

mail Send Notific Com
Link ation pleti
on
Notic
e
via via
SMT POP3
P
TCP/IP The TCP/IP address O O O O O O
address for the machine. E-
mails are sent via
TCP/IP.
Subnet Required when the U U U U U U
mask network is divided

E-mail Environment Settings

into subnets.
Gateway Required when U U U U U U
address multiple networks are
connected by
gateways.
Machine e- Set the E-mail O O O O O O
mail address of the
address machine.
DNS server Required when the U U U U U U
address addresses for a POP3
server and an SMTP
server are set with a
8
domain name format
instead of their IP
addresses. You can
also acquire this from
DHCP.
SMTP The machine uses an O O O U O O
server SMTP server to send
address e-mails.The SMTP
server can also be
used for receiving e-
mails.
SMTP If an SMTP server U U U U U U
AUTH login requires
name and authentication,
password specify an
authentication user
name. Also specify a
password as required.
POP3 Set the POP3 server U U X O U U
server address.
POP login Set the POP receiving U U X O U U
name and user name. Also
password specify a password as
required.

353
 E-mail Environment Settings

Item Description E- Store & Print E-mail E-mail Job

mail Send Notific Com
Link ation pleti
on
Notic
e
via via
SMT POP3
P
S/MIME Set the S/MIME U - U U - -
settings information.

O: Required to be set U: Set as required -: Not required to be set X: Not supported

Note
z To transmit e-mails encrypted by S/MIME or with digital signatures attached, a certificate must be ready in
advance. For more information on a certificate, refer to "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital
Signature" (P.416).

„Configuration on the Server

E-mail Environment Settings

Note
z
For information on the Server Settings, contact your System Administrator.

Item Description E- Store & Print E-mail E-mail Job

mail Send Notific Comp
Link ation letion
Notic
e
via via
8 SMTP POP3
Machine e- When using the E- O O O O O O
mail mail feature on
address the machine, an
e-mail account of
the machine must
be registered on a
mail server in
advance.
Host name Set the host name U U U U U U
and domain
Domain U U U U U U
name of the
name
machine along
with the TCP/IP
address for the
machine on the
DNS server.

O:Required to be set U:Set as required

354
 Installation Procedures

Installation Procedures
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the E-mail service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP" (P.355)
"Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment" (P.356)
"CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.358)

Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP

Enable the E-mail port, and set the IP address.
Note
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services"
(P.331).

E-mail Environment Settings

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin". 8
3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable ports to use for the E-mail feature.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [Send E-mail], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

6) Select [Close].

7) Select [Enabled] on the [Receive E-mail - Port Status] screen under [Receive E-mail] as
described above to use the Print E-mail feature.

8) Select [Enabled] on the [E-mail Notification - Port Status] screen under [E-mail
Notification Service] as described above to use the E-mail Notification or the Job
Completion Notification feature.

9) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

355
 E-mail Environment Settings

3 Set an IP address and the other addresses.

Skip this step if an IP address is already set. If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your
environment, configure the method for obtaining the address. If an IP address cannot be
obtained automatically or manual configuration is preferred, confirm the settings of an IP
address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
Reference
z For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.200).

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

5 Select [Close].

Note
z
Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the ports are enabled and that TCP/IP is set up
correctly.
E-mail Environment Settings

Reference
z
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment

The following describes the configuration procedures to use the E-mail features.
Reference
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For the items that can be configured using CentreWare
Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.358).
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet
8 Services" (P.330).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Set up the e-mail address of the machine.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name], and then configure items.

Reference
z For information on how to set an e-mail address, refer to "Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.205).

3) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

356
 Installation Procedures

3 Set up the protocol to receive e-mails.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Other Settings].

3) Select [Protocol to Receive E-mail], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select either [SMTP] or [POP3] as appropriate for your environment.

5) Select [Save].

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

4 Configure the server settings for receiving e-mails.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings].

„When [SMTP] is selected for [Protocol to Receive E-mail]

E-mail Environment Settings

Configure the SMTP server.
Reference
z
For information on how to configure the SMTP server, refer to "SMTP Server Settings" (P.213).
z
For information on how to set the machine's e-mail address when you receive e-mails via SMTP, refer
to"Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.205).

„When [POP3] is selected for [Protocol to Receive E-mail]

Configure the POP3 server.
Reference
z For information on how to configure the POP3 server, refer to "POP3 Server Settings" (P.213). 8
Reference
z For information on how to set the machine's e-mail address when you receive e-mails via POP3, refer to "Machine’s E-mail Address/
Host Name" (P.205).

Note
z When you enable POP over SSL in the POP3 Server Setting, receiving e-mail will be encrypted. POP over SSL
can be set using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on the setting procedure, refer to
"Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.331).

5 Configure the server settings for sending e-mails.

Note
z
To send e-mails, SMTP server settings are required. When [POP3] is selected in [Protocol to Receive E-mail],
configure the SMTP server in [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings].

Reference
z For information on how to configure the e-mail transmission, refer to "SMTP Server Settings" (P.213).

6 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

7 Configure the domain filtering for receiving e-mails as necessary.

Reference
z
For information on how to configure the domain filtering, refer to "Domain Filtering" (P.226).

8 Set up the S/MIME information.

357
 E-mail Environment Settings

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Security Settings].

3) Select [S/MIME Settings], and then set the items.

Reference
z For more information on how to configure S/MIME, refer to "S/MIME Settings" (P.221).

9 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

10 Select [Close].

Note
z
Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

11 Print a configuration report to confirm that the settings of each item.

Reference
z For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).
E-mail Environment Settings

CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items

You can configure the following setting items using CentreWare Internet Services:
Reference
z For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help.
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet
Services" (P.330).

Important
8 z
To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
z Machine's E-mail Address
z
Setup E-mail Notification
z Port Settings
z
SMTP Server Settings
z POP3 Server Settings
z Receiving Protocol
z
Domain Filtering
z S/MIME Settings

358
9
Scanner Environment Settings
9
 Scanner Environment Settings

Scan Service Overview

The machine is equipped with scanning capabilities.
The following scan services are available on the machine:
z E-mail
z Store to Folder
z
Scan to PC
z Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning)
z Store to USB
z
Job Flow Scanning
z Scan to My Folder
z Store & Send Link
z
Store to WSD
Note
z WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
Scanner Environment Settings

z
This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For more
information, contact out Customer Support Center.

E-mail
Scanned documents can be converted into electronic data and sent via e-mail.
Reference
z For information on e-mail environment settings, refer to "E-mail Environment Settings" (P.349)".

Store to Folder
9 You can scan a document you want to retrieve as electronic data, and store it in a folder.
The document can be accessed later from any computers on the network.
Reference
z
For information on the Store to Folder service, refer to "Configuration of Store to Folder" (P.362).

Scan to PC
When the machine is connected to a network, you can store the scanned data on network
computers using the FTP or SMB protocol.
You can scan a document you want to retrieve as electronic data, and store it on a
computer connected to a network.
Reference
z For information on the Scan to PC service, refer to "Configuration of Scan to PC" (P.364).

Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning)

A file defined with scanning conditions is called a job template. You can apply a job
template to a document scanned on the machine. The scanned document is saved on the
machine as a file and sent automatically to the computer (server).
Reference
z For information on how to configure a job template, refer to "Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning)"
(P.373).

360
 Scan Service Overview

Scan to My Folder
When you select [Login to Remote Accounts] for [Login Type] and select [Enabled] for
[Scan to My Folder] using CentreWare Internet Services, you can forward scanned
documents to different recipients that corresponds to the login user.
Reference
z For more information on configuration procedures, refer to "Configuration of Scan to My Folder" (P.367).

Store to USB
You can store the scanned data to a USB memory device when you insert the USB 2.0
memory device into the USB memory slot of the control panel of the machine. You can also
select data stored in the USB memory device and print the data directly.
Reference
z For information on the Store to USB service settings, refer to "Configuration of Store to USB" (P.372).

Job Flow Scanning

You can execute a scan job using the job flow sheets for the scan documents. Create the
job flow sheets using Device Setup tool on the network.

Scanner Environment Settings

Reference
z For information on how to configure job flow scanning, refer to "Configuration of Job Flow Sheets" (P.376).

Store & Send Link

The machine can convert a scanned document into electronic form, store it in the hard disk,
and send a URL that indicates the location of the document.
Note
z This feature may not be available depending on the model or your machine configuration. For information,
contact out Customer Support Center.
z To use the Store & Send Link feature, you need to configure the authentication settings.

Reference 9
z
For information on the Store & Send Link service, refer to "Configuration of Store & Send Link" (P.377).

Store to WSD
You can remotely scan the document and store the image by operating on thecomputer.
Using the control panel of the machine, you can also select a destinationcomputer on a
network to store the scanned data.
Note
z WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

Reference
z
For more information on the Store to WSD service, refer to "Configuration of Store to WSD" (P.379).

361
 Scanner Environment Settings

Configuration of Store to Folder

This section describes configuration procedures to use the Store to Folder service on the
machine.
This section describes configuration procedures to use the Store to Folder service on the
machine.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP" (P.362)
"Step 2 Registering a Folder" (P.363)
"Step 3 Configuring a Computer" (P.363)

Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP

Using Network Scanner Utility 3 (Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3), which supports
WebDAV protocol, and Device Setup Tool, enable the SNMP, SOAP, and WebDAV ports and
set up an IP address.
Important
Scanner Environment Settings

z We recommend you to enable [HTTP - SSL / TLS Communication] under [SSL / TLS Settings] when you use
WebDAV. This is an effectual way to avoid password leaking.

Note
z
You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services"
(P.331).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
9 displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable the ports.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [SNMP], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

6) Select [Close].

7) Select [SOAP], and then select [Change Settings].

362
 Configuration of Store to Folder

8) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

9) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

10)Select [Close].

11)Select [WebDAV], and then select [Change Settings].

12)Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

13)Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

14)Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

3 Set an IP address and the other addresses.

Skip this step if an IP address is already set. If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your
environment, configure the method for obtaining the address. If an IP address cannot be
obtained automatically or manual configuration is preferred, confirm the settings of an IP
address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
Reference
z For information on how to set an IP address, refer to ""Protocol Settings" (P.200).

Scanner Environment Settings

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

5 Select [Close].

Note
z
Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the WebDAV port is enabled and that TCP/ IP is
set up correctly.
Reference
z
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to ""Print Reports" (P.115).
9
Step 2 Registering a Folder
Register a folder to store scanned data.
Reference
z For information on registering a folder, refer to "Create Folder" (P.276).

Step 3 Configuring a Computer

To use Network Scanner Utility 3, install Network Scanner Utility 3 on a computer.
Reference
z
Network Scanner Utility 3 is included in the Media (Software/Product Manual) provided with the machine. For information on how
to install the Network Scanner Utility 3, refer to the manual contained in the Media (Software/Product Manual).

Reference
z For information on the usage of the Network Scanner Utility 3, refer to "12 Computer Operations" in the User Guide.

363
 Scanner Environment Settings

Configuration of Scan to PC
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Scan to PC service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Step 1 Preparations" (P.364)
"Step 2 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP" (P.365)
"Step 3 Configuration on the Computer" (P.366)

Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to use the Scan to PC feature.

Using FTP
To transfer data via FTP, one of the following FTP servers and an account to the FTP server
(login name and password) are required.
z Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Microsoft Windows
Server 2008 R2, Microsoft Windows Server 2012, Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2,
Scanner Environment Settings

Microsoft Windows Vista, Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows 8, or Microsoft

Windows 8.1
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 6.0
z
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server, or Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3.0 or later
z Mac OS X
FTP service of Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X
10.9 Mavericks, and OS X 10.10 Yosemite
Reference
9 z For information on how to configure the FTP service, refer to the manual provided with the software. For information on how to
configure the settings on Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks, and OS X 10.10 Yosemite, consult the
official website of Apple Inc.

Using SMB
To transfer data via SMB, your computer must run on one of the following operating
systems that includes folder sharing.
For Mac OS X, a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X.
z
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
z Microsoft Windows Server 2008
z Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
z
Microsoft Windows Server 2012
z Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
z Microsoft Windows Vista
z
Microsoft Windows 7
z Microsoft Windows 8
z Microsoft Windows 8.1

364
 Configuration of Scan to PC

z Mac OS X 10.5 Leopard

z Mac OS X 10.6 Snow Leopard
z
Mac OS X 10.7 Lion
z OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion
z OS X 10.9 Mavericks

Step 2 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP

To use Scan to PC service, enable the port (SMB or FTP client) and set the IP address.The
following describes the configuration procedures on the machine.
Note
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services"
(P.331).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

Scanner Environment Settings

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable the port.

9
„Using SMB
Enable the SMB port.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [SMB Client], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

„Using FTP
Enable the FTP port.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [FTP Client], and then select [Change Settings].

365
 Scanner Environment Settings

4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

3 Set the IP address of the machine and the other addresses.

Skip this step if an IP address is already set. If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your
environment, configure the method for obtaining the address. If an IP address cannot be
obtained automatically or manual configuration is preferred, confirm the settings of an IP
address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
Reference
z For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.200).

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

5 Select [Close].
Note
z
Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
Scanner Environment Settings

6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the SMB Client port or FTP client is enabled and
that TCP/IP is set up correctly.
Reference
z For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

Step 3 Configuration on the Computer

Create a destination folder on your computer.

9 Using FTP
Create a destination folder on the server where you login and set write rights on the folder.

Using SMB
Create a shared folder on your computer and set the write rights on the shared folder.
Note
z To use SMB on Mac OS X, set [Windows Sharing] to [On] in the [Service] tab of [Sharing] under [System
Preferences].

366
 Configuration of Scan to My Folder

Configuration of Scan to My Folder

This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Scan to My Folder service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Step1 Preparations" (P.367)
"Step 2 Enabling SMB Port and Setting up TCP/IP" (P.367)
"Step 3 Configuring Remote Authentication" (P.368)
"Step 4 Configuring Scan to My Folder" (P.369)
"Step5 Configuration on the Computer" (P.371)

Step1 Preparations
The Scan to My Folder service allows you to forward scanned files to recipients which vary
depending on a login user when [Login to Remote Accounts] is selected for [Login Type].
The following items are required to use the Scan to My Folder feature.

Remote Authentication System

Scanner Environment Settings

To use the Scan to My Folder service, a remote authentication system is required.
Reference
z For more information about a remote authentication system, refer to "Authentication System" (P.214).

Destination Computer

Step 2 Enabling SMB Port and Setting up TCP/IP

To use Scan to My Folder service, enable the SMB port and set the IP address. The following
describes the configuration procedures on the machine.
9
Note
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services"
(P.331).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable the SMB port.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

367
 Scanner Environment Settings

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [SMB Client], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

3 Set the IP address and the other addresses.

Skip this step if an IP address is already set. If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your
environment, configure the method for obtaining the address. If an IP address cannot be
obtained automatically or manual configuration is preferred, confirm the settings of an IP
address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
Reference
z For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.200).

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

5 Select [Close].
Scanner Environment Settings

Note
z Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the SMB Client port is enabled and that TCP/IP
is set up correctly.
Reference
z
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

9 Step 3 Configuring Remote Authentication

Set the Login Type to Login to Remote Accounts.
Note
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services"
(P.331).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Set the Login Type to Login to Remote Accounts.

368
 Configuration of Scan to My Folder

1) Select [Authentication/Security Settings].

2) Select [Authentication].

3) Select [Login Type].

4) Select [Login to Remote Accounts], and then select [Save].

5) Select [Close].

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

3 Configure a remote authentication server to use.

Note
z You can select from [Kerberos (Windows 2000)], [Kerberos (Solaris)], [LDAP], and [SMB].

Reference
z
For information on the remote authentication server settings, refer to "Authentication System Setup" (P.214).

1) Select [System Settings].

2) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

Scanner Environment Settings

3) Select [Remote Authentication/Directory Service].

4) Select [Authentication System Setup].

5) Select [Authentication System], and then select [Change Settings].

6) Select the remote authentication system to use, and then select [Save].

7) Select [Close].
Note
z
If an authentication setting is not configured on a remote authentication server selected, configure settings
under [Remote Authentication/Directory Service]. For [LDAP Server/ Directory Service Settings], a
configuration is required regardless of a remote authentication server selected. 9
z
For information on Kerberos Server Settings, refer to "Kerberos Server Settings" (P.215).
z
For information on LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings, refer to "LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings
(P.216).
z
For information on SMB Server Settings, refer to "SMB Server Settings" (P.219).

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

5 Select [Close].
Note
z
Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the SMB port is enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.
Reference
z For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

Step 4 Configuring Scan to My Folder

Configure the Scan to My Foldere settings using CentreWare Internet Services.

369
 Scanner Environment Settings

1 Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Reference
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).

2 Enable the feature of the Scan to My Folder

1) Click the [Properties] tab.

2) Click [Services].

3) Click [Scan to My Folder].

4) Click [General].

5) Select the [Enabled] check box under [Status].

6) Check the [Enabled] checkbox of [Allow User to Change File Storage Location] to allow
users to change the storage location.
Note
z
Checking this checkbox allows users to change the storage location on the control panel when performing the
Scan to My Folder service. When you do not check this checkbox, the storage location specified in the next
Scanner Environment Settings

procedure cannot be changed.

3 Specify the storage location (directory).

„Transferring files to a directory specified by a login user using LDAP (directory

service) information

1) Select the [LDAP Query] check box for [Determine Home Directory].
The folder specified for [homeDirectory] of a user profile which is registered with the LDAP
(user information management) server is defined as a storage location by default.
Note
9 z To change a storage location, select [LDAP Mapping for Home Directory] and enter the property name, which
a storage location is set, in [Home], and then select [Apply].
z The [LDAP User Mappings] screen which is displayed by clicking [LDAP Mapping for Home Directory] is
identical with the screen displayed by selecting [Properties] > [Connectivity] > [Protocols] > [LDAP] > [LDAP
User Mappings].

„Transferring files to a directory specified by CentreWare Internet Services without

using LDAP (directory service) information

1) Select the [No LDAP Query] check box for [Determine Home Directory].

2) Enter a directory name of the storage location in [Network Home Path].

Specify a folder name using UNC format (for example: \\server name\shared name\folder
name\folder name2).

4 To specify a subdirectory under the directory specified in step 3, perform the following
procedure:

1) Select [Automatically Create Subdirectory] check box, and enter a subdirectory name in
[Subdirectory] to specify a subdirectory.

2) When you use the login user name as a subdirectory name, select [Append "User Name"
to Path] check box.

370
 Configuration of Scan to My Folder

3) If you select the [Append "User Name" to Path] check box, selecting the [Automatically
Create "User Name" directory if one does not exist] check box creates a subdirectory
with a user name automatically when the user name directory does not exist.

4) When you select both the [Automatically Create Subdirectory] and [Append "User
Name" to Path] check boxes, specify which directory, subdirectory or subdirectory with a
user name, becomes a subdirectory in [Directory Structure].

5 Specify the authentication information for accessing the destination computer.

„Accessing the destination computer both by the user authentication and by the
domain information used when logged in to the machine

1) Select the [Authenticated User and Domain] check box for [Login Credentials to Access
the Destination].

„Accessing the destination computer only by the user authentication information

used when logged in to the machine

1) Select the [Authenticated User] check box for [Login Credentials to Access the
Destination].

Scanner Environment Settings

„Accessing the destination computer by the authentication information registered
with the machine on CentreWare Internet Services

1) Select the [System] check box for [Login Credentials to Access the Destination].

2) Configure the authentication information such as [Login Name] and [Passcode].

Enter a login name in [Login Name] with up to 97 single-byte characters. Enter a
passcode in [Passcode] with up to 32 single-byte characters. Re-enter the passcode in
[Retype Passcode] for confirmation.

6 Click [Apply].

Step5 Configuration on the Computer 9

Create a destination folder on your computer and set it as a shared folder, and then set
write rights on the folder.
Note
z
To use SMB on Mac OS X, set [Windows Sharing] to [On] in the [Service] tab of [Sharing] under [System
Preferences].

371
 Scanner Environment Settings

Configuration of Store to USB

This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store to USB service.
"Available USB Memory Devices" (P.372)
"CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.372)

Available USB Memory Devices

The Store to USB service allows you to directly save the scanned data to a USB 2.0 memory
device which is inserted into the USB memory slot on the control panel of the machine.
z
USB 2.0 memory devices
z USB memory devices with the capacity of up to 128 GB
z USB memory devices that support FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT (long name)
Note
z USB memory devices that are encrypted with software cannot be used with the machine.

CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items

Scanner Environment Settings

You can enable/disable the Store to USB service using CentreWare Internet Services. When
you disable the service, the Store to USB button is not displayed on the Services Home
screen, and you cannot use the service.
The Store to USB service is set to enabled by factory default.
Reference
z For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help.

Important
z
To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
9 Reference
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).

372
 Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning)

Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template

Scanning)
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Network Scanning service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Step 1 Preparations" (P.373)
"Step 2 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP" (P.373)
"Step 3 Configuring the SNMP Port" (P.374)
"Step 4 Configuration on the Computer" (P.375)

Step 1 Preparations
The following environment is required to use the Network Scanning feature on the
machine.
z To use SMB forwarding, your computer must run on one of the following operating
systems that supports folder sharing.

Scanner Environment Settings

- Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
- Microsoft Windows 2000
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
- Microsoft Windows Server 2012
- Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
- Microsoft Windows Vista
- Microsoft Windows 7
- Microsoft Windows 8
- Microsoft Windows 8.1 9
Step 2 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP
To use Network Scanning service, enable the port and set the IP address. The following
describes the configuration procedures on the machine.
Note
z
You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services"
(P.331).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

373
 Scanner Environment Settings

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable the SNMP port.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [SNMP], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Port Settings] screen is displayed.

7) Enable [Port Status] on the [SMB] or [FTP Client] screen, and enable [Internet Services
(HTTP)] on the [Internet Services - Port Status] screen as described above.

8) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Port Settings] screen is displayed.

3 Set the IP address and the other addresses.

Scanner Environment Settings

Skip this step if an IP address is already set. If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your
environment, configure the method for obtaining the addresses. If an IP address cannot be
obtained automatically or manual configuration is preferred, confirm the settings of an IP
address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
Reference
z For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.200).

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

5 Select [Close].

9 Note
z
Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the ports are enabled and that TCP/IP is set up
correctly.
Reference
z
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

Step 3 Configuring the SNMP Port

Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port using CentreWare Internet Services.

1 Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Note
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet
Services" (P.330).

2 Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port.

1) Click the [Properties] tab.

2) Click [Connectivity].

374
 Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning)

3) Click [Port Settings].

4) Select the [UDP] check box under [SNMP].

5) Click [Apply].

6) Enter the system administrator's user ID and passcode into [User Name] and [Password]
respectively, and click [OK].
Note
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet
Services" (P.330).

7) The right frame of the web browser changes to the machine reboot display.

8) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.

Step 4 Configuration on the Computer

Reference
z
For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help.

Important

Scanner Environment Settings

z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

375
 Scanner Environment Settings

Configuration of Job Flow Sheets

This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Job Flow Sheets service.
"Step 1 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP" (P.376)
"Step 2 Configuring the SNMP Port" (P.376)
"Step 3 Configuration on the Computer" (P.376)

Step 1 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP

To use the Job Flow Sheets service, enable the SOAP, SNMP, and Internet Services(HTTP)
ports, and set an IP address and other addresses. The following describes the configuration
procedures on the machine.
Note
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services"
(P.331).

Step 2 Configuring the SNMP Port

Scanner Environment Settings

Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port using CentreWare Internet Services.

1 Start CentreWare Internet Services

Reference
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).

2 Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port.

1) Click the [Properties] tab.

9 2) Click [Connectivity].

3) Click [Port Settings].

4) Select the [UDP] check box under [SNMP].

5) Click [Apply].

6) The right frame of the web browser changes to the machine reboot display.

7) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.

Step 3 Configuration on the Computer

Create job flows using Device Setup Tool to use for scanned documents.
Note
z Device Setup Tool is included in ApeosWare Management Suite, which you can download from our Web site.

376
 Configuration of Store & Send Link

Configuration of Store & Send Link

This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store & Send Link service.
Important
z When a user is notified by e-mail of a URL location to retrieve scanned data, the e-mail message is not
encrypted, which enables the user to retrieve the data without password authentication. Thus, in case the
URL information is leaked on the e-mail transmission path due to any attempts, other parties to whom the
information is leaked cannot be tracked. To prevent others from viewing scanned data, select [PDF] or
[DocuWorks] in [File Format] and set a password in [PDF Security] or [DocuWorks Security] before scanning a
document.

Note
z To use the Store & Send Link service, the configuration for authentication is required.
"Step 1 Configuring E-mail" (P.377)
"Step 2 Enabling Authentication" (P.377)
"Step 3 Other Settings" (P.377)
"Step 4 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.377)

Step 1 Configuring E-mail

Scanner Environment Settings

Configure the e-mail settings on the machine.
Reference
z
For information on how to configure e-mail settings, refer to.

Step 2 Enabling Authentication

Configure the authentication settings on the machine.
Reference
z For information on how to configure e-mail settings, refer to "Configuration for Authentication" (P.439).
9
Step 3 Other Settings
Configure the following items if necessary.
z
URL File Expiration
z Generation of URL Link
z
Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size
z Print Login Name on PDF Files
Reference
z For information about URL File Expiration, refer to "URL File Expiration" (P.243).
z For information about Generation of URL Link, refer to "Generation of URL Link" (P.244).
z
For information about Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size, refer to "Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size"
(P.244).
z
For information about Print Logon Name on PDF Files, refer to "Print Login Name on PDF Files" (P.244).

Step 4 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items

You can configure the following items using CentreWare Internet Services:
z URL File Expiration

377
 Scanner Environment Settings

z Generation of URL Link

z Maximum File Size
z
Subject
z Message
z Attachment
z
Device Information
z Signature
Reference
z For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help.
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet
Services" (P.330).

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
Scanner Environment Settings

378
 Configuration of Store to WSD

Configuration of Store to WSD

This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store to WSD service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Step 1 Preparations" (P.379)
"Step 2 Enabling Port" (P.379)
"Step 3 Confirmation on the Computer" (P.380)
Note
z WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

Step 1 Preparations
The following environment is required to use the Store to WSD feature on the machine.
z
The following operation system must be installed on a destination computer.
- Microsoft Windows 8
- Microsoft Windows 8.1
- Microsoft Windows 7

Scanner Environment Settings

- Microsoft Windows Vista Service Pack 2
- Microsoft Windows Server 2012
- Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
Note
z WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

Step 2 Enabling Port

To use the Store to WSD service, enable the WSD scan port. The following describes the
configuration procedures on the machine.
Note
9
z
You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services"
(P.331).
z WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable the port.

379
 Scanner Environment Settings

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [WSD], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [WSD Scan - Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

3 Select [Close].

Note
z Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

4 Print a configuration report to confirm that the WSD port is set up correctly.
Reference
z
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).
Scanner Environment Settings

Step 3 Confirmation on the Computer

Confirm that the machine name is displayed on the computer as a network device.
On Windows Vista, select [Control Panel] > [Hardware and Sound] > [Scanners and
Cameras] (on Windows 7, select [Control Panel] > [Devices and Printers] / on Windows 8
and Windows 8.1, Select [Control Panel] > [Hardware and Sound] > [Device and Printers] /
on Windows Server 2012, select [Control Panel] > [Hardware] > [Devices and Printers]), and
confirm the machine name on the screen.
It is convenient to configure the settings such as the color format, file type, and resolution
in [Scan Profiles] and save them in advance.

9 Reference
z For more information, refer to Windows Help.

Note
z On Windows Vista Home Basic or Home Premium, scanning with [Windows Fax and Scan] is not supported.
Use other features such as [From scanner or camera] in [Microsoft Paint] for scanning.

380
10
Using IP Fax (SIP)
10
 Using IP Fax (SIP)

IP Fax (SIP) Overview

IP Fax (SIP) is a fax feature that sends and receives document data via the IP network of a
corporation (the intranet). The IP Fax (SIP) complies with ITU-T Resolution T.38.
Because the IP Fax (SIP) uses the existing IP network for communications, you can reduce
the telecommunications costs compared to a conventional G3 fax machine that uses the
public telephone line.
Note
z The communication between IP Fax (SIP) devices is available for our compatible machines in a corporate
intranet. (Able 1407 λ is not available.) For information on the compatible machines, contact our Customer
Support Center.
Using IP Fax (SIP)

10

382
 Preparations

Preparations
This section describes the prerequisites to use the IP fax (SIP) feature on the machine.

System Requirements for the Machine

z IP Fax (SIP) Kit
z The machine is connected to the intranet.
The following equipment can also be used but not required.
z
SIP server
z VoIP gateway (to communicate with a G3 fax machine connected to the public phone
line)
Note
z For more information about the SIP server and VoIP gateway, contact your system administrator
z Another optional component is required to use the IP Fax (SIP) feature for some models.

Settings by System Configuration

To use the IP Fax (SIP) feature, configure the following settings.

Enabling port Configuring Configuring Configuring Registering

and setting up SIP User ID Fax SIP server VoIP gateway
TCP/IP environment

Using IP Fax (SIP)

IP Fax (SIP)
O O O - -
machine only
SIP server only O O O O -
VoIP gateway
O O O - O
only
SIP server and
VoIP gateway
O O O O O 10
O:Required -:Not supported

383
 Using IP Fax (SIP)

Installation Procedures
This section describes the configuration procedures to use the IP Fax (SIP) feature on the
machine.
"Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP" (P.384)
"Step 2 Configuring the SIP User Name" (P.385)
"Step 3 Configuring Fax Environment" (P.386)
"Step 4 Configuring the SIP Server" (P.387)
"Step 5 Registering the VoIP Gateway" (P.388)

Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP

To use the IP Fax (SIP) feature on the machine, enable the port and set the IP addresses.
The following shows the configuration procedures on the machine.
Reference
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services,
refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.331).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
Using IP Fax (SIP)

When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

10 3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable the SIP port.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [SIP], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

3 Set an IP address and the other addresses.

Skip this step if an IP address is already set. If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your
environment, configure the method for obtaining the address. If an IP address cannot be

384
 Installation Procedures

obtained automatically, or if manual configuration is preferred, confirm the settings of an

IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
Reference
z For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.200).

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

5 Select [Close].

Note
z
Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the port is enabled and TCP/IP setting is set up
correctly.
Reference
z For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

Step 2 Configuring the SIP User Name

This section describes the configuration procedures of the SIP user name on the machine.
Reference
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services,
refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.331).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

Using IP Fax (SIP)

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note 10
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Set SIP User ID.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [SIP settings].

3) Select [SIP User ID (Sign-in Name)], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Enter a SIP User ID and select [Save].

Reference
z For information on SIP User ID, refer to "SIP Settings" (P.209).

3 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

385
 Using IP Fax (SIP)

4 Select [Close].

Note
z Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

5 Print a configuration report to confirm that the port is enabled and TCP/IP setting is set up
correctly.
Note
z For information on how to print a settings list, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

Step 3 Configuring Fax Environment

This section describes the configuration procedures of the Fax feature related to IP fax
(SIP) on the machine.
Reference
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services,
refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.331).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Using IP Fax (SIP)

Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Set items displayed on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.

10
1) Select [Fax Service Settings].

2) Select [Screen Defaults].

3) Configure the required settings, and then select [Save].

Reference
z For information on the screen default, refer to "Screen Defaults" (P.245).

3 Set the default settings of the Fax feature.

1) Select [Fax Defaults].

2) Configure the required settings, and then select [Save].

Reference
z For information on the fax default, refer to "Fax Defaults" (P.246).

4 Configure the settings related to fax control.

1) Select [Fax Control].

386
 Installation Procedures

2) Configure the required settings, and then select [Save].

Reference
z For information on the fax control, refer to "Fax Control" (P.248)).

5 Configure the local terminal information.

1) Select [Local Terminal Information].

2) Configure the required settings, and then select [Save].

Reference
z
For information on the local terminal information, refer to "Local Terminal Information" (P.258).

6 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

7 Select [Close].

Note
z Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

8 Print a configuration report to confirm the fax settings.

Reference
z For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115)

Step 4 Configuring the SIP Server

Using IP Fax (SIP)

This section describes the configuration procedures to set the IP address, login username,
and password of a SIP server to go through. Configure a SIP server when you use the IP fax
(SIP) feature via a SIP server.
Reference
z
You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services,
refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.331).

1 Display the [Tools] screen. 10

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Configure SIP server settings.

Reference
z For more information on SIP server settings, refer to "SIP Settings" (P.209).

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

387
 Using IP Fax (SIP)

2) Select [SIP settings].

3) Select [Enable SIP Server], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Yes], and then select [Save].

5) Select [SIP Server IP Address Resolution], and then select [Change Settings].

6) Select a method to obtain SIP server IP address, and then select [Save].

7) Select [SIP Proxy Server Setup], and then select [Change Settings].

8) Set the IP address, port number, login user name, login password, and server type.
Note
z The settings of port number, login user name, login password, and server type are required even when [SIP
Server IP Address Resolution] is set to [DHCP] or [DHCP v6]

9) Select [SIP Registrar Server Setup], and then select [Change Settings].

10)Set the IP address, port number, login user name, login password, and server type.
Note
z The settings of the port number, login user name, login password, and server type are required even when
[SIP Server IP Address Resolution] is set to [DHCP] or [DHCP v6].

11)Select [Close].

3 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

4 Select [Close].
Using IP Fax (SIP)

Note
z Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

5 Print a configuration report to confirm that the SIP server settings.

Reference
10 z For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

Step 5 Registering the VoIP Gateway

This section describes the configuration procedures to register a VoIP gateway to go
through.
Configure a VoIP gateway when you transmit IP fax (SIP) to a G3 fax machine that is
connected to the public phone line.
You can configure up to 50 VoIP gateways.

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].

388
 Installation Procedures

When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Configure VoIP gateway settings.

Reference
z
For more information on VoIP gateway registration, refer to ""VoIP Gateway Setup" (P.211).

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [SIP Settings].

3) Select [VoIP Gateway Setup], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select a VoIP gateway to register, and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [ID], and then select [Change Settings].

6) Specify an ID, and then select [Save].

7) Select [Gateway Address], and then select [Change Settings].

8) Specify the IP address of the VoIP gateway, and then select [Save].

Using IP Fax (SIP)

9) Select [Save].

10)To configure another VoIP gateway, repeat steps 4 to 9.

11)Select [Close].

3 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

4 Select [Close]. 10
Note
z Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

5 Print a configuration report to confirm that the VoIP gateway settings.

Reference
z For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

389
Using IP Fax (SIP) Using IP Fax (SIP)

10

390
11
Using the Internet Fax Service
11
 Using the Internet Fax Service

Internet Fax Overview

The Internet Fax feature enables the machine to transmit the scanned data as an e-mail
attachment using a corporate intranet or the Internet, unlike conventional fax machines
which use public phone lines. Also, the machine can receive e-mails transmitted from the
Internet Fax-enabled machines.
Note
z An optional component is required depending on the model. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.

Reference
z
For details of the Internet Fax, refer to "Fax" > "About Internet Fax" in the User Guide.
Using the Internet Fax Service

11

392
 Preparations

Preparations
This section describes the prerequisites to use the Internet Fax on the machine.

System Requirements for the Machine

z The machine is connected to a network via TCP/IP.
z The environment is prepared for e-mail transmissions.

E-Mail Environment
To use the Internet Fax feature, configure the following settings for your e-mail
environment.

Item Description Internet Fax Internet Fax

Direct*
via via via SMTP
SMTP POP3
TCP/IP address TCP/IP address of the machine.
O O O
TCP/IP protocol is used for e-mail transmissions.
Subnet mask The subnet mask is required when a network is
U U U

Using the Internet Fax Service

divided into subnetworks.
Gateway address The gateway address is required when multiple
U U U
networks are used via gateways.
The machine's e- Set the machine's e-mail address.
O O O
mail address
DNS server address The address is required when the address of POP3 or
SMTP server is set not using an IP address but a
U U U
domain name. The address can be obtained by
DHCP.
SMTP server address SMTP server is used for sending e-mails from the
machine. The SMTP server can also be used for O O -
receiving e-mails. 11
SMTP AUTH When a certification-required SMTP server is used,
loginname, configure a user name for authentication. Set the U U -
password password as necessary.
POP3 server Set the POP3 server address. - O -
POP user name Configure the user name for POP receiving. Set the
- O -
password as necessary.

O: Required U: Set as required -: Not supported

* : When you use the Internet Fax Direct feature, set [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Fax Service Settings] > [Internet Fax Control] >
[Internet Fax Path] to [Direct (P2P)].

393
 Using the Internet Fax Service

Installation Procedures
This section describes the configuration procedures to use the Internet Fax feature on the
machine.
"Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP" (P.394)
"Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment" (P.395)
"Step 3 Testing the Internet Fax" (P.397)

Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP

To use the Internet Fax feature on the machine, enable the ports for the E-mail feature,
and set the IP address. The following shows the configuration procedures on the machine.
Reference
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services,
refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.331).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
Using the Internet Fax Service

When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable ports to use for the E-mail feature.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

11 2) Select [Port Settings].

3) Select [Receive E-mail], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].

5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].

6) Select [Close].

7) Select [Enabled] for [Send E-mail - Port Status] on the [Send E-mail] screen as described
above.

8) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

3 Set an IP address and the other addresses.

Skip this step if an IP address is already set. If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your
environment, configure the method for obtaining the address. If an IP address cannot be

394
 Installation Procedures

obtained automatically, or if manual configuration is preferred, confirm the settings of an

IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
Reference
z For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.200).

4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

5 Select [Close].

Note
z
Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the ports are enabled and that TCP/IP is set up
correctly.
Reference
z For information on how to print a Configuration Report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment

The following describes the configuration procedures to use the E-mail features.
Reference
z You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For the items that can be configured using CentreWare
Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.358).

Using the Internet Fax Service

z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet
Services" (P.330).

1 Display the [Tools] screen.

1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note 11
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin".

3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Set up the e-mail address of the machine.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name], and then set the items.
Note
z For information on how to set an e-mail address, refer to "Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.205)".

3) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

3 Set up the protocol to receive e-mails.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

395
 Using the Internet Fax Service

2) Select [Other Settings].

3) Select [Protocol to Receive E-mail], and then select [Change Settings].

4) Select either [SMTP] or [POP3] as appropriate for your environment.

5) Select [Save].

6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

4 Configure the server settings for receiving e-mails.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings].

„When [SMTP] is selected for [Protocol to Receive E-mail]

Configure the SMTP server.
Reference
z For information on how to configure the SMTP server, refer to "SMTP Server Settings" (P.213).
z For information on how to set the machine's e-mail address when you receive e-mails via SMTP, refer to
"Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.205)".

„When [POP3] is selected for [Protocol to Receive E-mail]

Configure the POP3 server.
Using the Internet Fax Service

Reference
z For information on how to configure the POP3 server, refer to "POP3 Server Settings" (P.213).
z For information on how to set the machine's e-mail address when you receive e-mails via POP3, refer to
"Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.205).

Important
z
When you enable POP over SSL in the POP3 Server Setting, receiving e-mail will be encrypted. POP over SSL
can be set using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on the setting procedure, refer to
"Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.331).

5 Configure the server settings for sending e-mails.

Note
11 z To send e-mails, SMTP server settings are required. When [POP3] is selected in [Protocol to Receive E-mail],
configure the SMTP server in [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings].

Reference
z For information on how to configure the e-mail transmission, refer to "SMTP Server Settings" (P.213).

6 Configure the domain filtering for sending and receiving e-mails as necessary.

Reference
z For information on how to configure the domain filtering, refer to "Domain Filtering" (P.226).

7 Set up the S/MIME information.

1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

2) Select [Security Settings].

396
 Installation Procedures

3) Select [S/MIME Settings], and then set the items.

Reference
z For more information on how to configure S/MIME settings, refer to S/MIME Settings(P.221).

8 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

9 Select [Close].

Note
z
Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.

10 After the machine reboots, you can print a configuration report to confirm the settings of
each item.
Reference
z For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115)".

Step 3 Testing the Internet Fax

Test the Internet fax transmission from the machine.

1 Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the Services Home screen to display the [Fax/Internet Fax]
screen.

Using the Internet Fax Service

2 Select [Internet Fax] from the drop-down menu.

3 Enter a destination address.

4 Press the <Start> button to transmit.

5 Check whether the computer received the e-mail.

Reference
z If the computer cannot receive the e-mail, refer to "Problem Solving" (P.451).

11

397
Using the Internet Fax Service Using the Internet Fax Service

11

398
12
Using the Server Fax Service
12
 Using the Server Fax Service

Server Fax Overview

If your machine supports the Scan feature, installing the Server Fax Kit (optional) allows
you to use the Fax feature of a Server Fax server.
With the Server Fax feature, you can transfer image data received by the machine to the
Server Fax server, and can transfer image data received by the Server Fax server to the
machine via a network based on the settings you made.
Important
z While the Server Fax feature is enabled, the Fax feature is detected as "not installed" even if the Fax Kit 3 is
installed on the machine. During that time, therefore, fax transmission and reception are disabled and
printed reports show that the machine does not support the Fax feature.

Note
z This feature does not appear for some models. For such models, an optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z The Server Fax service cannot be used together with the Fax, the IP Fax (SIP), or the Internet Fax service.
Using the Server Fax Service

12

400
 Preparations

Preparations
The following describes the conditions necessary to use Server Fax on the machine.

System Requirements for the Machine

z Scanner Kit needs to be installed on the machine.
z Server Fax Kit needs to be installed on the machine.
z
The machine needs to be connected to a network and needs to support TCP/IP
communication.
z Server Fax server needs to be installed on the network.

Using the Server Fax Service

12

401
 Using the Server Fax Service

Installation Procedure
Installation Overview
This section describes the configuration procedure to use the Server Fax feature on the
machine.
The following shows the reference section for the configuration procedures.
"Step 1 Fax Settings" (P.402)
"Step 2 Setting the Server Fax Feature" (P.403)

Step 1 Fax Settings

If your machine does not support the Fax feature and supports the Server Fax feature only,
the Server Fax feature will be enabled automatically. If your machine supports both the Fax
and Server Fax features, manually switch to the Server Fax feature.
The following procedure explains how to switch to the Server Fax feature on CentreWare
Internet Services.
Reference
z For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet
Services" (P.331)".

Note
z
You can switch to the Server Fax feature also on the machine's control panel.

1 Start a web browser.

Using the Server Fax Service

2 Enter the machine's IP address or the Internet address into the address box on the browser,
and then press the <Enter> key.
z Example of the IP address entry
http://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
http://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
z
Example of the Internet address entry
http://myhost.example.com/

12 Note
z When specifying a port number, add “:” and the port number to the end of the Internet address.

3 Click the [Properties] tab.

4 Click [Services] to display the items in the folder.

5 Click [Fax] to display the items in the folder.

6 Click [Fax Settings].

7 On the [Fax Settings] screen, select [Scan to Fax Server] under [Fax Service].

8 Set the values as the machine's setting values.

1) Click [Apply].

402
 Installation Procedure

2) The right frame on the web browser will change to the machine reboot display.

3) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the setting values are enabled.

Step 2 Setting the Server Fax Feature

Enable the Server Fax feature and set the file destination. The following procedure explains
how to set them on CentreWare Internet Services.
Reference
z For more information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare
Internet Services" (P.331).

1 Start a web browser.

2 Enter the machine's IP address or the Internet address to the address box on the browser,
and then press the <Enter> key.
z Example of the IP address entry
http://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
http://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
z Example of the Internet address entry
http://myhost.example.com/
Note
z When specifying a port number, add “:” and the port number to the end of the Internet address.

3 Click the [Properties] tab.

Using the Server Fax Service

4 Click [Services] to display the items in the folder.

5 Click [Fax] to display the items in the folder.

6 On the tree in the left frame, click [General].

7 On the [General] screen, click [Edit].

8 Set Optional Information such as [Job log] and [Confirmation Sheet].

12
9 Click [Apply] to enable the settings.

10 On the tree in the left frame, click [Fax Repository Setup].

11 On the [Fax Repository Setup] screen, select a protocol first and then set the items under
[Fax Destination].
Note
z When [FTP] or [SMB] is selected, faxes will be sent to the destination specified under [File Destination]. When
[SMTP] is selected, faxes will be sent to the destination specified in the E-mail settings.

Reference
z For more information on this setting, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

403
 Using the Server Fax Service

„When [FTP] or [SMB] is selected

Set the repository server that is to be used for the Server Fax feature.
z IP Address/Host Name and Port (If the port number is blank, the default port number
(FTP:21 or SMB:139) will be used.)
z Share (SMB only)
z Document Path
z
Login Name
z Password
z Retype Password

„When [SMTP] is selected

The SMTP server settings are the same as the E-mail settings.
Reference
z For more information on the SMTP server settings, refer to "Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment" (P.356).
The following settings are additionally required for the SMTP server.
z Domain Name
z
E-mail Address Display Format

12 Click [Apply] to enable the settings.

Reference
z For more information on how to print a settings list, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).
Using the Server Fax Service

12

404
13
Encryption and Digital Signature
13

Settings
 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Encryption and Digital Signature Overview

Types of Certificate
To use the Encryption feature and the Signature feature on the machine, a certificate is
required.
The following two types of device certificate can be used on the machine:
z A certificate issued by another CA
When you use a certificate issued by another CA, import the certificate using CentreWare
Internet Services.
Note
z When you use a certificate issued by another CA, import the certificates of all the CAs included in the path of
the certificate to be used.
The certificates meeting the following standards can be imported.
- X.509 Certificate (DER/PEM) (except for device certificates)
- PKCS#7 (DER) (except for device certificates)
- PKCS#12 (DER) (device certificates)
Reference
z For more information on how to import a certificate, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
The following shows the device certificates corresponding to the types of encryption,
certificate conditions that can be set according to the types of encryption, and how to
Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

check the certificate settings on Windows.

Device certificates corresponding to the types of encryption

Self-Signed Certificate Certificate Issued by

Another CA
Encrypting HTTP O O
communicationsfrom a client to the
machine(SSL/TLS server)
Encrypting HTTP communications X O
from the machine to a remote server
(SSL/TLS client)
Encryption using IPsec X *1

13 E-mail encryption/digital signature X O

PDF signature/DocuWorks signature/ O O
XPS*2 signature

O: Available
: Set as necessary
X: Not available

*1 : Available when [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by Digital Signature].

*2 : XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

406
 Encryption and Digital Signature Overview

Certificate conditions that can be set according to the types of encryption

Key usage (Only Extended key usage (Only Mail

when this item is when this item isincluded in address
included in the V3 the V3 extended area)
extended area)
Key Digital Server Client E-mail
encrypt signature Authenti authen protect
ion caion ticatio ion
n
Encryption on HTTP O O O X X X
communication fromthe
client to the machine (SSL/
TLSserver)
Encryption on HTTP O O X O X X
communication from the
machine to an remote
server (SSL/TLS client)
Encryption usingIPsec X O X X X X

How to check the certificate settings on Windows

To check the certificate settings, open the certificate file and check the fields on the
[Details] tab against the following.

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Key encryption [Key usage] includes "Key Encipherment".
Digital Signature [Key usage] includes "Digital Signature".
Server [Extended key usage] includes "Server Authentication".
Authentication
Client [Extended key usage] includes "Client Authentication".
Authentication
E-mail Protection [Extended key usage] includes "E-mail Protection".
Mail Address [Subject] includes "E=(E-mail address)", or [Subject alternative name]
includes "RFC822 Name=(E-mail address)".

Certificate Conditions
Valid certificates can only be used. To check the certificate conditions, check [Properties] 13
>[Security] > [Certificate Management] > [Certificate Details] > [Validity].

Validity Status Cause Remedy

Valid The certificate is X X
valid.
Valid (certificate expires The certificate is X X
soon) valid, but expires
within 1 month.

407
 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Validity Status Cause Remedy

Invalid (before validity The valid period of The validation Check the time when the
starts) the certificate is not period of the valid period of the
started. certificate is before certificate starts. Also
the time of the check if the time of the
machine. machine is correctly set.*
Invalid (validity expires) The certificate The validation Check the time when the
expired. period of the valid period of the
certificate is after certificate ends. Also
the time of the check if the time of the
machine. machine is correctly set.*
Certificate The certificate path is A CA certificate Import all the CA
issuerunknown. not completed. necessary to certificates of the CAs
configure the included in the
certificate path is certificate path.
not imported.

* : For Windows, open the certificate file and check [Valid From] on the [Advanced] tab.

Encryption Features for Communication

The data sent between the machine and computers on a network can be encrypted.

Encrypting HTTP Communications from a Client to the Machine (SSL/TLS Server)

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

The SSL/TLS protocol is used to encrypt the HTTP communications between a client and the
machine.
Note
z
If the certificate for the SSL server contains the V3 extension "keyUsage", "digitalSignature" must be asserted.
Refer to "How to check the certificate settings on Windows" (P.407).

Reference
z For information on the setting procedure, refer to "Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption" (P.410).

Encrypting HTTP Communications from the Machine to a Remote Server(SSL/TLS

Client)
The SSL/TLS protocol is used to encrypt the HTTP communications between a remote server
and the machine. No certificate is required in general. However, if a remote server is set to
require an SSL client certificate, you can use a certificate issued by another CA. When
verification of server certificates is enabled to verify the SSL/TLS certificate of a remote
13 server, import a certificate issued by another CA using CentreWare Internet Services to the
machine.
When verifying a SSL/TLS server certificate of a remote server with the verification of the
server certificate enabled, import the certificate of the CA included in the higher level of the
certificate path to the machine using CentreWare Internet Services.
Note
z If the certificate for the SSL client contains the V3 extension "keyUsage", "digitalSignature" must be asserted.
For information on how to check it on Windows, refer to "How to check the certificate settings on Windows"
(P.407).

408
 Encryption and Digital Signature Overview

Encryption using IPsec

IPSec enables IP-level (not application-level) encrypted communications with remote
devices.
If you select [Authenticate by Preshared Key], no device certificate is required.
Reference
z For information on IKE authentication methods, refer to "IPsec Settings" (P.223).
To verify the certificate of the remote device, you must register a root certificate created by
a CA of the remote device on the machine.
Note
z
To use certificates that have already been created, import them with CentreWare Internet Services.

Encryption and Digital-Signature Features for Scan Files

Encrypting PDF/DocuWorks Documents

PDF and DocuWorks documents can be encrypted and protected by a password.
Reference
z
For information on how to encrypt PDF and DocuWorks documents, refer to "Scan" > "E-mail" > "File Format (Selecting a File
Format for Output Data)" in the User Guide.

Encryption/Digital Signature of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Documents

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Digital signatures are available for PDF, DocuWorks, and XPS documents.
To use the digital signature, a device certificate is required.
For a device certificate, you can use any registered certificates.
Reference
z
For information on the setting procedure, refer to "Configuration of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature" (P.420).

13

409
 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption

This section describes the settings to encrypt HTTP communications.
"Installation Overview" (P.410)
"Step1 Configuration on the Machine" (P.410)
"Step2 Configuration on the Computer" (P.412)

Installation Overview
To encrypt HTTP communications, configure the machine and your computer as follows:

Configuration on the Machine

Configure a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered on the machine by
factory default. Configure certificates for an SSL server as needed.
z Configuring certificates by CentreWare Internet Services
The following two methods are available depending on types of certificates.
- Create a self-signed certificate on the machine, and then enable HTTPS.
- Enable HTTPS, and then import a certificate issued by another CA to the machine.

Configuration on the Computer

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

To encrypt communications between a web browser and the machine, enter an address
beginning with "https" instead of "http" into the address box of the web browser.

Step1 Configuration on the Machine

Configure a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered to the machine by
factory default. Configure certificates for an SSL server as needed.
The following describes the procedures to set up a certificate by CentreWare Internet
Services.

Setting up a Certificate using CentreWare Internet Services

To set up a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services, you can have the machine
create a self-signed certificate for SSL server or can import any registered certificate (issued
by another CA) to the machine.
13 Reference
z
For information on how to import a registered certificate, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services
screen to see help.

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
z When performing SSL communications using a self-signed certificate created on the machine, or a certificate
with which the character code is encoded with UTF-8, you will not be able to connect with SSL if Internet
Explorer is used with Mac OS X v10.2 or later. This is because the operating system cannot recognize the
character code (UTF-8) of the certificate. Use Netscape 7 in the above-mentioned OS environments.
z You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or [Others]. Delete the
registered certificate before importing.

410
 Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption

„ How to create the self-signed certificate (for SSL server)

1 Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Reference
z For more information on how to start CentreWare Internet Service, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).

2 Create a certificate.

1) Click the [Properties] tab.

2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.

3) Click [Machine Digital Certificate Management].

4) Click the [Create New Certificate] button.

5) Select [Self-Signed Certificate] and then click the [Continue] button.

6) Set [Digital Signature Algorithm] as necessary.

7) Set [Public Key Size] as necessary.

8) Set [Issuer] as necessary.

9) Set [Days of Validity] as necessary.

10)Click [Apply].

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

11)Refresh the web browser.

3 Set up the SSL/TLS information.

1) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.

2) Click [SSL/TLS Settings].

3) Select the [Enabled] check box for [HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication].

Important
z The check box can be selected only when the certificate for the SSL server is correctly set. When the check box
cannot be selected, check [Properties] > [Security] > [Certificate Settings], and make the correct settings for
the certificate for the SSL server.

4) Set up [HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication Port Number].

Important
z
13
Do not use the numbers of any other ports.

5) Click [Apply]

6) When the right frame of the web browser changes to the machine reboot display, click
[Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.

„ How to import the certificate issued by another CA

Before importing the certificate issued by another CA, create the self-signed certificate and
make the settings so that HTTP communication is encrypted.

411
 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

1 Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Reference
z For more information on how to start CentreWare Internet Service, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).

2 Import a certificate.
Important
z
You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or [Others]. Delete the
registered certificate before importing.
z
If the certificate to be imported contains the V3 extension "keyUsage", "digitalSignature" must be asserted.

1) Click the [Properties] tab.

2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.

3) Click [Machine Digital Certificate Management].

4) Click [Upload Signed Certificate].

5) Enter [Password].

6) Enter [Retype Password].

7) Enter a file name you want to import or select a file to import from a dialog box
displayed by clicking the [Browse] button, and then select [Save].

8) Click the [Import] button.

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

9) Refresh the web browser.

3 Configure the certificate.

1) Click [Security].

2) Click [Certificate Management].

3) Select [Local Device] for [Category] and [IPsec] for [Certificate Purpose], and then click
the [Display the list] button.

4) Select the check box next to the certificate to set.

5) Click the [Certificate Details] button.

6) Click the [Use this certificate] button.

13 7) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.

Step2 Configuration on the Computer

To encrypt communications between a web browser and the machine, enter an address
beginning with "https" instead of "http" in the address box of the web browser.
z Example of IP address entry:
https://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
https://[2001:DB8::1234]/ (IPv6)
z Example of Internet address entry:
https://myhost.example.com/

412
 Configuration of Encryption using IPsec

Configuration of Encryption using IPsec

This section describes how to encrypt communications using IPsec.
When the IKE authentication method is set to [Authenticate by Preshared Key], skip step 1
"Import and Configuration of a Certificate" and go to step 2 "Configuration on the Machine
(Configuration of IPsec)".
Reference
z For IKE authentication methods, refer to "IPsec Settings" (P.223).
Installation Overview(P.413)
"Step1 Import and Configuration of a Certificate" (P.413)
"Step2 Configuration on the Machine (Configuration of IPsec)" (P.414)
"Step3 Configuration on the Computer" (P.415)

Installation Overview
To encrypt communications using IPsec, configure the machine and your computer as
follows:

Configuration on the Machine

When [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by Digital Signature], configure
a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered on the machine by factory default.

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

After importing a certificate, configure IPsec.
Configure the following setting to set up a certificate on the machine.
z Configuring certificates by CentreWare Internet Services
- Enable HTTPS, and then import a certificate issued by another CA to the machine.
Note
z
If a certificate to be imported as an IPsec certificate contains V3 extension "KeyUsage", "digitalSignature" bit
must be asserted.

Configuration on the Computer

Configure the following settings to encrypt communications between a computer and the
machine.
z Create an IP security policy
z
Assign the IP security policy 13
Step1 Import and Configuration of a Certificate
The following describes configuration procedures to set up a certificate with CentreWare
Internet Services.
To configure a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services, configure the encryption
settings for HTTP communications, and then import a certificate issued by another CA to
use it for the IPsec certificate.
Reference
z For details on how to configure the encryption settings for HTTP communication, refer to "Configuration of HTTP Communications
Encryption" (P.410).

413
 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

1 Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Reference
z For more information on how to start CentreWare Internet Service, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).

2 Import a certificate.
Important
z
You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or [Others]. Delete the
registered certificate before importing.
z
If the certificate to be imported contains the V3 extension "keyUsage", "digitalSignature" must be asserted.
For information on how to check it on Windows, refer to "How to check the certificate settings on Windows"
(P.407).

1) Click the [Properties] tab.

2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.

3) Click [Machine Digital Certificate Management].

4) Click [Upload Signed Certificate].

5) Enter the password of the certificate for [Password].

6) Enter [Password].

7) Enter [Retype Password].

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

8) Enter a file name you want to import or select a file to import from a dialog box
displayed by clicking the [Browse] button, and then select [Save].

9) Click the [Import] button.

10)Refresh the web browser.

3 Configure the certificate.

1) Click [Security].

2) Click [Certificate Management].

3) Select [Local Device] for [Category] and [IPsec] for [Certificate Purpose], and then click
the [Display the list] button.

4) Select the check box next to the certificate to set.

13 5) Click the [Certificate Details] button.

6) Click the [Use this certificate] button.

7) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.

Step2 Configuration on the Machine (Configuration of IPsec)

The following describes configuration procedures to set up IPsec on the machine.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].

414
 Configuration of Encryption using IPsec

When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

4 Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

5 Select [Security Settings].

6 Select [IPsec Settings].

7 Configure the required settings.

Reference
z
For details on the settings, refer to "IPsec Settings" (P.223).

8 Select [Close].

Step3 Configuration on the Computer

The following describes the configuration procedures on the computer.

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Configure the following settings on the computer.
z Create an IP security policy
z
Assign the IP security policy
Reference
z For details on the settings, refer to the help of the computer.

13

415
 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital

Signature
This section describes how to encrypt e-mails and how to attach a digital signature to e-
mails.
"Installation Overview" (P.416)
"Step1 Configuration on the Machine" (P.417)
"Step2 Configuration on Sender and Recipient" (P.417)

Installation Overview
To encrypt e-mails and attach a digital signature, configure the machine and your
computer as follows:
Note
z To encrypt e-mails and attach a digital signature to e-mails between the machine and a computer, a personal
or device certificate for S/MIME of a recipient and the device certificate of the machine must be set on the
computer. To configure the digital signature, the device certificate of the machine is necessary. Configure the
following settings to the certificates.
z "e-mail address"
z
If the certificate contains V3 extension "keyUsage", "digitalSignature" and "keyEncipherment" must be
asserted.
z
If the certificate contains V3 extension "extendedKeyUsage", "emailProtection" must be set.
Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

z
Up to 100 addresses can be encrypted with S/MIME.
z For information on how to check it on Windows, refer to "How to check the certificate settings on Windows"
(P.407).

Configuration on the Machine

Set the certificate on the machine and enable the S/MIME communication.
Configure a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered on the machine by
factory default.
Configure the following settings to set up a certificate on the machine.
z
Configuring certificates by CentreWare Internet Services
- Set up HTTPS communications encryption settings, and then configure a certificate on
the machine.

13

416
 Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature

Configuration on Sender and Recipient

To transmit e-mails encrypted by S/MIME and with digital signatures attached, register the
required certificate on equipment of a sender and a recipient.
The following shows the certificate settings necessary to encryption and digital signature.

Source Destinatio Encryption Digital Signature

n
Certificate to Certificate to
beregistered to the beregistered to
source thedestination
The machine Computer Personal certificate of Device certificate for S/
thecomputer MIMEof the machine
Another Device certificate for S/ Device certificate for S/
machine MIMEof another machine MIMEof the machine
Computer The machine Device certificate for S/ Personal certificate of
MIMEof the machine thecomputer

Step1 Configuration on the Machine

This section describes configuration procedures to set up a certificate with CentreWare
Internet Services.
Note
z You cannot use a self-signed certificate created with CentreWare Internet Services for S/MIME.

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Step2 Configuration on Sender and Recipient
To transmit e-mails encrypted or with digital signature attached, a device certificate and a
personal certificate must be registered with each machine.
This section describes certificates required for destination and source, and registration
procedures.
Reference
z For information on the settings necessary to encryption and digital signature, refer to the table in Configuration on Sender and
Recipient(P.417).

Note
z
Required certificates include a trusted root certificate authority and all intermediate certificate authorities
that are registered in the path of a certificate to use.

When source is the machine and destination is a computer 13

The personal certificate of a computer must be registered on the machine. And the device
certificate of the machine must be registered on a computer.
To register the computer’s personal certificate, use CentreWare Internet Services.
There are two methods to register the machine’s device certificate to a computer:
z Send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature to a computer from the machine
andregister it to the certificate store of an e-mail application in the computer.
To send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature, select [Always add signature] or[Select
during send] for [Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail] under [Tools] > [System Settings] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Security Settings] > [S/MIME Settings] in advance.

417
 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

z Export the certificate of the machine to a computer using CentreWare InternetServices,

and register it to the certificate store of an e-mail application in the computer.
Reference
z For information on how to import and export a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Importing/exporting a
certificate using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.419) or the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
z For information on how to register a certificate to the certificate store of an e-mail application, refer to the
manual of your e-mail software.

When source is the machine and destination is another multifunctional machine

The device certificate of another multifunctional machine must be registered on the
machine. And the device certificate of the machine must be registered on another
multifunctional machine.
To register the device certificate of another multifunctional machine, start CentreWare
Internet Services of another multifunctional machine from a computer and export the
certificate to the computer. And then, start CentreWare Internet Services of the machine
and import the certificate.
To register the device certificate of the machine, perform the same procedure as described
above.
Reference
z
For information on how to import and export a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Importing/exporting a
certificate using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.419) or the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Important
Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

When source is a computer and destination is the machine

The device certificate of the machine must be registered on a computer. The registration of
the personal certificate of a computer to the machine is not required.
There are two methods to register the machine’s device certificate to a computer:
z
Send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature to a computer from the machine (or
another multifunctional machine) and register it to the certificate store of an e-mail
application in the computer.
To send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature, select [Always add signature] or [Select
during send] for [Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail] under [Tools] > [System Settings] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Security Settings] > [S/MIME Settings] in advance.
z Export the certificate of the machine to a computer using CentreWare Internet Services,
13 and register it to the certificate store of an e-mail application in the computer.
Reference
z
For information on how to import and export a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Importing/exporting a
certificate using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.419) or the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

Reference
z For information on how to register a certificate to the certificate store of e-mail software, refer to the manual of your e-mail
application.
The following e-mail applications can transmit e-mails between the machine and
acomputer:

418
 Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature

z Windows Vista®, Windows® 7:Microsoft® Office Outlook® 2007, Microsoft® Outlook®

2010
z
Windows® 8:Microsoft® Outlook® 2010
z Mac OS X:Mail 2.1.1

Importing/exporting a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services

To import a certificate, select the [Properties] tab > [Security] > [Machine Digital Certificate
Management] > [Upload Signed Certificate].
To export a certificate, select the [Properties] tab > [Security] > [Certificate Management]
and select a certificate to export, and then click the [Export this certificate] button.
Reference
z For information on how to import and export a certificate, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

13

419
 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Configuration of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature

This section describes the settings to send scanned documents in PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS
format with a digital signature (PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS) attached.
Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
"Installation Overview" (P.420)
"Step1 Configuration on the Machine" (P.420)
"Step2 Configuration on the Computer" (P.422)

Installation Overview
To attach a signature (PDF signature/DocuWorks signature/XPS signature) to a scanned
document to send as a PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS document, configure the machine and your
computer as follows:
Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

Configuration on the Machine

Configure a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered on the machine by
factory default.
Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Configure the following setting to set up a certificate on the machine.

z Configuring certificates by CentreWare Internet Services
Set up HTTPS communications encryption settings, and then configure a certificate on
the machine.

Configuration on the Computer

z Sending a DocuWorks security certificate file from the machine to a computer
You must register a personal certificate as the destination on the machine, and then
register the certificate on the Address Book. When you register a personal certificate on
the machine, include the root certificate in the personal certificate.
Important
z
o display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect to
the Internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
13 z Sending a PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS signature file from the machine to a computer
Make sure that the root certificate of the certificate to be used for the scan file signature
of the machine is registered on the recipient's computer.

Step1 Configuration on the Machine

This section describes configuration procedures to set up a certificate with CentreWare
Internet Services.

420
 Configuration of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature

Setting up a Certificate using CentreWare Internet Services

To configure a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services, configure the encryption
settings for HTTP communications, and then import a certificate issued by another CA to
enable S/MIME.
Reference
z For details on how to configure the encryption settings for HTTP communication, refer to "Configuration of HTTP Communications
Encryption" (P.410).

1 Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Reference
z For more information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).

2 Import a certificate.

1) Click the [Properties] tab.

2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.

3) Click [Machine Digital Certificate Management].

4) Click [Upload Signed Certificate].

5) Enter the password of the certificate for [Password].

6) Enter [Password].

Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

7) Enter [Retype Password].

8) Enter a file name you want to import or select a file to import from a dialog box
displayed by clicking the [Browse] button, and then select [Save].

9) Click the [Import] button.

10)Refresh the web browser.

3 Configure the certificate.

1) Click [Security].

2) Click [Certificate Management].

3) lect [Local Device] for [Category] and [Scan File] for [Certificate Purpose], and then click
the [Display the list] button. 13
4) Select the check box next to the certificate to set.

5) Click the [Certificate Details] button.

6) Click the [Use this certificate] button.

7) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.

4 Configure the settings for PDF Signature/DocuWorks Signature/XPS Signature.

Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

1) Refresh the web browser.

421
 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.

3) Click [PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Security Settings] and configure the following settings.

Important
z The DocuWorks documents with DocuWorks signature are available on the following versions of DocuWorks
software.
z When [SHA-1] is selected: DocuWorks 5.0 or later
z When [SHA-256] is selected: DocuWorks 8.0 or later
z
PDF Signature
Select the setting for PDF signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add visible
signature], [Always add invisible signature], or [Select during send].
z PDF Signature Hash Algorithm
Select the setting of the hash algorithm when using PDF signature from [SHA-1] or [SHA-
256].
z
DocuWorks Signature
Select the setting for DocuWorks signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add
signature], or [Select during send].
z
DocuWorks Signature Hash Algorithm
Select the setting of the hash algorithm when using DocuWorks signature from [SHA-1]
or [SHA-256].
z XPS Signature
Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Select the setting for XPS signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add signature],
or [Select during send].

4) Click [Apply].

Step2 Configuration on the Computer

z
Sending a DocuWorks security certificate file from the machine to a computer
You must register a personal certificate as the destination on the machine, and then
register the certificate on the Address Book. When you register a personal certificate on
the machine, include the root certificate in the personal certificate.
Reference
z
For information on how to register (import) a certificate, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services
screen to see help.
13 Important
z
To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the Internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
z Sending a PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS signature file from the machine to a computer
Make sure that the root certificate of the certificate to be used for the scan file signature
of the machine is registered on the recipient's computer.
Note
z
XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

422
14
Authentication and Accounting
14

Features
 Authentication and Accounting Features

Overview of Authentication and Accounting

Feature
This section overviews the authentication feature and the accounting feature.
Using authentication feature allows you to restrict the access to the machine, restrict the
use of each service, and count the use of services per user.
"Types of User" (P.424)
"User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.424)
"Access Control" (P.426)
"Types of Authentication" (P.426)
"Account Administration" (P.428)

Types of User
When the authentication feature is enabled, users are classified into the following three
types.
Note
z
When the authentication feature is disabled, users are classified as either system administrator or local user.

„ System Administrator
The system administrator can register and change system settings to adapt to the
environment to be used.
A system administrator uses a specific user ID called a system administrator’s user ID.
Authentication and Accounting Features

„ Login User
A login user is a user registered on the machine or a remote server. To use restricted
services, enter the user ID and passcode on the screen.
A user ID of a login user can be associated with some sub users in accordance with the
intended use.
Note
z An optional component is required to use the sub user feature. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.

„ Unregistered User
An unregistered user is a user not registered on the machine.
An unregistered user cannot use restricted services.
14
User Roles and Authorization Groups
You can select a user role and an authorization group for each user.
For a user registered on a remote server, these settings are effective only when LDAP is
used. When using LDAP, configure the settings on CentreWare Internet Services.
Important
z When [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is set to [Network Accounting],
an authorization group cannot be assigned to a user. Therefore, the features configured for the authorization
group, such as the feature to temporarily disable forcible printing, are not available.

424
 Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature

User Roles
Set the scope of administration authority for each login user. The authority of system
administrator or account administrator can be given to a specified login user.

„ System Administrator
The same authority as a system administrator is given except for the following operations:
z Operate folders
z Operate job flows sheets
z
Change the passcode of the system administrator

„ Account Administrator
The following authorities are given:
z Create, delete, change (except for passcode), and view (unavailable depending on some
settings) user information
z Create, delete, change, and view accounting
z Change Alternative Name for Account ID or Mask Account ID
z
Print an Auditron Report for each user

Authorization Groups
Create groups according to the operation authority of the following restrictions and assign
login users to them. The login users assigned to the authorization groups can operate the
machine in the same way as system administrator.

Authentication and Accounting Features

Reference
z
For details on authorization groups, refer to "Create Authorization Groups" (P.317).

„ Restrict Recipient Selection Method

Allows you to set whether or not to permit the group members to specify recipients when
[Restrict Recipient Selection Method] is set to [Only From Address Book].
Reference
z For details on the Restrict Recipient Selection Method setting, refer to "Restrict Recipient Selection Method" (P.180).

„ Restrict User to Edit Address Book

Allows you to set whether or not to permit the group members to edit the Address Book in
the machine when editing the Address Book is prohibited.
Reference
z For details on the Restrict User to Edit Address Book setting, refer to "Restrict User to Edit Address Book" (P.180).
14
„ Allow User to Disable Active Settings
Allows you to set whether or not to permit the group members to disable active settings,
such as Force Watermark and Print Universal Unique ID, and perform a job. This setting
enables users belonging to an authorization group to disable active settings from [Tools] on
the Services Home screen.
Reference
z
For details on the Watermark and UUID settings, refer to "Watermark" (P.170) and "Print Universal Unique ID" (P.174).
z For information on how to temporarily disable active settings, refer to "Allow User to Disable Active Settings"
(P.324).

425
 Authentication and Accounting Features

Access Control
Allows you to restrict the operation of the machine.

Account Limit for All User

When using authentication mode, you can restrict the access to the machine and the use of
each service. The user authentication is required to use this feature.
Note
z For more information, refer to "Access Control" (P.315).

„ Device Access
Allows you to prohibit the operation of buttons on the control panel.

„ Service Access
Allows you to configure whether or not to restrict the use of each service such as Copy, Fax,
and Scan.

„ Feature Access
Allows you to restrict making color copies, and printing and retrieving files stored in folders.

Account Limit for Each User

Allows you to restrict access to each service and to set the maximum number of pages
allowed for the service per user.
Allows you to restrict creating, editing, and using job flow sheets and folders per user.
Authentication and Accounting Features

Reference
z For more information about the feature, refer to "Services Controlled by Authentication" (P.432) and "Authentication for Job Flow
Sheets and Folders" (P.435).

Types of Authentication
The following describes the types of authentication (Login Type) available on the machine.
Authentication is performed using user information registered on the machine or a remote
server.

Types of Authenticartion

„ Login to Local Accounts

Login to Local Accounts uses the user information registered on the machine to manage
14 authentication.
Note
z A print job directly sent to the machine from a computer can be received on the machine after being
authenticated through cross-checking the authentication information configured on the client's print driver
with the information registered on the machine. In this case, depending on the remote authentication
system, the domain name needs to be set. Set the domain name from the print driver.

426
 Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature

„ Login to Remote Accounts

Authentication is performed for a remote server. User information is not registered on the
machine.
Login to Remote Accounts uses the user information registered on a remote authentication
server (LDAP, Kerberos, or SMB server) to perform authentication.
Important
z When a user is authenticated by a remote authentication server, the authenticated user can access the
services through the control panel based on the permission information obtained from the remote server.
z When you change Login Type to or from [Login to Remote Accounts], user information, private folders, and
Personal Sheets registered on the machine will be deleted.
z When you register user information on a remote authentication server, use up to 32 singlebyte characters for
a user ID and up to 128 single-byte characters for a password. Note, however, that up to 32 single-byte
characters are allowed for an SMB authentication password.

Note
z The user information used for Login to Remote Accounts can be stored on the machine. For more
information, refer to "Save remote accounts in this machine" (P.320) and "Delete Remote Accounts" (P.320).

Authentication Methods

„ User ID Authentication
Authentication is performed using user information registered on the machine or a remote
server in advance. The users are required to enter their user IDs and passcodes with the
numeric keypad or the touch screen of the machine.

„ Smart Card Authentication

Authentication is performed using the card number or user information registered on the

Authentication and Accounting Features

smart card. Register such information on the machine or a remote server in advance and
use the smart card for authentication.
Note
z
Authentication is performed using the smart card, IC Card Reader (optional), IC Card Gate (sold separately).
When you connect IC Card Gate to the machine, contact our customer support center. For information about
using IC Card Gate, refer to the manual for IC Card Gate.
z For information about setting procedure of authentication with IC Card Reader, refer to "Configuration for IC
Card Reader (Optional)" (P.444).
z User ID is registered on the smart card used with IC Card Gate in advance.

„ Combined Use of Smart Card Authentication and User ID Authentication

You can use smart card authentication in combination with user ID authentication.
However, when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts], you need to enable user ID
authentication.
Reference 14
z
For information on how to enable user ID authentication, refer to "When Smart Card Reader is Connected" (P.319).

427
 Authentication and Accounting Features

Account Administration

Types of Account Administration

The following describes the types of account administration (Accounting Type)available on
the machine.
Important
z When [Login to Remote Accounts] is set for [Login Type] and [Authentication Agent] is set for [Authentication
System], ApeosWare Authentication Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Authentication Agent
(sold separately) automatically becomes an accounting/authentication server.

Note
z Some Accounting Types may be grayed out and not selectable depending on the selected login type. For
more information, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Relationship" (P.429).
The Account Administration feature is classified into the following four types:

„ Local Accounting
Local Accounting performs account administration on the machine.
In Local Accounting, account administration is performed for each user using the login
users’information registered on the machine.
Note
z
Auditron reports can be printed when the login user is a system administrator, a user set to have system
administration authority, or a user set to have account administration authority. For printing procedure of the
report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

Reference
z For information on the types of jobs that can be monitored , refer to "Jobs Manageable by Account Administration" (P.429).
Authentication and Accounting Features

„ Network Accounting
Network Accounting performs account administration using user information managed by
a remote service.
In Network Accounting, the remote server collects job data stored on the machine and
counts up the numbers of pages processed for each user.
Note
z User information managed by the remote service is sent to be registered on the machine. When the user
information on the remote service is updated, the updated information must be sent from the remote service
to the machine.
z
The remote services supported by the machine include Device Setup Tool (free software).

„ Accounting using Authentication Server

Account administration is performed using a remote authentication server.

14 In this accounting, the remote server collects job data stored on the machine and counts up
the numbers of pages processed for each user.
Note
z
The authentication server manages the user's information and obtains accounting information from a
remote server.
Authentication servers supported by the machine include ApeosWare Authentication Management (sold
separately) or ApeosWare Authentication Agent (sold separately).

„ Xerox Standard Accounting

Account administration is performed using the user information and account information
registered on the machine. Also, accounting information is counted using various counters

428
 Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature

automatically created for each user. Auditron reports are created in CSV format using
CentreWare Internet Services.
Reference
z For information on driver settings, refer to the help of the driver.
z For information on the user information settings, account information settings, and how to create a report,
refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Note
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the Internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
z The authentication server manages the user's information and obtains accounting information from a
remote server. Authentication servers supported by the machine include ApeosWare Authentication
Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Authentication Agent (sold separately).

Authentication and Accounting Relationship

You can individually select Login and Accounting Types, and can combine them as
described in the following table.

Accounting Types
Accounting Local Network Authenticati Xerox
Disabled Accounting Accounting on Server Standard
Accounting
Login Types No Login
O X O X O
Required
Login to Local
X O O X O
Accounts

Authentication and Accounting Features

Login to
Remote O* X X X X
Accounts

O : Available
X : Not available
* : When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts], [Accounting Type] is automatically set to [Accounting Disabled]. Accounting,
however, can be performed with ApeosWare Accounting Services.

Jobs Manageable by Account Administration

This section describes the information that can be managed for the jobs for each service.

„ Print
The following table shows the print jobs and the information that can be managed for each
print job. 14

429
 Authentication and Accounting Features

Services (Jobs) Target User Managed Items

Normal Print Machine's print driver Login user Pages/sheets
Other than machine's print Unregistered user
driver
Secure Print Print Files Login user
Sample Set
Print Stored File
Delayed Print
Charge Print
Private Charge
Print

Print E-mail* Unregistered user

* : Printing is available only when [Non-account Print] is set to [Enabled] in CentreWare Internet Services.

„ Scan
The following table shows the scan jobs and the information that can be managed for each
scan job.

Services (Jobs) Target User Managed Items

E-mail Login user Scanned pages, mail transmission pages
Store to Folder Scanned pages
Scan to PC Scanned pages, file transfer pages
Authentication and Accounting Features

Store & Send Link Scanned pages

Network Scanning Scanned pages, file transfer pages
Store to USB Scanned pages

Note
z To use the Store & Send Link feature, an optional component is required. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.

„ Fax
The following table shows the scan jobs and the information that can be managed for each
scan job.

Services (Jobs) Target User Managed Items

14 Send as Fax Automatic Send Login User Transmissions/pages, charging
units
Manual Send (Call-in, Call-
out)
Receive Fax/ Automatic Reception/Print - *1 Receptions/pages, charging
PrintFax units, printed pages/number of
sheets
Manual Reception/Print
(Call-in, Call-out)
Store Fax- Automatic Reception to - *1 Receptions/pages, charging
Local Folder Folder units
Print Folder-received Fax Login User*5 Printed pages/number of sheets

430
 Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature

Services (Jobs) Target User Managed Items

Fax Polling Automatic Send (to Folder) Unregistered Transmissions/pages
User
Automatic Reception/Print Login User Polls/pages, charging units,
printed pages/number of sheets
Polling File Sample Printout Login User*5 Pages/number of sheets
(Folders, Polling Folders)
Fax Relay Relay Broadcasting, Printing Relay Transmissions/pages,
Broadcast Broadcast*2 chargingunits, printed pages/
number of sheets
Direct Fax transmission Login User Transmissions/pages, charging
units
Send as Internet Fax Login User Transmissions/pages
Receive Automatic Reception/Print - *3 Receptions/pages, printed
Internet Fax/ pages/number of sheets
Print Internet
Automatic Reception to Receptions/pages
Fax
Folder
Print Folder-received Fax Login User*5 Pages/number of sheets

Fax Polling Automatic - *4 Transmissions/pages, charging

Transmission(Transfer) units

*1 : The machine counts jobs as Receive Fax.

*2 : The machine counts jobs as Relay Broadcast.
*3 : The machine counts jobs as Receive Internet Fax.
*4 : The machine counts jobs as Internet fax Transfer.

Authentication and Accounting Features

*5 : When you enable folder operation on the setting of authentication feature under system administration mode, the machine
counts jobs as unregistered user's jobs.

‹ Restriction on Using the Accounting feature on Fax Jobs:

Note the following conditions when you use the accounting feature on fax jobs.
z Sending files from different user accounts to the same destination is not counted as a
batch send.
z
The number of charging units is calculated using the machine's built-in timer. Therefore,
the communications charges calculated from the number of charging units may slightly
differ from the charges invoiced by the telecommunications company.
z
When fax-received pages are split for printing, the number of pages counted will be
those received, not those printed.
z
The number of charging units is not counted for the following communications:
- When dialing a fax number using the numeric keypad or the On-hook/Off-hook
feature.
- When using an address number in which the billing data is not registered.
14
- When a phone conversation took place, including the one before a transmission.
‹ Billing for Fax Jobs
Fax jobs are not billed for the following communications:
z When dialing a fax number using the numeric keypad or the On-hook/Off-hook feature.
z
When using an address number in which the billing data is not registered.
z Manual Receive, Manual Send, or Manual Polling is used.
z When a phone conversation took place, including the one before a transmission.

431
 Authentication and Accounting Features

Services Controlled by Authentication

This section describes the features that are controlled by the authentication feature.
The restricted features vary depending on how the machine is used.
Reference
z For information on the folder and job flow sheet restrictions when the authentication feature is enabled, refer to "Authentication
for Job Flow Sheets and Folders" (P.435).
"Overview" (P.432)
"Combination of Authentication and Account Administration types" (P.432)

Overview
Some restrictions can be set for each user, and other restrictions can be set for the machine
as a whole.
When the authentication feature is used, specified service to be used for each user and the
available number of pages can be restricted.
Reference
z For information on the restrictions that can be set for each user, refer to "Service Access" (P.303), and for information on the
restrictions that can be set for the machine as a whole, refer to "Service Access" (P.316).

Combination of Authentication and Account Administration types

The following shows the services that can be restricted in use and accounted according to
the combination of the authentication and accounting administration types.
Authentication and Accounting Features

Reference
z For authentication procedure, refer to "Configuration for Authentication" (P.439).

Note
z To use the combination of user ID authentication and smart card authentication when [Login Type] is set to
[Login to Local Accounts] , you need to enable user ID authentication. For the setting procedure, refer to
"When Smart Card Reader is Connected" (P.319).

When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Local
Accounting]

Services Restrictions per User Per-user Usage

Count
Feature Account Limit*
Restrictions*
14
Copy O O O
Print O O O
Scan O O O
Fax, Internet Fax O - O

O : Available
- : Not available
* : For information of available setting for each user, refer to "Service Access" (P.303).

432
 Services Controlled by Authentication

When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Network
Accounting]

Services Restrictions per User Per-user Usage

Feature Account Limit Count*2
Restrictions*1
Copy O - -
Print O - -
Scan O - -
Fax, Internet Fax O - -

O : Available
- : Not available
*1 : The restriction is available with ApeosWare Device Management(sold separately).
*2 : The accounting is available with ApeosWare Device Management(sold separately).

When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts]

Services Restrictions per User Per-user Usage

Feature Count*
Account Limit
Restrictions
Copy O - -

Authentication and Accounting Features

Print O - -
Scan O - -
Fax, Internet Fax O - -

O : Available
- : Not available
* : The accounting is available with ApeosWare Device Management(sold separately).

Important
z Note the following conditions when you use ApeosWare Log Management to perform account
administration per user:
z When users are registered in multiple domains, each user ID must be unique.
z Before a user sends a job from a computer (print and fax), the user needs to log in from the computer to
the remote server to have the server confirm the user ID.

14

433
 Authentication and Accounting Features

When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Xerox
Standard Accounting]

Services Restrictions per User Per-userUsage

Count
Feature Account Limit*
Restrictions*
Copy O O O
Print O O O
Scan O O O
Fax, Internet Fax O - O

O : Available
- : Not available
* : You can select features available for each user. For more information, refer to the online help of CentreWare Internet Services.

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
Authentication and Accounting Features

14

434
 Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders

Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders

This section describes the restrictions of job flows and folders.
"Creating / Using Job Flow Sheet" (P.435)
"Creating / Using Folder" (P.437)

Creating / Using Job Flow Sheet

You can create the job flow sheets for the documents stored in folders.
The restrictions of the two job flow sheets created when the authentication feature is used
and when that is not used, are different. Also, the restrictions of the job flow sheets created
on the [Create Folder], [Send from Folder], or [Create Job Flow Sheet] screen are different.
Important
z When you switch the Login to Local Accounts feature from [enable] to [disable] or vice versa, all the job flow
sheets used till then become unavailable besides for the system administrator. In this case, delete all the job
flow sheets and create new ones.
z When you change [Login Type] to [Login to Remote Accounts] or to another login type from [Login to
Remote Accounts], the job flow sheets that was used before the change will be deleted.
z When a job flow sheet which becomes unavailable due to the change of the login type is associated with a
folder, the job flow sheet is available, but cannot be edited or copied. However, when the association is
invalid, the job flow sheet will not be displayed.
z
A job flow sheet created on the [Create Folder] screen or the [Send from Folder] screen can only be used for
the folder on which the job flow sheet is created. The job flow sheet cannot be used for any other folders.
z
The job flow sheets created on the network cannot be edited or copied on the machine.

Note

Authentication and Accounting Features

z
When using Device Setup Tool, the job flow sheets for the documents stored in the folders and the scan
documents can be created on the network. Device Setup Tool is downloaded from ApeosWare Management
Suite on our website.

Reference
z
For information of the job flow sheets which can be created on the machine, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.279).

When the Authentication Feature is Enabled

Note
z When the Authentication feature is enabled, the following users can use the job flow sheets.
z
A login user and a system administrator when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts]
z A login user besides guest user when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote Accounts]
z
A login user when [Verify User Details] is set to [Yes] in [Network Accounting] and [Customize User
Prompts] is set to [Display User ID & Account ID Prompts] or [Display User ID Prompt Only]

„ Creating Job Flow Sheet on the [Create Folder] screen / [Send from Folder] screen
14
The following shows the creator of job flow sheet, manageable user, and available
operations.

Creator of Job Flow Manageable User Available Operations

Sheet
Login User Creator /System Edit, Display, Copy, Delete, Select, Run,
Administrator Link to Folder
System Administrator All Login User /System Edit*, Display, Copy, Delete*, Select, Run,
Administrator Link to Folder

435
 Authentication and Accounting Features

* : Only the system administrator can operate.

Note
z A user copies a job flow sheet becomes the creator of the copied job flow sheet.

„ Creating Job Flow Sheet on the [Create Job Flow Sheet] screen
The following shows the creator of job flow sheet, manageable user, and available
operations.

Creator ofJob Flow Manageable User Available Operations

Sheet
Login User Creator /System Edit, Display, Copy, Delete, Select, Run
Administrator
System Administrator All Login User /System Edit*, Display, Copy, Delete*, Select, Run
Administretor

* : Only the system administrator can operate.

Note
z
A user copies a job flow sheet becomes the creator of the copied job flow sheet.

When the Authentication Feature is Disabled

„ Creating Job Flow Sheet on the [Create Folder] screen / [Send from Folder] screen
The following shows the creator of job flow sheet, manageable user, and available
operations.
Authentication and Accounting Features

Creator of Job Flow Manageable User Available Operations

Sheet
Local User All Local User /System Edit, Display, Copy, Delete, Select, Run,
Administrator Link to Folder
System Administrator All Local User /System Edit*, Display, Copy, Delete*, Select, Run,
Administretor Link to Folder

* : Only the system administrator can operate.

Note
z A user copies a job flow sheet becomes the creator of the copied job flow sheet.

„ Creating Job Flow Sheet on the [Create Job Flow Sheet] screen
The following shows the creator of job flow sheet, manageable user, and available
operations.
14
Creator ofJob Flow Manageable User Available Operations
Sheet
Local User All Local User /System Edit, Display, Copy, Delete, Select, Run
Administrator
System Administrator All Local User /System Edit*, Display, Copy, Delete*, Select, Run
Administretor

* : Only the system administrator can operate.

Note
z A user copies a job flow sheet becomes the creator of the copied job flow sheet.

436
 Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders

Creating / Using Folder

The folders created when the authentication feature is used and is not used are different in
use.
Important
z
When you switch the Login to Local Accounts feature from [enable] to [disable] or vice versa, all the job flow
sheets used till then become unavailable besides for the system administrator. In this case, delete all the job
flow sheets and create new ones.
z When you change [Login type] to [Login to Remote Accounts] or to another login type from [Login to Remote
Accounts], the job flow sheets that was used before the change will be deleted.

When the Authentication Feature is Enabled

Note
z When the Authentication feature is enabled, the following users can use the folders.
z
A login user and a system administrator when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts]
z A login user besides guest user when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote Accounts]
z A login user when [Verify User Details] is set to [Yes] in [Network Accounting] and [Customize User
Prompts] is set to [Display User ID & Account ID Prompts] or [Display User ID Prompt Only]
The following shows the relationship between the creator of a folder and the user who can
manage the folder.

Creator of Folder Manageable User Available Operations

Login User Creator /System Display, Delete, Change Settings,
Administrator Display File, Delete File, Register File,
Output File, Display Job Flow Sheet, Link
Job Flow Sheet, Run Job Flow Sheet

Authentication and Accounting Features

System Administrator All Unregistered User*2 / All Display, Delete*1, Change Settings*1,
Login User / System Display File, Delete File, Register File,
Administretor Output File, Display Job Flow Sheet, Link
Job Flow Sheet*1, Run Job Flow Sheet

*1 : Only the system administrator can operate.

*2 : Available when you enable folder operation on the setting of authentication feature in the system administration mode.

When the Authentication Feature is Disabled

The following shows the relationship between the creator of a folder and the user whocan
manage the folder.

Creator of Folder Manageable User Available Operations

Login User Creator /System Display, Delete, Change Settings, 14
Administrator Display File, Delete File, Register File,
Output File, Display Job Flow Sheet, Link
Job Flow Sheet, Run Job Flow Sheet
System Administrator All Login User /System Display, Delete*1, Change Settings*1,
Administretor Display File, Delete File, Register File,
Output File, Display Job Flow Sheet, Link
Job Flow Sheet*1, Run Job Flow Sheet

437
 Authentication and Accounting Features

* : Only the system administrator can operate.

Note
z Registering and outputting files using Network Scanner Utility 3 is not supported as the authenticated
operation.
Authentication and Accounting Features

14

438
 Configuration for Authentication

Configuration for Authentication

This section describes the settings to use the Authentication feature on the machine.
"Installation Overview" (P.439)
"Enabling Authentication" (P.439)
"Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings" (P.442)
"Creating an Authorization Group" (P.443)

Installation Overview
To use the Authentication feature, configure the following settings.
Important
z If job flow sheets, which are no longer available for use because of a change in the Login Type, are linked to
folders, they cannot be edited or copied, but still can be used. If you cancel the links, however, the job flow
sheets will no longer be displayed and will be unavailable.
Change the default authorization group settings and add an authorization group, as
necessary.

Login to Local Accounts

Specify the Login Type and access control, and then create a user.

Enabling Authentication
This section describes the procedures for [Login to Local Accounts] and [Login to Remote

Authentication and Accounting Features

Accounts] respectively.

When [Login to Local Accounts] is Selected

Perform the following procedures to use the local authentication.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator’s passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
14
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

4 Select [Authentication/Security Settings].

5 Select [Authentication].

6 Select [Login Type].

439
 Authentication and Accounting Features

7 Select [Login to Local Accounts], and then select [Save].

Reference
z For more information on the authentication method, refer to "Login Type" (P.315).

8 Select [Access Control].

9 Select [Service Access].

10 Select [Unlocked] for the required services to permit users unlimited access, and then select
[Save].

11 After you finish settings for each feature, select [Close].

12 To disable button operations on the control panel, select [Device Access] and select
[Locked], and then select [Save] and then [Close].

13 Select [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login] under [Passcode Policy]. Select [On] to
prompt users to enter their passcode, or select [Off] if the passcode entry is not required,
and then select [Save] and then [Close].

14 Select [Create/View User Accounts].

15 Select a user displayed as [<Available>], and then select [Create/Delete].

16 Enter a User ID and select [Save].

Authentication and Accounting Features

17 Select [Account Limit].

18 Configure the [Account Limit] and [Feature Access] settings for each service, and then
select [Close].

19 If necessary, select a user role and an authorization group for the user under [User Role]
and [Add This User To Authorization Group] respectively, and then select [Save].

20 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

21 Select [Close].

Note
z Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
14 z The machine enters the Login mode, and [Login] is displayed at the lower left of the Services Home screen.
z When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access],[ ]is displayed on the button of
the applicable service on the Services Home screen. Also,
[ : Requires Login]is displayed at the lower left of the Services Home screen.
[ ]and[ : Requires Login]are not displayed after authentication.
z
When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access] the applicable service is not
displayed on the Services Home screen. The services is displayed after authentication.

When [Login to Remote Accounts] is Selected

Perform the following procedures to use remote authentication.

440
 Configuration for Authentication

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2 Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

4 Select [Authentication/Security Settings].

5 Select [Authentication].

6 Select [Login Type].

7 Select [Login to Remote Accounts], and then select [Save].

Reference
z
For more information on the authentication method, refer to "Login Type" (P.315).

8 Select [Yes].

9 Select [Access Control].

Authentication and Accounting Features

10 Select [Service Access].

11 Select [Unlocked] for the required services to permit users unlimited access, and then select
[Save].

12 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

13 Select [System Settings].

14 Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

15 Select [Remote Authentication/Directory Service].

16 Select [Authentication System Setup] > [Authentication System], and then select a remote
authentication server.
14
Reference
z
For more information, refer to "Remote Authentication/Directory Service" (P.214).

Note
z The available options are [Kerberos (Windows 2000)], [Kerberos (Solaris)], [LDAP], and [SMB].

17 Configure the settings for the remote authentication server.

Reference
z
For more information on the Authentication feature, refer to "Kerberos Server Settings" (P.215), "LDAP Server/Directory Service
Settings" (P.216), and "SMB Server Settings" (P.219).

441
 Authentication and Accounting Features

18 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

19 Select [Close].
Note
z
Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on the
screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
z The machine enters the Login mode, and [Login] is displayed at the lower left of the Services Home screen.
z When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access],[ ]is displayed on the button of
the applicable service on the Services Home screen. Also,
[ : Requires Login]is displayed at the lower left of the Services Home screen.
[ ]and[ : Requires Login]are not displayed after authentication.
z When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access] the applicable service is not
displayed on the Services Home screen. The services is displayed after authentication.

„ When an LDAP server is used as a remote authentication server

Set the user authorization on the LDAP server using the following steps.

1 Start CentreWare Internet Services.

2 Click the [Properties] tab.

3 Click [Connectivity] > [Protocols] > [LDAP] > [LDAP Authorization Access].

4 Set attributes in [System Administrator Access] and [Accounting Administrator Access].

Setting example:
System Administrator Access: CN=SA,CN=Users,DC=secEQ,DC=local
Authentication and Accounting Features

Accounting Administrator Access: CN=AA,CN=Users,DC=secEQ,DC=local

5 Click [Apply].

Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings

Perform the following procedures to change the settings of the default authentication
group.
The settings changed here will be used as the default value of the authorization group for a
created user.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button

2 Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
14 displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z
The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

4 Select [Authentication/Security Settings].

442
 Configuration for Authentication

5 Select [Authentication].

6 Select [Create Authorization Groups].

7 Select the group displayed as [DefaultGroup (Default)], and then select [Create/ Delete].

8 Set each item.

Reference
z For more information on the change of the authorization group, refer to "Create Authorization Groups" (P.317).

9 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

10 Select [Close].

Creating an Authorization Group

Perform the following procedures to add authorization groups, if necessary.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2 Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note

Authentication and Accounting Features

z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

4 Select [Authentication/Security Settings].

5 Select [Authentication].

6 Select [Create Authorization Groups].

7 Select a group displayed as [(No Name)], and then select [Create/Delete].

8 Enter a group name into [Group Name].

9 Set the other items.

14
Reference
z
For more information on the authorization group settings, refer to "Create Authorization Groups" (P.317).

10 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

11 Select [Close].

443
 Authentication and Accounting Features

Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional)

You can use a smart card for authentication by comparing the information registered on
the smart card and the user information on the machine. You can also restrict the machine
use and perform accounting of the jobs using the information registered on the smart card.
This section describes the supported smart cards and how to register a smart card to use at
the machine.
Note
z An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
The following shows the reference section for card information and each procedure.
"Step 1 Preparations" (P.444)
"Step 2 Logout Method Using the Smart Card" (P.445)
"Step 3 Registering Smart Card Information" (P.445)

Step 1 Preparations
The machine supports IC Card Reader available for the following smart card type:

When using Embedded IC Card Reader

z
MIFARE® (Type A)
- Fuji Xerox IC Card (Type A)
- Other MIFARE compatible smart cards*
Authentication and Accounting Features

z
elWISE/ELWISE (Type B)
- eLWISE
- ELWISE
z
FeliCa®
- Fuji Xerox IC Card
- IC Card compatible with SSFC® version 1.0 format
- Other FeliCa compatible smart cards*
* : The embedded IC Card Reader of the machine may not support some smart cards.

When using Embedded IC Card Reader A

z MIFARE® (Type A)
14 Fuji Xerox IC card (Type A)
z

Other MIFARE compatible smart cards*

z

z
FeliCa®
- Fuji Xerox IC card (IDm only)
- Other FeliCa compatibled smart cards (IDm only)*
z
HID® Prox
z HID® iCLASS® (UID only)
z
EM Prox
z HITAG(HITAG2)

444
 Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional)

z LEGIC® Advant(UID only)

* : The embedded IC Card Reader of the machine may not support some smart cards.

Note
z
When you confirm whitch IC Card Reader you use, contact our Customer Support Center.

Step 2 Logout Method Using the Smart Card

Perform the following steps to set how to logout authentication using the smart card.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2 Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

4 Select [Authentication/Security Settings].

5 Select [Authentication].

Authentication and Accounting Features

Select [User Details Setup].

7 Select [Smart Card Logout Timing], and then select [Change Settings].

8 Select the authentication logout method, and then select [Save].

9 Select [Close].

Step 3 Registering Smart Card Information

The system administrator can register smart cards using CentreWare Internet Services.
Note
z The smart card information can be set from CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer to the
help of CentreWare Internet Services.
z The information used for authentication can also be set from CentreWare Internet Services. For more
information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
14
Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.

445
 Authentication and Accounting Features

Configuration for Account Administration

This section describes the settings to use the accounting feature on the machine.
"Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type" (P.446)
"Step 2 Registering User Information" (P.446)

Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type

The following describes the configuration procedures to use the accounting feature.
Reference
z For information on relationships between the authentication and accounting modes, refer to "Authentication and Accounting
Relationship" (P.429).

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2 Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z
The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Authentication and Accounting Features

4 Select [Accounting].

5 Select [Accounting Type].

6 Select an accounting type, and then select [Save].

Note
z You can select the accounting type from [Local Accounting], [Network Accounting], and [Xerox Standard
Accounting].

7 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

8 Select [Close].

14 Step 2 Registering User Information

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

446
 Configuration for Account Administration

2 Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
Note
z The default user ID is "11111".
z The default passcode is "x-admin".

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

4 Select [Accounting].

5 Select [Create/View User Accounts].

6 Select [<Available>], and then select [Create/Delete].

7 Enter a User ID and select [Save].

8 Select [Service Access].

9 Configure the [Service Access] and [Feature Access] settings for each service, and then
select [Save].
Reference
z For more information on the service access, refer to "Service Access" (P.303).

10 If necessary, select a user role and an authorization group for the user under [User Role],

Authentication and Accounting Features

and then select [Save].
Note
z
[User Role] is displayed only when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts].

Reference
z For more information on the user role, refer to "User Role" (P.304).

11 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

12 Select [Close].

14

447
 Authentication and Accounting Features

User Authentication Operations

The machine has the Authentication feature to restrict the services available.
This section describes the authentication method to use the restricted services.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
"Authenticating Login Users" (P.448)
"Changing Passcode" (P.449)

Authenticating Login Users

There are two methods to authenticate login users: using the control panel of the machine
and touching the smart card to the IC Card Reader.
To authenticate the login users using the operator panel, the user must enter the user ID. In
addition, the passcode entry is also required when [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login]
is set to [On] under Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Passcode
Policy].
Reference
z For more information on the passcode policy, refer to "Passcode Policy" (P.321).
z
For more information on user registration from the touch screen, refer to "Create/View User Accounts"
(P.317).

Note
z An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Authentication and Accounting Features

Log In/Log Out from the Control Panel

„ User Authentication

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button or the login information field on the touch screen.

2 Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen, and
select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the passcode, and select[Enter].
Important
z Finish user authentication before you cancel the Interrupt mode.

Note
z
When you select the service restricted, the [Log In] screen may appear. Enter the user ID and/or the passcode
14 to use the service.
z
When the user is authenticated, the <Log In/Out> button is lit.

„ Logging Out of User Authentication

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

Note
z
You can also log out by pressing the login information field on the touch screen, and then select [Logout].
z When the user is logged out, the <Log In/Out> button light goes out.

448
 User Authentication Operations

Log In/Log Out by Touching the IC Card Reader (Optional)

Changing Passcode
You can change the passcode to use for user authentication. Change the passcode by
following the steps in this section.

Changing Passcode by User

When a user is authenticated, the user can change his/her own passcode.

1 Select [Setup] on the Services Home screen.

2 Select [User Details Setup].

3 Select [Change Passcode].

4 Enter the current passcode, and then select [Next].

5 Select [New Passcode] and enter a new passcode, and then select [Save].

6 Select [Retype Passcode] and re-enter the new passcode, and then select [Save].

7 Select [Close].

Setting or Changing Passcode by System Administrator

Authentication and Accounting Features

The system administrator can set or change passcodes using CentreWare Internet Services.
Reference
z For more information on setting or changing passcodes from the touch screen, refer to "Create/View User Accounts" (P.301).

1 Start CentreWare Internet Services.

Reference
z For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.330).

2 Click the [Properties] tab.

3 Click [Security], and then click [Authentication Configuration].

4 Click [Next].
14
5 Enter the account number of the user to set or change in [Account Number], and then click
[Edit].

6 Enter a new passcode in [Password].

7 Re-enter the new passcode in [Retype Password].

8 Click [Apply].

449
Authentication and Accounting Features Authentication and Accounting Features

14

450
15
Problem Solving
15
 Problem Solving

Troubleshooting
This section describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions. Follow
the troubleshooting procedure below to solve the problems.

The machine does not work properly. Action Refer to "Machine Trouble" (P.453).
No Yes

A message is displayed. Cause Has a paper or document jam occurred?

No Yes Action For information on paper jams, refer to"Paper Jams"
(P.612).
For information on document jams, refer to
"Document Jams" (P.623).
No

Cause Is an error code displayed?

Action Refer to Error Code(P.496).

The image quality is poor. Action Refer to "Image Quality Trouble" (P.458).
No Yes

Trouble during copying Action Refer to "Trouble during Copying" (P.464).

No Yes

Trouble during printing Action Refer to "Trouble during Printing" (P.468).

No Yes

Trouble during faxing Action Refer to "Trouble during Faxing" (P.471).

No Yes

Trouble during scanning Action Refer to "Trouble during Scanning" (P.481).

No Yes

Network-related Problems Action Refer to "Network-related Problems" (P.486).

No Yes

Media Print - Text-related Problems Action Refer to "Media Print - Text Trouble" (P.494).
No Yes

Media Print - Photos-related Problems Action Refer to "Media Print - Photos Trouble" (P.495).
Yes

If the error is not resolved even after following the above procedure, contact our Customer
Problem Solving

Support Center.
When the EP system is available and a check or maintenance is required, the machine sends
a check or maintenance request to our Customer Support Center. A service representative
visits you as required. Requesting a check or maintenance should be performed by a system
administrator.
Note
15 z
The EP system may not be available in some regions. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.

Reference
z For more information on the check or maintenance procedure of the EP system via the Internet, refer to "EP Diagnostic Request/
Repair Request" (P.166) and "Check EP Connection" (P.167).
z For more information on the EP system, refer to EP System(P.749).

452
 Machine Trouble

Machine Trouble
Before you conclude that the machine is defective, check the machine status again.

Symptom Cause Remedy

The machine is Is the main power and Switch the main power and power on.
not powered on. power switched on?
Reference
z Refer to "Product Overview" in the User Guide.
Is the power cord plugged Switch the main power and power off,
into the power outlet? and then firmly plug the power cord into
the connector of the machine and power
Is the power cord
outlet. Then switch the main power and
disconnected from the
power on.
machine?
Reference
z Refer to "Product Overview" in the User Guide.
Does the AC outlet supply Connect another appliance to the outlet
power properly? to verify the power supply. Refer to
"Before Using the Machine" in the User
Guide.
The <Error> The system of the machine Switch the main power and power off and
indicator is or the components then on. If the error still is not resolved,
blinking. installed may have a contact our Customer Support Center.
trouble.
The <Error> Is paper or a document Remove the jammed paper or document.
indicator is lit. jammed?
Reference
z If paper is jammed, refer to"Paper Jams" (P.612),
and a document is jammed, refer to "Document
Jams" (P.623).
Is the front cover or top Solve the problem by following the
cover open? message displayed.
Is a message displayed on Replace the consumables indicated in the
the touch screen prompting message.
you to replacethe
consumables? Reference
z Refer to "Replacing Consumables" (P.78). Problem Solving
Is a message displayed in Check the message and solve the
the upper part of the touch problem.If an error code such as "016-
screen? 450" isdisplayed, check the error code list
and solve the problem.

Reference

The touch Is the <Power Saver>

z Refer to "Error Code" (P.496).
The machine is in the Power Saver mode.
15
screen is too button lit? Press the <Power Saver> button on the
dark. control panel to exit the Power Saver
mode.

Reference
z
Refer to "Product Overview" in the User Guide.

453
 Problem Solving

Symptom Cause Remedy

The touch Is the screen brightness too Adjust the screen brightness on the
screen is too low? [Screen Brightness] screen.
dark.
Reference
z Refer to "Adjusting Screen Brightness" (P.41).
Unable to print, Is a message displayed on Follow the instructions displayed to
or unable to the touch screen? resolve the problem.
copy.
Is the power cord Switch the main power and power off,
disconnected from the and then firmly plug the power cord into
machine? the connector of the machine and power
outlet. Then switch the main power and
power on.

Reference
z
Refer to "Product Overview" > "Power Source" in
the User Guide.
Paper is not fed Is the specified size paper Follow the instructions displayed to load
from Tray 5. loaded in the tray? paper of correct size, and then try again.

Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.68).
Unsatisfactory A probable cause is an Resolve the problem by referring to
print quality. image defect. "Image Quality Trouble".

Reference
z Refer to "Image Quality Trouble" (P.458).
Unable to print Non-standard fonts are Check the application or print driver
text correctly. used for printing. settings. If PostScript (optional) is being
(Text is used, download the required fonts.
garbled.)
Unable to insert Did you open a cover or Do not forcibly insert or remove the paper
or remove a turn the machine off during tray. Switch off the power. In a few
paper tray. printing? seconds, switch on the power. When the
machine is ready to receive data, insert or
remove the paper tray.
Unable to copy Is the document glass or Clean the document glass and the
with the the document cover dirty? document cover.
Problem Solving

specified size.
Reference
z Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.99).
Is the document a Place the document on the
transparent type such as a documentglass, and place a white sheet
transparency film? on top of the document when copying.
15 Is the document in the Load the document correctly.
correct position?
Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
Is the document loaded
correctly?

454
 Machine Trouble

Symptom Cause Remedy

Unable to copy Are the document guides Adjust the document guide positions.
with the on the document feeder set
specified size. in the correct positions? Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
Is the document folded? Unfold and correctly load the document.

Reference
z
Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
Is the document a non- Specify the document size.
standard size?
Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
Paper is often Is the paper loaded Load the paper correctly.
jammed or correctly in the tray?
wrinkled. Reference
z Refer to ""Loading Paper" (P.66).
Is the paper tray inserted Firmly push in the paper tray until it stops
correctly? to insert it correctly.

Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with a new one.

Reference
z
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Is the paper curled? Turn over the paper in the tray, or replace
the paper with a new one.

Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Are the paper and paper Correctly set the paper and paper trays to
tray settings correct? correspond to the paper.

Reference
z
Refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.72).
Are any torn pieces of Open the cover of the machine or slide Problem Solving
paper remaining or is there out the paper tray to remove the torn
a foreign object in the pieces or the foreign object.
machine?
Reference
z Refer to "Paper Jams" (P.612) or "Loading Paper"
(P.66).
Is non-standard paper Replace with paper that meets machine
loaded in the tray? specifications. 15
Reference
z Refer to "Paper Types" (P.48) or "Loading Paper"
(P.66).
Is paper exceeding the Load paper in the paper tray so that it
maximum fill line in the does not exceed the maximum fill line.
tray?
Reference
z
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).

455
 Problem Solving

Symptom Cause Remedy

Paper is often Are the paper guides set Load the paper correctly, and align
jammed or correctly? thepaper guides to the paper.
wrinkled.
Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66)or "Changing the
Paper Size" (P.70).
Is the image nearly the Increase the edge erase widths.
same size as the paper?
Is the paper finely cut out? Some types of paper may not be cut out
finely. Load the paper after fanning it
well.
A document is Is the document small? The minimum size of the document that
not fed into the can be loaded on the document feeder is
document 125 x 85 mm (Standard size: A5, A5 ).
feeder.
Reference
z
Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
An error Check the positions of the Adjust the paper guides to the
message paper guides of Tray 5. correctpositions.
appears after
paper is loaded Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.68).
in Tray 5 and
the <Start>
button is
pressed.
Documents are Are suitable types of Correctly load documents suitable for the
often jammed. documents being used? document feeder.
Are you trying to use Reference
irregular shaped z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
documents, business cards, Guide.
transparencies, or thin
documents?
Are you trying to use Remove sticky tags, paper clips or
documents with sticky tags, adhesive tape from the document before
paper clips or adhesive copying.
tape?
Problem Solving

Are the document guides Adjust the document guide positions.

set in the correct positions?
Reference
z
Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
Is a piece of torn paper Open the document feeder cover
remaining in the document andcheck inside.
15 feeder?
Reference
z Refer to "Document Jams" (P.623).
Is the [Mixed Size Set [Mixed Size Originals] to [On].
Originals] setting set to
[Off] when you copy Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Layout Adjustment" > "Mixed
originals of different sizes?
Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents
Simultaneously)" in the User Guide.

456
 Machine Trouble

Symptom Cause Remedy

Documents are Is an A5 document loaded Load the A5 document in portrait
often jammed. in landscape orientation ( ).
orientation( ) on the
document feeder when
[Mixed SizeOriginals] is set
to [On]?
An edge of Is the document curled? Flatten the curl and load the document
thedocument again.
isfolded.
Cannot copy Is [Output Color] set Set [Output Color] to [Color].
incolor. to[Black & White]?
Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copy" > "Output Color
(Selecting the Color for Copying)" in the User
Guide.
Is a message displayed on Replace the toner cartridge of the color
the touch screen prompting indicated in the message.
you to replace the toner
cartridge? Reference
z
Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridge" (P.80).
Is a message displayed on The drum cartridge needs to be replaced.
the touch screen prompting Contact our Customer Support Center.
you to replace the drum
cartridge?
Cannot staple Is staple jam occurred in Remove the staple jammed in
properly the staple cartridge? thecartridge.

Reference
z Refer to "Stapler Faults" (P.626).
Is the print driver set Check the [Staple] setting in [Print Setup]
correctly? in the print driver when you send a print
job from the computer.

Problem Solving

15

457
 Problem Solving

Image Quality Trouble

If the image quality of printed documents is poor, identify the symptom in the following
table to perform the remedy.
If image quality does not improve even after performing the remedy, contact our Customer
Support Center.

Symptom Cause Remedy

The copy is dirty. Is the document glass or the Clean the document glass and the document
document cover dirty? cover.

Reference
z Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document
Glass" (P.99).
Is the document a If the document is transparent, dirt on the
transparent type such as a document cover will be copied. Place a white
transparency film? sheet of paper on top of thedocument when
copying.
Is the document colored, Adjust the copy density or image quality.
rough, or a blueprint?
Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Image Quality" in the User Guide.
Is the document glossy Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
printing paper? document glass, and shadows are sometimes
copied, soiling the image. Place a
transparency film under the document when
copying.
The copy is too Is the copy density set to Adjust the copy density.
dark. [Darken]?
Reference
The copy is too Is the document faint? z Refer to "Copy" > "Image Quality" in the User Guide.
light.
Is the copy density set to
[Lighten]?
The copy is Are the paper edges aligned Align the paper edges, adjust them to the
slightly and the leading edge tray's top corners, and reload the paper.
misaligned. adjusted to the tray corners?
Reference
Problem Solving

z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).

The copy is Is the document loaded Load the document correctly.
misaligned or correctly?
skewed. Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.

15 Is the paper loaded correctly

in the tray?
Load the paper correctly.

Reference
z
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Are the paper guides of Tray 5
Reference
correctly aligned to the z Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.68).
paper?

458
 Image Quality Trouble

Symptom Cause Remedy

The copy is Are the document guides on Load the document correctly, and align the
misaligned or the document feeder set in document guides to the document edges.
skewed. the correct positions?
Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
Is the paper tray inserted Firmly push in the tray until it stops to insert it
correctly? properly.

Reference
z
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Part of the image Is the paper damp? If the paper is damp, the copy image may be
is missing on the partially missing or unclear. Replace the
copy. paper with a new one.

Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Is folded or wrinkled paper Remove the unsuitable paper or replace all of
included in the tray? the paper with a new one.

Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Is the document pasted or The pasted or folded section may not be
folded? laying flat on the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on top of the document
to flatten the document against the
document glass.
The copy has a Is the enlargement ratio too Vertical stripes may be printed on the copies
stripe pattern. large? depending on the ratio. Adjust the ratio to
eliminate the stripes.

Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copy" > "Reduce/Enlarge (Making
Enlarged/Reduced Copies)" in the User Guide.
Color shift of Is the color calibration Execute auto calibration.
color copies is incorrect?
poor, resulting in Reference
z
unsatisfactory Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.103).
image quality. Problem Solving
Is the machine set where it is If the document glass is exposed to strong
exposed to direct sunlight? light when you turn the machine on or cancel
the Power Saver mode, color shift may occur.
Close the document cover and turn the
machine on, and when the machine becomes
ready to copy or print, turn the machine off
and then on one more time.
15

459
 Problem Solving

Symptom Cause Remedy

Printing is faint. The paper is damp. Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
(smudged,
unclear) Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
deteriorated or is damaged. Contact our Customer Support Center.
There is no toner left in the Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
toner cartridge.
Reference
z
Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridge" (P.80).

Black dots are The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
printed. deteriorated or is damaged. Contact our Customer Support Center.

Black or colored The drum cartridge Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
lines are printed. hasdeteriorated or is Contact our Customer Support Center.
damaged.
Problem Solving

Dirt appears at The paper path is dirty. Print a few pages to remove the dirt.
equal intervals.
The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
deteriorated or is damaged. Contact our Customer Support Center.

15

Paper feed direction

460
 Image Quality Trouble

Symptom Cause Remedy

White dots The paper is unsuitable. Load suitable paper.
appear in black
filled areas. Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
deteriorated or is damaged. Contact our Customer Support Center.

Printed toner The paper is damp. Replace the paper with a new one.
smudges when
rubbed with your Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
finger.
Toner is not The paper is unsuitable. Load suitable paper.
fused.
The paper is Reference
soiled with toner. z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).

The entire paper The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
area is printed deteriorated or is damaged. Contact our Customer Support Center.
black.
High-voltage power supply Contact our Customer Support Center.
may have malfunctioned.

Problem Solving
Nothing is Two or more sheets of paper Fan the paper well and load it again.
printed. are being fed simultaneously
(double-feed). Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Power supply or high-voltage Contact our Customer Support Center.
power supply may have
malfunctioned.
15

461
 Problem Solving

Symptom Cause Remedy

White areas or The paper is damp. Replace the paper with a new one.
white or colored
stripes appear. Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
The paper is unsuitable. Load suitable paper.

Reference
z
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).

The entire output Two or more sheets may be Fan the paper well and load it again.
is faint. fed simultaneously.
Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).

Paper becomes The paper is unsuitable. Replace the paper with a new one.
wrinkled.
Reference
z
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Paper has been added to the
paper loaded.
The paper is damp.

Text is blurred. The paper is unsuitable. Replace the paper with a new one.

Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Paper has been added tothe
paper loaded.
Problem Solving

The paper is damp.

White or color The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
patches appear deteriorated or is damaged.
vertically. Note
z
Contact our Customer Support Center.
15 Clean the charge corotron. If the problem still
persists, the drum cartridge needs to be
replaced. Contact your Fuji Xerox Customer
Support Center.
No toner remains in the toner Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
cartridge.
Reference
z Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridge" (P.80).

Paper feed direction

462
 Image Quality Trouble

Symptom Cause Remedy

Text or images The paper guides in the paper Adjust the horizontal and vertical paper
are printed at an tray are not set in the correct guides to the correct positions.
angle. positions.
Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).

Problem Solving

15

463
 Problem Solving

Trouble during Copying

This section describes how to resolve copy problems.

Unable to Copy
If you cannot copy a document, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the
remedy.

Symptom Cause Remedy

The document is The document is too small. The minimum size of document that can
not correctly fed be loaded on the document feeder is 125
from the x 85 mm ( A5, A5 ).
document
feeder. Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document type is The document feeder does not feed
unsuitable. irregular sized documents, business cards,
transparencies, or thin documents. In
addition, the document feeder does not
feed documents with sticky tags, paper
clips, or adhesive tape.

Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document guides are Adjust the document guides to the
set in incorrect positions. document.

Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
A piece of torn paper Open the document feeder cover, and
remains in the document remove the piece.
feeder.
Reference
z Refer to "Document Jams" (P.623).
Problem Solving

Documents of mixed sizes When loading documents of mixed sizes,

are loaded. be sure to set [Mixed Size Originals] to
[On]. Otherwise, a paper jam will occur.

Reference
z
Refer to "Copy" > "Layout Adjustment" > "Mixed
Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents
15 Simultaneously)" in the User Guide.

464
 Trouble during Copying

The Copy Result is Not What was Expected

If the copy result is not what was expected, identify the symptom in the following table to
perform the remedy.

Symptom Cause Remedy

The copy is dirty. The document glass or the Clean the document glass or the document
document cover is soiled. cover.

Reference
z Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document
Glass" (P.99).
The document is a If the document is transparent, dirt on the
transparent type such as a document cover may be copied. Place a white
transparency film. sheet of paper on top of the document when
copying.
The document is colored, The paper's background color is copied.
rough, or a blueprint. Adjust the copy density or image quality, or
specify [Suppress Background].
The document is glossy Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
printing paper. document glass, and shadows are sometimes
copied, soiling the image. Place a
transparency film under the document when
copying.
The copy is too The copy density is set Adjust the copy density.
dark or light. to[Darken] or [Lighten].
Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Image Quality" in the User Guide.
The document density is too Adjust the copy density.
light.
Reference
z Refer to "Copy" in the User Guide.
The setting for [OriginalType] Copy black text. If the printout is too light,
is inappropriate for the select [Text] for [Original Type].
document.
Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Image Quality" in the User Guide.
The color of the Is the color calibration Execute auto calibration.
document and of incorrect? Problem Solving
the copy differ. Reference
z Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.103).
The document type selected Set the suitable value for [Original Type].
is not suitable.
Reference
z
Refer to "Copy" > "Image Quality" > "Original Type
(Selecting the Document Type)" in the User Guide.
The image quality selected is Copy black text. If the printout is too light,
15
unsuitable for the document. select [Text] for [Original Type].

Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Image Quality" in the User Guide.
The copy is Paper is misaligned in the Align the paper edges, and adjust them to
slightly tray. the tray's top corners to reload the paper.
misaligned.
Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).

465
 Problem Solving

Symptom Cause Remedy

Part of the image The paper is damp. If the paper is damp, the copy image may be
is missing on the partially missing or unclear. Replace the
copy. paper with new one.

Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Folded or wrinkled paper is Remove the unsuitable paper or replace all of
included in the tray. the paper with a new one.

Reference
z
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
The document is pasted or The pasted or folded section may not be
folded. laying flat on the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on top of the document
to flatten the document against the
document glass.
The copy has a The document enlargement Vertical stripes may be printed on the copies
stripe pattern. ratio is too large. depending on the ratio. Adjust the ratio to
eliminate the stripes.

Reference
z
Refer to "Copy" > "Copy" > "Reduce/Enlarge (Making
Enlarged/Reduced Copies)" in the User Guide
The copy is The document is not loaded Load the document correctly.
misaligned or correctly.
skewed. Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document guides onthe Load the document correctly, and align the
document feeder are not set document guides to the document.
in the correct positions.
Reference
z
Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The paper tray is notinserted Firmly push in the tray until it stops to set it
correctly. properly.

Reference
z
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Problem Solving

The paper guides in Tray 5 Load the paper correctly, and align the paper
are not set in the guides to the paper edges.
correctpositions.
Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.68).
Unable to copy The document glass or the Clean the document glass or the document
with the specified document cover is dirty. cover.
15 size.
Reference
z Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document
Glass" (P.99).
The document is a Place a white sheet of paper on top of the
transparent type such as a document when copying.
transparency film.

466
 Trouble during Copying

Symptom Cause Remedy

Unable to copy The document is misaligned. Load the document correctly.
with the specified
size. Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document guides on the Load the document correctly, and align the
document feeder are not set document guides to the document.
in the correct positions.
Reference
z
Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document is a Specify the document size, and then copy.
nonstandard size.
Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document is folded. Flatten the curl and load the document
again.

Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
Unable to copy in [Output Color] is set to [Black Set [Output Color] to [Auto Detect] or [Color].
color. & White].
Reference
z Refer to "Copy" > "Copy" > "Output Color (Selecting the
Color for Copying)" in the User Guide.
The document The document is larger than Adjust [Reduce/Enlarge] to copy
edges are missing the printable area. thedocument smaller.
on the copy.
Outputs are not The Finisher is not attached. The Finisher is required to staple. Install the
stapled. Finisher, or change the print option settings
to cancel stapling.
The number of pages to be You cannot staple more than 50 pages.
stapled exceeds the Reduce the number of pages to 50 or fewer.
maximum number for
stapling.

Problem Solving

15

467
 Problem Solving

Trouble during Printing

This section describes how to resolve print problems.

Unable to Print
If you cannot print a document, identify the symptom in the following table to performthe
remedy.

Symptom Cause Remedy

Data remains in The machine is not Switch the main power and power on.
the printer icon. powered on.
The network cable is Connect the network cable to the
disconnected from the computer.
computer.
The network cable is Connect the network cable to the
disconnected from the machine.
machine.
Reference
z
Refer to "Interface Cables" (P.21).
The print mode is [Off-line] Press the <Machine Status> button to
on the machine. check the [Print Mode] on the [Machine
Status] screen. If [Print Mode] is set to
[Offline], select [On-line].
An error occurred in the Check the error details and take an
machine. appropriate action.
The IP address or SMB Set the correct IP address or SMB network
network path is not path.
correctly set.
Note
z Refer to "Printer Environment Settings"
(P.335).
The network between the Check with your network administrator.
computer and machine is
abnormal.
The port is not enabled. Enable the port.
Problem Solving

Reference
z
Refer to "Port Settings" (P.194) and "Loading
Paper" (P.66).
The hard disk space of the Delete unnecessary data such as stored
machine is insufficient. documents (Charge Print, Private Charge
Print, and Secure Print) in folders to
15 increase free space.
The machine is connected Wait for a while, and then try printing
to multiple computers. again.
Non sensical A printer driver provided by Use the appropriate printer driver. Check
characters other company is used. the property screen of the printer driver to
(symbols) are confirm that your machine’s name is
printed in large displayed for the driver name on the
numbers. [Advanced] tab.

468
 Trouble during Printing

Symptom Cause Remedy

The data has The machine is out of Load paper in the machine.
been sent to the paper.
machine.
No paper is loaded for the Load paper of the size specified.
specified paper size.
Reference
z Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.66).
Printing is interrupted by a Cancel the interrupting operation.
copy operation.
An error occurred in the Check the error details and take an
machine. appropriate action.

The Print Result is Not What was Expected

If the print result is not what was expected, identify the symptom in the following table to
perform the remedy.

Symptom Cause Remedy

Cannot print in [Output Color] is set to Set [Output Color] to [Auto Detect] or
color. [Black and White]. [Color].
Outputs are not The Finisher is not The Finisher is required to staple. Install
stapled. installed. the Finisher, or change the print option
settings to cancel stapling.
The number of pages You cannot staple more than 50 pages.
to be stapled exceeds Reduce the number of pages to 50 or
the maximum number fewer.
for stapling.
The document is The document size is Change the size of paper in the tray, or
printed on a different from the change the print option to specify a tray
different paper size paper size loaded in that contains the correct sized paper.
than specified. the specified tray.
The image on the The image is larger Expand the printable area of the machine,
document edges is than the printable or reduce the image size on the printout.
missing on the area.
output.
The printed font Font replacement is Check the font replacement table. Problem Solving
differs from the font set on the print driver.
specified on the
computer.
The printout is not The machine does not To output offset, the Offset Stacking
offset. offer the Offset Module or the Finisher is required.
feature.
The specified print The print driver for Install the print driver for the model. 15
options are not another model is used.
enabled.
The required optional Check the optional components installed
kit is not installed on on the machine, and set [Installable
the machine. Options] under [Configuration] in the print
driver again.
The document The image is larger Expand the printable area of the machine,
edges are missing than the printable or reduce the image size on the printout.
on the printout. area.

469
 Problem Solving

Symptom Cause Remedy

The output color This is because the To closer match the color of Secure Print
differs between print path is different. and files in folder, select [On] in [Image
Secure Print and The output color of Options] > [Print Page Mode] on the
Print Stored File. Print Stored File is [Advanced] tab of the print driver settings.
reproduced by the
presence or absence of
dots, as with copying
or faxing. On the other
hand, the output color
of Secure Print is
reproduced using
density by default, as
with printing.
The print color The color calibration is Execute auto calibration.
differs from before. incorrect.
Reference
z Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.103).
Black lines are A print driver for Install the print driver for your machine.
printed. another machine is
used.
Problem Solving

15

470
 Trouble during Faxing

Trouble during Faxing

This section describes how to resolve fax problems.
Note
z For troubles during Internet faxing, refer to "E-mail Features Problems" (P.489).
z The Fax features are not available for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Sending Problems
If you cannot send a fax, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the
remedy.

Symptom Cause Remedy

A Transmission The fax was not sent Check the Transmission Results in the
Report - Job because of an error. Transmission Report - Job Undelivered. If
Undelivered is an error code is displayed, refer to "Error
output. Code" (P.496).
Unable to The phone line is not The machine is equipped with connectors
communicate connected correctly. to which to connect phone
(general fax) lines.Communication is enabled only
when the phone line is connected to the
correct connector.When the cable
connection is correct, the On-hook feature
allows you to call via general lines.
The phone dialing method Specify the same dialing method as the
is not available. one (Tone/10pps) subscribed for the
machine.
An error occurred with the Use a telephone near the machine to
phone line. check whether you can make a phone call.
If the phone call is disabled, the problem
is in the phone line, not in the machine.
The destination machine is The data cannot be sent if the machine of
abnormal. the recipient is turned off, is set to
"manual" receiving mode, or does not
support G3 reception.Call the recipient to Problem Solving
confirm the machine condition.
An incorrect fax number is Check the fax number and try sending
used. again.
The number is not for fax If no peep sound is heard from the
number. receiver when you call the number, the
number is not for a fax number.
You forgot the external When calling from an extension line, the 15
access number. external access number is required.
When dialing, dial the external access
number such as "0", and then dial the fax
number.
When the switchboard is changed and
you cannot send faxes, try the external
access number "0*" instead of "0".

471
 Problem Solving

Symptom Cause Remedy

Unable to When calling from an When calling from an abbreviated
communicate abbreviated telephone telephone number to an external line, an
(general fax) number, an external access external access number such as "0" may
number is appended. be registered for the abbreviated
telephone number. Confirm the telephone
number of the receiver on the
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered.
You are using a feature Confirm whether the destination fax
such as the Polling feature supports the feature.
that is not supported by
the destination fax.
The Authentication/ When the Authentication/Accounting
Accounting feature is feature is used and you send a fax directly
being used and the fax is from the computer, you must set the user
being sent directly from ID and passcode registered on the
the computer. machine to the fax driver.

Reference
z For details on the Authentication/Accounting
feature, refer to "Authentication and Accounting
Features" (P.423). For details on how to directly
send a fax from the computer, refer to "12
Computer Operations" > "Sending Fax" in the User
Guide.
Unable to The IP address is incorrect. Set a correct IP address, subnet mask, and
communicate gateway address on the machine.
(IP fax (SIP))
The SIP user name is Set a correct SIP user name in the
incorrect. machine.
The correct IP address of a Set a correct IP address of the SIP server
SIP server is not set in the on the machine.
machine.
The specified SIP server in Consult your network administrator on
a network is not active. the SIP server condition.
Registration of the Turn the machine off and then on.
machine information to a
SIP server failed.
Problem Solving

15

472
 Trouble during Faxing

Symptom Cause Remedy

Unable to The IP fax (SIP) machine The data cannot be sent if the IP fax (SIP)
communicate of the recipient is machine of the recipient is turned off. Call
(IP fax (SIP)) abnormal. the recipient to confirm the machine
condition.
The method for specifying Specify the following recipient
the recipient is incorrect. information:
z Neither a SIP server nor a VoIP gateway

is used. Specify "SIP user name@IP

address" for [Recipient].
z Only a SIP server is used. Specify "SIP

user name" or "telephone number" in

[Recipient].
z Only VoIP gateway is used Specify

"telephone number" in [Recipient].

z Both SIP server and VoIP gateway are

used.
Specify "SIP user name" or "telephone
number" in [Recipient].
You are using a feature Confirm whether the destination fax
such as the polling feature supports the feature.
that is not supported by
the destination fax.
The authentication/ When the authentication/accounting
accounting feature is feature is used and you send a fax directly
being used and the fax is from the computer, you must set the user
being sent directly from ID and passcode registered on the
the computer. machine to the fax driver.

Reference
z
For details on the authentication/accounting
feature, refer to "Authentication and Accounting
Features" (P.423). For details on how to directly
send a fax from the computer, refer to "13
Computer Operations" > "Sending Fax" in the User
Guide.
IP fax (SIP) is being The number of simultaneous connections
received. for IP fax (SIP) is one. The machine
cannot send and receive an IP fax (SIP) at
the same time.
Wait until the receiving completes, and Problem Solving
then try sending again.
Unable to The network relay device Enable the port for IP fax (SIP) of the
communicate such as a switch, router, network relay device.
(IP fax (SIP)) and firewall cannot go
through the port of the
machine.
The IP filter setting of the Add the IP address of the SIP server to the
15
machine is incorrect. permitted IP address of the machine in
the environment where the SIP server is
used. Set [IP Filtering] under [Properties]
tab > [Security] using CentreWare
Internet Services.
The Ethernet cable has When Register recovery on the SIP server
been unplugged for more is completed, the registration succeeds.
than one minute. No measure is required.

473
 Problem Solving

Symptom Cause Remedy

Unable to The registration of VoIP is Register the correct VoIP gateway on the
communicate incorrect. machine.
(IP fax (SIP) via
The specified VoIP Consult your network administrator on
VoIP gateway)
gateway in a network is the VoIP gateway condition.
not active.
The settings on the VoIP Consult your network administrator on
gateway are incorrect. the VoIP gateway settings.
The destination G3 fax The data cannot be sent if the G3 fax
machine is abnormal. machine of the recipient is turned off. Call
the recipient to confirm the machine
condition.
IP fax (SIP) The priority of the IP Increase the value for [Prioritize IP
transmission packet, which is sent from Packets] according to your network
takes long time. the machine, on the environment.
network relay device (such
as a switch and router) is Reference
z For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets],
low because the QoS
setting of the machine is refer to "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets
(Ethernet 1), Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)"
invalid.
(P.212).
A large amount of Set an appropriate parameter on the
communication data loss network relay device for your network
occurs because the queue environment.
(buffer) assigned to each
QoS of the network relay
device (such as a switch
and router) is low.
A large amount of Use the same communication speed
communication data loss within the network.
occurs because the
communication rates
(10M/ 100M/1000M)
differ on two sides of the
network relay device (such
as a switch and router).
A large amount of Set appropriate communication
communication data loss parameters on the VoIP gateway for your
Problem Solving

occurs because the environment.

communication
parameters (such as input
gain, output attenuation,
echo setting) of the VoIP
gateway are inappropriate
for the network
environment.
15 IP fax (SIP) machine is Configure the QoS setting for the entire
connected to the data network environment and control traffic.
network where the Set [Prioritize IP Packets] for QoS of the
telephone and data machine.
networks are operated
separately. Reference
z For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets],
refer to "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets
(Ethernet 1), Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)"
(P.212).

474
 Trouble during Faxing

Symptom Cause Remedy

Communication The priority of IP packet, Decrease the value for [Prioritize IP
s other than IP which is sent from the Packets] according to your network
fax (SIP) machine, on the network environment.
become slow relay device (such as a
while IP fax(SIP) switch and router) Reference
z For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets],
transmission is becomes higher than
executed. necessary because the QoS refer to "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets
(Ethernet 1), Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)"
setting of the machine is
(P.212).
invalid. Or, large amounts
of buffer space is
occupied.
IP fax (SIP) machine is Configure QoS setting for the entire
connected to the network environment and control traffic.
telephone network where Set [Prioritize IP Packets] for QoS of the
the telephone and data machine.
networks are operated
separately. Reference
z For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets],
refer to "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets
(Ethernet 1), Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)"
(P.212).
The image The document glass is Clean the document glass.
quality is poor. dirty.
Reference
z Refer to "Cleaning the White Chute and Constant
Velocity Transport Glass" (P.100).
The fax density is Adjust the fax density.
inappropriate.
Reference
z Refer to "4 Fax" > "Fax/Internet Fax" in the User
Guide.
The sender’s machine has Confirm with the sender.
a problem.
Note
z Image quality may be affected by a
problem of the sender's machine, not just
by a problem of the machine.

Receiving Problems
Problem Solving
If you cannot receive a fax, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the
remedy.

Symptom Cause Remedy

Unable to The phone line is not The machine is equipped with connectors
communicate(g connected correctly. to which to connect phone lines.
eneral fax) Communication is enabled only when the 15
phone line is connected to the correct
connector. When the cable connection is
correct, the On-hook feature allows you to
call via general lines.

475
 Problem Solving

Symptom Cause Remedy

Unable to An error occurred with the Use a telephone near the machine
communicate(g phone line. tocheck whether you can make a phone
eneral fax) call.If the phone call is disabled, the
problem is in the phone line, not in the
machine.
The machine is turned off. The machine cannot receive a fax when
turned off. Switch the main power and
power on.
No paper is set. Load paper in the machine to receive
faxes.
Paper is jammed. Follow the instructions displayed on the
control panel to remove the jammed
paper.

Reference
z Refer to "Paper Jams" (P.612).
The machine is in the The machine cannot receive a fax in the
System Administration System Administration mode. Exit the
mode. System Administration mode.
A machine password has When a machine password has been set,
been set. the machine accepts only data or polling
fax sent with the correct machine
password in F code.
The machine is in manual Receive the fax manually, or set
receive mode. [FaxReceiving Mode] to [Auto Receive].

Reference
z Refer to "Fax Receiving Mode" (P.130).
The machine is in manual To use Fax information service, set the
send mode. reception mode to [Manual Send] on the
on-hook screen, enter an information
code, and press the <Start> button.
The document is Check with the sender.
notcorrectly loaded on
thesender's machine. Note
z
Image quality may be affected by a
problem of the sender's machine, not just
Problem Solving

by a problem of the machine.

Unable to The IP address is incorrect. Set a correct IP address, subnet mask, and
communicate gateway address on the machine.
(IP fax (SIP))
The correct IP address of a Set a correct IP address of the SIP server
SIP server is not set in the in the machine.
machine.

15 The specified SIP server in

a network is not active.
Consult your network administrator on
the SIP server condition.

476
 Trouble during Faxing

Symptom Cause Remedy

Unable to Registration of the Turn the machine off and then on.
communicate(g machine information to a
eneral fax) SIP server failed.
The machine is turned off. The machine cannot receive a fax when
turned off. Turn the machine on.
The machine is in the The machine cannot receive a fax in the
System Administration System Administration mode. Exit the
mode. System Administration mode.
A wrong machine When a machine password has been set,
password has been set. the machine accepts only data or polling
fax sent with the correct machine
password in F code.
IP fax (SIP) is being sent. The number of simultaneous connection
for IP fax (SIP) is one. The machine
cannot send and receive an IP fax (SIP) at
the same time.Wait until the sending
completes, and then ask the sender to
send again.
The network relay device Enable the port for IP fax (SIP) of the
such as a switch, router, network relay device.
and firewall cannot go
through the port of the
machine.
The IP filter setting of the Add the IP address of the SIP server to the
machine is incorrect. permitted IP address of the machine in
the environment where the SIP server is
used.Set [IP Filtering] under [Properties]
tab > [Security] using CentreWare
Internet Services.
The Ethernet cable has When Register recovery on the SIP server
been unplugged for more is completed, the registration succeeds.
than one minute. No measure is required.
Unable to The registration of VoIP is Register the correct VoIP gateway on the
communicate incorrect. machine.
(IP fax (SIP) via
The specified VoIP Consult your network administrator on
a VoIP gateway)
gateway in a network is the VoIP gateway condition.
Problem Solving
not active.
The settings on the VoIP Consult your network administrator on
gateway are incorrect. the VoIP gateway settings.

15

477
 Problem Solving

Symptom Cause Remedy

IP fax (SIP) The priority of the IP Increase the value for [Prioritize
transmission packet, which is sent from IPPackets] according to your network
takes long time the machine, on the environment.
network relay device (such
as a switch and router) is Reference
z For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets],
low because the QoS
setting of the machine is refer to "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets
(Ethernet 1), Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)"
invalid.
(P.212).
A large amount of Set an appropriate parameter on the
communication data loss network relay device for your network
occurs because the queue environment.
(buffer) assigned to each
QoS of the network relay
device (such as a switch
and router) is low.
A large amount of Use the same communication speed
communication data loss within the network.
occurs because the
communication rates
(10M/ 100M/1000M)
differ on two sides of the
network relay device (such
as a switch and router).
A large amount of Set appropriate communication
communication data loss parameters on the VoIP gateway for your
occurs because the environment.
communication
parameters (such as input
gain, output attenuation,
echo setting) of the VoIP
gateway are inappropriate
for the network
environment.
IP fax (SIP) machine Configure the QoS setting for the entire
isconnected to the data network environment and control traffic.
network where the Set [Prioritize IP Packets] for QoS of the
telephone and data machine.
networks are operated
Problem Solving

separately Reference
z For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets],
refer to "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets
(Ethernet 1), Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)"
(P.212).

15

478
 Trouble during Faxing

Symptom Cause Remedy

Communication The priority of IP packet, Decrease the value for [Prioritize IP
s other than IP which is sent from the Packets] according to your network
fax (SIP) machine, on the network environment.
become slow relay device (such as
while IP fax aswitch and router) Reference
z For more information on [Pririotize IP Packets],
(SIP) becomes higher than
transmission is necessary because the QoS refer to "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets
(Ethernet 1), Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)"
executed. setting of the machine is
(P.212).
invalid or a large amounts
of buffer space is
occupied.
IP fax (SIP) machine is Configure QoS setting for the entire
connected to the network environment and control traffic.
telephone network where Set [Prioritize IP Packets] for QoS of the
the telephone and data machine.
networks are operated
separately. Reference
z For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets],
refer to "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets
(Ethernet 1), Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)"
(P.212).
The image Copy a document. If the image quality is
quality is poor. poor, replace the drum cartridge with a
new one.
The document glass of the Check with the sender
sender's machine is dirty.
Note
z Image quality may be affected by a
problem of the sender's machine, not just
by a problem of the machine.
The resolution setting on Check with the sender.
the sender's machine is
too low. Note
z Image quality may be affected by a
problem of the sender's machine, not just
by a problem of the machine.

Problem Solving

15

479
 Problem Solving

Symptom Cause Remedy

The one-page When scanned on the You can set the machine to process such a
document is sender's machine, the document by using the Auto Reduce on
received split document was enlarged Receipt feature and a border limit value
into multiple for some reason. for page splitting. According to the setting
pages. combination specified, the received
document is printed as follows:

Auto Auto
Reduce on Reduceon
Receipt ON Receipt
OFF
Within Automatic Trims the
border limit ally portion
reduces exceeding
image size standard
and prints siz e and
it on one then prints.
page.
Exceeding Splits data -
border limit at equal
ratio and
prints.

Reference
z Refer to "Border Limit" (P.251), or "Auto Reduce
On Receipt" (P.251).
Although the An unregistered folder is When using the Folder Selector feature,
Folder Selector specified on the Folder specify a registered folder. If an
feature is set, Selector feature. unregistered folder is selected, the
however, the received document cannot be stored in
received the folder, and will be automatically
document is printed.
printed, and
Reference
Problem Solving

cannot be stored
z For information on how to register the folder, refer
in the folder.
to "Create Folder" (P.276). For information on the
setting of the Folder Selector, refer to "Fax
Received Options" (P.255).

15

480
 Trouble during Scanning

Trouble during Scanning

This section describes how to resolve scan problems.
Note
z The Scan features are not available for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Unable to Scan with the Machine

If you cannot scan with the machine, identify the symptom in the following table to
perform the remedy.

Symptom Cause Remedy

The document is The document is too small. The minimum size of the document that
not correctly fed can be loaded on the document feeder is
from the 125 x 85 mm (Standard size: A5, A5 ).
document
feeder. Reference
z
Refer to "Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document type is The document feeder does not feed
unsuitable. irregular sized documents, business cards,
transparencies, or thin documents. In
addition, the document feeder does not
feed documents with sticky tags, paper
clips, or adhesive tape.

Reference
z
Refer to "Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document guides are Adjust the document guides to the
set in incorrect positions. document.

Reference
z
Refer to "Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" in the User
Guide.
A piece of torn paper Open the document feeder cover, and
remains in the document remove the piece. Problem Solving
feeder.
Reference
z Refer to "Document Jams" (P.623).
Documents of mixed sizes When loading documents of mixed sizes,
are loaded. be sure to set [Mixed Size Originals] to
[On]. Otherwise, a paper jam will occur.

Reference 15
z Refer to "Scan" > "Layout Adjustment" in the User
Guide.

481
 Problem Solving

Unable to Import Scanned Documents to the Computer

If you cannot import scanned documents to the computer, identify the symptom in the
following table to perform the remedy.

Symptom Cause Remedy

Unable to find The machine is not turned Switch the main power and power on.
the scanner. on.
The network cable is Connect the network cable to the
disconnected from the computer.
computer.
The network cable is Connect the network cable to the
disconnected from the machine.
machine.
Reference
z Refer to "Interface Cables" (P.21).
The network between the Check with your network administrator.
computer and machine is
abnormal.
Unable to open The folder is unregistered. Register the folder.
a folder.
Reference
z Refer to "Create Folder" (P.276).
The folder passcode has The passcode cannot be retrieved. Set the
been forgotten. passcode to [Off], and then set the
passcode again.

Reference
z Refer to "Create Folder" (P.276).
Unable to The scan driver is not Install the scan driver.
import data installed.
from the
scanner because
of a TWAIN
transmission
error.
Operation The file size is too large. Lower the resolution, and import again.
terminates
Problem Solving

during scanning. Reference

z
Refer to "Scan" > "Layout Adjustment" in the User
Guide.

Unable to Send a Scanned Document over the Network (FTP/SMB)

If you cannot send a scanned document over the network, identify the symptom in the
15 following table to perform the remedy.

Symptom Cause Remedy

A Transmission Unable to transmit Check the Transmission Results in
Report - Job because of the error. theTransmission Report - Job Undelivered.
Undelivered is If an error code is displayed, refer to "Error
output. Code" (P.496).

482
 Trouble during Scanning

Symptom Cause Remedy

Unable to send The server is not correctly Correctly specify the server.
data over the specified.
network.
The save destination is not Correctly specify the save destination.
correctly specified.
When SMB is selected, the Correctlpecify y sthe shared name.
shared name is not
correctly specified.
When SMB (UNC Format) Correctly specify the save destination.
is selected, the save
destination is not correctly
specified.
The login name is Correctly enter the login name.
notentered correctly.
The password is Correctly enter the password.
notcorrectly entered.
The time set on the Synchronize the time settings of the
machine does not agree machine and Windows.
with that of Windows,
when SMB transmission is
performed to Windows
Server 2003, Windows
Server 2008, Windows
Server 2012, Windows
Server 2012 R2, Windows
8 or Windows 8.1.
On Windows Server 2003, Follow the steps below to change
Windows Server 2008, thesettings of network access:
Windows Server 2012,, 1. Start Windows, and select [Control
Windows Server 2012 R2, Panel] > [Administrative Tools] >
Windows 8, or Windows [Local Security Policy].
8.1 users who do not set a
2. Select [Security Settings] > [Local
password cannot use SMB
Policies] > [Security Options].
transmission.
3. Change [Account: Limit local account
use of blank passwords to console
logon only] to [Disabled].
Is the root of the DFS Specify a DFS name space with a root Problem Solving
name space (\\Domain comprised of less than four characters.
name\Shared name)
specified with more than
three characters?
The access right to the Set the access right to the specified
specified storage location storage location correctly so that you can
is not set correctly. read and write the files and folders.
15
The SMB port number is Check the destination server, the router
blocked. between the machine and the server, virus
scanning software on the destination
server, and firewall to confirm whether the
SMB port is blocked or not.

483
 Problem Solving

Unable to Send E-mail

If you cannot send a scanned document using the E-mail feature, identify the symptom in
the following table to perform the remedy.

Symptom Cause Remedy

A Transmission Unable to transmit Check the Transmission Results in the
Report - Job because of an error. Transmission Report - Job Undelivered. If
Undelivered is the error code is displayed, refer to "Error
output. Code" (P.496).
Unable to send The mail address is Enter the correct mail address.
e-mail. incorrect.
The data size exceeded Change the maximum e-mail size, or
the maximum e-mail size. lower the resolution.

Reference
z Refer to "Maximum Total Data Size" (P.264), or
"Scan" > "Layout Adjustment" in the User Guide.

The Image is not What was Expected

If the image is not what was expected, identify the symptom in the following table to
perform the remedy.

Symptom Cause Remedy

The image is The document glass or the Clean the document glass or the
dirty. document cover is soiled. document cover.

Reference
z Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.99).
The document is If the document is transparent, dirt on the
atransparent type such as document cover may be copied on the
a transparency film. image. Place a white sheet of paper on
top of the document when scanning.
The document is colored, Adjust the copy density or image quality
rough, or a blueprint. when scanning.
Problem Solving

The document is glossy Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the

printing paper. document glass, and shadows are
sometimes scanned, soiling the image.
Place a transparency film under the
document when scanning.
The image is too The scan density is set to Adjust the scan density.

15 dark, or too light. [Darken] or [Lighten].

Reference
z Refer to "Scan" > "Advanced Settings" in the User
Guide.
The setting for Select the image quality appropriate for
[OriginalType] is the document.
inappropriate for the
document. Reference
z Refer to "Scan" > "Advanced Settings" in the User
Guide.

484
 Trouble during Scanning

Symptom Cause Remedy

Part of the The document is pasted or The pasted or folded section may not be
image is missing. folded. laying flat on the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on top of the
document to flatten the document
against the document glass.
The image is not The document glass or the Clean the document glass or the
the desired size. document cover is dirty. document cover.

Reference
z Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.99).
The document is a Place a white sheet of paper on top of the
transparent type such as a document when scanning.
transparency film.
The document is Load the document correctly.
misaligned.
Reference
z
Refer to "Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document guides on Load the document correctly, and align
the document feeder are the document guides to the document.
not set in the correct
positions. Reference
z Refer to "Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document is a non- Specify the document size.
standard size.
Reference
z
Refer to "Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document is folded. Flatten the curl and load the document
again.

Reference
z Refer to "Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The image is not [Color Scanning] is set to Set [Color Scanning] to [Color].
scanned in color. [Black & White] or
[Grayscale]. Reference Problem Solving
z
Refer to "Scan" > "E-mail" in the User Guide.
The image is The resolution is too low. Set the resolution higher.
coarse.
Reference
z Refer to "Scan" > "Layout Adjustment" in the User
Guide.
Image is saved with high
compression.
Select a lower compression ratio in
[Quality/File Size].
15
Reference
z Refer to "Scan" > "E-mail Options/Filing Options" in
the User Guide.
Black-and-white [Black & White] is selected Set [Color Scanning] to [Grayscale].
gradation is not for [Color Scanning].
reproduced Reference
z Refer to "Scan" > "E-mail" in the User Guide.
properly.

485
 Problem Solving

Network-related Problems
This section describes how to resolve network related problems.

When using SMB

When SMB is used, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the remedy.

When you cannot communicate with other SMB machines

Cause Check point Remedy

If [Auto Master The machine or other SMB Confirm the setting of [Auto Master Mode] of
Mode] of SMB is machines cannot be SMB. If the setting is enabled, change it to
set to [On], the searched from the Network [Off].
number of Computers icon.
machines whose
information can
be stored is
limited. The
number depends
on the network
environment.

When using TCP/IP

The possible causes, check points, and remedies when using TCP/IP (LPD) are as follows:

Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2003,

Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012, or Windows
Server 2012 R2

„ When you cannot print

Cause Check point Remedy

Problem Solving

The IP address is Request your network Set a correct IP address on the machine.
incorrect. administrator to check the
machine's IP address.
The volume of Confirm the memory If the one file of print data exceeds the
the print data amount for the LPD spool memory amount, divide the file not to
sent in an and the volume of the exceed the amount.
instruction from print data transmitted by
15 a computer an instruction.
If the print data is divided into multiple
files and exceeds the memory amount,
exceeded the
decrease the number of files not to
maximum
exceed the amount.
receivable
volume when
the LPD spool is
set to memory
spool.

486
 Network-related Problems

Cause Check point Remedy

An Confirm whether any error Restart the machine. Wait until the screen
unrecoverable messages are displayed on completely goes out to switch on the
error occurred the control panel. machine power.
during the
printing process.
The machine is Confirm the transport Select the transport protocol
not set to th protocol selected on the corresponding to the computer.
etransport machine.
protocol
corresponding to
the computer.
The machine is - Set not to output Ctrl-D.
trying to process
a data format
that does not
match the data
format of the
print data
transmitted
from a
computer.

„ When print result is not what was expected

Cause Check point Remedy

Selected printer language Confirm the selected printer Select the printer language
on the machine does not language on the machine on the machine to match
match the printer language and the printer language of the print data.
of the print data. the print data.
The computer is not using Confirm whether the print On the computer, select the
the print driver supplied with driver on the computer is the print driver supplied with the
the machine (is using one supplied with the machine. If the print driver is
another company's print machine. not listed for selection,
driver). install the print driver and
then select it. Operation is
not guaranteed if another
company’s print driver is
used. Problem Solving

Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks,
and OS X 10.10 Yosemite

„ When you cannot print

15
Cause Check point Remedy
The LPD port is Confirm whether the LPD When printing with a printer detected by
not activated. port is activated. using Bonjour, Select the [Enabled] check
box of [LPD] to activate the port.

487
 Problem Solving

CentreWare Internet Services Problems

The possible symptoms and remedies for problems when using CentreWare Internet
Services are as follows:

Symptom Remedy
Cannot connect to CentreWare Is the machine working properly? Check whether the
Internet Services. machine is turned on.
Is the Internet Services (HTTP) port activated? Print a
Configuration Report to confirm.
Is the Internet address correctly entered?Confirm the
Internet address again. If the problem persists, enter an
IP address to connect to CentreWare Internet Services.
Is a proxy server being used?Depending on the proxy
server, connections may not be possible. Set the
browser to [Not using proxy server] or set that particular
address to [Not using a proxy server].
The [Please wait] message is Wait for a while as instructed.If the status does not
continuously displayed. change, click the [Refresh] button. If this does not
impart any effect, confirm whether the machine is
operating correctly.
The [Refresh] button is not Old information may be cached on your web browser.
functioning. Clear all the information cached on the web bowser.
Selecting the menu on the left Your browser may not support Centreware Internet
frame does not update the right Services.
frame contents.
The screen display isdistorted. Change the window size for the browser.
The latest information is Click the [Refresh] button.
notdisplayed.
Characters are not correctly Use language command.
displayed.
Pressing [Apply] does not apply Are the entered values correct? If a value outside of the
the new settings. permitted range is entered, the update will
automatically be made within the range.
This may occur when the control panel is being
operated or the operation has just been completed.
Problem Solving

When the automatic reset function is set, any setting

configure with CentreWare Internet Services is not
applied until setting the time set for automatic reset.
Wait until then.
The machine is in the Sleep mode. Press the <Power
Saver> button on the control panel of the machine to
exit the Power Saver mode.
15 When you click [Apply], Is the password correct? The entries for Password and
amessage such as “The server Confirm Password do not match. Enter the correct
has returned ineffective or password.
unrecognizable response” or “No
Restart the machine.
data” is displayed on the
browser.
Cannot delete jobs. Wait for a while, and click [Refresh].

488
 Network-related Problems

E-mail Features Problems

The possible symptoms and remedies for problems when using E-mail Notification Service,
the Print E-mail feature, the E-mail service, and Internet Fax service as follows:

Syptom Remedy
Cannot receive e-mail (Print E-mail, Is the e-mail address for the machine configured?
Internet Fax).
Is [Receive E-mail] set to [Enabled]?
Are settings such as the IP addresses for the SMTP server
and POP3 server (if POP3 is selected as the incoming mail
protocol) configured correctly?
Are the POP3 user name and password entered correctly?
Is [Domain Filtering] set?
Confirm whether your own domain is set to [Allow Domains],
on CentreWare Internet Services.
Are the SMTP server and/or POP server operating properly?
Consult your network administrator.
Cannot transmit e-mail (Email Is the E-mail address for the machine configured?
Notification Service, Internet Fax,
and Email).
Is [E-mail Notification Service] set to [Enabled]? (For E-mail
Notification Service)
Is [Send E-mail] set to [Enabled]?
Is the IP address for the SMTP server configured correctly?
Are the settings for notification of transmission configured
correctly? (for E-mail Notification Service)
Confirm the settings on the [Properties] tab of CentreWare
Internet Services.
Is the destination address entered correctly?
Is the SMTP server operating properly?
Consult your network administrator.

Internet/Intranet Connection Problems

The possible causes and remedies for problems when connecting to the Internet or intranet Problem Solving
are as follows:

When connection to the Internet/Intranet fails

Cause Remedy
The Authentication feature Only Basic Authentication is supported by the machine.
15
used on the remote server is not The machine does not support NTLM/digest.
supported by the machine. For security purposes, change to the Authentication
feature using SSL.
The remote linkage services Purchase products/models/accessories supported by
used does not support the the remote linkage services.
model or accessories of the
machine.

489
 Problem Solving

Cause Remedy
The IP address is incorrect. Confirm the IP address. If the IP address is incorrect,
either set a static IP address or resolve the IP address
using DHCP or AutoIP.
The IP gateway address is Set the correct IP gateway address when connecting to
incorrect. the proxy server, or to a Web server via the IP gateway.
The subnet mask is incorrect. Set the correct subnet mask corresponding to your
environment.
The DNS server address is Confirm the DNS server address.
incorrect.
The DNS server selected cannot Select a DNS server that can resolve the address.
resolve the address. z When connecting via the proxy server Set the IP

address of a DNS server that can resolve the address

of the proxy server.
z When not connecting via the proxy server Set the IP

address of a DNS server that can resolve the

destination address.
The address of the address that Confirm whether only addresses that do not use a proxy
does not use a proxy server is server are set. Even if addresses not through a proxy
incorrect. server are specified using the FQDN, if a server is
directly accessed using its IP address, the registered
server is not excluded. Set the address not to use a
proxy server. Likewise, even if you directly specify an
address that does not use a proxy server, if a server is
accessed with the FQDN, the registered server is not
excluded. Set an IP address with the FQDN not to use a
proxy server.
The desired server, or theproxy Confirm whether the desired server or the proxy server
server is down. is operating correctly.
The network cable is not Confirm whether the network cable is correctly
connected, or broken. connected. We recommend using a spanning-tree
configuration, with which network disconnection rarely
occurs.
Cannot communicate because Wait for a while and try accessing again.
of overloading of the server
application.
An error occurs that is not Even though an error occurs during background
Problem Solving

displayed on the control panel. processing, no message appears on the control panel.
Display the [Job Status] screen or print the Job History
Report to confirm the result.
Cannot access the proxy server, The following types of access control are used. Confirm
firewall, or Web server as a the configured access control.
result of access control. z
Address (port) restriction
z
SSL restriction
15 z
User access restriction (including access right levels)
z
Content block
z
Scheme restriction (cannot use HTTP etc.)
z
Transfer data size restriction
z
Method restriction (cannot use POST etc.)
z
HTTP header restriction (only accepting specified
browsers etc.)
z
Time restriction (only available during a specific
period of time etc.)

490
 Network-related Problems

When connection to a desired Web server fails

Cause Remedy
The setting to use the proxy In the environment using the proxy server, you must
server is not configured. configure the machine to use the proxy server to
connect to a desired Web server. Make sure that you
configure the settings to use the proxy server.
The setting to use a proxy server In an environment that does not use a proxy server,
is configured even though the such as when connecting to an intranet, do not make
environment doesnot use a the settings to use the proxy server.
proxy server.
The proxy server address When the settings to use a proxy server are configured,
isincorrect. you cannot connect to a desired Web server only if the
IP address of the proxy server is correct. Set the correct
IP address of the proxy server.
When the proxy server access Set the user name and password on the machine that
requires authentication, you allow connection to the proxy server.
cannot connect to the server
because the user name or
password is incorrect.

IPv4 and IPv6 Connection Problems

The possible causes and remedies for problems when using an IPv4 or IPv6 address are as
follows:

Unable to connect using an IPv4 address

Symptom Remedy
When 0 (zero) is prepended to Do not prepend 0 (zero) to each value of an IPv4
the head of a value for the IPv4 address.
address (for
example:192.0.2.010),
connection fails.

Unable to connect using an IPv6 address Problem Solving

Symptom Remedy
You cannot connect to the When you specify the machine's link-local address, a
machine with the link-local scope ID must be appended to the address. For
address. example, when you use Internet Explorer 7 on Windows
Vista to access the address "fe80::203:baff:fe48:9010", 15
you must append the Ethernet adapter local area
connection number (for example, 8) for Windows Vista
to the address as follows: fe80::203:baff:fe48:9010%8
The machine cannot connect to Assign a static IPv6 address to the computer running
a computer running Windows Windows OS that supports IPv6.Then, register the IPv6
OS that supportsIPv6. address on the machine as host address to allow
communication.

491
 Problem Solving

Symptom Remedy
A device outside the router When searching for a device outside the router via SMB,
cannot be searched. directly specify the address. Multicasting is supported
only within a local link (FF02::1).
When SSL is enabled on When SSL is enabled, directly specify "https://[IPv6
CentreWare Internet Services, address]".
even if you specify "http://[IPv6
address]", you are not redirected
to "https://[IPv6 address]".

Unable to print using an IPv6 address

Symptom Remedy
On an IPv6 network without a Register the computer name of the machine on the
DNS server, a computer running "hosts" file stored on the computer running Windows
Windows OS that supports IPv6 OS that supports IPv6. For example, register in the
cannot be connected to a following file: C:\Windows\system32\driver\etc\hosts
Windows shared printer.

Unable to scan using an IPv6 address

Symptom Remedy
When the machine is configured Assign a global address to the machine.
with only a linklocal address, file
transfer fails.
When you specify the computer Scan data cannot be transferred with SMB if a
name on a storage destination destination server is specified using the computer
server of the Scan to PC (SMB) name. Use the IPv6 format to specify the server.
service inan IPv6 environment
without a DNS server, scan data
cannot be transferred.
The machine does not operate In an IPv6 environment, use a DNS server and specify a
correctly if the Internet Fax destination using a fully qualified domain name
direct destination is specified in (FQDN).
IPv6 address literal format.
Problem Solving

Example:
csw@[ipv6:2001:db8::1]
The machine does not operate In an IPv6 environment, use a DNS server and specify
correctly if the mail address for an emailaddress using the FQDN.
the E-mail service is specified in
IPv6 address literal format.
Example:
15 csw@[ipv6:2001:db8::1]

492
 Network-related Problems

Other problems on IPv6 addresses

Symptom Remedy
In an IPv6 network with no DNS Directly specify the IPv6 address to specify the
server installed, authentication computer name of an authentication server.
fails if an SMB authentication
server is specified using the
computer name.
IPv6 addresses are not correctly Use an IPv4 network for correct logging.
recorded on output job logs.

Problem Solving

15

493
 Problem Solving

Media Print - Text Trouble

The possible symptoms, causes, and remedies for problems when using Media Print - Text
are as follows.

Symptom Cause Remedy

[Media Print - The optional software, Properly set the software option, or
Text] is not USB Memory Kit (optional) disconnect the USB cable, and then
displayed on the is not recognized by the securely insert the USB cable into the
Services Home machine. connector.
screen.
Problem Solving

15

494
 Media Print - Photos Trouble

Media Print - Photos Trouble

The possible symptoms, causes, and remedies for problems when using Media Print - Photos
are as follows:

Symptom Cause Remedy

[Media Print - The USB Memory Kit Properly set the software option, or
Photos] is not (optional) is not disconnect the USB cable and then
displayed on the recognized by the securely insert the USB cable into the
Services Home machine. connector.
screen.
A blank sheet of Files that cannot be Files that cannot be printed (image files in
paper is output. printed (image files in other than DCF1.0 format) are not printed
other than DCF1.0 format) with index printing. Specify printing
are included among the again, excluding the images not displayed
files specified for printing. for index printing.

Note
z Editing or saving DCF 1.0-format image
files on a computer makes those files’
format other than DCF1.0.

Problem Solving

15

495
 Problem Solving

Error Code
This section describes error codes.
An error message and error code (***-***) are displayed on the touch screen if printing
terminated abnormally because of an error, or a malfunction occurred in the machine.
For faxing, an error code is also displayed on an Activity Report and a Transmission Report -
Job Undelivered.
Refer to the error codes in the following table to resolve problems.
Important
z If an error code is displayed, any print data remaining in the machine and information stored in the
machine's memory is not secured.
If an error code is displayed that is not listed in the following table, or if you cannot resolve
an error despite following the instructions described in the table, contact our Customer
Support Center. The contact number is printed on the label or card attached to the
machine.

Error Code Cause and Remedy

003-311 [Cause] An error occurred.
003-318 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
003-319 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
003-320 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
003-321 Center.
003-322
003-323
003-324
003-325
003-326
003-327
003-328
003-329
003-330
003-331
003-332
003-333
Problem Solving

003-334
003-335
003-336
003-337
003-338
003-339
15 003-340
003-341
003-342
003-343
003-344
003-345
003-346

496
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

003-700 [Cause] Too many documents are set in the document feeder after
clearing the paper jam.
[Remedy] Check the output, and then replace the documents that have
not been copied yet.
003-701 [Cause] A digital code is embedded in the document to restrict
duplication.
[Remedy] Use a document in which no digital code is embedded.
003-702 [Cause] You tried to copy sides 1 and 2 of a document simultaneously
specifying different Reduce/Enlarge ratio for each side.
[Remedy] Specify the same Reduce/Enlarge ratio for both sides.
003-703 [Cause] The Calibration Chart is not detected correctly.
[Remedy] Place the Calibration Chart properly.
003-704 [Cause] An error is found in the calibration pattern read, and the
machine may be out of order.
[Remedy] Execute the calibration again. If the error is not still resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
003-705 [Cause] Copying is started before the machine exits the Power Saver
mode and detects the change for the tray size, when the paper
size set in the tray that has been changed during the Power
Saver mode.
[Remedy] Cancel copying, and perform the operation for copying again.
003-750 [Cause] Unable to store any documents using the 2 Sided Book Copying
feature.
[Remedy] Check the 2 Sided Book Copying settings.

Reference
z Refer to "3 Copy" > "Layout Adjustment" in the User Guide.

003-751 [Cause] Unable to process the document because the specified scan
area is too small.
[Remedy] Increase the resolution or scan area.
003-752 [Cause] A mix sized document was to be scanned at 600 dpi in Color/2
sided.
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [400dpi] or lower, and try scanning again. Problem Solving

003-753 [Cause] A mix sized document was to be scanned at high resolution, 2

sided.
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [200dpi], and scan the document again.
003-754 [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.
003-755 [Remedy] Execute the job again.
15
003-756 [Cause] The faxed document is completely blank.
[Remedy] Check whether the document is blank or whether the side of the
document to be faxed is loaded correctly.
003-757 [Cause] A mix sized document was to be scanned at high resolution, 2
sided.
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [300dpi] or lower, and scan the document
again.

497
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

003-760 [Cause] An incompatible combination of feature is specified for
document scan conditions.
[Remedy] Confirm the selected options.
003-761 [Cause] The paper size of the tray selected for auto tray differs from the
paper size of the tray selected for Auto Paper selection.
[Remedy] Change the paper size for the tray, or change the [Paper Type
Priority] settings.
003-763 [Cause] An error occurred when reading the Calibration Chart.
[Remedy] Place the Calibration Chart correctly on the document glass.

Reference
z Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.103).

003-780 [Cause] Failed to compress the scanned document.

[Remedy] Reduce the resolution or the ratio for [Reduce/Enlarge] to
decrease the data size, or split the data to send it separately.
003-795 [Cause] When enlarging/reducing a scanned document to the paper size
specified, the reduction/enlargement ratio exceeds the allowed
range.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Manually enter a reduction/enlargement ratio.

z
Change the paper size.
005-275 [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.
005-280 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
005-500 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
005-288 [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
010-327 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
010-328 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
010-329 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
Problem Solving

010-331 is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.

010-332
010-333
010-334
010-335
010-337
15 010-379 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.

498
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

012-210 [Cause] Finisher malfunction
012-211 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
012-212 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
012-213 is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
012-221
012-223
012-224
012-231
012-243
012-249 [Cause] Finisher malfunction
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
012-259 [Cause] Finisher malfunction
012-260 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
012-261 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
012-263 is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
012-265
012-268
012-269
012-280
012-282
012-283
012-284
012-291 [Cause] The finisher front cover is open.
012-295 [Remedy] Close the finisher front cover. If the error still is not resolved,
012-296 contact our Customer Support Center.
012-334 [Cause] An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
012-350 [Cause] An error occurred in the finisher.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
013-210 [Cause] An error occurred in the Booklet Unit.
013-211 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
013-212 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
013-213 is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center. 15
013-220

499
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-210 [Cause] An error occurred in the software.
016-211 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
016-212 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
016-213 is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-214
016-215
016-216
016-217
016-218
016-219
016-220 [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.
016-221 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
016-222 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
016-223 is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-224
016-225
016-226
016-227
016-228
016-229 [Cause] An error occurred in the software
016-230 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-232 [Cause] An error occurred during initialization of the high compression
board.Otherwise, the high compression board is not supported
on your machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-233 [Cause] An error occurred in the software.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
Problem Solving

016-234 [Cause] An error occurred in the Authentication feature of the machine.

016-235 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
016-236 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
016-237 is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-238
016-239
15 016-240 [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-242 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.

500
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-310 [Cause] An error occurred.
016-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
016-312 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
016-313 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
016-314 Center.
016-315
016-316
016-317
016-318
016-319
016-321
016-322
016-323
016-325
016-326
016-327
016-330 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
016-331 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
016-332 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
016-335 [Cause] An error occurred.
016-336 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
016-337 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
016-338 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
016-339 Center.
016-340
016-341
016-342

Problem Solving

15

501
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-345 [Cause] An error occurred.
016-347 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
016-348 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
016-350 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
016-351 Center.
016-353
016-354
016-355
016-356
016-357
016-358
016-359
016-360
016-361
016-362
016-363
016-364
016-365
016-366
016-367
016-368
016-369
016-370
016-371
016-346 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device
connected.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
016-372 [Cause] An error occurred.
016-373 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
016-374 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
016-375 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Problem Solving

016-376 Center.
016-377
016-378
016-379
016-380
016-381
15 016-382
016-400 [Cause] The user name or password for 802.1x authentication does not
match in the setting of Ethernet1.
[Remedy] Confirm and correctly enter the user name or password in the
setting of Ethernet1. If the error still is not resolved, check
whether the network environment is set correctly.

502
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-401 [Cause] The 802.1x authentication method cannot be processed in the
setting of Ethernet1.
[Remedy] Set the authentication method of the machine to the same
method as set for the authentication server in the setting of
Ethernet1.
016-402 [Cause] The authentication connection of Ethernet1 timed out.
[Remedy] Confirm the network connection and switch setting of the
authentication device physically connected to the machine via
a network, and check whether it is connected to the machine
correctly.
016-403 [Cause] The root certificate of Ethernet1 did not match.
[Remedy] Confirm the authentication server and store the root certificate
of the server certificate of the authentication server into the
machine. If you cannot acquire the root certificate of the server
certificate, set [Server Certificate Verification] of [IEEE 802.1x
Settings] of Ethernet1 to [Disabled] on the touch screen.
016-404 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
016-405 [Cause] An error occurred in the certificate stored in the machine.
[Remedy] Initialize the certificate.

Reference
z For more information on initializing certificates, refer to "Maintenance" (P.166).

016-406 [Cause] An error occurred in the SSL client certificate.

[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
1) Store an SSL client certificate in the machine, and set it as the
SSL client certificate.
2) If an SSL client certificate cannot be set on the machine,
select an option other than [EAP-TLS] in [Authentication
Method].
016-407 [Cause] After automatically obtained the IP address, the machine failed
016-408 to retrieve proxy server settings from the DHCP server.
016-409 [Remedy] Modify the customized program and install it again. Problem Solving
016-410
016-411
016-412
016-421 [Cause] A paper tray is removed from the machine.
[Remedy] Insert the removed paper tray to the machine.
016-427 [Cause] The user name or password for 802.1x authentication did not
match in the setting of Ethernet2.
15
[Remedy] Confirm and correctly enter the user name or password in the
setting of Ethernet2. If the error still is not resolved, check
whether the network environment is set correctly.

503
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-428 [Cause] The 802.1x authentication method cannot be processed in the
setting of Ethernet2.
[Remedy] Set the authentication method of the machine to the same
method as set for the authentication server in the setting of
Ethernet2.
016-429 [Cause] The authentication connection of Ethernet2 timed out.
[Remedy] Confirm the network connection of Ethernet2 and switch
setting of the authentication device physically connected to the
machine via a network, and check whether it is connected to the
machine correctly.
016-430 [Cause] The user name or password for 802.1x authentication did not
match in the setting of Ethernet2.
[Remedy] Confirm and correctly enter the user name or password in the
setting of Ethernet2. If the error still is not resolved, check
whether the network environment is set correctly.
016-431 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
016-432 [Cause] An error occurred in the SSL client certificate of Ethernet2.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Store an SSL client certificate in the machine to set the SSL

client certificate.
z
If an SSL client certificate cannot be set on the machine,
select an option other than [EAP-TLS] in [Authentication
Method].
016-450 [Cause] The SMB host name already exists.
[Remedy] Change the host name.

Reference
z
Refer to "Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.205).

016-453 [Cause] Updating of the IPv6 address and host name for the DNS server
failed.
[Remedy] Check whether the IP address of the DNS server is set correctly.
Problem Solving

016-454 [Cause] Unable to retrieve the IP address from DNS.

[Remedy] Confirm the DNS configuration and IP address retrieve setting.

Reference
z Refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.200).

016-455 [Cause] Connection to the SNTP server timed out.

15 [Remedy] Confirm the network cable connection and the IP address of the
SNTP server are correct.

Reference
z
Refer to "Machine Clock/Timers" (P.146).

016-456 [Cause] Received a message from the SNTP server stating that the
server is not synchronized with the standard time source.
[Remedy] Confirm the SNTP server settings.

Reference
z
Refer to "Machine Clock/Timers" (P.146).

504
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-461 [Cause] When [Assurance Level] under the [Transfer Image Log] is set to
[High], you may not be able to create a new job because of a
restriction resulting from the congestion of unforwarded image
logs.
[Remedy] Confirm the status of the server managing the image logs and
the network status, and eliminate the source obstructing image
log forwarding to the image log server.
Take one of the following measures:
z
Confirm the forwarding settings, and then forward all un-
forwarded logs.
z
Change the [Assurance Level] to [Low]. In this case, the
image logs may not be forwarded and may be deleted
successively.
When using the Image Log Kit (PostScript), and you switch the
machine power off and then on, or when the machine restarts
automatically, switch off the machine power, make sure that
the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine
power.
016-500 [Cause] An error occurred.
016-501 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
016-502 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
016-503 [Cause] Unable to resolve the SMTP server name when sending.
[Remedy] Check on CentreWare Internet Services whether the SMTP
server settings are correct. Also, confirm whether the DNS server
settings are correct.
016-504 [Cause] Unable to resolve the POP3 server name when sending.
[Remedy] Check on CentreWare Internet Services whether the POP3 server
settings are correct. Also, confirm whether the DNS server
settings are correct.
016-505 [Cause] Unable to log into the POP3 server when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Check on CentreWare Internet Services whether the user name
and password used on the POP3 server are correct.
Problem Solving
016-506 [Cause] Unable to write the image log because the image log storage
space is insufficient on the machine.
[Remedy] Execute the job again. If the error still is not resolved, take one
of the following measures:
z
Delete unnecessary image logs
z Change the [Assurance Level] for image logs to [Low]

In this case, the contents of the logs are not secured. 15

016-507 [Cause] When using the Image Log Control feature, failed to forward
the image log to the server.
[Remedy] Either set the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to
the machine, or set [Transfer Image Log] to [Disabled].
016-508 [Cause] When using the Image Log Control feature, failed to forward
the image log to the server.
[Remedy] Set the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to the
machine.

505
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-509 [Cause] When using the Image Log Control feature, failed to forward
the image log to the server because the forwarding rule for
image logs from the server to the machine has not been set.
[Remedy] Either set the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to
the machine, or set [Transfer Image Log] to [Disabled].
016-510 [Cause] When using the Image Log Control feature, failed to forward
the image log to the server because the forwarding rule for
image logs from the server to the machine has not been set.
[Remedy] Set the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to the
machine.
016-511 [Cause] When using the Image Log Control feature, failed to forward
016-512 the image log to the server because the forwarding rule for
image logs from the server to the machine has not been set
correctly.
[Remedy] Confirm the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to
the machine.
016-513 [Cause] An error occurred in connecting to the SMTP server.Probable
causes are as follows:
1) The SMTP server or network may be overloaded.
2) The source port number for SMTP is incorrect.
[Remedy] For 1), wait for a while, and then execute the operation again.
For 2), confirm whether the source port number for SMTP is
correct.
016-514 [Cause] An error occurred during processing of an XPS document.
[Remedy] If an error occurred while printing from a driver which supports
XPS, print from the application using another print driver (PCL,
etc.).
If an error occurred while direct printing an XPS document (such
as ContentsBridge Utility, E-mail, and Media Print - Text), print
using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from XPS Document Viewer.

Note
z
XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

016-515 [Cause] There was insufficient memory during processing of an XPS

Problem Solving

document.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Set [Image Quality] to [Standard]
z Increase the amount of memory

z Print using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from XPS Document

Viewer.

15 Reference
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

Note
z For more information on [Image Options], refer to the help of the print driver.

506
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-516 [Cause] The Print Ticket included in the XPS document includes an
invalid description or a print setting not supported by the
machine.
[Remedy] Check whether there is a problem with the method of using the
application that sent the print job, or with the content of the
print instruction.
If your application usage and print instruction are correct, check
with the application manufacturer that sent the print job for
operations of the application, not with Fuji Xerox.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.

Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

016-517 [Cause] There is an error in the content described in the PostScript file.
[Remedy] Print with the PostScript driver. Furthermore, modify
ProcessColorModel described in the PostScript file so that the
color mode does not change.
016-518 [Cause] With the PostScript driver, booklet and Watermark were
specified at the same time.
[Remedy] With the PostScript driver, specifying a combination of booklet
and Watermark/UUID is not possible. Cancel one of them.
016-519 [Cause] The number of pages reached the maximum number of pages
specified, and the print job is terminated.
[Remedy] Have your system administrator change the maximum limit of
printable pages.
016-520 [Cause] An error occurred in the high compression hardware.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. Also change the output file format
and color mode.
If the problem is not resolved, switch off the machine power,
make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the
machine power. And then perform the above operation again.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Problem Solving
016-521 [Cause] The IC Card Reader(optional) is disconnected from the machine
while scanning the data with digital signature.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power and connect the IC Card Reader,
and then switch on the machine power.
016-522 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. Unable to acquire an SSL
client certificate.
[Remedy] The LDAP server is requesting an SSL client certificate. Set an 15
SSL client certificate on the machine.
016-523 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate data
is incorrect.
[Remedy] The machine cannot trust the SSL certificate of the LDAP server.
Register the root certificate for the LDAP server's SSL certificate
to the machine.

507
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-524 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate will
expire soon.
[Remedy] Change the SSL certificate of the LDAP server to a valid one. You
can clear this error by selecting [Disabled] for [LDAP - SSL/TLS
Communication] under [SSL/TLS Settings] on the machine;
however, note that selecting this option does not ensure the
validity of the LDAP server.
016-525 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate has
expired.
[Remedy] Change the SSL certificate of the LDAP server to a valid one. You
can clear this error by selecting [Disabled] for [LDAP - SSL/TLS
Communication] under [SSL/TLS Settings] on the machine;
however, note that selecting this option does not ensure the
validity of the LDAP server.
016-526 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server name does not
match the certificate.
[Remedy] Set the same LDAP server address to the machine and to the
SSL certificate of the LDAP server. You can clear this error by
selecting [Disabled] for [LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication] under
[SSL/TLS Settings] on the machine; however, note that selecting
this option does not ensure the validity of the LDAP server.
016-527 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. This is an SSL
authentication internal error.
[Remedy] An error occurred in the software. Contact our Customer
Support Center.
016-528 [Cause] You are logged out of the smart card authentication mode while
scanning the data with a digital signature.
[Remedy] Log in to the machine with the smart card, and then execute the
operation again.
016-529 [Cause] An error occurred when connecting to the Remote Download
server. There was no response from the server within the
specified time (45 seconds).
[Remedy] Confirm the network connection. Check whether the Remote
Download server is correctly set on the network.
Problem Solving

016-533 [Cause] Kerberos server authentication protocol error

[Remedy] The time difference between the machine and the Kerberos
server exceeded the clock skew limit value set on the Kerberos
server. Check whether the clocks on the machine and Kerberos
server are correctly set. Also check whether the summer time
and the time zone are correctly set on the machine and
Kerberos server.
15 016-534 [Cause] Kerberos server authentication protocol error
[Remedy] The domain set on the machine does not exist on the Kerberos
server, or the Kerberos server address set on the machine is
invalid for connection. Check whether the domain name and
the server address have been correctly set on the machine. For
connection to Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 Server, specify
the domain name in uppercase.

508
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-535 [Cause] The specified file does not exist on the Remote Download
server.
[Remedy] Confirm the file.
016-536 [Cause] An error occurred when accessing the DNS prior to connecting
to the Remote Download server.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection with the DNS. Also check whether the
Remote Download server name is registered to the DNS.
016-537 [Cause] Could not connect to the Remote Download server. The port of
the destination Remote Download server is not open.
[Remedy] Confirm the port in the network settings.
016-538 [Cause] An error occurred when writing the remote download file to the
hard disk. The file obtained from the Remote Download server
could not be written to the hard disk.
[Remedy] Confirm the amount of available space, and delete files that are
no longer required. Alternatively, replace the hard disk.
016-539 [Cause] Kerberos server authentication protocol error
[Remedy] An error occurred in the software. Contact our Customer
Support Center.
016-543 [Cause] The specified domain was deleted from ApeosWare
Authentication Management(sold separately) and ApeosWare
Authentication Agent(sold separately).
[Remedy] Select [Refresh] on the [Domain] screen, and update the
domain information, or add the domain to ApeosWare
Authentication Management(sold separately) and ApeosWare
Authentication Agent.
016-545 [Cause] The specified domain was deleted from ApeosWare
Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication
Agent(sold separately).
[Remedy] Adjust the times of the computer of the active directory and the
computer on which ApeosWare Authentication Management or
ApeosWare Authentication Agent is installed. Also, if the
Windows Time Service of the computer on which
Authentication Agent is installed has stopped, start the service.

Reference Problem Solving

z For more information on the process, refer to the manual for the Authentication Agent.

016-546 [Cause] A Local User tried to obtain the information of another user.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
016-555 [Cause] Connection to ApeosWare Authentication Management or
ApeosWare Authentication Agent to the database or the active
directory timed out. 15
[Remedy] Check whether you can connect from ApeosWare
Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication
Agent to the database or the active directory.

Reference
z For more information on the process, refer to the manual for ApeosWare Authentication
Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent.

509
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-556 [Cause] Connection to ApeosWare Authentication Management or
ApeosWare Authentication Agent to the database timed out
because of an overload.
[Remedy] Because the service is overloaded, wait for a while, and then
execute authentication again. If the error still is not resolved,
check ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare
Authentication Agent.

Reference
z For more information on the process, refer to the manual for ApeosWare Authentication
Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent.

016-557 [Cause] Authentication Agent internal error occurred.

[Remedy] Check ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare
Authentication Agent.

Reference
z
For more information on the process, refer to the manual for ApeosWare Authentication
Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent.

016-558 [Cause] The machine received an unknown error from ApeosWare

Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication
Agent.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
016-559 [Cause] A remote download parameter error occurred. An invalid value is
set for essential system data.
[Remedy] Confirm the settings for essential system data.
016-560 [Cause] A communications error occurred between the machine and
ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare
Authentication Agent (sold separately).
[Remedy] Check whether the network cable is connected, and confirm the
settings of ApeosWare Authentication Management or
ApeosWare Authentication Agent. Also, print a Configuration
Report, and if the DNS address of the server is set to "Server
Name / IP Address" for "Authentication Agent", check whether
DNS is enabled.
016-562 [Cause] Multiple entries containing the same smart card information
were found in the guest database of Active Directory,
Problem Solving

ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare

Authentication Agent.
[Remedy] Correct the guest database entries of Active Directory,
ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare
Authentication Agent so that they do not contain the same
smart card information.

15 016-564 [Cause] Failed to authenticate the Remote Download server.

[Remedy] Confirm the login name and password to access the Remote
Download server. If the error still is not resolved, contact the
Customer Support Center.
016-569 [Cause] Authentication Agent error
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.

510
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-574 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because the host or server name of the FTP server could
not be resolved when accessing the DNS server.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection to the DNS server. Check whether the
FTP server name is registered correctly on the DNS server.
016-575 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because the DNS server address was not registered on
the machine.
[Remedy] Specify the correct DNS server address. Or, specify the
destination FTP server by using its IP address.
016-576 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because it could not connect to the FTP server.
[Remedy] Ensure that both the destination FTP server and the machine
are available for network communications, by checking the
following conditions:
z
The IP address of the server is set correctly.
z
The network cables are plugged in securely.
016-577 [Cause] Unable to connect to the FTP service of the destination server.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Check whether the FTP service of the server is activated.
z Check whether the FTP port number of the server is correctly

registered on the machine.

016-578 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because of unsuccessful login to the FTP server.
[Remedy] Check whether the login name (user name) and password are
correct.
016-579 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because the scanned image could not be saved in the
FTP server after connection.
[Remedy] Check whether the FTP server’s save location is correct.
016-580 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because the file or folder name on the FTP server could
not be retrieved after connection.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege for the FTP server. Problem Solving

016-581 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because the suffix of the name of the file or folder
exceeded the limit value when the machine was connected to
the server and the name of a file or folder on the server was
determined.
[Remedy] Change the file name or forwarding destination folder of the
scan server. Also try moving or deleting the files within the
15
forwarding destination folder.

511
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-582 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because files could not be created on the FTP server
after connection.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Check whether the specified file name can be used in the
save location.
z
Check whether enough space is available in the save
location.
016-583 [Cause] Failed to create the lock directory in the FTP server while
transferring data using FTP of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z If the lock directory (*.LCK) exists in the destination, delete it

manually, and then execute the operation again.

z
Check whether the specified name is available in the save
location.
z
Confirm that the specified name is not duplicated in the save
location.
z Check whether enough space is available in the save

location.
016-584 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because folders could not created on the FTP server after
connection.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Check whether the specified folder name can be used in the

save location.
z
Check whether the same folder name exists in the save
location.
z
Check whether enough space is available in the save
location.
016-585 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because files could not be deleted on the FTP server
after connection.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege for the FTP server.
016-586 [Cause] The machine failed to delete the lock directory while
transferring data using FTP of the Scan to PC service.
Problem Solving

[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:

z Confirm the access privilege for the server.

z If the lock directory (*.LCK) exists in the destination, delete it

manually, and then execute the operation again.

016-587 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because folders could not be deleted on the FTP server
15 after connection.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege for the FTP server.
016-588 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because the data could not be written on the FTP server
after connection.
[Remedy] Check whether enough space is available in the save location.

512
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-589 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because the data could not be read from the FTP server
after connection.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege for the FTP server.
016-590 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because there are duplicate file names.
[Remedy] Set [Do Not Save] for the action for file name conflict.
016-591 [Cause] The machine failed to perform the additional processing for the
file name conflict using FTP of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] If [Add to Existing Folder] is set for the additional processing for
file name conflict, confirm that the file format is not multi-page.
016-592 [Cause] The machine failed to access the NEXTNAME.DAT file using FTP
of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] When [Add to Existing Folder] is set as the process to be
executed in case of a file name duplication, check the
NEXTNAME.DAT file is correct.
016-593 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because an internal error occurred after connection to
the FTP server.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
016-594 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
016-595 service because a network error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
016-596 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because a network error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
016-597 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because a network error occurred.
[Remedy] Stop all accesses from the other devices, and then execute the
operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
Problem Solving
Customer Support Center.
016-598 [Cause] The size of an e-mail page exceeds the maximum message size
016-599 because of page splitting.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Reduce the file size for [Quality/File Size].

z Increase the value for [Maximum Split Count].

Reference
15
z
For more information on [Quality/File Size], refer to "Scan" > "E-mail Options/Filing Options" >
"Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning)" in the User Guide.
z
For more information on [Maximum Split Count], refer to "E-mail Control"
(P.262).

513
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-700 [Cause] The job was suspended because the number of the digits for the
Secure Print or Charge Print passcode set on the print driver was
less than the value specified in [Minimum Passcode Length for
Stored Job] on the machine.
[Remedy] On the print driver, set the passcode string equal to or longer
than the value specified in [Minimum Passcode Length for
Stored Job].
016-701 [Cause] Unable to process print data because of insufficient memory.
[Remedy] Stop unnecessary ports or delete unnecessary data to increase
memory.
016-702 [Cause] Unable to process print data because of insufficient print page
buffer.
016-703 [Cause] The machine received an e-mail specified with an invalid folder
number.
[Remedy] For errors occurring during fax or Internet fax transmission:
Contact our Customer Support Center.For errors occurring
during e-mail/fax/Internet fax reception:Take one of the
following measures:Register the specified folder number, and
request the sender to send the e-mail/fax/Internet fax
again.Request the sender to send to an available folder.If the
error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-704 [Cause] The folder is full, and hard disk capacity is insufficient.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary files from the folder, and save the file.

Reference
z Refer to "Send from Folder" > "Checking/Operating Files in a Folder in the User Guide.

016-705 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:

1) You have specified the machine for the folder registry for the
scanned document. However, the Scanner Kit (optional) is not
installed.
2) You have not used the print driver for the machine.
[Remedy] For 1), press the <Services Home> button, and check whether
[Scan to PC] is displayed. If [Scan to PC] is displayed, then check
whether the scanned document can be stored in a folder. If
unable to store it in the folder, install the Scanner Kit (optional).
Problem Solving

For 2), use the print driver appropriate for the machine.
016-706 [Cause] The hard disk space is insufficient because the number of
Secure Print users exceeded the maximum limit.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary files from the machine, and delete
unnecessary Secure Print users.
15 Reference
z For more information on deleting users for Secure Print files, refer to "Job Status" > "Printing
and Deleting Stored Jobs", and on folders, refer to "Send from Folder" > "Checking/Operating
Files in a Folder" in the User Guide.

016-707 [Cause] Unable to print with the Sample Set feature because the hard
disk is not installed.
[Remedy] To use the Sample Set feature, the hard disk must be installed.
Contact our Customer Support Center.

514
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-708 [Cause] Unable to annotate because of insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk
space.
016-709 [Cause] An error occurred during print processing.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
016-710 [Cause] Unable to register the Delayed Print document because of hard
disk malfunction.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
016-711 [Cause] The upper limit for the e-mail size has been exceeded.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures, and then try sending the
mail again.
z
Reduce the number of pages of the document.
z
Lower the resolution with [Resolution].
z Reduce the magnification with [Reduce/Enlarge].

z
Ask your system administrator to increase the value set for
[Maximum Total Data Size].
016-712 [Cause] Unable to process the document because the specified scan
area is too small.
[Remedy] Increase the resolution or scan area.
016-713 [Cause] The passcode entered does not match the passcode set on the
folder.
[Remedy] Enter the correct passcode.
016-714 [Cause] The specified folder does not exist.
[Remedy] Create a new folder or specify an existing folder.
016-715 [Cause] The machine failed to access the ESCP form because the
password of the ESCP form does not match.
[Remedy] Enter the correct password of the ESCP form.
016-716 [Cause] Unable to spool TIFF file because of insufficient hard disk
space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary files and users from the machine.

Reference Problem Solving

z
Refer to "Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs" in the User Guide.

016-717 [Cause] Unable to create a Transmission Report - Job Undelivered or a

Transmission Report because the transmission result
information required for creating the report is not stored in the
machine's memory.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Execute the jobs for large size Internet fax documents (about 15
2GB) by splitting each document to minimize memory or
HDD usage.
z
If many scan or Internet fax documents are being processed,
wait until the jobs are completed to execute a new job.
z
After completing the job that you want to confirm in a
report, do not execute 200 or more jobs before printing the
report.

515
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-718 [Cause] Unable to process the PCL print data because of insufficient
memory.
[Remedy] Reduce the resolution, or cancel 2 sided printing or N up feature,
and then print again.
016-719 [Cause] Unable to process the PCL print data because of insufficient
print page buffer.
[Remedy] Increase the size of the print page buffer.
016-720 [Cause] An invalid command is included in PCL print data.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data and try printing again.
016-722 [Cause] The specified staple position is not supported by the machine,
or the paper size specified is not supported by the finisher.
[Remedy] Confirm the staple position and the paper size, and try printing
again.
016-723 [Cause] The specified punch position is not supported by the machine,
or the paper size specified is not supported by the finisher.
[Remedy] Confirm the punch position and the paper size, and try printing
again.
016-724 [Cause] The specified staple and punch position combination is
unsupported.
[Remedy] Specify the staple and punch positions on the same side, and try
printing again.
016-725 [Cause] A scanned document stored in a folder was to be sent by fax
using the Job Flow feature, but the file in the folder could not be
converted to fax data.
[Remedy] Do not use the Job Flow feature. Simply scan the document
from the machine’s [Fax] screen to send it by fax.
016-726 [Cause] Unable to automatically select a printer language because
PostScript data was sent with no Adobe PostScript 3 Kit
(optional) installed.
[Remedy] The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) must be installed.
016-727 [Cause] A print job was cancelled without storing a file into a folder
because the file was determined as not containing any pages.
Problem Solving

[Remedy] The file could not be stored into the folder because the machine
determined the print file as not containing any pages. Disable
[Skip Blank Pages] on the [Advanced] tab on the print driver, or
add text to the file if the file is blank.
016-728 [Cause] An unsupported tag is included in the TIFF file.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data.
15 016-729 [Cause] Unable to print because the number of colors or the resolution
of the TIFF file exceeds the allowed range.
[Remedy] Change the number of colors or resolution for the TIFF file, and
execute the operation again.
016-731 [Cause] Unable to print TIFF data because it was interrupted.
[Remedy] Retry printing.

516
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-732 [Cause] The form specified by emulation has not been registered at the
host side.
[Remedy] Resend the form data.
016-733 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1) Unable to obtain the IP address (the string after "@" in the
destination e-mail address) when e-mail is sent.
2) DNS server was unable to resolve the Internet address (the
string after "@") by the DNS server when e-mail is sent.
[Remedy] For 1), confirm the e-mail address.
For 2), confirm the DNS server address.
016-735 [Cause] Attempted to print [Job Template List] while updating the job
template.
[Remedy] Retry printing after waiting for a while.
016-738 [Remedy] Specify a paper size supported for booklet creation, and try
printing again.
016-739 [Remedy] Specify a combination of document size and paper size
supported for booklet creation, and try printing again.
016-740 [Remedy] Specify a paper tray supported for booklet creation, and try
printing again.
016-741 [Cause] An error occurred during the update process of the machine.
016-742 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
016-743 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
016-744 is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-745
016-746 [Cause] An unsupported feature is included in the received PDF.
[Remedy] Print using a print driver.
016-747 [Cause] The memory became insufficient when using the Repeat Image
feature and the Annotations features simultaneously.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Increase the annotation image size.

z
Reduce the usage of Repeat Image.
016-748 [Cause] Unable to print because of insufficient hard disk space. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Reduce the number of print pages by dividing the print data or
by printing one copy at a time when printing multiple copies.
016-749 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows: For a print job:
1) The printer language received from the print driver is
unsupported by this machine.
For printing of a document received by Internet Fax:
2) The printer language of the document received from the
15
remote machine is unsupported by this machine.
[Remedy] For 1), use the machine’s print driver for printing. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
For 2), request the sender to send Internet fax documents using
a printer language supported by the machine.

517
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-750 [Cause] The machine received a printing job ticket with a PDF, an XPS
from an application (such as ContentsBridge) that allows direct
transmissions of files, but the printing job ticket data had a
grammar or print instruction unsupported by the machine.
[Remedy] Check whether you are correctly using the application (such as
ContentsBridge) and whether the print instruction was correct.
If your application usage and print instruction are correct, check
with the application manufacturer that sent the print job for
operations of the application.
If the error still is not resolved, have the Configuration Report,
the Job History Report, and the print data with the printing job
ticket ready, and contact our Customer Support Center.

Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

016-752 [Cause] Unable to process for PDF Bridge because of insufficient

memory space.
016-753 [Cause] The password entered does not match that of the PDF file.
[Remedy] Set the correct password on ContentsBridge.
016-755 [Cause] Attempted to process a print-protected PDF file.

[Remedy] Cancel the print protection using Adobe® Reader®, and try
printing again.
016-756 [Cause] Do not have permission to use the service.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator.
016-757 [Cause] The passcode is incorrect.
[Remedy] Enter the correct passcode.
016-758 [Cause] The division does not have permission to use the service.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator.
016-759 [Cause] The number of pages reached the maximum number of pages
for this service.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator.
016-760 [Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
Problem Solving

z Set [Image Quality] to [High Speed].

z Increase PostScript memory.

016-761 [Cause] An error occurred during image processing.

016-762 [Cause] The specified printer language is not installed on the machine.

016-763 [Cause] Unable to connect to the POP server.

15 [Remedy] Confirm the POP server IP address set on the machine.
016-764 [Cause] Unable to connect to the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Consult the SMTP server administrator.
016-765 [Cause] Unable to send the e-mail because the hard disk on the SMTP
server is full.
[Remedy] Consult the SMTP server administrator.
016-766 [Cause] An error occurred on the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Consult the SMTP server administrator.

518
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-767 [Cause] Unable to send the e-mail because the address is not correct.
[Remedy] Confirm the address, and try sending again.
016-768 [Cause] Unable to connect to the SMTP server because the machine's
mail address is incorrect.
[Remedy] Confirm the machine's mail address.
016-769 [Cause] The SMTP server does not support delivery receipts (DSN).
[Remedy] Send e-mail without setting delivery receipts (DSN).
016-770 [Cause] Direct Fax is restricted.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator whether Direct Fax is
available. If it is available, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-772 [Cause] The DNS server address is not set.
[Remedy] Set the DNS server address.
016-774 [Cause] Unable to process compression conversion because of
insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk
space.
016-775 [Cause] Unable to process image conversion because of insufficient
hard disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk
space.
016-776 [Cause] An error occurred during image conversion processing.
[Remedy] For errors occurring when forwarding with Store to Folder or
Internet Fax:
The image conversion processing for the part of the data may
be completed. Retrieve each converted page from the folder
using CentreWare Internet Services.
For more information, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings
Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.331).
For errors occurring after instructing encryption or signature
using a certificate:
Take one of the following measures:
Problem Solving
z Check whether the certificate is valid.

z Set the correct date and time on the machine.

For errors occurring when [Microsoft® Word] or [Microsoft®

Excel®] is selected for [File Format]: There are too many images
in the document. Select [Single File for Each Page] for [File
Format], or select [Picture Object] for [Image Area Format].
016-777 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during image processing. 15
[Remedy] The hard disk may be defective. To replace the hard disk,
contact our Customer Support Center.
016-778 [Cause] The conversion processing of the scanned image was
interrupted because of insufficient disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk
space.

519
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-779 [Cause] An error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.
[Remedy] Retry scanning. If using large-size paper such as A3 with
[Resolution] set to [600 dpi], specify [Resolution] to [400 dpi] or
lower in [Layout Adjustment]. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
016-780 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during scanned image conversion
processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk may be defective. To replace the hard disk,
contact our Customer Support Center.
016-781 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1) The mail server cannot be found during e-mail sending (TCP/
IP session establishment failed).
2) The machine received an SMTP server error from the mail
server during e-mail sending.
[Remedy] 1) Take one of the following measures:
z Check whether the network cables are plugged in
securely.
z
Check whether the IP address of the SMTP server
when an IP address is used for server
specification.
2) Enter the host name using ASCII characters.
Available ASCII characters are follows:
z
alphabets
z numerals
Check whether or not ASCII characters are used in [Tools] > [Connectivity
& Network Setup] > [Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name].
016-786 [Cause] When using the Scan feature, the machine could not write the
file to the hard disk.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch
screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power.
z Load paper on the paper tray as necessary.

z If the error occurs when sending an e-mail, take one of the

Problem Solving

following measures:
z Lower the resolution.
z
Reduce the size.
z
Reduce the number of pages, and divide the job into
several e-mails to send.

15 z
Send the job by setting [Color Scanning] to [Black & White].
016-788 [Cause] Failed to retrieve a file from the Web browser.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures, and then execute the
operation again:
z
Reload the browser page.
z Restart the browser.

z Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch

screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power.

520
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

016-790 [Cause] Unable to send an e-mail with Split Send because of exceeding
the maximum number of splits allowed.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Reduce the file size for [Quality/File Size].
z
Increase the value for [Maximum Split Count].

Reference
z For more information on [Quality/File Size], refer to "Scan" > "E-mail Options/Filing Options" >
"Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning)" in the User Guide.
z For more information on [Maximum Split Count], refer to "E-mail Control"
(P.262).

016-792 [Cause] Failed to acquire the specified job history when printing a Job
Report.
[Remedy] The specified job history does not exist.
016-794 [Cause] Media is not inserted correctly.
[Remedy] Check whether the media is inserted correctly.
016-795 [Cause] An error occurred when reading the data on the media.
016-796 [Remedy] On a computer, confirm the content recorded on the media.
016-797
016-798 [Cause] Unable to print a document because the hard disk is not
installed.
[Remedy] Install the hard disk, and try printing again. Contact our
Customer Support Center.
016-799 [Cause] An invalid print parameter is included in the print data of the
application, or the print data and the Print Setup settings may
not match.
[Remedy] Check the print data of the application and the Print Setup
settings, and try printing again.
017-700 [Cause] ThinPrint.Engine connection timed out.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection to the ThinPrint.Engine.
017-701 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to ThinPrint.Engine.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection to the ThinPrint.Engine.
017-702 [Cause] The data sent to ThinPrint.Engine is invalid. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Confirm the connection to the ThinPrint.Engine.
017-703 [Cause] The print data sent from ThinPrint.Engine exceeded the
maximum size of the machine.
[Remedy] Split the job, and try printing again.
017-704 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
15
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. Send the job
again.
017-705 [Cause] ThinPrint.Engine SSL authentication error.
017-706 [Remedy] Check the server certificate information (expiry date and
017-707 address) that is registered to ThinPrint.Engine.
017-708

521
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

017-709 [Cause] An SSL communication error occurred between ThinPrint Engine
and the machine.
[Remedy] Check the settings of the machine.
017-713 [Cause] The SMTP server does not support STARTTLS.
[Remedy] Change SSL/TLS communication setting to other than
[STARTTLS].
017-714 [Cause] SSL connection to the SMTP server failed.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the SMTP server supports SSL connection. If
the server supports it, check the port number of the SMTP server.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
017-715 [Cause] SMTP server SSL server authentication error. The server
certificate is invalid.
[Remedy] Use the valid SSL server certificate of the SMTP server. You can
avoid this error by setting [SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication] in
[SSL/TLS Settings] to [Disabled], however the validity of the
server cannot be warranted.
017-716 [Cause] SMTP server SSL server authentication error. It is before the
valid period of the server certificate.
[Remedy] Use the valid SSL server certificate of the SMTP server. You can
avoid this error by setting [SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication] in
[SSL/TLS Settings] to [Disabled], however the validity of the
server cannot be warranted.
017-717 [Cause] SMTP server SSL server authentication error. The server
certificate expired.
[Remedy] Use the valid SSL server certificate of the SMTP server. You can
avoid this error by setting [SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication]
under [SSL/TLS Settings] to [Disabled], however the validity of
the server cannot be warranted.
017-718 [Cause] SMTP server SSL server authentication error. The server name
and certificate do not match.
[Remedy] Use the valid SSL server certificate of the SMTP server. You can
avoid this error by setting [SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication] in
[SSL/TLS Settings] to [Disabled], however the validity of the
Problem Solving

server cannot be warranted.

017-719 [Cause] SMTP server SSL server authentication error. SSL authentication
internal error.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
017-723 [Cause] Character strings the DocuWorks Direct Print feature does not
15 support are used.
[Remedy] Print the file from DocuWorks Viewer via the PCL print driver.
017-724 [Cause] An error occurred while receiving a print job from Denshi- Pen.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the machine is compatible with Denshi- Pen.
When it is compatible, execute the operation again. If the error
still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.

522
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

017-725 [Cause] An error occurred while receiving a print job when the Force
Annotation is enabled.
[Remedy] Incorrect name is set for the template of the Force Annotation.
Confirm the name of the template registered in the machine.
017-729 [Cause] When the machine is used as a print job storage device, print
job sending was stopped temporarily because the number of
jobs in the machine exceeded the maximum receivable volume
or the space for spool data was insufficient.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Set to spool data to the hard disk from the setting of the
storage destination machine.
z
Set [IPP] under [Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory
Settings] to [Spool to Hard Disk] by CentreWare Internet
Services.
z Wait for a while and send the job again.

017-730 [Cause] When the machine is used as a print job storage device, the
computer failed to send a job to the machine because a
network error occurred.
[Remedy] Confirm the followings:
z The network cable is connected properly.

z
The storage destination machine is powered on.
z
The IPP port of the storage destination machine is enabled.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
017-731 [Cause] Unable to connect to the POP server.
[Remedy] Confirm the followings:
z The IP address of the POP server is set on the machine.

z
The network cable is connected properly.
017-732 [Cause] When the machine is used as a print job storage device, the
computer failed to send a job because the machine is off-line.
[Remedy] Press the <Machine Status> button of the storage destination
machine, and set [Print Mode] to [On-line] on the [Machine
Information] screen . If the error still is not resolved, contact our
Customer Support Center. Problem Solving
017-733 [Cause] When the machine is used as a print job storage device, an
internal error in the software is occurred while the job sending
to the machine.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
017-734 [Cause] An internal error occurred during processing the AirPrint/Mopria
data.
15
[Remedy] Send the print job again by using the printer driver or software
other than AirPrint/Mopria. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
017-735 [Cause] Device usage is prohibited.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.

523
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

017-737 [Cause] Data could not be sent due to memory capacity shortage.
[Remedy] Have your system administrator stop or delete the unnecesary
plug-ins. If the error still is not resolved, switch off the machine
power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then
switch on the machine power. If the same message is displayed
again, contact our Customer Support Center.
017-738 [Cause] Data could not be sent due to an internal error.
017-739 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
017-740 [Cause] Data could not be sent due to a plug-in acticvation failure.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
017-741 [Cause] The job flow cannot be activated.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Install the latest plug-in.

z
Confirm the jobflow settings.
017-742 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the forwarding server.
[Remedy] Check the network connection and the address of the
forwarding server.
017-743 [Cause] Cannot login to the forwarding server.
[Remedy] Confirm the user ID and the passwork.
017-744 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the forwarding server.
[Remedy] Confirm the followings: You can access to the same path using a
computer. There is enough memory capacity left in the storage
destination.
017-745 [Cause] Data could not be sent due to the lack of hard disk memory
capacity.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
Problem Solving

z
Send with lower resolution.
z Send in smaller size.

z Send with fewer pages by deviding the job.

z
Send with [Black & White] set as the [Output Color].
017-746 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
15 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
017-747 [Cause] Connection to ApeosWare Authentication Agent to the
database timed out because of an overload.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again. If the
same message is displayed again, contact our Customer
Support Center.

524
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

017-748 [Cause] Data could not be sent due to the incorrect machine setting.
[Remedy] Confirm the network setting of the machine.
017-749 [Cause] An error occurred.
[Remedy] Confirm the job flow settings.
017-750 [Cause] A plug-in error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, reinstall the plug-in.
017-751 [Cause] A plug-in error occurred.
[Remedy] Confirm the detail from [Transmission Report - Job Undelivered].
017-755 [Cause] Cannot download a software.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Confirm that [Enabled] is checked in CentreWare Internet
Services under [Properties] > [Services] > [Machine
Software]> [Upgrades].
z
Download the software through USB connection.
017-759 [Cause] An error occurred during firmware update in the machine.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
017-760 [Cause] An error occurred in connecting to the POP3 server.
Probable causes are follows.
1) When connecting to the POP3 server by the TLS
communication, the port number is incorrect.
2) When connecting to the POP3 server by the SSL
communication, an internal error occurred.
[Remedy] For 1), set the correct port number for the POP3 server.
For 2), switch off the machine power, make sure that the
touchscreen is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If
the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
017-761 [Cause] A SSL server authentication error occurred because the server
certificate for the POP3 server is invalid.
[Remedy] Use the valid server certificate for the POP3 server. Problem Solving

017-762 [Cause] The server certificate for the POP3 server is before the valid
period.
[Remedy] Be sure to match the time set on the POP3 server and the
machine. If the time matches, use the valid server certificate.
017-763 [Cause] The server certificate for the POP3 server is expired.
[Remedy] Be sure to match the time set on the POP3 server and the
15
machine. If the time matches, use the valid server certificate.
017-764 [Cause] The server addresses of the POP3 server and the server
certificate are not same.
[Remedy] Use the valid server certificate in which the correct server
address is written.

525
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

017-765 [Cause] An error occurred in connecting to the POP3 server.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
017-766 [Cause] An error occurred in connecting to the POP3 server.
Probable causes are follows.
1) When connecting to the POP3 server by the TLS
communication, the port number is incorrect.
2) When connecting to the POP3 server by the SSL
communication, an internal error occurred.
[Remedy] For 1), set the correct port number for the POP3 server.
For 2), switch off the machine power, make sure that the
touchscreen is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If
the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
017-767 [Cause] A SSL server authentication error occurred because the server
certificate for the POP3 server is invalid.
[Remedy] Use the valid server certificate for the POP3 server.
017-768 [Cause] The server certificate for the POP3 server is before the valid
period.
[Remedy] Be sure to match the time set on the POP3 server and the
machine. If the time matches, use the valid server certificate.
017-769 [Cause] The server addresses of the POP3 server and the server
certificate are not same.
[Remedy] Use the valid server certificate in which the correct server
address is written.
017-770 [Cause] An error occurred in connecting to the POP3 server.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
017-771 [Cause] An error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
017-772 [Cause] The scanned documents is completely blank.
Problem Solving

[Remedy] Take one of the following measures.

z
Check whether the document is blank or whether the side of
the document to be scanned is loaded correctly.
z Select [Image option] in the [Advanced Settings] screen and

set the scan density to be [Darken].

If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
15 Center.
017-780 [Cause] When [Enabled] is set to [Auto Job Promotion], a bypassed job
is automatically deleted after a certain period of time.
[Remedy] No measure is required.

Note
z If necessary, change the setting by set [Disabled] or specify the period of time
until a bypassed job is deleted between 1 minute and 120 hours.

526
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

017-782 [Cause] An internal error occurred during image processing. No measure
is required.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
017-783 [Cause] The memory became insufficient during image processing.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:

Note
z Transmit data with lower resolution.
z Transmit data in the setting [Output Color] to [Black & White].

017-784 [Cause] An internal error occurred during image processing.

017-785 [Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
017-786 contact our Customer Support Center.
017-787 [Cause] An error occurred while processing data from Google Cloud
Print.
[Remedy] Print by a method other than Google Cloud Print.
018-400 [Cause] Although IPsec is enabled, theIPsec settings are inconsistent.
z
Although [Authenticated by Preshared Key] is set in [IKE
Authentication Method], a passcode is not set.
z Although [Authenticated by Digital Signature] is set in [IKE

Authentication Method], an IPsec certificate is not set.

[Remedy] Remove the inconsistency of the IPsec settings, and enable
IPsec again.
z
When [Authenticated by Preshared Key] is set in [IKE
Authentication Method], set the passcode.
z
When [Authenticated by Digital Signature] is set in [IKE
Authentication Method], set an IPsec certificate.
018-405 [Cause] An error occurred during LDAP authentication.
[Remedy] The account is disabled in the active directory of the
authentication server, or the access is set to disabled. Consult
your network administrator.
018-406 [Cause] The machine detects the identical IPv4 addresses when
018-407 Ethernet1 and Ethernet2 are connected to different network
and the setting of identical addresses is prohibited.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Set different IP addresses to each Ethernet. When setting the
same IP address to each Ethernet, contact our Customer
Support Center.
018-408 [Cause] The IPv4 address already exists in the network of Ethernet2.
[Remedy] Change the IPv4 address of Ethernet2.
018-409 [Cause] The IPv6 address already exists in the network of Ethernet2.
15
[Remedy] Change the IPv6 address of the network in which the address
already exists.
018-410 [Cause] Updating of the IPv4 address and host name for the DNS server
failed on the network of Ethernet2.
[Remedy] Check whether the IP address of the DNS server is set correctly.
018-411 [Cause] Updating of the IPv6 address and host name for the DNS server
failed on the network of Ethernet2.
[Remedy] Check whether the IP address of the DNS server is set correctly.

527
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-412 [Cause] The IPv6 address already exists in the network of Ethernet2.
018-413 [Remedy] Change the IPv6 address of the network in which the address
already exists.
018-414 [Cause] IP address for IPv6 set manually in Ethernet2 is incorrect.
[Remedy] Set the IP address correctly.
018-415 [Cause] IP address for IPv6 set manually in Ethernet2 is incorrect.
[Remedy] Change the [Manually Configured IPv6 Address] on the
machine, or the IP address of IPv6 on the network device, to
remove the duplication of addresses.
018-416 [Cause] The IPv6 address already exists in the network of Ethernet2.
[Remedy] Change the IPv6 address of the network in which the address
already exists.
018-500 [Cause] The certificate does not exist in the authentication server.
[Remedy] Configure the server certificate. Or, cancel authentication.
018-501 [Cause] Communications with the CA server set in the machine failed.
[Remedy] Check the network connection and the address of the CA server.
018-502 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because computers allowed to login are restricted.
[Remedy] Confirm the property information for the specified user, and
check whether the computers allowed to login to the server are
restricted.
018-503 [Cause] Communications with the CA server set in the machine failed.
018-504 [Remedy] Execute the authentication operation again.
Problem Solving

15

528
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-505 [Cause] Failed to log into the destination computer while transferring
data using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Check whether the user name and password of the SMTP server
registered in the machine is correct.

Important
z The password cannot be confirmed. If you have forgotten the password, reset
the password. Consult your system administrator for the pssword reset
procesure.
- When using Windows Server 2003, be sure to match the time set on the
SMB server and the machine.
- When the destination computer is Macintosh, you need to change the
account settings of the shared folder so that file sharing with Windows
users becomes available. For information about necessary accounting
settings, consult your system administrator. The following is an example of
a procedure for Mac OS X 10.6.

Note
z It is recommended that users create a dedicated account for data transfer. You
can create and set the account on the dialog box that appears by choosing
Apple menu > [System Preferences] and then clicking [Accounts] icon.
1) From Apple menu, choose [System Preferences], and then
click [Sharing].
2) Make sure that [File Sharing] check box is selected, and then
click [Options].
3) Select [Share files and folders using SMB].
4) Check the user accounts to enable for file sharing. Enter the
user's password, then click [OK].
5) Click [Done].

Note
z For information on how to change the account settings on other version of Mac
OS, consult your system administrator or the official website of Apple Inc.

018-506 [Cause] Communications with the CA server set in the machine failed.
[Remedy] Execute the authentication operation again.
018-507 [Cause] The authentication failed because the user name or password
entered is not correct.
[Remedy] Enter the correct user name or password.
Problem Solving
018-508 [Cause] A server error occurred during authentication.
[Remedy] Check the status of the authentication server.

15

529
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-543 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1) The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to
PC service because the specified shared name does not exist.
2) The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to
PC service because Invalid characters are used in the specified
shared name.
3) The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to
PC service because access privilege does not set on the
specified shared name when the server is Macintosh.
[Remedy] 1) Confirm that the specified shared name exits in the
destination PC.
2) Take one of the following measures:
z Check whether the following invalid characters
are included in the shared name set in the
machine
"/:|<>;,*?\[]+=
z Check whether a space character is included at
the top or end of the shared name set in the
machine.
z Check whether the shared name set in the
machine is specified only by a period.
3) When the destination computer is Macintosh, you need to
change the access privileges for the user for shared folder. For
information about necessary accounting settings, consult
your system administrator. The following is an example of a
procedure for Mac OS X 10.6.

Note
z It is recommended to create a dedicated account for data transfer. You can
create and set the account on the dialog box that appears by choosing Apple
menu > [System Preferences] and then clicking [Accounts] icon.
1) From Apple menu, choose [System Preferences], and then
click [Sharing].
2) Make sure that [File Sharing] check box is selected.
3) Select the folder being shared from folders listed in the
[Shared Folders] filed.
4) Choose [Read & Write] as privilege option for the user listed in
Problem Solving

the [Users] field.

Note
z
For information on how to change the access privilege settings on other version
of Mac OS, consult your system administrator or the official website of Apple
Inc.

018-547 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
15 service because the number of users logging into the SMB server
exceeded the limit when logging in to the SMB server.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Confirm how many users can access the shared folder.

z Check whether the number of login users have exceeded the

limit.

530
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-556 [Cause] Received the "XRXERROR" error detection code from the HTTP
server.
[Cause] 1) Check whether the specified drive and directory is available
on the destination HTTP server for the scanned document.
2) Perform the same operation again. If the problem persists,
contact our Customer Support Center.
018-557 [Cause] The specified file name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Modify the file name. Make sure that invalid characters are not
contained in the destination file name for the scanned
document.
018-558 [Cause] Received an error code from HTTP server.
[Remedy] 1) Check whether the specified directory exists on the
destination HTTP server for the scanned document.
2) Check whether the specified file exists on the HTTP server.
018-559 [Cause] The same file name already exists. [Do Not Save] is selected
when duplicate file name exists.
[Remedy] Select any option other than [Do Not Save] in [File Name
Conflict].
018-560 [Cause] A user authentication error occurred. (Received HTTP Status
401).
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is
accessible by PC.
z
Login name
z Login password

z
The HTTP server name
z
The HTTP server path name
018-561 [Cause] The hostname or the script storage location is not correct.
(Received HTTP Status 404).
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is

accessible by PC.
z The HTTP server name

z
The HTTP server path name
Problem Solving
018-562 [Cause] A client-side error occurred. (Received HTTP Status 4xx other
than 401 and 404).
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is

accessible by PC.
z The server settings

018-563 [Cause] A server-side error occurred. (Received HTTP Status 5xx).

15
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is
accessible by PC.
z The server settings

531
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-564 [Cause] DNS resolution for the specified hostname failed.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is
registered on the DNS server.
z
The machine is connected to the DNS server.
z The address of the DNS server is set on the machine.

018-565 [Cause] DNS resolution for the proxy server name set on the machine
failed.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The proxy server name set on the machine is registered on
the DNS server.
z
The machine is connected to the DNS server.
z The address of the DNS server is set on the machine.

018-566 [Cause] Unable to connect to the HTTP server.

[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The network cable connection on the machine
z
The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is
accessible by PC.
018-567 [Cause] The followings may be the cause:
z
The communication is disconnected while reading or writing
due to some reason.
z Close process of the file failed due to some reason.

[Remedy] Check whether the destination HTTP server for the scanned
document is accessible by PC.
018-568 [Cause] An SSL/TLS connection error occurred.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is
accessible by PC.
z
SSL settings for the HTTP server is correct.
z The HTTP server name

z The HTTP server path name

018-569 [Cause] The SSL server certificate may have a problem.

[Remedy] 1) Check whether the destination HTTP server for the scanned
Problem Solving

document is accessible by PC.

2) Check whether the SSL server certificate is registered on the
HTTP server.
3) Check whether the SSL server certificate is valid. Check the
followings:
z the certificate is unexpired
15 z
the time set on the machine is correct
z the certificate is not on the discard list
4) Check the certificate path to the SSL server certificate, and
import the required CA certificate.
5) If the SSL server certificated is not registered on the HTTP
server, disable the [Verify Remote Server Certificate] setting.

532
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-570 [Cause] A client certificate authentication error occurred on the HTTP
server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is
accessible by PC.
z
The SSL client certificate is registered on the machine.
z The device certificate is correctly registered on the HTTP

server.
018-571 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Perform the same operation again. If the problem persists,
contact our Customer Support Center.
018-572 [Cause] The specified context name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified context name is correct.
018-573 [Cause] The specified connection name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified connection name is correct.
018-574 [Cause] The specified volume name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified volume name is correct.
018-575 [Cause] The specified user name or password contains invalid
characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified user name or password is correct.
018-576 [Cause] The specified path name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified path name is correct.
018-577 [Cause] The specified file name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified file name is correct.
018-578 [Cause] The specified server or tree name does not exist.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The network cable connection on the machine

z The NetWare server is accessible by PC

z
The NetWare server or tree name
Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
Problem Solving
018-579 [Cause] The hard disk on the NetWare server may be full.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The NetWare server is accessible by PC

z The free space of the server to store data

Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWareserver.

018-580 [Cause] The specified volume name does not exist on the NetWare
server.
15
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The NetWare server is accessible by PC
z The volume name

Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.

533
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-581 [Cause] The specified directory path does not exist on the NetWare
server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The NetWare server is accessible by PC
z
The directory path name
Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-582 [Cause] The followings may be the cause:
z The login user does not have Open rights to the file.

z
The login user does not have Create rights to create a file.
z
The login user does not have Access rights to the directory.
z The login user does not have Read rights to the file.

z
The login user does not have Write rights to the file.
z
The login user does not have Delete rights of the directory or
file.
z Made a delete request to the directories or files but all of

them are read-only.

z
Made a delete request to the directories or files but some of
them are read-only.
[Remedy] 1) Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC.
2) Check the user has the following rights.
z Open rights to the file
z Create rights to a file
z
Access rights to the directory
z Read rights to the file
z Write rights to the file
z
Delete rights to the directory or file
3) Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-583 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred on the NetWare server.
[Remedy] 1) Check the status of the HDD on the NetWare server..
2) Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC.
3) Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-584 [Cause] The followings may be the cause:
Problem Solving

z The communication is disconnected while reading or writing

due to some reason

z Close process of the file failed due to some reason

[Remedy] 1) Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC.

2) Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-585 [Cause] The followings may be the cause:
15 z The specified folder or file is in use by another user

z
Made a delete request to the directories or files though some
of them are in use by another user
z Made a delete request to the directories or files though all of

them are in use by another user

[Remedy] 1) Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC.
2) Check the status of use of the other users.
3) Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.

534
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-586 [Cause] Login to the NetWare server was denied.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The NetWare server is accessible by PC
z
Login user name
z Login password

z
Volume name
z
Server or tree name
z Context name

Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.

018-587 [Cause] There are duplicate file names.
[Do Not Save] is set as a handling method when names are
duplicated for scanned files.
[Remedy] Set the process to be executed in case of a file name duplication
to other than [Do Not Save].
018-588 [Cause] Detected an incorrect filing policy (when add was selected)
after connecting to the server.
[Remedy] When [Rename New File] is set as the process to be executed
when file names are duplicate, confirm that the file format is
not multi-page.
018-589 [Cause] Failed to access the NEXTNAME.DAT file.
[Remedy] When [Rename New File] is set as the process to be executed
when file names are duplicate, check the NEXTNAME.DAT file is
correct.
018-590 [Cause] A file or folder of the same name was detected on the server.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
1) Execute the operation again by not accessing the same folder
or the same server from multiple machines.
2) If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
018-591 [Cause] When the machine was connected to the server and the name
of a file or folder on the server was determined, the suffix of the
name of the file or folder exceeded the limit value.
[Remedy] Change the file name or forwarding destination folder of the Problem Solving
scan server. Also try moving or deleting the files within the
forwarding destination folder.
018-592 [Cause] Failed to delete a scan lock folder.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
1) If an existing lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the forwarding
destination, delete it manually, and then execute the job
again. 15
2) Confirm that there is a folder with the name specified.
018-593 [Cause] Failed to create the scan lock folder.
[Remedy] If an existing lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the forwarding
destination, delete it manually, and then execute the job again.

535
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-595 [Cause] Multiple entries containing the same smart card information
were detected in the database of the LDAP server.
[Remedy] Correct the temporary user entries of the LDAP server so that
they do not contain the same smart card information.
018-596 [Cause] An error occurred during LDAP server authentication.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
018-700 [Cause] The network for Web Applications is being initialized.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again.
018-701 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "1" (operations error) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Check whether [LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings] under
[Remote Authentication/Directory Service] has been set
correctly. Or, the server may have a problem. Consult your
network administrator.
018-702 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "2" (protocol error) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
settings, and execute the operation again.
018-703 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "3" (time limit exceeded) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Change the search conditions/start position to narrow the
search range, and execute the operation again. If the error still
is not resolved, consult your network administrator.
018-704 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "4" (size limit exceeded) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Change the search conditions/start position to narrow the
search range, and execute the operation again. If the error still
is not resolved, consult your network administrator.
Problem Solving

018-705 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "5" (compare false) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The result may differ from the specified content. Have your
network administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-706 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
15 No "6" (compare true) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The desired result has been achieved. No problem occurred.
018-707 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "7" (specified authentication method not supported) for
Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server does not support the specified authentication
method. Change the authentication method. Consult your
system administrator for another method.

536
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-708 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "8" (strong authentication required) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Check whether the authentication settings are correct. Consult
your system administrator about the authentication, and
execute the operation again.
018-709 [Cause] An error occurred for external access (Web Applications).
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures depending on the setting:
For IPv4 environment
z
Check the IPv4 address of the machine.
z
Confirm whether the network cable is connected correctly.
z Check the address of the DHCP server.

For IPv6 environment

z
Confirm whether the global address distributed from an IPv6
router is assigned to the IPv6 address of the machine.
z
Confirm whether the network cable is connected correctly.
z Confirm whether the IPv6 router is set correctly.

018-710 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "10" (referral) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] No registered items were found in the specified retrieval range.
Have your network administrator confirm the authentication
settings.
018-711 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "11" (admin limit exceeded) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the operational status
of the server.
018-712 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "12" (unavailable extension) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the operational status
of the server.
018-713 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Problem Solving
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "13" (confidentiality required) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the operational status
of the server.
018-714 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "14" (SASL bind in progress) for Address Book query. 15
[Remedy] Retry after waiting for a while. If the error still is not resolved,
consult your network administrator.

537
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-715 [Cause] Kerberos server authentication protocol error. There is no
authentication method which supports both the machine
authentication and Kerberos server authentication.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Set the appropriate authentication method in the Kerveros
server.
z
Disable the FIPS140 validation mode of the machine. If the
error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
018-716 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "16" (no such attribute) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an attribute problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-717 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "17" (undefined type) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an attribute problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-718 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "18" (inappropriate matching) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an attribute problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-719 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "19" (constraint violation) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an attribute problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-720 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "20" (attribute exists) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an attribute problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
Problem Solving

018-721 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "21" (invalid syntax) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an attribute problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-722 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of
15 a network error.
[Remedy] Check that the network cable is connected properly. Also check
that the environmental settings are adequate.
018-723 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of
a certificate error.
[Remedy] Check that the root CA certificate registered to the machine and
the certificate verification settings are correct.

538
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-724 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of
an SSL communication error.
[Remedy] Check the SSL settings.
018-725 [Cause] The user password set in the Kerberos server expired.
[Remedy] Extend the expiration date of the password.
018-726 [Cause] The root (or intermediate) CA certificate on the smart card is
not registered on the machine.
[Remedy] Register the root (or intermediate) CA certificate on the smart
card on the machine.
018-727 [Cause] Authentication by the Kerberos server failed.
[Remedy] Check the certificate on the smart card, and then update the
certificate if it is invalid or revoked. Also, check whether the
certificate is enabled in the server.
018-728 [Cause] Authentication by the Kerberos server failed.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
When the root CA certificate of the KDC certificate is not
registered, register the root CA certificate.
z
When the KDC certificate is revoked, update the KDC
certificate of the server.
z
Confirm that the address of the Kerberos server set in the
machine and the address on the KDC certificate of the server
match.
018-729 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of
a time out error.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the procedure again. If the
problem still exists even after the remedy, check that the
network cable is connected properly. Also check that the
environmental settings are adequate.
018-730 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of
a network error.
[Remedy] Check that the network cable is connected properly. Also check
that the environmental settings are adequate. If the problem
still remains even when there is nothing wrong, contact our
Customer Support Center. Problem Solving
018-731 [Cause] The printing job was canceled due to insufficient memory
capacity for the hard disk.
[Remedy] Check the hard disk capacity, and delete unnecessary data.
Complete all the active jobs, and then execute the operation
again.
018-732 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
15
No "32" (no such object) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The specified e-mail address does not exist. Confirm the e-mail
address you entered or the e-mail address registered on the
LDAP server.

539
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-733 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "33" (incorrect alias) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a name problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-734 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "34" (invalid DN syntax) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a name problem. Confirm the user name
and password to cancel an incorrect password. If the error still is
not resolved, have your network administrator confirm the
authentication settings and status of the LDAP server.
018-735 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "35" (object is leaf) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a name problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-736 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "36" (alias differencing problem) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a name problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-737 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the problem still exists even
after the remedy, contact our Customer Support Center.
018-738 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of
a network error.
[Remedy] Check that the network cable is connected properly. Also check
that the environmental settings are adequate.
018-739 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the problem still exists even
after the remedy, contact our Customer Support Center.
018-740 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of
Problem Solving

a certificate error.
[Remedy] Check that the root CA certificate registered to the machine and
the certificate verification settings are correct.
018-741 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the problem still exists even
after the remedy, contact our Customer Support Center.
15 018-743 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of
a proxy connection error.
[Remedy] Check that the proxy server settings are adequate.
018-744 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because
DNS failed to resolve the name.
[Remedy] Check that the DNS settings are adequate.

540
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-745 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of
a proxy connection error.
[Remedy] Check that the proxy server settings are adequate.
018-746 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because
DNS failed to resolve the name.
[Remedy] Check that the DNS settings are adequate.
018-747 [Cause] The SMB server of the destination computer cannot be found
while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures.
z
Confirm the connection of the network cable.
z
Check whether the IP address is correct when an IP address is
used for the transferring destination address.
z For communications over subnet, confirm the WINS server

settings, and check whether the server address can be

resolved correctly.
z
Confirm the file Sharing service (communicating via port 137
(UDP), port 138 (UDP), and port 139 (TCP)) is authorized for
the transferring destination server, router between the
machine and server, and virus security software or firewall
software on the forwarding destination server.
018-748 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "48" (inappropriate authentication) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a security problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the authentication settings on the LDAP
server.
018-749 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "49" (invalid credentials) for Address Book query. The
address search was performed with an incorrect authentication
user name and password.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a security problem. Confirm your
authentication user name and password to cancel an incorrect
login name. If the error still is not resolved, have your network
administrator confirm the authentication settings on the LDAP
server. Problem Solving

018-750 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "50" (insufficient access) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a security problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the access rights for the LDAP server.
018-751 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address 15
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "51" (busy) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The service has a problem. Retry after waiting for a while. If the
error still is not resolved, consult your network administrator.

541
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-752 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "52" (unavailable) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a service problem. Retry after waiting for a
while. If the error still is not resolved, consult your network
administrator.
018-753 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "53" (unwilling to perform) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a service problem. Retry after waiting for a
while. If the error still is not resolved, consult your network
administrator.
018-754 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "54" (loop detected) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a service problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the operational status of the service on
the LDAP server.
018-755 [Cause] The SMB server specified as the destination does not respond to
the machine while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to
PC service.
[Remedy] Confirm the file Sharing service (communicating via port 139
(TCP), and port 445 (TCP)) is authorized for the transferring
destination server, router between the machine and server, and
virus security software or firewall software on the forwarding
destination server.
018-758 [Cause] The save location or file name of a scanned image has a
problem while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service. Probable cause is that the specified save location does
not exist on the server.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures.
z Check whether the save location is correct.

z Check whether the specified folder name can be used in the

SMB server.
018-759 [Cause] Invalid characters are used for the save location or file name of
Problem Solving

a scanned image while transferring data using SMB of the Scan

to PC service.
[Remedy] Check the followings for the save location or file name of a
scanned image set to the machine.
z
Confirm the save location name doesnot include the
following 10 invalid characters:" / : | < > ; , * ?.

15 z Confirm the file name doesnot include the following 11

invalid characters: " / : | < > ; , * ? \

z Confirm there is no space in the head and end of a string of

characters.
z
Confirm there is no period in the head and end of a string of
characters.

542
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-760 [Cause] Because the specified save location has the Distributed File
System (DFS) settings, it is linked to another shared folder while
transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] 1) Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Administrative Tools]
>[Distributed File System] on the SMB server.
2) Select the specified save location from the left side frame of
the [Distributed File System] window, and then confirm the
target information displayed on the right side frame of the
window.
3) Specify the SMB server, shared name, and save location based
on the information you confirmed in step 2.
018-761 [Cause] The memory stored in the saving destination PC is insufficient
while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Check the usage condition of he memory. If the remaining
capacity of the machine's memory is low, exit out of the
applications which are not used.
018-762 [Cause] A time out error occurred because it takes time to receive a
response from the saving destination PC while transferring data
using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Check whether the virus security software is working on the
saving destination PC. Some software takes time to receive a
response from the PC.If the software is working, reduce the
number of document pages to scale down the file size."
018-763 [Cause] The character code conversion is failed in the machine while
transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Confirm the server name, share name, and pass name does not
include the letters unique to the machine model.If the letters
are included, change the name not to include the letters.
018-764 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "64" (naming violation) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an update problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-765 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "65" (object class violation) for Address Book query. Problem Solving
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an update problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-766 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "66" (not allowed on nonleaf) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an update problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
15
018-767 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "67" (not allowed on RDN) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an update problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.

543
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-768 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "68" (already exists) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an update problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-769 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "69" (no object class modifications) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an update problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-770 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "70" (results too large) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Change the search conditions/start position to narrow the
search range, and execute the operation again. If the error still
is not resolved, consult your network administrator.
018-771 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "71" (affecting multiple DSAs) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-772 [Cause] Failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service
because the specified shared name does not exist.
[Remedy] Confirm that the specified shared name exits in the destination
PC.
Problem Solving

15

544
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-773 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "71" (affecting multiple DSAs) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
[Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1) The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to
PC service because Invalid characters are used in the specified
shared name.
2) The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to
PC service because access privilege does not set on the
specified shared name when the server is Macintosh.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Check whether the following invalid characters are included
in the shared name set in the machine: "" / : | < > ; , * ? \ [ ] + =
z
Check whether a space character is included at the top or end
of the shared name set in the machine.
z Check whether the shared name set in the machine is

specified only by a period.

When the destination computer is Macintosh, you need to
change the access privileges for the user for shared folder. For
information about necessary accounting settings, consult your
system administrator.The following is an example of a
procedure for Mac OS X 10.6.

Note
z It is recommended to create a dedicated account for data transfer. You can
create and set the account on the dialog box that appears by choosing Apple
menu > [System Preferences] and then clicking [Accounts] icon.
1) From Apple menu, choose [System Preferences], and then
click [Sharing].
2) Make sure that [File Sharing] check box is selected.
3) Select the folder being shared from folders listed in the
[Shared Folders] filed.
4) Choose [Read & Write] as privilege option for the user listed in
the [Users] field.

Note
z For information on how to change the access privilege settings on other version Problem Solving
of Mac OS, consult your system administrator or the official website of Apple
Inc.

018-780 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "80" (unknown error) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status. 15

545
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-781 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. Connection to the server cannot be established
for the Address Book query.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Confirm the network cable connection.
z
If the network cable connection has no problem, confirm the
active status of the target server.
z Check whether the server name has been correctly set for

[LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings] under [Remote

Authentication/Directory Service].
018-782 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "82" (program error or SASL authentication error) for Address
Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-783 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "83" (encoding error) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-784 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "84" (decoding error) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-785 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "85" (timeout) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Change the search conditions/start position to narrow the
search range, and execute the operation again. If the error still
is not resolved, consult your network administrator.
018-786 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "86" (unknown authentication method) for Address Book
Problem Solving

query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-787 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "87" (search filter error) for Address Book query.
15 [Remedy] Confirm the search conditions set on Address Book. If the error
still is not resolved, consult your network administrator.
018-788 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "88" (user cancelled operation) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.

546
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

018-789 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "89" (incorrect parameter) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-790 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "90" (no memory) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-791 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "91" (server connection error) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-792 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "92" (unsupported feature) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-793 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "93" (no results returned) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-794 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "94" (no more results) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-795 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "95" (results remaining) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
Problem Solving
status.
018-796 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "96" (client loop detected) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.
018-797 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address 15
Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result Message
No "97" (referral limit exceeded) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server
status.

547
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-210 [Cause] An error occurred in the IC card reader(optional).
021-211 [Remedy] Check the connection between the IC Card Reader and the
021-212 machine. Switch off the machine power, make sure that the
touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If
the error still is not resolved, the IC Card Reader may be
defective. Connect an unbroken IC Card Reader and execute the
operation again.
021-213 [Cause] There is a problem with the unit price table settings for the
related product.
[Remedy] The system administrator should exports the unit price table
and modify it using CentreWare Internet Services. Set a number
from 1 to 9,999,999 and import the table modified to the
machine.
021-214 [Cause] An error occurred during encrypted communication between
the machine and the USB memory device.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. Execute the
operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
Customer Support Center.
021-215 [Cause] The accounting/billing device connected does not match the
device set on the machine.
[Remedy] Change the setting on the machine or connect the correct
accounting/billing device, and switch off the machine power,
make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the
machine power.
021-360 [Cause] An error occurred.
021-361 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-401 [Cause] The number of authentication devices such as IC Card
Reader(optional) connected exceeds the setting value.
[Remedy] Disconnect the authentication device connected.
021-402 [Cause] The address of the proxy server name is incorrect.
Problem Solving

[Remedy] Check the followings:

z LAN cable connection

z DNS server address setting

z
The default gateway setting
z The subnet mask setting

If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
15 there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator. If the
network works normally but the error still is not resolved, contact
our Customer Support Center.

548
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-403 [Cause] Failed to resolve the address of the EP center of Fuji Xerox or EP
communication aggregate server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
LAN cable connection
z
DNS server address setting
z The default gateway setting

z
The subnet mask setting
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator. If the
network works normally but the error still is not resolved, contact
our Customer Support Center.
021-404 [Cause] Failed to connect the server or the proxy server. One of the
probable cause is that the power of these servers is switched off.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
LAN cable connection
z DNS server address setting

z
The default gateway setting
z
The subnet mask setting
z
EP proxy server setting(For BB-Direct configuration)
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
Also, when FQDN of the EP communication aggregate server is
changed for the EP communication aggregate server
configuration, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-405 [Cause] An error occurred in the SSL communication with the external
server.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-406 [Cause] The SSL certificate of the external server is not correct.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-407 [Cause] Failed to authorize the proxy server while connecting to the EP
system via the Internet.(Receiving HTTP status code 407)
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The login user of the EP proxy server 15
z The password of the EP proxy server

If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator. If the
network works normally but the error still is not resolved, contact
our Customer Support Center.

549
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-408 [Cause] A time out error occurred while connecting to the EP system via
the Internet.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
LAN cable connection
z
DNS server address setting
z The default gateway setting

z
The subnet mask setting
z
EP proxy server setting(For BB-Direct configuration)
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
Also, when FQDN of the EP communication aggregate server is
changed for the EP communication aggregate server
configuration, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-409 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
021-542 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
021-543 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-410 [Cause] A communication error occurred while connecting (acquiring
021-411 the EP certificate) to CA via the Internet.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
LAN cable connection
z DNS server address setting

z
The default gateway setting
z
The subnet mask setting
z EP proxy server setting(For BB-Direct configuration)

If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
Problem Solving

021-412 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
Internet. There is a problem with the address of the EP proxy
server name.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The LAN cable connection

z
The DNS server address setting

15 z The default gateway setting

z The subnet mask setting

z
The EP proxy server URL setting
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure. Consult your system
administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.

550
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-413 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
021-416 Internet.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The LAN cable connection
z
The DNS server address setting
z The default gateway setting

z
The subnet mask setting
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure. Consult your system
administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
021-414 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
Internet.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The LAN cable connection
z The DNS server address setting

z The default gateway setting

z
The subnet mask setting
z
The EP proxy server setting
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure. Consult your system
administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
021-415 [Cause] An error occurred while the SSL/TLS communication to the EP
system via the Internet.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The LAN cable connection

z
The DNS server address setting
z
The default gateway setting
z The subnet mask setting

z The EP proxy server setting

If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings, Problem Solving
there may be a network failure. Consult your system
administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.

15

551
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-417 [Cause] Failed to authorize the proxy server while connecting to the EP
system via the Internet.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The EP proxy server URL setting
z
The login user of the EP proxy server
z The password of the EP proxy server

If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
021-418 [Cause] There is a problem with the format of the proxy setting file.
021-419 [Remedy] The format of the proxy setting file registered in the HTTP
server may be incorrect. Consult your system administrator.
If the proxy setting file works normally but the error still is not
resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-420 [Cause] A time out error occurred while connecting to the EP system via
the Internet
Failed to obtain the proxy setting.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The LAN cable connection

z
The default gateway setting
z
The subnet mask setting
z The EP proxy server setting

z
The working condition of the HTTP proxy server in which the
proxy setting file is registered
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure. Consult your system
administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
021-421 [Cause] A time out error occurred while connecting to the EP system via
the Internet
Problem Solving

Failed to obtain the proxy setting.

[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The LAN cable connection
z The default gateway setting

z The subnet mask setting

z
The EP proxy server setting
15 z The working condition of the HTTP proxy server in which the

proxy setting file is registered

If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure. Consult your system
administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.

552
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-422 [Cause] The proxy setting file is not found while connecting to the EP
system via the Internet.
[Remedy] Check the EP proxy server setting screen on CentreWare
Internet Services.
If the error still is not resolved after checking the setting, the
proxy setting file may not be registered. Consult your system
administrator.
If the proxy setting file works normally but the error still is not
resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-423 [Cause] The size of the proxy setting file is too large. Failed to obtain the
proxy setting file.
[Remedy] Check the EP proxy server setting screen on CentreWare
Internet Services.
If the error still is not resolved after checking the setting, check
the proxy setting file size. When the size exceeds 64 KB, keep
the file size down.
If the proxy setting file works normally but the error still is not
resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-424 [Cause] The URL of the proxy setting file to connect with the proxy
server is incorrect while connecting to the EP system via the
Internet.
[Remedy] Check the EP proxy server setting screen on CentreWare
Internet Services.
If the error still is not resolved after checking the setting, consult
your system administrator about the URL of the proxy setting
file.
Otherwise, check the URL of proxy setting file of the DHCP or
DNS server as follows:
z The DHCP option is "252".

z
The SRV record of the host "wpad.(domain name)" is correct.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-425 [Cause] A time out error occurred while connecting to the DHCP or DNS
server via the Internet to obtain the URL (CURL) of the proxy Problem Solving
setting file.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The LAN cable connection
z The DNS server address settings

z The default gateway setting

z
The EP proxy server setting (CURL)
z The working condition of the DHCP or DNS server in which 15
the proxy setting file is registered
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure. Consult your system
administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.

553
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-426 [Cause] The URL (CURL) of the proxy setting file is not found on the
DHCP or DNS server while connecting to the EP system via the
Internet to obtain the URL (CURL) of the proxy setting file.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The EP proxy server setting
z
The URL of the proxy setting file is registered on the DHCP or
DNS server correctly
021-427 [Cause] [Cause] 3G connection by way of 3Gnet-BOX was lost due to the
time-out.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-428 [Cause] 3G communication by way of 3Gnet-BOX is out of
communication range.
[Remedy] If the antenna is being fallen down, stand it upright. If you still
have the problem, switch off the machine power, make sure that
the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine
power. If the same message is displayed again, contact our
Customer Support Center.
021-429 [Cause] An error occurred in the SIM card which had been inserted to
the 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-431 [Cause] USB connection with 3Gnet-BOX was failed.
[Remedy] Check the USB cable of 3G net-BOX to see if it has come off.
Connect the cable firmly if it is unplugged. If you still have the
problem, switch off the machine power, make sure that the
touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If
the same message is displayed again, contact our Customer
Support Center.
021-432 [Cause] 3G communication by 3Gnet-BOX was failed to start due to an
error which had occurred in the machine.
Problem Solving

[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-433 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine through the 3G
communication by way of 3Gnet-BOX.
15 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-434 [Cause] An error occurred in 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.

554
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-435 [Cause] 3G communication by 3Gnet-BOX was failed to start because an
error requiring the initialization of 3Gnet-BOX and the restart of
the machine was detected.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-436 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine through the 3G
communication by way of 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-437 [Cause] A communication error in DNS server occurred through 3G
communication by way of 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-438 [Cause] The name resolution of EP server was failed in 3G
communication by way of 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-439 [Cause] The name resolution of the certificate authority that had issued
the EP client certificate was failed in 3G communication by way
of 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-440 [Cause] The communication is disabled in 3G communication by way of
3Gnet-BOX with this machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
Problem Solving
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-500 [Cause] The following operation is performed when the Auditron mode
for the Fax service is enabled.
z While a Send Fax job is processing, another job that the

Auditron mode is enabled starts.

z While another job that the Auditron mode is enabled is
15
processing, a Send Fax job starts.
[Remedy] Wait for the active job finishes, and start the next job.
021-501 [Cause] The communication with the EP system via the internet failed.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.

555
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-502 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
Internet. There is a problem with the address of the EP proxy
server name.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. Execute the
operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
Customer Support Center.
021-503 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
Internet. There is a problem with the address of the EP proxy
server name.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
LAN cable connection
z
DNS server address setting
z The default gateway setting

z
The subnet mask setting
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
021-504 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
Internet.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
LAN cable connection
z
DNS server address setting
z The default gateway setting

z
The subnet mask setting
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
021-505 [Cause] The communication with the EP server failed.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
Problem Solving

is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-506 [Cause] The Certificate for the EP server is incorrect.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. Execute the
operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
15 Customer Support Center.

556
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-507 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
Internet.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The login user of the EP proxy server
z
The password of the EP proxy server
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
021-508 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
Internet.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z LAN cable connection

z
DNS server address setting
z
The default gateway setting
z The subnet mask setting

If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
021-509 [Cause] An error occurred while communicating with the EP server.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-510 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to EP system via the
Internet.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. Execute the
operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
Customer Support Center.
021-511 [Cause] The machine has already been specified with the EP server.
021-512 Problem Solving
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
021-513 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. Execute the
021-514 operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
Customer Support Center.
021-515 [Cause] The settings of the machine on the EP server are incorrect.
021-516 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. Execute the
operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
15
Customer Support Center.
021-517 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
021-518 Internet.
021-519 [Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again. If the
error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.

557
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-520 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
021-521 Internet.
021-522 [Remedy] Check the followings:
z
LAN cable connection
z
DNS server address setting
z The default gateway setting

z
The subnet mask setting
Check the following for BB-Direct configuration:
z
EP proxy server setting
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the DNS server failure. Consult
your system administrator. If the network works normally but
the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-523 [Cause] An error occurred while communicating with the EP server.
[Remedy] Enable the SOAP port, switch off the machine power, make sure
that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine
power. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
021-524 [Cause] An error occurred while communicating with the EP server.
021-525 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
021-526 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
021-527 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
021-528 Center.

021-529 [Cause] The machine attempted to upgrade the software of EP system

via the Internet, but the latest software version is already
installed.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
021-530 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to EP system via the
021-531 Internet.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again. If the
error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-532 [Cause] The machine attempted to upgrade the software of EP system
Problem Solving

021-533 via the Internet, but the software upgrade failed.

021-534 [Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
021-535
021-536 [Cause] The latest software version is not installed.
[Remedy] Reboot the machine and update the software to the latest
version. (The machine automatically reboots again.) Then,
15 execute the operation again.
021-538 [Cause] The software upgrade was canceled since the machine was in
use at the reserved time.
[Remedy] Check with your system administrators. If the system
administrators have not reserved the update, contact our
Customer Support Center.

558
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-539 [Cause] The software upgrade was canceled since the machine power
was off at the reserved time.
[Remedy] Check with your system administrators. If the system
administrators have not reserved the update, contact our
Customer Support Center.
021-540 [Cause] The SW upgrade was canceled since the machine power was
turned off while downloading the update file.
[Remedy] If necessary, execute the operation again.
021-541 [Cause] The SW upgrade cannot be started since an incorrect setting is
done to the machine
[Remedy] If necessary, execute the operation again.
021-542 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
021-543 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-545 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
Internet.
[Remedy] Confirm the contract period of the EP system. When the error is
displayed during the contract period, contact our Customer
Support Center.
021-565 [Cause] The 3G connection of 3Gnet-BOX is time out.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-566 [Cause] The 3G connection of 3Gnet-BOX is time out.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-567 [Cause] An error occurred in the SIM card inserted in 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-568 [Cause] Failure of time synchronization. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Get the time of this machine’s watch correct. If the error still is
not resolved, switch off the machine power, make sure that the
touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If
the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
021-569 [Cause] Failure of the USB connection to 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Make sure that the USB cable of 3Gnet-BOX is connected. If
15
not, connect it correctly. If the error still is not resolved, switch
off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is
not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.

559
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-570 [Cause] An error occurred in the 3G connection of 3Gnet-BOX and
connection is not started.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-571 [Cause] An error occurred in the 3G connection of 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-572 [Cause] An error occurred in the connection library in the 3G connection
of 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-573 [Cause] An error occurred in 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-574 [Cause] An error was detected for the reset of 3Gnet-BOX and the
reboot of this machine and connection is not started.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-575 [Cause] An error occurred in the 3G connection of 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-576 [Cause] An error occurred in the connection of DNS server in the 3G
connection of 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-577 [Cause] Failure of the name resolution of EP server in the 3G connection
Problem Solving

of 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-578 [Cause] Failure of the name resolution of an EP client certificate issue in
the 3G connection of 3Gnet-BOX.

15 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-579 [Cause] Failure of the name resolution of an EP client certificate issue in
the 3G connection of 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.

560
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

021-580 [Cause] Connection failure was detected in the 3G connection of 3Gnet-
BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-581 [Cause] Failure of the name resolution of Remote Download server in
the 3G connection of 3Gnet-BOX.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-582 [Cause] A conflict is detected between the software update and a batch
data setting or acquisition.
[Remedy] Close the [Maintenance] screen, wait until the batch data
setting or acquisition is completed, and operate the software
update again. If the same message is displayed again, contact
our Customer Support Center.
021-700 [Cause] The USB cable is unplugged or the USB interface may be out of
order.
[Remedy] Confirm that the USB cable is connected and switch off the
machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and
then switch on the machine power. If the error still is not
resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-701 [Cause] The USB interface error occurred.
[Remedy] Retry after waiting for a while or confirm that the USB cable is
connected and switch off the machine power, make sure that
the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine
power. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
021-731 [Cause] While using the related product, you attempted to make color
copies when the use of color is restricted.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
021-732 [Cause] The EP system is not available.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
021-733 [Cause] The use of color is restricted or the number of color pages Problem Solving
reached the maximum.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
023-500 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.

15

561
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

024-340 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
024-341 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
024-342 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
024-343 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
024-345 Center.
024-346
024-347
024-348
024-349
024-350
024-351
024-352
024-353
024-354
024-355
024-356
024-357
024-358
024-359
024-360
024-361
024-362
024-363
024-364
024-365
024-366
024-367
024-368
024-370
024-371
024-372
024-373
024-375
024-376
Problem Solving

024-700 [Cause] The memory capacity or hard disk required to use the optional
feature is not installed.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, and then switch it on again after
the touch screen goes out. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
024-701 [Cause] The specified paper type is not compatible with the Face Up/
15 Down Output setting selected.
[Remedy] Specify a paper type that is compatible with the Face Up/ Down
setting.
024-702 [Remedy] Remove the jammed paper, and then try printing again.

024-703 [Cause] Unable to print because the number of booklet pages exceeds
the maximum number allowed.
[Remedy] Use paper of less weight. Or, cancel the booklet creation.

562
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

024-704 [Cause] An error occurred while receiving a print job from Denshi- Pen.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
024-705 [Cause] The template of the specified force annotation was not found in
the machine.
[Remedy] Delete the document in the folder of the machine, and then
select [Store to Folder] again from the print driver to store the
document.
024-706 [Cause] A print job from Denshi-Pen is sent when [Force Watermark -
Client Print] or [Force Secure Watermark] > [Client Print] is set to
[On].
[Remedy] Set [Allow User to Disable Active Settings] to [Disable Active
Settings] under [Tools] >[Authentication / Security Settings].
024-742 [Cause] Booklet printing was specified for printer properties, but the
number of print pages for the job exceeded the maximum
number allowed for booklet creation.
[Remedy] Change the printer properties setting to split the pages
appropriately to create separate volumes, or to cancel the
booklet creation setting.
024-746 [Cause] The specified paper type is not compatible with the specified
paper size, paper tray, output tray, or 2 sided printing.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data.
024-747 [Cause] Incompatible print parameters are used. The combination of
the specified features such as Document Size, Paper Size, Paper
Tray, 2 sided printing, and Output Tray is incompatible.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data, and try printing again.
024-748 [Cause] The number of digits specified in [Bates Stamp - Number of
Digits] screen does not match the value specified in [Starting
Number].
[Remedy] Set [Bates Stamp - Number of Digits] to the value specified in
[Starting Number] or to [Auto Assign].
024-775 [Cause] Booklet printing was specified for printer properties, but the Problem Solving
number of print pages for the job exceeded the maximum
number allowed for booklet creation.
[Remedy] Change the printer properties setting to split the pages
appropriately to create separate volumes, or to cancel the
booklet creation setting.
025-596 [Cause] An error occurred with the hard disk.
025-597 [Remedy] Replace the hard disk.
15
026-400 [Cause] More than two devices are connected to the USB host port.
[Remedy] Disconnect the third or more devices so that the number of
connected devices becomes two. If the error still is not resolved,
switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power.

563
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

026-700 [Cause] By Address Book operation, the machine received an
unsupported protocol from the LDAP server.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
026-701 [Cause] The number of queries submitted to the Address Book exceeded
the machine's processing capability.
[Remedy] Wait for a while and execute the operation again. If the only
one query is being submitted to the Address Book, the
machine’s software may be defective. Contact our Customer
Support Center.
026-702 [Cause] The number of accesses from the LDAP server to the machine by
Address Book operation exceeded the machine's processing
capability.
[Remedy] Wait for a while and execute the operation again. If the error
still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
026-703 [Cause] Authentication is canceled when adding documents during
faxing or scanning.
[Remedy] Authenticate when adding documents.
026-704 [Cause] An error occurred during processing DocuWorks documents.
[Remedy] Print using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from DocuWorks Viewer.
026-705 [Cause] Unable to process for DocuWorks documents because of
insufficient memory space.
026-706 [Cause] Attempted to print a DocuWorks document of which printing is
prohibited.
[Remedy] Release the print prohibited settings using DocuWorks Viewer,
and then execute the operation again.
026-707 [Cause] When processing password-protected DocuWorks documents,
the password entered does not match that of the DocuWorks
document.
[Remedy] Set the correct password on ContentsBridge.
026-708 [Cause] Exceeded the maximum limit for the scan data size that can be
stored for one job with Store & Send Link.
Problem Solving

[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:

1) Reduce the resolution (scan quality) of the scan parameters
and execute the operation again.
2) Reduce the image with magnification of the scan parameters
(such as A3 > A4) and then execute the operation again.
3) If [Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size] is set to a small
value, increase the value.
15 026-709 [Cause] The capacity of the hard disk that can be used to store scan
data with Store & Send Link is insufficient.
[Remedy] Wait around one day, and when capacity becomes available as
a result of the automatic deletion of files, execute the operation
again.

564
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

026-710 [Cause] The machine has received and e-mail encrypted by S/ MIME,
but does not support the encryption method.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Ask the sender to send the e-mail encrypted by 3DES.
z
Disable the FIPS140 validation mode of the machine.
026-711 [Cause] Exceeded the maximum size allowed for a multi-page file when
scanning.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
1) Reduce the resolution (scan quality) of the scan parameters
and execute the operation again.
2) Reduce the number of document pages and then execute the
operation again.
The maximum size is 2 GB for TIFF, XPS, and PDF, and 1 GB for
XDW.

Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

026-712 [Cause] An error occurred while operating from CentreWare Internet

Services.
[Remedy] Retry after waiting for a while.
026-718 [Cause] Incompatible print parameters are used. The combination of
the specified features such as Document Size, Paper Size, Paper
Tray, 2 sided printing, and Output Tray is incompatible.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data, and try printing again.
026-719 [Cause] An error occurred while operating the Store to USB service.
[Remedy] Wait for a while and execute the operation again. If the error
still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
026-720 [Cause] The capacity of the USB memory device of the recipient is
insufficient while performing the Store to USB service.
[Remedy] Confirm the amount of available space.
026-721 [Cause] An error occurred while operating the Store to USB service.
[Remedy] Check the following conditions:
z
The USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory
slot.
Problem Solving
z
The USB memory device is accessible from your computer.
z The unencrypted USB memory device is used.

026-722 [Cause] The USB memory device is not initialized.

[Remedy] Initialize the USB memory device on a computer with the
following file format, and then execute the operation again.
z Supported file formats: FAT12, FAT16 (FAT), FAT32 15
Note
z NTFS is not supported.
z A software-encrypted USB memory device is not supported.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.

565
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

026-723 [Cause] The machine failed to access to the medium.
[Remedy] 1) Check that the medium is not inserted or removed, or the
other medium is not inserted, while the machine is
referencing the medium.
2) Check that the file in the medium can be accessed via a
computer.
026-724 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the
026-725 Internet.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
026-726 [Cause] The machine configuration information at a print job
specification does not match the actual machine configuration.
[Remedy] Modify the machine configuration information in the print
driver screen to match the actual machine configuration.
026-727 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1) Unusable characters are included in the path name of the file
location.
2) The length of the path name of the file location (including
extension) exceeds the number of characters available.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
1) Change the path name of the file location.
2) Set the path in the range of 1 to 255 bytes.
026-728 [Cause] An error occurred during WSD communications.
[Remedy] Check whether the network cable is correctly connected or check
the amount of available memory of the destination device.
026-729 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1) An error occurred during WSD communications.
2) Application other than [Windows Fax and Scan] was used to
scan a document on the scanner (WSD).
[Remedy] 1) , check whether the network cable is correctly connected or
check the amount of available memory of the destination
device.
2) ,Use [Windows Fax and Scan] to scan. If using another
application, set the document on the document glass.

Note
Problem Solving

z
WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

026-730 [Cause] The size of paper loaded in the specified tray is unknown.
[Remedy] Check whether the paper guides are correctly positioned in the
tray, and then try again.
026-736 [Cause] An internal error occurred while sending the scanned document
15 to the HTTP server.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
026-737 [Cause] Unable to send the scanned document to the HTTP server
because a network error occurred.
[Remedy] Consult your network administrator whether the network or the
server have any problem.

566
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

026-738 [Cause] The machine failed to send scanned document data to the
HTTP server because Web application is closed during it.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again.
026-739 [Cause] When authentication succeeds, all jobs are canceled because
there is a pending job.
[Remedy] No measure is required.
027-442 [Cause] The IP address of IPv6 already network exists.
[Remedy] Change the [Auto Stateless Address 1] for IPv6 on the machine,
or the IP address of IPv6 on the network device, to remove the
duplication of addresses.
027-443 [Cause] The IP address of IPv6 already exists.
[Remedy] Change the [Auto Stateless Address 2] for IPv6 on the machine,
or the IP address of IPv6 on the network device, to remove the
duplication of addresses.
027-444 [Cause] The IP address of IPv6 already exists.
[Remedy] Change the [Auto Stateless Address 3] for IPv6 on the machine,
or the IP address of IPv6 on the network device, to remove the
duplication of addresses.
027-445 [Cause] IP address for IPv6 set manually is incorrect.
[Remedy] Set the IP address correctly.
027-446 [Cause] The IP address of IPv6 set manually already exists.
[Remedy] Change the [Manually Configured IPv6 Address] on the
machine, or the IP address of IPv6 on the network device, to
remove the duplication of addresses.
027-447 [Cause] The IP address of IPv6 already exists.
[Remedy] Change the [Link-local Address] for IPv6 on the machine, or the
IP address of IPv6 on the network device, to remove the
duplication of addresses.
027-452 [Cause] IP address of IPv4 already exists.
[Remedy] Change the IP address of IPv4 set on the machine or the IP
address of IPv4 on the network device.
027-500 [Cause] Unable to connect to the SMTP server. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Specify the SMTP server name correctly or specify the server by
using its IP address.
027-501 [Cause] A POP server error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
027-502 [Cause] Failed to log into the POP3 server when using the POP3 protocol. 15
[Remedy] Confirm whether the user name and password used in the POP3
server are correct on CentreWare Internet Services.
027-503 [Cause] A POP server error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.

567
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-504 [Cause] An SMTP server error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
027-513 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because access to the SMB server was not permitted.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator for settings.
027-514 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because an error has been occurred between the SMB
server and the DNS server.
[Remedy] Check the following conditions:
z
The SMB server is connected to the DNS server.
z
The SMB server name is registered on the DNS server.
027-515 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because an error has been occurred.
[Remedy] Take the following measures:
z Set the DNS server address.

z
Set the target SMB server address using IP address.
Problem Solving

15

568
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-516 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1) The SMB server of the destination computer cannot be found
while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC service
(TCP/IP session establishment failed).
2) The SMB server specified as the destination does not respond
to the machine while transferring data using SMB of the Scan
to PC service.
3) Failed to name resolution of the SMB server specified as
destination to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service.
[Remedy] 1) Take one of the following measures:
z
Confirm the connection of the network cable.
z For communications over subnet, confirm the
WINS server settings, and check whether the
server address can be resolved correctly.
z File Sharing service (communicating via port 137
(UDP), port 138 (UDP), and port 139 (TCP)) is
authorized for the Firewall settings of the
destination SMB server.
2) Check whether the file sharing service is enabled on the
destination SMB server.
z The file sharing service of Microsoft network is
enabled.
If the error still is not resolved, check the following setting.
z NetBIOS over TCP/IP for TCP/IP is activated.
3) Take one of the following measures:
z When the destination SMB server name is
specified using the FQDN (example:
mypc01.fuji0.co.jp), confirm that the DNS server
address is set correctly in the Connectivity &
Network Setup of the machine.
z If the connection with the DNS server has any
problem, check whether the destination server
name set in the machine is registered on the DNS
Problem Solving
server.
027-518 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because the specified password was incorrect.
When the server is Macintosh, the specified user may not have
been registered as a user who is permitted to use File Sharing.
[Remedy] Confirm the password for the shared folder. When the server is
Macintosh, specify a user who is permitted to use File Sharing. 15

569
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-519 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because the save location or file name specified for the
scanned image had a problem.
z
The save location or the file name has a problem.
z
The specified save location does not exist on the server.
z Invalid characters are used in the save location or the file

name.
z
Because the specified save location has the Distributed File
System (DFS) settings, it is linked to another shared folder.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Check whether the save location is correct
z Check whether the specified file name can be used on the

SMB server.
z
Confirm the Distributed File System (DFS) settings with your
system administrator.
To confirm the settings, execute the following procedures:
1) Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Administrative Tools] >
[Distributed File System] on the SMB server.
2) Select the specified save location from the left side frame of
the [Distributed File System] window, and then confirm the
target information displayed on the right side frame of the
window.
3) Specify the SMB server, shared name, and save location based
on the information you confirmed in step 2.
027-520 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because the file name or folder name could not be
retrieved.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege to the SMB server.
027-521 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because the suffix of the name of the file or folder
exceeded the limit value.
[Remedy] Change the file name or forwarding destination folder of the
scan server. Or, try moving or deleting the files within the
forwarding destination folder.
027-522 [Cause] During forwarding using SMB of the Scan to PC service, the
Problem Solving

scanned image file could not be created on the SMB server

because of one of the following reasons:
z The specified file name already exists.

z
The specified file name has already been used.
z The specified file name exists as a directory.

z Invalid characters are used in the file name.

15 [Remedy] Take one of the following measures:

z
Check whether the specified file name can be used in the
save location.
z Check whether the specified file name has been used by

another user.
z Check whether the specified file name has been used for

another file or folder.

570
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-523 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because a folder could not be created on the SMB server.
The specified folder already exists.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified name is being used for another file
or folder on the SMB server.
027-524 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because a folder could not be created on the SMB server.
The specified folder already exists.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified name is being used for another file
or folder on the SMB server.
027-525 [Cause] During forwarding using SMB of the Scan to PC service, a file
could not be deleted from the SMB server because of one of the
following reasons:
z
The file does not exist.
z
The file is opened.
z The specified file name is being used as a directory.

[Remedy] Check whether the file is not being used by another user at the
specified save location.
027-526 [Cause] The machine failed to delete the lock directory on the SMB
server while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service.
[Remedy] If the lock directory (*.LCK) exists in the destination, delete it
manually, and then execute the operation again.
027-527 [Cause] During forwarding using SMB of the Scan to PC service, a folder
could not be deleted from the SMB server because of one of the
following reasons:
z The file does not exist.

z
The directory is not empty.
z
The specified directory name does not exist.
[Remedy] Check whether the file is not being used by another user at the
specified save location.
027-528 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because no space is available at the save location on the
SMB server.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Check whether the save location has free space.
027-529 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because an unexpected error has been received from the
SMB server, or an unexpected internal error has occurred on the
machine.
[Remedy] Log into the server from another computer using the same user
name, to confirm whether a file can be written into the same
save location on the server. If the error still is not resolved, it
15
may be an internal error. Contact our Customer Support Center.
027-530 [Cause] There are duplicate file names. [Do Not Save] is set as a
handling method when names are duplicated for scanned files.
[Remedy] Set the process to be executed when in case of a file name
duplication to other than [Do Not Save].

571
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-531 [Cause] Detected an incorrect filing policy (when add was selected)
after connecting to the server.
[Remedy] When [Rename New File] is set as the process to be executed in
case of a file name duplication, confirm that the file format is
not multi-page.
027-532 [Cause] Failed to access the NEXTNAME.DAT file.
[Remedy] When [Rename New File] is set as the process to be executed in
case of a file name duplication, check the NEXTNAME.DAT file is
correct.
027-533 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
027-543 [Cause] The SMB server (NetBIOS) name is invalid.
[Remedy] Check whether the server name of the SMB server is correct.
027-547 [Cause] SMB protocol error. An invalid character was detected in the
specified domain name.
[Remedy] If the error occurred during SMB authentication: Consult your
network administrator for the domain name, and then set it
correctly.
Also, check whether the domain name set on the machine is
correct.
To confirm the settings, execute the following procedures:
1) Enter the System Administration mode, and select [Tools] >
[System Settings] > [Connectivity & Network Setup] >
[Remote Authentication/Directory Service] > [SMB Server
Settings].
2) Select the SMB server to confirm the domain name.
If the error occurred during transferring using SMB of the Scan
to PC service:
Consult your network administrator whether the domain name
specified when entering login name is correct.
To confirm the domain name on the server, execute the
following procedures:
Problem Solving

1) Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Administrative Tools] > [Active

Directory Domains and Trusts] on the Active Directory
domain controller.
2) From the left side frame of the [Active Directory Domains and
Trusts] window, select [Active Directory Domains and Trusts]
> [Domains]. Right-click [Domains] to select [Properties].
3) Select [General] tab in the domain properties window, and
15 confirm the domain name (prior to Windows 2000).

572
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-548 [Cause] SMB protocol error. An invalid character has been detected in
the specified user name.
[Remedy] Ask your network administrator to set the user name with valid
characters.
To confirm the user name on the server, execute the following
procedures:
1) Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Administrative Tools] > [Active
Directory Users and Computers] on the Active Directory
domain controller where the user information is set.
2) Select [Active Directory Users and Computers] > [Server] >
[Domains] > [Users] from the left side frame of the [Active
Directory Users and Computers] window, to display the user
information.
3) Right-click the target user from the right side frame of the
[Active Directory Domains and Trusts] window to select
[Properties].
4) Select the [Account] tab in the [User Properties] window, and
confirm the user name of [User Log On Name (Prior to
Windows 2000)].
027-549 [Cause] SMB protocol error
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
027-564 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The SMB server was not found.
[Remedy] Check whether the connection between the authentication
server and the machine has been established via a network.
For example, confirm the following conditions:
z
Network cable connection
z
TCP/IP settings
z Connection via Port 137 (UDP), Port 138 (UDP), and Port 139

(TCP)
027-565 [Cause] SMB protocol error
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
027-566 [Cause] SMB protocol error. SMB (TCP/IP) is not active.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Enter the System Administration mode, and select [Tools] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Port Settings].On this screen,
confirm [SMB Client] is set to [Enabled].
027-569 [Cause] The SMB (TCP/IP) port is not activated.
[Remedy] Enter the System Administration mode, and select [Tools] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Port Settings].On this screen,
confirm [SMB Client] is set to [Enabled]. 15
027-572 [Cause] SMB protocol error
027-573 [Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
027-574 contact our Customer Support Center.
027-576
027-578

573
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-584 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The SMB server is in shared security mode.
[Remedy] The SMB server may be set on Windows 95, Windows 98, or
Windows Me OS. Set the SMB server on an OS other than
Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows Me OS.
027-585 [Cause] SMB protocol error. Login is disabled at this time.
[Remedy] Confirm the period login permitted with your system
administrator.
027-586 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The password has expired.
[Remedy] Obtain a valid password from your system administrator.
027-587 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The password must be changed.
[Remedy] Log into Windows, and change the password. Ask your system
administrator to change the setting so that you do not need to
change the login password next time.
027-588 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The user is invalid.
[Remedy] Ask your system administrator to validate the user.
027-589 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The user was locked out.
[Remedy] Ask your system administrator to cancel the lockout status.
027-590 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The user account has expired.
[Remedy] Obtain a valid user account from your system administrator. Or,
ask your system administrator to extend the account expiration
date.
027-591 [Cause] SMB protocol error. Users are restricted. A blank password is
invalid.
[Remedy] Set the password for the user.
027-700 [Cause] The domain section of the recipient's e-mail address is a
prohibited domain.
[Remedy] Specify a domain that is not prohibited for the domain section
of the recipient's e-mail address.
027-701 [Cause] The network cable is disconnected from the machine.
[Remedy] Connect the network cable securely if the cable is disconnected.
Problem Solving

027-702 [Cause] The specified recipient's certificate does not exist.

[Remedy] Register the certificate for the recipient on the machine.
027-703 [Cause] The specified recipient's certificate has expired.
[Remedy] Register a valid certificate for the recipient on the machine.
027-704 [Cause] The CA certificate of the specified recipient's certificate does
not exist.
15 [Remedy] Confirm the path to the recipient's certificate, and register the
required CA certificate on the machine.
027-705 [Cause] The specified recipient's certificate has been revoked.
[Remedy] Specify a valid certificate for the recipient.
027-706 [Cause] Unable to find the S/MIME certificate associated with the
machine's e-mail address when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Import the S/MIME certificate corresponding to the mail
address to the machine.

574
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-707 [Cause] The S/MIME certificate associated with the machine's e-mail
address has expired when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to issue a new S/MIME certificate, and then
import the certificate to the machine.
027-708 [Cause] The S/MIME certificate associated with the machine's e-mail
address is not reliable when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Import a reliable S/MIME certificate to the machine.
027-709 [Cause] The S/MIME certificate associated with the machine's e-mail
address has been discarded when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Import a new S/MIME certificate to the machine.
027-710 [Cause] No S/MIME certificate is attached to the received e-mail.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to send the e-mail with an S/MIME certificate
attached.
027-711 [Cause] No S/MIME certificate can be obtained from the received e-
mail.
[Remedy] Import the sender's S/MIME certificate to the machine, or ask
the sender to send S/MIME signature mail with an S/ MIME
certificate attached.
027-712 [Cause] The received S/MIME certificate has expired, or is an unreliable
certificate.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to send the e-mail with a valid S/MIME
certificate attached.
027-713 [Cause] The received e-mail has been discarded because it may have
been altered on its transmission route.
[Remedy] Inform this error to the sender, and ask the sender to send the e-
mail again.
027-714 [Cause] The received e-mail has been discarded because the address in
its From field is different from the mail address in the S/MIME
signature mail.
[Remedy] Inform the sender that the mail addresses differ, and ask the
sender to send the e-mail again.
027-715 [Cause] The received S/MIME certificate has not been registered on the
machine, or has not been set for use on the machine. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Import the sender's S/MIME certificate to the machine, or
change settings to use the S/MIME certificate on the machine if
the S/MIME certificate has already been registered.
027-716 [Cause] The received S/MIME certificate has been discarded because
the certificate was unreliable.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to send the e-mail with a reliable S/MIME
certificate attached.
15
027-717 [Cause] Unable to obtain SMTP server address for e-mail transmissions
from the DNS server.
[Remedy] Check whether the DNS server is set correctly.

575
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-720 [Cause] Unable to find the server of an application interface
destination.
[Remedy] Confirm the DNS server address. Or, check whether the
computer on which the application (ApeosWare Flow Service) is
installed has been registered on the DNS server.
027-721 [Cause] An application interface destination does not exist.
[Remedy] Check whether the application linked (ApeosWare Flow Service)
is operating correctly.
027-722 [Cause] The jobs timed out during connection with an application
interface destination.
[Remedy] Try processing the job flow again.
027-723 [Cause] Authentication at the application interface destination
(ApeosWare Flow Service) failed.
[Remedy] Confirm the user name and password that is used when
creating a job flow.
027-724 [Cause] An application interface destination (ApeosWare Flow Service)
could not be accessed.
[Remedy] Check whether ApeosWare Flow Service is operating correctly. If
it is operating correctly, confirm the log.
027-725 [Cause] A job operation failed using an application interface.
[Remedy] Check whether the application linked (ApeosWare Flow Service)
is operating correctly. If it is operating correctly, confirm the log.
If it is not operating, confirm the network environment.
027-726 [Cause] The status of the application interface destination (ApeosWare
Flow Service) is unknown.
[Remedy] Check whether ApeosWare Flow Service is operating correctly. If
it is operating correctly, confirm the log.
027-727 [Cause] A parameter is illegal during an application interface.
[Remedy] Try processing the job flow again.
027-728 [Cause] The number of files that are to be sent to external services
exceeded the maximum number.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of files, and send them again.
Problem Solving

027-730 [Cause] The number of the document pages attached to the SMTP mail
exceeds the maximum number of pages allowed for the Split
Send feature.
[Remedy] Increase the number of pages allowed for the Split Send
feature, or reduce the number of the document pages.
027-731 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
15 [Remedy] After the scanning for Network Scanning completes, execute
the operation again.
027-732 [Cause] The Network Scanning server is full, or a server disk error
occurred.
[Remedy] Check the amount of available disk space. If the disk space is
sufficient and the error still is not resolved, check the status of
the disk of the server.

576
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-733 [Cause] The SSL setting on the Network Scanning server is disabled.
[Remedy] Enable the SSL setting of the Network Scanning server.
027-734 [Cause] The certificate of the server used for Network Scanning is not
set correctly.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The Network Scanning server is accessible from your
computer using HTTPS protocol.
z
The SSL server certificate of the Network Scanning server is
registered on the machine.
z The SSL server certificate of the Network Scanning server is

correct.
z
When the certificate is not registered on the Network
Scanning server, disable the server certificate validation
feature of the machine.
027-735 [Cause] The data transfer using SSL is specified, but the SSL setting of
the machine is disabled.
[Remedy] Enable the SSL setting, or specify HTTP for the transfer protocol.
027-736 [Cause] The server certificate verification feature of the machine is
disabled when the server certificate verification is required.
[Remedy] Enable the server certificate validation. Or, disable the server
certificate validation for data transfer.
027-737 [Cause] An error occurred while reading data from the pool server for job
templates.
[Remedy] Check on the directory where the job templates are stored, and
confirm whether the settings including the access privilege are
correct.
027-739 [Cause] A specified pool server for job templates cannot be found.
[Remedy] Confirm the path name of the pool server for job templates.
027-740 [Cause] Login to the pool server for job templates failed.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the login user name and the login password
are correct.
027-741 [Cause] Unable to connect to the pool server for job templates.
[Remedy] Consult your network administrator for the network Problem Solving
environment and the server configuration.
027-742 [Cause] The capacity of the hard disk is insufficient and job templates
cannot be stored.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk
space.
027-743 [Cause] The settings of the pool server for job templates are not correct. 15
[Remedy] Confirm whether the settings of the pool server for job
templates are correct.
027-744 [Cause] Problem with the domain name of the pool server for job
templates.
[Remedy] Confirm the DNS server connection and check whether the
domain name is registered on the DNS server.

577
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-745 [Cause] DNS server address is not registered on the machine.
[Remedy] Register the DNS server address on the machine or set the
address of the pool server for job templates as IP address.
027-746 [Cause] The protocol setting of the pool server for job templates is not
correct.
[Remedy] Enable a proper port.
027-750 [Cause] Attempted to execute a fax, a print, or an Internet fax
transmission to the scanned document.
[Remedy] The Fax, Print, or Internet Fax features are unavailable for
scanned documents. Set the job flow correctly.
027-751 [Cause] An error occurred during job flow processing.
[Remedy] Confirm the settings of the job flow.
027-752 [Cause] A mandatory entry field is blank in the job flow.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Do not link folders to job flows that have mandatory entry
fields.
z
Set the default values to the mandatory fields of the job
flow.
027-753 [Remedy] 1) Attempted to execute the service while the port necessary for
the job flow is either deactivated or disabled.
2) Attempted to execute a job flow to send e-mail using the
Encryption or Digital Signature feature while S/MIME
communication is disabled.r.
[Remedy] For 1), have your system administrator confirm the port status.
For 2), enable S/MIME communication, or modify the job flow
so that e-mail is sent by not using the Encryption or Digital
Signature feature.
027-754 [Cause] [DocuWorks Signature] or [PDF Signature] is set inconsistency in
the job flow.
[Remedy] Check the DocuWorks and PDF signatures for both the system
data settings (machine's current settings) and the executed job
flow settings. If these settings differ, coordinate them.
Problem Solving

15

578
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-757 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1) An error occurred while connecting the server.
2) The reliable certificate has not been registered on the
machine.
3) The server addresses of the SSL server and the destination
server are not same.
4) The machine tries to communicate with the server using the
encryption method which is not supported on the machine.
5) The SSL client certificate has not been registered on the
machine.
6) The server certificate has been expired or will be expired
soon.
[Remedy] For 1), Check connection between the machine and the server,
or the machine and the DNS server using ping or trace route.
For 2), Import the CA certificate and intermediate certificate
reliable to the SSL server to the machine.
For 3), Check whether or not the machine communicates via the
SSL proxy server which enables you to confirm the SSL
communication. When the machine uses the server, set the
machine not to use the SSL proxy server.
For 4), Check the encryption method supported on the machine.
Set the available encryption method to the SSL server setting.
For 5), Import the SSL client certificate and configure the
setting to use the certificate.
For 6), Check the date and time registered on the machine is
precise. If they are not, adjust the gap.
027-759 [Cause] The connection to the LDAP server referred by the LDAP server
specified in [LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings] is failed.
[Remedy] Make sure the network settings of the machine are correctly set.
If the same message is displayed again, consult the network
administrator and check the connection from the machine to
the server.
027-760 [Cause] An invalid parameter is specified by XJT command.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Confirm the specified parameter.
027-761 [Cause] An on-demand print job was sent to the machine using the Web
Applications feature, but the time interval from receiving the
print job until starting the print processing exceeded the time
limit specified on the machine.
[Remedy] When multiple documents are to be printed, reduce the number
of documents, and then execute the operation again. 15
When on-demand printing is executed using the Web
Application feature, the print processing time is limited.
Consequently if many documents are to be printed or if print
processing takes time, a timeout may occur before all the data
are received. To resolve this problem, change the time limit
value according to the document volume and type. If the error
still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.

579
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-762 [Cause] An on-demand print job is sent to the machine using the Web
Applications feature, however, the specified job ticket is invalid
because of one of the following causes:
z
Abnormal change to the job ticket because of the machine
software failure
z
Abnormal change to the job ticket because of a bug on the
sender's remote server
z Abnormal change to the job ticket because of network

trouble
z
Intentional alteration to the job ticket
[Remedy] Execute the print job again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
027-763 [Cause] The machine failed to verify the user information against the
remote accounting server.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Check whether the remote accounting server is operating
properly.
z Check whether there is no network failure.

z Connect the network cable securely.

z
Confirm the settings on the machine.
027-770 [Cause] The print job has a problem.
[Remedy] Submit the print job again.
027-771 [Cause] The hard disk of the server connected to the machine is full.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the server.
027-772 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Use ASCII characters to modify the host name that has been
specified under [Tools] > [Connectivity & Network Setup] >
[Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name]. If the error still is not
resolved, confirm with your network administrator whether the
SMTP server supports the HELO command.
027-773 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again.
027-774 [Cause] The specified e-mail address contains unsupported characters.
Problem Solving

[Remedy] Specify the e-mail address using only ASCII characters.

027-775 [Cause] Too many destination addresses have been specified.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of destination addresses. If the error still is
not resolved, confirm with your network administrator whether
the SMTP server supports the EHLO command.

15 027-776 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Use ASCII characters to modify the host name that has been
specified under [Tools] > [Connectivity & Network Setup] >
[Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name]. If the error still is not
resolved, confirm with your network administrator whether the
SMTP server supports the EHLO command.
027-777 [Cause] The destination SMTP server does not support SMTP-AUTH.
[Remedy] Set [E-mail Send Authentication] to [Off] under [Tools] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail
Settings] > [SMTP Server Settings].

580
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

027-778 [Cause] The destination SMTP server does not support the SMTP-AUTH
system set on the machine.
[Remedy] Confirm the authentication type supported by the SMTP server
with your network administrator. The machine supports the
following authentication types: AUTH GSSAPI (only for
Kerberos), AUTH NTLMv2, AUTH NTLMv1, AUTH PLAIN, AUTH
LOGIN, AUTH CRAM-MD5.
027-779 [Cause] Failed to authenticate the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Confirm the login name and password set to SMTP-AUTH.
027-796 [Cause] The received e-mail was discarded because no documents were
attached to it. (The machine is set to print attached documents
only.)
[Remedy] To print the mail body or header information also, change
settings in the [Properties] screen of CentreWare Internet
Services.

Reference
z Refer to "Computer Operations" > "E-mail Printing" in the User Guide.

027-797 [Cause] The output destination of the received e-mail is invalid.

[Remedy] Specify a correct output destination, and send the e-mail again.
027-798 [Cause] The specified document did not exist.
[Remedy] Check the job flow setting.
029-703 [Cause] An error occurred in the communication with the AirPrint Scan
client, or the client canceled the job.
[Remedy] Check the network communication with the AirPrint Scan client
by checking the following.
z Check that the amount of space of the AirPrint Scan clien is

enough.
z
Check the connection of the network cable.
033-310 [Cause] An error occurred.
033-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
033-312 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center. Problem Solving
033-313 [Cause] A communication error occurred between the machine and the
fax controller.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
033-314 [Cause] An error occurred. 15
033-315 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
033-316 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
033-317 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
033-318 Center.
033-319

581
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

033-320 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
033-321 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
033-322 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
033-323 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
033-324 [Cause] An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
033-325 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
033-326 [Cause] An error occurred.
033-327 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
033-328 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
033-329 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
033-330 [Cause] An error occurred.
033-331 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
033-332 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
033-333 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
033-334 Center.
033-335
033-336
033-338
033-339
Problem Solving

033-340
033-363
033-341 [Cause] An unsupported device is connected instead of Fax Kit 3.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
033-500 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
15 033-501 [Remedy] Confirm the recipient, and then execute the operation again. If
receiving, ask the sender to send again.
033-502 [Cause] A response is not received for the fax.
[Remedy] Confirm the recipient, and then execute the operation again.
Also, confirm the recipient's machine (memory is full, machine
is being maintained, or other conditions), and execute the
operation again.
033-503 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
033-504 [Remedy] Execute the operation again.

582
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

033-504 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission and the
communication was terminated.
[Remedy] If this error occurred when sending a fax, execute the operation
again. If this error occurred when receiving a fax, ask the sender
to send again.
033-505 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Confirm the recipient, and then execute the operation again. If
receiving, ask the sender to send again.
033-506 [Cause] Communication was terminated at the recipient's machine.
[Remedy] The job may have been canceled at the recipient. If the job was
not canceled, check whether the other machine has a problem,
and execute the operation again.
033-507 [Cause] The recipient's machine cannot receive.
[Remedy] Confirm the recipient's machine (memory is full, machine is
being maintained, or other conditions), and execute the
operation again.
033-508 [Cause] No spooling documents exist at the other machine.
[Remedy] Ask the other party to prepare polling documents, and execute
the operation again.
033-509 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
confirm the condition of the other machine.
033-510 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Confirm the condition of the line and the other machine, and
execute the operation again.
033-511 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Confirm the following conditions:
z Whether a polling document exists at the other machine

z Whether a document is jammed at the other machine

z
Whether the passwords match
033-512 [Cause] The other party cannot execute Relay Broadcast.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the other party can execute Relay Broadcast. Problem Solving
033-513 [Cause] The other machine does not have the Folder feature.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the other machine has the Folder feature.
033-514 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to send again.
033-516 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission. 15
[Remedy] Confirm the recipient, and then execute the operation again. If
receiving, ask the sender to send again.
033-517 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
confirm the condition of the other machine.
033-518 [Cause] The other machine cannot correspond to reception of SUB.
[Remedy] Check whether the other machine can correspond to reception
of SUB, and execute the operation again.

583
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

033-519 [Cause] The other machine cannot correspond to reception of SEP.
[Remedy] Check whether the other machine can correspond to reception
of SEP, and execute the operation again.
033-520 [Cause] The other machine cannot correspond to reception of PWD/SID.
[Remedy] Check whether the other machine can correspond to reception
of PWD/SID, and execute the operation again.
033-521 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Confirm the condition of the machine (memory is full, paper has
run out, or other conditions), and execute the operation again.
033-522 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to execute the operation again.
033-523 [Cause] The line (Channel 1) is not connected correctly.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection of the line (Channel 1) and connect it
correctly, and then execute the operation again. When the
machine is connected to other device such as a home gateway
and a terminal adapter, confirm whether the device works
properly.
033-524 [Cause] The line (Channel 2) is not connected correctly.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection of the line (Channel 2) and connect it
correctly, and then execute the operation again. When the
machine is connected to other device such as a home gateway
and a terminal adapter, confirm whether the device works
properly.
033-525 [Cause] The line (Channel 3) is not connected correctly.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection of the line (Channel 3) and connect it
correctly, and then execute the operation again. When the
machine is connected to other device such as a home gateway
and a terminal adapter, confirm whether the device works
properly.
033-526 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Confirm the model of the sender's machine, and then execute
the operation again. If receiving, ask the sender to send again.
Problem Solving

033-527 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.

[Remedy] Confirm the other machine has a problem, and then execute the
operation again.
033-528 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to send again.
033-529 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
15 [Remedy] Confirm the other machine has a problem, and then execute the
operation again.
033-530 [Cause] Received a procedure disabled signal.
[Remedy] Confirm the procedure for DTMF in the User Guide, and then
execute the operation again.

584
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

033-531 [Cause] Received a command rejection signal
[Remedy] Confirm the condition of the other machine (memory is full,
paper has run out, or other conditions), and execute the
operation again.
033-532 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
033-533 [Remedy] Execute the operation again. If receiving, ask the sender to send
again.
033-534 [Cause] The other machine does not offer a feature to print the number
of document sets sent.
[Remedy] Do not specify multiple sets.
033-535 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Confirm information such as the recipient and folder
information, and execute the operation again.
033-536 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
033-537 [Remedy] Execute the operation again.
033-538 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
033-539 [Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
033-540 contact our Customer Support Center.
033-541 [Cause] The recipient is not specified.
[Remedy] Specify the recipient correctly.
033-542 [Cause] A line was specified that is not connected.
[Remedy] Specify a connected line.
033-543 [Cause] The recipient (fax number) is incorrect.
[Remedy] Enter a correct fax number, and execute the operation again.
033-544 [Cause] The recipient's line is busy.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again.
033-545 [Cause] There was no response from the fax recipient.
[Remedy] Confirm that you specified the correct number, and execute the
operation again. If the same message is displayed again, the
recipient may not support fax, or the recipient machine may be
Problem Solving
powered off. Ask the recipient for details.
033-546 [Cause] A dial tone was not detected.
[Remedy] Check whether the line is connected correctly.
033-547 [Cause] Communication was terminated by a cause such as pressing the
<Stop> button.
[Remedy] No measure is required. 15
033-548 [Cause] Cannot transmit manually because a line is unavailable.
[Remedy] Establish communication such as by telephone, and execute the
operation again.
033-549 [Cause] Cannot use the Fax service because of causes such as memory is
insufficient.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and execute the operation again.

585
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

033-550 [Cause] Cannot execute another job because fax communication is in
progress.
[Remedy] Wait until the job being communicated completes, and then
execute the operation again.
033-551 [Cause] You attempted to change a job immediately before fax or
telephone communication completed.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and execute the operation again.
033-552 [Cause] The total quantity of error lines detected with G3 exceeded the
set value.
[Remedy] Confirm the model of the other machine, and execute the
operation again. If receiving, ask the sender to send again.
033-553 [Cause] This machine does not have confidential or relay function. The
F-code sent from the other machine contains an instruction for
a function not supported by the machine.
[Remedy] If necessary, check whether the sender entered an invalid F-
code.
033-554 [Cause] The password was omitted or did not match in fax
communication.
[Remedy] No measure is required.
033-555 [Cause] The password received from the other machine did not match
the password for receiving faxes on the machine.
[Remedy] Check whether the sender specified an incorrect machine
password.
033-556 [Cause] The password sent to the other machine did not match the
password for receiving faxes on the other machine.
[Remedy] If necessary, check whether the correct machine password has
been instructed to the other machine.
033-557 [Cause] The number of services or of recipients exceeds the maximum
limit.
[Remedy] Wait until the number of jobs awaiting transmission decreases,
or reduce the number of recipients, and then send again.
033-558 [Cause] The machine is set to reject faxes without a remote ID, and a
Problem Solving

remote ID was not sent from the other machine.

[Remedy] Ask the sender to set a remote ID. If necessary, set the machine
to receive even when a remote ID is not sent.
033-559 [Cause] The authentication ID is incorrect.
[Remedy] An error occurred during operation of the maintenance system
by Fuji Xerox. When the communication line is available, contact
15 our Customer Support Center.
033-560 [Cause] An error occurred during remote maintenance work.
033-561 [Remedy] This is an error occurring during remote maintenance work by
033-562 Fuji Xerox. No measure is required.
033-563 [Cause] Paper that can print faxed documents is not loaded in a tray.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Specify the paper size.

z Confirm whether the paper tray is set correctly.

586
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

033-564 [Cause] The machine was turned off during communication.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, confirm the fax service settings and the fax
number, and then send again if sending. If the error still is not
resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
033-565 [Cause] Cannot send because too many recipients are specified.
[Remedy] Wait until the number of jobs awaiting transmission decreases,
or reduce the number of recipients, and then send again.
033-566 [Cause] Cannot send because the recipient (fax number) is not specified.
[Remedy] Correctly specify the recipient's fax number.
033-567 [Cause] The recipient (fax number) is incorrect.
[Remedy] Correctly enter the recipient's fax number, and execute the
operation again.
033-568 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If receiving, ask the sender to send
again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
033-569 [Cause] Paper in the tray is not loaded in the direction that the received
fax data can be printed.
[Remedy] Load paper in Tray 5 according to the direction displayed on the
screen.
033-570 [Cause] The machine was turned off during communication.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, confirm the Fax service settings and the fax
number, and then send again if sending. If the error still is not
resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
033-571 [Cause] The Fax service is not available from a reason such as
insufficient memory.
[Remedy] Cancel the fax data in the queue, or wait for a while, and
execute the operation again.
033-572 [Cause] The data received is not printed.
[Remedy] No measure is required. The data will be printed after a while.
033-573 [Cause] Attempted to send an IP fax (SIP) to the recipient (domain) that
transmissions are not permitted. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Confirm the recipient and re-specify a recipient.

z Check the setting for Block Domains and re-specify a

recipient.
033-574 [Cause] An unavailable line is specified.
[Remedy] Specify an available line. 15
033-575 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again.
033-576 [Cause] The recipient (fax number) is incorrect.
[Remedy] Enter a correct fax number, and execute the operation again.
033-577 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again.

587
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

033-578 [Cause] An error occurred during fax receiving.
[Remedy] Confirm the status of the line and the recipient machine, and
then ask the sender to send again.
033-580 [Cause] No VoIP gateway is registered corresponding to the fax number
entered.
[Remedy] Specify the VoIP gateway address corresponding to the fax
number entered.
033-581 [Cause] Unable to connect to the SIP server because of an
authentication error.
[Remedy] Confirm the settings of login user name, login password, and
SIP server under [SIP Settings] > [SIP Proxy Server Setup].
033-582 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.
[Remedy] Check whether or not the recipient's machine supports IP fax
(SIP). If it is IP fax-enabled device, confirm the settings on the
SIP server.
033-583 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and execute the operation again.
033-584 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.
[Remedy] Confirm the following conditions:
z Whether the address or fax number entered is correct

z
Whether the network cable is connected
z
Whether the SIP server is enabled
z Whether the network cable between the machine and the

SIP server connected

z
Whether the network cable between the machine and the
recipient connected
z
Whether the status of the SIP server and the recipient is
available for communications
033-585 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
033-586 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and execute the operation again. And confirm
Problem Solving

the following conditions:

z Whether an IP address can be obtained

z Whether the machine can register to the registrar server

033-587 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.

[Remedy] Wait for a while, and execute the operation again. And confirm
the following conditions:
15 z
Whether the network cable is connected
z Whether the recipient machine is on

033-588 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.

[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If another job is being processed,
execute the operation again.

588
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

033-589 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.
[Remedy] Check whether or not the recipient's machine supports IP fax
(SIP). If it is IP fax-enabled device, contact our Customer
Support Center.
033-590 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.
[Remedy] Confirm the following conditions:
z
Whether the network cable is connected
z
Whether the recipient machine is on
033-591 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again after another processing job
finishes.
033-592 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.
[Remedy] Confirm the following conditions:
z Whether the network cable is connected

z
Whether the recipient machine is on
033-593 [Cause] An IP fax (SIP) was cancelled at the sender.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to send again.
033-700 [Cause] The connection is time out when a fax is send or the machine
receives a fax from a remote machine.
[Remedy] In sending a fax, execute the operation again.In receiving a fax,
the remote machine may cancel sending. Check the situation of
the remote machine.
033-701 [Cause] The connection is time out. The possible causes are as follows.
z
The recipient is during a call.
z
The phone number is wrong.
z The recipient is not a fax machine.

z
The line is not correctly connected.
[Remedy] Confirm the following:
z
The recipient is not during a call.
z The phone number is correct.

z The recipient is a fax machine.

z
The line is correctly connected.
Problem Solving
When there is no problem, retry the operation.
033-710 [Cause] The document to be sent by polling was deleted.
[Remedy] Store the document again.
033-712 [Cause] Unable to process because of insufficient memory.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data.
033-713 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
15
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
033-716 [Cause] The folder specified from the sender's machine does not exist.
[Remedy] Register the folder.

Reference
z Refer to "Create Folder" (P.276).

589
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

033-717 [Cause] The folder passcode specified from the sender's machine is
incorrect. Or, the machine passcode for reception is incorrect.
[Remedy] Inform the correct information to the sender's machine.
033-718 [Cause] Fax or polling documents do not exist in the folder specified
from the sender's machine.
[Remedy] Store fax or polling documents into the folder as necessary.
033-719 [Cause] The document may be deleted by turning the machine off and
then on.
[Remedy] Retry sending.
033-721 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
033-724 [Cause] The reception was interrupted because the image volume
exceeded the upper limit.
[Remedy] Install the Extension System Memory to increase the maximum
volume of image data.
033-725 [Cause] The hard disk is full.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk
space.
033-726 [Cause] The received document was printed with 1 sided printing,
because 2 sided printing is not available for mixed sized
documents.
[Remedy] No measure is required.
033-728 [Cause] The auto print formatting of the received fax document was
interrupted by a manual print operation.
[Remedy] No measure is required. The machine will automatically start
the auto print job after manual printing completes.
033-731 [Cause] The printing of the received fax document was interrupted.
[Remedy] The auto print processing of the received fax document was
interrupted by a manual print operation. No measure is
required.
Problem Solving

033-732 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system.

[Remedy] This is an error occurring during maintenance work by Fuji
Xerox. No measure is required.
033-733 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
15 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
033-734 [Cause] Because a report job was instructed while preparing to print a
received fax, the printing of the received fax is temporarily
suspended.
[Remedy] No measure is required.

590
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

033-735 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
033-736 [Cause] The forwarding job was interrupted because the data volume
exceeded the upper limit.
[Remedy] No measure is required.
033-737 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
033-738 [Cause] Received abnormal JBIG data.
[Remedy] No measure is required.
033-740 [Cause] The printing of the received fax document was interrupted.
[Remedy] No measure is required.
033-741 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
033-742 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission. This error may occur
if the remaining capacity of the machine's memory is 10% or
less and Manual Send is used.
[Remedy] If this error was caused when using Manual Send, connect the
line after storing the document, and then send. If the error still
is not resolved, delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to
free up disk space, and execute the operation again.
If the error persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
033-743 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
033-744 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
033-745 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. Try again. If
033-746 the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
033-747 [Cause] The job is temporarily suspended.
[Remedy] No measure is required. Problem Solving
033-749 [Cause] The machine will automatically recover and print the document.
[Remedy] No measure is required.
033-750 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. Try again. If
the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support 15
Center.
033-751 [Cause] An activity report output occurred during the printer lockout
duration. Outputting the activity report was suspended because
the machine was in the Sleep mode.
[Remedy] No measure is required because the machine will output the
report after exiting the Sleep mode.

591
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

041-310 [Cause] An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
041-333 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
041-334 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
041-335 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
041-340 [Cause] An error occurred.
041-341 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
041-388 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
041-391 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
042-325 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
042-330 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
043-342 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
043-343 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
043-344 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
044-312 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
044-313 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
044-329 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
Problem Solving

045-310 [Cause] An error occurred.

045-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
045-370 [Cause] An error occurred.

15 045-371 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
045-382 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.

592
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

045-396 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
045-398 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
045-399 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
047-213 [Cause] Detected the installation of a finisher of a different type than
expected.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
047-320 [Cause] An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
057-310 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
057-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
057-312 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
057-313 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
057-314 Center.
057-315
057-316
057-317
058-310 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device
058-311 connected.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center. Problem Solving

058-318 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.

058-319 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
058-320 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
058-321 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
059-326 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine. 15
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
059-372 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.

593
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

059-383 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
060-341 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
060-342 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
060-343 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
060-344 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
060-345 Center.
060-346
060-347
060-348 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
060-349 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
060-350 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
060-351 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
060-352 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
060-353 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
060-354 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
060-355 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
060-356 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Problem Solving

15

594
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

061-354 [Cause] An error occurred.
061-355 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
061-356 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
061-357 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
061-358 Center.
061-359
061-360
061-361
061-362
061-363
061-364
061-365
061-366
061-367
061-368
061-369
061-370
061-371
061-372
061-373
061-390
061-391
061-392
061-393
062-277 [Cause] A communication error occurred between the document
scanning unit and the document feeder.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
062-311 [Cause] An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
062-345 [Cause] An error occurred.
062-360 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen Problem Solving
062-362 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
062-371 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
062-380 Center.
062-386
062-389
062-393
062-790 [Cause] Copying of the scanned document is prohibited.
15
[Remedy] Refer to "1 Before Using the Machine" > "Legal Notice" in the
User Guide.
071-210 [Cause] Tray 1 malfunction
[Remedy] Confirm the paper loading condition for the Tray, and then
switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center. You can
use a tray other than Tray 1.

595
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

071-212 [Cause] Tray 1 malfunction
[Remedy] Execute the operation again.
072-210 [Cause] Tray 2 malfunction
[Remedy] Confirm the paper loading condition for the Tray 2, and then
switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center. You can
use a tray other than Tray 2.
072-212 [Cause] Tray 2 malfunctioned
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. You can use a tray other
than Tray 2.
073-210 [Cause] Tray 3 malfunction
[Remedy] Confirm the paper loading condition for the Tray, and then
switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center. You can
use a tray other than Tray 3.
073-212 [Cause] Tray 3 malfunction
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. You can use a tray other
than Tray 3.
074-210 [Cause] Tray 4 malfunction
[Remedy] Confirm the paper loading condition for the Tray, and then
switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center. You can
use a tray other than Tray 4.
074-212 [Cause] Tray 4 malfunction
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. You can use a tray other
than Tray 4.
077-212 [Cause] Detected the installation of a tray of a different type than
expected.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
Problem Solving

077-214 [Cause] Detected the installation of a tray of a different type than

077-215 expected.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
077-314 [Cause] An error occurred.
077-316 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
15 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
081-799 [Cause] [Fax Transfer from Address Book] is set to [On], but the fax
numebr of the forwarding destination is not registered in the
Address Book.
[Remedy] Register the fax number of the forwarding destination in the
Address Book, or set [Fax Transfer from Address Book] to [Off].

596
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

091-328 [Cause] An error occurred in the drum cartridge.
[Remedy] Reinstall the drum cartridge or replace the drum cartridge with a
new one. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
091-329 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
091-330 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
091-331 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
092-312 [Cause] An error occurred.
092-313 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
092-314 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
092-315 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
092-329 Center.
092-330
092-331
092-332 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
093-335 [Cause] An error occurred in the toner cartridge.
[Remedy] Reinstall the toner cartridge or replace the toner cartridge with
a new one. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
093-336 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
093-337 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
093-338 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
099-364 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center. Problem Solving

099-396 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.

099-397 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
099-398 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device 15
099-399 connected.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.

597
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

102-356 [Cause] An error occurred.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
103-310 [Cause] An error occurred.
103-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
103-312 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
103-313 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
103-314 Center.

112-700 [Cause] The finisher's hole punch waste container is full.

[Remedy] Empty the hole punch waste container.

Reference
z For more information on how to empty the hole punch waste container, refer to "Emptying
Punch Waste Container (for Finisher-B1)" (P.93).

116-210 [Cause] An error occurred in the USB memory device.

116-211 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
116-212 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
116-220 [Cause] Failed to enter the Download mode.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
116-310 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
116-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
116-312 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
116-313 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
116-314 Center.
116-319
116-321
116-322
116-323
116-324 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] If an error occurred while printing, turn off the machine once,
Problem Solving

then turn the machine on holding down both the <Start> and
<Stop> buttons simultaneously for six seconds. This deletes the
print data that caused the error. If the error was caused by
another reason, switch off the machine power, make sure that
the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine
power. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
15

598
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

116-325 [Cause] An error occurred.
116-328 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
116-329 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
116-330 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
116-331 Center.
116-333
116-334
116-336
116-337
116-338
116-339 [Cause] Job Based Accounting system started with no hard disk
installed.
[Remedy] To use the Job Based Accounting system, the hard disk is
required. Switch off the machine power, make sure that the
touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power to
reset the operation.
116-340 [Cause] An error occurred.
116-341 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
116-342 [Cause] An error occurred.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.

Problem Solving

15

599
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

116-343 [Cause] An error occurred.
116-345 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
116-346 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
116-347 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
116-348 Center.
116-349
116-350
116-351
116-352
116-353
116-354
116-355
116-356
116-357
116-358
116-359
116-360
116-361
116-362
116-363
116-364
116-365
116-366
116-367
116-368
116-370
116-371
116-372
116-373
116-374
116-375
116-376
116-377
116-378
116-379
Problem Solving

116-380
116-381
116-382
116-383
116-384
116-385
15 116-386 [Cause] The fax cable is not connected correctly.
[Remedy] Connect the cable securely, and then switch off the machine
power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then
switch on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.

600
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

116-387 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
116-388 [Cause] The optional hard disk is not installed.
[Remedy] Install the hard disk. Contact our Customer Support Center.
116-389 [Cause] The Extension System Memory is not installed.
[Remedy] Install the Extension System Memory. Contact our Customer
Support Center.
116-390 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Follow the message displayed on the touch screen and initialize
the memory of the machine.
116-391 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
116-392 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
116-393 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
116-394 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
116-395 Center.
116-396
116-397
116-399
116-701 [Cause] Unable to use the 2 Sided Printing feature because of
insufficient memory.
116-702 [Cause] A print job was processed using a substitute font.
[Remedy] Check the print data.
116-703 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1) An error occurred during PostScript (optional) processing.
2) An error occurred because of insufficient memory.
3) An error occurred because of insufficient memory for
PostScript processing.
[Remedy] For 1), check the print data.
For 2), increase memory. Problem Solving
For 3), increase the value for [PostScript Memory].
116-704 [Cause] An error occurred when reading data on the media.
[Remedy] Check whether the media is inserted correctly.
116-705 [Cause] An error occurred when reading data on the media.
116-706
116-707
[Remedy] Use a computer to confirm the content recorded on the media. 15
116-708
116-709
116-710 [Cause] The correct document size could not be judged because the
receive data exceeded the HP-GL/2 spool size.
[Remedy] Increase the size assigned to HP-GL/2 auto layout memory.

601
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

116-713 [Cause] The data has been divided into a number of jobs because of
insufficient disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk
space.
116-714 [Cause] An HP-GL/2 command error occurred.
[Remedy] Check the print data.
116-716 [Cause] An error occurred when reading the data on the media.
116-717 [Remedy] On a computer, confirm the content recorded on the media.
116-720 [Cause] An error occurred during print processing because of insufficient
memory.
[Remedy] Stop unnecessary ports or delete unnecessary data to free up
disk space.
116-725 [Cause] Failed to write the image log because the image log storage
area on the machine is insufficient.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If this error still is not resolved,
take one of the following measures:
z Delete unnecessary image logs.

z
Change the [Assurance Level] setting for image logs to [Low].
In this case, selecting [Low] does not secure the contents of
created image logs.
116-738 [Cause] The size and orientation of the form specified are not matched
with the paper to be printed.
[Remedy] Match the size and orientation of the paper with the form
specified, and print again.
116-739 [Cause] The form or logo data cannot be registered because memory for
the form and logo data or memory capacity for the hard disk is
insufficient.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data, or free up the space for the form
memory.
116-740 [Cause] A numerical value operation error occurred because a value
exceeding the value limit of the machine was used in the print
data.
Problem Solving

[Remedy] Check the print data.

116-741 [Cause] The form cannot be registered because the number of the form
registration exceeds the maximum number allowed.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary form. The maximum number allowed is
2048.
116-742 [Cause] The logo data cannot be registered because the number of the
15 logo data registration exceeds the maximum number allowed.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary logo data.
116-743 [Cause] The logo data or form cannot be registered because the
memory for the form and logo data is insufficient.
[Remedy] Increase memory.
116-746 [Cause] The form specified is not registered.
[Remedy] Use the form registered, or register the form.

602
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

116-747 [Cause] The paper margin value is too large for the HP-GL/2 active
coordinates area.
[Remedy] Decrease the paper margin value, and then execute the
operation again.
116-748 [Cause] There is no plot data in the HP-GL/2 print data.
[Remedy] Check the print data.
116-749 [Cause] The job was cancelled because the specified font does not exist.
[Remedy] Install the font, or set the print driver to replace the font.
116-750 [Cause] Banner sheet tray malfunction
[Remedy] Restore the tray to normal condition or change the Banner
sheet tray.
116-751 [Cause] The process has been canceled because the hard disk is full.
[Remedy] Delete stored data in the hard disk. If the error still is not
resolved, split the file and send the job again.
116-752 [Cause] The descriptions of the PDF or XPS printing job ticket have a
problem.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

116-771 [Cause] The data was automatically modified because it included an

116-772 invalid parameter.
116-773 [Remedy] The printed image may be incomplete. Confirm with the sender
116-774 whether the image has a problem, or ask the sender to send the
116-775 data again. When using the Internet Fax Forwarding feature,
confirm its condition with the e-mail recipient.
116-776
116-777
116-778
116-780 [Cause] There is a problem with the document attached to the received
e-mail.
[Remedy] Check the attached document.
Problem Solving
116-790 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1) If the operator cancelled printing a document that was
received using the Store Fax - Local Folder or Store Internet
Fax - Local Folder feature: The first set of the document is not
stapled.
2) For causes other than 1)
No set of the document is stapled.
[Remedy] For 1), manually staple the first set of the document. Or, do not
15
cancel printing of a document that is received using the Store
Fax - Local Folder or Store Internet Fax - Local Folder feature.
For 2), check whether the staple position has been correctly
specified, and try printing again.
117-310 [Cause] An error occurred while scanning a document via WSD.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. Execute the
same operation again.

603
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

117-311 [Cause] Data Security Kit is not attached correctly.
[Remedy] Insert Data Security Kit into the correct slot.
117-312 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
117-319 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
117-320 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
117-321 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
117-322 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
117-323 Center.
117-324
117-326 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
117-327 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
117-329 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
117-331 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
117-332 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
117-333 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
117-343 [Cause] Probable causes are follows.
1) When [Image Log Control] on Tools is invaled and [Enabled]
is set for [Log Transfer] under [Transfer Image Log] , [Transfer
Per Job Basis] is set for [Logs to Transfer].
2) When [Transfer Image Log] is invalid (the hard disk is not
installed), [Log Transfer] is set to [Enabled].
[Remedy] For 1), set other than [Transfer Per Job Basis] for [Log to
Transfer].
For 2), install the hard disk to tha machine, or set [Pause] for
[Logs To Transfer].
117-345 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device
connected.
[Remedy] Switch on the machine power without connecting the device for
Problem Solving

EP system, and then set [Login Type] to any option other than
[Login to Remote Accounts] under [Tools] > [Authentication/
Security Settings] > [Authentication].
117-347 [Cause] The life of the component which cannot be replaced is expired.
The machine itself needs to be replaced.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
15 117-348 [Cause] The unformatted SD card used in the other machine is installed.
117-350 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.

604
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

118-310 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
118-311 [Cause] An error occurred during software processing.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
121-310 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
121-311 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device
connected.
[Remedy] Once IC Card Reader (optional) is connected to the machine,
the machine automatically changes the [Passcode Entry for
Smart Card Login] setting to [On] under [Tools] >
[Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication] >
[Passcode Policy]. Change the setting as required.
121-312 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device
connected.
[Remedy] Switch on the machine power without connecting the device for
EP system, and then set [Login Type] to any option other than
[Login to Remote Accounts] under [Tools] > [Authentication/
Security Settings] > [Authentication].
121-313 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device
connected.
[Remedy] Switch on the machine power without connecting the device for
EP system, and then set [Login Type] to any option other than
[Login to Remote Accounts] under [Tools] > [Authentication/
Security Settings] > [Authentication].
121-314 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device Problem Solving
121-316 connected.
121-317 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
121-318 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
121-319 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
121-322
121-323
121-324
15

605
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

121-325 [Cause] The machine detects unacceptable combination.
The unacceptable combination are as follows:
z
Both the USB IC card reader and the EP related equipment
are used
z
[Login to Local Accounts] is set to [Login Type]
z [Smart Card or Control Panel Login] is set to [When Smart

Card Reader is Connected]

[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
When both Smart Card and Control Panel Login are not used,
the setting of [When Smart Card Reader is Connected] will be
automatically changed to [Smart Card Login]. No measure is
required.
z
When only the USB IC card reader is connected to the
machine and both Smart Card and Control Panel Login are
used, contact our Customer Support Center.
121-326 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
121-327 [Cause] The machine does not support the connected product.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
121-339 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device
connected.
[Remedy] Check the unit table for CoinKit. If an undefined item is included
in the table, correct the table. Switch off the machine power,
make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the
machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
Customer Support Center.
121-340 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device
121-350 connected.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
Problem Solving

is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same

message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.

15

606
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

123-310 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
123-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
123-312 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
123-325 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
123-326 Center.
123-333
123-343
123-344
123-350
123-352
123-353
123-354
123-355
123-356
123-357
123-358
123-362
123-368
123-369
123-371
123-374
123-377
123-379
123-380
123-381
123-382
123-383
123-384
123-389
123-390
123-392
123-393
123-395
123-396
123-397 Problem Solving
123-398
123-399

15

607
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

124-310 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
124-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
124-312 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
124-313 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
124-314 Center.
124-315
124-316
124-317
124-318
124-319
124-320
124-321
124-322
124-323
124-324
124-325
124-326
124-327
124-328
124-330
124-331
124-332
124-333
124-334
124-335
124-337
124-338
124-339
124-340
124-341
124-342
124-343
124-344
124-345
124-346
Problem Solving

124-347
124-348
124-349
124-350
124-351
124-352
15 124-353
124-354 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
124-355 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.

608
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

124-360 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
124-361 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
124-362 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
124-363 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
124-372 Center.
124-373
124-374
124-380 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
124-381 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
124-382 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
124-383 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
124-390 Center.
124-391
124-392
124-393
124-701 [Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. You can use any output
trays other than the defective output tray.
124-702 [Cause] The output destination was changed because of the
malfunction of the specified output tray (Finisher Tray).
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. You can use any output
trays other than the defective output tray.
124-705 [Cause] The punch setting was cancelled.
[Remedy] Confirm the punch position, and then execute the operation
again.
124-706 [Cause] The folding setting was cancelled.
[Remedy] Confirm the folding setting, and then execute the operation
again.
124-708 [Remedy] For 1), check whether the specified size paper is loaded in the
tray.
For 2), confirm whether the error code 012-231, 012-232, 012-
233, or 012-234 is displayed on the touch screen, and contact
our Customer Support Center.
124-709 [Cause] The document exceeded the maximum number of pages that Problem Solving
can be stapled.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of pages, or cancel the stapling setting,
then try printing again.
124-710 [Cause] The machine cannot output to the output destination specified.
A paper size or a paper type that cannot be output is specified
or the output destination fails.
[Remedy] No measure is required. The machine automatically selects the
15
available output destination. If the paper is not still output from
the specified output destination even after the correct paper
size and type is selected, contact our Customer Support Center.
125-311 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.

609
 Problem Solving

Error Code Cause and Remedy

127-310 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
127-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
127-312 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If same
127-313 message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
127-314 Center.
127-315
127-320
127-337
127-342
127-353
127-354
127-396
127-398
127-399
127-700 [Cause] The SIP registrar server cannot be used.
[Remedy] Check if the SIP registrar server is available. Also, confirm that
[SIP Registrar Server Setup] is set correctly under [Tools] >
[System Settings] > [Connectivity & Network Setup] > [SIP
Settings] > [SIP Registrar Server Setup].
133-210 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
133-211 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
133-212 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
133-213 is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
133-214
133-215
133-216
133-217
133-218
133-219
133-220
133-221
133-222
133-223
133-224
Problem Solving

133-226 [Cause] A country code not supported by the machine was specified.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
133-280 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
133-281 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
133-282 is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still
15 133-283 is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.

133-700 [Cause] The staple/hole punch setting was cancelled.

[Remedy] Check whether the staple/hole punch position is correct, and
then execute the operation again.

610
 Error Code

Error Code Cause and Remedy

133-701 [Cause] Unavailable characters are included in Name, Company Logo,
Fax Comment, or Local Name and the characters are converted.
[Remedy] Enter available characters to Name, Company Logo, Fax
Comment, or Local Name.
When the available characters are not clear, enter alphanumeric
characters only.
133-710 [Cause] When printing the received fax document, the paper loaded on
the bypass tray was used for printing because the specified tray
could not be used.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Load paper available for printing the received fax document:
A3SEF , A4LEF , B4SEF , B5LEF , A4SEF , A5SEF
, B5SEF , 8.5 X11”SEF , 8.5 X 13”SEF , 8.5 X 14”SEF ,
11 X 17”SEF , 8.5X 11”LEF , 5.5 X 8.5”SEF .
z
Use a paper type available for printing the received fax
document:
plain paper, bond paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, user-
defined custom paper.
z Confirm the settings by selecting [Tools] > [Fax Service

Settings] > [Fax Control] > [Receiving Paper Size].

1) Select [Receiving Paper Size] > [Tray Mode] to add a tray to be
used for printing the received fax documents.
2) Set up paper so that the tray specified for [Tray Mode] can be
used for printing the received fax documents.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.

Other Errors
This section describes the remedies when the following messages are displayed.

ErrorMessage Cause and Remedy

A fault has occurred. [Cause] An error occurred.
Switch off the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the Problem Solving
(xxx-yyy)
touch screen is blank, and then switch the machine
power on again.
If the message persists, record the content displayed
for [(xxx-yyy)]. Then immediately switch the main
power and power off, make sure that the touch
screen is blank, and then contact our Customer
Support Center. 15
Completed with an error. [Cause] An error occurred, and the operation terminated
(xxx-yyy) abnormally.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again.
A fault has occurred. The [Cause] An auto-recoverable internal error occurred, and the
machine has rebooted. machine restarted automatically.
Select [Close]. If the
[Remedy] Select [Close] to use the machine normally. If the
problem persists, call for
error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
service.
Support Center.
(xxx-yyy)

611
 Problem Solving

Paper Jams
When a paper jam occurred, the machine stops and an alarm beeps. A message is also
displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed
paper.
Gently remove the paper to avoid it to be torn. If the paper is torn, remove all the torn
pieces, making sure that none remain inside the machine.
If a paper jam message appears again after you have cleared the paper jam, another paper
jam may be occurred in some other parts of the machine. Clear this by following the
message.
When the paper jam is cleared, printing is automatically resumed from the point when the
paper jam occurred.
If you were during copying, press the <Start> button to resume the copying from the point
when the paper jam occurred.

WARNING
If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative. Do not pull out a tray, otherwise it may cause injuries.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove a paper deeply jammed inside the product, particularly
a paper wrapped around the fusing unit or the heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause
injuries or burns. Switch off the product immediately and contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative.

This section describes how to clear a paper jam occurring in the following locations
The following shows the reference section for the procedures to clear a paper jam in each
location.
"Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4" (P.613)
"Paper Jams in Tray 5" (P.613)
"Paper Jams in Top Left Cover A" (P.615)
Problem Solving

"Paper Jams in Bottom Left Cover B (for 2-tray configuration)" (P.617)

"Paper Jams in Bottom Left Cover B (for 4-tray configuration)" (P.617)
"Paper Jams in Top Left Cover C" (P.618)
"Paper Jams in Duplex Module" (P.619)
"Paper Jams in Finisher-A1" (P.620)
15 "Paper Jams in Finisher-B1" (P.621)
Important
z
When a paper jam occurred, if you pull out a paper tray without checking the paper jam location, the
jammed paper may be torn and the pieces may remain inside the machine. This may cause machine
malfunctions; therefore, always check where the paper jam occurred first.
z If any piece of jammed paper remains inside the machine, the paper jam message will not disappear from
the touch screen.
z Clear the paper jams while the machine is powered on. If you turn off the machine, all data stored on the
memory of the machine will be erased.
z Do not touch components inside the machine. This may cause print defects.

612
 Paper Jams

Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Trays 1 to 4.

1 Pull out the tray where the paper jam occurred.

Important
z If you pull out a paper tray without checking the paper jam location, the jammed paper may be torn and the
pieces may remain inside the machine. This may cause machine malfunctions; therefore, always check where
the paper jam occurred first.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

3 Push the tray in gently until it stops.

Paper Jams in Tray 5

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Tray 5.

1 While lifting up the release lever of the top left cover (1), open the cover gently (2). Problem Solving

15

613
 Problem Solving

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Important
z The fusing unit is extremely hot. Do not touch the fusing unit as it may result in burn injury.

Note
z If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of paper remains inside the machine.

3 Close the top left cover gently by pressing on the center of the cover.

4 Check the back of Tray 5 (around the paper feed entrance) and remove the jammed paper.

Important
z When two or more sheets of paper are loaded, remove all of the sheets from the tray.

Note
z If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of paper remains inside the machine.

5 When two or more sheets of paper were loaded, neatly align all four corners of the paper.

6 Insert the paper into the tray with the printing side facing down until its edge lightly
Problem Solving

touches against the paper feed entrance.

15

614
 Paper Jams

Paper Jams in Top Left Cover A

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the top left cover.
Important
z Do not touch the black film like the transfer belt inside the top left cover when you remove the jammed paper
because images might be shifted on the transfer belt. If you touch the belt, the image quality might be
deteriorated or the belt may be damaged and need replacement.

1 Open Tray 5.

„When the Side Tray (optional) is installed

Remove paper from the Side Tray.

2 While lifting up the release lever of the cover A (1), open the cover (2).

Problem Solving

15

615
 Problem Solving

3 If paper is jammed outside the fusing unit, remove the jammed paper, and then proceed to
step 6. If paper is jammed inside the fusing unit, proceed to step 4.

4 Pull down the lever A1 in the arrow direction, and then open the fusing unit cover.
Important
z The fusing unit is extremely hot. Do not touch the fusing unit as it may result in burn injury.

5 Remove the jammed paper in the arrow direction.

Important
z
The fusing unit is extremely hot. Do not touch the fusing unit as it may result in burn injury.

Note
z If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of paper remains inside the machine.
Problem Solving

15
6 Return the lever A1 to its original position to close the fusing unit cover.

7 Close the cover A firmly.

8 Close Tray 5.

616
 Paper Jams

Paper Jams in Bottom Left Cover B (for 2-tray configuration)

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the bottom left cover.

1 Gently open the bottom left cover B while pulling the release lever.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Note
z Paper may be jammed in the hidden area on the upper position. Check inside thoroughly.
z
If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of paper remains inside the machine.

3 Close the bottom left cover B gently.

Paper Jams in Bottom Left Cover B (for 4-tray configuration)

1 Gently open the bottom left cover C while pulling the release lever.
Problem Solving

15

617
 Problem Solving

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Note
z Paper may be jammed in the hidden area on the upper position. Check inside thoroughly.
z If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of paper remains inside the machine.

3 Close the bottom left cover gently.

Paper Jams in Top Left Cover C

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the top left cover.
Important
z Do not touch the black film like the transfer belt inside the top left cover when you remove the jammed paper
because images might be shifted on the transfer belt. If you touch the belt, the image quality might be
deteriorated or the belt may be damaged and need replacement.

1 Open Tray 5.

„When the Side Tray (optional) is installed

Problem Solving

Remove paper from the Side Tray.

15

618
 Paper Jams

2 While lifting up the release lever of the cover A (1), open the cover (2).

3 While lifting up the lever, open top left cover C.

Important
z
The fusing unit is extremely hot. Do not touch the fusing unit as it may result in burn injury.

4 Remove the jammed paper.

Note
z If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of paper remains inside the machine.

5 Close the top left cover C.

6 Push the center of the top left cover A and close the cover gently, and then close Tray 5.

Paper Jams in Duplex Module

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the duplex module.
Problem Solving
1 Open Tray 5 (1), and then while lifting up the lever of the cover A (2), gently open the cover
A (3).

15

619
 Problem Solving

2 Remove the jammed paper.

„If the paper is jammed in the chute of the cover A

Lift up the lever A2, remove the jammed paper, and return the lever A.

Note
z
If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of paper remains inside the machine.

3 Close the cover A, and then close Tray 5.

Paper Jams in Finisher-A1

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the Finisher-A1 (optional).
The following shows the reference section for the procedures to clear a paper jam in each
location.

Paper Jams under the Finisher Top Cover

1
Problem Solving

Open the finisher top cover (1), turn the knob (2), and then remove the jammed paper (3).

15

Note
z
If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of paper remains inside the machine.

2 Close the finisher top cover.

620
 Paper Jams

Paper Jams in Finisher-B1

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the Finisher-B1 (optional).

Paper Jams under the Finisher Top Cover

1 Push up the lever on the finisher top cover.

2 The finisher top cover opens.

3 Remove the jammed paper.

Problem Solving

Note
z If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of paper remains inside the machine.

4 Close the finisher top cover.

15

621
 Problem Solving

Paper Jams in the Center Unit

1 Lift the top cover and open.

Important
z The top cover cannot be detached from the machine.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Note
z If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of paper remains inside the machine.

3 Close the finisher top cover.

Problem Solving

15

622
 Document Jams

Document Jams
Document Jams
When a document jam occurred in the document feeder, the machine stops and a message
is displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed to clear the document
jam and then load the document in the document feeder again.

1 Pull up the handle of the top cover of the document feeder, and then open the top cover
until it stops.

Note
z When you fully open the cover, it enters a fixed position. Open the cover gently.

2 If the document is not caught in the entry of the document feeder, pull out the document.

3 If the message on the screen instructs you to turn the knob, turn the knob to eject the
document upward.
Problem Solving

15

Important
z If the document is caught, do not pull it out forcibly. The document could be damaged.

623
 Problem Solving

4 If the message on the display instructs you to open the inner cover, lift up the handle, and
open the inner cover.

handle

5 Turn the knob to eject the document upward to remove.

Important
z If the document is caught, do not pull it out forcibly. The document could be damaged.

6 Close the inner cover of the document feeder.

7 Close the left cover of the document feeder until it clicks into place, and confirm that there
is no space between the near or far side of the cover and the document feeder.

8 If you cannot find the document, lift the document feeder gently, and remove the
document if it is there, and then close the document feeder.

9 If you still cannot find the document in step 8, lift the document feeder tray and remove
the document.
Problem Solving

15

10 Return the document feeder tray gently.

624
 Document Jams

11 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and then load the document
again following the instructions displayed on the touch screen.
Note
z
After removing the jammed document, reload the entire document including the pages already scanned. The
machine will automatically skip the scanned pages and start scanning unscanned pages.
z Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such documents,
directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.

Problem Solving

15

625
 Problem Solving

Stapler Faults
This section describes how to clear stapler troubles when the optional finisher is installed.
Perform the procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or staples are
bent. Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you have tried the
following solutions.
Important
z Even if the sheets have been stapled together properly, staples may rise up depending on the way you handle
the sheets.

Unstapled Bent staple

If copies are stapled as shown in the figures below, contact our Customer Support Center.

One side of staple rising up Staple bent in reverse direction

Flattened staple Entire staple rising up

Problem Solving

Staple rising up with

15 center pressed in

626
 Stapler Faults

Important
z Remove the bent staple when opening the staple cartridge cover. If you do not remove the bent staple, a
staple jam may occur as a result. Use the staple cartridge cover only when removing the bent staple.

Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (For Finisher-A1)

This section describes how to clear staple jam occurred in the staple cartridge of the
Finisher-A1 (optional).

1 Make sure that the machine is not operating, and open the finisher front cover.

2 Take the staple cartridge out of the machine.

Note
z The staple cartridge is firmly inserted. A slight force is required to pull the cartridge out of the finisher.

3 After you take out the staple cartridge, check inside of the finisher for any remaining
staples.
Problem Solving

15

627
 Problem Solving

4 Pull up the metal part of the staple cartridge as shown in the illustration.

5 Remove the jammed staples (1), and then return the metal part pulled up in step 4 to the
original position (2).

CAUTION
Be careful in removing jammed staples.

6 Push the staple cartridge into the machine until it clicks into place.
Problem Solving

7 Close the finisher front cover.

Note
z
If the finisher front cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine remains paused.

15 If you cannot remove jammed staples even after you perform the above procedure,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (For Finisher-B1)

This section describes how to clear staple jam occurred in the staple cartridge of the
Finisher-B1 (optional).

628
 Stapler Faults

1 Make sure that the machine is not operating, and open the finisher front cover.

2 Grasp the handle as shown in the illustration to pull out the staple cartridge to the right,
towards you.

3 Move up the staple cartridge, and then take it out of the machine.

4 After you take out the staple cartridge, check inside of the finisher for any remaining
staples. Problem Solving

15

629
 Problem Solving

5 Pull up the metal part of the staple cartridge as shown in the illustration.

6 Remove the jammed staples (1), and then return the metal part pulled up in step 5 to the
original position (2).

CAUTION
z Be careful in removing jammed staples.

7 Push the staple cartridge into the machine until it clicks into place.
Problem Solving

8 Close the finisher front cover.

Note
z
If the finisher front cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine remains paused.
15

630
16
Appendix
16
 Appendix

Specifications
This section lists the main specifications of the machine. Note that the specifications and
the appearance of the product may change without prior notice.

Copy Function
„ Type
Console

„ Memory
4 GB (Maximum: 4 GB)

„ HDD (optional)
160 GB or larger (Usable Space: 128GB)
Important
z Not all the HDD space described above can be used.

„ Color Capability
Full color

„ Scanning Resolution
600 X 600 dpi

„ Printing Resolution
600 X 600 dpi

„ Halftone/Printable Colors
256 levels of color (16.7 Million colors)

„ Warm-up Time
z With HDD
32 seconds or less.
22 seconds or less if the main power is on (24 °C room temperature)
z
Without HDD
30 seconds or less.
18 seconds or less if the main power is on (24 °C room temperature)
Appendix

„ Original Size
The maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17") for both sheets and books.
16 „ Paper Size
[Paper Tray 1 to 4]
z
Maximum : A3, 11 x 17"
z Minimum : A5
[Paper Tray5]
z
Maximum : A3, 11 x 17"

632
 Specifications

z Minimum : Postcard (148 X 100 mm), Envelope Monarch (191 x 98 mm)

Image loss width: Top edge, 4 mm or less; bottom edge, 2 mm or less; left and right edges,
2 mm or less

„ Paper Weight
Paper Tray 1 to 4: 60 to 256 gsm
Paper Tray 5: 60 to 216 gsm
Important
z Use paper recommended by Fuji Xerox. Copying may not be performed correctly depending on the
conditions.

„ First Copy Output Time

Important
z
The values may vary depending on the machine configuration.

Monochrome: 5.9 seconds (for A4 /monochrome priority mode)

Color: 8.1 seconds (for A4 /color priority mode)

„ Continuous Copy Speed

Important
z When paper is fed from Tray 5 and the paper size is set to [Auto Detect], the printing speed for the first page
will be slower.
z The speed may be reduced due to image quality adjustment.
z The performance may be reduced depending on the paper type or paper tray.
z When paper in width narrower than B5, such as postcards, isoutput continuously, the temperature on the
fusing unit becomes high. As a result, the machine may suspend the output, displaying a message "Please
wait", and may resume in 1 minute. Also, for paper A5 or smaller, even after 1 sheet of paper is output, the
machine may suspend with a "Please wait" message and may resume in 30 seconds.
<DocuCentre-V C2265>
z
A4 /B5
Monochrome: 25 sheets/minute
Color: 25 sheets/minute
z A4
Monochrome: 19 sheets/minute
Color: 19 sheets/minute
z B4
Monochrome: 16 sheets/minute
Appendix

Color: 16 sheets/minute
z
B5
Monochrome: 14 sheets/minute
Color: 14 sheets/minute 16
z A3
Monochrome: 14 sheets/minute
Color: 14 sheets/minute
<DocuCentre-V C2263>
z
A4 /B5

633
 Appendix

Monochrome: 20 sheets/minute
Color: 20 sheets/minute
z A4
Monochrome: 16 sheets/minute
Color: 16 sheets/minute
z
B4
Monochrome: 13 sheets/minute
Color: 13 sheets/minute
z B5
Monochrome : 11 sheets/minute
Color: 11 sheets/minute
z A3
Monochrome: 11 sheets/minute
Color: 11 sheets/minute

„ Paper Tray Capacity

z 4-tray model
Standard: 500 sheets x 4 trays + 100 sheets (bypass tray)
Maximum paper capacity: 2,100 sheets (Same as the standard)
z 2-tray model
Standard: 500 sheets x 2 trays + 100 sheets (bypass tray)
Maximum paper capacity: 1,100 sheets (Same as the standard)
Important
z When using 80 gsm paper.

„ Output Tray Capacity

Exit 2 Tray: approximately 250 sheets (A4 )
Center tray: approximately 250 sheets (A4 )
Important
z
When using 80 gsm paper

„ Power Supply
AC220-240 V ± 10%, 8 A, 50/60 Hz ± 10 % common
Appendix

AC110 V ± 10%, 15 A, 60 Hz ± 10 % (1 Power)

„ Maximum Power Consumption

1.76 kW or less (AC 220 V±10%), 1.92 kW or less (AC 240 V±10%), 1.65 kW or less (AC 110
16 V±10%)
Sleep mode: 1.0 W or less (AC 230 V), 1.0 W or less (AC 115 V)
Low Power mode: 53 W or less (AC 230 V), 54 W or less (AC 115 V)

634
 Specifications

„ Dimensions
Standard: Width 590 x Depth 659 x Height 768 mm
When the 1 Tray Module is installed: Width 590 x Depth 659 x Height 882 mm
When the 1 Tray Module with Cabinet is installed: Width 616 x Depth 659 x Height 1,119
mm
When the 3 Tray Module is installed: Width 616 x Depth 659 x Height 1,119 mm

„ Weight
Standard: 68 kg
When the 1 Tray Module is installed: 78 kg
When the 1 Tray Module with Cabinet is installed: 92 kg
When the 3 Tray Module is installed: 94 kg
Important
z The weight is without the power cord, a toner cartridge or any paper.

„ Space Requirement
Width 969 x Depth 659 mm (when the Bypass tray is fully extended and the stopper of
DADF is turned on)

Print Function
„ Type
Built-in

„ Continuous Print Speed

Same as the Basic Specifications / Copy Function
Important
z
The speed may be reduced due to image quality adjustment. The speed may also be reduced depending on
the document attributes.

„ Print Resolution
1200 X 2400 dpi

„ Page Description Language

Standard: PCL6, PCL5
Optional: Adobe® PostScript® 3™
Appendix

„ Network Protocol
z Ethernet (standard):
TCP/IP (Ipd, IPP, Port9100, WSD, ThinPrint®)
Note 16
z WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

„ Supported Operating System

z
Standard : PCL6
Windows Server® 2003,

635
 Appendix

Windows Server® 2003 x64,

Windows Vista® ,
Windows Vista® x64,
Windows Server® 2008,
Windows Server® 2008 x64,
Windows® 7,
Windows® 7 x64,
Windows Server® 2008 R2 x64,
Windows ® 8,
Windows ® 8 x64,
Windows Server® 2012 x64,
Windows Server® 2012 R2 x64,
Windows ® 8.1,
Windows ® 8.1 x64,
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks,
OS X 10.10 Yosemite
z Optional : PostScript® 3TM
Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Server® 2003 x64,
Windows Vista® ,
Windows Vista® x64,
Windows Server® 2008,
Windows Server® 2008 x64,
Windows® 7,
Windows® 7 x64,
Windows Server® 2008 R2 x64,
Windows ® 8,
Windows ® 8 x64,
Appendix

Windows Server® 2012 x64,

Windows Server® 2012 R2 x64,

16 Windows ® 8.1,
Windows ® 8.1 x64,
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks,
OS X 10.10 Yosemite
Important
z For information about the latest supported OS, contact our Customer Support Center.

636
 Specifications

„ Fonts
z Standard (PCL):
European 82 type faces, symbol 43 sets, Korean font 6 type faces, Chinese font 1 type
face, Chinese font 4 type faces (optional), Symbol set, Chinese Font (ShuSong), Korean
Fonts (Myungio, Gothic, Round Gothic, Graphic, Kungso, Saemul)
Japanese font 2 type faces, Japanese font (Heisei Mincho W3, Heisei Kaku Gothic W5)
z
Optional (Adobe® PostScript® 3™):
136 European fonts
TC/SC Additional Font ROM Kit: 4 Chinese Fonts (ShuSong, KaiTi, HeiTi, FangSong)

„ Emulation
ESC/P-K (LQ1900K II), TIFF, JPEG, PDF, XPS, HP-GL (HP7586B), HP-GL/2 /RTL (HP Designjet
750C Plus), DocuWorks, PCL5/PCL6 (HP Color LaserJet 5500), KSSM, KS5843, KS5895
Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

„ Interface
Ethernet 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, USB 2.0*
* : Supported by Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows
Server 2012, Windows Server 2012 R2, Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks,
OS X 10.10 Yosemite.

Scan Function (Optional)

„ Type
Color Scanner

„ Original Size
Same as the Basic Specifications / Copy Function

„ Scan Resolution
600 x 600 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi

„ Scanning Speed
Monochrome: 55 sheets/minute, Color: 55 sheets/minute
(For Fuji Xerox standard paper A4 , 200 dpi, Store to Folder)
Important
Appendix

z
The scanning speed varies depending on documents.

„ Interface
Ethernet 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T

„ Scan to Folder 16
z
Protocol:TCP/IP (WebDAV, HTTP)
z File Format:
- Monochrome Binary:TIFF, DocuWorks*1, PDF*1, XPS*1
- Gray Scale:TIFF, JPEG*2, DocuWorks*1, PDF*1, XPS*1

637
 Appendix

- Full Color:TIFF, JPEG, DocuWorks*1, PDF*1, XPS*1, High-compressed DocuWorks*1, High-

compression PDF*1, High-compression XPS*1
Note
z
XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
*1 : Supported only when documents are retrieved using CentreWare Internet Services.
*2 : Supported only when documents are retrieved using Network Scanner Utility 3.
z Driver:
TWAIN
z
Operating System:
Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Server® 2003 x64,
Windows Vista® ,
Windows Vista® x64,
Windows Server® 2008,
Windows Server® 2008 x64,
Windows® 7,
Windows® 7 x64,
Windows Server® 2008 R2 x64,
Windows ® 8,
Windows ® 8 x64,
Windows Server® 2012 x64,
Windows Server® 2012 R2 x64,
Windows ® 8.1,
Windows ® 8.1 x64,
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks,
OS X 10.10 Yosemite
Important
z For information about the latest supported OS, refer to the Fuji Xerox Web site.

„ Scan to PC
z
Protocol: TCP/IP (SMB, FTP)
Appendix

z Supported OS:
Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Server® 2003 x64,
16 Windows Vista® ,
Windows Vista® x64,
Windows Server® 2008,
Windows Server® 2008 x64,
Windows® 7,

638
 Specifications

Windows® 7 x64,
Windows Server® 2008 R2 x64,
Windows ® 8,
Windows ® 8 x64,
Windows Server® 2012 x64,
Windows Server® 2012 R2 x64,
Windows ® 8.1,
Windows ® 8.1 x64,
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks,
OS X 10.10 Yosemite*
* : Supports FTP protocol only.

Important
z For information about the latest supported OS, refer to the Fuji Xerox Web site.
z File Format:
- Monochrome binary:
TIFF, DocuWorks, PDF, XPS
- Gray scale/Full color:
TIFF, JPEG, DocuWorks, PDF, XPS, high-compressed DocuWorks, high-compressed PDF,
high-compressed XPS
Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

„ Scan to E-mail
z Protocol:
TCP/IP (SMTP)
z
File Format:
- Monochrome binary:
TIFF, DocuWorks, PDF, XPS
- Gray scale/Full color:
TIFF, JPEG, DocuWorks, PDF, XPS, high-compressed DocuWorks, high-compressed PDF,
high-compressed XPS
Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
Appendix

Fax Function (optional)

„ Send Document Size
Maximum : A3, 11 x 17", Long document (Maximum 600mm)
16
„ Recording Paper Size
Maximum: A3, 11 x 17", Minimum: A5

639
 Appendix

„ Transmission Time
2 seconds or more but below 3 seconds
Important
z When A4 size document with approximately 700 characters is transmitted in standard image-quality (8 x
3.85 lines/mm) and in high-speed mode (28.8kbps or faster, JBIG). Only indicates the time for transmitting
the image information and does not include the controlling time for the communication. Note that the
actual transmission time depends on the content of documents, the machine that the recipient uses, and the
status of the communication line. ｡

„ Transmission Mode
ITU-T G3

„ Scanning Resolution
z
Standard: 8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100 dpi
z Fine: 8 x 7.7 lines/mm, 200 x 200 dpi
z
Superfine(400 dpi): 16 x 15.4 lines/mm, 400 x 400 dpi
z
Superfine(600 dpi): 600 x 600dpi

„ Coding Method
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG

„ Transmission Speed
G3:
33.6/31.2/28.8/26.4/24.0/21.6/19.2/16.8/14.4/12.0/9.6/7.2/4.8/2.4 kbps

„ Applicable Lines
Telephone subscriber line, PBX, fax communication (PSTN), maximum 3 ports * (G3-3 port)
* : Up to three lines can be connected for G3 communications. Ports indicate the number of connectable channels.

Direct Fax Function (optional)

„ Document Size
A3, B4, A4

„ Transmission Speed
Same as the Fax Function

„ Resolution
Same as Scanning Resolution in the Fax Function
Appendix

„ Applicable Lines
Same as the Fax Function
16 „ Supported Operating System
z PCL6 Driver
Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Server® 2003 x64,
Windows Vista® ,

640
 Specifications

Windows Vista® x64,

Windows Server® 2008,
Windows Server® 2008 x64,
Windows® 7,
Windows® 7 x64,
Windows Server® 2008 R2 x64,
Windows ® 8,
Windows ® 8 x64,
Windows Server® 2012 x64,
Windows Server® 2012 R2 x64,
Windows ® 8.1,
Windows ® 8.1 x64,
z
Mac OS X Driver
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks,
OS X 10.10 Yosemite
Important
z
For information about the latest supported OS, refer to the Fuji Xerox Web site.

Internet Fax Function (optional)

„ Document Size
A3, B4, A4

„ Scanning Resolution
Same as the Fax function

„ File Format
Format: TIFF-FX
Compression method: MH, MMR, JBIG

„ Profile
TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J
Appendix

„ Network Protocol
Transmission: SMTP, Reception: SMTP, POP3

„ Interface
Ethernet 1000BASE-T/Ethernet 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T 16
IP Fax (SIP) Function (optional)
„ Document Size
Same as the Fax Function

641
 Appendix

„ Scanning Resolution
Same as the Fax Function

„ Supported Protocol
SIP, JT-T.38

„ Coding Method
Same as the Fax Function

„ Interface
Ethernet 1000BASE-T/Ethernet 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T

Duplex Automatic Document Feeder

„ Type
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder

„ Original Size / Paper Weight

z Max : A3, 11 x 17"
z Min: A5
z
38 to 128 gsm (In Duplex : 50 to 128 gsm)

„ Capacity
110 sheets
Important
z
When using 80 gsm paper

„ Feeding Speed
z DocuCentre-V C2265
Monochrome: 25 sheets/minute (A4 1sided)
Color: 25 sheets/minute (A4 1 sided)
z
DocuCentre-V C2263
Monochrome: 20 sheets/minute (A4 1 sided)
Color: 20 sheets/minute (A4 1sided)

Duplex Function
Appendix

„ Paper Size
Same as the Basic Specifications / Copy Function
16 „ Paper Weight
60 to 169 gsm

642
 Specifications

Finisher-A1 (Optional)
„ Type
Sorting (Offset available)/Stacking (Offset available)

„ Paper Size/Paper Weight

z
Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"
z Minimum: Postcard (100 x 148 mm)
z 60 to 220 gsm

„ Paper Capacity
Finisher tray
z For paper not stapled
A4: 500 sheets, B4: 250 sheets, A3 or larger: 200 sheets, Mixed stack: 250 sheets *
z
For paper stapled
30 sheets
* : Based on when larger size paper is stacked on paper.

Important
z When using 80 gsm paper

„ Dimensions/Weight
Width 559 x Depth 448 x Height 246 mm, 12 kg

„ Space Requirement (when connected to the main unit)

Width 1,036 X Depth 659 mm (main unit + Finisher-A1, when the extension tray and the
bypass tray are fully extended)

Finisher-B1 (Optional)
„ Type
Sorting (Offset available)/ Stacking (Offset available)

„ Paper Size/Paper Weight

z Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"
z Minimum: B5 *
z 60 to 220 gsm
Appendix

* : Paper smaller than B5 is delivered to the center tray.

„ Paper Capacity
Finisher tray
z For paper not stapled:
16
A4: 2000 sheets, B4 or larger: 1,000 sheets, Mixed stack*1: 300 sheets
z For paper stapled:
A4: 100 sets or 1000 sheets, B4 or larger: 75 sets or 750 sheets
z Center binding/folding*2: 50 sets or 600 sheets

643
 Appendix

z Folding*2: 500 sheets

*1 : When larger size sheets are stacked on top of smaller size sheets.
*2 : The Booklet Finishing function requires the optional Finisher-B1 Booklet unit. After a job with the Booklet Finishing function
specified has been output, the next job may not be delivered until the sheets are removed from the output tray. Also, if larger
size sheets are stacked on top of smaller size sheets after a job with the Booklet Finishing function specified has been run, the
next job may not be delivered until the sheets are removed from the output tray.

Note
z When using 80 gsm paper

„ Staple
z Capacity:
A4: 50 sheets (90 gsm or less)
z Paper Size:
Maximum: A3, 11 X 17"
Minimum:B5
z Position:
Single stapling or dual stapling

„ Punch
z Paper Size:A3, 11 x 17", B4, A4, A4 , 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11" , B5
z Number of Holes:2/4 holes, or 2/3 holes (US Specifications)
z
Paper Weight:60 to 200 gsm
Note
z The Punch function requires the optional Finisher-B1 Punch unit for 2-hole / 4-hole punch or Finisher-B1
Punch unit for 2-hole / 3-hole punch (US Specifications).

„ Booklet Finishing
z Capacity:
Saddle Staple: 15 sheets; Scoring: 5 sheets
z
Paper Size:
Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"
Minimum: A4, 8.5 x 11"
z Paper Weight
Saddle Staple : 64 to 80 gsm, Scoring : 64 to 105 gsm
Note
z The Booklet Finishing function requires the optional Finisher-B1 Booklet unit. After a job with the Booklet
Appendix

Finishing function specified has been output, the next job may not be delivered until the sheets are removed
from the output tray. Also, if larger size sheets are stacked on top of smaller size sheets after a job with the
Booklet Finishing function specified has been run, the next job may not be delivered until the sheets are
removed from the output tray.

16 „ Dimensions/Weight
Width 657 x Depth 552 x Height 1,010 mm, 28 kg
Width 657 x Depth 597 x Height 1,080 mm, 37 kg (When the Booklet Maker Unit is
attached)
Note
z The values do not include the finisher transport area located within the main unit.

644
 Specifications

„ Space Requirement (when connected to the main unit)

Width 1,573 X Depth 659 mm
With Booklet Finisher: W 1,573 x D 670 mm
Main Unit + Finisher-B1; when the paper support is pulled out and the Bypass tray is fully
extended.

Side Tray (optional)

„ Paper Size/Paper Weight
Same as the Basic Specifications / Copy Function
60 to 256 gsm

„ Paper Capacity
100 sheets
Important
z When using 80 gsm paper

„ Dimensions
Width 353 x Depth 429 x Height 198 mm

„ Space Requirement (when connected to the main unit)

Width 969 x Depth 659 mm (Main unit + Side Tray, when the bypass tray is fully extended)

Appendix

16

645
 Appendix

Printable Area
This section describes the area on paper that can be printed.

Standard Printable Area

The standard printable area is the area of a sheet of paper excluding the 4 mm margins on
the upper and lower edges of paper, and 2 mm margins on the right and left edges of
paper. For 13 x 18" paper (width of 330 mm), the printable area of the paper is the area
excluding the 3.5 mm left and right margins. The actual printable area, however, may vary
depending on the printer (plotter) control language.

Extended Printable Area

When you select the extended printable area setting for printing, you can expand the width
and length of the printable area to 291.0 x 476.6 mm and the print assured area to 289.0 x
423.4 mm. The area of paper you can print to, however, may vary depending on the size of
paper.
Note
z
To extend the printable area, change the PCL print driver setting, or the [Print Area] setting on the touch
screen.

Reference
z For more information on the setting method on the print driver, refer to the help provided for the print driver. For more information
on the setting on the control panel, refer to "Print Area" (P.229).

When the paper width is 12 inches (A3)

Printer
Unprintable area
4mm

Printable area/
Guaranteed print
area
2mm 2mm

Paper feed
direction
Appendix

2mm

16

646
 Printable Area

When the paper width is 12 inches (A3)

Copy
Unprintable area
4mm

Printable area/
Guaranteed print
2mm area 2mm

Paper feed
direction

2mm

Appendix

16

647
 Appendix

Internal Fonts
This section lists the fonts pre-installed on the machine.
Reference
z For more information on the optional PostScript fonts, refer to the manual contained in the Media provided with the PostScript 3
Kit (optional).

Stroke fonts (for PCL5 and European Stroke fonts

HP-GL/2)
Outline Euro- ESC/P-K Arial Sans Serif
fonts pean Arial Italic Symbol
Arial Bold Times New Roman
Arial Bold Italic Times New Roman Bold
Courier Times New Roman Italic
Courier Italic Times New Roman Bold
Courier Bold Italic
Courier Bold Italic ITC Zapf Dingbats
Roman GoldSEMM
GoldSAMM
PDF Arial Symbol
Arial Italic Times New Roman
Arial Bold Times New Roman Bold
Arial Bold Italic Times New Roman Italic
Courier Times New Roman Bold
Courier Italic Italic
Courier Bold ITC Zapf Dingbats
Courier Bold Italic GoldSEMM
GoldSAMM
Appendix

16

648
 Internal Fonts

Outline Euro- PCL CG Times Times New Bold

fonts pean CG Times Italic Times New Bold Italic
CG Times Bold Symbol
CG Times Bold Italic Wingdings
Univers Medium Line Printer
Univers Medium Italic Times Roman
Univers Bold Times Italic
Univers Bold Italic Times Bold
Univers Medium Condensed Times Bold Italic
Univers Medium Condensed Helvetica
Italic Helvetica Oblique
Univers Bold Condensed Helvetica Bold
Univers Bold Condensed Helvetica Bold Oblique
Italic CourierPS
Antique Olive CourierPS Oblique
Antique Olive Italic CourierPS Bold
Antique Olive Bold CourierPS Bold Oblique
CG Omega SymbolPS
CG Omega Italic Palatino Roman
CG Omega Bold Palatino Italic
CG Omega Bold Italic Palatino Bold
Garamond Antiqua Palatino Bold Italic
Garamond Kursiv ITC Bookman Light
Garamond Halbfett ITC Bookman Light Italic
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett ITC Bookman Demi
(Default): Courier ITC Bookman Demi Italic
Courier Italic Helvetica Narrow
Courier Bold Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Courier Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold
Letter Gothic Helvetica Narrow Bold
Letter Gothic Italic Oblique
Letter Gothic Bold New Century Schoolbook
Albertus Medium Roman
Albertus Extra Bold New Century Schoolbook
Clarendon Condensed Italic
Coronet New Century Schoolbook
Marigold Bold
Arial New Century Schoolbook
Arial Italic Bold Italic
Arial Bold ITC Avant Garde Book
Arial Bold Italic ITC Avant Garde Book
Times New Oblique
Times New Italic ITC Avant Garde Demi
ITC Avant Garde Demi
Oblique
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium
Italic
Appendix

ITC Zapf Dingbats

OCR-B
KO PCL5 Myungio Graphic
Gothic Kungso
R- Gothic Saemmul 16
KS Myungio T-Myungio
Gothic T-Gothic
R- Gothic TR-Gothic
Graphic T-Graphic
Kungso T-Kungso
Saemmul T-Saemmul
TC PCL5 ShuSong

649
 Appendix

SC PCL5 ShuSong
ESC/P-K

Note
z The fonts provided will vary depending on the region of use.
Appendix

16

650
 Optional Components

Optional Components
The following table shows the optional components available. To purchase these options,
contact our Customer Support Center.

Product Name Description

Duplex Automatic Scans multi-page duplex documents internally capturing both
Document Feeder sides at once
1 Tray Module Paper tray which contains up to 500 sheets of paper.*
1 Tray Module with Cabinet Paper tray with a cabinet which contains up to 500 sheets of
paper.*
3 Tray Module Module with three paper trays. Each paper tray contains up to500
sheets of paper.*
Side Tray Delivers output face up.
Finisher-A1 Staples output sheets.
Finisher-B1 Staples output sheets.
Booklet Maker Unit for Staples output sheets. Also creases output sheets in half or staples
Finisher-B1 them.
US 2/3 Hole Punch Kit for 2/3 hole-punches output sheets.The distance between the two
Finisher-B1 holes made with the US 2/3 Hole Punch Kit (US standard) is 70
mm, which is different from the 80 mm distance made with the 2/
4 Hole Punch Kit.
2/4 Hole Punch Kit for 2/4 hole-punches output sheets.
Finisher-B1
HDD Extension Kit Provides the features that require the hard disk.
Wing Table A kit to load related products such as IC Card Reader, or to secure
work space. The table can be placed on left side of the document
cover.
Assist Handle A tool to aid you in opening the document glass cover.
Secondary Ethernet Kit Allows you to use two lines on the Ethernet interface.
Wireless LAN Converter Converts the machine that supports 10/100/1000BASE-T wired
LAN to the machine that supports wireless LAN.
Adobe PostScript 3 Kit Allows you to use the machine as a PostScript printer. Also enables
printing from Macintosh.
Multi-Language Font Kit A UnicodeTM font kit which supports the PCL language for
principal systems like SAP.
Appendix

Note
z
UnicodeTM is a character code advocated by Xerox to handle multiple
languages such as Chinese, Korean, Japanese, and English in one
character code.
TC/SC Additional Fonts Kit Supports Chinese fonts. 16
Scanner Kit Adds the Scan feature to the machine.
Searchable PDF Kit Allows you to use optical character recognition (OCR) when
scanning.

Note
z The optional Scanner Kit is required to use this feature for some
models.

651
 Appendix

Product Name Description

High Compression Image Kit Allows you to create high-compressed DocuWorks or PDF files for
E-mail or Scan to PC feature.

Note
z The optional Scanner Kit is required to use this feature for some
models.
USB Memory Kit Directly stores data in a USB memory device when scanning. Also,
allows you to print image data taken with a digital camera as well
as data stored with the text format, using the control panel.

Note
z The optional Scanner Kit is required to use this feature for some
models.
Fax Kit 3 Adds the Fax and Internet Fax feature to the machine.
FAX Extension Board Kit 3 Adds extra facsimile lines to the machine.
Additional G3 Port 3 Adds an additional G3 port to the machine that offers the Fax
feature.
IP Fax [SIP] Kit Adds the IP Fax (SIP) feature to the machine.
Stamp Kit Stamps on a document scanned with Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder to send as a fax.
Server Fax Kit Adds the Server Fax feature to the machine.
Copy Management Prints dates or serial numbers on all the pages of confidential
Expansion Kit documents to restrict duplication.

Note
z The optional HDD Extension Kit is required to use this feature for some
models.
Network Accounting Kit Allows you to keep track of user accounts via an external
authentication server.

Note
z The optional HDD Extension Kit is required to use this feature for some
models.
Anti Earthquake Kit Prevents the machine from being moved by an earthquake.
Manual Holder A holder to keep the machine’s guides.
Embedded IC Card Reader A A built-in IC Card Reader, which can read data in a smart card.

Reference
z
For details on this option, refer to "Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional)"
(P.444).
Embedded IC Card Reader A An built-in IC Card Reader for Wing Table, which can read data in
Appendix

for Wing Table a smart card.

Note
z For details on this option, refer to "Configuration for IC Card Reader
(Optional)" (P.444).

16 Embedded IC Card Reader A built-in IC Card Reader, which can read data in a smart card.

Note
z For details on this option, refer to "Configuration for IC Card Reader
(Optional)" (P.444).

652
 Optional Components

Product Name Description

Embedded IC Card Reader An built-in IC Card Reader for Wing Table, which can read data in
for Wing Table a smart card.

Note
z For details on this option, refer to "Configuration for IC Card Reader
(Optional)" (P.444).
Attention Light ll Tells you the status of the machine such as malfunction, printing,
or faxing status.
Voice Guidance 2 Allows you to operate the machine using the numeric keypad,
following the the voice guidance.

Note
z The optional HDD Extension Kit is required to use this feature for some
models.

*
: When using 80-gsm paper.
Note
z
The optional components are subject to change without notice.
z For the latest information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Appendix

16

653
 Appendix

Adjust Image Transfer

This section describes how to adjust the transfer output value.
You can specify the transfer output value manually or by scanning the sample printout.
This is useful when the toner image does not transfer to the paper properly.

Adjusting the Transfer Output Value

You can specify the image transfer output value for each paper type.

Adjusting the transfer output value manually

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button and enter the System Administration mode.

Reference
z For how to enter the System Administration mode, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

3 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Maintenance].

4 Select [Adjust Image Transfer].

Appendix

5 Select [Paper Type].

6 Select the paper type, and then select [Close].

16
7 Select [Print Sample].

654
 Adjust Image Transfer

8 Select the paper size, load paper of that size in Tray 5 (Bypass), and then select [1 Sided] or
[2 Sided].

9 Press the <Start> button.

The print sample will be printed.
Side1
-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

+6

+7

+8

+9

+10

Note
z
"Side 1" will be printed on the top right of the Side 1 sample, and "Side 2" will be printed on the top right of the
Side 2 sample.
z
When the paper size is A4, B4, or 8.5 X 11", the sample will be printed on two sheets.

10 Check the print sample, and take a note of the value (-5 to +10) printed on the left side of
the most-successfully printed row.
Note
Appendix

z When [2 Sided] is selected, do the same for both the Side 1 sample and the Side 2 sample.

11 Enter the [Side 1] and the [Side 2] values you selected in step 10.

12 Select [Adjust]. 16
The specified transfer output values will be applied when the paper type of the job is the
same as the paper type selected in step 7.

13 Select [Close].

655
 Appendix

Adjusting the transfer output value by scanning the sample printout

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button and enter the System Administration mode.
Reference
z For how to enter the System Administration mode, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.138).

2 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

3 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Maintenance].

4 Select [Adjust Image Transfer].

5 Select [Paper Type].

6 Select the paper type, and then select [Close].

7 Select [Print Sample].

8 Select the paper size, load paper of that size in Tray 5 (Bypass), and then select [1 Sided] or
[2 Sided].
Appendix

16

656
 Adjust Image Transfer

9 Press the <Start> button.

The print sample will be printed.
Side1
-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

+6

+7

+8

+9

+10

Note
z "Side 1" will be printed on the top right of the Side 1 sample, and "Side 2" will be printed on the top right of the
Side 2 sample.
z When the paper size is A4, B4, or 8.5 X 11", the sample will be printed on two sheets.

10 Select [Scan Calibration Chart].

11 Set the print sample on the document glass as shown in the screen.

12 Place five or more blank sheets of the same size as the print sample over the print sample.
Then close the document cover and select [Start]. After the print sample is completely
scanned, remove the print sample and the blank sheets. When the sample is printed on
both sides of the sheet, perform steps 11 and 12 for each side of the sample printout.
Note
z The number of times you need to scan the print sample depends on the number of pages of the print sample
and whether it is 1 sided or 2 sided.
z Once for 1 page and 1 sided
z Twice for 1 page and 2 sided
z Twice for 2 pages and 1 sided
Appendix

z 4 times for 2 pages and 2 sided

z [Start] is displayed after the first scanning is completed. Make sure to select [Start] after scanning all the
printouts.
z Selecting [Start] with an insufficient number of scanning will cause an abnormal end of the adjustment in the
next step. 16
z Any print sample can be scanned up to four times regardless of how many times it needs to be scanned. If
the required number of scanning times is exceeded, the transfer output value is adjusted based on only the
later samples required.
z
When scanning a print sample which needs to be scanned twice or more, make sure to scan all the printouts.
If you scan a print sample together with another print sample printed after 24 hours or more from the
preceding sample printing, only the later sample will be used for adjustment.

657
 Appendix

13 After scanning has been completed, select [Start].

Note
z The message "Adjustment has been completed." is displayed when the adjustment process is completed
normally.

14 Recommendable adjustment setting (sample number) is displayed on [Side 1] and [Side 2].

15 Select [Adjust].
The specified transfer output values will be applied.

16 Select [Close].
Appendix

16

658
 ESC/P-K Emulation

ESC/P-K Emulation
This section describes how to use ESC/P-K emulation.

Emulation
This section describes the printer language emulations available on the machine.
Print data conforms to certain rules (grammars). These rules (grammars) are called printer
languages.
The machine supports two types of printer languages: a page description language,which is
used to create images on a page-by-page basis, and an emulation, which is used to achieve
the print results similar to those of other printers. To "emulate" means to imitate the print
results of other printers.

Emulation Mode
When printing data written in a language other than a page description language
supported by the machine, switch the machine to the emulation mode. The relationships
between the emulation mode and the printer to be emulated are as follows:

Emulation Mode Printer to be Emulated

ESC/P-K emulation mode (ESC/P-K mode) LQ1900K II+

Host Interfaces and Emulation

Different host interfaces support different printer languages. The host interfaces that
support printer languages are as follows:
z USB port
z
LPD port
z SMB port
z IPP port
z
Port 9100 port
z WSD port

Switching between Printer Languages

The machine provides the Multi-emulation feature that allows switching between different
printer languages.
Appendix

The methods of switching between printer languages are as follows:

„ Switching by Commands
Commands for switching between printer languages are provided. Upon receipt of a
command, the machine switches to the relevant printer language.
16
„ Interface-dependent
You can set a printer language for each host interface by using CentreWare Internet
Services. The machine switches to a printer language corresponding to the host interface
that received data.

659
 Appendix

Output Feature
This section describes the machine's output feature.

Outputting a Pending Print Job

The printing of jobs already received by the machine can be prioritized over other jobs.
Reference
z For information on prioritizing the printing of jobs already received by the machine, refer to "Job Status" > "Printing Pending Jobs"
in the User Guide.

ESC/P-K Emulation Print Features

Pages per Side

The Pages per Side feature reduces the size of multiple-sheet documents and prints them
on a single sheet of paper.
The Pages per Side feature can be used in the ESC/P-K emulation mode. In the ESC/P-K
mode, 2 Up can be used.

Form Overlay
In the ESC/P-K mode, you can register an original form on the machine, and overprint the
form on a printout.
The form to be used for overlaying can be specified on the control panel.
Reference
z For more information on registering forms, contact our Customer Support Center.

Forms
You can use ESC/P-K to register forms on the machine. Up to 64 forms can be registered.
Reference
z For more information on registering forms, contact our Customer Support Center.

ESC/P-K Emulation Settings

The following tables show the basic and extended settings that can be configured onthe
ESC/P-K emulation mode menu.

Basic Settings
Appendix

The following tables show the basic and extended settings that can be configured onthe
ESC/P-K emulation mode menu.

Setting Item Item Value

16 Number
Output color 5 Sets the output color.
[0] (Default): Color
[1]: Monochrome

660
 ESC/P-K Emulation

Paper tray 3 Sets the paper tray to be used for printing.

[0]: Auto
[1] (Default): Tray 1
[2]: Tray 2
[3]: Tray 3
[4]: Tray 4
[5]: Tray 5
If printing from Tray 5, instruct printing and then operate the machine to
start printing. To cancel the setting, change the setting for "Tray
5Confirmation".

Important
z When Trays 1 to 4 is selected, the paper size is determined by the size of paper
loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper Size] cannot be set.

Note
z When [Auto] is selected and paper of the same size in the same orientation is
loaded in multiple trays, paper will be fed in the order of Tray 1 J Tray 2 J Tray 3
J Tray 4. If paper of the same size is loaded in multiple trays but in different
orientations, feeding of the paper loaded in the landscape orientation is prioritized.
Document size 1 Sets the client-created document size.
[99](Default):Paper
[100]: Continuous form paper(10X12)
[101]: Continuous form paper(10X11)
[102]: Continuous form paper(15X12)
[103]: Continuous form paper(15X11)
[3]: A3
[4]: A4
[5]: A5
[14]: B4
[15]: B5
[21]: 8.5X14
[22]: 8.5X13
[23]: 8.5X11
[24]: 11X17
[0]: Postcard
The number of characters printed is: 80 characters/72 rows for continuous
form paper (10 x 12), 80 characters/66 rows for continuous form paper (10 x
11), 136 characters/72 rows for continuous form paper (15 x 12), and 136
characters/66 rows for continuous form paper (15 x 11).

Note
z When a continuous form paper is selected for [Original Size], [Paper Position]
cannot be set.
z When [Preset%] or [Fit to Cut Sheet] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], the machine
automatically calculates the magnification based on a combination of [Original
Size] and [Paper Size]. If the ratio, however, is outside the range of 45-210%, the
document will not be reduced/ enlarged, and will be printed at a scale of 100%.
Appendix

When [2 Up] is selected, the machine automatically calculates the magnification

based on a combination of [Original Size] and 1/2 of [Paper Size].
z The orientation set here is that of the document. It is not affected by the
orientation of paper loaded in the paper trays.
Orientation 19 Sets the orientation of paper.
[0] (Default): Portrait 16
[1]: Landscape

661
 Appendix

Paper size 2 Sets the size of paper to be printed. This setting can be made only when
[Paper Tray] is set to [Auto] or [Tray 5]. This setting can be configured only for
cut sheets.
[3]: A3
[4]: A4
[5]: A5
[14]: B4
[15]: B5
[21]: 8.5X14
[22]: 8.5X13
[23]: 8.5X11
[24]: 11X17
[0]: Postcard

Note
z When [Preset%] or [Fit to Cut Sheet] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], the machine
automatically calculates the magnification based on a combination of [Original
Size] and [Paper Size]. If the magnification, however, is outside the range of 45-
210%, the document will not be reduced/enlarged, and will be printed at a scale of
100%. When [2 Up] is selected, the machine automatically calculates the
magnification based on a combination of [Original Size] and 1/2 of [Paper Size].

Extended Settings

Setting Item Item Number Value

Paper position 20 Sets the paper position.
[0]](Default): Without cut sheet feeder(left)
[1]: With cut sheet feeder(center)
Output quantity 8 Sets the number of copies to be printed.
[1 to 250](Default:1):1-250 copies

Important
z
When the output quantity is specified by a client, that number of copies is printed.
After printing, the number set on the control panel is overwritten with the number
newly specified. However, the number of copies specified from the lpd port will not
overwrite the number set on the control panel.
Reduce/Enlarge 54 Sets the print magnification.
(Reduce/ [0](Default): Preset %
Enlarge mode) [1]: Variable %
[2]: Fit to Cut Sheet
[Preset %] is a magnification automatically calculated based on [Original
Size] and [Paper Size], and reduces/enlarges the printable area of the
document to fit in the printable area of the output paper. Therefore, when
the size of the document of the output paper are the same, the ratio will be
100%. Also, if [2 Up] is selected, the document will be reduced to the size at
Appendix

which two pages fit onto one sheet of paper. [Variable %] is a magnification
set in [Variable %] under [Reduce/ Enlarge]. A reference point for scaling
(reducing/enlarging) is the upper left corner of the printable area. This
reference point applies to all text, images, and graphics.
[Fit to Cut Sheet] prints the entire cut sheet area onto the printable area of
16 the output paper. It is a magnification automatically calculated based on
[Original Size] and [Paper Size], and reduces/enlarges the entire document
(including the area outside of the printable area) to fit onto the printable
area of the output paper.

662
 ESC/P-K Emulation

Setting Item Item Number Value

Reduce/Enlarge 17 Sets the magnification for the vertical or horizontal direction.
(Variable %/ [45 to 210](Default:100): 45-210%
vertical
magnification Note
z When a continuous form paper is selected for [Original Size], print result is
)
identical for [Preset %] and [Fit to Cut Sheet].
18
(Variable %/
horizontal
magnification
)
2 Up mode 21 2Sets whether to print with the 2 Up or page by page. 2 Up is a feature that
prints two pages onto one sheet of paper. Depending on the paper
orientation, the two pages are printed side by side, or one above the other.
[0](Default): Off
[1]: Forward
[2]: Reverse

Important
z When [Landscape] is selected for [Original Size], print result is identical for
[Forward] and [Reverse].
Output destinatio 9 Sets the output tray for the printouts.
[0](Default):Center Tray or Center Tray - Lower
[1]: Left Top Tray (optional)
[2]: Center Tray - Upper
[80]: Right Middle Tray (optional)
Tray 5 67 Prints from Tray 5, after you instruct to print and then operate the machine
confirmation to start printing.
[0](Default): Off
[1]: On
Grid lines 22 Sets the method for printing double-byte grid lines. The options are as
follows.
[0](Default): Image
[1]: Font
2 Sided printing 12 Sets the 2 sided printing.
[0](Default): Off
[1]: Head to Head
[2]: Head to Toe

Important
z When [Postcard] is selected for [Paper Size], [Head to Head] and [Head to Toe]
cannot be selected.
Font 13 Sets the font for double-byte characters.
Appendix

(Chinese [3](Default): ShuSong

character [4]: FangSong (optional)
fonts) [5]: HeiTi (optional)
[6]: KaiTi (optional)
14 Sets the font for single-byte characters.
(Alphanumeric [0](Default): Roman 16
fonts) [1]: Sanserif

Important
z
Since this feature selects the default value, its setting will not be affected when an
extended command is received.

663
 Appendix

Setting Item Item Number Value

Print control 50 Sets the code for double-byte characters.
(Chinese [2](Default): GB18030
character [3]: BIG5
codes)
51 Sets whether to print blank pages if included in the document.
(Blank sheet [0](Default): Off
output) [1]: On

Note
z Even when [Off] is selected, blank pages are printed if they are spaces created with
user-defined characters or images in white color.
z When [Off] is selected for this feature and 2 Up or 2 sided printing is specified,
blank pages are not printed.
52 Extends the position of the right margin.
(Character [0](Default): Standard
print area) [1]: Extended

Important
z Changing the character print area from [Extended] to [Standard] restores the left
and right margins to the default values.
z When the position of the right margin is set here, that position becomes the right
edge of the character print area.
53 Sets whether or not to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
(Image Image Enhancement smoothens the border between black and
enhancement) white,reducing rough edges, and thus seemingly increasing the resolution.
[0]: Off
[1](Default): On
ESCP switch 55 Sets the Text Quality mode to high quality or draft.
(Text quality) [0](Default): High Quality
[1]: Draft

Important
z Since the default value is selected for the [Text Quality], [Reduced Characters],
[Character Code Table], [Page Length], and [1-inch Perforation Skip] features, their
settings will not be affected when an extended command is received.

Note
z
Changing settings does not change actual printing quality.
z This setting affect the Text Quality selection commands. For more information on
the Text Quality selection commands, contact our Customer Support Center.
56 Reduces the size of single-byte alphanumeric characters when printing.Sets
(Reduced whether to reduce their sizes or to print them at a scale of 100%.
characters) [0](Default): Off
[1]: On
57 Sets the character code table for double-byte characters.
Appendix

(Charactercode [1](Default): Extended Graphic

table) [2]: Slant
58 Sets the length of a page (printable area) to 11 inches or 12 inches.
(Page length) [0](Default): 11 inches
16 [1]: 12 inches
59 Sets whether or not to leave a 1-inch space between pages.
(1-Inch [0](Default): Off
perforation [1]: On
skip)
Important
z This is effective only when CSF under [Paper Position] is set to [Off].

664
 ESC/P-K Emulation

Setting Item Item Number Value

ESCP switch 60 Sets the position to start printing at 8.5 mm or 22 mm below the top edge of
(Paper feed paper.
position) [0](Default): 8.5mm
[1]: 22mm
61 Sets the action to be executed when a CR command is received.
(CR feature) [0](Default): Carriage return
[1]: Carriage return and linefeed
Position 15 Adjusts the printing position vertically or horizontally, and changes the
adjustment (Vertical positions of the margins.
position [0](Default): Off
adjustment) [1-500]: -250 to +250 mm
16
Important
(Horizontal z Data outside the printable area is not printed regardless of the adjustment of the
position print position. In addition, data moved outside the printable area as a result of
adjustment) adjusting the print position is not printed.
Escape sequence 62 A normal extended command is specified starting with hexadecimal 1BH ESC
(Escape as the escape sequence identifying the command, followed by ; (3BH). When
sequence) you cannot use a semicolon or ESC code with the host computer, you can use
a special string instead as an escape sequence. This setting specifies whether
or not to enable the escape sequence replacement feature. When enabling,
specify the escape sequence with item 63.
[0](Default): Disabled
[1]: Enabled

Note
z For more information on extended commands, contact our Customer Support
Center.
63 To control an extended command with a text code, you must specify an
(Escape escape sequence (the first two bytes) of the extended command.Enter two
sequence characters using the keyboard displayed on the screen.
character) [&%](Default) : 0x21 - 0x7e
Form overlay 64 Constantly performs Form Overlay by selecting a form name (No. 01-64)
registered on the machine.
[0](Default) : Off
[1-64]: No. 1 - No. 64

Important
z Since the default value is selected for this feature, this setting is not affected when
an extended commend is received.
z Once a form name is selected, it continues to be displayed even if the form is
deleted. When a form name is selected using the up and down arrow keys, it is not
displayed. In this case, the setting is set to "Off".
Stapling 66 Sets the stapling position.
Appendix

[0](Default) :Off
[1]: Top left
[2]: Top Double
[3]: Top Right
[4]: Left Double
[5]: Right Double 16
[6]: Bottom Left
[7]: Bottom Double
[8]: Bottom Right
Bypass Tray -Wait 67 Sets whether to suspend the print processing when feeding paper from the
User Bypass Tray. Processing is resumed by a user operation on the machine.
[0]: Off
[1](Default): On

665
 Appendix

Setting Item Item Number Value

Form Type 68 Sets the form type.
[0](Default) :ESC/P-K
Punching 69 Select the position for punching holes.
[0](Default): Off
[1]: Top
[2]: Bottom
[3]: Left
[4]: Right
Number of holes 70 Select the number of punch holes.
[0](Default): 2 holes
[1]: 3 holes
[2]: 4 holes
Binary character 72 Sets the character strings to be specified when entering commands in
strings hexadecimal format.
[0](Default): OFF
[1]: &$%$
[2]: $?!#
0 Style 73 Sets the typeface for "0".
[0](Default): 0
[1]:
Number of sets 74 Sets the method of specifying the number of print sets.
[0]: Protocol
[1]: Panel
[2](Default): Command
Appendix

16

666
 ESC/P-K Emulation

Magnification Table

Preset %

Documen Paper A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 11 x 8.5 x 8.5 x 8.5 x Postcard

t Size Size 17" 14" 13" 11"
A3 Long 100 70 49 86 60 103 84 78 66 100
edge
Short 100 70 48 86 60 94 72 72 72 100
edge
A4 Long 143 100 70 123 86 147 120 112 94 48
edge
Short 143 100 69 123 86 135 103 103 103 45
edge
A5 Long 204 143 100 177 123 210 172 160 135 69
edge
Short 207 145 100 178 124 195 149 149 149 65
edge
B4 Long 116 81 57 100 70 119 98 90 76 100
edge
Short 116 81 56 100 70 109 83 83 83 100
edge
B5 Long 164 116 81 143 100 171 140 130 109 56
edge
Short 164 116 81 143 100 156 120 120 120 53
edge
11 x 17" Long 97 68 48 84 59 100 82 76 64 100
edge
Short 106 74 51 92 64 100 77 77 77 100
edge
8.5 x 14" Long 119 83 58 102 72 122 100 93 78 100
edge
Short 139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100
edge
8.5 x 13" Long 128 90 63 111 77 132 108 100 84 100
edge
Short 139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100
Appendix

edge
8.5 x 11" Long 152 106 74 131 92 156 128 119 100 100
edge
Short 139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100
edge 16
Postcard Long 100 100 145 100 178 100 100 100 100 100
edge
Short 100 100 153 100 190 100 100 100 100 100
edge
15 x 11" Long 119 83 58 103 72 122 100 93 78 100
edge

667
 Appendix

Documen Paper A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 11 x 8.5 x 8.5 x 8.5 x Postcard

t Size Size 17" 14" 13" 11"
Short 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100
edge
15 x 12" Long 119 83 58 103 72 122 100 93 78 100
edge
Short 95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100
edge
10 x 11" Long 147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 50
edge
Short 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
edge
10 x 12" Long 135 95 66 117 81 139 114 105 89 46
edge
Short 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
edge

Unit:[%]

Note
z
If the magnification for either the long edge or short edge is outside the range of 45 - 210%, the
magnifications for both the long edge and short edge becomes 100%.
Appendix

16

668
 ESC/P-K Emulation

Preset % (2-Up Printing)

Docume Paper A3/2 A4/2 A5/2 B4/2 B5/2 11 x 8.5 x 8.5 x 8.5 x Postcard/2
nt Size Size 17"/2 14"/2 13"/2 11"/2
A3 Long 70 49 100 60 100 66 50 50 50 100
edge
Short 70 48 100 60 100 72 59 54 45 100
edge
A4 Long 100 70 48 86 60 94 72 72 72 100
edge
Short 100 69 48 86 59 103 84 78 65 100
edge
A5 Long 143 100 69 123 86 135 103 103 103 45
edge
Short 145 100 69 124 86 149 121 112 94 47
edge
B4 Long 81 57 100 70 49 76 58 58 58 100
edge
Short 81 56 100 70 48 83 68 63 53 100
edge
B5 Long 116 81 56 100 70 109 83 83 83 100
edge
Short 116 80 55 100 69 120 98 90 76 100
edge
11 x 17" Long 68 48 100 59 100 64 49 49 49 100
edge
Short 74 51 100 64 100 77 62 58 48 100
edge
8.5 x 14" Long 83 58 100 72 50 78 60 60 60 100
edge
Short 97 67 100 84 57 100 82 75 63 100
edge
8.5 x 13" Long 90 63 100 77 54 84 64 64 64 100
edge
Short 97 67 100 84 57 100 82 75 63 100
edge
8.5 x 11" Long 106 74 51 92 64 100 77 77 77 100
edge
Appendix

Short 97 67 46 84 57 100 82 75 63 100

edge
Postcard Long 100 145 100 178 124 100 149 149 149 65
edge
16
Short 100 153 105 190 131 100 185 172 144 71
edge
15 x 11" Long 83 58 100 72 100 78 60 60 60 100
edge
Short 72 50 100 62 100 74 60 56 47 100
edge

669
 Appendix

Docume Paper A3/2 A4/2 A5/2 B4/2 B5/2 11 x 8.5 x 8.5 x 8.5 x Postcard/2
nt Size Size 17"/2 14"/2 13"/2 11"/2
15 x 12" Long 83 58 100 72 100 78 60 60 100 100
edge
Short 66 46 100 57 100 68 55 51 100 100
edge
10 x 11" Long 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100
edge
Short 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
edge
10 x 12" Long 95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100
edge
Short 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
edge

Unit:[%]

Note
z
If the magnification for either the long edge or short edge is outside the range of 45 - 210%, the
magnifications for both the long edge and short edge becomes 100%.
Appendix

16

670
 ESC/P-K Emulation

Fit to Cut Sheet

Documen Paper A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 11 x 8.5 x 8.5 x 8.5 x Postcard

t Size Size 17" 14" 13" 11"
A3 Long 98 69 48 85 59 101 83 77 64 100
edge
Short 97 68 47 84 58 91 70 70 70 100
edge
A4 Long 138 97 68 120 84 142 117 108 91 100
edge
Short 137 96 66 118 82 129 99 99 99 100
edge
A5 Long 196 137 96 169 118 201 165 153 129 66
edge
Short 195 136 94 168 117 183 140 140 140 62
edge
B4 Long 113 79 55 98 68 116 95 88 74 100
edge
Short 112 78 54 97 67 105 81 81 81 100
edge
B5 Long 160 112 78 138 97 165 135 125 105 54
edge
Short 158 110 76 136 95 149 114 114 114 50
edge
11 x 17" Long 95 67 47 82 57 98 80 74 63 100
edge
Short 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100
edge
8.5 x 14" Long 116 81 57 100 70 119 98 90 76 100
edge
Short 133 93 64 115 80 125 96 96 96 100
edge
8.5 x 13" Long 125 87 61 108 75 128 105 97 82 100
edge
Short 133 93 64 115 80 125 96 96 96 100
edge
8.5 x 11" Long 147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 100
edge
Appendix

Short 133 93 64 115 80 125 96 96 96 100

edge
Postcard Long 100 195 136 100 168 100 100 100 183 94
edge
16
Short 100 201 139 100 173 100 100 100 207 91
edge
15 x 11" Long 135 95 66 117 81 139 105 114 89 46
edge
Short 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
edge

671
 Appendix

Documen Paper A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 11 x 8.5 x 8.5 x 8.5 x Postcard

t Size Size 17" 14" 13" 11"
15 x 12" Long 135 95 66 117 81 139 105 114 89 46
edge
Short 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
edge
10 x 11" Long 147 103 72 127 89 151 115 124 97 50
edge
Short 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
edge
10 x 12" Long 147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 50
edge
Short 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
edge

Unit:[%]

Note
z
If the magnification for either the long edge or short edge is outside the range of 45 - 210%, the
magnifications for both the long edge and short edge becomes 100%.
Appendix

16

672
 ESC/P-K Emulation

Fit to Cut Sheet (When 2 Up is specified)

Docume Paper A3/2 A4/2 A5/2 B4/2 B5/2 11 x 8.5 x 8.5 x 8.5 x Postcard/2
nt Size Size 17"/2 14"/2 13"/2 11"/2
A3 Long 69 48 100 59 100 64 49 49 100 100
edge
Short 68 47 100 58 100 70 57 53 100 100
edge
A4 Long 97 68 47 84 58 91 70 70 70 100
edge
Short 96 66 46 82 57 99 80 74 62 100
edge
A5 Long 137 96 66 118 82 129 99 99 99 100
edge
Short 136 84 65 117 80 140 114 106 88 100
edge
B4 Long 79 55 100 68 48 74 57 57 57 100
edge
Short 78 54 100 67 46 81 66 61 51 100
edge
B5 Long 112 78 54 97 67 105 81 81 81 100
edge
Short 110 76 53 95 65 114 93 86 72 100
edge
11 x 17" Long 67 47 100 57 100 63 48 48 48 100
edge
Short 72 50 100 62 100 74 60 56 47 100
edge
8.5 x 14" Long 81 47 100 70 49 76 58 58 58 100
edge
Short 93 50 100 80 55 96 78 72 61 100
edge
8.5 x 13" Long 87 61 100 75 52 82 63 63 63 100
edge
Short 93 64 100 80 55 96 78 72 61 100
edge
8.5 x 11" Long 103 89 100 89 72 97 74 74 74 100
edge
Appendix

Short 93 80 100 80 55 96 78 72 61 100

edge
Postcard Long 195 136 94 168 117 183 140 140 140 62
edge
16
Short 201 139 96 173 119 207 169 156 131 65
edge
15 x 11" Long 95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100
edge
Short 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
edge

673
 Appendix

Docume Paper A3/2 A4/2 A5/2 B4/2 B5/2 11 x 8.5 x 8.5 x 8.5 x Postcard/2
nt Size Size 17"/2 14"/2 13"/2 11"/2
15 x 12" Long 95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100
edge
Short 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
edge
10 x 11" Long 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100
edge
Short 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
edge
10 x 12" Long 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100
edge
Short 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
edge

Unit:[%]

Note
z
If the magnification for either the long edge or short edge is outside the range of 45 - 210%, the
magnifications for both the long edge and short edge becomes 100%.

Paper Size and Number of Printable Characters

When the paper feed position is 22 mm

Paper Size Portrait Landscape

Characters Lines Characters Lines
A3 113 92 161 63
B4 97 78 139 53
A4 79 63 113 42
B5 68 53 97 35
A5 54 42 79 27
Postcard 35 30 54 19
11 x 17" 106 94 166 58
8.5 x 14" 81 76 136 43
Appendix

8.5 x 13" 81 70 126 43

8.5 x 11" 81 58 106 43

16

674
 ESC/P-K Emulation

When the paper feed position is 8.5 mm

Paper Size Portrait Landscape

Characters Lines Characters Lines
A3 113 95 161 66
B4 97 82 139 56
A4 79 66 113 45
B5 68 56 97 39
A5 54 45 79 31
Postcard 35 30 54 19
11 x 17" 106 98 166 62
8.5 x 14" 81 80 136 47
8.5 x 13" 81 74 126 47
8.5 x 11" 81 62 106 47

Note
z
The values are based on 10-cpi character pitch and 6-lpi line pitch.
z The magnification for both the long edge and short edge is 100%.
z
Some paper sizes may not be available depending on your hardware configuration.

Fit to Cut Sheet

Paper Size Portrait Landscape

Characters Lines Characters Lines
A3 116 99 165 70
B4 101 85 143 60
A4 82 70 116 49
B5 71 60 101 42
A5 58 49 82 34
Postcard 39 34 58 23
11 x 17" 110 102 170 66
8.5 x 14" 85 84 140 51
Appendix

8.5 x 13" 85 78 130 51

8.5 x 11" 85 66 110 51

Note
z The values are based on 10-cpi character pitch and 6-lpi line pitch. 16
z Some paper sizes may not be available depending on your hardware configuration.

675
 Appendix

15-inch Continuous Form Mode (When Aligned at Left in Landscape Orientation)

Paper Size Portrait Landscape

Characters Lines Characters Lines
All supported 136 66 136 72
paper sizes

Note
z The values are based on 10-cpi character pitch and 6-lpi line pitch.

10-inch Continuous Form Mode

Paper Size Portrait Landscape

Characters Lines Characters Lines
All supported 80 66 80 72
paper sizes
Appendix

16

676
 PDF Direct Print

PDF Direct Print

PDF Direct Print is a feature that prints PDF files by directly using the lpr command instead
of a print driver. When this feature is used, the following items will be printed based on the
settings of [PDF] under [Print Mode].

z Output Quantity z Layout

z 2 Sided Printing z Paper Size
z Print Mode z Output Color
z
Collate z
Print Processing Mode

Important
z You cannot print DocuWorks files with Japanese fonts used.

Note
z Two types of the PDF Direct Printing methods are available: the genuine Adobe PDF Direct Print and the non-
PostScript PDF Direct Print (PDF Bridge). You can select which method to prioritize in the System
Administration mode.
z When you use the lpr command to print, specify the number of copies to be printed in the lpr command. The
copy quantity setting made on [Output Quantity] under [PDF] becomes invalid. If the copy quantity is not
specified in the lpr command, only one copy is printed.
z
Before you print PDF file using the lpr command, the LPD protocol of the machine must be started with the
control panel or CentreWare Internet Services.
z PDF Direct Print supports PDF version 1.6.

PDF Direct Print Settings

This section describes the available settings with the PDF Direct Print feature.
The settings configured here are valid when printing PDF files without using
ContentsBridge provided by Fuji Xerox.
Note
z
For information on printing PDF files using ContentsBridge Utility, refer to the manual provided on the Media
(Software/Product Manual).

Setting Item Item Value

Number
Output quantity 401 Sets the number of copies to be printed.
[1-999] (Default: 1) : 1-999 sheets
2 sided printing 402 Sets the 2 sided printing option.
[0] (Default) : 1 Sided
[1]: 2 Sided, Flip on Long Edge
[2]: 2 Sided, Flip on Short Edge
Appendix

[2 Sided Print, Flip on Long Edge] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that
pages can be bound along the long edge.
[2 Sided Print, Flip on Short Edge] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that
pages can be bound along the short edge.
Print mode 403 Selects which you prioritize: image quality or print speed.
[0] (Default): Standard
16
[1]: High Speed
[2]: Fine
The [Standard] setting prints in a standard speed and quality.
The [High Speed] setting prioritize the print speed.
The [Fine] quality setting prints in high quality but in a slower speed.

677
 Appendix

Setting Item Item Value

Number
Collate 404 Selects whether to print multiple-sheet documents as collated sets (1, 2, 3...1,
2, 3...).
[0] (Default): Off
[1]: On
Layout 405 Sets the layout for printing.

Note
z This item can be set when [PDF Bridge] is selected for [Process Mode].
[0] (Default) : Auto %
[1]: Booklet
[2]: 2-up
[3]: 4-up
[4]: 100% (size-by-size)
The [Auto %] setting automatically calculates the largest magnification
possible to fit to the output paper size.
The [Booklet] setting prints the images side by side, on both sides of each
page, in the correct order to make a booklet based on the layout of the
original PDF file. Some documents may not be printed in a booklet fashion
depending on the structure of their pages. In this case, they will be printed
with the [Auto %] setting.

Note
z When [A4] is selected for [Paper Size], documents will be printed on A4 size paper.
z
When [Paper Size] is set to [Auto], documents will be printed on A3 or A4 size paper.
The [2-up] setting prints two pages onto one sheet of paper. When [2-Up] is
selected, the paper size is fixed at A4.
The [4-up] setting prints four pages on each sheet of paper. When [4-Up] is
selected, the paper size is fixed at A4.
Paper size 406 Sets the size of the paper to be printed.
[0] (Default) : Auto
[1]: A4
The [Auto] setting automatically determines the paper size, based on the size
and settings of a PDF file to be printed.
Output color 407 Sets whether to print in color or monochrome.
[0] (Default) : Auto
[1]: Black
The [Auto] setting automatically determines the output color: color or
monochrome for each page. If colors other than black and white are used on
the original, the machine prints the document in color, and if only black and
white are used on the original, the machine prints in monochrome.
Process mode 408 Sets the print processing mode when you use the PDF Direct Print feature.
[0](Default): PDF Bridge
[1]: PS
Appendix

[PDF Bridge] processes PDF files using the PDF Direct Print feature provided
by Fuji Xerox.
[PS] processes PDF files using the PostScript feature provided by Adobe.

Note
16 z

z
This item is displayed when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is installed.
The print results may differ between the [PDF Bridge] and [PS] selections.
z When [PS] is selected, the [Layout] setting becomes invalid.

678
 DocuWorks Direct Print

DocuWorks Direct Print

DocuWorks Direct Print is a feature that prints DocuWorks files by using the lpr command
directly instead of a print driver. When this feature is used, the following items will be
printed based on the settings of [DocuWorks] under [Print Mode].

z Output Quantity z Layout

z 2 Sided Printing z Paper Size
z Print Mode z Output Color
z
Collate

Important
z You cannot print DocuWorks files with Japanese fonts used.

Note
z When you use the lpr command to print, specify the number of copies to be printed in the lpr command. The
copy quantity setting made on [Output Quantity] under [DocuWorks] becomes invalid. If the copy quantity is
not specified in the lpr command, only one copy is printed.
z
Before you print DocuWorks file using the lpr command, the LPD protocol of the machine must be started
with the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services.

DocuWorks Direct Print Settings

This section describes the available settings with the DocuWorks Direct Print feature.
The settings configured here are valid when printing DocuWorks files without using
ContentsBridge provided by Fuji Xerox.
Note
z For information on printing DocuWorks files using ContentsBridge Utility, refer to the manual provided on the
Media (Software/Product Manual).

Setting Item Item Value

Number
Output quantity 501 Sets the number of copies to be printed.
[1-999] (Default: 1): 1-999 sheets
2 sided printing 502 Sets the 2 sided printing option.
[0](Default): 1 Sided
[1]: 2 Sided, Flip on Long Edge
[2]: 2 Sided, Flip on Short Edge
[2 Sided Print, Flip on Long Edge] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that
pages can be bound along the long edge.
[2 Sided Print, Flip on Short Edge] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that
pages can be bound along the short edge.
Appendix

Print mode 503 Selects which you prioritize: image quality or print speed.
[0] (Default) : Standard
[1]: High Speed
[2]: Fine
The [Standard] setting prints in a standard speed and quality.
The [High Speed] setting prioritize the print speed. 16
The [Fine] quality setting prints in high quality but in a slower speed.
Collate 504 Selects whether to print multiple-sheet documents as collated sets (1, 2, 3...1,
2, 3...).
[0](Default) :Off
[1]: On

679
 Appendix

Setting Item Item Value

Number
Layout 505 Sets the layout for printing.
[0] (Default) : Auto %
[2]: 2-up
[3]: 4-up
[4]: 100% (size-by-size)
The [Auto %] setting automatically calculates the largest magnification
possible to fit to the output paper size.The [2-up] setting prints two pages
onto one sheet of paper. When [2-Up] is selected, the paper size is fixed at
A4.The [4-up] setting prints four pages on each sheet of paper. When [4-Up] is
selected, the paper size is fixed at A4.
Paper size 506 Sets the size of the paper to be printed.
[0] (Default) : Auto
[1]: A4
The [Auto] setting automatically determines the paper size, based on the size
and settings of a DocuWorks file to be printed.
Output color 507 Sets whether to print in color or monochrome.
[0] (Default): Auto
[1]: Black
The [Auto] setting automatically determines the output color: color or
monochrome for each page. If colors other than black and white are used on
the original, the machine prints the document in color, and if only black and
white are used on the original, the machine prints in monochrome.
Appendix

16

680
 PCL Emulation

PCL Emulation
Emulation
This section describes the printer language emulations available on the machine.
Print data conforms to certain rules (grammars). These rules (grammars) are called printer
languages.
The machine supports two types of printer languages: a page description language, which
is used to create images on a page-by-page basis, and an emulation, which is used to
achieve the print results similar to those of other printers. To "emulate" means to imitate
the print results of other printers.

Emulation Mode
When printing data written in a language other than a page description language
supported by the machine, switch the machine to the emulation mode. The relationships
between the emulation mode and the printer to be emulated are as follows:

Emulation Mode Printer to be Emulated

PCL emulation mode (PCL mode) LJ4200

Switching between Printer Languages

The machine provides the Multi-emulation feature that allows switching between different
printer languages.
The methods of switching between printer languages are as follows:

„ Switching by Commands
Commands for switching between printer languages are provided. Upon receipt of a
command, the machine switches to the relevant printer language.

„ Automatic Switching
The machine analyzes the data received by a host interface, and automatically identifies
the printer language to be used. It then switches to the identified printer language.

„ Interface-dependent
You can set a printer language for each host interface by using CentreWare Internet
Services. The machine switches to a printer language corresponding to the host interface
that received data.
Appendix

Fonts

Available fonts
The following fonts can be used for PCL emulation:
16
„ Alphanumeric fonts

z
CG Times z
Univers Bold Condensed
z CG Times Italic z Univers Bold Condensed Italic
z CG Times Bold z Antique Olive
z
CG Times Bold Italic z
Antique Olive Italic

681
 Appendix

z Univers Medium z Antique Olive Bold

z
Univers Medium Italic z
CG Omega
z Univers Bold z CG Omega Italic
z Univers Bold Italic z CG Omega Bold
z
Univers Medium Condensed z
CG Omega Bold Italic
z Univers Medium Condensed Italic z Garamond Antiqua
z Garamond Kursiv z Helvetica Oblique
z
Garamond Halbfett z
Helvetica Bold
z Garamond Kursiv Halbfett z Helvetica Bold Oblique
z Courier z CourierPS
z Courier Italic z CourierPS Oblique
z Courier Bold z CourierPS Bold
z Courier Bold Italic z CourierPS Bold Oblique
z
Letter Gothic z
SymbolPS
z Letter Gothic Italic z Palatino Roman
z Letter Gothic Bold z Palatino Italic
z
Albertus Medium z
Palatino Bold
z Albertus Extra Bold z Palatino Bold Italic
z Clarendon Condensed z ITC Bookman Light
z
Coronet z
ITC Bookman Light Italic
z Marigold z ITC Bookman Demi
z Arial z ITC Bookman Demi Italic
z Arial Italic z Helvetica Narrow
z Arial Bold z Helvetica Narrow Oblique
z Arial Bold Italic z Helvetica Narrow Bold
z Times New z Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
z Times New Italic z New Century Schoolbook Roman
z
Times New Bold z
New Century Schoolbook Italic
z
Times New Bold Italic z
New Century Schoolbook Bold
z
Symbol z
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
z Wingdings z ITC Avant Garde Book
z
Line Printer z
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
z
Times Roman z
ITC Avant Garde Demi
z Times Italic z ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
z
Times Bold z
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
z
Times Bold Italic z
ITC Zapf Dingbats
z Helvetica z OCR-B

Font Caching
To ensure hi-speed printing, outline fonts of up to a certain size are cached. Outlinefonts
are converted into bitmap data temporarily and then printed. To minimize thisprocessing
time, the processed bitmap data is saved in the memory. This process iscalled font caching.
The saved bitmap data is deleted when you turn the machine off or reset it. For the PCL
emulation mode, data other than that being processed is not saved.

Output Feature
This section describes the machine's output features. The following two output features are
available:
z
Outputting a Pending Print Job
Appendix

z Forcible Output in Emulation Mode

Outputting a Pending Print Job

16 The printing of jobs already received by the machine can be prioritized over other jobs.
Reference
z For information on prioritizing the printing of jobs already received by the machine, refer to "Job Status" > "Printing Pending Jobs"
in the User Guide.

682
 PCL Emulation

Forcible Output in Emulation Mode

In emulation mode, data is not output until one complete page of data is prepared or the
page break command is received. For a USB interface, if printing ends in the middle of a
page, the next data set waits until the time set with [Auto Eject Time] elapses.
Reference
z For more information on forcible printing, refer to "Job Status" in the User Guide.
z For more information on the auto eject time, refer to Auto Eject Time(P.195).

PCL Emulation Settings

The following table shows the emulation parameters and their values for PCL emulation.

PCL Settings List

The following table describes the parameters that can be set with the mode menu.

Parameter Item No. Value

Paper tray 201 Sets the paper tray to be used for printing.
[0] (Default): Auto
[1]: Tray 1
[2]: Tray 2
[3]: Tray 3
[4]: Tray 4
[5]: Tray 5

Note
z When any of Trays 1 to 4 is selected, the paper size is determined by the size of paper
loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper Size] cannot be set.

Note
z
When [Auto] is selected and paper of the same size in the same orientation in multiple
trays is loaded, paper will be fed in the order of Tray 1 J Tray 2 JTray 3 J Tray 4. If
paper of the same size is loaded in multiple trays but in different orientations, feeding
of the paper loaded in the landscape orientation is prioritized.
Auto size 202 Sets the default paper size. Only available when [Paper Tray] is set to [Auto].
Only cut sheet can be set.
[3]: A3
[4] (Default): A4
[5]: A5
[14]: B4
[15]: B5
[21]: 8.5 X 14"
[22]: 8.5 X 13"
[23] (Default): 8.5 X 11"
Appendix

[24]: 11 X 17"
[25]: Custom Size
[30]: 8K

Important
z When any of Trays 1 to 4 is selected, [Paper Size] cannot be set. The paper size loaded
in the specified tray is displayed.
16
Note
z When any of Trays 1 to 4 is selected, the paper size is determined by the size of paper
loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper Size] cannot be set.

Note
z Depending on the combination of [Original Size] and [Paper Size], [?] may be displayed
for the magnification. In this case, the document is printed at a scale of 100%.

683
 Appendix

Parameter Item No. Value

Bypass size 203 Sets the default paper size. Only available when [Paper Tray] is set to [Auto].
Only cut sheet can be set.
[3]: A3
[4] (Default): A4
[5]: A5
[14]: B4
[15]: B5
[21]: 8.5 X 14"
[22]: 8.5 X 13"
[23] (Default): 8.5 X 11"
[24]: 11 X 17"
[25]: Custom Size
Output 204 Sets the output tray for the printouts.
destination [0] (Default): Center Tray - Lower
[1]: Side Tray (optional)
[2]: Center Tray - Upper (optional)
[80]: Right Middle Tray (optional)
[81]: Right Top Tray (optional)
Orientation 205 Set the orientation of paper.
[0] (Default): Portrait
[1]: Landscape
2 Sided printing 206 Sets the 2 sided printing.
[0] (Default): Off
[1]: On
Appendix

16

684
 PCL Emulation

Parameter Item No. Value

Default font 207 [0]: CG Times [43]: Symbol
[1]: CG Times Italic [44]: Wingdings
[2]: CG Times Bold [45]: Line Printer
[3]: CG Times Bold Italic [46]: Times Roman
[4]: Univers Medium [47]: Times Italic
[5]: Univers Medium Italic [48]: Times Bold
[6]: Univers Bold [49]: Times Bold Italic
[7]: Univers Bold Italic [50]: Helvetica
[8]: Univers Medium Condensed [51]: Helvetica Oblique
[9]: Univers Medium Condensed Italic [52]: Helvetica Bold
[10]: Univers Bold Condensed [53]: Helvetica Bold Oblique
[11]: Univers Bold Condensed Italic [54]: CourierPS
[12]: Antique Olive [55]: CourierPS Oblique
[13]: Antique Olive Italic [56]: CourierPS Bold
[14]: Antique Olive Bold [57]: CourierPS Bold Oblique
[15]: CG Omega [58]: SymbolPS
[16]: CG Omega Italic [59]: Palatino Roman
[17]: CG Omega Bold [60]: Palatino Italic
[18]: CG Omega Bold Italic [61]: Palatino Bold
[19]: Garamond Antiqua [62]: Palatino Bold Italic
[20]: Garamond Kursiv [63]: ITC Bookman Light
[21]: Garamond Halbfett [64]: ITC Bookman Light Italic
[22]: Garamond Kursiv Halbfett [65]: ITC Bookman Demi
[23] (Default): Courier [66]: ITC Bookman Demi Italic
[24]: Courier Italic [67]: Helvetica Narrow
[25]: Courier Bold [68]: Helvetica Narrow Oblique
[26]: Courier Bold Italic [69]: Helvetica Narrow Bold
[27]: Letter Gothic [70]: Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
[28]: Letter Gothic Italic [71]: New Century Schoolbook
[29]: Letter Gothic Bold Roman
[30]: Albertus Medium [72]: New Century Schoolbook Italic
[31]: Albertus Extra Bold [73]: New Century Schoolbook Bold
[32]: Clarendon Condensed [74]: New Century Schoolbook Bold
[33]: Coronet Italic
[34]: Marigold [75]: ITC Avant Garde Book
[35]: Arial [76]: ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
[36]: Arial Italic [77]: ITC Avant Garde Demi
[37]: Arial Bold [78]: ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
[38]: Arial Bold Italic [79]: ITC Zapf Chancery Medium
[39]: Times New Italic
[40]: Times New Italic [80]: ITC Zapf Dingbats
[41]: Times New Bold
[42]: Times New Bold Italic
Appendix

16

685
 Appendix

Parameter Item No. Value

Symbol set 208 [0] (Default): Roman 8 [18]: Microsoft Publishing
[1]: ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 [19]: Math 8
[2]: ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 [20]: PS Math
[3]: ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 [21]: Pi Font
[4]: ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 [22]: Legal
[5]: PC-8 [23]: ISO 4 United Kingdom
[6]: PC-8 DN [24]: ISO 6 ASCII
[7]: PC-775 [25]: ISO 11 Swedish:names
[8]: PC-850 [26]: ISO 15 Italian
[9]: PC-852 [27]: ISO 17 Spanish
[10]: PC-1004 (OS/2) [28]: ISO 21 German
[11]: PC Turkish [29]: ISO 60 Norwegian v1
[12]: Windows 3.1 Latin 1 [30]: ISO 69 French
[13]: Windows 3.1 Latin 2 [31]: Windows 3.0 Latin 1
[14]: Windows 3.1 Latin 5 [32]: Windows Baltic
[15]: DeskTop [33]: Symbol
[16]: PS Text [34]: Wingdings
[17]: MC Text [35]: UCS-2
Font size 209 Specifies the point size of a font in 25 increments. The value of 100 represents 1
point.
[400] - [5000] (Default: [1200]): 4.00 to 50.00 point
Font pitch 210 Specifies the pitch size of a font. The value of 100 represents the pitch size of 1
point.
[600] - [2400] (Default: [1000]): 6.00 to 24.00 point
Form line 211 Specifies the number of lines on a page.
[5] - [128] (Default: [64]): 6.00 to 24.00 point
Quantity 212 Sets the number of copies to be printed.
[1] - [999] (Default: [1]): 1 to 999 sets

Note
z
When the output quantity is specified by a client, that number of copies is printed.
After printing, the number set on the control panel is overwritten with the number
newly specified. However, the number of copies specified from the LPD port will not
overwrite the number set on the control panel.
Image enhance 213 Sets whether or not to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
Image Enhancement smoothens the border between black and white, reducing
rough edges, and thus seemingly increasing the resolution.
[0]: Off
[1] (Default): On
HexDump 214 Sets whether to enable a hex dump.
[0] (Default): Off
[1]: On
Draft mode 215 When printing in black and white, prints the portion printed in black by using the
Appendix

draft mode. This feature is enabled for the entire document.

[0] (Default): Off
[1]: On
Color mode 216 Sets the color mode.
16 [0] (Default): Auto
[1]: Color
[2]: Mono

686
 PCL Emulation

Parameter Item No. Value

Binding 217 Sets binding when printing 2 sided.
You can select [LEF] or [SEF] for 2 sided printing. Select according to the edge to
be bound. Unifies the leading direction of the image on the front and rear sides
of the paper at the long edge of the paper for LEF and at the short edge of the
paper for SEF.
[0] (Default): LEF
[1]: SEF
Line termination 218 Sets line termination processing.
[0] (Default): Off
[1]: Add-LF (Appends an LF to CR)
[2]: Add-CR (Appends a CR to LF and FF)
[3]: CR-XX (Appends a CR to LF and FF, and LF to CR)
Default custom 219(Short Specifies the default custom paper size.
paper size edge) [2100] (Default short-edge value) : 210.0 mm
[2970] (Default long-edge value) : 297.0 mm
220(Long
[0] - [9999]: 0 to 999.9 mm
edge)
221 Sets the method for specifying the number of copies to print.
[0] : Protocol
[1]: Panel
[2](Default): Command

Appendix

16

687
 Appendix

HP-GL/2 Emulation
Emulation
This section describes the printer language emulations available on the machine.
Print data conforms to certain rules (grammars). These rules (grammars) are called printer
languages.
The machine supports two types of printer languages: a page description language, which
is used to create images on a page-by-page basis, and an emulation, which is used to
achieve the print results similar to those of other printers. To "emulate" means to imitate
the print results of other printers.

Emulation Mode
When printing data written in a language other than a page description language
supported by the machine, switch the machine to the emulation mode. The relationships
between the emulation mode and the printer to be emulated are as follows:

Emulation Mode Printer to be Emulated

HP-GL/2 emulation mode (HP-GL/2 mode) DJ750C Plus

Switching between Printer Languages

The machine provides the Multi-emulation feature that allows switching between different
printer languages.
The methods of switching between printer languages are as follows:

„ Switching by Commands
Commands for switching between printer languages are provided. Upon receipt of a
command, the machine switches to the relevant printer language.

„ Automatic Switching
The machine analyzes the data received by a host interface, and automatically identifies
the printer language to be used. It then switches to the identified printer language.

„ Interface-dependent
You can set a printer language for each host interface by using CentreWare Internet
Services. The machine switches to a printer language corresponding to the host interface
that received data.
Appendix

Fonts
16 Available fonts
The following fonts can be used for HP-GL/2 emulation:

„ Alphanumeric fonts
z
Roman
z Sans serif

688
 HP-GL/2 Emulation

Font Caching
To ensure hi-speed printing, outline fonts of up to a certain size are cached. Outline fonts
are converted into bitmap data temporarily and then printed. To minimize this processing
time, the processed bitmap data is saved in the memory. This process is called font caching.
The saved bitmap data is deleted when you turn the machine off or reset it. For the PCL
emulation mode, data other than that being processed is not saved.

Output Feature
This section describes the machine's output features. The following two output features are
available:
z Outputting a Pending Print Job
z Forcible Output in Emulation Mode

Outputting a Pending Print Job

The printing of jobs already received by the machine can be prioritized over other jobs.
Reference
z For information on prioritizing the printing of jobs already received by the machine, refer to "11 Job Status" > "Printing Pending
Jobs" in the User Guide.

Forcible Output in Emulation Mode

Factory Default Settings

In HP-GL or HP-GL/2 emulation mode factory default setting, the document is reduced or
enlarged to print according to the paper size (Auto Layout).

„ Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 degrees, Scaling Mode: Paper Size, Scaling: On

Print Area

Appendix

Document Size Paper Size

Note
z Change the factory default setting if required. For more information on changing procedures, refer to "HP-
16
GL/2 Emulation" (P.688).

„ When the extra Hard Disk is installed on the printer

When Auto Layout is enabled, the print data is stored to the hard disk.

689
 Appendix

HP-GL/2 Emulation Settings

The following table shows the emulation parameters and their values for HP-GL/2
emulation.

HP-GL/2 Settings List

Items that can be set using the HP-GL/2 mode menu are explained in two groups: basic
settings and extended settings.

Basic Settings

Parameter Item No. Value

Document size 101 Sets the document size created by a computer.
[0]: ] A0
[1]: A1
[2]: A2
[3]: A3
[4]: A4
[5]: A5
[10]: B0
[11]: B1
[12]: B2
[13]: B3
[14]: B4
[15]: B5
[99](Default):Auto
[100]: Paper
When [Auto] is selected, the settings of the Scaling mode, the Area
Determination mode, and the Paper Margin settings of Print Control become
enabled.

Note
z If the document size other than [Auto] is selected, the settings under [Auto layout]
become [ON].
z Depending on the combination of [Document size] and [Paper size], the document
is printed at a scale of 100%.
Paper size 102 Sets the default paper size. Only available when [Paper tray] is set to [Auto] or
[Tray 5]. Only cut sheet can be set.
[3]: A3
[4]: A4
[5]: A5
[14]: B4
[15]: B5
[99]: Auto
Appendix

[101](Default):A Size

Important
z When Trays 1 to 4 is selected, [Paper size] cannot be set. The paper size loaded in
the specified tray is displayed.
16 Note
z If [A Size] or [Auto] is selected, the settings become as follows:
z When [Document size] is set to other than [Auto], [Paper size] is set to [A3].
z
When Trays 1 to 4 is selected, the paper size is determined by the size of paper
loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper size] cannot be set.
z
Depending on the combination of [Document size] and [Paper size], [?] may be
displayed for the magnification. In this case, the document is printed at a scale of
100%.

690
 HP-GL/2 Emulation

Paper tray 103 Sets the paper tray to be used for printing.
[0](Default):Auto
[1]: Tray1
[2]: Tray2
[3]: Tray3
[4]: Tray4
[5]: Tray5

Important
z When Trays 1 to 4 is selected, the paper size is determined by the size of paper
loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper size] cannot be set.
Paper tray 103
Note
z
When [Auto] is selected and paper of the same size in the same orientation in
multiple trays is loaded, paper will be fed in the order of Tray 1 J Tray 2 J Tray 3
J Tray 4. If paper of the same size is loaded in multiple trays but in different
orientations, feeding of the paper loaded in the landscape orientation is prioritized.

Extended Settings

Auto layout 106 Selects whether to perform auto layout of the document or not.
[0](Default):ON
[1]: OFF
Active palette 107 Selects whether to use a pen specified by command or set on the panel.
[0](Default):Command
[1]: Panel
No. of prints 108 Sets the number of copy to be printed.
[1] - [250] (Default: 1) : 1 - 250
Output 109 [0] (Default) : Center Tray - Lower
destination [1] : Side Tray (optional)
[2] : Center Tray - Upper (optional)
[80] : Right Middle Tray (optional)
[81] : Right Top Tray (optional)

Note
z
When the optional Extra Center Tray is installed, "Center Tray - Lower" is used as
the Center Tray.
[0] (Default) : Right Top Tray
[80] : Right Middle Tray (optional)
[0] (Default) : Center Tray or Center Tray - Lower
[2] : Center Tray - Upper
[80] : Right Middle Tray (optional)
[0] (Default) : Right Top Tray
[80] : Finisher Tray (optional)
[0] (Default) : Center Tray
Appendix

[80] : Finisher Tray (optional)

[0] (Default) : Center Tray or Center Tray - Upper
[1] : Left Top Tray (optional)
[2] : Center Tray - Lower
[80] : Finisher Tray (optional)
[68] : Stacker Tray (optional)
[69] : Stacker - Top Tray (optional)
16
[80] : Finisher Tray (optional)
[81] : Right Top Tray (optional)
2 sided printing 110 Sets 2 sided printing.
[0] (Default) : None
[1] : Head to head
[2] : Head to toe

691
 Appendix

Alphanumeric 112 Sets the font for single-byte characters.

fonts
Reference
z For more information on fonts, refer to "Internal Fonts" (P.648).
[0] (Default) : Stroke
[1] : Roman
[2] : Sans serif
Position 113 Adjusts the hard clip area vertically or horizontally. You can set from -250
adjustment (Vertical mm to +250 mm in 1 mm increments.
position [0] (Default) : Does not move the hard clip area.
adjustment) [1] - [250] : -250 to -1 mm
[251] - [500] : +1 to +250 mm
114
(Horizontal Important
position z
Data outside the printable area is not printed regardless of the adjustment of the
adjustment) print position. In addition, data moved outside the printable area as a result of
adjusting the print position is not printed.
Number of sets 115 Sets the method for specifying the print sets.
[0] (Default) : Protocol
[1] : Panel
[2] : Command
Print control 150 Selects a graphics language. This setting affects to IW, OW, and UC of HP-
(HP-GL mode) GL/2 commands.
[0] (Default) : HP-GL
[1] : HP-GL/2

Note
z
To print HP-GL/2 command that does not include BP command, select [HP-GL/2].
Appendix

16

692
 HP-GL/2 Emulation

Print control 151 Sets the size of hard clip area.

(Hard clip) In HP-GL mode, the plottable area is determined in line with the paper size,
apart from the printable area. This area is called the "hard clip area", and
determines the maximum range of pen movement. Accordingly, images
cannot be drawn outside the boundary of the hard clip area.
[0] : Standard
[2] (Default) : Paper

Reference
z For more information on hard clip area, refer to "Hard Clip Area" (P.695).
152 Sets the command that indicates the end of plotting. When the command
(Eject specified here is received, plotting is terminated and the paper is output.
command SP) [0] (Default): OFF
[1]: ON
153
The default value is [ON] for SPO, and [OFF] for the others.
(Eject
command SPO) Reference
z
154 If multiple commands are specified, when one of the commands is received, plotting is terminated
(Eject and the paper is output.
command NR)
155
(Eject
command FR)
156
(Eject
command PG)
157
(Eject
command AF)
158
(Eject
command AH)
159 Sets whether the original size is enlarged or reduced so that the document
(Scaling) size fits the paper size.
[0]: OFF
[1] (Default) : ON
160 Selects the document size for auto scaling: A series paper (A0, A1, A2, A3, A4,
(Scalingmode) and A6) or the active coordinate area which is determined accordance with
the setting selected in [Area Determination Mode].
[0] (Default) : Paper Size
[1] : Active Coordinate Area

Note
z [Active Coordinate Area] can be selected only when [Auto layout] is set to [ON].
Appendix

When [OFF] is selected, [Scaling mode] becomes [Paper Size].

z The setting of the scaling mode is valid when [Document size] is set to [Auto].
161 Sets the method to obtain the active coordinate area when auto scaling is
(Activeareadet being used.
erminationcom
mand)
[0] (Default) : Auto
[1]: PS
16
[2]: IW
[3]: IP
[4]: Adapted

Note
z The setting of the active area determination command is valid when [Document
size] is set to [Auto].

693
 Appendix

Print control 162 Sets the paper margin when auto scaling is being used.
(Papermargin) [0] - [99] (Default: 0) : 0 to 99 mm

Note
z The setting of the paper margin is valid when [Document size] is set to [Auto].
163 Sets whether to perform image enhancement, which artificially increases the
(Imageenhanc resolution of an image and smooth its edges.
ement) [0]:OFF
[1] (Default) : ON
Stapling 164 Sets the stapling position.
[0] (Default) : None
[1]: Top Left
[2]: Top Double
[3]: Top Right
[4]: Left Double
[5]: Right Double
[6]: Bottom Left
[7]: Bottom Double
[8]: Bottom Right
Manual feed 165 [0]:None
traycheck [1] (Default): Yes
indicator
Punching 166 Select the position for punching holes.
[0](Default): None
[1]:Top
[2]:Bottom
[3]:Left
[4]:Right
Number of holes 167 Select the number of punch holes.
[0] (Default) : 2 holes
[1]:3 holes
[2]:4 holes
Emulation target 169 Select the machine to emulate.
printer [0] (Default): HP750
[1]: FX4036
Pen attributes 800-815 (Pen Set the width (thickness of the line) of the 16 pens (No. 00 to 15). You can set
width) (No. 0- the width from 0.0 to 25.5 mm in 0.1 mm increments. No. 00 denotes Item
No.15) No. 800.
[0] - [255] (Default: 3) : 0 to 25.5 mm

Note
z If the image is reduced by concern with the relationship between [Document size]
and [Paper size] settings, the pen width is reduced accordingly to 0.1 mm at the
smallest.
Appendix

z
The width of the line gets thick symmetrically with respect to the center of the line.
z If the width is set to 0.0 mm, nothing is plotted.

16

694
 HP-GL/2 Emulation

Pen attributes 850-865 Set the line end shape of the 16 pens (No. 00 to 15). No. 00 denotes Item No.
(Lineend 850.
shape) (No. 0- [0] (Default): Cut
No.15) [1]: Round
[2]: Rectangular
[Cut]
: specified coordinate
[Round]
: specified coordinate
[Rectangular]
: specified coordinate
900-915 (Pen Set the process for when pens’ lines intersect for 16 pens (No. 00 to 15).No.
intersects)(No. 00 denotes Item No. 900.
0-No.15) [0] (Default): None
[1]: Intersect
[2]: Round
[3]: Cut
[None]

[Intersect]

[Round]

[Cut]

Note
z [None] is suitable for drafts because it takes shortest processing time.
z If a symbol is set by symbol command, the link process is not executed. The
symbol command is an HP-GL/2 command for specifying a symbol.

Hard Clip Area

In the HP-GL mode, the plottable area is determined in line with the paper size, apart from
the printable area. This area is called the "hard clip area", and determines the maximum
range of pen movement. Accordingly, images cannot be drawn outside the boundary of the
hard clip area. This machine allows you to select a hard clip area from the following:
Appendix

z Standard
Defines the printable area of the machine as the hard clip area.
z
Paper
16

695
 Appendix

Defines a size same as the paper size as the hard clip area. However, the area that allows
actual printing is within the printable area.
The hard clip area can be set either with HP-GL emulation mode settings or by the specified
hard clip command "&I".
The following coordinate values present an example of when the origin is set at the lower
left (Auto Layout in HP-GL/2) of A3 sheet.
+Y (16798, 11876)

(16442, 11520)

Standard Hard Clip Area

Paper Hard Clip Area

Paper Size

(0, 0) Standard origin

(0, 0) Paper origin +X

Standard
Defines the printable area of the machine as the hard clip area.

Printable Area
The printable area in the HP-GL mode is as follows:
Appendix

16

696
 HP-GL/2 Emulation

Paper Size and Printable Area

Papersiz Paper Length(1/ Coordinate Value (1/7200 inch)

e 7200 inch)
X Axis Y Axis Margin Printable Area Top-right Edge Margin
Width Heigh Botto Botto LongSi ShortS Toprigh Toprig XR YU
t m- m- de ide tX htY
left X left Y
A3 119052 84168 1260 1260 116532 81648 117792 82908 1260 1260
A4 84168 59508 1260 1260 81648 56988 82908 58248 1260 1260
A5 59508 41940 1260 1260 56988 39420 58248 40680 1260 1260
B4 103176 72828 1260 1260 100656 70308 101916 71568 1260 1260
B5 72828 51588 1260 1260 70308 49068 71568 50328 1260 1260

Note
z The HP-GL emulation supports five paper sizes: A3, A5, A4, B4, and B5.

Width

YU Top-right X, Top-right Y

Physical paper size Short-side

Height

Printable Area
Long-side

XR

Bottom-left X, Bottom-left Y Appendix

Papers Paper Length(1/ Coordinate Value (1/7200 inch)

ize 7200 inch
X Axis Y Axis Margin Printable Area Top-right Edge Margin
Width Height Botto Botto LongS ShortSi Toprig Toprigh XR YU
16
m- m- ide de htX tY
left X left Y
A3 84168 119052 1260 1260 81648 116532 82908 117792 1260 1260
A4 59508 84168 1260 1260 56988 81648 58248 82908 1260 1260
A5 41940 59508 1260 1260 39420 56988 40680 58248 1260 1260

697
 Appendix

Papers Paper Length(1/ Coordinate Value (1/7200 inch)

ize 7200 inch
X Axis Y Axis Margin Printable Area Top-right Edge Margin
Width Height Botto Botto LongS ShortSi Toprig Toprigh XR YU
m- m- ide de htX tY
left X left Y
B4 72828 103176 1260 1260 70308 100656 71568 101916 1260 1260
B5 51588 72828 1260 1260 49068 70308 50328 71568 1260 1260

Note
z The HP-GL emulation supports five paper sizes: A3, A5, A4, B4, and B5.

Width

YU Top-right X, Top-right Y

Long-side

Physical Short-side
paper size

Printable Area

Height

XR

Bottom-left X, Bottom-left Y

(0, 0)
Appendix

Auto Layout
16 This section explains Auto Layout.

What is Auto Layout?

Auto Layout is a function that evaluates document size using the HP-GL data entered from
a host system and enlarges or reduces the document size corresponding to the paper size so
that data plotted is placed in the center of the paper. Using the Auto Scaling/Auto Layout

698
 HP-GL/2 Emulation

function enables you to print a document in the HP-GL mode without concern for
document size and origin position.
All Auto Layout settings can be made in the [HP-GL/2 - Programming] screen (Select the
<Machine Status> button > [Print Mode] > [HP-GL/2 Emulation] > [Programming]). The
settings cannot be made with advanced commands.

Enabling Auto Layout

To enable Auto Layout, enter Item Numbers and Values on the [HP-GL/2 - Programming]
screen as follows:
z Set [Document size ([101])] to [Auto ([99])]. The default value is [Auto ([99])].
z
Set [Auto layout ([106])] to [ON ([0])] to set the origin position. The default value is [ON
([0])].
z Set [Scaling ([159])] to [ON ([1])]. The default value is [ON ([1])].
z
Select a method for obtaining the active coordinate area using the area determination
mode. The default value is [Auto ([0])].
z Set the paper margin using [Paper margin ([162])]. The default value is 0 mm ([0]).
z
Set the scaling mode. The default value is [Paper Size ([0])].

Setting Item Details

The following describes the details for each setting. You can change the settings on the
[HP-GL/2 - Programming] screen.

„ Document Size
To set Document size to Auto, enter [101] to the [Item Number] box and select [Change
Value], and then enter [99] to the [New Value] box and select [Save]. Once you set
Document size to Auto, you can set Auto layout to ON.

„ Auto Layout
To set Auto layout to ON, enter [106] to the [Item Number] box and select [Change Value],
and then enter [0] to the [New Value] box and select [Save].
Enabling Auto layout activates the settings for scaling, area determination mode, paper
margins, and scaling mode.

„ Scaling
Set whether the original size is enlarged or reduced so that the document size fits the paper
size.
Appendix

16

699
 Appendix

„ Area Determination Mode

The following methods are available to obtain an active coordinates area using HP-GL data.
Auto
Automatically selects the method of determining the active coordinates area from PS, IW,
IP, and Adapted in that order of priority.
IW
The area specified by the last IW command in the data becomes the active coordinates
area. If there are no IW commands in the data, the active coordinates area is determined
by Adapted.
IP
The coordinates encompassing all areas specified by IP commands in the data becomes
the active coordinates area.If there are no IP commands in the data, the active coordinates
area is determined byAdapted.
Adapted
The active coordinates area is determined by the following conditions:
z Minimum/Maximum position coordinates plotted by drawing commands
z Maximum font size specified within the page
z
Maximum line width
PS
The coordinates encompassing all areas specified by PS commands in the data becomes
the active coordinates area. If there are no PS commands in the data, the active coordinate
area is determined by Adapted.

„ Paper Margin
Set the range from 0 to 99 mm. The default value is 0 mm. To get the active coordinates
area, subtract the area set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained in
the area determination mode.

Paper Margins
Appendix

Cannot plot because activecoordinates

Area obtained by area determination mode
area exceeds
hard clip is exceeded
16 Area remaining when paper margin subtracted fromarea
obtained by area determination mode

700
 HP-GL/2 Emulation

„ Scaling Mode
Select the mode for determining the document size from the obtained active coordinates
area. Use active coordinates area to determine whether the paper orientation will be
portrait or landscape.
z If it is an Active Coordinates Area
To obtain the document size, subtract the area specified in paper margins from the active
coordinates area obtained in the area determination mode.
z
If it is a Paper Size
Set the document size from the obtained active coordinates area and the origin point
setting. The document size can be selected from six sizes of A series paper (A0, A1, A2, A3,
A4, or A5).

How to Determine Document Size

The document size is determined by comparing with the hard clip area of each paper size
based on the active coordinates area obtained in the scaling mode, paper margin, and area
determination mode.

„ If the Scaling Mode is a Paper Size

1) Obtain the coordinate area to be active from the HP-GL data entered, in accordance with
the area determination mode.
2) As a margin, add the larger value of either the font size specified in the page, the default
size or one half the specified pen width, to the active coordinates area obtained in step 1.
3) Subtract the value set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained in
step 2.
4) The minimum size that includes the active coordinates area obtained in step 3 will be the
document size.

„ If the Scaling Mode is the ACA

1) Obtain the coordinate area to be active from the HP-GL data entered, in accord with the
area determination mode.
2) As a margin, add the larger value of either the font size specified in the page, the default
size or one half the specified pen width, to the active coordinates area obtained in step 1.
3) Subtract the value set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained in
step 2.
4) The ACA obtained in the process up to step 3 will be the document size.
Appendix

16

701
 Appendix

z For Example:
If the following data is entered when the scaling mode is paper size, origin position is Auto,
paper margin is 10mm, and area determination mode is IP:
All pen width settings are 0.1 mm.
The following data does not contain a character size specification command and the A3
physical size of the area specified by IP/IW.
IN;
IP-8399,-5938, 8399, 5938;
IW-8399,-5938, 8399, 5938;
PU;
SP1;
:
:
SP0;
1) As the area determination mode is IP, the active coordinates area is specified as the area
-8399,-5938,8399,5938 by an IP command.
2) Because there are no font size specification commands and all pen widths are 0.1mm in
the above example, add the height/2 of the default font size for A3 size paper (75 plotter
units) to the active coordinates area obtained in step 1.
The active coordinates area obtained in step 2 is -8474,-6013,8474,6013.
3) The value set in paper margins (10 mm = 400 plotter units) is subtracted from the active
coordinates area obtained in step 2.
The active coordinates area obtained in step 3 is -8074,-5613,8074,5613.
4) As the active coordinates area obtained in step 3 exceeds the A4 size and is A3 size, the
document size is determined to be A3.
In addition, when the paper margin setting is 0 mm and the active coordinates area is
8474,-6013,8474,6013, and this exceeds A3, but is A2 or smaller, the document size is
determined to be A2.
If the operation panel settings are as follows, the paper size is determined as below.
Document size: Auto
Paper Tray: Auto
The method for determining the paper size differs according to the paper size and scaling
mode settings on the operation panel.

„ If the Paper Size Setting is A Sizes

Appendix

The paper sizes among the three sizes (A3, A4, and A5) that are actually loaded in the trays
become the possible paper size.
If A series paper (A3, A4, A5) is not loaded in the trays, all three sizes, A3, A4, and A5
become possible sizes; a message is displayed on the touch screen prompting the user to
16 load A series paper.

„ If the Paper Size Setting is Auto

The paper sizes among the five sizes (A3, B4, A4, B5, and A5) that are actually loaded in the
trays become the possible paper size.
If A3, B4, A4, B5, or A5 paper is not loaded in the trays, all five sizes become possible sizes; a
message is displayed on the touch screen prompting the user to load paper.

702
 HP-GL/2 Emulation

„ If the Scaling Mode Setting is Paper Size

If the paper size and the document size are the same, select paper that is the same size as
the document.
If the document size is larger than any possible paper sizes, select the largest paper.
If the document size is smaller than any possible paper sizes, select the smallest paper.

„ If the Scaling Mode Setting is ACA

Select the smallest paper size that can contain the ACA.
If the active coordinates area is larger than any possible paper sizes, select the largest
paper.
If the active coordinates area is smaller than any possible paper sizes, select the smallest
paper.
Note
z If the document size is set to anything other than Auto, the paper size is the one set on the control panel.
z If the paper tray is set to Auto, the paper size is the one loaded in each tray. However, If paper whose size is
not supported is loaded, an error message will be displayed prompting the user to load a supported paper.

How to Determine the Scaling Ratio

When auto scaling is being used, although the scaling ratio is determined by document size
and paper size, it differs according to the scale mode setting.
Note
z
To activate scaling, set the scaling to ON on the [HP-GL/2 - Programming] screen. If it is set to OFF, it is
plotted at the same scale (100%).

„ If the Document Size is Auto and the Scaling Mode is Paper Size
The hard clip setting is inactive. The hard clip area is always the paper’s hard clip area.
z If the document size = paper size, it plots at the same scale (100%).
z
If the document size > paper size, it plots at a reduced scale.
z If the document size < paper size, it plots at the same scale (100%).

Paper Size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5
Document
Size
A0 35 25 100 31 100
A1 50 35 25 43 31
A2 71 50 35 61 43
Appendix

A3 100 71 50 87 61
A4 100 100 71 100 87
A5 100 100 100 100 100
16
Unit: Percent (%)

If the origin position of the plotting position is Layout, the document is placed and drawn in
the center.
If the origin position is bottom left or center, the origin of the document and the paper are
aligned and drawn.

703
 Appendix

„ If the Document Size is Auto and the Scaling Mode is ACA

The hard clip setting is inactive. The hard clip area is always the advanced hard clip area.
The scaling factor is determined according to the ACA and the paper size. The range for the
ACA for each paper size is as follows:

Paper 0 Degrees 90 Degrees

Size
Min Max Min Max
Value Value Value Value
P2x - P2y - P2x - P2y - P2x - P2y - P2x - P2y -
P1x P1y P1x P1y P1x P1y P1x P1y
A3 7829 5485 73075 51200 5485 7829 51200 73075
A4 5485 3828 51200 35733 3828 5485 35733 51200
A5 3828 2648 35733 24720 2648 3828 44088 35733
B4 6762 4723 63120 44088 4723 6762 44088 63120
B5 4723 3297 44088 30773 3297 4723 30773 44088

Unit: Plotter Unit

The maximum scaling factor is 210% of the advanced hard clip area for each paper size
and the minimum scaling factor is 22.5%.

Restriction on Auto Layout

„ When the extra Hard Disk is installed on the printer

When Auto Layout is enabled, the print data is stored to the hard disk.

„ When the extra Hard Disk is not installed on the printer

When Auto Layout is enabled, the print data is stored to auto layout memory area.The
default size of auto layout memory is set to 100 kbyte and an error will occur on the printer
when the print data exceeds 100 kbyte. In this case, change the size of auto layout memory
using the control panel. Auto layout memory size can be set up to 5120 kbyte. The printer
cannot receive the print data exceeding 5120 kbyte. We recommend you to install hard
disk on the printer when using Auto Layout feature.

Examples of Combinations of Each Function

The following are examples showing the print results that can be achieved by combining
various functions.
Appendix

16

704
 HP-GL/2 Emulation

„ Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Paper Size, Scaling: ON

Print Area

Document Size Paper Size

„ Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Paper Size, Scaling: OFF

Print Area

Document Size Paper Size

„ Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Active Coordinate Area,
Scaling: ON

Print Area
Appendix

Active Paper Size

Coordinate Area determined by
entered data
16

705
 Appendix

„ Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Active Coordinate Area,
Scaling: OFF

Print Area

Active Coordinate Area determined Paper Size

by entered data
Appendix

16

706
 Notes and Restrictions

Notes and Restrictions

This section describes the notes and restrictions to observe when using the machine.

Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine

„ Notes on Switching Off the Main Power and Power
Power off processing is performed internally on the machine for a while after the power is
switched off. Therefore, do not switch the main power off immediately after switching the
power off. Do not switch the main power off while the touch screen displays a screen or the
<Power Saver> button blinks. Switching off the main power may damage the hard disk and
the memory or cause a machine malfunction. In addition, the machine will not be activated
soon if you switch on the power before the touch screen gets blank. Confirm that the touch
screen is blank before switching on the power.

„ Installing and Moving the Machine

z
When moving the machine to another location, contact our Customer Support Center.
z When the machine is operating, do not subject it to shock.
z When closing the document cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
z
Do not place any objects near the ventilation openings of the machine's exhaust fan.

„ Character Code
In data transmission from a computer or read processing of data in a medium such as a
USB memory device, if characters that the machine does not support are included in folder
and file names, these characters may not be displayed correctly.
When the Media Print - Photos service is used, only ASCII characters can be used.

„ Output Destination
When you change the finisher to install, reconfigure the output destination under [Tools] >
[System Settings] > [Copy Service Settings] > [Copy Defaults] > [Output Destination].
You can also change the output destination for Print E-mail, Private Folder Printed Files, and
Fax Received as required.

„ Restrictions on Method of Recipient Specification

z The [New Recipients] and [Redial List] buttons may not be displayed when you specify a
recipient for fax/Internet fax/e-mail transmission if the method of recipient specification
is restricted in the System Administration mode. In this case, you cannot use the numeric
keypad either. Consequently, the recipients you can specify are limited to those who are
Appendix

registered on the Address Book.

You must add an address book entry using CentreWare Internet Services or Device Setup
Tool (free software). The system administrator, however, can register new recipients from
the control panel of the machine even when the method of recipient specification is
limited. 16
z The users who belong to an authorization group for which [Restrict Recipient Selection
Method] is set to [No Restriction] can directly specify a recipient for fax/Internet fax or
an e-mail transmission.

707
 Appendix

„ One-Touch Buttons
The One-Touch buttons (only for fax models) are used to specify an address when sending
faxes, IP faxes, internet faxes, Scan to PC, or E-mail. The buttons cannot be used when you
specify an e-mail address, a shared folder of SMB/FTP, or a server address.
The following two methods are available to assign the address numbers to the One-Touch
buttons.
z [Type 1]: Assigns the One-Touch buttons 1 to 52 to the address numbers 0001 to 0052,
and buttons 53 and 54 to the stored programming jobs 1 and 2.
z [Type 2]: Assigns the One-Touch buttons 1 to 45 to the address numbers 0001 to 0045,
and buttons 46 to 54 to the stored programming jobs 1 to 9.
Note
z [Type 1] is selected by factory default.

Reference
z
For more information on how to change the number of address numbers assigned, refer to "One-touch Buttons" (P.153).

„ Assigning to the One-Touch Buttons

You can change the way how address numbers and stored programs are assigned to the
One-Touch buttons. When you have changed the assignment, some One-Touch buttons
that were used for address numbers before may be used for stored programs while other
One-Touch buttons that were used for stored programs before may be used for address
numbers. Be sure that you perform the correct operation.

„ IC Card Reader (optional)

z
There are two types of IC Card Reader you can choose: the Embedded IC Card Reader
(optional) and the IC Card Reader for Wing Table (optional).
z Installing the IC Card Reader to the machine enhances the authentication function of
the machine. Also, you can restrict the usage of the machine and improve the security
management feature and availability of documents.
z The following EP accessories can be simultaneously installed on the machine with the IC
Card Reader.
- Foot Switch
- Dispenser 2
- IC Card Cashier
- Coinkit 8
- Coinkit 9
Note
z When you want to install IC Card Cashier, contact our Customer Support Center. Our service representative
performs the installation and configures the settings.
Appendix

„ Printed Time in Force Annotation

The time you specified to print a job, the time at which the print job is started inside the
machine, and the time at which the job is actually printed may not be coincident with one
16 another depending on the machine status and settings or the content of the print job. The
time printed in Force Annotation is the time at which the print job is started inside the
machine.

„ Stored Programming
z The following features and operations cannot be registered on a stored program.
- Registration and call of a stored program
- EP Diagnostic Request

708
 Notes and Restrictions

- System Settings
- The [Media Print - Text] and [Media Print - Photos] buttons on the Services Home
screen
- The [Store to USB] button on the Services Home screen
- The [Job Flow Sheets], on the Services Home screen
- A custom button to which the Job Flow service is assigned
- Address Book for the Fax/Internet Fax, E-mail, and Scan to PC services
- Buttons that cannot be selected
- The [Language] button on the Services Home screen
- The [Screen Brightness] button on the Services Home screen
- The [Browse] button of the Scan to PC service
- Address editing operation of the E-mail service ([Remove], [Edit], and [Close Menu] on
the pop-up menu)
- The <Power Saver> button
z After registering a program, you may not be able to retrieve the stored program correctly
if you execute the following operations:
- If a Watermark is registered on the program, and you change the default value of the
Watermark after registering the program
- If a passcode of a folder that is subject to operation by a stored program is changed
after the program is registered
- If the settings of the control panel are changed
- If the features registered on the custom buttons are changed
- If the setting is changed with [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Copy Service Settings] >
[Preset Buttons]
- If the program is selected from a list of a job flow or the Address Book
- If a button no longer functions as a result of a change of optional components such as
Finisher
- If the measurement unit such as mm or inch is changed
- If a file is selected from a file list with Job Status
- The use of a scrolling bar when you select an item

„ Output Color
When you select [Auto Detect] in [Output Color] for a copy job or select [Color] in [Output
Color] for a print job, the machine may consume yellow, magenta, and cyan toner
cartridges and drum cartridges even when your document is black and white.
In addition, when [Background Suppression (Color Copy)] is set to [High Speed] under
[Tools] > [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Image Quality Adjustment],
yellow, magenta, and cyan toner cartridges and drum cartridges are always used. Thus
these color toner cartridges and drum cartridges are consumed even when your document
Appendix

is black and white.

„ Opening and Closing of the Document Cover during the Power Saver Mode
If you open the document cover during the Power Saver mode, and then start scanning a
document immediately after the machine exits the mode, the detection error of a
document size may occur. In this case, enter the document size manually. It takes a few
16
seconds before the machine can detect a document size automatically. This detection error
will not occur if you load a document, close the document cover, and wait for a few seconds
before start scanning a document.

709
 Appendix

„ Operations during the Power Saver mode

z It takes a few seconds before you can operate the system settings under [Tools] after the
machine exits the Sleep mode.
z The <Power Saver> button still lights up when you perform the operations which do not
light up the touch screen such as printing command from a computer.
z
A message does not appear on the touch screen if you open and close the top cover of
the document feeder when the document feeder is deactivated (such as when the service
to use a scanner is not selected). However, the confirmation message appears on the
touch screen and the <Error> indicator lights up when the document feeder is activated
(exits the Power Saver mode) while the top cover is open.
z The machine exits the Power Saver mode when you open the document cover to copy or
scan.
z After the machine exits the Power Saver mode, the document feeder and scanner device
are activated after the document cover is opened while the scanner device is
deactivated. However, to make the document detected on the document glass, make
sure that the scanner device in the document glass moves to the detect position for the
document size, and then close the document cover.
z
After the machine is activated from the Power Saver mode, a message does not appear
on the touch screen if you perform the following operations while the service to be used
for the output device, such as copying and secure printing, is not selected.
- Opening and closing the top cover of the document feeder
- Opening and closing the front cover
- Opening and closing the bottom left cover
- Opening the paper tray
- All the operations including opening and closing the front cover of the finisher, and
pressing the buttons
However, the confirmation message appears and the <Error> indicator lights up when
the machine is activated (exits the Power Saver mode) while each cover or a paper tray is
open.
z After the machine exits the Power Saver mode, the value detected before the machine
enters the Power Saver mode is displayed or informed as paper tray status and the
information on the consumables such as the toner remaining amount, status of the drum
cartridge, and paper, if the service used for the output device is not activated.
z After the machine exits the Power Saver mode, be careful for the following if you use the
copy feature before you activate the service used for the output device. The information
displayed such as a paper size specified for the paper tray or the remaining amount is
detected before the Power Saver mode. If you change the paper size or remaining
amount during the Power Saver mode, it takes a few seconds for the change to be
updated on the screen.
Appendix

z Exiting the Power Saver mode activates the entire machine when Copy, Simple Copy, or
Stored Programming is set as the default screen on the touch screen.
z Exiting the Power Saver mode activates the entire machine when [Paper Tray Attributes
16 During Loading] is set to [On].
z The entire machine exits the Power Saver mode when you press the <Machine Status>
button, enter the System Administration mode, or select the Stored Programming
service.
z The machine does not exit the Sleep mode when you use the EP service by EP-BB.

710
 Notes and Restrictions

z When [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Port Settings] >
[USB] > [USB - Print Mode] is set to any option other than [Auto], exiting the Power Saver
mode activates the entire machine.

Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature

„ Copy Feature
The machine does not offer the Improves Fit feature.

„ Meter Count for Dual Color and Single Color Copies

Dual color and single color copies are counted as color copies.

„ Color Effect for Dual Color Copy

To extract colors for dual color copy, adjusting the colors of the document is requiredin
advance.
Our service representative performs the adjustment. Contact our Customer SupportCenter.

„ Pages per Side for Black & White and Color Mixed Documents and Meter Count
If you copy a document that contains black & white and color pages by specifying[Pages
per Side], an output sheet that has both black & white and color pages will be counted as a
color page.

„ Copy and Simple Copy

You cannot switch the screen between the Copy and Simple Copy services. Return to the
Services Home screen, and then select a service. In that case, the settingsspecified in either
service are cleared.

„ ID Card Copy
z
The machine does not shift the ID card image to the center of the output in any
magnification ratio and image size you specified.
z When the reduced size is specified to copy an ID card, the machine may copy the ID card
in a different orientation from the original orientation depending on the magnification
ratio specified.

Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Print Feature

„ Output of Long Feed Documents
The output of long feed documents is not supported.
Appendix

„ PostScript Driver
Some options such as Poster (Photo Enlargement) are not supported by the PostScript
driver. With the Pages per Sheet (N-Up) feature, you can specify 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages up,
and with or without frame borders.

„ Printing from Macintosh via USB Connection

16
When you send a print job from the PostScript driver of Macintosh connected via USB and
the job includes application data with graphic data (EPS file including binary data) pasted,

711
 Appendix

the machine may misidentify the binary data as protocol data; therefore, the output of text
data may extend for multiple pages.
In this case, select [RAW] for [Adobe Communication Protocol] under [Tools] > [System
Settings] > [Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Port Settings] > [USB] to properly print data
which includes EPS files with binary data.

„ Text and Photos for Media Print

You can use a commercially available single-slot memory card reader, but the operation is
not guaranteed. When you use a multi-slot memory card reader, only one of those slots can
be recognized. The slot to be used differs depending on the card readers. Some of the
media and slots of memory card readers may not be used on the machine, and the
operation is not guaranteed.

„ Thumbnail for Media Print

The Media Print - Photos feature supports Thumbnail view but not Preview. The Media Print
- Text feature supports neither Thumbnail view nor Preview.

„ Print Jobs while the Control Panel is being Operated

The processing and output speeds of print jobs may slow in the following conditions:
z The control panel is being operated while the machine processes a print job.
z The status of a print job is being viewed in the [Job Status] screen.

„ When the Print Results Differ from the Settings

As in the following cases, insufficient memory for the print page buffer may cause print
result in not printing as specified. In this case, we recommend that you increase the
memory.
z
Printed only on 1 side when 2 sided printing is specified.
z A job was terminated (If data cannot be written to the print page buffer, the job
including that page is terminated).

„ Direct Print via USB Host (a USB memory device)

When the machine is in the Sleep mode, your computer does not detect the machine if you
connect a USB memory device to the machine. Exit the Sleep mode, and thenconnect the
USB memory device and send a print job.

„ Printing from a USB Memory Device

z To print from a USB memory device, the USB Memory Kit (optional) is required.
z Use USB 2.0 compliant memory devices only.
The following USB memory devices are not supported:
Appendix

- A USB memory device with multiple media partitions that require other utilities to
access to the contents therein.
- A USB memory device connected via an external hub.
16 z Multiple USB memory devices cannot be used simultaneously.
z
The machine does not display a menu to prevent you from removing a USB memory
device while it is being accessed.

712
 Notes and Restrictions

„ Meter Counts for 2 Sided Printing

When printing 2 sided, depending on the application being used, blank sheets can be
inserted automatically to adjust pages. These blank sheets inserted by the application will
also be counted by the meter.

„ Meter Count for Watermark

When the Copy Management Expansion Kit (optional) is installed and a document is
printed using the Watermark feature (such as Annotation and Force Annotation), the
meters count with the following method:
z Color documents are counted as color copies regardless of whether the Watermark
feature is used or not.
z
Black & white documents are counted as color copies if [Font Color] is set to other than
[Black], or counted as black & white if [Font Color] is set to [Black].

„ PDF Direct Print

PDF Direct Print supports Adobe PDF 1.6. However, note the followings:
z
It may take long to output a PDF file, for the rendering processing is complicated.
z This feature does not support the "Embed OpenType Fonts" setting of Adobe® Acrobat®
7 (PDF 1.6).
z This feature supports the features of PDF 1.6 created by Adobe Acrobat 7 or later.
However, it does not support the features of PDF 1.7 (Adobe Acrobat 8 and 9).
z PDF Bridge, which is provided by Fuji Xerox, of the machine supports the features of PDF
1.6 such as transparent object.
z
Set the PostScript Memory to its maximum value (128MB) to print PDF files properly.

„ ThinPrint
z To install "ThinPrint .print" to Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008, a ".print
Application Server Engine" licence is required.
z ThinPrint can operate in an IPv4 environment, but not in an IPv6 environment.
z ".print AutoConnect" is not supported.
z
Up to three can be connected simultaneously. The fourth or above connection requests
are stored in the queue. Up to 10 connection requests can be stored in the queue. If
exceeding 10, another connection request is no longer received. After preceding
connections are terminated, the connection requests in the queue will be processed
subsequently when the total number of the connections becomes less than four.
z Functions to control jobs, such as canceling or suspending jobs, are not provided. Instead,
you can cancel a job on the [Job Status] screen from the control panel, or from
Appendix

CentreWare Internet Services.

z The machine prints jobs in the order in which they are spooled. The jobs may not be
printed in the order in which the job requests are received by the machine.
z If the power is switched off, this feature can store the order of jobs spooled and their
data. If the power switched off while a job is being received, the job is deleted.
16
„ Paper Orientation when Printing Mixed Size Originals
z The combinations available for printing mixed size originals from the print driver are the
followings: A4 and A3, B5 and B4, 8.5 x 11" (Letter) and 11 x 17" (Tabloid), 16K and 8K.
z
The document orientation (portrait or landscape) may not be determined correctly
depending on the application being used. In this case, the output may have a different

713
 Appendix

orientation from the document orientation, depending on the combination of the mixed
size originals.
z
The output may have a different orientation from the original orientation when a
document stored in a folder is printed.

„ Direct Fax Driver

The direct fax driver does not support Envelope (90 x 205 mm), Envelope (162 x 229 mm),
Envelope (229 x 324 mm), and Envelope (235 x 120 mm).

„ Printing via lpr Port

When a print job is sent via the lpr port, the characters of user name, file name, or host
name may be garbled and displayed incorrectly on the screen during printing, the job
confirmation screen, or the Job History Report.
To prevent character garbling, use a port other than lpr.

„ When Using the Authentication Feature on the machine

When you set the authentication information on the print driver, set the User ID up to 32
single-byte characters (16 double-byte characters). If you set the User ID using 17
doublebyte characters or more, an authentication error occurs so that you cannot start
printing.

Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Scan Features

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using the Scan features.
Reference
z For the notes and restrictions on Network Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3, refer to the Readme contained in the Media
(Software/Product Manual).

„ Retrieving Files from Folder

z When [Delete Files After Retrieval] is set to [No], the same file can be accessed by
multiple clients.
When [Delete Files After Retrieval] is set to [Yes], only one client can access any given
file. The file that is being imported by a client cannot be seen by other clients.
z When files are retrieved from CentreWare Internet Services, the files are not deleted
regardless of the setting of [Delete Files After Retrieval].

„ Using Network Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3 Simultaneously

You cannot use both the Network Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3 on a single
computer to connect to the machine.
Appendix

A maximum of three computers using either the Network Scan Driver or Stored File
Manager 3 may retrieve files simultaneously from one machine.

„ Secure Polling from Other Faxes

16 „ Using TIFF Files

The TIFF files created by Stored File Manager 3 are compressed into the MMR, MH,JBIG, or
JPEG format. To open a TIFF file, use application software that supports the format.

„ Restriction on Scanning Capacity

The maximum scanning capacity for one page is 297 x 432 mm. For standard sizes,A3 or 11
x 17 inches.

714
 Notes and Restrictions

„ Number of Sheets for Scanning (for Folder)

A maximum of 999 pages can be scanned for folders at one time. The number of pages
may differ depending on the file size and resolution.

„ Store to USB
z The Scanner Kit (optional) and the USB Memory Kit (optional) are required to use this
service.
z
You cannot use this service on job flows (whose Target is Scan Jobs or Folder).
z The USB 2.0 compliant memory device is supported.
z Neither file nor directory names in a USB memory device are displayed on the touch
screen.
z You cannot delete the files or folders in a USB memory device using the machine.
z To prevent you from removing a USB memory device while it is being accessed, an icon
showing that the removal of a USB memory device is prohibited appears on the touch
screen. Be sure to remove a USB memory device from the machine after the message
"Data has been transferred." is displayed on the touch screen.
z
When the data size exceeds the capacity of the USB memory device while the machine is
performing the Store to USB service, the job in progress is cancelled.
z Neither the Media Print - Text nor Media Print - Photos feature can be used while the
Store to USB service is in progress. The Store to USB service cannot be used as well while
the Media Print - Text or Media Print - Photos feature is in progress.
z You can enable or disable the Store to USB service from CentreWare Internet Services in
the System Administration mode. You cannot set it from the touch screen. (The default
setting is [Enabled].)
z You can set not to display the [Store to USB] service on the Services Home screen from
the touch screen.
z The machine may not be able to recognize a USB memory device that was formatted by
a digital camera or a tool other than the Windows standard format tool.

„ Screen Switching After Inserting a USB Memory Device

z If a USB memory device is inserted when the machine is switched off, and then you
switch on, the Services Home screen is displayed.
z
When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory slot during the Power Saver
mode, the touch screen does not light up. After exiting the Power Saver mode by pressing
the <Power Saver> button, insert the USB memory device again or select the feature to
be used on the Services Home screen.
z The screen does not switch when removing a USB memory device.
Appendix

z The screen switches even when a USB memory device whose format is not supported is
inserted. However, an error occurs when selecting the menu.
z If no media is in the Memory Card Reader (commercially available), the screen switches
when you insert the Reader.
16
z If the Memory Card Reader (commercially available) is used and it is left inserted all the
time, the screen does not switch even when a media is inserted into the slot of the
Reader.

„ Network Reference on SMB Environment

z If you configure more than 256 shared resources other than shared folders (such as
shared printers) when using Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2012, Windows

715
 Appendix

Server 2012 R2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, or Windows 8.1, shared
resources other than shared folders may be displayed in the shared folder list.
z
Names such as workgroup names, server names, and shared names on the network may
not be displayed alphabetically on the list.

„ Scan High Compression Feature

z
To use the Image Compression feature, the Scan features are required.
z You can select 200 dpi or 300 dpi for the resolution.
z To view or print High-compression DocuWorks documents that are output by using the
Image Compression feature (on your computer), one of the following software is
required:
- DocuWorks 6.0 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light 5.1 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 5.1 or later
Note
z You cannot use DocuWorks Trial edition.Use DocuWorks Viewer Light 7.0 (free distribution) contained in the
Media (Software/Product Manual).
z
You can open High-compression PDF files with Adobe Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3) or later.
z The Image Compression feature may not be able to scan the colors of the documents
precisely due to the image processing to improve the compression ratio.

„ High Compression Image Kit (Optional)

z To use the Image Compression feature, the Scan features are required.
z You can select 200 dpi or 300 dpi for the resolution.
z
To view or print High-compression DocuWorks documents that are output by using the
Image Compression feature (on your computer), one of the following software is
required:
- DocuWorks 6.0 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light 5.1 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 5.1 or later
Note
z You cannot use DocuWorks Trial edition.
z You can open High-compression PDF files with Adobe Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3) or later.
z
The Image Compression feature may not be able to scan the colors of the documents
precisely due to the image processing to improve the compression ratio.

„ PKI Encryption and PKI Signature of Scan Files

Appendix

z
Signature using the electronic stamp of DocuWorks is not supported.
z Acrobat Approval is not supported.

„ PKI Encryption and PKI Signature of PDF and DocuWorks Documents

16 z
PKI (Public Key Infrastructure) encryption of PDF is not available. A certificate is not used
for password encryption.
z If a message stating that a certificate revocation could not be checked is displayed and a
signature verification error occurs in the viewer of DocuWorks and PDF, confirm the
certificate revocation setting in the viewer.

716
 Notes and Restrictions

„ Digital Signature of PDF

z The security handler (XERX.FX.PPKMS) of Xerox is not provided.
z
When a PDF document signed by the machine is displayed with Adobe Acrobat (Reader),
a message stating that no handler is found for signature confirmation may be displayed.
In this case, select [Windows Digital Certificate] or [Adobe Default Security].
z
A certificate to be used for PDF digital signature must meet the conditions described in
the "S/MIME" section.

„ S/MIME Communication
The E-mail and Internet Fax services support S/MIME.

„ Searchable PDF
z We recommend that you set [300 dpi] for [Resolution] when you use the optical
character recognition (OCR) feature.
z
For Store to Folder, you cannot select [Searchable] for [Searchable Text].
z When you use CentreWare Internet Services to retrieve a file from a folder, you can set
[Searchable Text] if all scanned images of the file in the folder are set as follows:
- Image Size: 15 x 15 mm to 309 x 432 mm
- Color Scanning: Auto Detect, Color, Grayscale, Black & White (Black & White only for
some models)
- Original Type: Photo & Text, Text (for faxes, all types)
- Color Space: sRGB
- Resolution: 200dpi, 300dpi (for faxes, all resolutions)
- Reduce/Enlarge: 100% (for faxes, all ratios)

„ Compression Format of Scanned Images

z
You cannot retrieve grayscale or color images in uncompressed (Raw) format.
z JBIG2 compression of PDF is supported.

„ Preview of Scan File

z
The output is not rotated even when the previewed image is rotated on the screen in the
following cases:
- The document is output in TIFF or JPEG
- The document is scanned to a folder
- The document is scanned using a job flow sheet
z
If a preview image is not what you expected, cancel the job, configure the settings, and
then scan the document again.
Appendix

z If you cancel the scanning of a document by pressing the <Stop> button on the control
panel or the [Delete] button in the touch screen, selecting [Preview] may not display all
the scanned files.

„ Scanning Documents with a Small Number of Colors (the Specific Color Feature)
16
z To use the Specific Color feature, the High Compression Image Kit (optional) is required.
z Specific Color (for PDF or DocuWorks) and MRC High Compression (for PDF or
DocuWorks) cannot be used simultaneously.
z You cannot use this feature when retrieving data via Network Scanner Utility 3
z Select [Color] for [Color Scanning].

717
 Appendix

z This feature is available when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color], when [Resolution] is set
to [200 dpi] or [300 dpi], and when [File Format] is set to [PDF] or [DocuWorks].
z
You cannot change the number of colors. (The maximum is 16 colors.)
z You can attach thumbnails to files when [Specific Color] is selected, but the thumbnails
are displayed in full color.
z
Monochrome images scanned with the Specific Color feature may be different from the
ordinary monochrome images in the image quality.
z The Specific Color feature is not suitable for documents with graphs and photographs, or
with multiple colors. For those documents, use MRC High Compression.

„ Obtaining Addresses from LDAP Server

z Recipients’ addresses that can be obtained from the LDAP server for the E-mail service
are e-mail addresses, Internet fax addresses, and fax numbers.
z The Address Book that can be used for the E-mail service in Job Flows is the Address Book
stored in the machine.

„ Restrictions on Internet Explorer

z When you access a URL that is sent by e-mail using Internet Explorer, a File Download
pop-up window is displayed. Start the download within three minutes after the pop-up
window appears, otherwise an incomplete file will be left in your computer.
z When you use the Store & Send Link service by selecting [DocuWorks] and [Single File for
Each Page] for [File Format], you may not properly obtain files from the destination URL
if [Automatic prompting for file downloads] is set to [Disable] under [Tools] > [Internet
Options] > [Security] > [Custom Level] > [Automatic prompting for file downloads] with
your Internet Explorer.
z
When you use Internet Explorer, even if you click "To delete file, click here." in the
[Document Acquisition] screen of the Store & Send Link service, file deletion may not be
performed. In this case, use another browser than Internet Explorer to delete the file.

„ Split Files
You cannot select [Single File for Each Page] when using the Store to Folder or JobFlow
Feature.

„ Thumbnail View
z
Files in a folder may not be displayed in thumbnail view in the following cases. In those
cases, display them in list view.
- Some file is not displayed in thumbnail view even though it is stored in the folder.
- Characters and images are not correctly displayed because they are scaled down from
the actual sizes.
Appendix

z The orientation of an image displayed in thumbnail view depends on which orientation

the document was stored in.
z
If the power is cut off immediately after a scanned file is stored in a folder, or if the hard
16 disk space is insufficient to display thumbnails, files in the folder may not be displayed in
thumbnail view. In that case, display them in list view.

„ FTP Transmission for Scan to PC

z By factory default, [Passive Mode] is selected as a transfer mode to send scanned data
via FTP from the machine.

718
 Notes and Restrictions

z You can switch the FTP transfer mode using CentreWare Internet Services, but cannot
switch the mode per job or per destination FTP server.
z
Depending on your network environment, operations may not be performed properly
unless the FTP transfer mode is switched from [Passive Mode] to [Active Mode].
z When [IP Filtering] is enabled, make sure to switch the FTP transfer mode to [Active
Mode].
In [Passive Mode], the server permits a client to connect to the port for the data transfer
so that the client starts the connection. [Passive Mode] is commonly used and also has
lower security risk than [Active Mode].
In [Active Mode], a client notifies the server of the port number for the data transfer so
that the server starts the connection. [Active Mode] may incur a security risk such as
impersonation by third parties.
In addition, the proper connection may not be available in a firewall environment. In
such a case, select [Passive Mode].

„ SMB Transfer for Scan to PC

z If you use Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, contact our Customer Support Center and ask if your
operating system is supported.
z
If you use OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, contact our Customer Support Center and ask if your
operating system is supported.

„ Store to WSD
Note
z WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
z When the WSD scan port is not activated, the [Store to WSD] button is not displayed in
the Services Home screen. Enable the WSD scan port to use the Store to WSD feature on
the machine.
z Store to WSD feature requires the scanner driver included as standard in Windows Vista
Service Pack 2 or later. When an appropriate operation system is installed, you can
operate scan using [Windows Fax and Scan] or [From scanner or camera] in [Microsoft
Paint].
z [Next Original] is not displayed when using WSD scan.
z
You cannot execute multiple jobs simultaneously. If you execute a job during the scan
job, the latter job is not accepted.
z When using WSD scan, you cannot change layout settings by the machine. Configure the
settings on the computer using the scanner driver included as standard in Windows.
z Press [Operate From Computer] to display the standby screen. If the standby screen is
not displayed, a scan job will not be started even when the network computer recognizes
Appendix

the machine. While the standby screen is displayed, the machine does not execute Auto
Clear or enter the Power Saver mode.
z
After being scanned, remove the originals and then select [OK] on the [Remove Your
Originals] screen. You cannot execute any operation without selecting [OK].
16
z Store to WSD feature requires the default scanner driver included as standard in
Windows Vista or later. Setting items are different from those for the dedicated scanner
driver.

719
 Appendix

Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Fax Feature

„ Settings on Manual Fax Transmissions
Manual fax transmissions are performed in accordance with the settings in [Fax Defaults].
If you change settings on the fax screen before the calling screen appears,the settings
become effective.

„ Unavailable Fax Functions

The machine does not support the following functions.
z ISDN connection
z G4 communication
z
Relay station role for the relay broadcast
z Specifying all the addresses at a time using the wild card (*)
z Telephone function via an optional line

„ Unavailable Fax Functions

The Internet Fax feature does not support the following functions.
z Manual send
z Remote Polling
z
Relay Broadcast
z Sorting received faxes by folder (Folder Selector)
z Direct Fax

„ Relay Broadcast
The machine has the function of an initiating station but does not have the function of a
relay station.
The machine does not support G4 communications, but if a relay station supports G4
communications, the machine can select a G4 communication function that a relay station
performs as an instruction for relay broadcast.

„ Features Supported by F Code Communication

F Code communication supports the following features: the Send Fax - Remote Folder,
Secure Polling, Store File - Local Folder, Relay Broadcast, and Remote Relay Broadcast
features.

„ Fax Immediate Reception

Appendix

If the machine’s memory capacity becomes insufficient to receive fax data, the machine
automatically switches into immediate reception mode. In this mode, the machine outputs
received documents on a page-by-page basis; each document page is output immediately
after the machine finishes receiving it. However, if the machine receives large data, such as
16 an A3 size photo with many halftone levels, the machine may not print it even after the
machine finishes receiving it. In that case, press the <Stop> button, or turn the machine off
and then on again, to have the machine print the document.

„ Skip Blank Pages Feature

The accuracy of detecting blank pages depends on the status of the page. For example, if a
blank page background shadows, the machine may not determine the page as a blank.

720
 Notes and Restrictions

„ Address Type Settings When Registering on the Address Book

The following address types can be selected when you add an address to AddressBook:
Fax, IP Fax (SIP), Internet Fax, E-mail, and Server (FTP/SMB)
When you register an address on the Address Book, select an address type in accordance
with the service. The address book entry registered with the wrong address type cannot be
selected from the original service.

„ Simple Fax
z While you are making the settings for [Fax/Internet Fax], you cannot switch to the
[Simple Fax] screen. To switch to the [Simple Fax] screen, you must return to the Services
Home screen. Once you return to the Services Home screen, the settings you have made
will be cleared.
z
You can re-enter a recipient after entering the recipient to prevent sending a fax to a
wrong address.
z You cannot use address numbers to specify recipients for Broadcast Send, group dial
numbers, the Address Book, and wildcards.

„ Printer Lockout
If the power is switched off when both [Set Lockout Duration] and [Allow User to Lock Out]
are selected in [Printer Lockout], the manually configured [Lock Out Printer] setting is
cleared. If the power is switched on again, [Set Lockout Duration] will be effective
regardless of the [Lock Out Printer] setting.

„ Activity Report
z
The number of a smart card cannot be displayed.

„ Direct Fax
When sending a fax using the Direct Fax feature, the recipient name is printed on the
Activity Report, Confirmation Options, Transmission Report - Job Undelivered,Broadcast
Report, and Job History Report. If you want to print the telephone number or SIP URL
instead, leave the text box of [Name] on the print driver screen blank. Note that the column
of [To] on the Fax Cover Page is also left blank under this setting.
When a recipient’s name of Direct Fax exceeds 18 single and double-byte characters, the
19th character and after will be truncated on the Job History Report.

„ Prevention of Wrong Transmissions for Direct Fax

z After specifying a recipient using an address number (Speed Dial) or selecting from the
Address Book, the [Settings of Reentering Fax Address] dialog box will not be played
even when [Settings of Reentering Fax Address:] is set to [On] on the [Configuration] tab
Appendix

on the [Properties] screen.

z
You cannot enter a fax number when [Restriction of Specifying Fax Address] is set to
[Speed Dial Only] or [Phonebook Only] on the [Configuration] tab on the [Properties]
screen. Specify a recipient using an address number (Speed Dial) or selecting from the
Address Book under this setting. 16
z You cannot specify multiple recipients when [On] is set for [Restrict Multi- Address Fax
Transmission:] to prevent faxes from being sent to undesired destinations.

721
 Appendix

Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the E-mail/Internet Fax Feature

„ Notes on E-mail Transmissions
"The job has been sent." that is displayed on the confirmation screen, Activity Report, or
Confirmation Options indicates that an e-mail has been sent to the SMTP server configured
on the machine for transmitting e-mail. The e-mail, however, may not reach its destination
for some problem on the transmission path of the Internet. In this case, the machine is not
notified of such transmission error. After sending an important e-mail, we recommend that
you confirm its reception, such as by calling the recipient.

„ Feature Combinations when Transmitting an Internet Fax

‹ [Resolution] on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen
When [TIFF-S] is selected for [Internet Fax Profile] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options]
screen, [Superfine (400 dpi)] or [Superfine (600 dpi)] cannot be selected.
Reference
z For information on Internet fax profiles, refer to "Fax" > "Fax/Internet Fax Options" > "Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax
Profiles)" in the User Guide.

‹ [Starting Rate] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen

The communication mode can be specified only when sending e-mail using the Fax
Gateway feature. For other cases, e-mail is sent via G3 Auto.
Reference
z For more information on the Fax Gateway feature, refer to "4 Fax" > "About Internet Fax" > "Useful Features" > "Sending Internet
Fax to regular fax machines via a relay station" in the User Guide.

‹ [Original Size] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen

When [TIFF-S] is selected for [Internet Fax Profile] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options]
screen, an Internet fax is sent in A4 even if a size larger than A4 is specified.
Reference
z For information on Internet fax profiles, refer to "4 Fax" > "Fax/Internet Fax Options" > "Internet FaxProfile (Specifying Internet
Fax Profiles)" in the User Guide.

„ Internet Fax and Direct Internet Fax

z You can switch between the Internet Fax and Internet Fax Direct features in the System
Administration mode, however, you cannot use both features simultaneously. For
switching between the features, contact your system administrator.
z Both the Internet Fax and E-mail services can be used at the same time. The Internet Fax
Direct and E-mail services can also be used simultaneously.
z The following recipient machines (models with the Fax feature) can establish a peerto-
peer communication with the machine for the Internet Fax Direct feature:
Appendix

- DocuCentre-V C2265/C2263
- ApeosPort-V C7776/C6676/C5576/C4476/C3374/C2276
- DocuCentre-V C7776/C6676/C5576/C4476/C3374/C2276
16 - ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3373/C2275
- DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3373/C2275
- DocuCentre-V C7780/C6680/C5580
- ApeosPort-IV C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275
- DocuCentre-IV C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373
- ApeosPort-IV C7780/C6680/C5580
- DocuCentre-IV C7780/C6680/C5580

722
 Notes and Restrictions

- ApeosPort-IV C4430
- DocuCentre-IV C4430
- DocuCentre-IV C2260
- ApeosPort-IV C5570
- DocuCentre-IV C5570
- ApeosPort-IV C4470
- DocuCentre-IV C4470
- ApeosPort-IV C3370
- DocuCentre-IV C3370
- ApeosPort-IV C3371
- DocuCentre-IV C3371
- ApeosPort-IV C2270
- DocuCentre-IV C2270
- ApeosPort-III C4405
- DocuCentre-III C4405
- ApeosPort-III C3305/C2205
- DocuCentre-III C3305/C2205
- ApeosPort-III 4000/3000
- DocuCentre-III 4000/3000
- ApeosPort-III 7000/6000/5000
- DocuCentre-III 7000/6000/5000
- ApeosPort-III C4400
- DocuCentre-III C4400
- ApeosPort-III C3300/C2200
- DocuCentre-III C3300/C2200
- DocuCentre-III 4000/3000
- ApeosPort-II 7000/6000/5000
- DocuCentre-II 7000/6000/5000
- ApeosPort-II C7500/C6500/C5400
- DocuCentre-II C7500/C6500/C5400
- DocuCentre-II 4000/3000
- Papered 4000/3000
- DocuCentre-II C4300/C3300/C2200
- ApeosPort-II C4300/C3300/C2200
- ApeosPort C7550 I/C6550 I/C5540 I
- ApeosPort 750 I/650 I/550 I
- ApeosPort C4535 I/C3626 I/C2521 I
- ApeosPort 450 I/350 I
Appendix

- DocuCentre Color f450/f360/f250

- DocuCentre f285/f235
z When [Resend Attempts] is set to [On] and the status of the Internet Fax Direct feature
enters Resend Required, the subsequent jobs will not be executed until the jobs in
Standby status finish.
16
z
Transmission results of Internet faxes cannot be listed on Transmission Report - Job
Undelivered or Transmission Report by recipients. Transmission results of Internet Direct
faxes can be listed on the reports.

723
 Appendix

„ Internet Fax Profiles

‹ When specifying an Internet fax profile
The Internet fax profile that can be processed varies depending on the machine that the
recipient uses. When specifying an Internet fax profile, confirm whether it can be processed
by the recipient's machine.
‹ When an Internet fax profile not supported by the recipient's machine is specified
If the Internet fax profile you specified is not supported by the recipient's machine, the
image you sent cannot be displayed or printed on the recipient's machine. Before using an
Internet fax profile, confirm if it can be processed by both your machine and the recipient's
machine.
‹ TIFF files and Internet fax profiles that can be processed upon Internet fax
reception
z TIFF file format: TIFF-FX (RFC2301)
z
Internet fax profile: TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J, TIFF-C
When the machine receives unsupported internet fax profile, the file may not be printed.
When the machine receives TIFF-C, the file will be printed in B&W.
Note
z
Communications and Information network Association of Japan (CIAJ) confirms the use of image-/tiff-fx.

‹ Transmission conditions for broadcast transmission

z When sending a document via a broadcast transmission, it can be sent to both Internet
fax and regular fax addresses at the same time. To Internet fax addresses, the document
will be sent by e-mail, and to regular fax addresses, the document will be sent by fax.
z When the transmission conditions are different for each address, set all addresses to the
following settings:
- Transmission mode:G3 Auto
- Internet fax profile :TIFF-S
- Read/delivery receipt:None

„ E-mail Forwarding
If the fax you received is a JBIG-compressed image, and if the Internet fax profile of the
forwarding destination is set to TIFF-F, the machine converts the image into MH format
when forwarding. When the Internet fax profile is TIFF-S, the data is forwarded with its size
and resolution unchanged.

„ S/MIME Communication for Internet Fax

S/MIME Encryption cannot be used for the features that use special e-mail addresses, such
as the reception of Internet fax with a folder specified and a fax transfer for e-mails
Appendix

received by Internet Fax.

„ S/MIME Untrusted E-mail Reception Settings

When [Receive Untrusted E-mail] or [Receive Untrusted Internet Fax] under [Connectivity &
16 Network Setup] > [Security Settings] > [S/MIME Settings] is set to [No] in the System
Administration mode, you cannot receive the confirmation result even if [Read Receipts] is
set to [On].

724
 Notes and Restrictions

„ Fax Gateway Feature

This feature can only be used when the e-mail receiving protocol is SMTP on the Internet
Fax-enabled machine that faxes are sent to.
If an e-mail was sent by converting it into fax, and if it was not delivered successfully to the
recipient, the e-mail that was received originally will be deleted.
Reference
z For more information on the Fax Gateway feature, refer to "4 Fax" > "About Internet Fax" > "Useful Features" > "Sending Internet
Fax to regular fax machines via a relay station" in the User Guide.

„ Restrictions on Paper Selections upon Internet Fax Reception

The machine determines whether a TIFF file attached to an e-mail complies with the
content type defined in RFC2301 and RFC3250. If the content type is compliant with
RFC2301 and RFC3250, the machine selects appropriate paper to render the file image as a
fax-received image.
Even when the file was received via Internet Fax, if its content type is not compliant with
FRC2301 or RFC3250, the machine will not properly select paper for it. For example, an
incoming fax that is A4 size may be printed on B4 paper instead.
Such problems may improve depending on the usage. Contact our Customer Support
Center for further information.

„ Resolution when group is specified

When you specify a group using Internet Fax, [Resolution] for the address numbers
registered as a group is not applied. The resolution set by [Resolution] in the [Fax/Internet
Fax] screen is transmitted to the machine.

„ Restrictions on the E-mail Server

Depending on the system environment (such as the restrictions on your e-mail server), large
e-mail may not be delivered successfully. When sending a large e-mail by splitting it, check
the capacity of your system environment and of the recipient’s environment.
If the data size is still too large to send, reduce their size by lowering the image resolution or
transmission resolution.

„ Network Security
We do not guarantee the security of any information disclosed over the network.

„ Setting the System Environment for E-mail Service

To send or receive e-mail, the system environment of the machine must be set for the E-
mail service. Set up the system environment such as SMTP, POP3, and DNS servers, as
required.
Appendix

„ Notes on Security
E-mail uses the Internet, which is a network connecting computers worldwide, as its
transmission path. Thus, since other signals also are sent over the Internet, you must pay
attention to security to prevent third parties from reading or tampering of your e-mail.
Consequently, to transmit important information, we recommend that you use other
16
transmission methods that guarantee security. In addition, to avoid the reception of
unwanted e-mail, we recommend that you do not disclose your e-mail address to third
parties unless necessary.

725
 Appendix

„ Preventing Receipt of Unwanted E-mail

The machine provides a feature that prevents the reception of unwanted e-mail sent from
third parties.
By specifying the domains from which e-mail can be received, you automatically can reject
e-mail sent from other addresses.
Reference
z For information on restricting domains from which e-mail can be received, refer to "Domain Filtering" (P.226).

„ Notes on E-mail Receptions

A large volume of e-mail may not be printed if the memory capacity is insufficient. In this
case, increase the memory size or ask the sender to lower the resolution.

„ Notes on E-mail Reception when [Split by Data Size] is specified

When [Split by Data Size] is specified as the e-mail splitting method, even if you receive the
split e-mail, you cannot reconstruct and print it.

„ Notes on E-mail Transmission when [Split by Data Size] is specified

When [Split by Data Size] is specified as the e-mail splitting method, split the data so as to
enable e-mail reception with e-mail software corresponding to the Message/Partial content
type.

„ Job Counter Report

If you specify multiple different [Pages per Side] settings using the Build Job feature, the
numbers of pages displayed for [2 Pages] and [Greater than 2 Pages Up] displayed on the
Job Counter Report are calculated according to the latest N-up setting you specify.
Example 1:
When you select [2 Pages] for Document 1 (4 pages) and [Off] for Document 2 (2 pages),
both Documents 1 and 2 are set to [Off] and the number of printed pages is calculated as
follows:
z
Total pages: 4
z 2 up: 0
Example 2:
When you select [Off] for Document 1 (4 pages) and [2 Pages] for Document 2 (2 pages),
both Documents 1 and 2 are set to [2 Pages] and the number of printed pages is calculated
as follows:
z Total pages: 5
z 2 up: 5
Appendix

On ApeosWare Log Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Accounting Service (sold

separately), the numbers of pages for 2in1, 4in1, and 8in1 are also calculated in the same
way as described above.
The meter on the [Billing Information] screen calculates the number of printed pages
16 correctly regardless of the [Pages per Side] setting.

„ Folder Passcode
You do not need to specify the passcode of a recipient when sending an IP Fax (SIP) to a
remote folder. Thus, the passcode enclosed in "\" or "/" is not replaced by "*" as with that of
regular faxes.If you select an IP Fax (SIP) by mistake and specify the passcode of a
recipient when you send a fax or an Internet fax, the passcode is displayed on the touch

726
 Notes and Restrictions

panel screen, the Job Status screen, and a report. Be sure to check the type of fax before
sending a fax to a remote folder.
Note
z
Communications and Information network Association of Japan (CIAJ) confirms the use of image-/tiff-fx.

Notes and Restrictions for IP Fax (SIP)

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using IP Fax (SIP).

„ IP Fax (SIP) Feature

z
In IP Fax (SIP) transmissions, protocols used for call connection are SIP and for data
communication is T.38. Other IP Fax transmissions protocols, such as H.323 standard
and deemed voice communication method, are not supported.
z
IP Fax (SIP) cannot be performed on SSL/TLS communication.
z In IP Fax (SIP) transmissions, authentication is performed between the machine and a
SIP server.
The authentication supports the digest authentication only. NTLM and the other
authentication methods are not supported.
z The number of simultaneous connections for IP fax (SIP) is one. The machine cannot
perform sending and receiving an IP fax (SIP) at the same time.
z
Up to two SIP servers are available for a registrar server and a proxy server, respectively.
z The IP address of a SIP server can be resolved using DHCP or DHCPv6 (The IP address of
the SIP server must be set to the option number "120" of a DHCP or a DHCPv6 server).
However, observe the following considerations:
- If an IP address is automatically resolved using DHCP in an IPv4 environment, set
[IPv4 - IP Address Resolution] to [DHCP] or [DHCP/AutoIP].
- Even when an IP address can be resolved automatically using DHCP or DHCPv6, port
number, login user name, login password, and server type cannot be resolved
automatically. Configure these items manually.
- If an IP address is resolved automatically, the same IP address is assigned to a proxy
server and a registrar server. If you use different IP addresses for a proxy server and a
registrar server, configure the IP addresses manually.
- If multiple IP addresses are resolved automatically, assign the first IP address to a
primary proxy/registrar server and the second to a secondary proxy/registrar server.
The third and subsequent addresses are not used.
z
Only ToS (IP Precedence/DSCP) is supported as a QoS control method, and other QoS
controls including CoS are not supported. Set the priority of IP packet transmission in
[Prioritize IP Packets] to perform QoS control for the machine.
Appendix

„ Recipients
z The communication between IP Fax (SIP) devices is available for our compatible
machines in a corporate intranet. (Able 1407 λ is not available.) For information on the
compatible machines, contact our Customer Support Center.
16
„ SIP Server
The following e-mail applications can transmit e-mails between the machine and a
computer:
z Cisco MCS 7800 series (Cisco Unified Communications Manager 6.0/6.1/7.1/8.0 is
installed) is validated as a SIP server available for the machine.
z
The gateway may not work properly over an analog line depending on your environment.

727
 Appendix

z If you use a SIP server manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc., only UDP can be used as
T.38 protocol.
z
SIP servers do not work on IPsec communications.
z SIP servers do not work in an IPv6 environment.
z SRST that works on routers such as CISCO2801 manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc. is
not supported.
z Cisco Call Manager Express that works on routers such as CISCO2801 by Cisco Systems,
Inc. is not supported.
z
If you use a SIP server manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc., you can specify only IPv4
address character strings of the SIP server on the right side of @ in [SIP User ID (Sign-in
Name)]. If you specify IPv6 address character strings, FQDN character strings, and SIP
domain name character strings, the SIP server does not work.
z When a SIP server is configured as a SIP terminal of the machine on the server, if settings
other than specified are configured, the SIP server does not work as the SIP terminal.
z
For a SIP server manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc., an address retention period is fixed
to 120 seconds. This value cannot be changed even if Timer Register Expires value is
changed.

„ VoIP Gateway
z Cisco ISR 2800 series (with IOS 12.4) is validated as a VoIP gateway available for the
machine.
z
If you use a VoIP gateway manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc., only UDP can be used
as T.38 protocol.
z VoIP gateways do not work on IPsec communication.
z
VoIP gateways do not work in an IPv6 environment.
z If settings other than specified by Fuji Xerox are configured for a dial peer or a voice port
on a VoIP gateway, the VoIP gateway does not work.
z
If a part of transferred data is lost on a network, a part of image may be missing or be
getting stacked. To avoid these, the ECM mode is effective. The machine can always use
the ECM mode, however, you cannot use the mode depending on the VoIP gateway
settings. Consult your network administrator whether the ECM mode is available.

„ NAT/NAPT
Communication protocols that transmit UPnP, TURN, STUN, ICE, and UDP hole punching in
SIP communications are not supported. IP Fax (SIP) does not work in an environment that
uses NAT/NAPT devices including ALG.
Appendix

Notes and Restrictions when Connecting with Internet Service Provider

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using features that transmit e-
mails or Internet faxes using an Internet service provider (ISP).
16 The features related to e-mail are as follows:
z E-mail
z E-mail Notification Service
z
Internet Fax

„ Notes and Restrictions on Accessing ISP

Observe the following notes and restrictions when connecting the machine to ISP:

728
 Notes and Restrictions

z Dial-up connection is not supported. Continuous connection is required.

z Connect the machine in an environment using IP masquerade. Assigning a global IP
address to the machine is not supported.
z Be sure to assign an exclusive e-mail account to the machine for POP reception. Sharing
an e-mail account with other users may cause troubles.
z
Be sure to set size limitation for sending e-mail. Although the applicable e-mail size may
vary depending on the ISP used, we recommend that you set a small value.
z Although continuous connection other than ADSL or cable connection is also supported,
the reception of image data significantly burdens the machine.
z SMTP reception is not supported. This machine supports only POP reception.
z When installing the machine in an environment that is operating a mail transfer agent
(MTA) in a private segment, set the machine to adapt to the operation system being
used.
z For information about supported ISPs, contact our Customer Support Center.
z
When received via POP, the fax cannot be sent using the Fax Gateway feature. This is
because POP receiving does not forward an Internet fax document received by e-mail to
the fax machine.

„ Feature Specifications
Details of the features related to e-mail are as follows:
z Transmission specifications
Supported protocol : SMTP
Port number : 25 (default)
z Authentication for transmission
SMTP authentication : AUTH GSSAPI (only for Kerberos), AUTHNTLMv2, AUTH NTLMv1,
AUTH PLAIN, AUTH LOGIN, and AUTH CRAM-MD5
POP before SMTP : Plain and APOP
Waiting time for POP authentication : cannot be changed
Encryption communication (SSL): supported
z Receiving specifications
Supported protocol : POP3
POP3 port number : 110 (default)
Authentication method for POP3 : Plain and APOP
E-mail processing after POP3 reception: deletes e-mail received from a server after
Appendix

reception. Settings to store e-mail on the server is not supported.

Encryption communication (SSL):not supported
Note
z IMAP4 is not supported.
16
„ IP Address Settings
The machine does not support a global IP address. Be sure to use the machine in an
environment using IP masquerade.
‹ Operating with fixed address
Register the machine's IP address on a router or a server managing IP addresses for
domain control servers.

729
 Appendix

‹ Operating with DHCP

Setting is not required. Depending on settings of the router and the DHCP server,
registration may be required. Confirm operation rules for the router and DHCP server you
are using. When access is restricted by MAC address, registration on the DHCP server may
be required.

„ Settings from the Control Panel

Before you use the E-mail service, set the maximum data size for sending e-mail on the
control panel. For more information on the maximum limit, refer to the ISP guidelines. The
recommended value is 1 to 2 MB.
In the System Administration mode, select [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Email/Internet
Fax Service Settings] > [E-mail Control] > [Maximum Total Data Size] to configure the
setting.
Reference
z For more information on setting, refer to "Maximum Total Data Size" (P.264).
Suitable image sizes are as follows:
Reference
z
A4 full-color 200 dpi with standard compression: around 700 KB
z
A4 full-color 200 dpi with high compression: around 400 KB
z A4 black and white 200 dpi (text document) : around 25 KB
z A4 black and white 200 dpi (text & photo document):around 200 KB

Note
z
The sizes described above are applicable when sending e-mail. The actual size may be different.

„ Settings from CentreWare Internet Services

Reference
z For more information on settings to be configured on CentreWare Internet Services, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the
CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help.

Important
z To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to connect
to the internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
z
Set [Polling Interval] to at least 10 minutes when connecting to ISP.
Appendix

16

730
 Notes and Restrictions

Notes and Restrictions on the Interrupt Mode

If you press the <Interrupt> button while printing, the machine temporarily stops printing
and enters the Interrupt mode.
Note
z
However, if the machine is scanning a document while printing, the print job cannot be interrupted.
Jobs can/cannot be executed during interruption are as follows:

Job Job Job

Instruction Execution
from the
Control
Panel*1
Copy Required O
Print Printing of a document*2 instructed Required*3 O
from a client computer

Printing of a document*4 instructed Required

from the <Job Status> button > O
[Secure Print Jobs & More]
Fax Fax transmission, Broadcast Send Required O
Store for Poling Required O
Incoming Fax Print Required*3 O
Printing of a document in the Public
Folder ([Job Status] > [Secure Print Required O
Jobs & More] on the control panel)
Direct Fax Direct Fax transmission Not required U
Internet Fax Internet fax Transmission Required O
Internet fax reception/printing Required*3 O
Internet fax reception/Store Internet
Not required U
fax - Local Folder
Forwarding an incoming Internet fax
Not required U
to a regular fax machine
Forwarding an incoming fax to an
Not required X
Internet fax
Scan Store to Folder, Scan to PC, E-mail,
Network Scanning, Store & Send Link, Required O
and Store to USB
Appendix

Report/List Automatic printing of a report/list

Not required X
other than a Job History Report
Automatic printing of a Job History
Not required O
Report
Printing of a report/list instructed from
16
the <Machine Status> button >
Required O
[Machine Information] > [Print
Reports]
Folder Automatic forwarding of a stored file,
automatic fax/Internet fax Not required X
transmission

731
 Appendix

Job Job Job

Instruction Execution
from the
Control
Panel*1
Folder Printing of a stored file (Fax for Secure
Polling/Store Fax - Local Folder/Store
Required O
Internet Fax - Local Folder) instructed
from the control panel
Printing of a stored file (scanned file/
print file) instructed from the control Required X
panel
Automatic printing of a stored file Required*3 O
Job Flow Sheet Execution of a job flow sheet
instructed in [Send from Folder] or [Job Required O
Flow Sheets] on the touch screen

O : The job can be executed during the Interrupt mode.

X: The job cannot be executed during the Interrupt mode.
U :The job can be accepted from a client or another machine, but the job cannot be executed
during the Interrupt mode.
*1 : The job instruction from the control panel is required/not required to execute the job.
*2 : Normal printing, first set of Sample Set, Delayed Print (auto print)
*3 : During interruption, any document displayed as a pending job on the [Job Status] screen can be printed by selecting [Promote
Job]. When priority printing is instructed during interruption, the next priority printing is disabled until the instructed print job
is completed.
*4 : Secure Print, Private Charge Print, Sample Set, Delayed Print, or Charge Print

Note
z The followings jobs are executed regardless of the Interrupt mode.
z Automatic fax transmission (Send Fax - Remote Folder)
z Fax reception

Notes and Restrictions on Folders

„ Printing Scan Files
When you print files in a folder such as the following, it may take long to output the first
page:
z Files with multiple pages
z
Files with colors or saved in high resolution
Appendix

„ Retrieving Files in Folder from CentreWare Internet Services

z Files in a folder can be retrieved in DocuWorks or PDF format from CentreWare Internet
Services, but DocuWorks and PDF files that are encrypted or with signature attached
16 cannot be retrieved from CentreWare Internet Services.
z When you retrieve a file in PDF format from CentreWare Internet Services, the PDF file
cannot be optimized for Web view.

732
 Notes and Restrictions

Notes and Restrictions when Connecting to Internet or Intranet

„ Internet/Intranet Connection
Depending on the web server, server application, proxy server, and firewall, you may not be
able to connect to the Internet or intranet.
To connect to the Internet or intranet using a third party server application, proxy, or
firewall, the following requirements must be met:
z Support Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2,
Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8,
or Windows 8.1

Notes and Restrictions when Operating from Computers

„ Supported OS
There are notes and restrictions on Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions, Microsoft
Windows Vista x64 Edition, Microsoft Windows Server 2008 x64 Editions, Microsoft
Windows 7 x64 Edition, Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 Editions, Microsoft
Windows 8 x64 Edition, Microsoft Windows 8.1 x64 Edition, Microsoft Windows Server
2012 x64 Editions, and Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 x64 Edition Drivers. For notes
and restrictions on the supported operating systems, refer to our Web site before using the
operating systems.

„ Restrictions on Macintosh (standard)

z
In Macintosh environment, the Scan features using the Direct Fax feature and a TWAIN
scanner driver cannot be used.
z The print driver for Max OS X adopts the Plugin driver, which enables you to make the
settings for the authentication information and to use the Secure Print feature.

„ Restrictions on Macintosh (the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional))

To print using PostScript, the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is required.
z Because the print drivers for Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8
Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks, and OS X 10.10 Yosemite adopt Plug-ins, the User
Details Setup, Secure Print, Sample Set, Delayed Print, and Print Stored File features are
available.

„ Print Driver for Mac OS X

z Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks,
and OS X 10.10 Yosemite is supported.
z
The Direct Fax feature cannot be used.
Appendix

z There is neither the feature to adjust image quality nor to save toner. There are also
some limitations, for example, in paper size settings and paper types. To fully utilize the
Print feature, install the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit(optional).

„ Direct Fax for Mac OS

16
z
Documents in various sizes are not supported.
z When sending a document of different orientations using this feature, the machine may
divide the document into multiple jobs in each size. (It depends on the application you
use.)
z This feature does not support documents with covers.

733
 Appendix

z If you attach covers to a document on Mac OS, only the cover page is sent to the
recipient. Even if you set to output multiple sets, the setting is changed to 1 set
automatically.
z The Collate feature is not available.

„ CentreWare Internet Services

z
When [CSRF Protection] feature is enabled, CentreWare Internet Services may become
inaccessible depending on your browser type, web browser usage situation, and the
network environment. In such a case, try to access CentreWare Internet Services from
other computer. Be sure to consult your system administrator before disabling the
feature. If you have no other computer that can access CentreWare Internet Services,
contact our Customer Support Center. CSRF is a type of attack that forces a user to
execute unwanted action on a web site in which the user is currently authenticated, via
the malicious web site. The [CSRF Protection] feature prevents unwanted actions from
being executed on CentreWare Internet Services and changing the machine settings in
case the user unknowingly accesses a malicious website.
z The optional hard disk is required to obtain a Job History Report in a CSV format using
CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
z Do not edit or change the CSV file (address book data) exported by CentreWare Internet
Services, using software such as Microsoft Excel. Some models do not display any
warning message when registering the altered data. Since the altered data may be
damaged, fax may be sent to undesired recipients.
z The recipient data is added to the Address Book in the machine without deleting
registered recipients when you import the data from [Data Import] on [Address Book]
tab of CentreWare Internet Services. If you want to change the setting to overwrite
mode, contact our Customer Support Center.
z
Only the Address Book data exported from [Data Export] on the [Address Book] tab of
CentreWare Internet Services is available for importing with [Data Import] on [Address
Book] tab.
z
When the Authentication feature is used and the characters other than alphanumeric
characters are used for the User ID, CentreWare Internet Services is not available.

Notes and Restrictions on Job Flows

„ Job Flow Settings for High Compression Format
z
When [MRC High Compression] is set to [On] under [File Format] for the Scan features,
select one of the alternatives for each setting item:
- Color Scanning: [Auto Detect], [Color], or [Grayscale]
Appendix

- Resolution: [200 dpi] or [300 dpi]

- Reduce / Enlarge: [100%]
- File Format (without thumbnail specification): [PDF], [DocuWorks], or [XPS]
- File Format (with thumbnail specification): [DocuWorks] or [XPS]
16 Important
z If settings other than the above are used, you can register a Job Flow sheet on the machine, but an error
occurs when the machine executes the Job Flow and the Job Flow cannot be carried out.

Note
z XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.

734
 Notes and Restrictions

„ Addresses Registered on Job Flows

If you specify a speed dial or an address registered on the Address Book when creating a
job flow on the machine, any subsequent change of the number or address on the Address
Book is not reflected on the job flow created. To transmit to the changed address, you must
directly correct the address registered on the job flow.

Notes and Restrictions on the Security Features

„ Allow User to Disable Active Settings (for Forcible Printing Features)
This feature cannot apply to the ordinary print jobs. This feature is applicable to the jobs
stored in the machine and then printed by the instruction from the touch screen, such as
Copy, Secure Print, Private Charge Print, Print Stored File, Media Print - Text, and Media
Print - Photos .

Notes and Restrictions on the Authentication and Accounting Features

„ Notes and Restriction on Authentication and Accounting
z The general shared folders created under the [No Login Required] mode become
unavailable after the machine's login type is changed to require login.
z
When the machine's login type is set to require login, the private folders and the
administrator shared folder can be created. The general shared folder cannot be created.

„ Notes on the User ID setting

If you change the [User ID for Login] setting under [Authentication / Security Settings] >
[Authentication] > [User Details Setup], the registered user information including the user-
related folders and job flow sheets will be deleted.

„ Notes on Job Status Default Setting

If you set [Hide Job Details] on [Authentication / Security Settings] > [Job Status Default],
you cannot stop or delete jobs you instructed. Therefore, you cannot cancel jobs in the case
of operational error of copies or wrong transmission of faxes.

„ Remote Authentication using the Smart Card

z
Remote Authentication can be performed in an environment where Active Directory is
used.
z Change the default realm name only when you want to use a different realm name.

Notes and Restrictions for Using SMB

Appendix

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using SMB.

„ Configuration on the Machine

z IP addresses are managed for the entire system. Configure the settings only after
consulting your network administrator. 16
z The setting of subnet mask and gateway addresses may be required depending on the
network environment. Consult your network administrator and configure the required
settings.

735
 Appendix

„ Configuration on the Computer

z IP addresses are managed for the entire system. Configure the settings only after
consulting your network administrator.
z When setting the network such as IP addresses with a host used under the Network
Information Service (NIS), consult your NIS administrator.

„ SMB Authentication
When an IP address or a host name is used to designate the authentication server for SMB
authentication, even if the domain name is incorrect, the authentication succeeds if the
correct user name and passcode are entered.

Notes and Restrictions for Using TCP/IP

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using TCP/IP (LPD).

„ Configuration on the Computer

z IP addresses are managed for the entire system. Configure the settings only after
consulting your network administrator.
z When setting the network such as IP addresses with a host used under the Network
Information Service (NIS), consult your NIS administrator.

„ Turning Off the Machine

Check the following points when turning off the machine:
z When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [Spool to Memory
All print data spooled within the machine memory, including the data which is being
printed, is erased. The print data does not remain when the machine is turned on again.
However, if the machine was turned off immediately after a computer instructed a print
job, the job may remain on the computer. In this case, when the machine is turned on,
the data stored on the computer is printed before any jobs instructed subsequently.
z When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [Spool to Hard Disk]
All print data spooled in the machine hard disk, including the data which is being printed,
is saved. In this case, when the machine is turned on, the data stored on the machine
hard disk is printed before any jobs instructed subsequently.
z When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [No Spooling]
All print data spooled in the machine receiving buffer, including the data which is being
printed, is erased. The print data does not remain when the machine is turned on again.
However, if the machine was turned off immediately after a computer instructed a print
job, the job may remain on the computer. In this case, when the machine is turned on,
Appendix

the data stored on the computer is printed before any jobs instructed subsequently.

„ While Printing
z When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to either [Spool to Hard Disk] or [Spool to Memory]
16 If the transmitted print data size exceeds the available capacity of either hard disk or
memory, the print data is not received.
Note
z When the print data exceeds the receivable size, some computers may immediately re-transmit the print
data. In this case, the computer appears to be not operating. Remedy this problem by canceling the print
data transmission from the computer.
z
When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [No Spooling]

736
 Notes and Restrictions

When the machine receives a print request from a computer, the machine cannot accept
print requests from any other computers.
z
When a computer's IP address or a computer name is changed
When you change a computer's IP address or a computer name, queries and cancel
processes submitted from the machine are no longer executed correctly. Thus, turn the
machine off and on when there is no print data in the receiving buffer.
Note
z From the control panel on the machine, you can cancel print jobs or force the machine to print the jobs
remaining in the receiving buffer. For more information on the operation, refer to "11 Job Status" in the User
Guide.

Notes and Restriction for Using Secondary Ethernet (Optional)

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using Secondary Ethernet
(optional).
z The exceptions setting dialog box may be displayed when you access CentreWare
Internet Services using FQDN by Ethernet 2 while enabling [HTTP - SSL/TLS
Communication].
z The job log does not record Ethernet1 and Ethernet2 separately. You cannot identify
which network has transmitted a job.
z
The remaining level of consumables and the meter value information transmitted from
the machine are identical between Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2. When you use the
software which is not supplied by Fuji Xerox to check the machine usage status, please
do not set IP address to avoid the duplication of machine information. Instead of IP
address, set the machine-specific information such as UUID depending on the software
you use.
z
When [LPD Print Queue] is set to [Job Submission Order], no priority of print order occurs
between Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2.
z The submission, status confirmation (lpq), and cancellation (lprm) of print jobs from
different hosts which have the same IP address are processed as the same host’s
request.
z Port 9100 receives a print job from single line at one time even when two Ethernet
interface lines are used.
z [Get IP Address from DHCP] of [IPv6 - DNS Server Setup] is available only for [TCP/ IP -
Network Settings (Ethernet 1)]. For [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)], set the DNS
server address manually.
z On the [Properties] tab > [Connectivity] > [Protocols] > [TCP/IP] of CentreWare Internet
Services, selecting [Enabled] for [Dynamic DNS Registration] of both Ethernet 1 and
Ethernet 2 may cause the Dynamic DNS registration to fail. Select [Enabled] only for
Appendix

either Ethernet 1 or Ethernet 2 to use the Dynamic DNS registration feature.

Notes and Restrictions for Using Bonjour

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using Bonjour. 16
„ Supported Environment for Bonjour
Bonjour is available on Printer Setup Tool (Print Center, Printer Setup Utility) of Mac OS X
10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks, OS X 10.10
Yosemite, or Macintosh computers that use Safari. The Discovery feature of Bonjour is
available only within the same subnet.

737
 Appendix

„ Printer Name
z If you change a printer name or a host name that is already assigned, documents may
be printed by a printer that is not selected.
z If a printer name or a host name is duplicated on the same network, one of the
duplicated names is automatically changed by adding a number to avoid duplication.
z
If you change a printer name or a host name, because of the limitation on the number or
type of characters used, a name differing from the designated name may be assigned.
We recommend that you not change printer names or host names.

Notes and Restrictions for IPv6 Connection

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using IPv6 connection.
z Printing via IPv6 supports the following versions of the operating systems.
- Windows Vista
- Windows 7
- Windows 8
- Windows 8.1
- Windows Server 2008
- Windows Server 2008 R2
- Windows Server 2012
- Windows Server 2012 R2
- Linux distribution that Common Unix Printing System supports IPv6 and is printable
z
IPv6 does not support the following protocols:
- UPnP Discovery
z Some features of SMB are not supported (If you attempt to use services with a NetBIOS
name, communication may not be available in some environment).
z IPv6-in-IPv4-tunneling in the machine itself is not supported.
Important
z
If [IP Mode] is set to [IPv6 Mode], the IPv6-inIPv4-tunneling cannot be performed.
z
If more than one router exist in the same subnet, a communication error may occur.
z In a dual stack environment, some services may cause performance problems depending
on the network settings (for example, when you attempt to set the machine to prioritize
IPv6 in an environment where the Web server is started with IPv4).
z In a multi-prefix environment (where multiple IPv6 global addresses are used), data
transmission from the machine to a device installed on another network may fail.
z
In a multi-prefix environment (where multiple IPv6 global addresses are used), an
Appendix

address that is not assigned to the machine may be used for communication.
z
The machine may be assigned an unavailable address, such as site local addresses
(fec0::) or the documentation prefix (2001:db8::/32), as an autoconfigured IPv6 address
or as an IPv6 DNS server address.
16 z
The machine may use the DNS information for IPv4 rather than that for IPv6 if: the
machine is in Dual Stack mode, the DNS information for both IPv4 and IPv6 is
configured, the machine is to be communicate with a device that is specified using the
FQDN, and the machine has just been turned on.
z
The machine may display an incorrect machine address. Example: Either the IPv4 or IPv6
address is not displayed in Dual Stack mode. A different IPv6 address is displayed.

738
 Notes and Restrictions

z A time synchronization server cannot be specified in IPv6 format. Use the IPv4 format to
specify a time synchronization server directly.
z
WINS does not support IPv6 communication.
z When a self-signed certificate is used for SSL communication, observe the following
restrictions when specifying the printer URL:
- When specifying the machine by using the domain name (for IPv4 or IPv6): Set the
host name and domain name for the machine before creating a self-signed certificate.
Example: When the FQDN is "csw.ipv6.domain.local", specify csw for the host name,
and ipv6.domain.local for the domain name.
- When specifying the machine by using the IPv4 address: Import a self-signed
certificate that is created in IPv4 or Dual-Stack mode.
- When specifying the machine by using the IPv6 address: Secure IPP (IPP-S)
communication is not available.
z
When IPv6 is enabled and IPv4 is disabled on the machine, you cannot specify a storage
location for the Browse function of the Scan to PC (SMB) service.
z When the Scan to PC (FTP) service is used, only ASCII characters can be used for file
names.
z In the following cases, since the addresses may not be recognized as those of the same
machine, the lpq command (for status check) and the lprm command (for canceling)
may not be available for LPD print jobs.
- When simultaneously operating IPv4 and IPv6 addresses with the same host
- When simultaneously operating multiple IPv6 addresses with the same host
z IPv6 addresses may not be correctly recorded on job logs. Use an IPv4 network for
correct logging.
z When searching a device outside the router via SMB, directly specify the address.
Multicasting is supported only within a local link (FF02::1).
z
In an IPv6 environment without a DNS server, if a computer name is specified in the SMB
server settings for SMB authentication, the authentication fails. Specify the IPv6 address
directly for a computer name of the authentication server.
z
If you specify an IPv6 address as a destination URL using a remote access service, such
as DocuShare, the address does not operate correctly. In an IPv6 environment, use a DNS
server and specify a remote service’s destination URL by using the FQDN.

Notes and Restrictions for Print E-mail

„ Print E-mail
The machine cancels receiving e-mails but does not display error codes when disk space is
insufficient.
Appendix

16

739
 Appendix

Passcode Setting for Extended Functions

A passcode is required to use the extended function on the machine.

Available Extended Function and Passcode

Extended Function Passcode

Extensible Customization Function/custom service RWHJBEIIAIMQ@

Note
z It takes a few minutes longer to warm-up the machine after you set the passcode to enable the extended
function.
Following are instructions for enabling the extended function.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel.

2 Enter the System Administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].

Note
z When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the System Administrator’s passcode.

3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Appendix

16

740
 Passcode Setting for Extended Functions

4 Select [Maintenance] in [Common Service Settings] under [System Settings].

5 Select [Software Options].

6 Enter the passcode for the extended function with the keyboard.

7 Select [Reboot].
The setting of "Fonts to Prevent Garbled Characters on Touch Screen" is completed after
rebooting the machine.
If you are setting "Embedded Plug-ins", continue the steps below.

8 After rebooting the machine, start CentreWare Internet Services.

Note
Appendix

z
For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet
Services" (P.330).

9 Select [Embedded Plug-ins] in [Plug-in / Custom Services Settings] under [Security] from
[Properties] tab.
16

741
 Appendix

10 Check the [Enabled] checkbox and click [Apply].

Note
z
XPS stands for XML Paper Specifications.

11 Click [Reboot Machine].

After rebooting the machine, the setting will be enabled.
Appendix

16

742
 Using the Telephone

Using the Telephone

This section describes how to use an external telephone connected to the machine with the
Fax feature.

Placing a Call
The following describes how to place a call using the external telephone.
To place a call, the following two methods can be used:
z
Dialing with the receiver lifted (off-hook dialing)
z Dialing with the receiver resting in the cradle (on-hook dialing)

Off-hook Dialing
The following describes how to place a call with off-hook dialing.

1 Pick up the receiver of the external telephone.

Important
z While the machine is in the Power Saver mode, you cannot place a call using the external telephone. To place
a call, press the <Power Saver> button to exit the Power Saver mode.

2 Specify the call destination.

z
The call destination can be specified using the numeric keypad, address numbers, or one-
touch buttons. The Address Book cannot be used.
z The call destination can be specified also with the keyboard displayed on the screen.
Appendix

16
Note
z To disconnect the call, select [Close].
z If your telephone line is set to touch-tone, [Tone (:)] does not appear.
z
If you want to send tones (or to use the touch-tone services) while using a pulse line, select [Tone (:)].
z Some touch-tone services may not be available even if you set your telephone to send tones.

743
 Appendix

3 When the call is connected, start speaking.

4 When the call is finished, place the receiver back in the cradle.
Important
z
Be sure that the receiver is placed properly in the cradle. Otherwise, the line remains "busy".

5 Select [Close].

On-hook Dialing
The following describes how to place a call with on-hook dialing. Adjust the line monitor
volume so that you can hear the sound clearly.
Reference
z
The volume of the line monitor can be changed in the System Administration mode. For more information on how to change the
volume, refer to "Line Monitor Volume" (P.152). By factory default, the volume is set to [Soft].

1 On the Services Home screen, select [Fax/ Internet Fax].

2 Select the [More Options] tab, and then select [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)].

3 Specify the call destination.

z The call destination can be specified using the numeric keypad, address numbers, or one-
Appendix

touch buttons. The Address Book cannot be used.

16

744
 Using the Telephone

z The call destination can be specified also with the keyboard displayed on the screen.

Note
z To disconnect the call, select [Line Cut].
z If your telephone line is set to touch-tone, [Tone (:)] does not appear.
z If you want to send tones (or to use the touch-tone services) while using a pulse line, select [Tone (:)].
z Some touch-tone services may not be available even if you set your telephone to send tones.

4 When the call is connected, lift the receiver and start speaking.

5 After the call is finished, place the receiver back in the cradle.

Important
z Make sure that the receiver is placed properly in the cradle. Otherwise, the line remains "busy".

Appendix

16

745
 Appendix

Activity Report
You can print activity reports to check whether a transmission is successfully completed or
not. In the report, a remote terminal name and a result or a status of each operation are
recorded by outgoing and incoming transmission.
Reference
z For information on how to print the activity report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.115).

Item Description
No The serial numbers for transmissions is shown.
Doc. Job numbers that the machine automatically assigned to
documents when the documents were received.
Remote Station Information on recipient to which transmission is made is
recorded in the following order of priority.
z Transmitting (speed dialing)

1 Recipient
2 Remote terminal name
3 G3 ID (including spaces)
4 Tel. No.
5 Communication mode EC (or G3, SG3)
When IP Fax (SIP) is used:
1 Recipient
2 Remote terminal name
3 G3 ID (including spaces)
4 SIP address
5 Communication mode IP Fax or IP Fax-ECM
z
Transmitting (when all digits are dialed)
1 Remote terminal name
2 G3 ID (including spaces)
3 Tel. No.
4 Communication mode EC (or G3, SG3)
When IP Fax (SIP) is used:
1 Remote terminal name
2 G3 ID (including spaces)
3 Tel. No.
4 SIP address
5 Communication mode IP Fax or IP Fax-ECM
z
Receiving
1 Remote terminal name
2 G3 ID (including spaces)
3 Communication mode EC (or G3, SG3)
When IP Fax (SIP) is used:
Appendix

1 Remote terminal name

2 G3 ID (including spaces)
3 Communication mode IP Fax or IP Fax-ECM

Note
16 z
You can set the number of character digits displayed for the recipient
whether the first 40 digits or the last 40 digits. For details on setting
up, see "Activity Report - Recipient" (P.166). The factory default
displays the first 40 digits.
Start Time The date and time that the communication began are shown. In
Batch Send, the start time of the transmission for each document
is recorded.

746
 Activity Report

Item Description
Duration The duration of the transmission is displayed. In Batch Send, it is
the length of time taken to transmit each document is recorded.
Pages "-" is shown when the number of pages is 0.
z Transmitting
The number printed on the left side of the slash "/" indicates the
number of pages that were successfully transmitted. The
number printed on the right side of the slash "/" indicates the
number of total pages. In Batch Send, the number of total
pages is not shown.
z Receiving/Polling

The number of pages that the machine successfully received is

shown.

Note
z Depending on the transmission status on the recipient's machine or
the setting of the machine, the value in [Pages] may differ from the
actual number of pages printed.
Mode The mode used for the communication is shown.
There are three modes: G3, EC, and SG3 (Super G3). (Thisfield is
blank if a mode other than above these was used.)
When IP Fax (SIP) is used:
IP Fax or IP Fax-ECM
Contents The information about the communication is indicated. See the
Note field at the bottom of the report for a list of abbreviations
and their definitions.
z Transmitting

1 Remote service
2 Redial
3 Folder XXX
4 Broadcast/Multi-Poll
5 Polling
6 Relay Broadcast Assignment
7 Fax forwarding box XXX
When IP Fax (SIP) is used:
1 Redial
2 Folder XXX
3 Broadcast/Multi-Poll
4 Polling
z Receiving

1 Folder XXX
2 Polling
3 Receiving line box XXX
When IP Fax (SIP) is used:
1 Folder XXX
Appendix

2 Polling
3 Receiving line box XXX

Note
z
XXX indicates the Folder number
Status The result of the operation is indicated. 16
Completed : The operation ended normally.
Busy : The recipient is busy or did not answer.
Auto Send : The document is being re-sent and the set re-
send times has not been exceeded.
Canceled : The communication was terminated.

747
 Appendix

Item Description
Check Remote : An error caused by the recipient or the line
Station during communication.
Send Again : The document must be re-sent because the
re-send times have reached the maximum
due to a transmission error.
Receive Again : A polling request must be re-sent due to a
polling reception error.Or, you must ask a
sender to resend the document due to a
reception error.
Disconnected : Check that the line is properly connected.
When IP Fax (SIP) is used, check that the
network cable is properly connected.
XXX-XXX : Error code

Reference
z For more information on lines, refer to "2 Product Overview" > "Machine
Components" > "Telephone line connectors" in the User Guide and for more
information on XXX-XXX (error code), refer to Error Code(P.496).
z For more information on how to connect network cables, refer to
"Using the Ethernet Interface" (P.21)
Total All pages received or sent are recorded.
Appendix

16

748
 EP System

EP System
Electronic Partnership (EP) is a system to automatically control or maintain the machine by
connecting the machine and the EP center of Fuji Xerox.
You can use the EP system via the Internet.
The following describes how to use the EP system on the machine.
Note
z The services provided by the EP system are available only when the machine is switched on.
z The EP system may not be available in some regions. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.

Proxy server

EP-BB
the Internet
Customer Customer’s Fuji Xerox
intranet EP System

The following services are available for EP system:

Automated Meter Reading

The machine automatically reports the meter readings at a scheduled date and time every
month. You can check the previous meter readings by selecting [Billing Information].
Note
z
[Billing Information] can be displayed when the EP system is used. For more information, refer to "Billing
Information" (P.134).

Check or Maintenance Request of the Machine

When a check or maintenance is required, the machine sends a check or maintenance
request to our Customer Support Center. A service representative visits you as required. This
operation should be performed by a system administrator.
Appendix

Automated Alert Notification

When a problem occurs, the machine performs a self-diagnosis and automaticallynotifies
the problem to our Customer Support Center.
A service representative visits you in response to the notification. 16
Timely Delivery of Consumables
The machine notifies us of the used amount of consumables such as toner cartridges. We
send you consumables based on usage track records.

749
 Appendix

Remote Modification of the Settings

We can remotely change the machine settings as you request. For more information on
each setting, contact our Customer Support Center.

Software Upgrade
When the software requires an upgrade, you can download a newer version of thesoftware
and upgrade it.
Reference
z For information on software upgrade, refer to "Software Upgrade" (P.168).
Appendix

16

750
 Index

Index Add Me to "Cc" Field.............................................................. 264

Add Me to "To" Field ............................................................. 264
Add This User to Authorization Group........................... 304
Numerics Added Port Number .............................................................. 196
Adding paper ..............................................................................66
10 Mbps Full-Duplex ............................................................. 201 Address Book............................................ 120, 121, 284, 286
10 Mbps Half-Duplex ............................................................ 201 Address Book Default - Fax ................................................ 266
100 Mbps Full-Duplex........................................................... 201 Address Book Default - Scan.............................................. 266
100 Mbps Half-Duplex ......................................................... 201 Address Book Settings.....................................140, 144, 266
1000 Mbps ................................................................................ 201 Address Book Type ................................................................ 266
10-inch Continuous Form Mode....................................... 676 Address Type............................................................................ 292
15-inch Continuous Form Mode (When Aligned at Left Address Type Settings When Registering on the Address
in Landscape Orientation) .................................................. 676 Book ............................................................................................. 721
1st Tab - Features Allocation.................................. 236, 245 Addresses Registered on Job Flows................................. 735
2 Pages Up On Receipt......................................................... 252 Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server.................................... 206
2 Sided Copying ...................................................................... 186 Adjust Color Registration .................................................... 164
2 Sided Printing............................................................ 252, 287 Adjust Image Transfer .............................................. 169, 654
2 Sided Report ......................................................................... 166 Adjust Paper Registration ................................................... 169
200 dpi (High Speed)............................................................ 269 Adjust Punch Position/Booklet Fold Position .............. 169
Adjusting Screen Brightness .................................................41
A Adjusting the Transfer Output Value............................. 654
Administrator Guide.................................................................17
A/B Series Size................................159, 192, 240, 241, 257
Adobe Communication Protocol...................................... 195
Accept Cookies ........................................................................ 274 Alert Tone.................................................................................. 151
Access Control............................................................... 315, 426
All Account Limits................................................................... 306
Access To ................................................................................... 325
All Authorization Groups ..................................................... 306
According to Original Orientation ................................... 243 All Feature Access Settings................................................. 306
According to Print Auditron................................................ 322
All levels below root entry................................................... 218
Account Administration....................................................... 428
All User Accounts.................................................................... 306
Account Administrator .............................................. 304, 425 Allocate Memory .................................................................... 227
Account Auto Setup for Card Login ................................ 319
Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field ........................... 264
Account Limit for All User ................................................... 426
Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field ............................. 264
Account Limit for Each User............................................... 426 Allow Print Driver to Override ............................................ 232
Accounting ...........................................................141, 145, 301
Allow to edit From if Search Failed ................................. 264
Accounting Login Screen Settings ................................... 308
Allow to edit From if Search Found................................. 264
Accounting Type..................................................................... 307 Allow User to Disable Active Settings .......318, 324, 425
Accounting using Authentication Server ...................... 428
Allow User to Disable Active Settings (for Forcible
Accounting/Billing Device ................................................... 311
Printing Features)................................................................... 735
Accounting/Billing Device Settings ................................. 310 Alphanumeric fonts.................................................... 681, 688
Index

Active Jobs View ..................................................................... 324

Alternative Name for Account ID.................................... 309
Activity Report ....................................................165, 721, 746
Alternative Name for User ID ................................ 308, 318
Activity Report - Recipient .................................................. 166 Annotations - Comment - Font Color............................. 188
Add Address Book Entry ...................................................... 289
Annotations - Comment - Font Size................................ 188
Add Domain Name................................................................ 240
Annotations - Comment Density ..................................... 191
Add Domain Name to User Name .................................. 226 Annotations - Create Comments ..................................... 193
Add Fax Comment................................................................. 300
Annotations - Stored Comment ....................................... 188

751
 Applicable Lines ......................................................................640 Auto Job Release .................................................................... 148
Apply Layout Template to Copy/Print Jobs................. 173 Auto Layout ................................................................... 698, 699
Area Determination Mode.................................................. 700 Auto Paper Off......................................................................... 190
ART IV, ESC/P, 201H Form Memory ............................... 227 Auto Paper Select................................................................... 158
as the address type..................................................... 291, 292 Auto Print................................................................................... 148
Assigning Services to the Custom Buttons......................39 Auto Reduce On Receipt...................................................... 251
Assigning to the One-Touch Buttons.............................. 708 Auto Retrieval of CRL............................................................ 225
Attachment, Basic Headers & Message ............. 260, 262 Auto Select................................................................................ 287
Attachment, Full Headers & Message................. 260, 262 Auto Start .................................................................................. 279
Attribute Name of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3 ............. 219 Auto Tray Switching.............................................................. 160
Attribute of Login User Name........................................... 217 Auto Tray Switching Control.............................................. 160
Attribute of Smart Card....................................................... 217 Auto Upright Orientation.................................................... 243
Attribute of Typed User Name ......................................... 217 Auto Validation of Speed Dial Entry .............................. 181
Attribute Type of Certificate ............................................. 219 Automated Alert Notification ........................................... 749
Attribute Type of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3................ 219 Automated Meter Reading ................................................ 749
Attribute Type of E-mail (Internet Fax) ........................ 219 Automatic Switching.................................................. 681, 688
Attribute Type of E-mail Address..................................... 219 Automatic Tray Selection ......................................................66
Attribute Type of Fax Number.......................................... 219 Automatically Configured IPv6 Address....................... 204
Attribute Type of Given Name.......................................... 218 Automatically Printed Reports/Lists ............................... 125
Attribute Type of IP Fax (SIP) Number ......................... 219 Available Extended Function and Passcode................ 740
Attribute Type of Name ...................................................... 218
Attribute Type of Surname................................................. 218 B
Audio Tones..............................................................................150
Auditron Mode ........................................................................308 Back Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3 .......................................... 183
Auditron Report (Copy Jobs).............................................. 124 Background Pattern .............................................................. 171
Auditron Report (Fax Jobs)................................................. 125 Background Suppression .......................................... 185, 237
Auditron Report (Print Jobs)............................................... 125 Background Suppression (Black Copy) .......................... 163
Auditron Report (Scan Jobs) .............................................. 125 Background Suppression (Color Copy) .......................... 163
Auditron Reports.....................................................................123 Background Suppression (Photo & Text)...................... 191
Authenticating Login Users................................................ 448 Background Suppression (Scan Jobs)............................. 163
Authentication.........................................................................315 Background Suppression Level.......................................... 242
Authentication and Accounting Features .................... 423 Background Suppression Level (Text) ............................ 191
Authentication and Accounting Relationship............. 429 Banner Sheet............................................................................ 232
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders....... 435 Banner Sheet Offset.............................................................. 232
Authentication Method ....................................................... 216 Banner Sheet Tray ................................................................. 232
Authentication Methods ..................................................... 427 Base Tone .................................................................................. 151
Authentication of User Attributes ................................... 216 Basic Settings................................................................ 660, 690
Authentication System ........................................................ 214 Batch Send ................................................................................ 250
Authentication/Security Settings................141, 145, 313
Index

Bates Stamp - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, -

Authorization Groups............................................................ 425 Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and - Bottom Right .. 192
Auto .............................................................................................201 BB Registration........................................................................ 167
Auto Clear..................................................................................148 Before Using the Machine .....................................................15
Auto Clear Alert Tone ........................................................... 151 Billing - Day Time, Billing - Night Time, Billing - Midnight
Auto Display of Login Screen ............................................ 152 298
Auto Eject Time.......................................................................195 Billing Data List ....................................................................... 122
Auto Job Promotion............................................................... 177 Billing for Fax Jobs ................................................................. 431

752
 Index

Billing Information ..................................................... 112, 134 Changing the Paper Settings................................................72

Binary .......................................................................................... 195 Changing the Paper Size ........................................................70
Black Impressions................................................................... 134 Changing the Paper Size for Trays 1 to 4........................70
Black Large Impressions ...................................................... 135 Changing the Screen Default...............................................29
Block Inbound Faxes............................................................. 254 Character Code ....................................................................... 707
Block Unknown Fax Numbers............................................ 254 Charge/Private Print Settings ............................................ 321
Bonjour ....................................................................................... 196 Check Document Guides Position.................................... 180
Booklet Creation - Default Cover Tray........................... 189 Check EP Connection ............................................................ 167
Booklet Finishing .................................................................... 644 Check Folder Passcode ......................................................... 277
Booklet Offset.......................................................................... 176 Check or Maintenance Request of the Machine ....... 749
BOOTP......................................................................................... 202 Check Smart Card Details ................................................... 168
Border Limit .............................................................................. 251 Checking the status of consumables.................................79
Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab....................................... 249 Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass .99
Broadcast Disabled................................................................ 248 Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers......................... 101
Broadcast Report.................................................................... 126 Cleaning the Exterior ...............................................................96
Broadcast Starting Rate ...................................................... 260 Cleaning the Interior (LED Printheads) ............................97
Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report............................................... 165 Cleaning the Machine .............................................................96
Bypass ......................................................................................... 287 Cleaning the Touch Screen....................................................99
Cleaning the White Chute and Constant Velocity
C Transport Glass ....................................................................... 100
Clear Cache Upon Closing .................................................. 274
Calibration................................................................................. 164 Coding Method ............................................................ 640, 642
Cancel.......................................................................................... 305 Color Capability ...................................................................... 632
Cancel Printing ........................................................................ 233 Color Effect for Dual Color Copy...................................... 711
Capacity ..................................................................................... 642 Color Impressions................................................................... 134
Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase.......................... 187, 238 Color Large Impressions ...................................................... 135
CentreWare Internet Services ........................................... 734 Color Scanning ........................................................................ 236
CentreWare Internet Services Help....................................17 Color Shift.................................................................................. 186
CentreWare Internet Services Problems ....................... 488 Color Space .................................................................... 237, 242
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items .. 339, 343, Common Service Settings..............................140, 143, 146
347, .................................................................................. 358, 372 Company Logo ........................................................................ 258
CentreWare Internet Services Settings ......................... 327 Compatible Mode .................................................................. 233
Certificate Auto Store........................................................... 222 Completed Jobs View ........................................................... 324
Certificate Conditions........................................................... 407 Compression Format of Scanned Images.................... 717
Certificate conditions that can be set according to the Configuration for Account Administration .................. 446
types of encryption................................................................ 407 Configuration for Authentication.................................... 439
Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings..................... 225 Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional) ............. 444
Chain Dial .................................................................................. 249 Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature....
Index

Change Account Limit .......................................................... 303 416

Change Settings...................................................................... 158 Configuration of Encryption using IPsec ...................... 413
Changing Passcode ............................................................... 449 Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption......
Changing Passcode by User............................................... 449 410
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings ...... Configuration of Job Flow Sheets ................................... 376
442 Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template
Changing the Interval for Entering Power Saver Mode.. Scanning)................................................................................... 373
23 Configuration of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature..... 420

753
 Configuration of Scan to My Folder ............................... 367 Create/View User Accounts..................................... 301, 317
Configuration of Scan to PC .............................................. 364 Creating / Using Job Flow Sheet ...................................... 435
Configuration of Store & Send Link ................................ 377 Creating an Authorization Group .................................... 443
Configuration of Store to Folder...................................... 362 CRL Retrieval Time-Out........................................................ 225
Configuration of Store to USB .......................................... 372 Current System Software .................................................... 113
Configuration of Store to WSD......................................... 379 Custom Buttons 1 to 3 ......................................................... 153
Configuration on Sender and Recipient..417, 420, 421, Custom Colors.......................................................................... 193
422 Custom Item 1 ........................................................................ 293
Configuration on the Computer....................................... 736 Custom Item 2 ........................................................................ 293
Configuration on the Machine328, 410, 413, 416, 420, Custom Item 3 ........................................................................ 293
.......................................................................................................735 Custom Paper Name/Color................................................. 157
Configuration on the Server............................................... 354 Custom Settings...................................................................... 128
Configuration Report............................ 116, 117, 119, 121 Custom Size .........................................................160, 192, 240
Confirmation Options........................................................... 247 Custom Watermark 1 to 3 .................................................. 172
Connection Interval............................................................... 147 Customize Paper Supply Screen ....................................... 158
Connectivity & Network Setup.....................140, 143, 194 Customize User Prompts ..................................................... 308
Continuous Copy Speed ...................................................... 633 Customizing the Button Layout ..........................................33
Continuous Print Speed ....................................................... 635 Customizing the Control Panel ............................................29
Contrast........................................................................... 185, 237 Cut Link....................................................................................... 278
Control Panel Alert Tone ..................................................... 151
Control Panel Select Tone................................................... 151 D
Conventions.................................................................................19
Convert Custom Size to Standard Size .......................... 267 Data Indicator......................................................................... 181
Copy.............................................................................................288 Data Processing Order.......................................................... 234
Copy and Simple Copy ......................................................... 711 Date ............................................................................................. 146
Copy Control.............................................................................189 Date - Font Size....................................................................... 189
Copy Defaults ..........................................................................183 Date & Time
Copy Feature............................................................................711 Newest First.................................................................. 273
Copy Function..........................................................................632 Oldest First .................................................................... 273
.......................................................................................................103 Date Format ............................................................................. 170
Daylight Savings..................................................................... 149
Copy Output .............................................................................188
Deactivate All........................................................................... 150
Copy Reports ............................................................................116
Copy Service Settings ......................................140, 143, 182 Default Language .................................................................. 153
Default Print Paper Size....................................................... 177
Copy Tab - Features Allocation......................................... 182
Default Programming........................................................... 129
Cover Page ................................................................................295
Covers - Default Front Cover Tray, Default Back Cover Default Watermark................................................................ 170
Default Watermark Effect .................................................. 170
Tray ..............................................................................................189
Delay Start ................................................................................ 296
Create Authorization Groups............................................. 317
Delay Start - Specific Time ................................................. 247
Index

Create Fax Group Recipients ............................................. 299

Delete.......................................................................................... 282
Create Folder............................................................................276
Delete All Certificates/Initialize Settings...................... 169
Create Job Flow Sheet.......................................................... 279
Creating Job Flow Sheet on the........................................ 436 Delete All Data ........................................................................ 167
Delete Expired Files ............................................................... 278
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword ....................................... 288
Delete Files After Retrieval ................................................. 278
Create New Job Flow Sheet ............................................... 281
Create Text String ..................................................................173 Delete Form .............................................................................. 229
Delete from this group ......................................................... 300
Create/Change Link............................................................... 279

754
 Index

Delete Job.................................................. 190, 231, 241, 253 Display Paper Supply Screen ............................................. 230
Delete Layout Template...................................................... 173 Display Scan & Transfer Screens...................................... 242
Delete Persistent Cookie Upon Closing ......................... 274 Document Feeder Quiet Mode ......................................... 180
Delete Remote Accounts..................................................... 320 Document Jams ...................................................................... 623
Delete this Group.................................................................... 300 Document Size.............................................................. 640, 641
Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User DocuWorks Direct Print........................................................ 679
ID .................................................................................................. 108 DocuWorks Direct Print Settings ...................................... 679
Delivery Confirmation Method......................................... 260 DocuWorks Printer Settings List ....................................... 119
Delivery Receipts .................................................................... 260 DocuWorks Signature........................................................... 223
Delivery Receipts/Read Receipts ...................................... 247 DocuWorks Signature Hash Algorithm.......................... 223
Density........................................................................................ 171 Domain Filter List ........................................................ 120, 121
Destination Computer.......................................................... 367 Domain Filtering..................................................................... 226
Device Access ......................................................303, 315, 426 Domain Name ....................................................206, 215, 220
Device Certificate ................................................................... 223 Domains 1 to 50 ..................................................................... 226
Device Certificate - Client ................................................... 221 Double-Tap Interval.............................................................. 157
Device Certificate - S/MIME............................................... 221 Drag ................................................................................................42
Device Certificate - Server................................................... 220 Dual Color - Non-target Area Color................................. 184
Device certificates corresponding to the types of Dual Color - Source Color .................................................... 184
encryption ................................................................................. 406 Dual Color - Target Area Color.......................................... 184
DHCP ................................................................................ 202, 209 Dual Stack ................................................................................. 202
DHCP v6 ..................................................................................... 209 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder ............................ 642
DHCP/AutoIP............................................................................ 203 Duplex Function...................................................................... 642
Digital Signature..................................................................... 285 Duration for Preview Generation..................................... 272
Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail................................ 222
Digital Signature - Outgoing Internet Fax ................... 222 E
Digital Signature of PDF...................................................... 717
Dimensions .................................................................... 635, 645 Edge Erase................................................................................. 238
Dimensions/Weight.................................................... 643, 644 Edge Erase - 2 Sided Original - Side 2 ............................ 187
Direct (P2P) ............................................................................... 259 Edge Erase - Bottom Edge .................................................. 186
Direct Authentication ........................................................... 216 Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges ....................................... 238
Direct Fax........................................................................ 254, 721 Edge Erase - Left &amp ....................................................... 252
Direct Fax Driver ..................................................................... 714 Edge Erase - Left Edge.......................................................... 186
Direct Fax for Mac OS........................................................... 733 Edge Erase - Right Edge....................................................... 187
Direct Fax Function (optional) .......................................... 640 Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges........................ 238, 252
Direct Print via USB Host (a USB memory device).... 712 Edge Erase - Top Edge.......................................................... 186
Directory Service ..................................................................... 266 Edit E-mail Recipients ........................................................... 265
Disabled .......................................................................... 150, 158 Edit/Delete ..................................................................... 281, 288
Display Billing Information Upon Login ....................... 309 E-mail ............................................................................... 350, 360
Index

Display Confirmation Screen............................................. 230 When selecting........................................................................ 291

Display Consumables Screen............................................. 155 E-mail Address ....................................................205, 292, 303
Display Default of Stored Print Job List ........................ 272 E-mail Addresses 1 to 5........................................................ 175
Display Details of Stored Print Job List.......................... 272 E-mail Control .......................................................................... 262
Display Fax Line Selection .................................................. 246 E-mail Encryption ................................................................... 239
Display Message ..................................................................... 230 E-Mail Environment ............................................................... 393
Display Message at End of Scanning............................. 242 E-mail Environment Settings ............................................. 349
Display Message at End of Transfer............................... 242 E-mail Features Problems.................................................... 489

755
 E-mail Forwarding ..................................................................724 ESC/P-K Emulation ................................................................. 659
E-mail Message .......................................................................175 ESC/P-K Emulation Print Features ................................... 660
E-mail Notification...................................................... 288, 351 ESC/P-K Emulation Settings ............................................... 660
E-mail Notification (Status notifications such as Ethernet - Rated Speed / Ethernet 1 - Rated Speed,
consumables) ...........................................................................350 Ethernet 2 - Rated Speed .................................................... 201
E-mail Notification Service ................................................. 198 Ethernet Settings.................................................................... 201
E-mail Overview.......................................................................350 Ethernet1 - Network Name, Ethernet 2 - Network Name
Email Screen Default ............................................................ 236 201
E-mail Send Authentication ............................................... 214 Executing Calibration ........................................................... 103
E-mail Sending When Search Failed............................... 264 Expiration Date for Files in Folder ................................... 271
E-mail Subject ..........................................................................238 Extended Printable Area...................................................... 646
E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings .........140, 144, 262 Extended Settings ....................................................... 662, 691
Embedded Plug-ins ................................................................ 175 Extension ................................................................................... 248
Embossed...................................................................................170 Extra Center Tray ................................................................... 176
Emptying Punch Waste Container (for Finisher-B1) ...93
Emulation .................................................. 637, 659, 681, 688 F
Emulation Mode ................................................659, 681, 688
Enable File Printing................................................................ 275 F Code ......................................................................................... 297
Enable SIP Server....................................................................209 Factory Default Settings ..................................................... 689
Enabled............................................................................ 150, 303 Factory Defaults ..................................................................... 128
Enabling Authentication ..................................................... 439 Failed Access Log.................................................................... 318
Enabling Auto Layout ........................................................... 699 Fault Tone ................................................................................. 151
Encrypting HTTP Communications from the Machine to Faults................................................................................ 112, 132
a Remote Server(SSL/TLS Client) ..................................... 408 Fax................................................................................................ 430
Encryption .................................................................................285 When selecting........................................................................ 291
Encryption and Digital Signature Overview................. 406 Fax Billing Data....................................................................... 310
Encryption and Digital Signature Settings................... 405 Fax Comments List ................................................................ 122
Encryption and Digital-Signature Features for Scan Files Fax Control................................................................................ 248
409 Fax Data in Folder Priority 1 to 3..................................... 254
Encryption Features for Communication ..................... 408 Fax Defaults ............................................................................. 246
Encryption Key for Confidential Data............................ 179 Fax Function (optional) ....................................................... 639
Encryption using IPsec ......................................................... 409 Fax Gateway Feature ........................................................... 725
End Sheet...................................................................................232 Fax Group Recipients ............................................................ 121
Enter Once Only ........................................................... 248, 249 Fax Immediate Reception .................................................. 720
Enter Twice..................................................................... 248, 249 Fax Line 1 - Name to Fax Line 3 - Name....................... 246
Entering Text...............................................................................45 Fax Number .............................................................................. 295
EP Diagnosis .............................................................................170 Fax Received - Line 1 to 3 ................................................... 257
EP Diagnostic Request/Repair Request ......................... 166 Fax Received - SIP .................................................................. 257
Index

EP Proxy Server Setup........................................................... 207 Fax Received Options ........................................................... 255

EP Registration ........................................................................167 Fax Receiving Mode ................................................... 130, 251
EP System ..................................................................................749 Fax Reports ............................................................................... 120
EPA Server Registration ....................................................... 167 Fax Screen Default ................................................................ 245
Error Code..................................................................................496 Fax Service ................................................................................ 175
ESC/P Logical Printers List................................................... 118 Fax Service Settings..........................................140, 144, 245
ESC/P Settings List .................................................................118 Fax Speed Dial Default ........................................................ 266
ESC/P User Defined List ....................................................... 118 Fax Transfer from Address Book...................................... 261

756
 Index

Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size ................................... 261 For Windows NT...................................................................... 294
Fax Transfer Resolution ....................................................... 269 For workgroups
Feature Access....................................................303, 317, 426 ................................................................................................ 294
Feature Combinations when Transmitting an Internet Force Annotation.................................................................... 172
Fax ................................................................................................ 722 Force Delete.............................................................................. 267
Feature in 2nd to 4th Column........................................... 245 Force Watermark - Client Print.......................................... 171
Feature Specifications.......................................................... 729 Force Watermark - Copy...................................................... 171
Features Supported by F Code Communication........ 720 Force Watermark - Media Print ........................................ 172
File Display Default ............................................................... 267 Force Watermark - Print Stored File................................ 172
File Format ................................................ 236, 285, 286, 641 Forcible Output in Emulation Mode .................... 683, 689
File Name Form Overlay............................................................................ 660
Ascending ...................................................................... 273 Forms........................................................................................... 660
Descending ................................................................... 273 From Last Operation to Low Power Mode.................... 150
File Transfer Report - Fax Server ...................................... 126 From Last Operation to Sleep Mode .............................. 150
Filename Format .................................................................... 242 Front Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3 ......................................... 183
Filename Format for Store to Folder.............................. 253 FTP Client................................................................................... 197
Files deleted at ........................................................................ 271 FTP Transmission for Scan to PC ..................................... 718
Files kept for ............................................................................. 271 Functional Code...................................................................... 275
Files Retrieved By Client ...................................................... 267
Fine-tune 100%...................................................................... 190 G
Finisher Adjustment .............................................................. 168
Finisher-A1 (Optional) .......................................................... 643 G3 Line 1 to 3 - Dial Type.................................................... 258
Finisher-B1 (Optional) .......................................................... 643 G3 Line 1 to 3 - Fax ID ......................................................... 258
First Copy Output Time........................................................ 633 G3 Line 1 to 3 - Line Type ................................................... 259
First Tab - Reconfirm Recipients....................................... 154 G3 Sender ID - Fax................................................................. 250
Fit to Cut Sheet ............................................................ 671, 675 G3 Sender ID - IP Fax (SIP)................................................ 250
Fit to Cut Sheet (When 2 Up is specified) .................... 673 G3 SIP Line - ID....................................................................... 259
Flick .................................................................................................43 Gateway Address.................................................................... 211
Flick and Double-tap ............................................................. 156 General Information............................................................. 113
Folder List .................................................................................. 122 Generation of URL Link........................................................ 244
Folder Name............................................................................. 277 Get IP Address from DHCP...................................... 203, 204
Folder Passcode ........................................................... 277, 726 Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) Port ............................................... 201
Folder Report................................................................. 126, 165 Given Name.............................................................................. 292
Folder Selector - Service Priority ....................................... 253 Global IP Address Security Warning............................... 157
Folder Selector by G3 ID ..................................................... 252 Group Name............................................................................. 318
Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID 253, 255 Group Send Disabled ............................................................ 249
Folder Selector List................................................................. 121 Guest User................................................................................. 319
Folder Selector Setup................................................. 253, 256 Guides for Optional Components.......................................17
Folder Service Settings ....................................141, 144, 267
Index

Font Caching ................................................................. 682, 689 H

Font Color .................................................................................. 171
Font List...................................................................................... 119 Halftone/Printable Colors ................................................... 632
Font Size..................................................................................... 170 Handling consumables/periodic replacement parts ...79
Fonts ............................................................................................ 637 Hard Clip Area.......................................................................... 695
For Active Directory HDD (optional)........................................................................ 632
................................................................................................ 294 Hide Job Details ...................................................................... 325

757
 High Compression Image Kit (Optional)....................... 716 Image Quality............................................................... 160, 162
Highlighted Originals ............................................................ 191 Image Quality Adjustment................................................. 162
Hole Punch ................................................................................287 Image Quality Trouble......................................................... 458
Hole Punch Tool ......................................................................168 Image Rotation....................................................................... 187
Host Interfaces and Emulation ........................................ 659 Image Rotation - Rotation Direction ............................. 187
Host Name ................................................................................206 Image Shift - Side 1............................................................... 187
How to check the certificate settings on Windows... 407 Image Shift - Side 2............................................................... 187
How to create the self-signed certificate (for SSL server) Image Transfer Screen......................................................... 242
411 Importing/exporting a certificate using CentreWare
How to Determine Document Size.................................. 701 Internet Services..................................................................... 419
How to Determine the Scaling Ratio.............................. 703 Inbound Fax Spam List ........................................................ 121
HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory.......................................... 228 Inch Size...........................................160, 192, 240, 241, 257
HP-GL/2 Emulation ................................................................ 688 Incoming E-mail Print Options.......................................... 262
HP-GL/2 Emulation Settings .............................................. 690 Incoming Internet Fax Print Options ............................. 260
HP-GL/2 Logical Printers List .............................................. 118 Index ................................................................................ 292, 295
HP-GL/2 Palette List............................................................... 118 Initialize Hard Disk................................................................. 167
HP-GL/2 Settings List ................................................. 118, 690 Inkjet Originals ........................................................................ 191
HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication ...................................... 220 Installation of CentreWare Internet Services............. 328
HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number............................................. 220 Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
HTTP Proxy Server Authentication....................... 207, 208 345
HTTP Proxy Server Login Name............................. 207, 208 Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100).... 341
HTTP Proxy Server Name ......................................... 206, 208 Installation When Using USB Port .................................. 338
HTTP Proxy Server Password .................................. 207, 208 Installing and Moving the Machine................................ 707
HTTP Proxy Server Port Number ........................... 207, 208 Interface ...............................................................637, 641, 642
HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication .................... 207, 208 Interface Cables ........................................................................21
HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name .......................... 207, 208 Interface-dependent........................................659, 681, 688
HTTPS Proxy Server Name....................................... 207, 208 Internal Fonts .......................................................................... 648
HTTPS Proxy Server Password ................................ 207, 208 When selecting........................................................................ 292
HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number......................... 207, 208 Internet Fax and Direct Internet Fax............................. 722
Internet Fax Control.............................................................. 259
I Internet Fax Encryption....................................................... 248
Internet Fax Function (optional) ..................................... 641
IC Card Reader (optional)................................................... 708 Internet Fax Output Destination ..................................... 261
ID ..................................................................................................211 Internet Fax Overview.......................................................... 392
ID Card Copy............................................................................711 Internet Fax Path ................................................................... 259
ID Card Copy - Reduce/Enlarge ........................................ 191 Internet Fax Profile...........................................248, 284, 298
IEEE 802.1x Settings............................................................. 225 Internet Fax Profiles.............................................................. 724
IEEE 802.1X Settings / IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet Internet Fax Service .............................................................. 350
Index

1), IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet 2) ............................ 224 Internet Fax Subject ............................................................. 248
If the Paper Size Setting is A Sizes .................................. 702 Internet Fax to E-mail .......................................................... 268
If the Paper Size Setting is Auto....................................... 702 Internet Fax to Internet Fax.............................................. 267
If the Scaling Mode is a Paper Size................................. 701 Internet Services (HTTP) ..................................................... 199
If the Scaling Mode is the ACA......................................... 701 Internet/Intranet Connection ........................................... 733
If the Scaling Mode Setting is ACA................................. 703 Internet/Intranet Connection Problems ....................... 489
If the Scaling Mode Setting is Paper Size..................... 703 IP Address.................................................................................. 113
Image Enhancement ............................................................ 163 IP Address or Host Name .................................................... 205

758
 Index

IP Address Settings................................................................ 729 Kerberos Server Settings...................................................... 215

When selecting........................................................................ 291 Keyboard Input Restriction ................................................ 155
IP Fax (SIP) Feature .............................................................. 727 Keyword...................................................................................... 282
IP Fax (SIP) Function (optional)....................................... 641 KS Settings List ........................................................................ 118
IP Mode ...................................................................................... 202 KS5895 Settings List ............................................................. 119
IPP ..................................................................................... 196, 337 KSSM Settings List ................................................................. 118
IPsec ............................................................................................ 223
IPsec Settings........................................................................... 223 L
IPv4 - DNS Server Setup ...................................................... 203
IPv4 - Gateway Address....................................................... 203 Language of the Original .................................................... 239
IPv4 - IP Address..................................................................... 203 LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication ...................................... 221
IPv4 - IP Address Resolution .............................................. 202 LDAP Referral Hop Limit...................................................... 218
IPv4 - IP Filter........................................................................... 204 LDAP Referrals ......................................................................... 218
IPv4 - Subnet Mask................................................................ 203 LDAP Server .............................................................................. 218
IPv4 and IPv6 Connection Problems.............................. 491 LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings......................... 216
IPv4 Mode ................................................................................. 202 Level of Certificate Verification........................................ 225
IPv6 - DNS Server Setup ...................................................... 204 Lighten/Darken ..................................................185, 237, 246
IPv6 - IP Filter........................................................................... 205 Limited Paper..............................................................................59
IPv6 Address Manual Configuration .............................. 204 Line 1 to 3 - Company Logo............................................... 258
IPv6 Mode ................................................................................. 202 Line Monitor Volume ............................................................ 152
Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder............................................ 278
J List of Embedded Plug-ins .................................................. 175
Loading Paper.............................................................................66
Job Complete Tone 1, 2....................................................... 151 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass).......................................68
Job Completion Notice......................................................... 351 Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4 ..............................................67
Job Counter Report..................................................... 122, 726 Local Accounting ......................................................... 307, 428
Job Flow Error Report................................................. 126, 166 Local Name............................................................................... 258
Job Flow Scanning ................................................................. 361 Local Terminal Information............................................... 258
Job Flow Service Settings ...............................141, 144, 269 Log In/Log Out by Touching the IC Card Reader
Job Flow Settings for High Compression Format ...... 734 (Optional) .................................................................................. 449
Job Flow Sheet List Default................................................ 269 Log In/Log Out from the Control Panel......................... 448
Job History Report.................................................................. 165 Logging Out of User Authentication .............................. 448
Job Login Failure..................................................................... 322 Login Credential to Access Destination ........................ 240
Job Login Success ................................................................... 322 Login Credentials for E-mail Send ................................... 214
Job Status Default ................................................................. 324 Login Credentials to Search Entries ................................ 217
Job Status/Activity Report .................................................. 115 Login Name ................................................................... 213, 217
Job Submission Order ........................................................... 234 Login to Local Accounts..................................315, 426, 439
Job Ticket Memory ................................................................ 228 Login to Remote Accounts....................................... 315, 427
Index

Job Type on Job Status screen.......................................... 153 Login Type................................................................................. 315

Job without User ID.................................................... 322, 323 Login User.................................................................................. 424
Jobs Manageable by Account Administration ........... 429 Logout Confirmation Screen.............................................. 318
Low Toner Alert Tone............................................................ 152
K LPD .................................................................................... 196, 336
LPD Print Queue...................................................................... 234
Kerberos Server Certificate Verification........................ 320

759
 M Meter (Copy Jobs).................................................................. 136
Meter (Print Jobs)........................................................ 136, 306
Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Meter (Scan Jobs)................................................................... 136
Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks, and OS X 10.10 Yosemite ..... Meter Count for Dual Color and Single Color Copies711
487 Meter Count for Watermark .............................................. 713
Machine Clock/Timers .......................................................... 146 Meter Counts for 2 Sided Printing................................... 713
Machine Configuration........................................................ 113 Meter Report (Print Jobs) .................................................... 124
Machine Information ................................................ 112, 113 Millimeters/Inches ................................................................. 179
Machine Name........................................................................206 Minimum Passcode Length ................................................ 321
Machine Password .................................................................258 Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs ................ 273
Machine Ready Tone ............................................................ 151 Mixed Size Originals .........................................186, 238, 247
Machine Serial Number ....................................................... 113 Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy................................ 190
Machine Status .......................................................................111 Mixed Size Originals Scan Mode ...................................... 254
Machine Trouble.....................................................................453 Multi-poll Report ..................................................................... 126
Machine’s E-mail Address/Host Name .......................... 205
Magnification Table.............................................................. 667 N
Maintenance .................................................................... 77, 166
Manual (HTML) ..........................................................................17 Name................................................................................ 282, 292
Manual Redial List - Dial Mode......................................... 249 Name/E-mail Address ......................................284, 285, 288
Manual Redial List - Saved Entries .................................. 249 Name/Fax Number..................................................... 282, 283
Manual Send/Receive Default .......................................... 251 NAT/NAPT ................................................................................. 728
Manually Configured IPv6 Address ................................ 204 Network Accounting................................................... 307, 428
Manually Configured IPv6 Address Prefix.................... 204 Network Interface.................................................................. 205
Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway .............................. 204 Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning) ............. 360
Mask Account ID (***) ........................................................... 309 Network Security .................................................................... 725
Mask User ID (***)........................................................ 309, 318 Network User ID Attribute.................................................. 217
Maximum Address Entries .................................................. 262 Network-related Problems .................................................. 486
Maximum Data Size per E-mail ........................................ 264 New Recipient.....................................................282, 283, 284
Maximum Image Size .......................................................... 296 No Access to Copy/Fax/Scan/Print Service .................. 303
Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator...... No Login Required ................................................................. 315
320 No Spooling .............................................................................. 228
Maximum Number of Search Results............................. 219 Non-PJL Command Job(s)................................................... 323
Maximum Number of Sessions......................................... 196 Normal ........................................................................................ 191
Maximum Number of Sets ................................................. 192 Notes and Restriction for Using Secondary Ethernet
Maximum Split Count........................................................... 264 (Optional) .................................................................................. 737
Maximum Stored Pages .................................190, 241, 254 Notes and Restriction on Authentication and
Maximum Total Data Size.................................................. 264 Accounting ................................................................................ 735
Media Print - Photos Trouble ............................................. 495 Notes and Restrictions for Print E-mail.......................... 739
Index

Media Print - Text Trouble .................................................. 494 Notes and Restrictions for Using Bonjour .................... 737
Media Print Service Settings ................................... 141, 270 Notes and Restrictions for Using TCP/IP ...................... 736
Media Print Settings.............................................................. 145 Notes and Restrictions on Accessing ISP...................... 728
Memory ......................................................................................632 Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature
Memory Full Procedure ...................................190, 241, 253 711
Message .......................................................................... 284, 288 Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the E-mail/Internet
Message Digest Algorithm ................................................. 222 Fax Feature ............................................................................... 722
Message Encryption Method............................................. 222 Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Fax Feature ...

760
 Index

720 Other problems on IPv6 addresses ................................. 493

Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Print Feature . Other Settings.......................................................................... 175
711 Out of Paper Warning Tone............................................... 151
Notes and Restrictions when Connecting to Internet or Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings............................... 212
Intranet ...................................................................................... 733 Outline ........................................................................................ 170
Notes on E-mail Receptions ............................................... 726 Output......................................................................................... 287
Notes on E-mail Transmissions......................................... 722 Output Color.................................................................. 184, 709
Notes on Job Status Default Setting.............................. 735 Output Color (Simple Copy)............................................... 184
Notes on Security ................................................................... 725 Output Color Recognition ................................................... 162
Notes on the User ID setting............................................. 735 Output Destination...........................................188, 287, 707
Notify Job Completion by E-mail .......................... 174, 351 Output Destination (Simple Copy).................................. 188
Notify the Completion of Jobs by E-mail...................... 351 Output Destination for E-mail........................................... 226
NTP Time Synchronization ................................................. 147 Output Destination Setup................................................... 257
Number of Overwrites .......................................................... 325 Output Feature...................................................660, 682, 689
Number of Sheets for Scanning (for Folder) ............... 715 Output Size Defaults............................................................. 240
Output Tray Capacity........................................................... 634
O Outputting a Pending Print Job...................660, 682, 689
Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature.....
Object Class of Search Target........................................... 218 424
Obtaining Addresses from LDAP Server ........................ 718 Overview of Machine Status.............................................. 112
OCR Font Glyphs (0 x 5C).................................................... 234 Overwrite Hard Disk.................................................... 127, 325
OCSP Communication Time-Out...................................... 226 Owner.......................................................................................... 269
Odd Page 2 Sided................................................................... 177
Off-hook Dialing ..................................................................... 743 P
Offset Stacking (Center Tray - Lower)............................ 176
Offset Stacking (Center Tray) ........................................... 175 Page Description Language............................................... 635
Offset Stacking (Right Middle Tray)............................... 176 Page Numbers - Font Size................................................... 189
One level below root entry only........................................ 218 Page Numbers - Style ........................................................... 189
One-Touch Buttons................................................................ 708 Pages per Side .............................................................. 187, 660
On-hook Dialing ...................................................................... 744 Pages per Side for Black & White and Color Mixed
Operating with DHCP ........................................................... 730 Documents and Meter Count............................................ 711
Operating with fixed address ............................................ 729 Paper and Other Media ..........................................................47
Operation of Up/Down Buttons ....................................... 155 Paper Capacity ............................................................. 643, 645
Operation Time-Out .............................................................. 200 Paper Jams................................................................................ 612
Optimize PDF For Quick Web View.................................. 237 Paper Jams in Bottom Left Cover B ................................ 617
Optional Components .......................................................... 651 Paper Jams in Bottom Left Cover C ................................ 617
Options ....................................................................................... 271 Paper Jams in Duplex Module........................................... 619
Orientation for Stored Print Jobs ..................................... 267 Paper Jams in Finisher-A1................................................... 620
Original Orientation ................................................... 187, 238
Index

Paper Jams in Finisher-B1................................................... 621

Original Size ................................................................... 632, 637 Paper Jams in the Center Unit .......................................... 622
Original Size / Paper Weight .............................................. 642 Paper Jams in Top Left Cover A........................................ 615
Original Size Defaults ......................................192, 240, 257 Paper Jams in Top Left Cover C........................................ 618
Original Type.......................................................185, 236, 246 Paper Jams in Tray 5............................................................. 613
Original Type - Auto (Black & White) ............................. 185 Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4 ................................................. 613
Original Type - Auto (Non-Black & White) ................... 185 Paper Jams under the Finisher Top Cover......... 620, 621
Original Type - See-Through Paper ................................. 191 Paper Margin............................................................................ 700

761
 Paper Orientation when Printing Mixed Size Originals ... DocuWorks Documents........................................................ 716
713 PKI Encryption and PKI Signature of Scan Files ........ 716
Paper Size .............................................................158, 632, 642 Placing a Call............................................................................ 743
Paper Size and Number of Printable Characters ....... 674 Please adhere to the following points when loading
Paper Size and Printable Area ........................................... 697 paper in a tray ............................................................................65
Paper Size Settings ................................................................ 177 Please keep the following points in mind when storing
Paper Size/Paper Weight.......................................... 643, 645 paper ..............................................................................................64
Paper Supply........................................................164, 184, 287 Plug-in Settings ....................................................................... 175
Paper Supply - Button 2 - 5................................................. 183 Polled Files - Auto Delete..................................................... 250
Paper Tray Attributes............................................................ 158 Polling Interval ........................................................................ 213
Paper Tray Attributes During Loading........................... 159 Pool Server................................................................................. 269
Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen ......................... 159 Pool Server Login Method................................................... 269
Paper Tray Priority .................................................................159 POP Password Encryption ................................................... 213
Paper Tray Settings ............................................................... 157 POP3 Server Settings............................................................. 213
Paper Tray Status ...................................................................114 Port 9100 ........................................................................ 197, 337
Paper Type ................................................................................158 Port Number ............. 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 213, 294
Paper Type Mismatch........................................................... 230 Port Settings ............................................................................. 194
Paper Type Priority ................................................................ 159 Port Status............................195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 200
Paper Types .................................................................................48 PostScript Default Color ...................................................... 232
Paper Weight ................................................................ 633, 642 PostScript Driver...................................................................... 711
Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login ........................ 321 PostScript Font Absence...................................................... 233
Passcode Entry for Smart Card Login............................. 321 PostScript Font List ................................................................ 119
Passcode Policy .......................................................................321 PostScript Font Substitution .............................................. 233
Passcode Setting for Extended Functions .................... 740 PostScript Logical Printers List .......................................... 118
Password ......................................................................... 213, 217 PostScript Memory................................................................. 227
Paused Job Handling ............................................................ 181 PostScript Paper Supply....................................................... 233
PBX ...............................................................................................259 PostScript Wait Timeout ..................................................... 195
PCL Emulation..........................................................................681 Power Off Deletes Jobs ........................................................ 272
PCL Emulation Settings........................................................ 683 Power on Self Test.................................................................. 168
PCL Font List .............................................................................119 Power Saver Deactivation................................................... 150
PCL Macro List .........................................................................117 Power Saver Mode ....................................................................23
PCL Settings List........................................................... 117, 683 Power Saver Settings ............................................................ 149
PDF Direct Print ............................................................ 677, 713 Power Saver Timers ............................................................... 150
PDF Direct Print Settings ..................................................... 677 Power Supply............................................................................ 634
PDF Settings List .....................................................................117 Preferred DNS Server IP Address, Alternate DNS Server
PDF Signature ..........................................................................223 1 IP Address, Alternate DNS Server 2 IP Address.....203,
PDF Signature Hash Algorithm......................................... 223 204
PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature Settings ...................... 222 Preset %................................................................241, 257, 667
Index

Photo & Text /Printed Original.......................................... 191 Preset % (2-Up Printing) ..................................................... 669
Photo & Text Recognition................................................... 162 Preset Buttons.......................................................................... 183
Photo Image Quality ............................................................ 163 Preventing Receipt of Unwanted E-mail....................... 726
Photo Reproduction Level ................................................... 162 Prevention of Wrong Transmissions for Direct Fax .. 721
Photos - Paper Supply - Button 1 to 5 ............................ 270 Preview............................................................................. 237, 247
Ping Connection Test............................................................ 205 Preview Generation ............................................................... 272
PJL.................................................................................................195 Preview of Scan File............................................................... 717
PKI Encryption and PKI Signature of PDF and Primary Network ..................................................................... 202

762
 Index

Primary Server - IP Address ................................................ 210 Printing from Macintosh via USB Connection............ 711
Primary Server - Login Password ........................... 210, 211 Printing Resolution................................................................. 632
Primary Server - Login User Name........................ 210, 211 Printing Scan Files.................................................................. 732
Primary Server - Port Number............ 210, 211, 215, 216 Printing via lpr Port ................................................................ 714
Primary Server Name/Address ............................... 215, 216 Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 1),
Primary Server Type ................................................... 210, 211 Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2) ..................................... 212
Print.........................................................................230, 287, 429 Problem Solving ...................................................................... 451
Print & Delete Confirmation Screen ............................... 267 Process Control Setup........................................................... 169
Print Area ................................................................................... 229 Profile .......................................................................................... 641
Print Attachment Only ......................................................... 260 Profile for Broadcast Job ..................................................... 259
Print Delivery Confirmation Mail ..................................... 263 Programming ........................................................................... 128
Print Diagnostic Chart .......................................................... 169 Protocol ...................................................................................... 205
Print Driver for Mac OS X..................................................... 733 Protocol Settings..................................................................... 200
Print E-mail..................................................................... 350, 739 Protocol to Receive E-mail .................................................. 226
Print Error Notification E-mail ........................................... 263 Proxy Server Settings ............................................................ 206
Print Function........................................................................... 635 Proxy Server Setup...................................................... 206, 208
....................................................................................................... 103 Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode........................................ 252
Print Job Confirmation Screen .......................................... 272 Public Folder Printed Files ................................................... 257
Print Login Name on PDF Files.......................................... 244 Punch........................................................................................... 644
Print Mode...................................................................... 127, 195
Print only when communication error............................ 165 Q
Print Order for All Selected Files ....................................... 273
Print Overview.......................................................................... 336 Quality/File Size ...................................................................... 238
Print Position ............................................................................ 174 Quality/File Size for Retrieval ............................................ 268
Print Position (Side 2) ........................................................... 174 Quantity Display..................................................................... 192
Print Position Adjustment ................................................... 174 Quick Reference Guide............................................................17
Print Quantity .......................................................................... 287 Quick Setup Home ................................................................. 169
Print Reports ............................................................................. 115
Print Reports Button.............................................................. 164 R
Print Resolution ....................................................................... 635
Print Service Settings .......................................140, 144, 227 RARP ............................................................................................ 203
Print the Auditron Report.................................................... 306 RAW ............................................................................................. 195
Print the Meter Report.......................................................... 306 Read Receipts ............................................................... 260, 263
Print this Sample List............................................................. 172 Receive Control ....................................................................... 322
Print Universal Unique ID ................................................... 174 Receive E-mail.......................................................................... 197
Print User ID ............................................................................. 231 Receive Untrusted E-mail.................................................... 221
Print when delivery fails....................................................... 166 Receive Untrusted Internet Fax ....................................... 222
Print/Delete (Read)................................................................ 278 Receiving Buffer - IPP ........................................................... 228
Printable Area ............................................................... 646, 696 Receiving Buffer - LPD .......................................................... 228
Index

Printed Time in Force Annotation ................................... 708 Receiving Buffer - Port 9100.............................................. 228
Printer Environment Settings............................................. 335 Receiving Buffer - USB ......................................................... 228
Printer Lockout.............................................................. 148, 721 Receiving Paper Size.............................................................. 251
Printer Name ............................................................................ 738 Recipients .................................................................................. 727
Printer Reports ......................................................................... 117 Reconfirm E-mail Recipient ................................................ 154
Printing a Report/List ............................................................ 107 Reconfirm E-mail Recipient Button................................. 154
Printing from a USB Memory Device.............................. 712 Reconfirm Fax/Internet Fax Button ............................... 155

763
 Reconfirm Fax/Internet Fax Recipient........................... 154 Restrictions on Macintosh (the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit
Reconfirm Recipient at Other Tabs................................. 154 (optional)) ................................................................................. 733
Recording Paper Size............................................................. 639 Restrictions on Method of Recipient Specification... 707
Reduce / Enlarge - Button 3 - 5 ......................................... 246 Restrictions on Paper Selections upon Internet Fax
Reduce 8.5 x 11" .....................................................................252 Reception................................................................................... 725
Reduce/Enlarge .......................................................................184 Restrictions on the E-mail Server...................................... 725
Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3 - 4 ........................................... 183 Resume / Delete by User ..................................................... 181
Reduce/Enlarge - Buttons 2 to 5 ...................................... 236 Resume by User ...................................................................... 231
Reduce/Enlarge Presets...................................192, 241, 257 Resume Job after Jam Clearance .................................... 231
Re-enter Broadcast Recipients .......................................... 248 Resume Job After Print Error.............................................. 231
Re-enter Fax Number or E-mail ........................................ 249 Retrieval of Certificate Status ........................................... 225
Re-enter Group Recipients .................................................. 249 Retrieve Programming ......................................................... 128
Re-enter Recipients................................................................ 248 Retrieving Files from Folder ............................................... 714
Re-enter Speed Dial Recipients......................................... 248 Retrieving Files in Folder from CentreWare Internet
Register Google Cloud Print ............................................... 229 Services ....................................................................................... 732
Relay Broadcast ........................................................... 297, 720 Right Edges ............................................................................... 252
Remote Authentication System ....................................... 367 Ringing Volume....................................................................... 152
Remote Authentication using the Smart Card........... 735 Root entry only........................................................................ 218
Remote Authentication/Directory Service ................... 214 Rotate 90 degrees.................................................................. 250
Remote Folder .........................................................................296 RTP Listening Port Number ................................................ 212
Remote Modification of the Settings............................. 750 Run Job ..................................................................190, 241, 254
Remotely Authenticated User........................................... 240
Replacing Consumables..........................................................78 S
Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4.................87
Replacing Stamp........................................................................94 S/MIME Certificate ................................................................ 293
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Booklet Maker Unit for S/MIME Communication.......................................... 221, 717
Finisher-B1) ..................................................................................92 S/MIME Communication for Internet Fax ................... 724
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-A1) .................88 S/MIME Settings..................................................................... 221
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-B1)..................90 S/MIME Untrusted E-mail Reception Settings ........... 724
Replacing Toner Cartridge.....................................................80 Same Resolution (High Quality) ....................................... 269
Replacing Waste Toner Container (R5)............................82 Sample Job................................................................................ 188
Reports...................................................................119, 120, 164 Saturation....................................................................... 185, 241
Resend Attempts ...............................................284, 285, 286 Save (Write).............................................................................. 278
Resend Interval ....................................... 284, 285, 286, 287 Save as Charge Print Job..................................................... 324
Reset Total Impressions ...................................................... 305 Save as Private Charge Print Job ..................................... 323
Reset User Account................................................................ 304 Save Deleted Faxes ............................................................... 250
Reset User Accounts................................................... 305, 317 Save in......................................................................................... 269
Resolution.................................................. 238, 246, 295, 640 Save remote accounts in this machine.......................... 320
Index

Resolution when group is specified................................. 725 Save Undelivered Faxes....................................................... 250

Response to Read Receipts................................................. 263 Saved Faxes - Auto Delete.................................................. 250
Restrict Recipient Selection Method..........180, 318, 425 Scaling......................................................................................... 699
Restrict User to Edit Address Book .............180, 318, 425 Scaling Mode............................................................................ 701
Restriction on Auto Layout................................................. 704 Scan ............................................................................................. 430
Restriction on Scanning Capacity.................................... 714 Scan Chart with Document Feeder ................................. 170
Restrictions on Internet Explorer ..................................... 718 Scan Defaults........................................................................... 236
Restrictions on Macintosh (standard)............................ 733 Scan File Transfer Report .................................................... 165

764
 Index

Scan File Transfer Report (Fax Server)........................... 166 Secondary Server - Login User Name.................. 210, 211
Scan Function (Optional) .................................................... 637 Secondary Server - Port Number...... 210, 211, 215, 216
Scan High Compression Feature ...................................... 716 Secondary Server Name/Address ......................... 215, 216
Scan Reports............................................................................. 119 Secondary Server Type.............................................. 210, 211
Scan Resolution....................................................................... 637 Secure Polling from Other Faxes...................................... 714
Scan Service Overview .......................................................... 360 Security Function Supplementary Guide .........................17
Scan Service Settings .......................................140, 144, 235 Security Settings..................................................................... 220
Scan to E-mail .......................................................................... 639 Select Keyword ........................................................................ 281
Scan to Fax ............................................................................... 175 Select Tray 5............................................................................. 230
Scan to Fax Server.................................................................. 175 Semi Standard Paper...............................................................50
Scan to Folder .......................................................................... 637 Send as E-mail ......................................................................... 284
Scan to My Folder .................................................................. 361 Send as Fax............................................................................... 282
Scan to PC ...................................................................... 360, 638 Send as Internet Fax............................................................. 283
Scan to PC Defaults............................................................... 239 Send as IP Fax (SIP) .............................................................. 283
Scan to PC Screen Default.................................................. 236 Send Document Size ............................................................. 639
Scan/Fax Configuration............................................ 119, 121 Send E-mail ............................................................................... 198
Scanner Environment Settings.......................................... 359 Send Query to OCSP Responder With............................ 225
Scanning Resolution.............................. 632, 640, 641, 642 Sending Problems................................................................... 471
Scanning Speed....................................................................... 637 Separators - Default Separator Tray .............................. 189
Schedule Upgrade.................................................................. 168 Serial Number .......................................................................... 134
Scheduled Power Off............................................................. 150 When selecting........................................................................ 291
Scope of Search from Root Entry..................................... 218 Server Certificate Verification........................................... 215
screen .......................................................................................... 436 Server Fax Overview .............................................................. 400
Screen After Auto Clear ....................................................... 152 Server Name/IP Address........................................... 213, 220
Screen After Inserting USB................................................. 155 Server Name/IP address...................................................... 293
Screen Brightness ................................................................... 154 Server Response Time-Out.................................................. 214
Screen Default ......................................................................... 152 Service Access .....................................................303, 316, 426
Screen Defaults ............................................................ 235, 245 Service Rep. Restricted Operation ................................... 179
Screen Switching After Inserting a USB Memory Device Services Controlled by Authentication .......................... 432
715 Services Home ................................................................. 34, 153
Screen Type .............................................................................. 164 Services Home - Additional Features...................... 36, 153
Screen/Button Settings ........................................................ 152 Setting Item Details.............................................................. 699
Search by Keyword ................................................................ 281 Setting or Changing Passcode by System Administrator
Search by Name...................................................................... 281 449
Search Directory Root........................................................... 218 Setting Restore Tool.............................................................. 109
Search Display Default......................................................... 266 Setting the Screen After Auto Clear ..................................31
Search Entries by Common Name................................... 218 Setting the System Environment for E-mail Service. 725
Search Entries by Given Name.......................................... 218 Setting the Warmer Mode.....................................................26
Index

Search Entries by Surname................................................. 218 Setting up a Certificate using CentreWare Internet

Search Time-Out .......................................................... 215, 219 Services....................................................................................... 410
Searchable - Page Orientation .......................................... 243 Settings by System Configuration................................... 383
Searchable - Text Compression ........................................ 239 Settings from CentreWare Internet Services .............. 730
Searchable PDF ....................................................................... 717 Settings from the Control Panel....................................... 730
Searchable Text ...................................................................... 239 Settings on Manual Fax Transmissions......................... 720
Secondary Server - IP Address................................ 210, 211 Setup ................................................................................ 141, 145
Secondary Server - Login Password...................... 210, 211 Shadow Suppression............................................................. 237

765
 Shadow Suppression Level.................................................. 242 Spool to Hard Disk ................................................................. 228
Shared Name (SMB Only)................................................... 294 Spool to Memory .................................................................... 228
Sharpness ....................................................................... 185, 237 Spots/Streaks Diagnostics .................................................. 169
Side Tray (optional)............................................................... 645 SSL/TLS ....................................................................................... 221
Signing Certificate for E-mail Attachment................... 222 SSL/TLS Settings ..................................................................... 220
Simple Fax .................................................................................721 Stamp.......................................................................................... 247
Single Color ...............................................................................184 Standard ......................................................................... 195, 696
SIP ................................................................................................197 Standard Mode ....................................................................... 233
SIP Line - Company Logo .................................................... 259 Standard Paper ..........................................................................49
SIP Proxy Server Setup ......................................................... 210 Standard Printable Area ...................................................... 646
SIP Registrar Server Setup .................................................. 210 Standard Size Threshold Value......................................... 267
SIP Server...................................................................................727 Staple ............................................................................... 287, 644
SIP Server IP Address Resolution ..................................... 209 Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (For Finisher-A1) .... 627
SIP Settings...............................................................................209 Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (For Finisher-B1) .... 628
SIP Transport Protocol ......................................................... 209 Stapler Faults ........................................................................... 626
SIP User ID (Sign-in Name)................................................ 209 Start Job at Other Tabs........................................................ 154
Size Detection ..........................................................................158 Start Sheet ................................................................................ 232
Skip Blank Pages .......................................................... 247, 254 Start Sheet & End Sheet ...................................................... 232
Skip Blank Pages Feature .................................................... 720 Start Upgrade .......................................................................... 168
Smart Card Authentication ................................................ 427 Starting CentreWare Internet Services ......................... 330
Smart Card Certificate Verification ................................ 320 Starting Rate ................................................................. 247, 295
Smart Card Link Mode.......................................................... 319 STARTTLS .................................................................................. 221
Smart Card Logout Timing................................................. 320 STARTTLS (If Available) ...................................................... 221
SMB Client.................................................................................196 STATIC............................................................................. 203, 209
SMB Server Settings .............................................................. 219 Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP.... 384, 394
SMB Server Setup ...................................................................220 Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ......338, 341, 345
SMB Transfer for Scan to PC.............................................. 719 Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment........................ 395
SMTP AUTH Login Name.................................................... 214 Step 2 Setting the Server Fax Feature ........................... 403
SMTP AUTH Password.......................................................... 214 Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ........................ 366
SMTP Server Name/IP Address......................................... 213 Store & Send Link ........................................................ 350, 361
SMTP Server Port Number .................................................. 214 Store & Send Link - E-mail Subject .................................. 239
SMTP Server Settings............................................................ 213 Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size ......................... 244
SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication........................................ 221 Store to Folder ......................................................................... 360
SNMP...........................................................................................197 Store to USB .................................................................. 361, 715
SOAP ............................................................................................199 Store to WSD................................................................. 361, 719
Software Download............................................................... 180 Store/Delete Programming ................................................ 129
Software Options....................................................................167 Stored File Settings...........................................141, 145, 271
Software Upgrade....................................................... 168, 750 Stored Job Expiration Date ................................................ 271
Stored Programming.................................................. 279, 708
Index

Software Version ....................................................................114

Speed Dial ...................................................................... 282, 283 Stored Programming Complete Tone ............................ 152
Split by Data Size....................................................................264 Stored Programming Tone ................................................. 152
Split Encrypted E-mail........................................................... 222 Storing and Handling Paper..................................................64
Split Encrypted Internet Fax.............................................. 222 Subject ........................................................................................ 285
Split Files ....................................................................................718 Substitute Font and Print.................................................... 233
Split into Pages........................................................................263 Substitute Tray........................................................................ 229
Split Send Method..................................................................263 Supplies ........................................................................... 112, 133

766
 Index

Supported Environment for Bonjour .............................. 737 Time Server Address.............................................................. 148
Supported OS ........................................................................... 733 Time Zone ................................................................................. 149
Supported Paper Type.............................................................49 Timely Delivery of Consumables...................................... 749
Surname..................................................................................... 292 Tone............................................................................................. 258
Switching between Printer Languages .....659, 681, 688 Tools ............................................................................................ 137
Switching by Commands................................659, 681, 688 Tools Menu List ....................................................................... 143
Sys. Admin. Settings Security Warning.......................... 157 Total Impressions........................................................ 135, 306
System Administrator......................................304, 424, 425 Touch Screen...............................................................................42
System Administrator Settings ......................................... 313 Transfer Protocol ......................................................... 239, 293
System Administrator's Login ID..................................... 313 Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2)..................... 285
System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs)................. 307 Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2) ................. 286
System Administrator's Passcode ................................... 314 Transferring via FTP .............................................................. 294
System Requirements for the Machine ......................... 401 Transferring via SMB ............................................................ 294
System Settings ........................................................... 140, 143 Transmission conditions for broadcast transmission ......
724
T Transmission Header Text....................................... 247, 284
Transmission Header Text - Fax Transfer..................... 261
T.38 Settings ............................................................................ 212 Transmission Header Text - Polling................................. 249
T.38 Transport Protocol ....................................................... 212 Transmission Interval ........................................................... 250
Tap ..................................................................................................43 Transmission Mode ............................................................... 640
Target............................................................................... 164, 269 Transmission Report.............................................................. 125
Targeted Jobs .......................................................................... 174 Transmission Report - Job Deleted.................................. 165
Targeted Paper Color (Copy Jobs)................................... 160 Transmission Report - Job Undelivered.............. 125, 165
Targeted Paper Type (Copy Jobs) ................................... 160 Transmission Screen.............................................................. 246
TBCP ............................................................................................ 195 Transmission Speed............................................................... 640
TCP Listening Port Number ................................................ 212 Transmission Time................................................................. 640
TCP/IP - Common Settings................................................. 201 Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults............................................... 159
Text - Paper Supply - Button 2 to 5................................. 270 Tray Mode ................................................................................. 251
Text and Photos for Media Print ...................................... 712 Trays 1 to 4............................................................................... 287
Text String Added to User Name..................................... 217 Trouble during Copying ....................................................... 464
The Copy Result is Not What was Expected................ 465 Trouble during Faxing .......................................................... 471
The Image is not What was Expected........................... 484 Trouble during Printing ........................................................ 468
The Print Result is Not What was Expected................. 469 Trouble during Scanning ..................................................... 481
ThinPrint.......................................................................... 200, 713 Troubleshooting...................................................................... 452
ThinPrint-SSL/TLS Communication ................................. 221 Turning Off the Machine..................................................... 736
Thumbnail - Outgoing E-mail ............................................ 237 Type ........................................................................637, 642, 643
Thumbnail - Scan to PC........................................................ 237 Types of Account Administration .................................... 428
Thumbnail for Media Print ................................................. 712 Types of Authenticartion .................................................... 426
Index

Thumbnail View ...................................................................... 718 Types of Authentication...................................................... 426

TIFF Format.............................................................................. 242 Types of Certificate ............................................................... 406
TIFF/JPEG Logical Printers List.......................................... 118 Types of paper loaded in trays ............................................66
TIFF/JPEG Settings List ........................................................ 118 Types of User ........................................................................... 424
TIFF-F ............................................................................... 260, 298
TIFF-J................................................................................ 260, 299 U
TIFF-S ............................................................................... 260, 298
Time ............................................................................................. 147 UDPTL Listening Port Number .......................................... 212

767
 Unable to connect using an IPv4 address.................... 491 Using Network Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3
Unable to connect using an IPv6 address.................... 491 Simultaneously........................................................................ 714
Unable to Copy .......................................................................464 Using the Ethernet Interface................................................21
Unable to Import Scanned Documents to the Computer Using the Internet Fax Service ......................................... 391
482 Using the Machine as a Local Printer............................. 336
Unable to Print ........................................................................468 Using the Machine as a Network Printer ...................... 336
Unable to print using an IPv6 address .......................... 492 Using the Server Fax Service...................................... 18, 399
Unable to scan using an IPv6 address........................... 492 Using the Telephone............................................................. 743
Unable to Send a Scanned Document over the Network Using the USB Interface.........................................................21
(FTP/SMB) .................................................................................482 Using TIFF Files....................................................................... 714
Unable to Send E-mail.......................................................... 484
Unavailable Fax Functions ................................................. 720 V
Uncollated - Default Separator Tray .............................. 188
Unregistered Forms ............................................................... 231 Variable % ..................................................................... 241, 257
Unregistered User ..................................................................424 Verify Remote Server Certificate ..................................... 221
Unusable Paper ..........................................................................64 Verify User Details ................................................................. 308
UPnP Discovery .......................................................................198 Via E-mail Server..................................................................... 259
URL File Expiration.................................................................243 View Accounts ......................................................................... 305
URL of OCSP Responder ...................................................... 225 VoIP Gateway List.................................................................. 121
Usable Paper ...............................................................................52 VoIP Gateway Setup............................................................. 211
Usage (Auto Paper Select).................................................. 158
USB.................................................................................... 195, 336 W
Use Added Text String ......................................................... 217
Use Cache..................................................................................274 Warmer Mode.......................................................................... 149
Use Closest Size.......................................................................230 Warm-up Time......................................................................... 632
Use Larger Size ........................................................................230 Watermark ................................................................................ 170
Use of Smart Card..................................................................319 Watermark/Background Contrast ................................... 171
Use Proxy Server .....................................................................206 Web Applications Version................................................... 274
Use TLS1.0.................................................................................274 Web Browser Setup ..........................................141, 145, 274
User ..............................................................................................304 WebDAV..................................................................................... 200
User Account Billing Information .................................... 135 Website....................................................................................... 113
User Authentication .............................................................. 448 What is Auto Layout? ........................................................... 698
User Authentication Operations ...................................... 448 When connection to a desired Web server fails......... 491
User Details Setup..................................................................318 When connection to the Internet/Intranet fails ....... 489
User ID........................................................................................302 When Paper Jam Occurs...................................................... 231
User ID Authentication........................................................ 427 When print result is not what was expected ............... 487
User ID for Login ....................................................................319 When receiving E-mail via SMTP...................................... 205
User Mode .................................................................................251 When receiving E-mails via POP3 .................................... 206
User Name ..................................................................... 294, 302 When Smart Card Reader is Connected........................ 319
Index

User Name for FTP Scan ..................................................... 240 When specifying an Internet fax profile....................... 724
User Name Only......................................................................240 When SSL Certificate Verification Fails......................... 275
User Role ....................................................................................304 When the extra Hard Disk is installed on the printer.......
User Roles ..................................................................................425 689, ............................................................................................. 704
User Roles and Authorization Groups ............................ 424 When the extra Hard Disk is not installed on the printer
Using FTP........................................................................ 364, 366 704
Using IP Fax (SIP) ..................................................................381 When the Print Results Differ from the Settings ....... 712

768
 Index

When to Notify........................................................................ 288 Wireless LAN Settings........................................................... 200

When using SMB..................................................................... 486 WSD ............................................................................................. 198
When using TCP/IP................................................................ 486 WSD Print - Port Status ........................................................ 198
When you cannot communicate with other SMB WSD Scan - Port Status........................................................ 198
machines.................................................................................... 486
When you cannot print ............................................. 486, 487 X
While Printing .......................................................................... 736
Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Xerox Standard Accounting .................................... 307, 428
Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows XPS Print Ticket Processing................................................. 233
Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012, or Windows XPS Signature .......................................................................... 223
Server 2012 R2 ........................................................................ 486

Index

769
 770
Index
DocuCentre-V C2265/C2263
Administrator Guide
ME7494E2-1 (Edition 1)
June 2015
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2015 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.